Specifications - Lord and Son Construction, Inc.

FINAL DESIGN SUBMITTAL FOR:
RENOVATE
TELEPHONE EXHANGE, BLDG 2801
KEESLER AFB, MISSISSIPPI
PROJECT NO. MAHG 12-1038
Specifications
1091 Tommy Munro Drive
Biloxi, MS 39532
228.594.2323

00 01 10 – PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
Division 1 – General Requirements
Section 00102 – Drawing List
Section 00103 – Summary of Project Work
Section 01000 – General Requirements with Keesler AFB Supplement
Section 01001 – HVAC Coordination, Commissioning, and Close-out
Section 01140 – Work Restrictions
Section 01150 – Quality Requirements
Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
Section 01330A – Project Schedule
Section 01355A – Environmental Protection
Section 01500 – Temporary Construction
Section 01561 – Temporary Facilities
Section 01732 – Selective Demolition
Section 01770N – Closeout Procedures
Section 01779 – Testing and Acceptance
Section 1780A – Closeout Submittals
Section 1782 – Operations and Maintenance Data
Division 2 – Existing Conditions
Section 02000 – General Demolition
Section 02 11 50 – Asbestos Removal
Attachment: Keesler AFB Asbestos Protocol
Attachment: Asbestos Abatement and Management Inspection Report
Attachment: Asbestos Report
Section 02 41 00 – Selective Demolition
Division 4 – Masonry
Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry
Division 6 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites
Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry
Section 06 61 16 – Solid Polymer (Solid Surfacing) Fabrications
Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation
Section 07 46 40 – Fiber-Reinforced Cement Siding
Section 07 52 16 - SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
Division 8 – Openings
Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors
Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors and Panels
Section 08 34 59 – Vault Doors
Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware
Section 08 80 00 – Glazing
MAHG121038 00 01 10 -1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division 9 – Finishes
Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board
Section 09 30 00 – Tiling
Section 09 51 13 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring
Section 09 68 00 – Carpeting
Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating
Section 09 97 23 – Concrete and Masonry Coatings
Division 10 – Specialties
Section 10 14 00 – Signage
Section 10 21 13 – Toilet Compartments
Section 10 28 00 – Toilet and Bath Accessories
Section 10 44 13 – Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
Section 10 51 13 – Metal Lockers
MAHG121038 00 01 10 -2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP
Division 21 – Fire Suppression
Section 21 13 17.00 10 – Dry Pipe Sprinkler System, Fire Protection
Division 22 – Plumbing
Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing, General Purpose
Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Section 23 00 00 – Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, and Exhaust Systems
Section 23 03 00.00 20 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 23 05 48 – Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping And Equipment
Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC
Section 23 07 00 – Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems
Section 23 09 23 – Direct Digital Control for HVAC and Other Local Building Systems
Section 23 11 25 – Facility Gas Piping
Section 23 21 13.00 20 – Low Temperature Water Heating System
Section 23 25 00 – Chemical Treatment of Water for Mechanical Systems
Section 23 31 13 – Metal Ducts
Section 23 34 23 – HVAC Power Ventilators
Section 23 37 13 – Diffusers, Registers, and Grills
Section 23 52 43.00 20 – Low Pressure Water Heating Boilers
(Under 800,000 Btu/Hr Output)
Section 23 64 10 – Water Chillers, Vapor Compression Type
Section 23 64 26 – Chilled, Chilled-Hot, And Condenser Water Piping Systems
Section 23 73 13 – Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
Section 23 82 19 – Fan Coil Units
Division 26 – Electrical
Section 26 00 00.00 20 – Basic Electrical Materials And Methods
Section 26 05 00.00 40 – Common Work Results For Electrical
Section 26 05 19.00 10 – Insulated Wire And Cable
Section 26 05 71.00 40 – Low Voltage Overcurrent Protective Devices
Section 26 09 23.00 40 – Lighting Control Devices
Section 26 12 19.10 – Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers
Section 26 20 00 – Interior Distribution System
Section 26 24 16.00 40 – Panelboards
Section 26 41 00.00 20 – Lightning Protection System
Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Division 27 – Communications
Section 27 05 14.00 10 – Cable Television Premises Distribution System
Section 27 05 28.36 40 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems
Section 27 10 00 – Building Telecommunications Cabling System
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security
Section 28 16 01.00 10 – Small Intrusion Detection System
Section 28 31 64.00 10 – Fire Detection and Alarm System, Addressable
MAHG121038 00 01 10 -3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00102
LIST OF DRAWINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This document lists the drawings for the project pursuant to contract clause "DFARS 252.236-7001, Contract
Drawings, Maps and Specifications."
1.2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
Contract drawings are as follows:
DRAWING
NO.
G001
G100
G101
D001
D100
D120
D121
D200
D201
D202
A001
A100
A101
A110
A120
A121
A600
A601
I600
I601
TITLE
TITLE SHEET
GENERAL INFORMATION
LIFE SAFETY, PHASING, & HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PLANS
DEMO SITE PLAN
DEMO FLOOR PLAN
DEMO ROOF PLAN AND EXISTING IMAGES
DEMO ROOF DETAILS
DEMO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
DEMO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
DEMO DETAILS
SITE PLAN
FLOOR PLAN, OPENING SCHEDULE, DOOR & FRAME TYPES
PLAN DETAILS
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND DETAILS
ROOF PLAN
NEW ROOF DETAILS
HEAD & JAMB DETAILS
HEAD, JAMB & SILL DETAILS
FINISH SCHEDULE
MILLWORK DETAILS
M001
HVAC LEGEND, SCHEDULE AND NOTES
M002
HVAC SCHEDULES
M101 HVAC PHASE 1
M102 HVAC PHASE 2
M103 HVAC PHASE 3
M104 HVAC PHASE 4
M105 HVAC PHASE 5-A
M106 HVAC PHASE 5-B & 5-C
M201
HVAC DETAILS
M202
HVAC DETAILS
M301
HVAC PIPING DETAILS
M302
HVAC PIPING DIAGRAM AND CONTROLS
M401
HVAC CONTROLS
SECTION 00102
1 of 2

SECTION 00102
LIST OF DRAWINGS
FP100
FP200
P001
P100
E001
E100
E110
E120
E130
E140
E200
E201
E300
E301
E400
E401
T001
T100
T110
T200
T300
FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION NEW WORK PLAN
PLUMBING LEGEND, SCHEDULE AND NOTES
PLUMBING PLANS AND RISER DIAGRAMS
LEGEND, NOTES, & ABBREVIATIONS
FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING
FLOOR PLAN - POWER
FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM
ROOF PLAN - LIGHTNING PROTECTION
DETAILS
DETAILS
RISER DIAGRAMS
FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM
SCHEDULES
SCHEDULES
LEGEND, NOTES, & ABBREVIATIONS
FLOOR PLAN - TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION
FLOOR PLAN - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
DETAILS
RISER DIAGRAMS
-- End of Document --
SECTION 00102
2 of 2

SECTION 00103
SUMMARY OF PROJECT WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Description
The Work consists of renovating various interior spaces within an existing 1 story,
concrete masonry unit building with multiple additions, approximately 50 years old. The building
contains roughly 10,000 square feet designed around the base’s main telecommunications system.
The building is sprinklered and will require modifications of the sprinkler system to serve all rooms.
Interior finishes will be upgraded as well as upgrades to services, including electrical and mechanical
will be major elements in this project. This project includes the renovation of the entire facility while
it remains fully operational.
The intent of the renovation is to update the existing building and provide major interior renovations
and minor exterior renovations including a reroof of the entire facility.
B. Location
1. The project is located on Keesler Air Force Base, Biloxi, Mississippi. Off of General Chappie
James Street, Building 2801.
C. In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and
Improvements":
1. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions
of the existing work which remains.
2. Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction
operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the
completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition equal to or better than that
which existed before new work started.
1.2 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
A. Obtain digging permits prior to start of excavation by contacting the Contracting Officer 15 calendar
days in advance. Scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment, and mark the surface
of the ground paved surface where existing underground utilities or utilities encased in pier structures
are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground or
encased obstruction not indicated to be specified or removed but indicated or discovered during scanning
in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed. Verify
elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment
in grade can be made.
1.3.1 NOTIFICATION PRIOR TO EXCAVATION
A. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to starting excavation work. Contact Miss
Utility 48 hours prior to excavating. Contractor is responsible for marking all utilities not marked
by Miss Utility or base utilities shop.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED
SECTION 00103
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00103
SUMMARY OF PROJECT WORK
END OF SECTION
SECTION 00103
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
1.0 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. THE WORK COVERED BY THESE SPECIFICATIONS CONSISTS OF FURNISHING ALL
PLANT, LABOR, EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS AND PERFORMING ALL OPERATIONS IN
CONNECTION WITH REMOVING/REPLACING/RELOCATING VARIOUS MECHANICAL
LINES AND MISCELLANEOUS OTHER ITEMS RELATING TO THE BUILDING, TO INCLUDE
ALL WORK AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE
SPECIFICATIONS AND APPLICABLE DRAWINGS AND SUBJECT TO TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT.
B. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and in keeping with generally accepted standards
for similar work.
C. Contractor is responsible for field verifying all measurements and evaluating existing conditions.
1.1 WORKING CONDITIONS:
The Contractor shall take all necessary and prudent safety precautions to ensure the safety of the workforce and
other exposed personnel.
a. Underground Utilities: Protect all active utilities. Any damage to existing utility lines caused by
the Contractor will be the Contractors responsibility.
b. Hazardous Electrical Exposure: Provide Safety protection and precautions for any electrical
exposure.
c. Permits: Contractors will be required to obtain permits as required by Keesler in the performance
of their work. Contractors shall post or have readily available all permits before work is
commenced
The following permits must be obtained anytime referenced work is required.
Dig Permit,
CSC Customer Service
Burn Permit,
Keesler AFB Fire Department
Confined Entry Permit, Certified Personnel, obtain permit from CSC project management personnel, or
CSC safety office. Notification to fire department of actual day and time work is accomplished.
1.2 MATERIAL DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Delivery: The Contractor shall have all materials for his work delivered during normal working hours or
shall have a representative present to receive shipments. The contractor should be particularly aware that
all delivery vehicles must have sufficient information to locate project site. This includes name and address
of the project site and name of prime contractor and a point of contact for delivery.
B. Storage: The Contractor shall be responsible for the storage of all material and equipment. All items shall
be properly stored to maintain their original condition until actually installed.
1.3 REPAIR OF GOVERNMENT -OWNED FACILITIES:
In order to complete the work on this job, certain GOVERNMENT-owned facilities may have to be removed or
altered in some way and others may be inadvertently damaged. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to return
these facilities to a condition acceptable to the GOVERNMENT.
1.4 UTILITIES:
Section 01000
Page 1 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
A. All reasonable amounts of electricity and water required for the completion of this project will be furnished
to the Contractor without charge from existing Government facilities where feasible.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION
a. INTERRUPTION OF UTILITY SERVICE: Interruptions to utility services shall be
minimized. Necessary outages shall be coordinated with the GOVERNMENT a minimum of 10
days in advance of the planned outage.
b. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: Portable sanitation units for this project shall be
supplied by the contractor. This includes maintenance, transportation to and from job site, secure
placement of unit as not to obstruct normal public activity, and unit clean-out as needed. The type
units provided and the placement location(s) shall be approved by the GOVERNMENT.
c. STORM DAMAGE: Should warnings of winds of gale force or stronger be issued, the
Contractor shall take every practical precaution to minimize danger to persons and damage to
property. These precautions shall be coordinated through the GOVERNMENT, [government
technical monitor] and shall include closing all openings; removing all loose materials, tools, and
equipment from exposed locations; as well as removing or securing scaffolding and other
temporary work. Contractor will follow Keesler requirements for Hurricane Conditions in force.
d. SAFETY: The Contractor shall observe all Safety, Security, Traffic and Fire regulations
presently enforced at Keesler Air Force Base. And comply with latest issue of OSHA
requirements.
A. Material: All material furnished by the Contractor for this job shall be new, unused material of high
quality. All equipment and materials shall comply with the buy American act. Contractor shall notify
Government if a deviation is required.
B. Cleaning: The Contractor shall maintain the premises, including any staging area or storage areas, free
from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by the Contractor’s work and shall minimize the
spread of dust and flying particles. As work is completed, or at the end of each day, the site shall be
cleaned and all waste material shall be properly disposed of.
1.6 JOBSITE MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE AREAS:
A. The contractor shall maintain the jobsite and staging areas in conformance with Keesler standards.
B. Lay down/staging areas shall be kept neat and free of loose debris at all times. Grass shall be cut and
maintained regularly. Height and maintenance shall be consistent with normal Base standards and
consistent with the immediate area.
C. Jobsites and lay down/staging areas shall be enclosed with a 6’ chain link fence with brown fabric
screening. Materials and equipment may be stored inside storage units. Items stored in the lay down area
shall be arranged neatly.
D. All temporary storage trailers and storage containers shall present a neat and clean appearance and shall be
in a state of good repair and shall be located within the fenced area described in paragraph above.
E. If allowed by the contract and if approved by the GOVERNMENT, an office mobile unit may be located
outside of a fenced area. At a minimum, this unit shall be in a paved area and shall present a neat,
professional appearance. Unit shall be of Keesler standard colors, shall have presentable skirting and
access stairs. Ancillary items, such as porches and canopies, shall be neat and painted Keesler brown.
Contractor shall submit a picture of the proposed unit for approval and before unit is moved to Base.
F. Execution of work may require excavation or other type of work both at and away from primary work area.
These areas shall be secured and work times shall be kept to a minimum. Open excavations shall be
directly in progress or shall be covered directly after work complete. Open excavations requiring extended
Section 01000
Page 2 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
period of inactivity shall be temporarily backfilled. In no case shall an excavation be open for more than
72 hours. Barricades, fences and other warning devices shall be maintained neatly at all times.
1.7 INTERUPTION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING SERVICE:
Interruptions to any mechanical, electrical or plumbing services shall be minimized. Necessary outages shall be
coordinated with the GOVERNMENT a minimum of 10 days in advance of the planned outage. The Contractor
shall fill out a “Utility Service Outage Request Form” and submit it to the GOVERNMENT. The GOVERNMENT
may require the contractor to attend a coordination meeting to access the purpose, intent, and impact of the outage
request with the facility and any or all operations departments. Contractors shall not shut-down or start-up any
mechanical, electrical or plumbing system without the coordination and/or permission of the GOVERNMENT.
1.8 Environmental Protection:
A. Contractor personnel shall, at all times, perform all work and take such steps required to prevent any
interference or disturbances to the ecological balance of the environment. All work must be performed in
accordance with applicable Federal, State, Local, and Air Force environmental regulations. Use good
management practices to protect air, water, land and wildlife and to prevent noise, solid waste, radiant
energy, dust and radioactive pollutants. In the event of a chemical or hazardous material spill, the
contractor must immediately notify the Keesler Fire Department at 228-377-1839 and the GOVERNMENT
representative at 228-377-8255
B. Required Asbestos Abatement and Management Procedures:
a. These steps are in accordance with Air Force Instruction, EPA, and MDEQ. OSHA governs all
worker safety and must be complied with by contractors and subcontractors. These requirements
are summarized in the Keesler Air Force Base Asbestos Operations and Management Plan. Please
reference the Plan. These steps are required by all personnel or contractors doing work on Keesler
Air Force Base.
b. If the personnel or contractor encounters what they think may be asbestos, they are required to
stop and call the KAFB Asbestos Point of Contact which is Terry James at the Keesler
Environmental Section. He can be reached at 228-377-1262 or 228-377-3004 during duty hours
and 228-348-0864 during off hours. Once it is determined by the Asbestos POC that asbestos is
present, the following actions are required (Only the APOC and Bioenvironmental are certified to
make that determination).
1.9 Security Requirements:
The Contractor is responsible for obtaining passes to enter the installation. The contractor shall coordinate with
GOVERNMENT to obtain approval and documentation for application of passes/ID.
2.00 BUILDING OCCUPANCY
Building will remain operational and will be occupied during construction. Contractor shall perform all work during
normal working hours except as otherwise approved to accommodate agreed upon “shut-downs” and other required
“after hours” work.
3.00 SCHEDULE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a schedule to meet construction time.
B. For this contract the Contractor shall have 266 calendar days to complete the work.
C. The Contractor shall develop, and submit for approval a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule
indicating all work activities including required interruptions of utilities, facilities activities, traffic
flow, etc.
Section 01000
Page 3 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
3.1 PHASING OF WORK
A. It is the intent of this project to install all utility lines complete and ready for service prior to
interruption of existing lines and that minimum down time will be necessary for connections to new
lines and abandonment of existing line.
B. No facility shall have their services, or any other utility or service disrupted during normal working
hours without prior approval.
C. This will require careful planning, phasing and sequencing of the work, as well as providing temporary
services as required.
D. Contract phasing shall be fully developed by the Contractor with the User and the Government
Technical Manager (GOVERNMENT) and shall insure that the Contractor’s Phasing Plan fully allows
the facility services to remain open and that there are no interferences with the facility’s ability to meet
its obligations.
3.2 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall coordinate his work with the Government Technical Manager (GOVERNMENT) to
avoid interference with necessary activities within and adjacent to the construction site. The Contractor
shall coordinate the work of all trades to prevent any conflicts. The Contractor before proceeding with the
construction shall resolve any conflicts of components.
B. Normal Work Hours
The Contractor will perform all work during work hours between 7:00 A. M. and 5:00 P.M. but work after
these normal business hour shall be required if necessary to complete the work as scheduled and as required
by phasing requirements. The Contractor will not normally be permitted to work on weekends or on the
following legal holidays (or the day the federal government observes these holidays) unless he has
coordinated such work with the GOVERNMENT at least 72 hours in advance:
a. New Year's Day f. Labor Day
b. Martin Luther King, Mr.’s Birthday g. Columbus Day
c. Washington's Birthday h. Veteran's Day
d. Memorial Day i. Thanksgiving Day
e. Independence Day j. Christmas Day
4.0 SITE VISIT
Bidder is responsible for site investigation in accordance with contract clause entitled "Site Investigation and
Conditions Affecting the Work" (FAR 52.236-3).
5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor must comply with the contract clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for Construction" (FAR
52.236-21). See paragraph 19.01 entitled "INTENT OF DRAWINGS".
6.00 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS [see specifications]
A. SUBMITTAL REGISTER
a. Within fourteen calendar days after receipt of "Notice of award," of the contract, the Contractor
shall furnish the Contracting Officer a Submittal Register to indicate the Contractor's scheduled
submittal dates.
b. The Register shall contain all items (shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, certificates of
compliance, material samples, guarantees, etc.) that the Contractor shall submit for review and
approval action during the life of the contract.
B. The Contractor will submit four (4) copies of all required submittals unless otherwise specifically indicated.
Section 01000
Page 4 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
6.1 DESCRIPTIVE DATA
A. The Contractor shall submit three copies of AF Form 3000, Material Submittal Approval, to the
GOVERNMENT for approval. Included shall be manufacturer's descriptive data for materials, fixtures, and
equipment the Contractor proposes to incorporate in the work. The submittal shall include catalog
numbers, diagrams, drawings, and such additional descriptive data and samples required to properly
evaluate all items. When specifications require materials to conform to Federal, Military, Commercial,
AGTM, etc., specifications and standards, the Contractor shall submit supplier's or manufacturer's
Certification of Conformance in addition to other descriptive data. Catalog numbers and trade names
specified indicate examples of a standard product. Other manufacturers' products may be substituted
contingent upon approval. Approval of all items must be obtained prior to fabrication or purchase.
Payment for work incorporating these materials will not be made if required material submittals have not
been approved. Approval of materials, fixtures, and equipment will be based on manufacturer's published
ratings and conformance with specifications.
B. The Material Descriptive Data Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to, the information
C. indicated in the appropriate specification section.
D. The Shop Drawing Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to, the information indicated in the
appropriate specification section.
E. The Samples Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to, the information indicated in the
appropriate specification section.
6.2 CONTRACTOR DEVIATION
When data is submitted for approval, the Government's approval of such data shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for errors or deviation from contract drawings and specifications. In the case of a deviation, the
Contractor shall inform the GOVERNMENT in writing of the request for deviation with all the specific data related
to the change.
7.0 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS
Any publication referenced in this specification, but not shown in each part under paragraph entitled
"APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS", also form a part of these specifications to the extent referenced.
8.0 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCING
A. Provide and install six-foot (6’) high chain link fence, including gates as indicated, in accordance with
commercial (not residential) industry standards.
B. Zinc coated steel fabric or wire not less than (9) gauge.
C. Hot-dipped galvanized steel fence supports, framing and fittings of commercial grade sizes and weights.
D. Provide Keesler standard brown vision screen.
9.0 REMOVAL PROCEDURES
No removed items will be reused in this contract unless specifically listed in these specifications and/or on the
drawings. All removed equipment becomes the property of the Contractor unless noted otherwise. The Contractor
will be required to furnish lifting equipment as necessary to remove the equipment, and shall provide all equipment
to transport the removed items off base. All unused material or debris will be removed from Government-controlled
property. Use of Government-contracted dumpsters is prohibited. Unused materials, debris and rubbish shall be
disposed of off base in a permitted landfill. The Contractor shall comply with Mississippi Department of
Environmental Management Regulations.
10 EXCAVATION: [see specifications]
Section 01000
Page 5 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
11.0 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS
Whenever the Contractor uses portable electrical tools or equipment in an outside location or in an interior wet
location where floor is conductive such as concrete, the Contractor shall provide and use a portable ground fault
circuit interrupter (GFCI). This shall apply wherever electric power is supplied through Government-controlled
facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the GFCI in operating condition and testing it before
each use.
12.0 FIRE REGULATIONS
The Contractor shall comply with all aspects of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publication 241,
"Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations," dated 1980 and Unified Facilities Criteria
(UFC)3-600-01 dated 17 April 03.
13.0 ASBESTOS
No friable asbestos containing materials will be installed as a part of this contract. Spray application of asbestos or
asbestos-containing materials to exposed walls, ceilings, ducts, columns, etc. is prohibited. In the event friable
asbestos containing materials are encountered during "rip out" and demolition operations, the Contractor shall notify
the Government Project Manager and will take appropriate abatement action.
14.0 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
All drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to qualify the materials specified and indicate their intended
relationship to each other. The drawings are not to be scaled, rather field conditions should dictate placement. The
various scales used on the drawings may not allow the indications of all fittings, offsets, and accessories that may be
required. The Contractor is to carefully investigate the conditions that would affect the work to be performed and
shall arrange such work accordingly.
15.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS [SEE SPECIFICATIONS]
The Contractor shall provide to the Government marked drawings commonly referred to as "as-builts" indicating
conditions that differ from that shown on the contract plans The Contractor will review with the GOVERNMENT
the "as-builts" on a weekly basis to ensure an accurate up-to-date set of documents is being kept. Changes are to be
noted as the work progresses. The Contractor will utilize a Government-furnished copy of the contract drawings
with the changes neatly indicated in red using the drafting standards and legends indicated in the contract drawings.
One copy is required and will be submitted to the GOVERNMENT at the final inspection. If there are no changes, a
title sheet (from the contract drawings) will only be required with the note "NO CHANGES" marked appropriately.
16.0 TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible for the orderly handling of traffic through the work at all times during the life of
the construction contract. This shall be accomplished in conformity with all state, local, federal, and military
Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
17.0 CONTRACTOR MAINTENANCE
At the end of each working day the Contractor shall clean up the work site which includes the construction area(s),
construction office area(s), material storage area(s), parking and eating area(s), and any other area(s) affected by the
construction process. Stacked material shall not be within 8m (25-feet) of an active roadway. Tracking of soil, mud
or other construction debris or substance on any Base street, parking area, sidewalk, patio, driveway, turf, or other
area shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall keep all turfed areas clean within the construction limits, and
shrubs and other elements in the landscape shall be maintained.
Section 01000
Page 6 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
18.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A. The work includes demolition or removal of all construction indicated or specified. All material and debris
resulting from this project shall become property of the Contractor and shall be hauled off and disposed off
base at the Contractor's expense. Organic waste from ground clearing operations may be disposed of at the
Base compost facility, but check with the GOVERNMENT for final clearance. All solid wastes including
but not limited to wood, sheetrock, metal, wire, paint, painted brick, painted concrete, painted rock, painted
anything, and etc. shall be disposed of in an approved state certified landfill at the Contractor's expense.
B. Clean concrete, brick, rock, and dirt do not require disposal in a certified landfill. This material shall be
disposed off base in any legal manner that will not result in liability to the United States Air Force.
Payment for services to the Contractor shall not be released until Contractor has provided copies of all
landfill receipts to the GOVERNMENT. The Contractor shall comply with all state, local, federal, and
military Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
19.0 ENVIRONMENTAL RELEASE REPORTING
An environmental release report shall be completed for all environmental releases that are caused by an Air Force
activity or which occur on an Air Force installation or facility. Examples of environmental releases are listed as
follows but not limited to: oil releases to navigable waters, hazardous substance release above the reportable
quantity, vinyl chloride releases, excessive emissions over amount allowed in permits, hazardous material incidents
occurring during transportation, underground storage tank spills and releases, and any emergency incidents of
environmental contamination. The Contractor shall immediately notify the GOVERNMENT in the event of any
environmental release. The following information shall be documented; the time, type, amount, and cause of
release.
20.0 PROTECTION OF EXISTING LANDSCAPE DURING CONSTRUCTION: n/a
21.0 STAGING AREA
The Contractor will be provided space as indicated for an office trailer and staging of materials in support of this
project and must provide protection and security for it in that area. If not identified on contract drawings the
location will be mutually agreed upon and within a reasonable distance to the construction area. Contractor will be
required to provide temporary fencing with Keesler AFB standard brown screening around all trailer and staging
areas. Contractor will be responsible for job site security as required.
22.0 TESTING
Where specific tests are required by this contract, the Contractor shall notify the GOVERNMENT at least 24 hours
prior to testing. The Contractor shall turn in a test report, if required, to the GOVERNMENT as soon as possible.
The Contractor shall not proceed with any work that would cover up the work being tested until the
GOVERNMENT has approved the work being tested.
23.0 CONDUCT OF WORK
The Contractor shall conduct his work so the Government property and personnel, other personnel, and work areas
shall be protected at all times from inconvenience, damage of any nature, or injury caused by this work until
completion of the contract.
24.0 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED PROPERTY
A. In the event of damages of any nature caused by this work (including maintenance and warranty
operations) due to improper protection, precaution, or safety measures, such damages shall be repaired or
such property shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense, cost, or charge to the Government.
B. In the event the Contractor does not satisfactorily repair or replace such damage caused by the work of the
contract, the Government reserves the right to make the necessary corrections and deduct from the contract
Section 01000
Page 7 of 8

SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLER AFB SUPPLEMENT
price the cost to the Government for inconveniences, labor material, etc. involved.
25.0 BARRICADES
The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all required barricades as directed by the Safety Office and the
Government Project Manager, and access driveways and doors will remain clear at all times.
26.0 CLEANING SCHEDULE
A. Clean sites of all construction related and project related debris on a regular basis or as required by the
GOVERNMENT.
B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the work areas and the site.
All base roads are to be cleaned of dirt/debris as directed.
C. Execute final cleaning prior to the final inspection.
27.0 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES [SEE SPECIFICATIONS]
Closeout procedures will be conducted for each construction area/building as if it were a separate project. When the
Contractor is ready for final inspection, the Contractor shall notify the GOVERNMENT (in writing) within two (2)
working days of the desired inspection date. During the inspection, the Contractor and the GOVERNMENT shall
document all deficiencies on a "punch list." The GOVERNMENT will provide a formal copy of the punch list to
the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all punch list items prior to the end of the contract
completion date and notify the GOVERNMENT (in writing) when the contractor is ready for re-inspection.
28.0 Controlled/Restricted Areas.
The Contractor shall implement local Base procedures for entries to Air Force control/restricted areas where
Contractor personnel will work.
29.0 WEAPONS, FIREARMS, AND AMMUNITION
Contractor employees are prohibited from possessing weapons, firearms, or ammunition on themselves or within
Contractor-owned or privately owned vehicles while on Keesler AFB.
30.0 TRAFFIC LAWS
All Contractor personnel shall comply with Base traffic regulations.
-- END OF SECTION –
Section 01000
Page 8 of 8

SECTION 01001 HVAC COORDINATION COMMISSIONING AND CLOSE-OUT
1.0 HVAC PROJECT COORDINATION MEETINGS:
The General and/or Prime Contractor shall send his Mechanical Foreman to all Tuesday morning project
coordination meetings. These meetings shall be held in the Civil Engineering Building (B.4705) every
Tuesday morning at 7:30 am unless notified otherwise. The contractors’ representative shall be the point of
contact for the project and the most familiar with the project progress and details. The purpose of these
meetings shall be for project update and coordination purposes.
2.0 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT SEQUENCE:
The General Contractor and Mechanical Contractor are required to coordinate the following sequence with
the CSC STM, Designer/Engineer and CSC CEOM shop supervisor one month prior to the beginning of the
Certified Factory Start-Up for all equipment. All coordination requests must be submitted in writing or e-
mail to the STM. The Contractor shall submit proof of Factory Technician Start-Up Certification and
Factory Start-Up Report for approval in the submittal process. All of the following procedures are
sequential and must therefore be coordinated and executed in sequential order. The Contractor will be
allowed to proceed to each sequential item based on successful completion of each item as approved and
directed by the STM.
1. Controls Commissioning with Commissioning Reports for all Devices: The Contractor shall not
proceed to item #2 until all controls commissioning reports for all devices are submitted to the STM and
approved. Controls commissioning reports shall be submitted upon the immediate completion of controls
commissioning so as not to delay the project. The Contractor shall begin delivery of all Close-Out materials
at this point (see item #7).
2. Operational Test: After completion of installation, all mechanical systems shall be started and operated
to prove proper functioning of each item of equipment. All operating test shall be scheduled with the STM
and performed to the satisfaction of the STM. The contractor shall coordinate the controls contractor to be
present. Should any element or individual piece of equipment not perform properly, the Contractor shall
make all required corrections and repeat the operational test for the equipment in question and/or any other
related equipment that must operate in unison to the satisfaction of the STM before proceeding to item #3.
3. Certified Factory Start-up with Certified Factory Start-up Report: After equipment installation and
operational test are completed; the Contractor shall provide the services of a manufacturer certified field
representative for starting the unit and training for the CSC CEOM operator(s) and or technician(s) at no
additional costs. Training can occur sequential to Certified Factory Start-Up if successful and the STM is
provided the Certified Factory Start-Up Report immediately upon completion, approved, and Certified
Factory Training has been previously coordinated. Uncertified vendor field representatives are not allowed.
Factory certified vendor field representatives are only allowed if they are approved during the submittal
process. The contractor shall coordinate the controls contractor to be present. The Contractor shall present
CSC STM with all required copies of the O&M manuals upon completion of Factory Start-Up and prior to
Training.
4. Test and Balance: The contractor shall provide complete Test & Balance service as dictated by the
specifications. Any deviations from the Test & Balance specification shall be requested in writing to the
CSC STM and approved by the Designer/Engineer. The Contractor shall request in writing all pertinent
information required for Test & Balance if additional or any information is needed. The Test & Balance
Report shall be presented to the Designer/Engineer within 48 Hours for approval by the Designer/Engineer.
The Designer/Engineer shall have 1 week to review upon receipt thereof. Additional details of the Test &
Balance requirements are presented specifically in the Test & Balance section of the specifications.
SECTION 01001
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01001 HVAC COORDINATION COMMISSIONING AND CLOSE-OUT
5. Training for newly installed Mechanical Systems and Devices:
a. Scheduling: Typically, training is only scheduled on Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday each
week; but exceptions may be permitted on request. Requests for Rescheduling training must be
presented in writing or e-mail and may be contingent to a 7-day advance notice. All systems and
devices must be fully tested and functioning prior to beginning scheduled training. It is the
installers responsibility to ensure that the
equipment works BEFORE CSC CEOM staff arrive for training.
b. Start-up and/or Operational Reports: All equipment reports shall be completed in full and
delivered to CSC STM prior to beginning the training.
c. Training: Shall be provided by Certified Factory Technician(s) and must include
demonstrated performance of all designed system and device functions. Any failures identified
during the training which are not immediately (less than 15 minutes) repairable will result in
training stoppage until corrected and ALL system component operations re-verified prior to
resuming the training.
d. Rescheduling of Training: If any failure is identified prior to or during training which
requires rescheduling of the training; The contractor shall notify the CSC STM in writing or e-
mail, who in turn, will notify CSC CEOM Supervisors and coordinate. The reschedule date will
not require a 7 day notice but will be accommodated at the earliest time based on CSC
STM/CEC/CEOM work load and manning.
6. Pre-Final Inspection: When requested by the STM and/or the Contractor and deemed necessary by the
STM a courtesy Pre-Final Inspection shall be provided to the contractor. Written comments shall be
offered to the Contractor and the Contractor shall address all issues before requesting Final Inspection.
7. Final Inspection (95% complete): The Contractor shall request a date/time/place for Final Inspection
in writing or e-mail to the CSC STM when the Contractor has verified all items are completed by the
Contractors work force and/or sub-contractors. Upon approval and coordination of the Final Inspection
Request, the STM shall approve Contractor Progress Payment Request to 95% completion. The STM shall
provide the contractor in writing a punch-list of any issues found during the course of inspection. The
Contractor shall request in writing or e-mail a Re-Inspection of punch list items when the contractor has
verified his work force or sub-contractors have successfully completed all punch-list items.
8. Close-Out Materials: The Contractor shall provide the following Close-Out materials immediately
following Final Inspection. The Contractor is encouraged to begin assimilating and submitting Close-Out
Materials upon initiation of the End of Project Close-Out Sequence. The Contractor shall present CSC
STM with all required copies of the O&M manuals upon completion of Factory Start-Up and prior to
Training. The following items shall be submitted to the CSC buyer prior to approval of the 100% Progress
Payment
a. Unit Input Report (Refrigerant).
b. Contractor Warranty.
c. Equipment Warranties.
d. O&M manuals and/or equipment (not submittal for materials and equipment) for all submittal
required equipment.
e. Copies of all Permits if not already received.
9. Approve final invoiced payment (100% complete): Upon receipt and approval of all Close-Out
Materials, the CSC STM shall approve the Contractors 100% Progress Payment .
3.0 UTILITY OUTAGES: The Contractor shall be responsible to request Utility Outages using a copy of the
“UTILITY OUTAGE REQUEST FORM” at the end of this section.
SECTION 01001
Page 2 of 4

SECTION 01001 HVAC COORDINATION COMMISSIONING AND CLOSE-OUT
1. Maximum possible utility (electrical, water, HVAC,.) outages during
normal business hours: 1-2 hours pending (unless approved temporary service
is provided) 4 week notification and approval by Base Command, MSG, CSC and
facility personnel.
2. Maximum possible utility (electrical, water, HVAC,.) outages after
normal business hours and requiring CSC shop support:
Friday 7:00 AM - 5:00 PM (Down Fridays only)
Saturday 7:00 AM - 5:00 PM
Sunday 7:00 AM - 5:00 PM
Pending 4 week notification and approval by Base Command, MSG, CSC and
facility personnel.
3. Maximum possible utility (electrical, water, HVAC,.) outages after
normal business hours and not requiring CSC shop support:
Thurs. 6:00 PM - Monday 5:00 am (Down Friday weekend)
Friday 6:00 PM - Monday 5:00 am
Pending 4 week notification and approval by Base Command, MSG, CSC and
facility personnel.
SECTION 01001
Page 3 of 4

SECTION 01001 HVAC COORDINATION COMMISSIONING AND CLOSE-OUT
UTILITY OUTAGE REQUEST FORM
Date Submitted:
Project Number and Facility Name and Number:
Outage Time and Duration:
Proposed Outage Type and System(s) to be taken out of service:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Plumbing:
Other (Explain Type):
Work Location:
Workers Access Routes and Entry Points (Be specific):
Any known Impacts to Facility Operations (Be specific):
Areas of the Facility that will be affected:
Back Out Measures that will be employed if needed:
Protective Measures Employed for Workers Safety:
Temporary Measures that will be utilized to protect the facility and its mission:
Check Out Procedures for bringing system back on line:
Notification Lead Time:
Contractors Signature/Date:
CSC Operations Signature/Date:
CSC STM Signature/Date:
Facility Representative's Signature/Date:
SECTION 01001
Page 4 of 4

SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Government approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Contractor regulations; G
Transportation of personnel, materials, and equipment;
1.2 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES
1.2.1 Activity Regulations
A. Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar with and obey Activity
regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and
avenues of ingress and egress. Ingress and egress of Contractor material deliveries at the Activity is limited
to the commercial gate. To minimize traffic congestion, delivery of materials shall be outside of peak
traffic hours (6:30 to 8:00 a.m. and 3:30 to 5:00 p.m.) unless otherwise approved by the Contracting
Officer. Wear hard hats and all required personal protection in designated areas. Do not enter any
restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry. The Contractor's equipment shall
be conspicuously marked for identification.
1.2.1.1 Employee List
A. The Contractor shall provide to the Contracting officer, in writing, the names of two designated
representatives authorized to request personnel and vehicle passes for employees and subcontractor's
employees prior to commencement of work under this contract. The Contractor shall adhere to the
requirements of "Important Clarifications - Contractors - How to Gain Access," using most recent copy, in
obtaining access to the Keesler AFB complex for the life of the contract. A copy of these requirements will
be provided at the preconstruction
1.2.2 Working Hours
A. Regular working hours shall consist of a period between 7 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. 5 days per week, excluding
Government holidays.
1.2.3 Work Outside Regular Hours
A. Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval. Make application 15 calendar
days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in
progress, giving the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed, contract number and
project title. Based on the justification provided, the Contracting Officer may approve work outside regular
hours. During periods of darkness, the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by
the Contracting Officer.
1.2.4 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions
a. Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and
Government holidays. Conform to procedures required in the paragraph "Work Outside Regular
Hours."
G
Section 01140
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
b. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection, before interrupting existing
service. It is the intension of this project to continue operations of existing utility service until
such time as the new utility can be made ready for service.
c. Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telephone service, electric service, air
conditioning, heating, fire alarm, shall be considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph
entitled "Work Outside Regular Hours." Approvals will be required for all outages, contractor
shall work with the GOVERNMENT representative to schedule these outages. Approvals for
outages may take up to 3 weeks for approval and must be scheduled to allow for approvals.
d. Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor shall not operate nor disturb the setting of control
devices in the station utilities system, including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The
Government will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the work. The
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such
operation is required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section –
Section 01140
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred
to within the text by the basic designation only.
1.2 U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1(2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G"
designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following
shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
B. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals QC Plan; G,
C. Submit a QC plan within 15 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award.
1.4 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section. The QC program consists of a QC
Manager, a QC plan, a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC meetings, three phases
of control, submittal review and approval, testing, and QC certifications and documentation necessary
to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations which comply
with the requirements of this contract. The QC program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall
be keyed to the work sequence. No work or testing may be performed unless the QC Manager is on
the work site.
B. Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Acceptance
The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the acceptance of the QC plan is
mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.
C. Acceptance
Acceptance of the QC plan is required prior to the start of construction. The CONTRACTING
OFFICER reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations as necessary,
including removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The CONTRACTING
OFFICER reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in
order to verify the submitted qualifications.
D. Notification of Changes
Notify the CONTRACTING OFFICER, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes
in the QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed
change. Proposed changes shall be subject to the acceptance by the CONTRACTING
OFFICER.
SECTION 01150
Page 1 of 7

SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.5 QC ORGANIZATION
1.6 QC PLAN
QC Manager
Duties
Provide a QC Manager to implement and manage the QC program. In addition to
implementing and managing the QC program, the QC Manager may perform the duties
of project superintendent. The QC Manager is required to attend the Coordination and
Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings, perform the three phases of
control, perform submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and
provide QC certifications and documentation required in this contract. The QC
Manager is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and
documentation performed by others.
Qualifications
An individual experienced as a superintendent, inspector, QC Manager, project
manager, or construction manager on similar size and type construction contracts which
included the major trades that are part of this contract. The individual must be familiar
with the requirements of the EM 385-1-1 and have experience in the areas of hazard
identification and safety compliance.
Construction Quality Management Training
In addition to the above experience requirements, the QC Manager shall have
completed the course Construction Quality Management for Contractors and will have
a current certificate.
Requirements
Provide, for acceptance by the CONTRACTING OFFICER, a QC plan submitted in a
three-ring binder that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes the following with a
table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs.
1.7 QC ORGANIZATION
A chart showing the QC organizational structure and its relationship to the production side of the organization.
1.8 NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS
In resume format, for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM for Contractors course certification
required by the paragraph entitled "Construction Quality Management Training".
1.9 DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONEL
A. Of each person in the QC organization.
1. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS: A listing of outside organizations such as Contracting Office
rural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a
description of the services these firms will provide.
2. APPOINTMENT LETTERS: Letters signed by an officer of the
firm appointing the QC Manager and stating that they are responsible for managing and
implementing the QC program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the QC
Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work.
3. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER: Procedures for
reviewing, approving and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of the person(s) in the QC
organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval.
4. TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION: Testing laboratory information required by the
paragraphs "Accredited Laboratories" or "Testing Laboratory Requirements", as applicable.
SECTION 01150
Page 2 of 7

SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5. TESTING PLAN AND LOG: A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required,
referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test, the frequency, and the
person responsible for each test.
6. PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS: Procedures to identify, record, track and
complete rework items.
7. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES: Use Government formats.
8. LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES: A Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) is a task, which
is separate and distinct from other tasks, has the same control requirements and work crews.
The list shall be cross-referenced to the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the
specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart, the list of definable features of
work shall include but not be limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects
requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable features of work shall include but
not be limited to all critical path activities.
9. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THREE PHASES OF CONTROL: For each DFOW
provide Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists. Each list shall include a breakdown of quality
checks that will be used when performing the quality control functions, inspections, and tests
required by the contract documents. The preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted with
a view towards obtaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential
problems.
10. PERSONNEL MATRIX: Not Applicable.
11. PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION: See the paragraph entitled
"COMPLETION INSPECTIONS".
12. TRAINING PROCEDURES AND TRAINING LOG: Not Applicable.
1.10 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING
During either the Pre-Construction conference, but prior to the start of construction, discuss the QC program
required by this contract. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details,
including documentation, administration for on-site and off-site work, and the coordination of the Contractor's
management, production and the QC personnel. At the meeting, the Contractor will be required to explain how three
phases of control will be implemented for each DFOW. Contractor's personnel required to attend shall include the
QC Manager, project manager, and superintendent. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the QC Manager and
signed by both the Contractor and the CONTRACTING OFFICER. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the
signed minutes to all attendees.
1.11 QC MEETINGS
A. After the start of construction, the QC Manager shall conduct QC meetings weekly at the work site
with the superintendent and the foreman responsible for the ongoing and upcoming work. The QC
Manager shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the CONTRACTING
OFFICER within two working days after the meeting. As a minimum, the following shall be
accomplished at each meeting:
1. Review the minutes of the previous meeting;
2. Review the schedule and the status of work and rework;
3. Review the status of submittals;
4. Review the work to be accomplished in the next two weeks and documentation required;
5. Resolve QC and production problems (RFIs, etc.);
6. Address items that may require revising the QC plan; and g. Review Accident Prevention Plan
(APP).
1.12 THREE PHASES OF CONTROL
A. The three phases of control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the
SECTION 01150
Page 3 of 7

following for each DFOW.
SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1. Preparatory Phase
a. Notify the CONTRACTING OFFICER at least two work days in advance of each
preparatory phase. Conduct the preparatory phase with the superintendent and the
foreman responsible for the definable feature of work. Document the results of the
preparatory phase actions in the daily CQC Report and in the QC checklist. Perform the
following prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work:
b. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections;
c. Review the contract drawings;
d. Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and equipment have
been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when
required;
e. Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the
required QC testing;
f. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been
completed;
g. Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on
hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data;
h. Review the APP and appropriate Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) to ensure that
applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) are submitted; and
i. Discuss construction methods and the approach that will be used to provide quality
construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each DFOW.
2. Initial Phase
a. Notify the CONTRACTING OFFICER at least two work days in advance of each
initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a DFOW, conduct the
Initial Phase with the foreman responsible for that DFOW. Observe the initial segment
of the work to ensure that it complies with contract requirements. Document the results
of the Initial Phase in the daily CQC Report and in the QC checklist. Perform the
following for each DFOW:
b. Establish the quality of workmanship required;
c. Resolve conflicts;
d. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory; and
e. Check work procedures for compliance with the APP and the appropriate AHA to
ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.
3. Follow-Up Phase
a. Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as necessary, until
the completion of each DFOW and document in the daily CQC Report and in the QC
checklist:
b. Ensure the work is in compliance with contract requirements;
c. Maintain the quality of workmanship required;
d. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory;
e. Ensure that rework items are being corrected; and
f. Perform safety inspections.
4. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
a. Additional preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted on the same DFOW if the
quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes in the applicable QC
organization, if there are changes in the on-site production supervision or work crew, if
work on a DFOW is resumed after substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems
develop.
SECTION 01150
Page 4 of 7

SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5. Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site Work
a. Notify the CONTRACTING OFFICER at least two weeks prior to the start of the
preparatory and initial phases.
1.13 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL
Procedures for submission, review, and approval of submittals are described in the submittal section of the
specification.
1.14 TESTING
A. Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under
this contract.
B. Accreditation Requirements
Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a laboratory accreditation
authority and will be required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of
Accreditation. The laboratory's scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM
standards (i.e.; E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D 3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the technical sections
of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the
requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the
actual testing, not just the "Corporate Office."
C. Laboratory Accreditation Authorities
Laboratory Accreditation Authorities include the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
International Accreditation Services, Inc. (IAS), U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Materials
Testing Center (MTC), the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA), the
Washington Association of Building Officials (WABO) (Approval authority for WABO is
limited to projects within Washington State), and the Washington Area Council of Engineering
Laboratories (WACEL) (Approval authority by WACEL is limited to projects within the EFA
Chesapeake and Public Works Center Washington geographical area).
D. Capability Check
The CONTRACTING OFFICER retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the
proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques, and other
items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set forth in this contract.
E. Test Results
1. Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used.
2. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails
to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify the CONTRACTING
OFFICER immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red
letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements,
whichever is applicable. Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative
authorized to sign certified test reports. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other
documentation to the CONTRACTING OFFICER via the QC Manager.
1.15 QC CERTIFICATIONS
A. Contractor Quality Control Report Certification
Each CQC Report shall contain the following statement: "On behalf of the Contractor, I certify
that this report is complete and correct and equipment and material used and work performed
SECTION 01150
Page 5 of 7

SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
during this reporting period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to
the best of my knowledge except as noted in this report."
B. Invoice Certification
Furnish a certificate to the CONTRACTING OFFICER with each payment request, signed by
the QC Manager, attesting that as-built drawings are current and attesting that the work for
which payment is requested, including stored material, is in compliance with contract
requirements.
C. Completion Certification
Upon completion of work under this contract, the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate to the
CONTRACTING OFFICER attesting that "the work has been completed, inspected, tested and
is in compliance with the contract."
1.16 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS
A. Punch-Out Inspection
Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time
stated in the Contract clause "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or
stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QC Manager shall conduct an inspection of the work
and develop a punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and
specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items of the "Rework Items List", which
were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out inspection. The punch list shall include the
estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be
provided to the CONTRACTING OFFICER. The QC Manager or staff shall make follow-on
inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished,
the Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government
"Pre-Final Inspection".
B. Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to
be occupied. A Government pre-final punch list may be developed as a result of this
inspection. The QC Manager shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to
notifying the Government that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any
items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in a timely manner and shall be
accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment
thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.
C. Final Acceptance Inspection
The QC Manager, the superintendent, or other Contractor management personnel and the
CONTRACTING OFFICER will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Government
personnel may be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by
the CONTRACTING OFFICER based upon results of the "Pre-Final Inspection". Notice shall
be given to the CONTRACTING OFFICER at least 14 days prior to the final inspection. The
notice shall state that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being
unacceptable will be complete by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection.
Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will
be cause for the CONTRACTING OFFICER to bill the Contractor for the Government's
additional inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause "Inspection of Construction".
1.17 DOCUMENTATION
A. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities.
The forms identified under the paragraph "INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER
(CONTRACTING OFFICER)" shall be used. Reports are required for each day work is performed.
SECTION 01150
Page 6 of 7

SECTION 01150
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the contract. Every space on the forms must be
filled in. Use N/A if nothing can be reported in one of the spaces. The superintendent and the QC
Manager must prepare and sign the Contractor Production and CQC Reports, respectively. The
reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. In the
"remarks" section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions
received, problems encountered during construction, work progress and delays, conflicts or errors in
the drawings or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered, instructions given and
corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a record of visitors to the work site. For each remark
given, identify the Schedule Activity No. that is associated with the remark.
B. Quality Control Validation
1. Establish and maintain the following in a series of three ring binders. Binders shall be divided
and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be readily available to the Government's
Quality Assurance Team during all business hours.
C. As-Built Drawings
a. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists, arranged by specification
section.
b. All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number.
c. A current up-to-date copy of the Testing and Plan Log with supporting field test
reports, arranged by specification section.
d. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order. Also include
documentation that modified work was accomplished.
e. A current up-to-date copy of the Rework Items List.
f. Maintain up-to-date copies of all punch lists issued by the QC
g. Staff on the Contractor and Sub-Contractors and all punch lists issued by the
Government.
1. The QC Manager is required to review the as-built drawings, required by Section 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations,
which have been made from the Contract drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified
with the appropriate modifying documentation, e.g. PC number, modification number, RFI
number, etc. The QC Manager shall initial each deviation or revision. Upon completion of
work, the QC Manager shall submit a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as-built
drawings prior to submission to the CONTRACTING OFFICER.
1.18 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE
The CONTRACTING OFFICER will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing
requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when
delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the
Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the CONTRACTING OFFICER may issue an order stopping all or
part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time
lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time, for excess costs, or damages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01150
Page 7 of 7

SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1.0 GENERAL
A. The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to
adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections.
B. Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as those used in the contract
drawings.
C. Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with
contract requirements.
D. Contractor's Quality Control System Manager, to check and approve all items prior to submittal and stamp,
sign, and date indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements are to be clearly
identified.
E. Submittals are to be scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered
thereby. Picked up and disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations samples remaining upon completion of the
work.
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Government approval is required for all submittals. Government approval is required for extensions of
design, critical materials, any deviations from the solicitation, the accepted proposal, or the completed
design, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as
designated by the Contracting Officer.
B. The approval of submittals by the GOVERNMENT shall not be construed as a complete check, but will
indicate only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are
satisfactory. Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error, which may exist,
as the Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections, details and
satisfactory construction of all work.
1.1.1 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVAL
1.1.2 Submittals Required from the Contractor
As soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement of fabrication, forward to the Government.
Submittals required in the technical sections of this specification. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all items
listed on the Submittal Register (741-F-016, Schedule of Material Submittals, or equivalent)
TRANSMITTAL FORM (AF 3000):
AF Form 3000 shall be used for submitting both Governments approved and information only submittals in
accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms will be furnished to the Contractor by
the GOVERNMENT. This form shall be properly completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and
identifying each item submitted. Special care will be exercised to ensure proper listing of the specification
paragraph and/or sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
1.3 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Number of Copies Submittals
Submit four copies of submittals.
SECTION 01330
Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.3.2 Review Schedule
A period of 14 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals.
1.4 SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. The Contractor shall develop a complete list of
submittals required in the specifications, and use the list to prepare the Submittal Register. The Contractor is
required to complete the submittal register and submit it to the Contracting Officer for approval within 30 calendar
days after Notice to Proceed.
1.4.1 Copies Delivered to the Government
Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government with each invoice request.
1.5 SCHEDULING
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are
interrelated. Include certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay damages
or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with performance of
work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of
requirements.
b. Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the register.
c. Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual submission and approval
dates. When all items on the register have been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.
d. Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual submittal is made on or
before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
e. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with receipt by approving authority,
that includes at least 14 working days for Contracting Officer approval. Period of review for
submittals with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from
QC organization
f. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal.
1.5.1 Schedule Submittal
At the Preconstruction conference, provide, for approval by the Contracting Officer, the following schedule of
submittals:
a. Schedule of shop drawings and technical submittals required by the specifications and drawings.
1.6 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
A. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project
design concepts and compliance with contract documents.
B. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled "Review Notations" and
with markings appropriate for action indicated.
C. Upon completion of review of submittals Government will, stamp and date approved submittals. 2 copies
of the approved submittal will be retained by the Contracting Officer and 2 copies of the submittal will be
returned to the Contractor.
1.7 Review Notations
1.7.1 DISAPPROVED [OR REJECTED] SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor considers any
correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the clause entitled, "Changes" is to be given to the Contracting
Officer. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and construction of
SECTION 01330
Page 2 of 3

SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
work. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such
work at the Contractor's expense.
B. If changes are necessary to submittals, the Contractor shall make such revisions and submission of the
submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be
accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.
1.8 APPROVED[/ACCEPTED] SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not be construed as a complete check, and
indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory,
design, general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information appear to meet the Solicitation
and Accepted Proposal. Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error
which may exist.
1.9 APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and is not be construed to change
or modify any contract requirements. Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.
1.10 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals have not been obtained.
1.11 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1.11.1 Bar Chart
A. Submit the progress chart, for approval by the Contracting Officer, at the Preconstruction Conference in
one reproducible and 4 copies.
B. Prepare the progress chart in the form of a bar chart utilizing form "Construction Progress Chart" or
comparable format acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
1.11.2 Project Network Analysis
Submit the initial progress schedule within 21 calendar days of notice to proceed. Schedule is to be updated and
resubmitted monthly beginning 7 calendar days after return of the approved initial schedule. Sufficient detail to
facilitate the Contractor's control of the job and to allow the Contracting Officer to readily follow progress for
portions of the work should be shown within the schedule.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01330
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 01330A
PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES (Not Applicable)
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be responsible for the preparation of all
required project schedule reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pursuant to the Contract Clause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS, a Project Schedule as
described below shall be prepared. The scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Contractor management personnel shall actively participate in its development. Subcontractors and suppliers
working on the project shall also contribute in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. The
approved Project Schedule shall be used to measure the progress of the work, to aid in evaluating time extensions,
and to provide the basis of all progress payments.
3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT
The schedule shall be the basis for measuring Contractor progress. Lack of an approved schedule or scheduling
personnel will result in an inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor's progress for the purposes of
payment.
3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE
The computer software system utilized by the Contractor to produce the Project Schedule shall be capable of
providing all requirements of this specification. Failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of this
specification shall result in the disapproval of the schedule. Manual methods used to produce any required
information shall require approval by the Contracting Officer.
A. Use of the Critical Path Method
The Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation shall be used to generate the Project Schedule. The
Contractor shall provide the Project Schedule in the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM).
B. Level of Detail Required
The Project Schedule shall include an appropriate level of detail. Failure to develop or update the Project
Schedule or provide data to the Contracting Officer at the appropriate level of detail, as specified by the
Contracting Officer, shall result in the disapproval of the schedule. The Contracting Officer will use, but is
not limited to, the following conditions to determine the appropriate level of detail to be used in the Project
Schedule:
C. Activity Durations
Tasks related to the procurement of long lead materials or equipment shall be included as separate activities
in the project schedule.
D. Government Activities
Government and other agency activities that could impact progress shall be shown.
E. Responsibility
All activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the party responsible to perform the work.
F. Work Areas
All activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the work area in which the activity occurs.
G. Modification or Claim Number
Any activity that is added or changed by contract modification or used to justify claimed time shall be
identified by a mod or claim code that changed the activity.
Section 01330A
1 of 5

SECTION 01330A
PROJECT SCHEDULE
H. Bid Item
All activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the Bid Item to which the activity belongs.
I. Phase of Work
All activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the phases of work in which the activity occurs.
J. Category of Work
All Activities shall be identified in the project schedule according to the category of work which best
describes the activity
K. Scheduled Project Completion
The schedule interval shall extend from NTP to the contract completion date.
L. Project Start Date
The schedule shall start no earlier than the date on which the NTP was acknowledged.
M. Constraint of Last Activity
Completion of the last activity in the schedule shall be constrained by the contract completion date.
N. Interim Completion Dates
Contractually specified interim completion dates shall also be constrained to show negative float if the
early finish date of the last activity in that phase falls after the interim completion date.
3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall provide the submissions as described below. The data disk, reports, and network diagrams
required for each submission are contained in paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS.
A. Initial Project Schedule Submission
The Initial Project Schedule shall be submitted for approval within 20 calendar days after NTP. The
schedule shall provide a reasonable sequence of activities which represent work through the entire project
and shall be at a reasonable level of detail.
B. Periodic Schedule Updates
Based on the result of progress meetings, specified in "Periodic Progress Meetings," the Contractor shall
submit periodic schedule updates. These submissions shall enable the Contracting Officer to assess
Contractor's progress.
3.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The following items shall be submitted by the Contractor for the preliminary submission, initial submission, and
every periodic project schedule update throughout the life of the project:
A. Hard Copy of Schedule
Two hard copies of the project schedule shall be provided.
B. File Medium
Required data shall be submitted on CD unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.
C. Disk Label
A permanent exterior label shall be affixed to each disk submitted.
D. Network Diagram
The network diagram shall be required on the initial schedule submission and on monthly schedule update
submissions. The network diagram shall depict and display the order and interdependence of activities and
the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited
to, the following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:
E. Continuous Flow
Diagrams shall show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left. The activity
number, description, duration, and estimated earned value shall be shown on the diagram.
F. Project Milestone Dates
Dates shall be shown on the diagram for start of project, any contract required interim completion dates,
and contract completion dates.
G. Critical Path
The critical path shall be clearly shown.
Section 01330A
1 of 5

SECTION 01330A
PROJECT SCHEDULE
3.6 PERIODIC PROGRESS MEETINGS
Progress meetings to discuss payment shall include a monthly onsite meeting or other regular intervals mutually
agreed to at the preconstruction conference.
A. Meeting Attendance
The Contractor's Project Manager shall attend the regular progress
B. Update Submission Following Progress Meeting
A complete update of the project schedule containing all approved progress, revisions, and adjuncts, based
on the regular progress meeting, shall be submitted not later than 4 working days after the monthly progress
meeting.
3.7 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS
In the event the Contractor requests an extension of the contract completion date, or any interim milestone date, the
Contractor shall furnish the following for a determination as to whether or not the Contractor is entitled to an
extension of time under the provisions of the contract: justification, project schedule data, and supporting evidence
as the Contracting Officer may deem necessary. Submission of proof of delay is obligatory to any approvals.
A. Justification of Delay
The project schedule shall clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the float time available
for the work involved with this request. The Contracting Officer's determination as to the number of
allowable days of contract extension shall be based upon the project schedule updates in effect for the time
period in question, and other factual information. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the
Contractor's own actions, which result in the extension of the schedule, will not be a cause for a time
extension to the contract completion date.
B. DIRECTED CHANGES
If the NTP is issued for changes prior to settlement of price and/or time, the Contractor shall submit
proposed schedule revisions to the Contracting Officer within 2 weeks of the NTP being issued. The
proposed revisions to the schedule will be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to inclusion of those
changes within the project schedule.
3.9 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT
Float available in the schedule, at any time, shall not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Government or
the Contractor.
-- End of Section --
Section 01330A
1 of 5

SECTION 01355A
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred
to within the text by the basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) EM 385-1-1
Requirements
(2003) Safety -- Safety and Health
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents
which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to
human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment aesthetically,
culturally and/or historically.
B. Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur to the
environment during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires
consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual
aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well
as other pollutants.
C. Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or disposed of, may meet the
definition of a hazardous waste. These waste streams would typically consist of material brought on site by
the Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of construction. Examples
include, but are not limited to, excess paint thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,
excess paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and contaminated pesticide equipment
rinse water.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of construction
operations. The environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of
permanent work shall be protected during the entire duration of this contract. The Contractor shall comply with all
applicable environmental Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and regulations.
1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.
1.5 PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section. The Contractor shall be responsible for
payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or notices obtained by the Contractor. All
costs associated with this section shall be included in the contract price. The Contractor shall be responsible for
payment of all fines/fees for violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and local laws and
regulations.
SECTION 01355A
Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01355A
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are
for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review
the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Environmental Protection Plan
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the site, the Contractor shall submit an
Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the
Environmental Protection Plan is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues
which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of concern shall be defined within the Environmental
Protection Plan as outlined in this section. The Contractor shall address each topic at a level of detail commensurate
with the environmental issue and required construction task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this
section, but which the Contractor considers necessary, shall be identified and discussed after those items formally
identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the Environmental Protection Plan, the Contractor shall meet with the
Contracting Officer for the purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental Protection Plan;
possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan including any reporting requirements; and methods for
administration of the Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan shall be current and
maintained onsite by the Contractor.
A. Compliance
No requirement in this Section shall be construed as relieving the Contractor of any applicable Federal,
State, and local environmental protection laws and regulations. During Construction, the Contractor shall
be responsible for identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval any additional requirements to be
included in the Environmental Protection Plan.
B. Contents
The environmental protection plan shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are) responsible for ensuring
adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.
b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be
removed from the site, if applicable.
c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's environmental
protection personnel.
d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program.
e. An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and location of the erosion and
sediment controls to be provided. The plan shall include monitoring and reporting requirements to
assure that the control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment control plan,
Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
may be substituted for this plan.
f. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments or haul roads,
stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or
spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on the site.
g. A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on the
job site; identifies the intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water,
or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations for storage and handling of
i. these materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous material to be on site at
SECTION 01355A
Page 2 of 5

SECTION 01355A
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
any given time shall be included in the contaminant prevention plan. As new hazardous
materials are brought on site or removed from the site, the plan shall be updated.
h. A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and procedures for management
and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as
concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic
test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a settling/retention pond is required, the plan
shall include the design of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements
for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of disposal for the waste water, the
plan shall include a sketch showing the location for land application along with a description of
the pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be the method of disposal,
a copy of the permit and associated documents shall be included as an attachment prior to
discharging the waste water. If disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan shall include
documentation that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow rate,
volume, and type of discharge.
C. Appendix
Copies of all environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct, notifications,
certifications, reports, and termination documents shall be attached, as an appendix, to the Environmental
Protection Plan.
1.8 PROTECTION FEATURES
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES,
EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to start of any onsite construction activities, the
Contractor and the Contracting Officer shall make a joint condition survey. Immediately following the survey, the
Contractor shall prepare a brief report including a plan describing the features requiring protection under the
provisions of the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings as environmental features
requiring protection along with the condition of trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of
work and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s), as applicable. This survey report
shall be signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its accuracy and
completeness. The Contractor shall protect those environmental features included in the survey report and any
indicated on the drawings, regardless of interference which their preservation may cause to the Contractor's work
under the contract.
1.9 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall comply with the special environmental requirements listed here and included at the end of this
section.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS
Any deviations, requested by the Contractor, from the drawings, plans and specifications which may have an
environmental impact will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review,
processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to disapprove alternate methods, even if
they are more cost effective, if the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will have an
adverse environmental impact.
1.11 NOTIFICATION
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with Federal, State or
local environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental Protection
plan. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective
action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order
stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions shall be
granted or equitable adjustments allowed to the Contractor for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other
actions the Contracting Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition
Regulation or Federal Law.
SECTION 01355A
Page 3 of 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
SECTION 01355A
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LAND RESOURCES
The Contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications. Prior to the beginning
of any construction, the Contractor shall identify any land resources to be preserved within the work area. Except in
areas indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared, the Contractor shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or
destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval. No ropes,
cables, or guys shall be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized. The
Contractor shall provide effective protection for land and vegetation resources at all times as defined in the
following subparagraphs. Stone, soil, or other materials displaced into uncleared areas shall be removed by the
Contractor.
A. Work Area Limits
Prior to commencing construction activities, the Contractor shall mark the areas that need not be disturbed
under this contract. Isolated areas within the general work area which are not to be disturbed shall be
marked or fenced. Monuments and markers shall be protected before construction operations commence.
Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers shall be visible in the
dark. The Contractor's personnel shall be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting
particular objects.
B. Landscape
Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features indicated and defined on the
drawings to be preserved shall be clearly identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any
other approved techniques. The Contractor shall restore landscape features damaged or destroyed during
construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area.
C. Odors
Odors from construction activities shall be controlled at all times. The odors shall not cause a health hazard
and shall be in compliance with State regulations and/or local ordinances.
D. Sound Intrusions
The Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize environment
damage by noise. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the State of Mississippi rules.
3.4 CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL
Disposal of wastes shall be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in other sections and/or shown on the
drawings.
A. Solid Wastes
Solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) shall be placed in containers which are emptied on a regular
schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal shall be conducted to prevent contamination. Segregation
measures shall be employed so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste.
The Contractor shall transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in compliance with
Federal, State, and local requirements for solid waste disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill shall
be the minimum acceptable off-site solid waste disposal option. The Contractor shall verify that the
selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and licenses to operate. The
Contractor shall comply with site procedures and Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
3.5 TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
The Contractor's personnel shall be trained in all phases of environmental protection and pollution control. The
Contractor shall conduct environmental protection/pollution control meetings for all Contractor personnel prior to
commencing construction activities. Additional meetings shall be conducted for new personnel and when site
conditions change. The training and meeting agenda shall include: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution;
familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards; installation and care of devices, vegetative covers,
and instruments required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous environmental
SECTION 01355A
Page 4 of 5

SECTION 01355A
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants;
recognition and protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered species and their habitat that
are known to be in the area.
3.6 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
The Contractor shall clean up all areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up".
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of
temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures,
stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of the work. The
disturbed area shall be graded, filled and the entire area seeded unless otherwise indicated.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01355A
Page 5 of 5

SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Site Plan
The Contractor shall prepare a site plan indicating the proposed location and dimensions of any area
to be fenced and used by the Contractor, the number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress
to the fenced area and details of the fence installation. Any areas which may have to be graveled to
prevent the tracking of mud shall also be identified. The Contractor shall also indicate if the use of a
supplemental or other staging area is desired.
B. Identification of Employees
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing to each employee, and for requiring each employee
engaged on the work to display, identification as approved and directed by the Contracting Officer.
Prescribed identification shall immediately be delivered to the Contracting Officer for cancellation
upon release of any employee. When required, the Contractor shall obtain and provide fingerprints of
persons employed on the project. Contractor and subcontractor personnel shall wear identifying
markings on hard hats clearly identifying the company for whom the employee works.
C. Employee Parking
Contractor employees shall park privately owned vehicles in an area designated by the Contracting
Officer. This area will be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor
employee parking shall not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of the
military installation.
1.2 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
A. Payment for Utility Services
The Government will make all reasonably required utilities available to the Contractor from existing
outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities
furnished without charge.
B. Temporary Connections
The Contractor, at its expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall provide
and maintain necessary temporary connections, distribution lines
C. Sanitation
The Contractor shall provide and maintain within the construction area minimum field-type sanitary
facilities approved by the Contracting Officer. Government toilet facilities will not be available to
Contractor's personnel.
D. Telephone
The Contractor shall make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.
1.3 BULLETIN BOARD, PROJECT SIGN, AND PROJECT SAFETY SIGN
A. Bulletin Board
Immediately upon beginning of work, the Contractor shall provide a weatherproof glass-covered
bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the Equal Employment Opportunity
poster, a copy of the wage decision contained in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and
other information approved by the Contracting Officer. The bulletin board shall be located at the
project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting
Officer. Legible copies of the aforementioned data shall be displayed until work is completed. Upon
completion of work the bulletin board shall be removed by and remain the property of the Contractor.
SECTION 1500
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
B. Project Sign [REQUIRED THIS PROJECT ]
1. Sign Description
a. Prior to initiating any work on site provide one project identification sign at the location
indicated designated by the Contracting Officer. Construct the sign in accordance with
project sign detail attached at the end of this section. Maintain sign throughout the life
of the project. Upon completion of the project, remove the sign from the site.
b. On the project sign, list one points of contact by name and telephone number for a Air
Force representative, which will be provided by the Contracting Officer.
2. Project Signboard (Air Force) [REQUIRED THIS PROJECT ]
a. Furnish the sign, maintain the sign during construction, and remove the sign from the
job site upon completion of the project. Details of sign graphics and construction are
indicated on the drawings.
b. The 18 inch diameter for Air Force shall be created in the design indicated.
c. Use weather resistant, self adhering film shall be rated for a minimum of 2 year exterior
vertical exposure and be mounted to sign with pressure sensitive, permanent acrylic
adhesive. Shop cut sticker to round shape and provide pull-off backing sheet on
adhesive side of sticker for shipping.
C. Project and Safety Signs
The requirements for the signs, their content, and location shall be as shown on the drawings.
The signs shall be erected within 15 days after receipt of the notice to proceed. The data
required by the safety sign shall be corrected daily, with light colored metallic or non-metallic
numerals. Upon completion of the project, the signs shall be removed from the site.
1.4 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. During construction the Contractor shall provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary to
maintain traffic. The Contractor shall maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the
construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting Officer. Measures for
the protection and diversion of traffic, including the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of
barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and the work, and the erection and
maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, shall be as required by the State and
local authorities having jurisdiction. The traveling public shall be protected from damage to person
and property.
B. The Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from the site shall interfere as
little as possible with public traffic. The Contractor shall investigate the adequacy of existing roads
and the allowable load limit on these roads. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any
damage to roads caused by construction operations.
C. Haul Roads
The Contractor shall be restricted to haul routes indicated on the drawings unless otherwise approved
by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and
distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust control, although optional,
shall be adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Upon completion of the work, haul roads used
and/or damaged by the Contracting Officer shall be cleaned and/or repaired to the condition prior to
the start of construction work.
D. Barricades
The Contractor shall erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous
areas. Such barricades shall be required whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads,
SECTION 1500
Page 2 of 4

SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
parking areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise necessary to ensure
the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Barricades shall be securely placed, clearly visible
with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and
night.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Administrative Field Offices
The Contractor shall provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the construction
area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse facilities will not be available to the
Contractor's personnel.
B. Storage Area
The Contractor shall construct a temporary 6 foot high chain link fence around trailers and materials.
The fence shall include plastic strip inserts, colored brown, so that visibility through the fence is
obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit.
Trailers, materials, or equipment shall not be placed or stored outside the fenced area unless such
trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct storage area by the Contracting
Officer away from the vicinity of the construction site but within the military boundaries. Trailers,
equipment, or materials shall not be open to public view with the exception of those items which are
in support of ongoing work on any given day. Materials shall not be stockpiled outside the fence in
preparation for the next day's work. Mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment,
cranes, trucks, and like equipment, shall be parked within the fenced area at the end of each work day.
C. Supplemental Storage Area
Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will designate another or supplemental area for the
Contractor's use and storage of trailers, equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close
proximity of the construction site but shall be within the military boundaries. Fencing of materials or
equipment will not be required at this site; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for
cleanliness and orderliness of the area used and for the security of any material or equipment stored in
this area. Utilities will not be provided to this area by the Government.
D. Appearance of Trailers
Tailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material storage purposes shall present a clean
and neat exterior appearance and shall be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of
the Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not be allowed on the military
property. Trailers shall be in accordance with Base standards for temporary trailers.
E. Maintenance of Storage Area
Fencing shall be kept in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Should the Contractor elect to
traverse, with construction equipment or other vehicles, grassed or unpaved areas which are not
established roadways, such areas shall be covered with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent
rutting and the tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways; gravel gradation shall be at the
Contractor's discretion. Grass located within the boundaries of the construction site shall be mowed
for the duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings, under trailers, and i areas
not accessible to mowers shall be edged or trimmed neatly.
F. Security Provisions
Adequate outside security lighting shall be provided at the Contractor's temporary facilities. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the security of its own equipment; in addition, the Contractor shall
notify the appropriate law enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary
project field office.
1.6 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date established for commencement of work, the
Contractor shall furnish and erect temporary project safety fencing at the work site. The safety fencing shall be a
high visibility orange colored, high density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 42 inches high,
supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved
location. The safety fencing shall be maintained by the Contractor during the life of the contract and, upon
SECTION 1500
Page 3 of 4

SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
completion and acceptance of the work, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the
work site.
1.7 CLEANUP
Construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like shall be removed from the work site daily. Any
dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways shall be cleaned away. Materials resulting from
demolition activities which are salvageable shall be stored within the fenced area described above or at the
supplemental storage area. Stored material not in trailers, whether new or salvaged, shall be neatly stacked when
stored.
1.8 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project and after removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area,
the fence shall be removed and will become the property of the Contractor. Areas used by the Contractor for the
storage of equipment or material, or other use, shall be restored to the original or better condition. Gravel used to
traverse grassed areas shall be removed and the area restored to its original condition, including top soil and seeding
as necessary.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SECTION 1500
Page 4 of 4

SECTION 01561
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Erection, maintenance, and dismantling of temporary fencing around construction
site and materials storage areas. This section does not apply where security fencing is required.
B. Refer to Contracting Officer for location of Personnel Gates and Vehicular Access Gates.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 requirements
Shop drawing indicating layout of temporary fencing, location and size of gates, existing pavement and
roads, access to fire hydrants and hose connections, and other site specific conditions. Prepare drawing
after site observation and verification of existing conditions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCING
A. Unless otherwise indicated, type of temporary chain link fencing shall be Contractor's option.
Following types are acceptable:
a. New materials or previously used salvaged chain link fencing in good condition.
b. Posts: Galvanized steel pipe of diameter to provide rigidity. Post shall be suitable for setting in
concrete footings, driving into ground, anchoring with base plates, or inserting in precast concrete
blocks.
c. Fabric: Woven 2” galvanized steel wire mesh. Provide in continuous lengths to be wire tied to
fence posts or prefabricated into modular pipe-framed fence panels.
B. Length:
Approximately 1,000 Linear Feet
C. Height: 6’-0”
D. Post Spacing: Max 10’-0” OC
E. Post Caps
Fit all exposed ends of post with caps. Provide caps that fit snugly and are weather tight. Where top
rail is used, provide caps to accommodate the top rail. Install post caps as recommended by the
manufacturer and as shown.
F. Top and Bottom Tension Wire
ASTM A817 and ASTM F626, zinc-coated, having minimum coating the same as the fence fabric.
G. Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size indicated on the Drawings or by
Contracting Officer required for functional access to site.
1. Fabricate of same material as used for fencing.
2. Vehicle gates:
a. One (1) Required: Location by Contracting Officer
b. Minimum width: 20 feet to allow access for emergency vehicles.
c. Capable of manual operation by one person.
d. Lockable by Padlock: Provide Padlock and deliver three (3) sets of keys total for all gates to
Contracting Officer. All Padlocks for Vehicular gates and Personnel gates must be keyed the
same.
3. Personnel / Pedestrian Gates
a. Min two (2) required: Location by Contracting Officer
b. Minimum Width: 48”
c. Capable of manual operation by one person.
SECTION 01561
Page 1 of 2

2.2 PRIVACY FABRIC
SECTION 01561
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCING
d. Lockable by Padlock: Provide Padlock and deliver three (3) sets of keys total for all gates to
Contracting Officer. All Padlocks for Vehicular gates and Personnel gates must be keyed the
same.
A. Provide continuous water resistant knitted polypropylene 95% visibility blockage privacy fabric equal
to PRIVACY SCREEN – 200 SERIES by www.fencescreen.com.
B. Color: Chosen by Contracting Officer from MFGR standard line of colors.
C. Height: Match fence height.
2.3 PLASTIC MESH FENCING
A. Where indicated on Drawings or by Contracting Officer as required to provide visual warning and
control, provide plastic mesh fencing supported by steel posts driven into ground or set in precast
concrete blocks.
B. Height: 36 inches minimum.
Color: Safety orange.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
A. Installation of temporary fencing shall not deter or hinder access to existing and new hose connections and
fire hydrants. Maintain 3 feet diameter clear space around fire hydrants.
B. Where fire hydrant or hose connection is blocked by fencing, provide access gate.
C. Access: Provide gates for personnel, delivery of materials, and access by emergency vehicles.
D. Field verify location with Contracting Officer.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Chain link posts:
a. Space as 10 maximum.
b. For solid ground conditions drive posts min 36”, set in holes and compact backfill, or anchor in
precast concrete blocks with concrete.
c. For soft and unstable ground conditions, cast concrete plug around post.
d. For posts over pavement: Use galvanized steel post plates or precast concrete blocks filled with
concrete.
B. Gate posts: Use bracing or concrete footings to provide rigidity for accommodating size of gate.
C. Fence Mesh Fabric: Securely attach to posts top and bottom and min 12” OC vertical
D. Privacy Fabric: Securely attach to line posts and secure to top and bottom tension wire min 24” OC.
E. Gates: Install with required hardware.
F. Plastic mesh fencing: Space steel support posts to ensure mesh remains vertical and at proper height.
Securely tie mesh to posts.
3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL
A. Maintain fencing in good condition. If damaged, immediately repair.
B. Remove temporary fencing upon completion of Work or when no longer required for security or
control. Backfill holes and compact to finish grade. Holes in pavement shall be surfaced to match
existing paving. Repair damage caused by installation of temporary fencing.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01561
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01732
Selective demolition
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Section Includes:
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that
are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed
to accept hazardous wastes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an PA-approved certification program.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by THE
GOVERNMENT as far as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, THE GOVERNMENT will remove the following items:
a. All Furnishings and Equipment
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will not be removed by THE GOVERNMENT before start of the Work. .
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered above what is listed in the documents, do not
disturb; immediately notify THE GOVERNMENT.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during
selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
SECTION 01732
Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01732
Selective demolition
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function
or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit
a written report to Architect.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect
them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section
01100 "Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect,
and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be
selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary
services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of
services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems,
equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to THE GOVERNMENT.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according
to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to
preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to
remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being
demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction
and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand
SECTION 01732
Page 2 of 3

SECTION 01732
Selective demolition
tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before
starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected
storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations
after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain THE GOVERNMENT's property, remove demolished materials from
Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and
areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01524 "Construction Waste Management."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off THE GOVERNMENT's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01732
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 01770N
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Equipment/Product Warranty List; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Drawings; G
Record Of Materials; G
Utility Record Drawings
Utility As-Built Drawings; G
Equipment/Product Warranty Tag; G
Hazardous Material Reporting; G
Certification of EPA Designated Items;
1.2 UTILITY AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
G
A. In addition to as-built drawings provide for each exterior utility system a set of reproducible utility
drawings, stamped and signed by a registered professional civil engineer or professional land surveyor, and
two copies. Submit within ten working days after each system is in place, but no later than five working
days before final inspection. Indicate exterior utilities from a point five feet from a building to the
termination point or point of connection to existing system. Include the following:
a. Horizontal and vertical controls for new utilities and existing utilities exposed during construction.
Reference to station's horizontal and vertical control system.
b. Sufficient dimensional control for all important features such as beginning and termination points,
points of connection, inverts for sewer lines and drainage collection systems, top of pipe or
conduit runs, manholes, cathodic protection appurtenances, valves, valve stem tops, backflow
preventers, and other significant features.
c. Indicate type and size of all materials used in the construction of the system.
d. Indicate bearing and distance on tangent lines. On curves, indicate delta and radius of the curve,
also provide X, Y, and Z coordinates at all BC and EC angle points. Indicate horizontal and
vertical control for all intersecting and tangent points where utility alignment changes. Indicate X,
Y, and Z coordinates at building line and point of connection for straight building laterals or
services under 40 feet.
e. Tolerances: Horizontal and vertical control dimensions, plus or minus 0.10 foot. Angular control,
plus or minus 0 degrees 01 minute.
1.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL REPORTING
Submit hazardous material reporting information which includes actual quantities of hazardous materials stored and
used during the project.
1.4 CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
Submit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required by FAR 52.223-9, "Certification and Estimate of
Percentage of Recovered Material Content for EPA Designated Items".
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.5.1 As-Built Drawings
SECTION 01770N
Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01770N
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
"FAC 5252.236-9310, Record Drawings." In addition to the requirements of FAC 5252.236-9310, the Contractor
shall survey the horizontal and vertical location of all underground utilities to within 0.1 feet relative to the station
datum. All pipe utilities shall be surveyed at each fitting and every 100 LF of run length. Electrical and
communication duct bank, direct buried conduit, and direct buried conductor shall be surveyed every 100 LF and at
each change of direction. Locations and elevations shall be recorded on the Record Drawings. Submit drawings
with QC certification.
1.5.2 Utility Record Drawings
In addition to record drawings provide for each exterior utility system a set of reproducible utility drawings, stamped
and signed by a registered professional civil engineer or professional land surveyor, and two copies. Submit within
ten working days after each system is in place, but no later than five working days before final inspection. Indicate
exterior utilities from a point five feet from a building to the termination point or point of connection to existing
system. Include the following:
a. Horizontal and vertical controls for new utilities and existing utilities exposed during construction.
Reference to station's horizontal and vertical control system.
b. Sufficient dimensional control for all important features such as beginning and termination points,
points of connection, inverts for sewer lines and drainage collection systems, top of pipe or conduit
runs, manholes, cathodic protection appurtenances, valves, valve stem tops, backflow preventers, and
other significant features.
c. Indicate type and size of all materials used in the construction of the system.
d. Indicate bearing and distance on tangent lines. On curves, indicate delta and radius of the curve, also
provide X, Y, and Z coordinates at all BC and EC angle points. Indicate horizontal and vertical
control for all intersecting and tangent points where utility alignment changes. Indicate X, Y, and Z
coordinates at building line and point of connection for straight building laterals or services under 40
feet.
e. Tolerances: Horizontal and vertical control dimensions, plus or minus 0.10 foot. Angular control,
plus or minus 0 degrees 01 minute.
1.5.3 As-Built Record of Materials
Furnish a record of materials. Where several manufacturers' brands, types, or classes of the item listed have been
used in the project, designate specific areas where each item was used. Designations shall be keyed to the areas and
spaces depicted on the contract drawing. Furnish the record of materials used in the following format:
MATERIALS SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURER MATERIALS USED WHERE DESIGNATION
(MANUFACTURER'S USED DESIGNATION)
1.6 EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT WARRANTIES
1.6.1 Equipment/Product Warranty List
Furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing written warranties for
equipment/products furnished under the contract, and prepare a complete listing of such equipment/products. The
equipment/products list shall state the specification section applicable to the equipment/product, duration of the
warranty therefore, start date of the warranty, ending date of the warranty, and the point of contact for fulfillment of
the warranty. The warranty period shall begin on the same date as project acceptance and shall continue for the full
product warranty period. Execute the full list and deliver to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance of the
facility.
1.6.2 Equipment Warranty Tags and Guarantor's Local Representative
Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of the guarantor's representative nearest to the
location where the equipment and appliances are installed. The guarantor's representative, upon request of the
SECTION 01770N
Page 2 of 3

SECTION 01770N
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
station representative, shall honor the warranty during the warranty period, and shall provide the services prescribed
by the terms of the warranty. At the time of installation, tag each item of warranted equipment with a durable, oiland
water-resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach tag with copper wire and spray with a clear
silicone waterproof coating. Leave the date of acceptance and QC's signature blank until project is accepted for
beneficial occupancy. Tag shall show the following information:
Type of Equipment/Product
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT WARRANTY TAG
Warranty Period From To
Contract No.
Inspector's Signature
Construction Contractor:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Warranty Contact:
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Date Accepted
1.7 CLEANUP
STATION PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE
Leave premises "broom clean." Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary
labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from
roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove
waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
Not used.
-- End of Section –
SECTION 01770N
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 01779
TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for final acceptance.
B. Submittal of Operation and Maintenance manuals.
C. Submittal of Record Drawings.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.3 TESTING ON LOCAL POWER
A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the work complete, he shall notify the Contracting Officer in
writing that the project is ready for testing and acceptance.
B. The Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor of the date on which the testing shall begin.
C. The testing shall consist of a seven (7) day continuous run period in which the well and all related
mechanical and electrical systems will operate in automatic mode off of the local power grid.
D. In the event the system goes off line for any reason to include equipment failure, adjustments or has to
be run in the manual mode the test period shall be stopped. When repairs have been made and the
system is restarted in the automatic mode the test will commence at the first hour and proceed for a
seven (7) day period.
E. It is the Contractors responsibility to continue the testing until such time as the system operates in the
automatic mode for a full seven (7) day period without interruption.
1.4 TESTING ON EMERGENCY POWER
Upon completion of the seven (7) day Local Power test the Contractor shall operate the system on the
emergency power for five (5) cycles. Each cycle shall consist of interrupting the local power, which will activate
the emergency generator. The system then shall be operated on emergency power for a period of two(2) hours.
Upon completion of each two (2) hour run on emergency power the system will be returned to local power and
allowed to run on local power for one hour before starting the next cycle on emergency power. In the event the
system goes off line while on emergency power for any reason to include equipment failure, adjustments or has
to be run in the manual mode the test period shall be stopped. When repairs have been made and the system is
restarted on emergency power the test will commence at the first hour and proceed for five (5) full cycles.
1.5 ACCEPTANCE BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER
The Contracting Officer upon completion of both the local and emergency power test shall notify the Contractor
in writing of the acceptance of the project. In the event the Contractor fails to complete the required testing the
Contracting Officer is under no obligation to accept the work in place and it becomes the full responsibility of
the Contractor to make any and all modifications, repairs or replacement of equipment at his sole expense until
such time as the system can pass the full testing procedures.
1.6 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
Prior to application for final payment, the CONTRACTOR receive in writing a letter of acceptance from the
Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01779
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01780A
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance
with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
As-Built Drawings
Drawings showing final as-built conditions of the project. The manually prepared
drawings shall consist of 1 set of completed final as-built original transparency
drawings, 2 sets of blue-line prints of the transparencies, and the approved marked
working as-built prints.
SD-03 Product Data
As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials
Two copies of the record listing the as-built materials and equipment incorporated
into the construction of the project.
Warranty Management Plan
One set of the warranty management plan containing information relevant to the
warranty of materials and equipment incorporated into the construction project,
including the starting date of warranty of construction. The Contractor shall
furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of each of the
guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.
Warranty Tags
Two record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and design.
Final Cleaning
1.2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. As-Built Drawings
This paragraph covers as-built drawings complete, as a requirement of the
contract. The terms "drawings," "contract drawings," "drawing files," "working
as-built drawings" and "final as-built drawings" refer to contract drawings which
are revised to be used for final as-built drawings.
B. Working As-Built and Final As-Built Drawings
The Contractor shall revise 2 sets of paper drawings by red-line process to show
the as-built conditions during the prosecution of the project. These working asbuilt
marked drawings shall be kept current on a weekly basis and at least one set
shall be available on the jobsite at all times.
C. Changes from the contract plans which are made in the work or additional
information which might be uncovered in the course of construction shall be
accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. Final
Section 01780A
Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01780A
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
as-built drawings shall be prepared after the completion of each definable feature
of work, as appropriate for the project. The working and final as-built drawings
shall show, but shall not be limited to, the following information:
a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines. In order that
the location of these lines and appurtenances may be determined in the event the
surface openings or indicators become covered over or obscured, the as-built
drawings shall show, by offset dimensions to two permanently fixed surface
features, the end of each run including each change in direction. Valves, splice
boxes and similar appurtenances shall be located by dimensioning along the
utility run from a reference point. The average depth below the surface of each
run shall also be recorded.
b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building structure.
c. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork,
structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans.
d. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working
drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor.
e. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or affected as
part of the project construction.
f. Changes or modifications which result from the final inspection.
g. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, only the option
selected for construction shall be shown on the final as-built prints.
h. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government property, or if
Government property is used as a spoil area, the Contractor shall furnish a contour
map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
i. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls, fire
alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
j. Modifications (change order price shall include the Contractor's cost to change
working and final as-built drawings to reflect modifications
D. Drawing Preparation
The as-built drawings shall be modified as may be necessary to correctly show the
features of the project as it has been constructed by bringing the contract set into
agreement with approved working as-built prints, and adding such additional
drawings as may be necessary. These working as-built marked prints shall be
neat, legible and accurate. These drawings are part of the permanent records of
this project and shall be returned to the Contracting Officer after approval by the
Government. Any drawings damaged or lost by the Contractor shall be
satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Government.
E. Manually Prepared Drawings
Only personnel proficient in the preparation of manually prepared drawings shall
be employed to modify the original contract drawing or prepare additional new
drawings. Additions and corrections to the contract drawings shall be neat, clean
and legible, shall be done to the same level of detail, and shall match the adjacent
existing line work, and lettering being annotated in type, density, size and style.
Section 01780A
Page 2 of 5

SECTION 01780A
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Within 30 days for contracts less than $5 million after Government approval of all
of the working as-built drawings for a phase of work, the Contractor shall prepare
the final as-built drawings for that phase of work and submit two sets of blue-line
prints of these drawings for Government review and approval. Drawings will
become the property of the Government upon final approval. Failure to submit
final as-built drawings and marked prints, as required herein, will be cause for
withholding any payment due the Contractor under this contract. Approval and
acceptance of final as-built drawings shall be accomplished before final payment
is made to the Contractor.
F. Payment
No separate payment will be made for as-built drawings required under this
contract, and all costs accrued in connection with such drawings shall be
considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.
G. As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials
The Contractor shall furnish two sets of final record of equipment and materials
10 days after final inspection. The designations shall be keyed to the related area
depicted on the contract drawings.
H. Final Approved Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall furnish final approved project shop drawings 30 days after
transfer of the completed facility.
I. Construction Contract Specifications
The Contractor shall furnish final as-built construction contract specifications,
including modifications thereto, 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.
J. Real Property Equipment
The Contractor shall furnish a list of installed equipment furnished under this
contract. The list shall include all information usually listed on manufacturer's
name plate. The "EQUIPMENT-IN-PLACE LIST" shall include, as applicable,
the following for each piece of equipment installed: description of item, location
(by room number), model number, serial number, capacity, name and address of
manufacturer, name and address of equipment supplier, condition, spare parts list,
manufacturer's catalog, and warranty. A draft list shall be furnished at time of
transfer. The final list shall be furnished 30 days after transfer of the completed
facility.
1.3 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
A. Warranty Management Plan
The Contractor shall develop a warranty management plan. At least 30 days before the
planned pre-warranty conference, the Contractor shall submit the warranty management
plan for Government approval. The warranty management plan shall include all required
actions and documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which it is
entitled. The plan shall be in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to render it
Section 01780A
Page 3 of 5

SECTION 01780A
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel Warranty information made
available during the construction phase shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for
approval prior to each monthly pay estimate. Approved information shall be assembled
in a binder and shall be turned over to the Government upon acceptance of the work. The
construction warranty period shall begin on the date of project acceptance and shall
continue for the full product warranty period. A joint 9 month warranty inspection shall
be conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor, Contracting Officer
and the Customer Representative.
B. Performance Bond
The Contractor's Performance Bond shall remain effective throughout the construction
period.
a. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any
construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have the work
performed by others, and after completion of the work, will charge the remaining
construction warranty funds of expenses incurred by the Government while
performing the work, including, but not limited to administrative expenses.
b. In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the construction warranty
work performed by the Government at the Contractor's expense, the Contracting
Officer will have the right to recoup expenses from the company.
c. Following oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair
work, the Contractor shall respond in a timely manner. Written verification will
follow oral instructions. Failure of the Contractor to respond will be cause for the
Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.
C. Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, the
Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual understanding
with respect to the requirements of this section. In connection with these requirements
and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion inspection, the Contractor
shall furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed and bonded company
which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction warranty work action on behalf of
the Contractor. This point of contact will be located within the local service area of the
warranted construction, shall be continuously available, and shall be responsive to
Government inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not
relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with other portions of
this provision.
D. Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service Requirements
Following oral or written notification by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall
respond to construction warranty service requirements as shown below. The Contractor
shall submit a report on any warranty item that has been repaired during the warranty
period. The report shall include the cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action
taken, and when the repair was completed. If the Contractor does not perform the
construction warranty within the timeframes specified, the Government will perform the
work and back charge the construction warranty payment item established. Perform
Section 01780A
Page 4 of 5

SECTION 01780A
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
onsite inspection to evaluate situation, and determine course of action within 8 hours, all
other work to be initiated within 3 work days and work continuously to completion or
relief.
E. Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, each warranted item shall be tagged with a durable, oil and
water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Each tag shall be attached with a
copper wire and shall be sprayed with a silicone waterproof coating. The date of
acceptance and the QC signature shall remain blank until project is accepted for
beneficial occupancy.
1.4 MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING, AND COMMISSIONING
Prior to final inspection and transfer of the completed facility; all reports, statements, certificates,
and completed checklists for testing, adjusting, balancing, and commissioning of mechanical
systems shall be submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer as specified in applicable
technical specification sections.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Operation manuals and maintenance manuals shall be submitted as specified. Operation manuals
and maintenance manuals provided in a common volume shall be clearly differentiated and shall
be separately indexed.
1.6 FINAL CLEANING
The premises shall be left broom clean. Stains, foreign substances, and temporary labels shall be
removed from surfaces. Carpet and soft surfaces shall be vacuumed. Equipment and fixtures
shall be cleaned to a sanitary condition. Filters of operating equipment shall be replaced. Debris
shall be removed from roofs, drainage systems, gutters, and downspouts. Paved areas shall be
swept and landscaped areas shall be raked clean. The site shall have waste, surplus materials,
and rubbish removed. The project area shall have temporary structures, barricades, project signs,
and construction facilities removed. A list of completed clean-up items shall be submitted on the
day of final inspection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PRT 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
– End of Section –
Section 01780A
Page 5 of 5

SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this contract and a
complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment, product, or system. Organize and present
information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment,
component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance
with this section and Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with hole punches
obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.
C. Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of Operation and
Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package requirements specified in the
individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each
product, component, and system designated for data package submission.
D. Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the
Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M
Data. Changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance
of submitted data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the
notification of this change requirement.
1.2 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
A. Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of
operation:
1. Safety Precautions
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating
conditions.
2. Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to set up and prepare each system for use.
3. Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating
procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
4. Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include Control
Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment.
5. Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of
continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to
systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion,
spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for
emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions, valve
locations and zones or portions of systems controlled.
6. Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication,
adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.
7. Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant
data) that are best suited for the operation of each product, component or system.
Section 01782
Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run.
8. Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to
minimize corrective maintenance and repair.
9. Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for
lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator Service Requirements":
i. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and
applications.
ii. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points,
recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
iii. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
10. Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests
and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize
corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance
work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements
by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency
and procedures for each separate operation.
B. Corrective Maintenance (Repair)
1. Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and
making repairs.
2. Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions.
Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought.
Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and
equipment may be reused or require replacement.
3. Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and
control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a
complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On
diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the
terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.
4. Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or
equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
5. Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal,
replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies,
accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments
required. Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations.
6. Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure
continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is
required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long
lead-time to obtain.
C. Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including
requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation
of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately.
D. Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs
Section 01782
Page 2 of 3

SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the
following:
E. Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component, assembly, subassembly,
and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements,
such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial
number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear
and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the
items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and
separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that will cross-reference the
illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components,
assemblies, and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts
data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies,
subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as
typically shown in a master parts catalog
F. Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and include the servicing and technical precautions
prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force.
G. Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that are needed for use in training
designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems.
H. Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools
needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components.
I. Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor
and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also
provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and
service organization most convenient to the project site. Provide the name, address, and
telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
A. Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.
B. Data Package 3
Safety precautions
Emergency operations
Lubrication data
Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic tech.
Maintenance and repair procedures
Spare parts and supply list
Warranty information
Contractor information
Normal operations
Environmental conditions
Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
Removal and replacement instructions
Parts identification
Test equipment and special tool information
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Section 01782
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 02000
GENERAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)
ARI Guideline K
(1997) Containers for Recovered Fluorocarbon Refrigerants
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A10.6
(1990; R 1998) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1
(2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements
U.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)
DLA 4145.25
(June 2000) Storage and Handling of Liquefied and Gaseous
Compressed Gases and Their Full and Empty Cylinders
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
DOD 4000.25-1-M
MIL-STD-129
(2000) Requisitioning and Issue Procedures
(Rev P) Military Marking for Shipment and Storage
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 61-SUBPART M National Emission Standard for Asbestos
40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
49 CFR 173.301
Shipment of Compressed Gases in Cylinders and Spherical Pressure
Vessels
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the GTM. Remove rubbish and debris from the
base; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the building. The work includes demolition, salvage of
identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from
Government property daily, unless otherwise directed. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in
areas specified by the GTM. In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance
with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-07 Certificates
Demolition plan;
Notifications;
Notification of Demolition and Renovation forms;
SECTION 02000
Page 1 of 6

SECTION 02000
GENERAL DEMOLITION
Proposed salvage, demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started.
1.4 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of
the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in ANSI A10.6.
B. Furnish timely notification of demolition and renovation projects to Federal, State, regional, and local
authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M. Notify the Regional Office of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), State's environmental protection agency and the GTM in
writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M.
1.5 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do
not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or
pollution.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic barricades with
flashing lights. Anchor barricades in a manner to prevent displacement by wind. Notify the GTM prior to
beginning such work.
B. Existing Work
Before beginning any demolition work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to
determine the extent of the work. Record existing work in the presence of the GTM showing the condition
of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be
acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation
walls, the location and extent of cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist
prior to before starting work.
C. Items to Remain in Place
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain
the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the GTM. Coordinate
the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and
supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or
add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed
under this contract. Do not overload structural elements and/or pavements to remain. Provide new
supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work. Repairs,
reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the GTM prior to performing such work.
D. Existing Construction
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new
construction. Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent
settlement or other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust
and dirt in all work areas. Remove dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.
E. Weather Protection
For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and materials and equipment from the
weather at all times.
F. Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition
operations. Prior to start of work, [utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the
SECTION 02000
Page 2 of 6

SECTION 02000
GENERAL DEMOLITION
Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor] [the Government will disconnect and seal
utilities serving each area of alteration or removal upon written request from the Contractor].
G. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is
specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary
services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and
other structural components that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring,
and are determined to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing, shoring, or
lateral support until demolished, unless directed otherwise by the GTM. Ensure that no elements
determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as
may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract.
H. Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the
structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the
demolition site. No area, section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other
structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support
to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.
1.7 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted
1.8 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades
involved. Items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or replaced with new
undamaged items as approved by the GTM.
1.9 REQUIRED DATA
The Demolition plan shall include procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be
salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, a detailed
description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations. Include
statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof deck and its suitability to perform as a safe
working platform or if inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers, state provisions for securing the safety of the
workers throughout the performance of the work. Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance
with EM 385-1-1.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified.
1.11 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Use of explosives will not be permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIAL
Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill
basements, voids, depressions or excavations resulting from demolition of structures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A. Structures
a. None
SECTION 02000
Page 3 of 6

SECTION 02000
GENERAL DEMOLITION
B. Utilities and Related Equipment
General Requirements
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by
the GTM. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except
when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided.
Do not begin demolition work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap utilities for
future use, as indicated.
C. Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities, as indicated and as uncovered by work and terminate in a manner conforming to
the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the GTM. When utility lines
are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the GTM shall be notified prior to further work in
that area. Remove meters and related equipment and deliver to a location on the station in accordance with
instructions of the GTM.
D. Masonry
Sawcut and remove masonry so as to facilitate the installation of new work. Where new masonry adjoins
existing, the new work shall abut or tie into the existing construction as indicated and/ or specified for the
new work. Provide square, straight edges and corners where existing masonry adjoins new work and other
locations.
E. Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to
the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete
provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At
locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the
concrete.
F. Structural Steel
Dismantle structural steel at field connections and in a manner that will prevent bending or damage.
Salvage and recycle structural steel, steel joists, girders, angles, plates, columns and shapes. Flame-cutting
torches are permitted when other methods of dismantling are not practical. Transport steel joists and
girders as whole units and not dismantled. Transport structural steel shapes to a designated storage area,
stacked according to size, type of member and length, and stored off the ground, protected from the
weather.
G. Miscellaneous Metal
Salvage shop-fabricated items such as access doors and frames, steel gratings, metal ladders, wire mesh
partitions, metal railings, metal windows and similar items as whole units. Salvage light-gage and coldformed
metal framing, such as steel studs, steel trusses, and similar items. Scrap metal shall become the
Contractor's property. Recycle scrap metal to the greatest extent possible as part of demolition operations.
Provide separate containers to collect scrap metal and transport to a scrap metal collection or recycle
facility.
H. Carpentry
Salvage and recycle lumber, millwork items, and finished boards except those that are unfit for reuse.
Remove windows, doors and frames and similar items as whole units, complete with trim and accessories.
Do not remove hardware attached to units, except for door closers. Brace the open end of door frames to
prevent damage.
I. Patching
Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these
holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces. Where new work is to be applied to
existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving
SECTION 02000
Page 4 of 6

SECTION 02000
GENERAL DEMOLITION
new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall
match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish. Patching shall be as
specified and indicated, and shall include:
a. Concrete and Masonry: Completely fill holes and depressions, [caused by previous physical
damage or] left as a result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain, with an approved
masonry patching material, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
J. Air Conditioning Equipment
Remove air conditioning equipment without releasing chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants to the atmosphere in
accordance with the Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990. Recover all refrigerants prior to removing air
conditioning equipment and dispose of in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Disposal of Ozone
Depleting Substance (ODS)."
K. Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures
Disconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing services to remain, unless otherwise
noted. Mechanical equipment and fixtures must be disconnected at fittings.
L. Piping
Disconnect piping at unions, flanges and valves, and fittings as required to reduce the pipe into straight
lengths. If the piping that remains can become pressurized due to upstream valve failure, end caps, blind
flanges, or other types of plugs or fittings with a pressure gage and bleed valve shall be attached to the open
end of the pipe to ensure positive leak control. Box prefabricated supports, hangers, plates, valves, and
specialty items according to size and type. Classify piping not reusable as scrap metal.
M. Fixtures, Motors and Machines
Remove motors and machines associated with heating, air conditioning, refrigeration, and other mechanical
system installations. Classify units as scrap and disposed of by the Contractor.
3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS
Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that are sequential to demolition work in
areas occupied by structures to be demolished until all demolition in the area has been completed and debris
removed. Holes, open basements and other hazardous openings shall be filled.
3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A. Title to Materials
All materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting from demolition,
and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the GTM of the
Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the GTM to begin demolition. The
Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract
award. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site.
B. Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Section, 602(a) and (b), of The Clean Air Act. Prevent discharge
of Class I and Class II ODS to the atmosphere. Place recovered ODS in cylinders meeting ARI Guideline
K suitable for the type ODS (filled to no more than 80 percent capacity) and provide appropriate labeling.
Recovered ODS shall be remove from Government property and dispose of in accordance with 40 CFR
82]. Products, equipment and appliances containing ODS in a sealed, self-contained system (e.g.
residential refrigerators and window air conditioners) shall be disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR 82.
C. Special Instructions
No more than one type of ODS is permitted in each container. A warning/hazardous label shall be applied
to the containers in accordance with Department of Transportation regulations. All cylinders including but
SECTION 02000
Page 5 of 6

SECTION 02000
GENERAL DEMOLITION
not limited to fire extinguishers, spheres, or canisters containing an ODS shall have a tag with the following
information:
a. Activity name and unit identification code
b. Activity point of contact and phone number
c. Type of ODS and pounds of ODS contained
d. Date of shipment
e. Naval stock number (for information, call (804) 279-4525).
D. Transportation Guidance
Shipment of all ODS containers shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129, DLA 4145.25 (also referenced
one of the following: Army Regulation 700-68, Naval Supply Instruction 4440.128C, Marine Corps Order
10330.2C, and Air Force Regulation 67-12), 49 CFR 173.301, and DOD 4000.25-1-M.
E. Unsalvageable Material
Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to remain in place, shall
be disposed of off base. Dispose of combustible material off the site.
3.4 CLEANUP
Debris and rubbish shall be removed from basement and similar excavations. Debris shall be removed and
transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding
hauling and disposal.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
A. Sub Title
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other non-salvageable materials resulting from removal operations
with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified off the base. Removed
materials shall not be stored on the project site.
B. Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished structures will not be permitted on Government property.
C. Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from demolished structures, except waste soil, from Government
property for legal disposal.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02000
Page 6 of 6

SECTION 02 11 50 – ASBESTOS REMOVAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification covers the removal of all ACM (asbestos containing material)
indicated on the Drawings including, but not limited to:
1. Floor tile and mastic.
2. Prior to start of any ACM removal, Keesler AFB Asbestos Protocol and a
Asbestos Abatement and Management Inspection Report must be submitted
to the Contracting Officer.
a. See forms attached at the end of this Section.
3. See attached “Asbestos Report” at the end of this Section
B. Work shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services required
(in accordance with the requirements of EPA, OSHA, Mississippi DEQ, and other
regulatory agencies) to properly complete the work in accordance with the contract
documents.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Asbestos Abatement Contractor, his superintendent and abatement workers shall
be required to have current EPA-AHERA training and must be properly accredited
and certified by the Mississippi Department of Environmental Quality.
B. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall employ an Air Monitoring Professional
which must be approved by the Government. Air monitoring shall be in strict
accordance with OSHA and EPA AHERA requirements.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. Authorized visitor - the Government, Contracting Officer, or a representative of any
regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project.
B. Abatement - procedures to control fiber release from asbestos containing
materials.
C. Removal - all herein specified procedures necessary to strip all asbestos
containing materials from the designated areas and to dispose of these materials
at an acceptable site.
D. Air Monitoring - the process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of
air in a stated period of time.
E. HEPA Vacuum Equipment - high efficiency particulate air (absolute) filtered
vacuum equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 1 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

fibers. Filters should be of 99.97% efficiency for retaining fibers of 0.3 microns or
larger.
F. Surfactant - a chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus
reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area.
G. Amended Water - a water to which a surfactant has been added.
H. Airlock - a system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement
between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area, typically consisting of
two curtained doorways at least 6 feet apart.
I. Curtained Doorway - a device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another
while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by
placing two overlapping sheets of plastic sheet over an existing or temporarily
framed doorway, securing each along one vertical side of the doorway, and
securing the vertical side of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the
doorway. Two curtained doorways spaced a minimum of six feet apart form an
airlock.
J. Decontamination Enclosure System - a series of connected rooms, with curtained
doorways between any two adjacent rooms, for the decontamination of workers or
of materials and equipment. A decontamination enclosure system always contains
at least one airlock.
K. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System - a decontamination system for
materials and equipment, typically consisting of a designated area of the work
area, a washroom, a holding area, and an uncontaminated area.
L. Equipment Room - a contaminated area or room which is part of the worker
decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of contaminated
clothing and equipment.
M. Washroom - a room between the work area and the holding area in the equipment
decontamination enclosure system. The washroom comprises an airlock.
N. Holding Area - a chamber between the washroom and an uncontaminated area in
the equipment decontamination enclosure system. The holding area comprises an
airlock.
O. HEPA Filter - a High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA) filter capable of
trapping and retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 microns in
length.
P. Negative Pressure - a local exhaust system capable of maintaining a minimum
pressure differential of minus 0.02 inch of water column relative to adjacent
unsealed areas.
Q. TWA (Time Weighted Average) - three samples are required to establish the 8-
hour time weighted average.
1. Within the asbestos control area: an 8-hour time weighted average airborne
concentration of two fibers, longer than 5 micrometers, per cubic centimeter of
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 2 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

air.
2. Outside the asbestos control area: an 8-hour time weighted average
concentration of 0.5 fibers, longer than 5 micrometers, per cubic centimeter of
air.
R. PEL - Permissible Exposure Limit
1.4 APPLICABLE REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
A. The current issue of each document shall govern. Where conflict among
requirements or with these specifications exists, the more stringent requirements
shall apply.
B. Regulations: Comply with applicable Federal, State, municipal, and local
regulations, which can be obtained at the following addresses:
1. Code of Federal Regulations
Available from Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
(usually first published in Federal Register)
2. National Bureau of Standards
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
3. Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20460
4. National Electrical Code, and
National Fire Protection Association
Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S. Department of Labor)
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
1.5 SUBMITTALS AND NOTICES
A. Prior to commencement of work:
1. Keesler AFB Asbestos Protocol and a Asbestos Abatement and Management
Inspection Report must be submitted to the Contracting Officer.
2. Notify in writing of proposed asbestos work, with copy to Contracting Officer,
the EPA regional office, OSHA Regional Office, local air pollution control
agency, local authority with responsibility for occupational health and safety,
with jurisdiction over the State of Mississippi, not fewer than ten (10) days
before work commences on this project. Written notification, in accordance
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 3 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

with 40 CFR 61, B., 61.22, d.; shall be sent, immediately upon award of
contract to:
Mississippi Department of Environmental Quality
P. O. Box 10385
Jackson, MS 39209-0385
with a copy of this notification to:
Region IV
Asbestos, Pesticide & Toxic Management
USEPA
345 Courtland Street, N.E.
Atlanta, GA 30365
3. Submit proof satisfactory to the Government that all required permits, site
location, and arrangements for transport and disposal of asbestos containing
of contaminated materials, supplies and like have been obtained.
4. Submit to the Contracting Officer a description of the plans for construction of
decontamination enclosure systems and for isolation of the work areas in
compliance with this specification and applicable regulations.
5. Post caution signs in and around the work area as required by Federal, State
regulations.
1.2 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
A. Prior to commencement of work, the workers shall be instructed, and shall be
knowledgeable of all work and safety procedures.
B. Provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory equipment
approved by NIOSH and OSHA and suitable for the asbestos exposure level in the
work area according to OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.1001(f) or applicable
standard. Where respirators with disposable filter are employed, provide sufficient
filters for replacement as required by the worker or applicable regulation.
1. Types of respirators which are to be worn during area preparation and final
clean up, and during removal of floor tile and mastic, shall be as follows:
a. Power Air Purifying (PAPR)
Protection Factor 100
Positive pressure respirator
High Efficiency Filter
Half or full face piece
C. Provide authorized visitors with suitable respirators with new filters or cartridges
whenever they are required to enter the work area, to maximum of 4 per day.
D. Provide workers with sufficient sets of disposable protective full body clothing.
Such clothing shall consist of full body coveralls and headgear. Provide eye
protection and hard hats as required by applicable safety regulations. Nondisposable
type protective clothing shall be left in the Contaminated Equipment
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 4 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

Room until the end of the asbestos abatement work, at which time such items shall
be thoroughly cleaned of all asbestos or asbestos-containing material.
E. Provide authorized visitors with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye
protection and footwear, as described above, whenever they are required to enter
the work area, to a maximum of 4 sets per day.
F. Provide and post, in the Equipment Room and the Clean Room, the
decontamination and work procedures to be followed by workers.
G. Worker Protection Procedures
1. Each worker and authorized visitor shall, upon entering the job site: remove
street clothes in the clean change room and put on a respirator with new
filters, and two (2) sets of clean protective clothing, before entering the work
area.
2. Each worker and authorized visitor shall, each time he leaves the work area:
remove gross contamination from clothing before leaving the work area;
proceed to the first room of the decontamination unit to HEPA vacuum the
outer disposable protective ware and remove that outer layer. Proceed to the
center room, HEPA vacuum the remaining disposable protective ware and
remove that layer. Wet wipe face, respirator and areas of exposed skin.
Remove respirator. Proceed to Clean Room and dress in street clothes.
3. Contaminated work footwear shall be stored in the equipment room when not
in use in the bench area. Upon completion of asbestos abatement, dispose of
footwear as contaminated waste or clean thoroughly inside and out using soap
and water before removing from work area or from equipment and access
area. Store contaminated protective clothing in the equipment room for reuse
or place in receptacles for disposal with other asbestos contaminated
materials.
4. Workers removing waste containers from the equipment decontamination
enclosure shall enter the holding area from outside wearing a respirator and
dressed in clean coveralls. No worker shall use this system as a means to
leave or enter the washroom or the work area.
5. Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke, or chew gum or tobacco at the work site
except in the established clean room.
6. Workers shall be fully protected with respirators and protective clothing
immediately prior to the first disturbance of asbestos-containing or
contaminated materials and until final clean up is completed.
H. Negative Air Pressure
1. Negative air pressure shall be maintained in the asbestos removal areas by an
HEPA filtration system. Negative air pressure will be provided at a rate to
insure that the air in the work area will be exchanged every fifteen (15)
minutes.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 5 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the
name of the manufacturer and the brand name.
1. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp
surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.
2. Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed
from the premises. Material that becomes contaminated with asbestos shall
be disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
B. Plastic sheet, of 4 mil, in sizes to minimize the frequency of joints.
C. Tape shall be capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of plastic sheets and for
attachment of plastic sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials
and capable of adhering under dry and set conditions, including use of amended
water.
D. Surfactant (wetting agent) shall consist of 50% polyoxyethylene ether and 50% of
polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester, or equivalent, and shall be mixed with water to
provide a concentration of one ounce surfactant to 5 gallons of water.
E. Lockdown Encapsulant: for thoroughly cleaned substrate shall be equal to
Guardian Post Removal Encapsulant by Control Resource Systems, Inc.
F. Solvent for Mastic Removal: Sentinel 747 Mastic Remover by Sentinel, Inc., or
equal.
G. Disposal Bags: Provide 6 mil leaktight polyethylene bags labeled with two labels
with text as follows:
1. First Label:
CAUTION
Contains Asbestos Fibers
Avoid Opening or Breaking Container
Breathing Asbestos is Hazardous to Your Health
2. Second Label: (provide in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(f) of OSHA's
Hazard Communication standard)
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
BREATHING AIRBORNE ASBESTOS, TREMOLITE,
ANTHOPHYLLITE, OR ACTINOLITE FIBERS
IS HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 6 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

H. Warning Labels and Signs: As required by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.1001.
I. Other Materials: Provide all other materials, such as timber, sheathing, nails and
hardware, which may be required to construct and dismantle the decontamination
area and the barriers that isolate the work area.
2.2 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide suitable tools for asbestos removal.
B. Air movement equipment - High Efficiency Particulate Air Absolute Filtration
Systems shall be equipped with filtration equipment in compliance with ANSI Z 9.2,
Local Exhaust Ventilation. No air movement system shall discharge asbestos
fibers outside the work area. Contractor shall be responsible for any licensing
requirements for negative air system employed.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Work Areas
1. Shut down electric power. Provide temporary power and lighting and ensure
safe installation of temporary power sources and equipment per applicable
electrical code requirements and provide 24 V safety lighting and ground-fault
interrupter circuits as power source for electrical equipment.
2. Shut down and isolate heating, cooling, ventilating air systems to prevent
contamination and fiber disposal to other areas of the structure. During the
work, vents within the work area shall be sealed with tape and plastic sheeting.
3. Clean the proposed work areas using HEPA filtered vacuum equipment or wet
cleaning methods as appropriate. Methods that raise dust, such as dry
sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters shall
not be used.
4. Seal off all openings, including but not limited to doorways, and any other
penetrations of the work areas, with plastic sheeting sealed with tape.
Doorways and corridors which will not be used for passage during work must
be sealed with barriers as described in these specifications.
5. Protection of Surfaces
a. General: Cover floor and wall surfaces in area of ACM removal. Use a
minimum of two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting on the floor and two
layers of 4 mil polyethylene sheeting on the walls. Install sheeting so that
one layer of sheeting on both floor and walls can be removed, leaving one
layer in place for cleaning prior to removal. Isolate all areas not to have
ACM removed until pre-final clean air is achieved.
6. Build airlocks at entrances to and exits from the work areas.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 7 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

7. Maintain emergency and fire exits from the work areas, or establish alternative
exits satisfactory to the applicable fire officials.
8. After preparation of work areas and decontamination enclosure systems,
remove asbestos-containing materials, including any accessory items, and
dispose of as contaminated waste.
B. Decontamination Enclosure Systems:
1. Build suitable framing and sheathing, or use existing rooms connected with
framed-in tunnels if necessary and line with plastic, sealed with tape at all lap
joints in the plastic for all enclosures and decontamination enclosure system
rooms.
2. In all cases access between contaminated and uncontaminated rooms or
areas shall be through an airlock as described in Section 1.04. In all cases
access between any two rooms within the decontamination enclosure systems
shall be through a curtained doorway.
C. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: Construct a worker decontamination
enclosure system contiguous to the work area consisting of three totally enclosed
chambers as follows:
1. The first room with two curtained doorways, one to the work area and one to
the center room. This room shall contain HEPA vacuum and container for
outer disposable ware.
2. A center room with two curtained doorways, one to the first room and one to
the clean room. This room shall contain shower area and container for under
disposable ware.
3. A clean room with one curtained doorway into the center room and one
entrance or exit to noncontaminated areas of the building. The clean room
shall have sufficient space for storage of workers street clothes and other
noncontaminated items.
D. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System: Provide or construct an equipment
decontamination enclosure system consisting of two totally enclosed changers as
follows:
1. A washroom, constituting an airlock, with a curtained doorway to a designated
area of the work area and a curtained doorway to the holding area.
2. A holding area, constituting an airlock, with a curtained doorway to an
uncontaminated area.
E. Separation of Work Areas from Non-Work Areas
1. Separate parts of the building not required to have asbestos removed (as
shown on drawings) from parts of the building that will undergo asbestos
abatement by means of airtight barriers, constructed as follows:
a. Build suitable wood or metal framing and apply 3/8" minimum thickness
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 8 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

sheathing on work side.
b. Cover sheathing with plastic sheet, sealed with tape as specified on work
area side.
F. Maintenance of Enclosure Systems:
1. Ensure that barriers and plastic linings are effectively sealed and taped.
Repair damaged barriers and remedy defects immediately upon discovery.
2. Visually inspect enclosures at the beginning of each work period.
3. Use smoke methods to test effectiveness of barriers when directed by
Contracting Officer.
G. Negative Pressure System:
1. Provide a fully operational negative air system within the work area
maintaining continuously a pressure differential across work area enclosures
of 0.01 inches of water. Demonstrate to the Contracting Officer the pressure
differential by use of a pressure differential meter or a manometer, before
disturbance of any asbestos containing materials.
2. Continuously monitor and record the pressure differential between the work
area and the building outside of the work area with a monitoring device
incorporating a strip chart recorder.
3. Determining the Ventilation Requirements: Provide fully operational negative
pressure systems supplying a minimum of one air change every 15 minutes.
4. Location of Exhaust Units: Locate exhaust unit(s) so that makeup air enters
work area primarily through decontamination facilities and traverses work area
as much as possible. This may be accomplished by positioning the exhaust
unit(s) at a maximum distance from the worker access opening or other
makeup air sources.
5. Place end of unit or its exhaust duct through an opening in the plastic barrier
or wall covering. The plastic around the unit or duct shall then be sealed with
tape.
6. Vent to outside of building, unless authorized in writing, by attaching lengths of
flexible or rigid duct connected to the air outlet and routed to the nearest
outside opening. Window panes which have to be removed temporarily shall
be reinstalled at the completion of the work.
7. Use of System During Abatement Operations
a. Start exhaust units before beginning work (before any asbestos containing
material is disturbed). After abatement work has begun, run units
continuously to maintain a constant negative pressure until
decontamination of the work area is complete. Do not turn off units at the
end of the work shift or when abatement operations temporarily stop.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 9 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

. Do not shut down negative air system during encapsulating procedures,
unless authorized by the Contracting Officer in writing.
c. Start abatement work at a location farthest from the exhaust units and
proceed toward them. If an electric power failure occurs, immediately stop
all abatement work and do not resume until power is restored and exhaust
units are operating again.
d. At completion of abatement work, allow exhaust units to run as required to
remove airborne fibers that may have been generated during abatement
work and cleanup and to purge the work area with clean make up air. The
units may be required to run for a longer time after decontamination, if dry
or only partially wetted asbestos material was encountered during any
abatement work.
8. Dismantling the System: When a final inspection and the results of final air
tests indicate that the area has been decontaminated, exhaust units may be
removed from the work area. Before removal from the work area, remove and
properly dispose of prefilter, and seal intake to the machine with 6 mil
polyethylene to prevent environmental contamination from the filters.
H. Asbestos abatement work shall not commence until:
1. Arrangements have been made for disposal of waste an acceptable site.
2. Arrangements have been made for containing and disposal of waste water
resulting from wet stripping.
3. Work areas and decontamination enclosure systems and parts of the building
required to remain in use are effectively segregated.
4. Negative air system is in place and properly operating.
5. Tools, equipment and material waste receptors are on hand.
6. Arrangements have been made for building security.
7. All other preparatory steps have been taken and applicable notices posted and
permits obtained.
3.2 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS
A. Removal of Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tile and Mastic (Category I Nonfriable ACM):
1. Cover wall surfaces, up to 6 feet A.F.F., with 4 mil plastic sheeting sealed with
tape.
2. Establish negative pressure system as described in 3.01, G., above.
3. Floor tiles shall not be allowed to become friable. Breakage shall be
minimized. Contractor shall not use a mechanical chipper, and shall not saw,
grind or sand ACM.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 10 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

4. Wet floor tiles with amended water during removal to minimize fiber release
during removal. Use amended water sparingly and apply with a sponge, cloth
or mop to eliminate standing water and to prevent water from traveling to other
areas. If approved in advance by the Contracting Officer, a damp towel may
be placed over tiles during removal as an alternate to a direct application of
amended water.
5. Remove individual floor tiles by wedging a scraper under one edge of the tile
and exerting a twisting, prying force as it is moved under the tile until the tile
releases from the substrate. Avoid breaking floor tiles. If tiles do not release
easily, a mallet or hammer may be used to strike the scraper and force it under
the floor tile; hot air blowers may be used to heat the tile and soften the
adhesive. Place tiles in asbestos disposal bags immediately after removal
from substrate.
6. Scrape up remaining mastic and adhesives and deposit scrapings in disposal
bags as small areas of floor are cleared of tile.
7. Clean floor of all visible mastic residue by wet mopping with approved solvent.
3.3 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE
A. Clean external surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment thoroughly by
wet sponging or HEPA vacuum before moving such items into the equipment
decontamination enclosure system washroom for final cleaning and removal to
uncontaminated areas. Ensure that personnel do not leave work areas through the
equipment decontamination enclosure system.
3.4 FIRST CLEANING – GENERAL
A. First Cleaning: Carry out a first class cleaning of all surfaces of the work area
including items of remaining sheeting, tools, scaffolding and/or staging by use of
damp cleaning and mopping, and/or a High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA)
filtered vacuum. (Note: A HEPA vacuum will fail if used with wet material.) Do not
perform dry dusting or dry sweeping. Use each surface of a cleaning cloth one
time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until
there is no visible debris from removed materials or residue on plastic sheeting or
other surfaces.
B. Remove all filters in air handling system(s) and dispose of as asbestos containing
waste.
C. Wait 24 hours to allow negative air machines to clean air of airborne asbestos
fibers. Use oscillating fans as necessary to assure circulation of air in all parts of
work areas during this period. Maintain negative pressure system in operation for
the entire 24 hour period.
D. Encapsulation of Substrate: Perform encapsulation of substrate where required at
this time. Maintain negative air system in operation during encapsulation work.
Encapsulant shall be spray applied with coverages as recommended by the
manufacturer. Encapsulant shall be tinted a contrasting color to the substrate, to
facilitate verification of coverage.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 11 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

3.5 SECOND CLEANING – GENERAL
A. Second Cleaning: Carry out a second cleaning of all surfaces in the work area in
the same manner as the first cleaning.
B. Immediately following the second cleaning, the Testing Laboratory shall perform
the Final Air Clearance Testing described in Section 4.3, below.
C. After area passes Final Clearance Test, remove wall sheeting and floor sheeting.
3.6 THIRD CLEANING – GENERAL
A. Carry out a third cleaning of all surfaces in the work area in the same manner as
the first cleaning immediately after removal of primary plastic. This cleaning is now
being applied to existing room surfaces.
B. Wait 24 hours to allow negative air machines to clean air of airborne asbestos
fibers. Use oscillating fans as necessary to assure circulation of air in all parts of
work areas during this period. Maintain negative pressure system in operation for
the entire 24 hour period.
3.7 FINAL CLEANING – GENERAL
A. Carry out a final cleaning of all surfaces in the work area in the same manner as
the previous cleaning.
B. Wait 24 hours to allow negative air machines to clean air of airborne asbestos
fibers. Use oscillating fans as necessary to assure circulation of air in all parts of
work areas during this period. Maintain negative pressure system in operation for
the entire 24 hour period.
3.8 VISUAL INSPECTION
A. After 24 hours perform a complete visual inspection of the entire work area
including decontamination unit, all plastic sheeting, seals over ventilation openings,
doorways, windows, and other openings; look for debris from any sources, residue
on surfaces, dust or other matter. If any such debris, residue, dust or other matter
is found repeat final cleaning and continue decontamination procedure from that
point. When the area is visually clean, complete the certification at the end of this
section. Visual inspection is not complete until confirmed in writing, on the
certification, by Project Superintendent.
3.9 DISPOSAL – GENERAL
A. Disposal of asbestos-containing materials and asbestos-contaminated waste shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. As the work progresses, and to prevent
exceeding available storage capacity on site, remove sealed and labeled
containers of asbestos waste and dispose of such containers at an authorized
disposal site in accordance with the requirements of disposal authority. Submit
documentation regarding disposal to Government.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 12 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

3.10 DISPOSAL OF CATEGORY I NONFRIABLE ACM
A. Category I nonfriable ACM may be disposed of as construction debris in a sanitary
landfill with a permit from, or approved by, the Solid Waste Division of the
Mississippi Department of Environmental Quality. Contractor shall be responsible
for locating general landfill to accept material. Submit documentation regarding
disposal to Government.
PART 4 – TESTING
4.1 TESTING LABORATORY
4.2 MONITORING
A. The Contractor shall pay for all testing. Submit the name, address and telephone
number of the testing laboratory selected for the monitoring to the Contracting
Officer for approval. The laboratory may be required to send qualifications and
certifications to the Contracting Officer. Submit the name of the technician, or
industrial hygienist that will be monitoring the testing to the Contracting Officer for
approval. The contractor acknowledges the right of the Government to accept or
reject the testing lab.
B. The Testing Laboratory firm shall designate a technician qualified to make the
samples required and the technician shall certify by this signature that he
performed the sampling required below.
1. The samples will be used by the lab to test for ACM constituent analysis and
homogeneity throughout the building. Samples of multi-layered ACM shall be
taken in a manner that will keep layers intact. These samples are to be
treated as multiple product, therefore, twice the amount is needed, trying to
keep the layers intact.
C. If a wetting application is necessary for abatement, we suggest that no additives be
added to the water. If additives are used, a description or list of the additives
should be applied with each sample.
D. All samples shall be packaged in proper ACM containers furnished by the Air
Monitoring Lab. Containers shall be identified by Building project number,
institution, building name, sample removal location, type of material, sample
number, person and firm taking sample, and date of sampling.
A. Monitoring: Monitoring of airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers shall be in
accordance with the latest editions of OSHA 29 CFR 1910 and EPA 40 CFR 61,
and as specified herein.
B. Monitoring Prior to Asbestos Work: Provide area monitoring and establish the
reference TWA one day prior to the masking and sealing operations for each
demolition site.
C. Monitoring During Asbestos Work: Provide personal and area monitoring and
establish the TWA during the first exposure to airborne concentrations of asbestos.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 13 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

Thereafter, during the removal process, provide the following air monitoring:
MINIMUM NUMBER EACH SAMPLE
AREA TO BE OF SAMPLES FOR MINIMUM VOLUME
SAMPLED EACH WORKDAY LITERS
Work Area 2 600L
Outside Work Area 2 3,000L
Outside Building, at
Exhaust Opening 1 3,000L
Personal air monitoring shall be continuous on one removal workman during each
shift. If monitoring outside the asbestos control area shows airborne
concentrations have reached the specified TWA, stop all work in the effected area
(leaving negative air machines in operation), correct the conditions causing the
increase, and notify the Contracting Officer.
D. Monitoring Results: PCM fiber counting shall be completed and results made
available to the Contractor within 16 hours. Notify the Contractor and the
Contracting Officer immediately of any exposures to asbestos fibers in excess of
the acceptable limits. Submit written reports of all monitoring results to the
Contracting Officer within 3 working days.
E. Local Exhaust System: Pressure differential recordings for each work day shall be
reviewed by the laboratory and submitted to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours
from the end of each work day. The laboratory shall notify the Contractor and the
Contracting Officer immediately of any variance in the pressure differential which
could cause exposure of adjacent unsealed areas to asbestos fiber concentrations
in excess of the TWA.
4.3 WORK AREA CLEARANCE
A. General
1. This section sets forth required post-abatement airborne asbestos
concentrations in the Work Area and describes testing procedures to measure
these levels.
2. The Asbestos Abatement Work Area is Cleared when the Work area is
visually clean and airborne asbestos structure concentrations have been
reduced to the level specified below.
3. Work of this paragraph will not begin until the visual inspection is complete
and has been certified by the Project Designer.
B. Air Monitoring
1. To determine if the elevated airborne asbestos structure concentration
encountered during abatement operations has been reduced to the specified
level, the Contractor will secure samples and analyze them according to the
following procedures.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 14 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

a. Aggressive sampling procedures as described below will be followed.
b. PCM samples will be secured for Final Clearance testing as indicated
below.
c. Aggressive sampling procedures will be repeated.
d. Work Area Clearance: Upon meeting the TEM Clearance requirements.
C. Aggressive Sampling
1. All air samples will be taken using aggressive sampling techniques as follows:
a. Before sampling pumps are started the exhaust from forced air equipment
(leaf blower with an approximately 1 horsepower electric motor) will be
swept against all walls, ceilings, floors, ledges and other surfaces in the
room. This procedure will be continued for 5 minutes per 10,000 cubic
feet of room volume.
b. One 20 inch diameter fan per 10,000 cubic feet of room volume will be
mounted in a central location at approximately 2 meters above floor,
directed toward ceiling and operated at low speed for the entire period of
sample collection.
c. Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation
away from room corners, obstructed locations, and sites near windows,
doors, or vents.
d. After air sampling pumps have been shut off, fans will be shut off.
D. Schedule of Air Samples
1. General: The number and volume of air samples taken and analytical methods
used will be in accordance with the following schedule. Sample volumes given
may vary depending upon the analytical instruments used.
2. Final Air Clearance requirements shall be TWA of .01 fibers/cc.
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 15 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

E. Phase Contrast Microscopy: (for Final Clearance)
1. In each homogeneous work area after completion of all cleaning work, a
minimum of 5 samples will be taken and analyzed as follows:
a. Samples will be collected on 25 mm cassettes with the following filter
media:
PCM: .08 mixed cellulose ester in a cassette with a conductive
extension cowl.
Location Number Analysis Detection Minimum Rate
Sampled of Method Limit Volume LPM
Samples Fibers/cc (Liters)
___________________________________________________________
Each Work
Area 5 PCM 0.005 2,600 1-16
Work Area
Blank 1 PCM 0.005 0 open
for 30
seconds
Laboratory
Blank 1 PCM 0.005 0 Do not
open
2. Analysis: Fibers on each filter will e measured using the NIOSH Method 7400,
Revision No. 1, entitled "Fibers" published in the NIOSH Manual of Analytical
Methods, 3rd Edition, Second Supplement, August 1987.
3. Fibers: Referred to in this section include fibers regardless of composition as
counted by the phase contrast microscopy method used.
4. Split sample: One work area sample will be split and both halves analyzed
separately for duplicate analysis.
5. Release Criteria: Decontamination of the work site is complete when every
work area sample is at or below .01 fibers/cc. If any sample is above .01
fibers/cc then the decontamination is incomplete and recleaning is required.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 02 11 50 - 16 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

Keesler AFB Asbestos Protocol
Required Asbestos Abatement and Management Procedures
These steps are in accordance with Air Force Instruction, EPA, and MDEQ. OSHA
governs all worker safety and must be complied with by contractors and subcontractors.
These requirements are summarized in the Keesler Air Force Base Asbestos Management
and Operations Plan. Please reference Plan.
These steps are required by all personnel or contractors doing work on Keesler Air Force
Base.
A. If the personnel or contractor encounters what they think may be asbestos, they are
required to stop and call the KAFB Asbestos Point of Contact which is the Keesler
Environmental Section. The section can be reached at 228-377-1262 during duty hours
and 228-348-0864 during off hours.
Thomas Minton is the Asbestos POC for the base and can be reached at the number
above or at 228-348-0864 at anytime.
B. Once it is determined by the Asbestos POC that asbestos is present, the following
actions are required (Only the APOC and Bioenvironmental are certified to make that
determination).
NO ABATEMENT WORK IS TO BEGIN WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL
FROM THE APOC.
A Mississippi State certified asbestos abatement contractor must be used to conduct the
abatement. Please note that non-friable asbestos can easily be made friable and become
regulated.
The following documents must be submitted to the Asbestos POC and approved in
writing before abatement can begin:
1. 10 Day MDEQ notification and return acknowledgement letter
2. Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (to be certified by a Mississippi Certified
Management Planner and or Certified Industrial Hygienist )
3. Asbestos Work Plan (scope of work, removal procedures, worker protection, air
monitoring, disposal location, containment procedures)
4. MDEQ Asbestos Abatement Certification for the Company
5. Supervisors qualifications and state certification
6. CURRENT State Certifications (applications will not be accepted) for all
individuals working on site
7. Respirator fit test for all individuals
8. Physicals for all individuals

Once the submittals are approved in writing, the following actions are required.
1. The contractor is required to set up their containment areas, negative air machine, and
critical barriers and obtain approval from our Asbestos POC to begin work.
2. The Asbestos POC routinely checks the abatement work to ensure that the
containment area and critical barriers are secure, that the workers are wearing the
appropriate personal protective equipment that the asbestos containing material is being
bagged appropriately, and that air monitoring is being conducted on the workers and
outside the abatement area. This also includes reviewing the daily log maintained on site
to assure that no uncertified individuals are performing abatement work.
3. Upon completion of the abatement work, the contractor contacts the Asbestos POC
and Bioenvironmental (when required) to conduct a walk through of the area and approve
that all abatement has been completed and that the area has been cleaned of asbestos
fibers. This will require at least a 24-hour period. Please reference cleaning procedures
in the Asbestos Management and Operations Plan.
4. Air sampling results are required to be taken and submitted for approval by the APOC
before the containment area, negative air machine, and critical barriers can be removed.
5. All asbestos waste must be handled and disposed of in accordance with State law.
The APOC must review the waste prior to leaving the base and the manifest will be
signed by a designated Keesler government representative. Contractors will not sign
manifests for ACM.
After the abatement has been complete, and approved by the APOC, the contractor shall
submit the following items in a post-job submittal to be maintained in the Asbestos
Abatement Files.
a. Air sampling results
b. Daily report logs
c. Daily worker sign in/out sheets
d. Waste manifest (Generator Copy)
The APOC and Environmental Section are available at any time to provide asbestos
awareness training and consultation to project managers, contractors and subcontractors
prior to beginning the project.
Janet Lanier
Environmental Manager

Asbestos Abatement and Management Inspection Report
Bldg _________ Start Date____________ Completion Date_________
Required Asbestos Abatement and Mgt
Procedures
Pre - Job
10 Day Notification and return acknowledgment
from MDEQ
Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (to be certified by a
Certified Industrial Hygienist, Management Planner,
or Project Designer)
Asbestos Work Plan (scope of work, removal
procedures, worker protection, air monitoring,
disposal location, containment procedures)
MDEQ Asbestos Abatement Certification for the
Company
Supervisor’s qualifications and MDEQ Certification
CURRENT MDEQ State Certifications (applications
will not be accepted) for all individuals working on
the site
Certificates of Worker Release for all individuals
Physicals and respiratory fit test for all individuals
Required Asbestos Abatement and Mgt
Procedures
During Work
Containment area, negative air machine, and critical
barriers in place and approved by CSC/CEV
Asbestos POC
Received/
Approved
Complete
Comments
LEC/MSD Form #3 – 1/30/07

Containment area and critical barriers secure
Workers wearing personal protective equipment
(PPE)
Asbestos-containing material bagged appropriately
Air monitoring conducted on workers
Air monitoring conducted outside abatement area
Daily log review (assurance of no uncertified
individuals performing abatement work)
Asbestos Abatement and Management
Procedures
Post - Job
Asbestos POC and Bioenvironmental (when
required) walk-though and approval of completed
abatement & area cleaned of asbestos fibers
(cleaning procedures in Asbestos Management and
Operations Plan)
Air sampling results submitted for approval by
asbestos POC prior to removal of containment area
and critical barriers
Asbestos waste handled and disposed of in
accordance with State law – asbestos POC must
review waste prior to leaving
Air Sampling Results
Daily Report Logs
Daily Worker Sign-In/Out Sheets
Waste manifest (must be signed by KAFB personnel)
Complete
LEC/MSD Form #3 – 1/30/07

6500 Sunplex Drive
Ocean Springs, MS 39564
228.875.6420 Phone
228.875.6423 Fax
Kyle Kish
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
February 03, 2012
1041 Tommy Munro Drive
Biloxi, MS 39532
Work Order #: 1201377
RE: Asbestos Inspection
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Dear Kyle Kish
Asbestos Inspection Report
Enclosed are the results of the survey performed by the industrial hygiene department on 01/26/12. If you have
any questions concerning this report please feel free to contact Dave Bingham, Industrial Hygiene Supervisor.
Harry P. Howell
President
Page 1 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Sample No:
1201377-01 Client ID: A-01 Black Flooring Mastic Rm#1
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Black non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 3
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-02 Client ID: A-02 Black Flooring Mastic Rm#1A
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Black non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 3 None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-03 Client ID: A-03 2'x2' Ceiling Tile Rm#1A
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 80 None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-04 Client ID: A-04 Plaster Wall in Janitor Closet
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan non-friable 1 100 3 None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-05 Client ID: A-05 Sheet Rock and Joint Compound on Walls, Mens Room
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Sheet Rock/Joint Compound
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
White friable (A) 90 3 Cellulose 5 None Detected
White friable (B) 10 3 Cellulose 3 None Detected
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 2 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Sample No:
1201377-06 Client ID: A-06 2'x2' Ceiling Tile Mens Restroom
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 80 None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-07 Client ID: A-07 Glue Dots on Wall at Entry to Main Hall
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Brown non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 5 None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-08 Client ID: A-08 Sheetrock W/Wall Paper Main Hall
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Sheet Rock/Joint Compound
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
White friable (A) 80 3 Cellulose 3 None Detected
White friable (B) 20 3 Cellulose 5 None Detected
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
1201377-09 Client ID: A-09 Plaster on Walls in Ladies Room
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Tan non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 2 None Detected
01/30/12
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Sample No:
1201377-10 Client ID: A-10 Tectum Board in Ladies Restroom
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 20 None Detected
01/30/12
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 3 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Sample No:
1201377-11 Client ID: A-11 9''x9'' Vinyl Floor Tile in Ladies Restroom
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Floor Tile/Mastic
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
Green non-friable (A) 95 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 3
Black non-friable (B) 5 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 2
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
Floor Tile/Mastic
1201377-12 Client ID: A-12 12''x12'' Vinyl Floor Tile in Ladies Lobby
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
White non-friable (A) 95 3 None Detected
Black non-friable (B) 5 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 2
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
1201377-13 Client ID: A-13 Large Accoustic Wall Tile Rm 9A
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 10
Glass Fibers 15
None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-14 Client ID: A-14 Small Accoustic Wall Tile Rm 9A
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 10
Glass Fibers 15
None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-15 Client ID: A-15 1'x1' Ceiling Tile Rm 9A
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Yellow friable 1 100 3 Glass Fibers 60 None Detected
01/30/12
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 4 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Sample No:
1201377-16 Client ID: A-16 Black Mastic on Floor in Rm 9
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Black non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 5
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-17 Client ID: A-17 Small Accoustic Wall Tile Rm 9B
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Tan friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 10
Glass Fibers 15
None Detected
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-18 Client ID: A-18 Black Mastic on Floor Rm 9C
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Black non-friable 1 100 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 2
01/30/12
Sample No:
1201377-19 Client ID: A-19 9''x9'' Vinyl Floor Tile Rm 10A
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Floor Tile/Mastic
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
Green non-friable (A) 95 3 None Detected
Black non-friable (B) 5 3 Chrysotile 4
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
Floor Tile/Mastic
1201377-20 Client ID: A-20 9''x9'' Vinyl Floor Tile Rm 4
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
Green non-friable (A) 95 3 Cellulose 3 Chrysotile 4
Black non-friable (B) 5 3 Cellulose 3 Chrysotile 3
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 5 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Sample No:
1201377-21 Client ID: A-21 9''x9'' Vinyl Floor Tile Under 12'' tile Rm 4
Macroscopic
Description
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
Floor Tile/Glue/Floor Tile/Mastic
4 100 - - - 01/30/12
White non-friable (A) 45 3 None Detected
Yellow non-friable (B) 5 3 Cellulose 5 None Detected
Tan non-friable (C) 45 3 Chrysotile 2
Black non-friable (D) 5 3 Chrysotile 3
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
1201377-22 Client ID: A-22 9''x9'' Vinyl Floor Tile Under 12'' tile Rm 4
Floor Tile/Glue/Floor Tile/Mastic
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
4 100 - - - 01/30/12
White non-friable (A) 45 3 None Detected
Yellow non-friable (B) 5 3 Cellulose 5 None Detected
White non-friable (C) 45 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 2
Black non-friable (D) 5 3 Cellulose 5 Chrysotile 3
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
Floor Tile/Mastic
1201377-23 Client ID: A-23 12''x12'' Vinyl Floor Tile Rm 5
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
2 100 - - - 01/30/12
Blue non-friable (A) 95 3 None Detected
Black non-friable (B) 5 3 Cellulose 5 None Detected
Sample No:
Macroscopic
Description
1201377-24 Client ID: A-24 Block Mortar Rm 6
No. of Layers
and Layer
Designator
Percent of
Total Sample
Non-Fibrous
Components*
Other Fibrous Non-
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Asbestos Content
Total or Layer %
Footnotes
Gray non-friable 1 100 3 None Detected
01/30/12
Footnotes
Analytical
Date
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 6 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
A-bnf
A-brn
A-bvf
A-gnf
A-grn
A-tf
A-tnf
A-wf
A-wnf
A-yfr
A-ynf
Black non-friable
Brown non-friable
Blue non-friable
Gray non-friable
Green non-friable
Tan friable
Tan non-friable
White friable
White non-friable
Yellow friable
Yellow non-friable
< Less Than
> Greater Than
Footnotes and Definitions
* Key to Non-Fibrous Components
1 = Rock/Mineral fragments 5 = Diatoms 9 = Vinyl 13 = Spores/Pollen
2 = Mica/Vermiculite 6 = Perlite 10 = Foam/Rubber 14 = Foil
3 = Binders 7 = Adhesive/Mastic 11 = Paint
4 = Opaques 8 = Tar 12 = Other
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 7 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
The scope of services included a limited visual survey of the property. The survery focuses on the detection of visible suspect asbestos
materials. The results of this survey are presented in the following report.
In addition to the visual survery, if asbestos samples were taken per client request, the results of completed laboratory analysis are included
as an attachment to this report. Often materials are located in confined or inaccessible locations with little or no visible manifestation of their
presence. These materials may be found in various areas such as under existing flooring materials, above ceilings, behind walls, materials
within fixtures, electrical wiring casing, or buried pipes and wires. Because of the potential for hidden materials, it may not be possible to
determine whether all suspect building materials have been identified, located, and subsequently tested. Destructive measures to access
these potentially hidden materials were not employed by Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc. as a part of this project. However, Micro-Methods
Laboratory,Inc. does warrant that its investigations and methodology reflect our best efforts upon the prevailing standard of care in the
environmental industry and the clients scope of work. It is not intended that the scope and/or cost of remedial action is to recommended or
defined based on the results and recommendations made by this inspector. The results relative to this inspection are applicable to the single
structure that is inspected. Detached structures should be inspected and reported separately. Based on the the opinion, judgment, and
experience of the inspector, it is their discretion to determine the location and quantity of samples taken, including but not limited to collection
of non-suspect samples. Inspections performed pursuant to this standard rely upon the opinon, judgment, and experience of the inspector,
and are not intended to be technically exhaustive. Based on the opinion, judgment, and experience of the inspector, recommendation of
additional inspections may be appropriate based on factors outside the data interpretation contained in this inspection. In the event a lwa,
statue, or ordinance prohibits a procedure recommended in the standard, the inspector is relieved of the obligation to adhere to the prohibited
part of the inspection.
This inspection was conducted according to the State of Mississippi NESHAP regulations by a state certified asbestos inspector.
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 8 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
Asbestos Survey Report
Summary Comments:
On 1/26/2012 Charles D. Bingham and Clifford Meins, Representatives of Micro-Methods Laboratory Inc. performed a limited asbestos inspection of building 2801 at
Keesler Air Force Base, Biloxi, Mississippi to comply with MS DEQ and NESHAP regulations for renovation. Suspect asbestos materials were sampled from the interior of
the building and analyzed for asbestos content. The following is a summary of the findings.
Findings:
Asbestos in amounts greater than 1% was identified in the flooring materials in rooms 1, 1A, 1B, 4, 4A, 9, 9A, 9B, 9C, 10, 10A, and the ladies restroom.
No other asbestos containing materials were identified at the time of this inspection.
MS Certified Asbestos Inspector
Charles D. Bingham
Cert. # ABI-00001348 Exp. 04/21/2012
MS Certified Asbestos Inspector
Clifford Meins
Cert. # ABI-00001821 Exp. 09/21/2012
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 9 of 10

Client:
Log-In:
Eley Guild Hardy Architects
01/26/12
Laboratory:
Lab Contact:
Micro-Methods Laboratory, Inc.
Tina Tomek For Charles D. Bingham
Date Reported:
2/3/2012
Client Reference:
Asbestos Inspection
PO Number:
KAFB Bldg. 2801 Asbestos
The results in this report apply to the samples analyzed in accordance with the chain of custody document. This anlaytical report must be reproduced in its entiret
Page 10 of 10

SECTION 02 41 00 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them offsite,
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for
reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or
removed and reinstalled.
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of
selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each
activity, interruption of utility services, and locations of temporary partitions and
means of egress.
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a
landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in
demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved
certification program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations
before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
MAHG121038 05 41 00 -1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Government will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective
demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Government's operations will not
be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Government as far as practical.
C. Notify Contracting Officer of discrepancies between existing conditions and
Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. If materials other than those indicated on the Drawings are suspicious of
containing hazardous materials, do not disturb; immediately notify Contracting
Officer.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect
them against damage during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS
A. Provide partitions in order to limit dust and dirt migration and to segregate the
areas where the following Work is being performed:
1. Provide to segregate new interior spaces from interior spaces to remain and
during phasing of the Work.
B. Construct dustproof partitions with minimum 2” x 4” wood studs @ 16” oc with
gypsum wallboard or plywood on each side. Provide hinged doors for access.
Cover existing openings with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting to prevent transmission
of dust into other areas.
1. Protect air-handling equipment by sealing off all intake louvers and other
areas.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
MAHG121038 05 41 00 -2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine
extent of selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature
and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Contracting Officer.
D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off
indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be
selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. Notify Contracting
Officer 1 week in advance of anticipated utility outages.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary
services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug
and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C. Disposal of all fluorescent tubes and all lighting ballasts:
1. The Contractor shall obtain a temporary EPA ID Number. This number can be
obtained from the Mississippi Department of Environmental Quality by fax at
no charge to the Contractor.
2. The Government shall be provided with a waste manifest and Certificate of
Disposal from the recycler.
3. The Contractor is to provide the dump receipts on a weekly basis to the
Contracting Officer.
4. Fluorescent Tubes:
a. Hazardous waste lamps that are listed under the Resource Conservation
and Recovery Act (RCRA), must be removed in compliance with RCRA
hazardous waste requirements. Lamps are regulated as a universal
waste under 40 CFR Part 273.
b. All lamps in lighting fixtures including fluorescent, high intensity discharge
(HID), neon, mercury vapor, high pressure sodium and metal halide
lamps, shall be removed and disposed of.
MAHG121038 05 41 00 -3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

3.3 PREPARATION
c. Tubes shall be removed intact and properly packaged for transport to the
recycler.
5. Lighting Ballasts:
a. All lighting ballast that are unmarked or which do not contain “PCP free”
labeling shall be recycled by an EPA authorized Universal Waste
Processor.
A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary partitions, barricades and other
protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings
and facilities to remain.
B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural
supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or
collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or
uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by
new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work
within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain
or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for
sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of
adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.
At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and
contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations.
Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting
operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as
not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
Paint equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of
containers.
MAHG121038 05 41 00 -4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements
for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against
damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the
Contracting Officer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
3.6 CLEANING
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Government's property, remove
demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPAapproved
landfill.
B. Burning or burying of any material on site is prohibited.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Government's property and legally
dispose of them.
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 05 41 00 -5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

SECTION 04 20 00 – UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
1. Face Brick to match existing adjacent.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU), as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Standard gray mortar
4. Liquid Membrane over CMU (Vapor Retarder)
5. Other items as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Provide full size brick samples to show compatibility with existing brick.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK MATERIALS
A. Face Brick Schedule:
1. Size: Modular for 3/8” mortar joint, 3-5/8” x 2-1/4” x 7-5/8”
2. Match existing adjacent brick to the greatest extent possible.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8"
high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) and door jamb units of 8” long x 8” high (7-5/8" x 7-
5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Thicknesses as indicated.
B. Standards: Hollow units comply with ASTM C90, Grade N. Solid units comply with
ASTM C145, Grade N-1. Concrete brick comply with ASTM C55.
C. Weight: Provide lightweight units using aggregate complying with ASTM C331
producing dry net unit weight of not more than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Curing: Cure units in a moisture-controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at
normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C90, Type I. Limit
moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum
MAHG121038 04 20 00 - 1 UNIT MASONRY

percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as
reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site.
E. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Concrete masonry: ASTM C91-99, Type S cement
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-99a, Type I, except Type III, may be used for
cold weather construction.
3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91-99, Type S:
a. Mortar for Unit Masonry shall comply with ASTM C270-00. Type S with a
12 percent maximum air content shall be used.
4. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207-91, Type S.
5. Aggregates: Shall comply with ASTM C144-02.
a. Where white and light colored mortars are specified or selected, white
mason’s sand shall be used. Sand color shall be approved by the
Contracting Officer for these locations.
6. Water: Clean, free from deleterious materials which would impair strength or
bond.
B. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze
agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
C. Mortar for Concrete Masonry Units: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless
another type is indicated.
1. For all CMU, use Type N.
D. Mortar for Brick: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
1. For all face brick, use Type N.
A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown.
B. Provide wire reinforcing and brick anchors in locations as indicated on Drawings.
1. Brick anchors to be adjustable veneer tie assemblies, anchored to CMU wall
MAHG121038 04 20 00 - 2 UNIT MASONRY

with expansion anchors.
C. Air Infiltration Barrier - Liquid Applied:
1. Liquid applied membrane to be ready-mixed, flexible waterproofing material
system. System shall consist of fabric joint treatment and liquid applied
waterproofing material, and all other related components to create a complete
system.
2. Product: Provide system equal to Sto "StoGuard" with "EmeraldCoat"
membrane.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the actual thickness indicated. In most
cases floor plan dimensions indicate nominal thickness and require deducting 3/8
inch to determine actual thickness.
B. Layout concrete masonry to provide equal cuts at each end of individual wall
panels where practicable. Follow CMU layout indicated on Drawings.
C. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and
coordinated with other work.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,
place a layer of monofilament screen such as Dur-O-Wal's Dur-O-Stop in the
joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
E. Fill space between steel frames and other openings and masonry solidly with
mortar unless otherwise indicated.
F. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and
for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour
height.
2. Low lifting grouting procedures shall be utilized for all masonry filled cell
construction. Limit pour heights to a maximum of 48 inches and utilize a
course grout mix.
MAHG121038 04 20 00 - 3 UNIT MASONRY

3.2 CLEANING OF CMU
A. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and
after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Rub joints with
carborundum or CMU block to eliminate ridges and irregularities and provide well
formed intersections.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 04 20 00 - 4 UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections
and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of work
in this Section include rough carpentry for:
1. Framing lumber and plywood
2. Wood nailers and blocking
3. Other rough carpentry indicated
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.2 REFERENCES
1. Division 6 Section “Solid Polymer (Solid Surfacing) Fabrications”
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20
B. Plywood Performance Standards: Must comply with PS2-92 and APA
Performance Rating Standards.
C. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency
D. Forest Certification: Provide wood components produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) accredited
certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, “Principles and Criteria”. (www.fscus.org)
1.3 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact
with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and provide air circulation within stacks.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to allow proper
attachment of other work.
MAHG121038 06 10 00 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Framing Lumber:
1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimension.
2. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, graded in accordance with
established grading rules for moisture content specified for each use.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide kiln-dried lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
5. Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir of following species and grades:
a. Structural Light Framing: Stress Group 1500 F, #2 Dense KD Grade.
b. Non-structural light framing: Stress Group 1500 F
6. Miscellaneous Lumber:
B. Plywood:
a. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including bucks,
nailers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber
of sizes shown or specified worked into shapes shown.
b. Grade: Standard or No. 2 Southern Pine.
1. All plywood shall be FSC Certified.
2. General:
a. Minimum Construction Standards of Plywood are as follows (thickness as
indicated on Drawings):
(1) 1/2” shall be 4 ply
(2) 5/8” shall be 5 ply
(3) 3/4” shall be 6 ply
b. Warped plywood panels are not acceptable.
c. Provide pressure treated plywood at areas indicated on the drawings.
MAHG121038 06 10 00 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY

2.2 ACCESSORIES
3. General Plywood Sheathing:
a. Size: as indicated on Drawings.
b. Grade: APA Rated Sheathing
c. Span Rating: 32/16
d. Exposure Durability: Exposure 1
4. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment,
provide fire retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-C
Plugged INT with exterior glue, in 3/4" thickness, 6 ply construction.
A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated
and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal
Specifications for nail, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring
devices.
B. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, provide fasteners and
anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A153).
C. Adhesive:
2.3 WOOD TREATMENT
1. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: maximum VOCs: 70 grams/liter
A. Comply with applicable standards for the American Wood Preservers Association
(AWPA). Each piece shall bear the quality mark of an independent agency or
inspection service certified by these organizations to inspect treated materials.
1. Use wood treated with preservative Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary (ACQ).
2. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA) or other arsenic containing preservatives
will not be accepted.
B. Preservative Treated (PT) Wood: All wood in contact with ground and concrete, or
indicated as “Treated” or preservative treated (such as when in contact with
masonry, steel, and other conditions) shall be pressure treated in accordance with
AWPB Standards. Retention levels and use categories are as follows:
1. Above Ground: .25 (UC1-3)
2. Ground Contact: .40 (UC4A)
3. Ground Contact (Structural): .60 (UC4B)
C. Borates (SBX) waterborne preservative may be used above ground and
continuously protected from liquid water applications such as sill plates or other
enclosed structural framing at retentions of 0.25 lbs/cubic foot.
MAHG121038 06 10 00 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY

D. Where possible, all special cuts and holes should be fabricated before treatment.
If cut after treatment, coat surfaces with liberal brushed solution of copper
naphthenate containing a minimum of 2 percent metallic copper in solution in
accordance with AWPA Standard M4.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements:
1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and
units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
2. Framing lumber and other rough carpentry shall be fitted closely, set
accurately to the required lines and levels and shall be secured in place in a
rigid and substantial manner.
3. All framing and support members, not indicated or specified, shall be provided
as necessary for the proper completion of the work.
4. Spiking, nailing and bolting shall be done in an approved manner; spikes,
nails and bolts shall be of the proper size, and care shall be used so as not to
split the members. Members shall be drilled accurately for bolting; and for
nailing where necessary to avoid splitting. Suitable washers shall be provided
under bolt heads, and nuts and bolts shall be drawn up tight.
5. Provide framing to support all edges of covering material.
B. Wood Nailers, and Blocking:
1. Provide wherever shown and where required for attachment of other work.
Form to shapes as shown or required and cut as required for true line and
level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry
during installation of masonry work.
MAHG121038 06 10 00 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY

C. Installation of Plywood:
1. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E
304 "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial" for types of
plywood products and applications indicated.
2. Apply sheathing with long dimension (face grain) perpendicular to framing.
Apply with side edges 1/4 inch apart and end edges 1/8 inch apart. All end
edges of sheathing shall bear on a support. Stagger end joints of roof
sheathing.
3. For wood framing, nail to supports with 6d common nails spaced 6 inches on
center along edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports.
4. Use 11 gauge galvanized roofing nails 1-3/4" inches long with 7/16 inch heads
for wood framing. Fasteners shall be installed at 6" o.c. on panel edges, at
12" o.c. along intermediate supports, and 3/8" minimum from panel edge.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 06 10 00 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 61 16 – SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work in this section includes shower surrounds and other items utilizing solid polymer
(solid surfacing) fabrication as shown on the drawings and as described in this
specification. Do not change source of supply for materials after work has started, if the
appearance of finished work would be affected. Variation in component size and
location of openings to be plus or minus 1/8 inch.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, including adhesives.
B. Shop drawings indicating locations, dimensions, component sizes, fabrication and joint
details, attachment provisions, installation details, and coordination requirements with
adjacent work.
C. Samples: Solid surface for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall not be delivered to project site until areas are ready for installation.
Components and materials shall be delivered to the site undamaged, in containers
clearly marked and labeled with manufacturer's name. Materials shall be stored indoors
and adequate precautions taken to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Protective
coverings shall be provided to prevent physical damage or staining following installation,
for duration of project.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's warranty of ten years against defects in materials, excluding damages
caused by physical or chemical abuse or excessive heat, shall be provided. Warranty
shall provide for material and labor for replacement or repair of defective material for a
period of ten years after component installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wilsonart Solid Surfacing
B. Dupont - Corian
C. Formica Solid Surfacing
MAHG121038 06 61 16-1 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS

2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Solid polymer material shall be a homogeneous filled solid polymer; not
coated, laminated or of a composite construction; meeting IAPMO Z124.3 and IAPMO
Z124.6 requirements. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties
specified. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.01 inch shall be repairable by sanding or
polishing.
B. Cast,100 Percent Acrylic Polymer Solid Surfacing Material:
1. Cast, 100 percent acrylic solid polymer material shall be composed of acrylic
polymer, mineral fillers, and pigments and shall meet the following minimum
performance requirements:
a. Tensile Strength: 5800 psi (min.) per ASTM D 638
b. Hardness: 55-Barcol Impressor (min.)per ASTM D 2583
c. Impact Resistance: NEMA LD 3-303 (Ball drop):
1.) 1/4" sheet 36", 1/2 lb ball, no failure
2.) 1/2" sheet 140", 1/2 lb ball, no failure
3.) 3/4" sheet 200", 1/2 lb ball, no failure
d. Mold & Mildew Growth: No growth per ASTM G 21
e. Flammability: per ASTM E 84
1.) Flame Spread 25 max.
2.) Smoke Developed 30 max
C. Material Patterns and Colors:
1. Patterns and colors for all solid polymer components and fabrications shall be those
indicated on the project drawings. Pattern and color shall occur, and shall be
consistent in appearance, throughout the entire depth (thickness) of the solid
polymer material.
D. Surface Finish:
1. Exposed finished surfaces and edges shall receive a uniform appearance. Exposed
surface finish shall be semigloss; gloss rating of 25-50
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessory products, as specified below, shall be manufactured by the solid polymer
manufacturer or shall be products approved by the solid polymer manufacturer for use
with the solid polymer materials being specified.
MAHG121038 06 61 16-2 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS

B. Seam Adhesive:
1. Seam adhesive shall be a two-part adhesive kit to create permanent, inconspicuous,
non-porous, hard seams and joints by chemical bond between solid polymer
materials and components to create a monolithic appearance of the fabrication.
Adhesive shall be approved by the solid polymer manufacturer. Adhesive shall be
color-matched to the surfaces being bonded where solid-colored, solid polymer
materials are being bonded together. The seam adhesive shall be clear or color
matched where particulate patterned, solid polymer materials are being bonded
together.
C. Panel Adhesive:
1. Panel adhesive shall be neoprene based panel adhesive meeting TCA Hdbk,
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed. This adhesive shall be used to bond solid
polymer components to adjacent and underlying substrates.
D. Silicone Sealant:
1. Sealant shall be a mildew-resistant, FDA and OSHA Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) listed silicone sealant or caulk in a clear formulation. The silicone
sealant shall be approved for use by the solid polymer manufacturer. Sealant shall
be used to seal all expansion joints between solid polymer components and all joints
between solid polymer components and other adjacent surfaces such as walls,
floors, ceiling, and plumbing fixtures.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Components shall be factory or shop fabricated to sizes and shapes indicated, to the
greatest extent practical, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's requirements. Factory cutouts shall be provided for plumbing fixtures
where indicated on the drawings. Contours and radii shall be routed to template, with
edges smooth. Defective and inaccurate work will be rejected.
B. Joints and Seams:
1. Joints and seams shall be formed between solid polymer components using
manufacturer's approved seam adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in
appearance and without voids to create a monolithic appearance.
C. Edge Finishing:
1. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform appearance and finish. Edge
shapes and treatments, including any inserts, shall be as detailed on the drawings.
Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or
inaccurate work.
D. Tub/Shower Wall Panel System:
1. Tub/shower wall enclosures shall provide a system of solid polymer components to
include: panels corner trim panel edge trim. Dimensions of all components shall be
as indicated on the drawings. Panels shall be formed from manufacturer's standard
MAHG121038 06 61 16-3 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS

1/4 inch thick sheet product. Panels shall be full width and height with seams
occurring only at the inside corners of the enclosure.
MAHG121038 06 61 16-4 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: All components and fabricated units shall be installed plumb, level, and rigid.
Field joints between solid polymer components to provide a monolithic appearance shall
be made using solid polymer manufacturer's approved seam adhesives, with joints
inconspicuous in the finished work.
B. Wall Panels & Panel Systems
3.2 CLEANING
1. Installation of wall panels and system components to substrates shall include the use
of a neoprene-based panel adhesive. Seam adhesive shall be used to adhere all
solid polymer components to each other with the exception of expansion joints and
inside corners. All inside corners and expansion joints between solid polymer
components shall be joined with silicone sealant. All joints between solid polymer
components and non-solid polymer surfaces shall be sealed with a clear silicone
sealant.
A. Components shall be cleaned after installation and covered to protect against damage
until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 06 61 16-5 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS

SECTION 07 21 00 – THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Extent of insulation work is shown on Drawings, by generic names or by
abbreviations.
B. Applications of insulation specified in this section include:
1. Sound attenuation batts in interior metal stud walls, above ceilings and in
other locations indicated on the Drawings.
A. Product Data: Product literature, samples and installation instructions for specified
insulation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use insulation of thickness required to provide specified Resistance "R" value.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or
snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and
protection during installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Johns Manville
B. Knauf (EcoBatt)
C. CertainTeed (Sustainable Insulation)
A. Sound Attenuation Batts:
1. Sound Attenuation Batts, Johns Manville Formaldehyde-free Sound Control
Fiber Glass Batts or approved equal.
a. Provide in locations as indicated on Drawings.
2. ASTM Standard C665, Type 1
MAHG121038 07 21 00 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

3. Surface burning Characteristics (ASTM E84)
a. Flame Spread 25 or less
b. Smoke Developed 50 or less
4. Minimum 20% recycled content
5. Size:
B. Accessories:
a. Thickness: as indicated on Drawings.
b. Width: unless otherwise noted provide same as framing spacing
indicated.
1. Low expansion foam: provide “Green Series Pro-Foam II” as manufactured
by OSI (www.osipro.com)
a. VOC Level: 0 g/L
b. Contains no formaldehyde
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which insulation work is to
be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do
not proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation
in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project
conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific
recommendations before proceeding with work.
a. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation.
b. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise
shown or required to make up total thickness.
B. Sound Attenuation Batts:
1. Interior Walls:
a. Position to fit snugly between studs.
MAHG121038 07 21 00 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION

. Install batts at all cracks around doors.
c. Staple unfaced insulation to gypsum board with a least five 9/16 inch long
staples driven through 1-1/2 inch long pieces of gypsum board joint
reinforcement placed on face of insulation to hold insulation in place, or
use proprietary fastening system manufactured for this purpose.
d. In areas where it will be applied in heights over 8 feet, use wire, metal
straps, or other proprietary fastening system to hold the product in place
until the interior finish is applied.
2. Interior Ceilings:
C. Accessories:
a. Lay on top of ceiling panel and suspension system. Fit tightly together to
reduce the amount of heat loss. Do not install on top of or within 3 inches
of recessed light fixtures unless the fixtures are approved for such use.
1. Low expansion foam:
a. Cover surfaces not intended to be foamed.
b. Perimeter seal all openings. Fill to only 30% of area
c. Cured foam can be trimmed with a sharp knife or sanded.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 07 21 00 - 3 THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 – GENERAL
SECTION 07 46 40 – FIBER-REINFORCED CEMENT SIDING
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Extent of fiber-cement siding, panels, trim and accessories is shown on Drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”
2. Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating”
A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing elevations, installation and
anchorage details, trim and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing,
terminations and penetrations of siding and soffit work.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product description, indicating material
types and thicknesses and installation details.
C. Samples: Submit one 2'-0" long by full width sample of each type and color of
siding proposed for use.
D. Certificates: Submit documents certifying that products meet or exceed
requirements herein.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Provide installer with not less than three years of experience with
products similar to those specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Store materials off ground, on a flat surface, under cover. Protect from damage
and deterioration.
A. Warrant siding and accessories against manufacturing defects, for the life of the
installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. James Hardie Building Products Inc.
MAHG121038 07 46 00 - 1 FIBER-REINFORCED CEMENT SIDING

2.2 MATERIALS
B. Georgia Pacific Corporation
C. CertainTeed Corporation
A. Panels: Equal to Hardi-Panel Vertical Siding as manufactured by James Hardie
Building Products Inc.
1. Provide in locations where “soffit” is indicated and other locations where panels
are required.
2. Thickness: 5/16" nominal
3. Panel size: maximum size possible to eliminate splices
4. Style: smooth
5. Finish: Factory primed.
B. Exterior Trim: equal to Hardi-Trim XLD as manufactured by James Hardie Building
Products, Inc.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
1. Thickness: nominal 5/4" (1" actual)
2. Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
3. Finish: Factory primed.
A. Fasteners:
1. Nails: 314 stainless steel only, ring shank nails with a blunt or diamond point
and a box or siding type head. Provide fasteners in shank diameter and length
as recommended by manufacturer for substrate.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer of siding must examine substrate and conditions under which work is to
be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to the installer.
MAHG121038 07 46 00 - 2 FIBER-REINFORCED CEMENT SIDING

3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 CLEANING
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawing details.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty
coverage.
2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report
applicable to location of project.
3. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal
movement; seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.
C. After installation, seal all joints. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed
cut edges.
D. Finish Painting: Within one week after installation, paint siding per Division 9
Section “Painting and Coating”.
A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project
site.
B. Repair or replace any work which has been stained, marred or otherwise damaged
during the work under this Section.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 07 46 00 - 3 FIBER-REINFORCED CEMENT SIDING

SECTION 07 52 16 – MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work generally involves providing a reinforced SBS Modified membrane fully
adhered to recovery board over rigid insulation mechanically fastened to existing
lightweight concrete deck complete with related flashings, cant strips, roof
penetration flashings, and performing such incidental or other work as may be
necessitated by these operations and called for by the Drawings.
1. Provide all materials and accessories for a complete installation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”
2. Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal”
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Description of roofing system as specified (in order of installation):
1. Existing metal form deck / Structural Concrete deck (approximately 3” thick)
2. Lightweight concrete (over metal form deck – some areas)
3. Base sheet over entire existing – mechanically fastened thru to metal form
deck/ into structural concrete deck
4. Rigid and Tapered insulation in thickness as indicated on drawings – adhered
to base sheet (asphalt or adhesive depending on manufactuer)
5. Recovery board – fully adhered (asphalt or adhesive depending on
manufacturer)
6. Modified Base Sheet – fully adhered to recovery board
7. Modified Cap Sheet – fully adhered
8. Base and Cap Flashings – fully adhered
A. Include Complete Shop Drawings of:
1. Construction details, finishes and methods of assembling sections
2. Size, shape and thickness of materials
3. Setting plan for flat and tapered insulation
4. Details of joining with other work
B. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations
according to ASCE 7-05, Method 2 for Components and Cladding, sealed by a
registered professional engineer in the State of Mississippi.
C. Samples: Submit two 12-inch square samples of membrane illustrating the color
and thickness to be used.
MAGH121038
07 52 16-1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

D. Warranty: provide copy of system warranty to be provided as specified herein.
E. Manufacturer’s Data:
1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and
recommendations indicating special precautions required for installing the
membrane.
2. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that roof system furnished is approved by
Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, and meets local or nationally
recognized building codes.
3. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the roof system is adhered properly to
meet or exceed the requirements of FM 1-135.
4. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the roof system furnished is approved or
accepted by Factory Mutual Approval Standard 4470.
5. Written certification from the roofing system manufacturer certifying the
applicator is currently authorized for the installation of the specified roof
system.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator qualifications: Approved by the manufacturer prior to the bidding period
and throughout the installation and able to present a copy of his 5 year
certification upon request by the Architect or Owner.
1. Applicator must have installed at least five roofs of the same materials and
methods specified for this project that have been warranted for the same
number of years as required under this specification by the manufacturer of
the product that will be used in the Work.
2. Copies of such warranties are to be submitted within 5 days after bid opening.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification
C. Factory Mutual Engineering & Research Corporation (FM):
1. Roof assembly classification of Class A Construction, wind uplift requirements
of 1-135 in accordance with FM Construction Bulletin 1-28.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Schedule conference before roofing materials are delivered to project.
B. Notify for Attendance: Owner, Using Agency representative, Architect, General
Contractor, Roofing Contractor’s Superintendent and his job foreman, and roofing
materials Manufacturer’s representative.
C. Records: Keep records of meeting and discussions made at meeting.
MAGH121038
07 52 16-2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

D. Review in Depth: Project Manual, Detail Drawings, Manufacturer’s Specifications
and warranty requirements.
1. In detail, discuss construction procedures, job and surface readiness, material
storage and protection.
2. Note deviations, differences or discrepancies.
3. Resolve and make part of project record.
4. Review warranty requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials and store in their unopened original packaging, bearing the
manufacturer's name, related standards and any other specification or reference
accepted as standard.
1. When stored outdoors, insulation is to be stacked on pallets or dunnage at
least four (4) inches above ground level and covered with "non-sweating"
tarpaulins.
B. Protect and permanently store all materials in a dry, well-vented and weatherproof
location. Only materials to be used the same day shall be removed from this
location. During winter, store materials in a heated location with a 50 degrees F.
minimum temperature, removed only as needed for immediate use. Keep
materials away from open flame or welding sparks.
C. Carefully store on end materials delivered in rolls with selvage edges up, a
minimum of 6-inches above grade. Store metal flashings and counter flashings in
such a way as to prevent wrinkling, twisting, scratching and other damage.
D. Avoid stockpiling of materials on roofs without first obtaining acceptance from the
Architect.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submit certification by the manufacturer of the system materials used that these
Specifications and the Drawing Details are acceptable to them for the deck and
surfacing to which they are to be applied.
1. If details for any manufacturer's systems proposed in the Contract Documents
are not acceptable to the manufacturer, submit corresponding details
proposed for the particular application, together with the manufacturer's
reasons for not accepting the conditions depicted in the Specifications or
Drawings. No alternate details will be considered without evidence of valid
objections on the part of the manufacturer to the Contract requirements.
2. No deviation is to be made from this Specification without prior written
approval by the manufacturer; submit such approval to the Architect.
MAGH121038
07 52 16-3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

B. When the project is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer (a
representative of the manufacturer) will provide the following:
1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
1.10 WARRANTY
1. Report progress and quality of the work as observed in order to ascertain that
the roofing system has been installed according to their published
specifications, standards and details.
2. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to
correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention.
3. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no applications
procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have
been previously reported and corrected.
A. Surfaces on which the roofing membrane system is to be applied shall be clean,
smooth, dry, and free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign materials, oil and
grease.
1. Before beginning work, a representative of the manufacturer shall examine the
roof surfaces in order to ensure that the substrate is acceptable.
2. Do not begin installation until all defective conditions have been corrected.
3. All surface voids greater than 1/4" wide shall be properly filled with an
acceptable fill material.
B. Fire and Smoke Protection:
1. Kettles shall be located so as to prevent damage to buildings or other
property. They shall not be positioned on roof decks. Mops shall be spun at
the end of work periods to separate the strands, and shall be stored in that
conditions to prevent spontaneous combustion. Fire extinguishers shall be
provided near kettles for immediate use.
A. The Contractor is to cover damages to the building resulting from failure to
prevent penetration of water during construction.
B. Applicator’s Warranty: At completion of project and prior to final acceptance, the
roofing contractor shall furnish in writing and notarized, 5 copies of Roofing
Contractor’s warranty for all work of the new roof system against both faulty
material and workmanship and to be free of water leaks for work two (2) years
from date of Owner’s acceptance.
1. Address warranty to Owner and deliver to Architect for review and transmittal.
2. During this two (2) year period, agree to remove, repair and replace all
defects, defective materials and generally to maintain roofing system and
associated sheet metal and accessories in its original weathertight and
watertight condition, all without cost to Owner. Such warranty should reflect
this paragraph verbatim and provisions of warranty as required by Close-out
MAGH121038
07 52 16-4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

Documents.
C. Roofing Manufacturer’s Warranty: Upon completion of the work, furnish to the
Owner the manufacturer’s written and signed standard roofing & metal warranty,
including asphalt, fasteners, wood blocking, rigid/tapered insulation, recovery
board, modified bitumen system, all metal flashings, liquid flashings, duct and pipe
supports, metal copings, and related accessories, certifying the performance of
his products and the consistency of the properties of such products affecting their
performance for the following:
1. 20 year complete roofing system material and workmanship no dollar limit
system warranty
a. During roof warranty period, manufacturer’s representative and roofing
contractor agree that as soon as practical after receipt of notice from
Owner, they will inspect and cause immediate emergency repairs to be
made to defects and leaks threatening interior of building.
b. Manufacturer and Roofing Contractor further agree to effect permanent
repairs to defects or leaks within 30 days of Owner’s notice without cost
to Owner.
c. The manufacturer shall review the requirements of the plans,
specifications and project prior to bidding. Any conditions which may
negatively effect the warranty must be identified in writing prior to bidding.
No exception to warranty is acceptable.
d. Refer to Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal” for metal flashing
information.
D. Emergency Repairs: Owner reserves prerogative of making immediate
emergency repairs, at their own expense, to conditions threatening building
contents without abrogating their rights under this warranty.
E. Type Repairs: Make permanent restoration using proper laminar reconstruction
with hot bitumen and reconstruct to original condition using materials and methods
originally manufacturer specified or as outlined by manufacturer’s written
requirements.
1.11 LABORATORY TESTING
A. Upon request from the Architect the membrane manufacturers shall supply, at
their expense, the results of mechanical and chemical testing performed on the
asphalt materials supplied.
B. The tests shall be performed to certify compliance with the standards referenced
under this section.
C. Other tests may be performed upon request. Refer to “Final Inspection”
paragraph.
1.12 SITE PROTECTION
MAGH121038
07 52 16-5 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. During roofing work, exposed surfaces of finished walls shall be protected with
tarps in order to prevent damage. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
any damage.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Soprema USA
B. Johns Manville
C. Firestone Building Products Co.
D. GAF
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt:
1. Asphalt shall be certified in full compliance with the requirements of Type
Type IV asphalt listed in Table 1, ASTM D-312-71. Each container, or bulk,
shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous temperature (EVT), the finished
blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point.
B. Base Sheet:
1. Sopra-G as manufactured by Soprema or from one of equal manufacturers.
C. .Insulation:
1. Insulation shall be a rigid polyisocyanurate board with facing material
acceptable to the membrane manufacturer for the system specified.
2. Tapered insulation is required at various locations – see roof plan for locations.
3. Insulation adhesive: provide equal to “Olybond Classic” as manufactured by
OMG Roofing Products, Inc.
D. Recovery Board:
1. Recovery board to be 1/2 inch thick (unless otherwise noted). Layer to be hot
asphalt applied or attached with insulation adhesive, depending on
manufacturer.
2. Provide products from one of the following:
a. “Sopraboard”; Soprema
MAGH121038
07 52 16-6 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

. “Dens-Deck”; Georgia Pacific
c. “Securock Roof Board”; USG
E. Modified Base Sheet:
1. “Sopralene 180 Sanded” as manufactured by Soprema or from one of equal
manufacturers:
a. “Dynalastic 180S”; Johns Manville
b. “SBS Smooth”; Firestone
c. “Ruberoid Mop Smooth” (Mop Smooth 1.5 is not acceptable); GAF.
2. Description: Membrane shall have non-woven polyester reinforcement and
thermofusible elastomeric asphalt. Both sides to have a sanded surface.
Elastomeric asphalt shall be a mix of selected bitumen and SBS thermoplastic
polymer.
a. Approximate thickness – 120 mils.
F. Modified Cap Sheet:
1. Solar Reflectance (based upon specified product): .78; Thermal Emittance:
.89; SRI: 96.
2. “Soprastar Sanded” as manufactured by Soprema or from one of equal
manufacturers:
(1) “Dynalastic 250 FR CR”; Johns Manville
(2) “SBS Premium FR (Ultrawhite)”; Firestone
(3) “Energycap MOP FR”; GAF
3. Description: selected SBS modified bitumen applied onto a polyester
reinforcement with a sanded underside and a reflective white top surface.
a. Approximate thickness – 160 mils
G. Modified Base Flashing:
1. “Sopralene 180 PS” as manufactured by Soprema or from one of equal
manufacturers:
a. “Dynalastic 180S”; Johns Manville
b. “SBS Smooth”; Firestone
c. “Ruberoid Mop Smooth” (Mop Smooth 1.5 is not acceptable); GAF
MAGH121038
07 52 16-7 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

2. Description: Flashing membrane shall have non-woven polyester
reinforcement and thermofusible elastomeric asphalt. Under side to have a
sanded surface. Topside to have a thermofusible plastic film.
3. Composition: Reinforcement shall be 3.68 lbs/sq. non-woven polyester.
Elastomeric asphalt shall be a mix of selected bitumen and SBS thermoplastic
polymer.
a. Approximate thickness – 120 mils
H. Modified Cap Flashing:
1. “Sopralast 50 TV ALU” as manufactured by Soprema or from one of equal
manufacturers:
a. “Dynaclad”; Johns Manville
b. “SBS Metal Flash AL”; Firestone
c. “Ultraclad SBS”; GAF
2. Description: Waterproofing sheeting, aluminum foil faced, based on
elastomeric modified bitumen and a glass fabric reinforcements. The
underside shall be protected by a thermofusible film.
3. Composition: Reinforcement shall be 1.04 lbs/sq. fiberglass. Elastomeric
asphalt shall be a mix of selected bitumen and SBS thermoplastic polymer.
a. Approximate thickness – 168 mils.
I. Polyurethane Coating System:
1. “Alsan Flashing System” as manufactured by Soprema – consisting of “Alsan
Primer HES”, “Alsan Flashing”, and “Alsan PolyFleece”.
a. This component of the roofing system may be provided under other
manufacturers besides Soprema. Manufacturer to include system in their
overall roof warranty.
b. Equal manufacturers include:
2. Description:
(1) “PermaFlash”; Johns Manville
(2) “Ultraflash”; Firestone
(3) “Topcoat Matrix MajorSeal”; GAF
a. Alsan Flashing is a polyurethane/bitumen resin, single-component, and
moisture-cured compound. Brown in color, with a drying time of 2 to 12
hours.
MAGH121038
07 52 16-8 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

. PolyFleece is 100% polyester, 2.4 oz./sy., with a nominal thickness of 30
mils.
3. Provide around ALL roof penetrations, as well as where “pitch pans” are
required whether called for on the Drawings or not.
J. Water Cut-Off: “Sopracolle” or “Sopramastic” as manufactured by Soprema.
K. Wood Blocking:
1. All nailers and blocking material to be free of wane, shake, decay or checks,
and pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above ground use.
a. Refer to Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”.
L. Traffic Topping: Shall be Soprema “Soprawalk” – provide all around rooftop
mechanical units and roof scuttle and other locations where indicated on
Drawings. Provide different color granular in these locations (as selected by
Architect).
M. Fasteners:
2.3 PIPE SUPPORTS
1. Mechanical fasteners for securement of insulation to decking shall be approved
by the insulation manufacturer for the system specified.
a. Number of fasteners and layout will be as recommended by the
manufacturer and as per FM Approval Guide for 1 – 135 wind uplift.
2. Length of fastener shall be determined by the thickness of the decking and any
fill. Fasteners shall be of appropriate length to achieve a minimum of 1-inch
penetration.
A. General:
1. Provide equal to Miro Industries Inc., in sizes and application as required. No
wood will be allowed for supporting piping or conduit.
2. Composition and Materials: A one-piece roof deck base, a roller housing
support composed of rigid polycarbonate resin with carbon black added for
UV resistance and protection, and a roller made of polycarbonate resin which
rests on a polycarbonate rod of 9/16" diameter (at some).
3. Strap material to be .125 aluminum 5052 allow temper H32 (ASTM B-209-01).
Wire ties will not be acceptable.
B. Electrical Conduit Support:
1. Provide Miro Industries “Conduit Support” per the following:
MAGH121038
07 52 16-9 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

a. 2.5-Conduit Support-2 (2-1/2” clearance above roof)
b. 2.5-Conduit Support-5 (3-1/4” to 5” clearance above roof)
2. More than one conduit or pipe may be ganged on the pipe support and
attached with typical pipe clamps or clips so long as the total load weight per
support does not exceed 100 pounds.
C. Duct Supports:
1. Provide Miro Industries “Duct and Cable Tray Supports – Model 10-DS” per
the following:
a. Product is to be constructed of a braced strut or telescoping assembly
which is resting on polycarbonate bases. Support shall not penetrate the
roof membrane.
b. Bases are 19" x 23", the support has a bar width which allows at least 16"
between the strut assembly, and can adjust in height.
c. Provide cross bracing at elevations 36” and higher.
D. All other supports:
1. Provide Miro Industries “Pipe Supports” per the followings at single pipe
locations (not specified above):
a. 3 inch and less inside diameter pipe:
(1) 3-R-2 (2-1/8” clearance above roof)
(2) 3-R-4 (4” clearance above roof)
(3) 3-RAH-7 (3-1/2” to 7-1/2” clearance above roof)
b. 3 inch to 4inch inside diameter pipe:
(1) 4-R (2-1/8” clearance above roof)
(2) 4-RAH-7 (3-1/2” to 7-1/2” clearance above roof)
E. Pre-manufactured Roof Curbs:
1. Pre-manufactured, engineered, single piece welded aluminum roof curbs as
manufactured by one of the following:
a. Curb Technologies, LLC
b. AES Industries, Inc.
c. KCC International, Inc.
MAGH121038
07 52 16-10 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

2. Provide at ALL roof curbs in lieu of site built. All curbs shall be
constructed to allow for a minimum of 8 inches above surrounding roof
surface.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Before commencing work, all surfaces shall be smooth, clean, dry and free of any
debris that would adversely affect the installation of the membrane.
B. Roofing contractor shall verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive
work, including deck slope which may require insulation stops and/or back nailing
by the warranty supplier based on specified system.
C. Verify slope and condition of existing metal decking.
1. The roofing contractor shall notify Architect, in writing of any defects in the
substrate, and work shall not proceed until defects have been corrected.
D. Check projections, curbs, and deck for inadequate anchorage, foreign material,
moisture, or unevenness that would prevent quality and execution of new roofing
system.
E. Start of work by the roofing contractor shall imply approval of deck surfaces and
site conditions; and no claim in this respect will be considered valid in case of
failure of the roofing components within the guarantee period.
F. Do not install materials in conditions of inclement weather.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Surface of walls, walks, pavements, adjacent property, etc., shall be protected as
necessary to prevent soiling or other damage resulting from the application of
roofing or transporting of materials. If surfaces are stained or damaged in any
way, they shall be restored by this contractor, at no cost to building owner, in a
manner acceptable to building owner.
A. Maintain all equipment and tools in good working order.
B. Equip kettles and tankers with accurate, fully readable thermometers. Do not heat
asphalt to or above its FP. Avoid heating at or above FBT, should conditions make
this impracticable, and exception is granted by the Architect, heating above the
FBT must not be done for more than four (4) hours. Application temperatures
must not be more or less than 25 degrees F of the EVT.
3.4 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
MAGH121038
07 52 16-11 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Install roofing membrane on clean and dry surfaces, in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
B. Perform roofing work on a continuous basis as surface and weather conditions
allow.
C. Protect adjoining surfaces against any damage that could result from roofing
installation.
D. Install only as much roofing as can be completed in one day. If weather conditions
do not permit such completion, exposed areas shall be temporarily
weatherproofed to prevent any water or snow infiltration from damaging other
materials already installed, in particular, the thermal insulation.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roofing, accessories, and sheet metal attached to roof in
accordance with Roofing Material Manufacturer’s current published Built-Up
Roofing Product Data and Application Guide, their approved details, and their
application recommendations including quantities and procedures for application
of bitumen as to satisfy the warranty specified.
B. Precautions During Installation: During cold weather, only apply roofing when
ambient temperature is at least 40 degrees F. And rising (unless otherwise
specified), on dry deck, over dry insulation with taped joints, and when roofing
materials may be properly applied. If materials are cold lay membrane on top of
other membrane and allow them to relax.
C. Membrane plys and flashing: Install using methods only where approved by
Architect and in strict accordance with manufacturer’s current published directives
and details.
3.6 POLYURETHANE FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install polyurethane flashing system – “Alsan Flashing” on all penetrations
(including “pitch pockets”), any irregular penetrations, structural steel penetrations,
and other areas calling for “Polyurethane Flashing System”.
B. Clean area, and using a paint brush or roller coat penetration with “Alsan
Flashing”, 30 mils per layer.
C. Install “Alsan PolyFleece” scrim two 4”layers, then two additional layer of “Alsan
Flashing”.
D. Allow each layer of the “Alsan Flashing” to dry 2 to 5 Hour before applying each
coat.
E. After the last coat of “Alsan Flashing” is applied wait 20 to 30 min and apply
granules to match cap sheet.
3.7 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
MAGH121038
07 52 16-12 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Install pipestands and other supports on an additional sheet of finish ply as
specified herein. Sheet shall be square and placed in line with the direction of the
pipe.
B. Spacing: Manufacturer’s recommended spacing is not to exceed 8 foot centers
depending upon the load. Minimum of 2 per pipe or duct run.
C. Provide aluminum pipe straps at all supports. “Zip-ties” will not be acceptable.
3.8 WATER CUT-OFF
A. At the end of the day's work, and when precipitation is eminent, a water cut-off
shall be constructed at all open edges. Construct the cut-off with the same
membrane and asphalt. Cut-off must be able to withstand extended periods of wet
weather.
3.9 ROOFING SAMPLES
1. The water cut-off shall be completely removed prior to resuming the installation
of the roofing system.
A. If requested by Architect, Contractor shall cut and analyze roof samples.
B. Two samples will be required for the first 100 squares and one sample for each
additional 100 squares shall be taken at the time of Substantial Completion.
C. Analysis of samples to be provided including determination of bitumen weight,
number of piles and conditions of insulation.
D. Sample size to 4 inches (minimum) by 36 inches must be replaced, with same
material as originally provided in hot bitumen, if determined to be acceptable to
Architect.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (FINAL INSPECTION)
A. Field inspections will be performed as outlined under “Quality Assurance”.
B. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor,
Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner, and other representatives
directly concerned with performance of roofing system.
C. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well
as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items
requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in
attendance.
D. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic
scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials
have been installed. The thermographic scan shall be paid for and provided by the
Contractor.
MAGH121038
07 52 16-13 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

3.11 CLEANING
E. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Contractor shall be
required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense.
F. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as
required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
G. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections.
H. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the
installation from the roofing system manufacturer.
I. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not
respond within twenty four (24) hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the
Work under the terms of the Conditions of the Contract.
A. Clean-up and remove daily from the site all wrappings, empty containers, paper,
loose particles and other debris resulting from these operations.
B. Remove asphalt markings from finished surfaces.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
3.12 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner's representative on
the following procedures:
3.13 PROTECTION
1. Roof troubleshooting procedures.
2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing problems.
3. Roofing maintenance.
4. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and
force.
5. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect
and force.
A. Provide traffic ways, erect barriers, fences, guards, rails, enclosures, chutes and
the like to protect personnel, roofs and structures, vehicles and utilities.
B. Special permission must be obtained from the Manufacturer before any traffic will
be permitted over new roofing.
END OF SECTION
MAGH121038
07 52 16-14 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and by
provisions of this section.
B. The applications for joint sealers as work of this section include the following:
1. Wall control joints in non-fire rated walls.
2. Joints between metal door and window frames and adjacent construction.
3. At locations where dissimilar metals come together.
4. Other locations indicated or required to properly seal buildings.
A. Product Literature
1. Submit product data sheets and the manufacturer's installation instructions. If
two or more different sealants are to be in physical contact with each other,
obtain from each manufacturer confirmation that its product is compatible with
the proposed and adjacent products, including any other products which may
be used by other sub-contractors. Include primer literature with the submittal
document unless the manufacturer's sealant submittal specifically eliminates
the need for a primer.
2. If a stain type primer is required for the sealant selected, such information
shall be specifically included on submittal documents calling attention to the
need for such staining type primer and noting the planned precautions to
prevent exposed stain residue.
3. Include Safety Data Sheets for sealants.
B. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color chart. Submit cured
samples of each chosen color for verification of actual color to be installed.
Multiple cured samples may be required for selection.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened container, clearly identifying each
product specified, relating it to the product literature submitted.
B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation, with proper precautions
concerning shelf life, temperature, humidity, and similar storage factors to ensure
the fitness of the material when installed.
MAHG121038 07 92 00 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions - Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under
unfavorable weather conditions. Install elastomeric sealants when temperature is
in lower third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer for installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General Sealer Performance Requirements
1. Provide colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by
Contracting Officer from manufacturer's standard colors. Select materials for
compatibility with joint surfaces and other indicated exposures, and except as
otherwise indicated, s elect modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade
recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated.
B. Exterior General Use:
1. Single-component polyurethane conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25,
Grade NS
C. Exterior Concealed Joints and Under Thresholds: One-part butyl rubber caulk
conforming to FS TT-S-001657, Type I
D. Exterior Concealed Joints between two assembled rigid surfaces in compression:
Polyisobutylene sealant tape conforming to AAMA 804.1
E. Exterior and Interior Horizontal Joints subject to pedestrian traffic:
1. Two-part polyurethane conforming to ASTM C920, Class 25, Type M; selfleveling,
zero-VOC.
F. Interior Non-wet Areas: One-component acrylic latex water-based sealant
conforming to ASTM C834, VOC content: maximum 42 grams/liter.
G. Interior Wet Areas: One-part, mildew-resistant silicone rubber conforming to ASTM
C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS.
H. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod-stock polyethylene foam, polyethylenejacketed
polyurethane foam, butyl-rubber foam, neoprene foam, or other flexible,
permanent, durable, nonabsorptive material as recommended for compatibility with
sealant by sealant manufacturer.
I. Joint Cleaner, Primer, and Bond Breaker: As recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
J. Fiber Expansion Joint Material: Preformed cellular fiber complying with ASTM
D1751.
K. Acoustical Sealant: Nonskinning, nonhardening, permanently flexible sealant
specifically designed for sealing gypsum wallboard.
MAHG121038 07 92 00 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION FIELD-ADHESION TESTING
A. Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test
joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in
Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect substrate surface to assure that no bond breaker materials contaminate
the surface to which the sealant is to adhere and to ensure that unsound
substrates are repaired. Installation of sealant shall be evidence of acceptance of
the substrate.
B. Verify joint dimensions prior to installation of the sealant to ensure that all
dimensions are within tolerance established in the manufacturer's literature.
Unacceptable variations shall be called to the Contracting Officer’s attention for
resolution prior to installing any material.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking
compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which
could interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and
masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where not indicated if
recommended by sealant manufacturer, prior to installation of any backer rod or
bond breaker tape. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining
surfaces.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's
technical representative directs otherwise.
B. Set joint filler units full depth of joint or position in joint to coordinate with other
work, including installation of backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or
gaps between ends of joint filler units.
C. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to
be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application
indicated in which case a bond breaker tape shall be used to prevent 3 sided
adhesion. Apply backer rod using blunt or rounded tools which will ensure a
uniform depth without puncturing the material. Use a rod oversized a minimum of
33% for closed cell and 50% for open cell, unless otherwise required by the
manufacturer.
MAHG121038 07 92 00 - 3 JOINT SEALANTS

D. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are
deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with
complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as
otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below
adjoining surfaces, with a smooth, even finish.
E. Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant
manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin)
section of bead.
1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to
traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than
1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep.
2. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants, fill joints to a depth in range of
75% to 125% of joint width.
F. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining
surfaces or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces
by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage.
G. Curing: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal
cohesive strength and surface durability.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 07 92 00 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of metal doors and frames is shown and scheduled on drawings and
includes the following:
1. Hollow metal doors and frames, shop finished
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”
2. Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors”
3. Division 8 Section “Glazing”
4. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”
5. Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating”
A. Shop Drawings - Submit for fabrication and installation of hollow metal frames.
Include details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish
hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide hollow metal frames complying with ANSI A250.8/SDI100-1998
Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and as herein
specified.
B. Manufacturer - Provide each type of door frame unit by a single firm specializing in
production of that type of work.
C. Submit Certificate of Compliance certifying that doors have Miami-Dade County
Product Approval for small and large missile impact (exterior doors only).
MAHG121038 08 11 13 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work carton or crated to provide protection during transit and
job storage.
B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be
repaired, provided finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable
to Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood sills at
least 4" high, or otherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust and
damage. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create
humidity chamber.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Curries Company
B. Ceco Door Products
C. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company
D. Metal Products Incorporated
E. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and
oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568.
F. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM
A366 and ASTM A568.
G. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality
complying with ASTM A653, with A90 coating.
H. Inserts, Anchors Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hotdip
galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153 Class
C or D as applicable.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Steel Doors:
1. Provide flush metal doors indicated on drawings or schedules, complying with
requirements for SDI Level II, Model 2 (16 gauge, heavy duty, seamless).
2. All exterior doors shall be galvanized. All other metal items in exterior
doors shall also be galvanized.
MAHG121038 08 11 13 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

3. Close top and bottom edges as integral part of door construction or by
addition of inverted steel channels.
4. Exterior doors shall be insulated with fiberglass insulation (minimum density
0.8 lbs per cubic foot).
B. Standard Steel Frames:
2.4 FABRICATION
1. Provide 16 gauge metal frames (unless otherwise noted on Drawings or as
specified herein) for doors, and other openings, of types and styles as shown
on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate frames with mitered and full welded corners, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Provide 14 gauge metal frames at all frames supporting hollow metal doors.
b. All exterior frames and other frames supporting galvanized doors shall be
galvanized.
2. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3
silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and 2 silencers on heads of
pair of door frames.
3. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes,
welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other
material might obstruct hardware operation.
4. Provide floor anchors at each jamb and mullion in addition to required wall
anchors.
A. General
1. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free
from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in
manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.
2. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush
units, from only cold-rolled steel.
3. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels,
louvers, and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel (at fabricator's
option). All items in exterior doors to be galvanized.
4. Fabricate doors indicated to be galvanized from galvanized sheet steel. Close
top and bottom edges as integral part of door construction or by addition of
inverted galvanized steel channels.
5. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat
MAHG121038 08 11 13 - 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

2.5 FINISHES
Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts.
B. Finish Hardware Preparation
1. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware
in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and
tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site.
3. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in
accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published
by Door and Hardware Institute.
A. Shop Paint:
1. Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units.
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign
materials before application of paint.
3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly
finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
4. Prior to application of ANY hardware, finish coat shall be SHOP applied
(frames may be field applied), primed with 2 coats of finish paint in accordance
with Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating”. Hardware and doors are not to
be installed until ALL painting has been completed.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and
frames are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final
shop drawings and manufacturer’s data, and as herein specified
MAHG121038 08 11 13 - 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

3.3 ADJUSTING
B. Placing Frames
1. Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for
Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
2. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed remove temporary
braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
3. Locate 3 wall anchors, of type suitable for construction involved, per jamb at
hinge and strike levels and floor anchor at each jamb and mullion.
C. Door Installation
1. Fit metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100-
98.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operation of finish hardware items, leaving
steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating
condition.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 08 11 13 - 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 14 16 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on Drawings and in
schedule.
B. Types of doors required include the following:
1. Pre-finished solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces.
C. Contractor to furnish one quart of each factory finish selected as part of door
package. This finish is for field application / repair of damaged or field modified
doors and shall be delivered to the site with the doors.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”
2. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”
3. Division 8 Section “Glazing”
A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and
installation instructions for each type of wood door. Include details of core and
edge construction, trim for openings and louvers (if any) and similar components.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each
kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent
of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicated blocking locations for hardware locations.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Requirements for veneer matching.
5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements
C. Product Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard extended warranty for review.
11-008 08 14 16-1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Comply with requirements of the following standards unless otherwise
indicated.
1. WDMA I.S.1-A-11, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
B. Allowable Tolerances for Fabrication:
1. Size, overall dimensions - 1/16"
2. Maximum warp and diagonal squareness - 1/8"
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling
and deterioration. Comply with the "On-site Care" recommendations of NWMA
pamphlet "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Deliver doors to site ONLY after building has reached average prevailing humidity
of this area. Refer to Project Conditions as specified herein.
C. Store doors in area where no excessive variations of heat, dryness or humidity are
to be encountered.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are
enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and
relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction
period.
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch
section.
11-008 08 14 16-2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in
a 3-inch span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due
to repair or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
B. Marshfield Door Systems
C. Algoma Hardwoods
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood
products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A-11 Performance Grade: Extra heavy duty.
1. All doors must meet specified WDMA Performance Duty Level, including face
screw holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with
screws; through bolts are not acceptable.
C. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 only, made with binder containing
no urea-formaldehyde resin.
2. Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard
cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices and other screw applied
hardware.
2.3 INTERIOR SOLID CORE DOORS
A. Grade: Custom, with Grade A faces.
B. Species: Select White Birch
C. Cut: plain sliced
D. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
E. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: running match.
11-008 08 14 16-3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

F. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
G. Core: Particleboard core
H. Exposed Vertical Edges: Hardwood, of same or compatible species as face,
minimum thickness of 1/2 inch.
I. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing:
1. Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood
doors. Fill glazing bead nail holes in factory finished doors.
B. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard
flush wood beads unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
2. Profile: to be selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer’s full line.
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware
to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame
Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
2.6 FINISHES
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile selected.
2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section “Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is
not surface applied, before finishing.
11-008 08 14 16-4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers
may be omitted at edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard UV cured polyurethane, equal to WDMA TR-
6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range.
a. Final color, build, and sheen to be approved by Contracting Officer based
on actual review samples.
4. Factory pre-finished doors to be individually protected with transparent polywrap
at the factory.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging
doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,
location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads
and plumb jambs. Any deficiencies must be corrected prior to door
installation.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
Building shall be fully enclosed and permanent climate control system operating.
B. Hardware: Coordinate installation with Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”.
C. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
D. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels
as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by
manufacturer. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of
cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
11-008 08 14 16-5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,
provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and
hinge edges.
3. Trim bottom rail only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not trim factory finished doors for width.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Operation: Correct any deficiency that prohibits the door from swinging or
operating freely. Do not remove hinge screws after initial insertion. Shims used
for alignment purposes must be inserted between hinge and frame. Do not insert
shims between hinge and door.
B. To prevent stile failure, insure that door closers are properly adjusted and do not
limit the door opening swing. Limit door opening swing only with a properly
located stop.
C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
A. Do not “prop” doors open with any devices during construction at the base of the
door. If this occurs, doors will be rejected and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
B. Protection of Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required
for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until
acceptance of work.
C. One month prior to expiration of warranty per General Conditions, Contractor to
perform walk-thru of all wood door openings and adjust hardware as necessary for
proper operation of doors to fully satisfy door manufacturer’s warranty.
END OF SECTION
11-008 08 14 16-6 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 31 00 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Metal Access Panels as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
Access panels include the following:
1. 16 inch x 16 inch exterior wall access panel
2. 12 inch x 12 inch interior wall access panel
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Door and panel units: Show types, elevations, thickness of metals, full size
profiles of door members.
2. Hardware: Show materials, finishes, locations of fasteners, types of fasteners,
locations and types of operating hardware, and details of installation.
3. General: Show connections of units and hardware to other Work. Include
schedules showing location of each type and size of door and panel units.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of access door and
panel assembly, including setting drawings, templates, finish requirements, and
details of anchorage devices.
1. Include complete schedule, types, locations, construction details, finishes,
latching or locking provisions, and other pertinent data.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and
rough-in dimensions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Size Variations
1. Obtain Contracting Officer’s acceptance of manufacturer’s standard size units
which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
B. Coordination
1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for
installation of access doors.
2. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
MAHG121038 08 31 00 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 1 year warranty. Access panels to be free from
manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship during this time.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Nystrom Building Products
B. JL. Industries, Inc
C. Equal as approved.
A. Wall Access Door:
2.3 FABRICATION
1. Provide “XTC Series” exterior access doors as manufactured by Nystrom
Building Products. Sizes as indicated on Drawings.
a. Door: Fabricate from 20 gauge galvanized steel, insulated sandwich type
construction.
b. Hinge: concealed continuous stainless steel piano type.
c. Frame and Flange: Fabricate from .080 6063-T5 extruded aluminum
d. Latch:
(1) Inside unit: ¼ turn latch (provide 1 key)
(2) Exterior unit: 3-point latch with padlockable exterior handle
e. Insulation: 2.25lb density foam insulation.
f. Gasket: Extruded santoprene.
A. Manufacture each access panel assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. Welded construction: Furnish with a sufficient quantity of 1/4” mounting holes to
secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
C. Furnish number of latches required to hold door in flush smooth pane when
closed.
MAHG121038 08 31 00 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine opening to receive the work. Verify that openings are correctly
dimensioned to receive doors. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing floor doors and hatches.
C. Install frames plumb and level in opening, in proper alignment with floor surface for
flush installation. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed Work requiring access.
E. Remove PVC protectant off of hatch covers and frames after installation.
A. Adjust latching mechanism to operate smoothly.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames which are bowed, warped or damaged.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 08 31 00 - 3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

SECTION 08 34 59 – VAULT DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide a vault door unit where indicated on Drawings.
B. The vault door unit shall be a steel security-vault type door with frame, and ramp
type threshold, which is a standard product of a manufacturer specializing in this
type of fabrication.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic
designation only.
1. U.S. General Services Administration (GSA):
a. FS AA-D-600 (Rev C, Am 1) Door, Vault, Security
A. Product data and certificates of vault door and frame
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing head, jamb, and sill sections, and
elevations of the doors and gate.
C. Installation instructions: Submit printed instructions and drawings provided by the
manufacturer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver door and frame assemblies to the jobsite in a protective covering with the
brand and name clearly marked thereon. Inspect materials delivered to the jobsite
for damage, and unload them with a minimum of handling.
B. Store in a dry location with adequate ventilation, free from dust, water, and other
contaminants, and allowing easy access for inspection and handling. Store door
assemblies off the floor on nonabsorptive strips or wood platforms. Prevent
damage to doors and frames during handling.
C. Replace damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new condition.
MAHG121038 08 34 59 - 1 VAULT DOORS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 VAULT DOOR AND FRAME
A. Design and construction of the door and frame assembly shall conform to FS AA-
D-600. Provide a door which is Class 5, Type IIL - left opening swing without
optical device, Style K - key change combination lock, Design S - single lock .
Submit manufacturer's catalog data including catalog cuts and brochures showing
that the proposed vault door unit conforms with the requirements in FS AA-D-600,
and has been tested and approved by the General Services Administration (GSA).
B. Submit certification stating that vault-door units that do not bear the GSA label are
constructed to Class 5 standards.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Install the vault door assembly in strict compliance with the printed instructions and
drawings provided by the manufacturer. After installation, adjust the door, the
locking mechanism, and the inner escape device for proper operation.
A. Adjust vault door hardware and operating mechanism to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 08 34 59 - 2 VAULT DOORS

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are
required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware
specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are
installed.
B. NOTE: Provide the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC) to assist
the Contracting Officer in preparation of the door hardware schedule and product
selection. The hardware consultant shall sign and seal the door hardware construction
submittal. Provide, as far as possible, door hardware of one manufacturer’s make. All
hardware shall be clearly and permanently marked by the manufacturer where it will be
visible after installation.
C. This Section includes the following:
1. Hinges
2. Lock cylinders and keys
3. Lock and latch sets
4. Bolts
5. Exit devices
6. Closers
7. Overhead stops and holders
8. Miscellaneous door control devices
9. Door trim units
10. Protection plates
11. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors
12. Thresholds
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”
2. Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors”
E. Products furnished but not installed under this Section to include:
1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by GOVERNMENT.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Standards of the following as referenced:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
3. Factory Mutual (FM)
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. UL 10C - Fire Tests Door Assemblies
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -1 DOOR HARDWARE

6. Warnock Hersey
B. Regulatory standards of the following as referenced:
1. Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, Americans with Disabilities
Act, Public Law 101-336 (ADA).
2. CABO/ANSI A117.1: Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically
Handicapped People, 1992 edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door
hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and
other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. Provide catalog
information for the specified items and for those submitted.
B. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware recommended by AHC,
organize schedule into vertical format “hardware sets" indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door or opening. Use specification
Heading numbers with any variations suffixed a, b, etc. Include the following
information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings
both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
i. Cross-reference numbers used within schedule deviating from those
specified.
1) Column 1: State specified item and manufacturer.
2) Column 2: State prior approved substituted item and its manufacturer.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly
where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work
that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the
product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware,
and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the
Government's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
C. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full
description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final
hardware schedule.
1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after
final check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying
coordination requirements.
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -2 DOOR HARDWARE

D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
E. Contract closeout submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance data: Complete information for installed door
hardware.
2. Warranty: Completed and executed warranty forms.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, obtain each type of
hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with
warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service
performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that
indicated for this Project.
C. Coordination Meetings:
1. Supplier shall set up and attend the following:
a. Supplier to meet with the Contracting Officer to finalize lock functions and
keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
b. Supplier to meet with the installer prior to beginning of installation of door
hardware.
2. General Contractor shall set up and attend the following:
a. Supplier to meet with the Contracting Officer, General Contractor, electrical
and security contractors to coordinate all electrical hardware items.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware
schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by
hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers
clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of
approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same
container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and
hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation
(shop or Project site).
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -3 DOOR HARDWARE

E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately
replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses
both before and after installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special warranties:
1. Door Closers: Ten year period
2. Exit Devices: Three year period
3. Locks and Cylinders: Three year period
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
(*Denotes manufacturer referenced in the Hardware Headings)
A. Hinges:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Ives
b. Bommer
c. PBB
2. Characteristics:
a. Templates: Provide only template-produced units.
b. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following
requirements:
1) For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and
tapped holes.
2) For wood doors and frames install threaded-to-the-head wood screws.
3) Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
c. Hinge pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1) Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.
2) Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins.
3) Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
4) Tips: Flat button and matching plug. Finished to match leafs.
d. Size: Except as otherwise indicated, size hinges as follows:
1) Doors up to 3'-0" in width: Standard weight, ball bearing, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
2) Doors over 3'-0" in width and labeled doors over 8'-0" in height: Heavy
weight, ball bearing, 5 x 4-1/2
3) Exterior doors: Heavy weight, ball bearing, 5 x 4-1/2
e. Quantity: Furnish one pair of hinges for all doors up to 5’-0" high. Furnish
one hinge for each additional 2-1/2 feet or fraction thereof.
B. Cylinders:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Match existing Keesler Air Force Base Standard.
2. Characteristics:
a. Review the keying system with the Contracting Officer and provide the type
required (master, grandmaster or great-grandmaster).
b. Equip locksets with core cylinders to match existing Base Standard.
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -4 DOOR HARDWARE

c. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or
nickel silver.
d. Comply with Contracting Officer's instructions for master keying and, except
as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not
designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
1) Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies
cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, “DO NOT
DUPLICATE."
e. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
f. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each
master system, 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system, 10
construction master keys, 3 construction control keys and 3 permanent
control keys.
1) Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2) Furnish construction keys to General Contractor.
3) Install permanent cores and deliver keys to Contracting Officer.
a) Government to install permanent cores
C. Locksets, Latchsets, Deadbolts:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Schlage
b. Sargent
c. Best
2. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.
a. Chassis: Cold-rolled steel.
b. Latchbolts: 3/4-inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
c. Lever Trim: Through-bolted, accessible design, cast or solid rod lever as
scheduled. Spindles: Independent break-away.
d. Thumbturns: Accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to
operate.
e. Deadbolts: Stainless steel 1-inch throw.
f. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.
g. Strikes: 16 gage curved stainless steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box
construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
h. Basis of Design: Schlage L series, design 017.
i. Acceptable Substitution: Sargent 8200 series; Best 45H series.
j. Certifications:
1) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.
2) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 30 UL Listed.
D. Exit Devices:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Von Duprin
b. Sargent
c. Percision
2. Characteristics:
a. Exit devices shall be "UL" listed for life safety. All exit devices for fire rated
openings shall have “UL" labels for “Fire Exit Hardware."
b. All exit devices mounted on labeled wood doors shall be mounted on the
door per the door manufacturer’s requirements.
c. All trim shall be thru-bolted to the lock stile case. Lever design to match
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -5 DOOR HARDWARE

locksets.
d. All exit devices shall be made of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum
material, powder coated, anodized, or plated to the standard architectural
finishes to match the balance of the door hardware.
e. Provide glass bead conversion kits to shim exit devices on doors with raised
glass beads.
f. Except as otherwise indicated for doors complying with FEMA 361, all exit
devices shall be one manufacturer. No deviation will be considered.
g. All series exit devices shall incorporate a fluid damper, which decelerates the
touchpad on its return stroke and eliminates noise associated with exit device
operation. All exit devices shall be non-handed. Touchpad shall extend a
minimum of 1/2 of the door width and shall extend to the height of the cross
rail housing for a “no pinch” operation. Plastic touchpads are not acceptable.
All latchbolts to be the deadlocking type. Latchbolts shall have a selflubricating
coating to reduce wear. Plated or plastic coated latchbolts are not
acceptable. Plastic linkage and “dogging” components are not acceptable.
h. Lever trim shall be solid case material with a break-away feature to limit
damage to the unit from vandalism.
i. Surface vertical rod devices shall be UL labeled for fire door applications
without the use of bottom rod assemblies. Where bottom rods are required
for security applications, the devices shall be UL labeled for fire doors
applications with rod and latch guards by the device manufacturer.
j. Exit devices to include impact resistant, flush mounted end cap design to
avoid damage due to carts and other heavy objects passing through an
opening. End cap shall be of heavy-duty metal alloy construction and provide
horizontal adjustment to provide alignment with device cover plate. When
exit device end cap is installed, no raised edges will protrude.
k. Basis of Design: Von Duprin 98 series
l. Acceptable Substituion: Sargent HC80 series, Precision (FL)2000 Apex
series x V3900 trim
E. Closers and Door Control Devices:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. LCN Closers 4041
b. Sargent 281
c. Corbin Russwin DC8000
2. Characteristics:
a. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high
strength cast iron cylinder and metal cover.
b. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 o F
to -30 o F without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the
door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature
stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C.
c. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer
sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped.
Spring power adjustment allows for quick and accurate power adjustment by
way of dial adjustment gauge located on closer spring tube. Hydraulic
regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have
separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed and back check.
d. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel
arm closers). All parallel arm mounted closers shall have “EDA” type arms.
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -6 DOOR HARDWARE

e. All surface closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full
load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. All closers
(overhead, surface and concealed) shall be of one manufacturer and carry
manufacturer's ten year warranty (electric closers to have two year warranty).
f. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors
required to be accessible to the physically handicapped provide adjustable
units complying with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening
force.
g. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors
swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required
by code. Where possible, mount closers inside rooms.
h. Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by
ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification.
i. Basis of Design: LCN 4041 series
j. Acceptable Substitution: Sargent 281 series x SRI, Corbin Russwin DC8000
series x SRI.
F. Overhead Door Stops and Holders:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Glynn Johnson
b. Architectural Builders Hardware
2. Characteristics:
a. Provide heavy duty, stainless steel door stops and holders (concealed and/or
surface mounted as scheduled).
b. Concealed holders to be installed with the jamb bracket mortised flush with
the bottom of the jamb. The arm and channel to be mortised into the door.
c. Surface holders to be installed with the jamb bracket mounted on the stop.
G. Floor Stops and Wall Bumpers:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Trimco
b. Ives
c. Rockwood
2. Characteristics: Refer to Hardware Headings.
H. Door Bolts/Coordinators:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Trimco
b. Ives
c. Rockwood
2. Characteristics:
a. Flush bolts to be forged brass 6-3/4" x 1", with 1/2" diameter bolts. Plunger
to be supplied with milled surface one side that fits into a matching guide.
b. Automatic flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of
classified fire doors. Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass
components.
c. Self-latching flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of
classified fire doors. Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass
components.
d. Automatic flush bolts and self-latching flush bolts shall be UL listed for fire
door application without bottom bolts (LBB).
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -7 DOOR HARDWARE

e. Furnish dust proof bottom strikes.
f. Coordinator to be soffit mounted non-handed fully automatic UL listed
coordinating device for sequential closing of paired doors with or without
astragals.
g. Provide filler pieced to close the header. Provide brackets as required for
mounting of soffit applied hardware.
I. Protective Plates:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Trimco
b. Ives*
c. Rockwood
2. Characteristics:
a. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units
consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.
b. Materials:
1) Metal Plates: Stainless Steel, .050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).
c. Fabricate protection plates not more than 2 inches less than door width on
push side and not more than 1 inch less than door width on pull side.
d. Heights:
1) Kick plates to be 8 inches in height.
2) Mop plates to be 8 inches in height.
3) Armor plates to be 36 inches in height. Armor plates on fire doors to
comply with NFPA 80.
J. Door Seals/Gasketing:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. National Guard Products*
b. Reese Industries
c. Zero Weatherstripping
2. Types: Indicated in Hardware Headings.
K. Silencers:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Hager
b. Ives*
c. Rockwood
2. Three for each single door; two for each pair of doors.
3. Omit on doors provided with perimeter gasketing.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have
manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable
nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise
acceptable to Contracting Officer.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -8 DOOR HARDWARE

B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated,
using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in
no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable
hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of
hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not
furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as
otherwise specified.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,
generally prepared for machine screw installation.
1. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any
condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other
work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including “prepared
for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is
closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with
concealed fasteners.
4. Do not use thru-bolts or sex bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on
opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of
adequately fastening the hardware, or otherwise found in the Hardware Headings.
Coordinate with wood doors and metal doors and frames. Where thru-bolts are
used, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt as a means of reinforcing the work, or
use sex screw fasteners.
2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and
lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s standards, but in no case
less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze,
and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard
finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."
E. The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA
A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S.
finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
1. Hinges: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel
2. Continuous Hinges: 628 (US28) Clear Anodized Aluminum
3. Flush Bolts: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel
4. Locks: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel
5. Exit Devices: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel
6. Door Closers: 689 Powder Coat Aluminum
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -9 DOOR HARDWARE

7. Protective Plates: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel
8. Door Stops: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel
9. Overhead Holders: 630 Satin Stainless Steel and 689 Powder Coated Steel (as
scheduled)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except
as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except
as otherwise directed by Contracting Officer.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
2. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and
Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
3. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal,
storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work
specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
function properly with final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -10 DOOR HARDWARE

C. Door Hardware Supplier's Field Service:
1. Inspect door hardware items for correct installation and adjustment after complete
installation of door hardware.
2. Instruct Government's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of
door hardware and hardware finishes.
3. File written report of this inspection to Contracting Officer.
D. Door Hardware Manufacturer’s Field Service:
1. Prior to project completion, representatives of the lock, exit device and overhead
closer manufacturers shall inspect and certify that all units are installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and are regulated properly and
functioning correctly.
2. A written report of the inspection results and recommendations shall be provided
to the Contracting Officer and shall include the appropriate certificates.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 08 71 00 -11 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 80 00 – GLAZING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
1. Fixed Glass Units and Doors
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”
2. Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors”
A. Samples: Submit 12-inch square samples of each type of glass indicated, and 12-
inch long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or
gasket exposed to view.
B. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that
glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants
and other glazing materials.
C. Product Certificates: Obtain Certificate of Compliance for all glass products
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Requirements:
1. Small and Large missile impact required at all exterior glazing.
2. Glazing to be in accordance with UFC 4-010-01: DoD Minimum Anti-
Terrorism Standards for Buildings (ATFP).
B. Safety glass products are to comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of
16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently
marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC)
or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Single Source fabrication responsibility: Fabrication processes, including
laminating and tempering, shall be fabricated by a single Fabricator.
D. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazing components of the work. During installation, discard units
MAHG121038 08 80 00 - 1 GLAZING

with significant edge damage or other imperfections.
E. Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers
of glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with
recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing Manual", except
where more stringent requirements are indicated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION
A. Provide in overall sizes indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.
B. GL1 (Impact Safety Glass - ATFP) 9/16:
1. 1/4" Heat Strengthened fully tempered clear Outboard Lite
2. .090 Solutia Saflex (PVB)
3. 1/4" Heat Strengthened fully tempered Inboard Lite
C. GL2 (Clear Safety Glass):
2.2 COMPONENTS
1. 1/4 inch thick clear fully tempered glass.
A. General: Provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's standard colors,
or black if no color is so selected. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations
for selection of hardness, depending upon the location of each application,
conditions at time of installation, and performance requirements as indicated.
Select materials and variations or modifications carefully for compatibility with
surfaces contacted in the installation. Sealants shall contain no asbestos.
B. 2-part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: Elastomeric polysulfide sealant complying with
FS TT-S-227, Class A, Type 2; specially compounded and tested to show a
minimum of 20 years resistance to deterioration in normal glazing applications.
Use for all exterior locations.
C. Oleo-resinous Glazing Compound: Oil-based glazing compound; non-staining and
non-bleeding; provide proper type as required for channel. Use for interior
locations.
MAHG121038 08 80 00 - 2 GLAZING

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
2. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 79-90 durometer hardness, with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
3. Spacers: Neoprene or EPDM, 40-50 durometer hardness with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
4. Compressible Filler (Rod): Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of
synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used;
flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compressive strength for 25% deflection.
B. Structural Sealant
1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that
is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact,
specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant.
a. Provide sealants for use inside that have a VOC content of 100 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
b. Color: Black.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate.
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used.
B. Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as
otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature
changes, wind loading, and impact loading (for doors), without failure,
including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants to remain watertight
and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
MAHG121038 08 80 00 - 3 GLAZING

B. Glazing
3.3 CLEANING
3.4 PROTECTION
1. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet located in 1/4 of glass width
from each corner. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.
2. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes
larger than 50 united inches, except where preshimmed tapes are used for
glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width.
3. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and
similar characteristics.
4. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming
voids or installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not
leave voids in sill channels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on
light size, thickness and type of glass and complying with manufacturer's
recommendations.
5. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
"wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
6. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a
substantial "wash" away from glass.
7. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames
promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.
A. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled
for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion of project.
Comply with glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass.
Remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealant for high early
strength and durability.
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or
damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 08 80 00 - 4 GLAZING

SECTION 09 22 16 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior framing systems (includes but is not limited to supports for partition
walls, framed soffits, furring).
2. Interior suspension systems (includes but is not limited to supports for
ceilings, suspended soffits).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”
2. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board”
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Direct Suspension Systems: ASTM C635
B. Metal Support System Installation: ASTM C754
C. Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" in 8' - 0" variation in finish surface
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and in a manner to keep them dry, protected
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from
construction traffic and other causes.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal,
unless otherwise indicated.
MAHG121038 09 22 16 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc
coating, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for
attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal
to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
b. Powder-Actuated Fastener (Option): Suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for
attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent
testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
diameter.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal
thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.
1. Depth: 2 inches unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge, unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings.
b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 650-C Drywall Furring System.
3. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
MAHG121038 09 22 16 - 2 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Double 20 gage stud framing at all openings including door and view panels.
2. 20 gauge at 16” o.c. for tile backer board locations
3. 22 gauge at 16" o.c. for other locations.
4. Use 18 gauge for all runners.
5. Provide “flex track” at all curved wall locations.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated or at a minimum where required by the
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA), provide the following:
1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch
deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to
studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of
structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
C. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 25 gauge
2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches unless otherwise noted.
2.4 STEEL FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Provide stud manufacturer's standard clips, shoes, ties, reinforcement, and other
accessories as needed for a complete partition framing system.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
MAHG121038 09 22 16 - 3 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Support Systems:
1. Direct-hung Suspension System: Attach perimeter support member to
adjacent vertical surfaces. Mechanically join support members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall support. Cut, bend and secure joints at bulkhead at
ceiling level change as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
a. Space runners 48 inches on center, and suspend from structure with
specified hangers spaced no more than 48 inches on center along the
runners.
(1) For interior ceilings suspend from structure with 12 gage or heavier
galvanized steel wire. Wrap ties tightly at least 3 full turns.
b. Place furring tees 16 inches on center between furring runners. Provide a
furring tee at, and 8 inches each side of, gypsum board end joints.
c. Provide auxiliary framing at openings for light fixtures and similar work, as
required for support of both the gypsum board and other work indicated
for support thereon.
d. Install supplementary framing, runners, blocking and bracing at openings
and terminations in the work, and at locations required to support fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, and similar work which cannot be adequately supported on
gypsum board alone.
2. Wall/Partition Support System: Support systems shall extend from floor to
heights indicated on partition types/schedule.
a. Install runner tracks at floors and bottom of roof or floor framing members
and where stud system abuts other construction. Where partitions
parallel, but are not directly beneath framing members, where there is no
floor above, provide runner, or stud, headers between beams, spaced 4
feet on center, attached at each end, and secure top runner of partition
thereto.
b. Space studs 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Frame door openings with 20 gage vertical studs. Provide runner track
header of same gage as jamb studs, and jack studs same as partition
studs across head of opening.
d. Frame other openings same as door openings and frame above and
below openings same as above door head.
MAHG121038 09 22 16 - 4 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

e. Install supplementary framing, runners, blocking and bracing at openings
and terminations in the work, and at locations required to support fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim and similar work which cannot be
adequately supported on gypsum board alone.
f. Secure perimeter framing to structural elements with suitable fasteners
located 2 inches from each end and 24 inches apart between, except top
runner parallel to, but not directly under, framing members will be
attached with 2 screws to headers provided at 48 inches on center.
Anchor studs adjacent to door and fixed light openings, partition
intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges. Make webflange
bend at each end of runner over openings and screw to jamb studs
with 2 screws each end.
3. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural
supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial
loading of finished assemblies.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 22 16 - 5 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

SECTION 09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Mold and Mildew Resistant Gypsum Board
2. Tile backer board
3. Wallboard finishing (joint tape-and-compound treatment)
4. Gypsum wallboard accessories including reveals
5. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”
2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”
3. Division 9 Section “Non-Structural Metal Framing”
4. Division 9 Section “Tiling”
5. Division 9 Section “Painting and Coating”
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s product specifications and installation instructions for
each gypsum board component, including other data as may be required to
show compliance with these specifications.
B. Samples: 12 inch long sample of reveals, in finish specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide products manufactured in North America only.
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD

B. Gypsum Board:
1. “GA-216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products” by Gypsum
Association
2. “GA-214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish” by Gypsum
Association.
C. Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" in 8' - 0" variation in finish surface
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store gypsum in accordance with GA-238 and manufacturer recommendations.
B. Deliver materials in original packaged, containers or bundles bearing brand name
and identification of manufacturer or supplier
C. Store materials inside under cover and in a manner to keep them dry, protected
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from
construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent
sagging.
D. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect
metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 F.,
maintain continuous, uniform, comfortable building working temperatures of not
less than 55 F. for a minimum period of 48 hours prior to, during and following
application of gypsum board and joint reinforcement materials or bonding of
adhesives.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of
that required for drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.
Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent too rapid drying.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gypsum Board:
1. Georgia-Pacific
2. US Gypsum Company (USG)
3. CertainTeed Gypsum
4. Temple-Inland Corporation
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Mold and Mildew Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, of thickness indicated
below to resist mold and mildew; in maximum lengths available to minimize end-toend
butt joints. Board shall score minimum 10 when tested per ASTM D 3273.
1. Type X, 5/8 inch thick unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide at ALL interior areas unless noted otherwise.
B. Tile Backer Board (provide at all locations where wall tile occurs and other areas
indicated). Board shall score minimum 10 when tested per ASTM D 3273.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
1. 5/8” DensShield Tile Backer Board as manufactured by Georgia Pacific
Corporation.
2. 5/8” Fiberock Aqua-Tough as manufactured by USG Corporation.
3. 5/8” Diamondback GlasRoc Tile Backer as manufactured by CertainTeed
Corporation
4. 5/8” GreenGlass Tile Backer as manufactured by Temple Inland.
A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories
by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel (required at
exterior) or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in mold resistant joint
compound.
1. Include corner beads, edge trim, control joints and other units necessary for
project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details
indicated, whether or not specific accessories are shown on the drawings.
2. Comply with ASTM C1047-10a Standard Specification for Accessories for
Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base, current version.
B. Joint Treatment Materials:
1. General: Comply with ASTM C475 Standard Specification for Joint
Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board, current version.
2. Glass-Fiber Mesh Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, alkali resistant,
minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch. Mold resistance
rating score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.
a. For use at all boards (mold and mildew interior, tile backer)
b. Certainteed “FibaTape Mold-X10” is an acceptable alternative (1-7/8”
wide).
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD

3. Exterior sealant: Silicone Emulsion Sealant meeting ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, compatible with glass fiber mesh tape and for covering exposed
fasteners.
4. Setting Type Joint Compound: Factory prepackaged, job mixed chemicalhardening
powder products for bedding and filling.
a. Provide equal to USG “Sheetrock Brand Easy Sand Lightweight Setting-
Type Joint Compound”.
b. Use for all areas requiring setting or topping compound (ie: taping, filling,
and treating fasteners).
C. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, in lengths recommended by sheathing manufacturer
for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other
corrosion-protective coating.
1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing with steel drill
screws complying with ASTM C1002, Standard Specification for Steel Self-
Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing with drill
screws complying with “ASTM C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill
Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases
to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness”.
3. Provide Type S or Type S-12 screws only.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Do not deliver or install gypsum board until building is fully enclosed, wet work is
complete.
B. Prior to finishing, HVAC system shall be operating and maintaining temperature
and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board construction attaches or abuts,
installed hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors and structural framing with Installer
present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of gypsum board assemblies specified in this
Section.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install and finish in accordance with “GA-216, Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Panel Products”, with manufacturer's printed directions and
recommendations.
2. Install boards with correct side out (typically logo side out). Use maximum
lengths possible to minimize number of joints.
3. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of boards but do not
cut into facing (no countersinking).
4. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with long edges in contact with edges
of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud
flanges, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud
spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each
steel stud.
5. Caulk/seal cut edges and penetrations around pipes, fixtures, etc., and where
sheathing butts against dissimilar materials with applicable sealant.
6. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards.
7. Finishing, General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both
directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim and control joints; penetrations;
fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work
for decoration.
B. Mold and Mildew Resistant Gypsum Board:
1. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly
against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Install boards with a minimum ¼ inch setback at wall-to-floor
intersections.
b. Allow no joints greater than 1/8 inch.
2. Fastener Spacing:
a. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. along supported edges and
12 inches o.c. along intermediate supports (or tighter spacing if
recommended by manufacturer for specific application) and set back a
minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.
3. Joints and corners shall be treated with 2” fiberglass tape embedded in a skim
coat of setting material as specified herein.
a. Skim coat all fasteners with setting material.
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD

C. Tile Backer Board:
1. Comply with Division 9 Section “Tiling” and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation.
2. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly
against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Install boards with a ¼ inch setback where they abut shower receptors to
prevent wicking.
b. Allow no joints greater than 1/8 inch.
3. Do not install an additional vapor barrier in conjunction with tile backer boards.
4. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with long edges in contact with edges
of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud
flanges, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud
spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each
steel stud.
5. Fastener Spacing:
a. Space fasteners approximately 6 inches o.c. (or tighter spacing if
recommended by manufacturer for specific application) and set back a
minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.
6. Joints and corners shall be treated with 2” fiberglass tape embedded in a skim
coat of the tile setting material as specified in Division 9 Section “Tiling”.
a. Skim coat all fasteners with tile setting material.
7. Where tile backer board is indicated to be painted, finish per “Mold and
Mildew Resistant Gypsum Board” as specified herein.
D. Accessories:
1. Trim:
a. Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to
fasten gypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim
manufacturer.
b. Install metal corner beads at external corners and “reveals” in locations
as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.
(1) Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, unless a “reveal” product is
called for on Drawings.
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 6 GYPSUM BOARD

2. Control Joints:
a. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings
and locations required by “GA-216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Panel Products”, and as specified herein. Locations shall be approved by
Contracting Officer prior to installation for visual effect.
3.4 LEVELS OF GYPSUM BOARD FINISH
(1) Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls
or partitions of other finish material.
(2) A control joint shall be installed where a partition, wall, or ceiling
traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic, or building control
element) in the base building structure.
(3) Control joints shall be installed where a wall or partition runs in an
uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet.
(4) Control joints in interior ceilings shall be installed so that linear
dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 linear feet.
(5) Where gypsum board is vertically continuous, as at stairwells,
provide horizontal control joints at each floor level.
(6) A control joint or intermediate blocking shall be installed where
ceiling framing members change direction.
(7) Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical system, blocking shall
be provided behind the control joint by using a backing material of 5/8
in. type X Mold and Mildew resistant gypsum board as specified
herein, mineral fiber, or other tested equivalent.
A. Levels of Finish: Provide in accordance with Gypsum Association “GA 214,
Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish”.
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, exterior, and concealed areas, except provide
higher level of finish as required to comply with acoustical ratings.
a. All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound.
Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges
are acceptable.
2. Level 2: all Tile Backer gypsum surfaces to receive tile.
a. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound
and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over
all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be
covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess
joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound
applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be
considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 7 GYPSUM BOARD

conditions of this level.
3. Level 3: Gypsum board substrate at areas of textured finishes and heavy duty
wall coverings.
a. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound
and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and
interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with
two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth
and free of tool marks and ridges.
4. Level 4: all Gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level is
indicated.
a. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound
and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and
one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles.
Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate
coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of
tool marks and ridges.
5. Level 5: not used on this Project.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tolerances:
3.6 PROTECTION
1. Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8'-0" variation from plumb or level in exposed lines
of surface, except at joints between gypsum board units.
2. Do not exceed 1/16 inch variation between planes of abutting edges or ends.
3. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction
period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 29 00 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 09 30 00 – TILING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Definitions - Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic
materials. The types of work of this section include:
1. Porcelain Floor and Wall Tile
2. Tile Trim and Accessories to achieve a complete installation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”
2. Division 9 Section “Resilient Tile Flooring”
3. Division 9 Section “Carpeting”
A. Samples - Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections
of tiles showing full range of colors available for each type of tile specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including tile and their specific locations as
indicated on the drawings. Show expansion joint locations for approval.
C. Grout manufacturer's color chart and instructions for use of grout.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tile Manufacturing Standard: ANSI A137.1. Furnish tile complying with standard
grade requirements unless indicated otherwise.
B. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout,
and setting materials.
C. Tile Council of America, Inc.
1. Handbook No. F113-11 (thinset) at all on-grade concrete areas not indicated
to be recessed.
2. Handbook No. W245-11 for wall tile installed over backerboard.
D. Tile Installation Standards: ANSI Standards - Comply with applicable
requirements of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
1. ANSI A108.5. Tiles installed with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; for ceramic
MAHG121038 09 30 00-1 TILING

tile base without wall tile.
2. ANSI A108.10: installation of grout in tilework.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
All cartons must be from same Lot.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in
accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed
recommendations. All cartons must be from the same lot.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Colors, patterns, and locations of all tile types are as indicated on the
Drawings. Manufacturer’s listed below are to be Contracting Officer’s control
sample. Other manufacturer’s must submit samples prior to bid matching color
and finish in order to be considered “equal”.
B. Porcelain Floor Tile:
1. PORC1: 12 inch x 12 inch: “Diamante – Unpolished” as manufactured by
Dal-Tile.
C. Porcelain Wall Tile:
1. WT1: 12 inch x 12 inch: “Diamante – Polished” as manufactured by Dal-Tile.
D. Porcelain Wall Base:
2.2 SETTING MATERIALS
1. PTB1: 6 inch x 12 inch: “Diamante – Polished Cove Base” as manufactured
by Dal-Tile.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Laticrete International
2. MAPEI Americas
3. Mer-Krete Systems.
MAHG121038 09 30 00-2 TILING

B. General:
1. Color as indicated on Drawings. If not indicated as selected by Architect.
C. Thinset Installation (floor and wall):
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
1. Mortar: ANSI A118.4, latex portland cement mortar (on a cured bed).
2. Grout: ANSI A118.7, Polymer modified cement grouts.
A. Provide in accordance with Tile Council of America “EJ171 Movement Joint
Guidelines for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone”:
2.4 ACCESSORIES
1. Back-up strip: flexible and compressible type of closed cell foam polyethylene
or butyl rubber, rounded at surface to contact sealant, and as recommended
by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Sealant: Two component sealant shall comply with Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227e;
use Type II (non-sag) for joints in vertical surfaces and Type I (self-leveling)
for joints in horizontal surfaces. Trafficked areas of floors - Shore A hardness
greater than 35.
A. Provide accessories in locations as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Termination Strip:
1. Between mosaic tile and VCT/SDT or carpet: Schlüter RENO-U, sized for
each application, type 304 stainless steel.
2. Provide other transitions where indicated on Drawings by Schlüter.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and
that does not change color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Tilework:
1. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to
form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown.
Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
MAHG121038 09 30 00-3 TILING

3.2 CLEANING
2. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile
without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,
finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical
outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations, so that plates, collars or covers
overlap tile.
3. Placement Methods:
a. Install tile on floors and masonry walls using Latex-Portland Cement.
b. Install base without wall tile using Latex-Portland Cement.
4. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Layout tile
work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall
area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths.
5. Grout: Install in accordance with applicable ANSI standard as specified
herein.
B. Expansion Joints:
1. Install where required per TCNA “EJ171”, where required below, and per
approved layout.
a. Interior locations (at grade): 20’ to 25’ in each direction
b. Install where tile work abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls,
curbs, columns, pipes, changes in backing materials, etc.
c. Install directly over joints in structural floor including construction joints or
cold joints.
2. Joints shall be same width as grout joint, but not less than 1/4”.
3. Set compressible back-up strip when mortar is placed or utilize removable
wood strips to provide space for back-up after mortar has cured.
4. Keep movement joints cavities open and free of dirt, debris, grout, mortar, and
setting materials.
5. Install sealant after tile work and grout are dry. Follow sealant manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Grout Sealer: Provide one coat of grout sealer to all grout joints using foam rubber
paint brushes. Care shall be taken to avoid excessive drippage and runs onto tile.
A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free
of foreign matter. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when
permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than
14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing
MAHG121038 09 30 00-4 TILING

3.3 PROTECTION
fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and
after cleaning.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of non-uniform
joints, cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
A. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or
other heavy covering during construction period to prevent damage and wear.
1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after
grouting is completed.
2. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner
from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 30 00-5 TILING

SECTION 09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings.
B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following:
1. Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board ceilings
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product specifications and installation instructions
for materials and suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and
other data as required showing compliance with these specifications.
B. Coordination Drawings: layout of ceilings drawn to scale coordinating acoustical
tile ceiling installation and spacing with hanger attachment to building structure
and ceiling mounted items. Include locations of all mechanical and electrical items
(light fixtures, mechanical items, fire alarm, and sprinkler heads).
1. Contracting Officer will provide a CAD drawing of the reflected ceiling plan for
the contractor’s use in preparing. This is to be used as a guide only – it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all tile is centered in the space
and all items are located properly.
C. Samples: Set of samples for acoustical unit, showing full range of exposed color
and texture, and set of 12” long samples of suspension system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Firm with not less than three years of successful experience in
installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which
is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original unopened packages and
store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature
and stabilized moisture content.
MAHG121038 09 51 13 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units
in any way. Minor damages may be repaired, provide finish items are equal in all
respects to new work and acceptable to Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove
and replace damaged items as directed.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space enclosure - Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed
and weather-proof, until wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, until
work above ceilings is completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and
humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final
occupancy.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong World Industries
B. USG Corporation
C. CertainTeed Ceilings
2.2 MINERAL FIBER ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. General: Where units less than 6 inches wide would occur at edges of room with
24 X 24 inch pattern, provide 24 X 48 inch panels cut to extend to wall, eliminating
the tee near the wall. Where tegular tiles occur at these locations, modify tile to sit
flush with suspension system.
B. Type 1 (ACT1), angled tegular:
1. NRC – 0.55; CAC – 35
a. 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Fine Fissured (1732) by Armstrong.
b. 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Radar ClimaPlus (2220) by USG
c. 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Fine Fissured (HHF-154) by Certainteed.
C. Type 2 (ACT2), square edge, wet areas:
1. NRC – 0.55; CAC – 35
a. 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Fine Fissured (1728) by Armstrong.
b. 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Radar ClimaPlus (2210) by USG
c. 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Fine Fissured (HHF-157) by Certainteed.
MAHG121038 09 51 13 - 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

2. Provide “retention clips” at all areas of Type 2 (equal to Armstrong 414).
2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C635, as applicable to type of suspension system
required for type of ceiling units indicated. Coordinate with other work supported
by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures and HVAC equipment.
1. Structural Class: Intermediate-duty.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table
1 Direct Hung. Hanger Wires-galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper,
prestretched, yield-stress load of at least 3 times design load, but not less than 12
gage (0.106").
C. Edge Molding: provide manufacturer’s standard wall angle (7/8” hemmed angle
molding) for edges of ceiling of material and finish to match exposed tee flanges in
same space unless otherwise noted below.
D. Exposed Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard exposed tees, cross tees
and accessories of types indicated, with exposed cross tees coped to lay flush
with main runners. Hot dipped galvanized steel on all surfaces of ceiling
suspension system, including mouldings, trim and accessories.
E. Suspension System:
1. For “ACT1” and “ACT2” Ceilings:
a. Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System by Armstrong.
b. Donn DX 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System by USG.
c. Classic Stab System 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System by Certainteed.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must examine conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be
performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling – in accordance with approved
coordination layout drawing.
MAHG121038 09 51 13 - 3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions
and to comply with governing regulations, and industry standard applicable to
work.
B. Install suspension system to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported
only from building structural members or from carrying channels supported by
structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced maximum 4' - 0"
along each main tee and as required by UL assembly unless otherwise indicated,
leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' - 0". Provide extra hangers and carrying
channels as required to support weight at lighting fixtures and duct outlets.
C. Install edge mouldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. Attach
mouldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from
ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' -0". Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
D. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension members. Scribe and cut
panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge mouldings and
suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and
touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 51 13 - 4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 65 19 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUMBITTALS
A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on Drawings and in
schedules. Work includes the following:
1. Static Dissipative Vinyl composition tile
2. Vinyl Composition Tile
3. Accessories including rubber base.
4. Patterns and locations of all flooring and accessories are as indicated on the
Drawings. Colors shall be selected by the Contracting Officer.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section “Tiling”
2. Division 9 Section “Carpeting”
A. Product Data: Provide Safety Data Sheets for floor tile and adhesives.
B. Samples: Submit sample of each type, color and finish of resilient flooring and
accessory required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide
full-size tile units for SDT/VCT and 6" long sample of accessories.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended
maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced
by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives and
sealants.
B. Provide resilient flooring material to meet the following fire test performance
criteria as tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory:
1. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I.
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

2. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or
less.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees (18 Celsius) in spaces to receive
resilient flooring for at least 40 hours prior to installation, and during installation.
Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature 55 degrees (13 Celsius) in areas
where work is completed.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs and
environmental conditions must be within limits recommended by manufacturer of
products being installed. Moisture that results must be submitted in writing to the
Owner prior to installation.
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard finish and wear warranties for all products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Resilient Tile (SDT/VCT):
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Equal as approved
B. Accessories
1. Johnsonite, Inc.
2. Roppe Corporation, USA
C. Substitutions:
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, products of other manufacturers
may be substituted upon matching Contract Officer’s control sample in color,
texture, and size.
A. General:
1. References: Thru-color products conforming to the requirements of ASTM F
1066, Class 2 – through pattern, through chip.
2. Gauge/Thickness – 1/8 inch
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

B. Static Dissipative Tile (SDT):
1. Provide “Static Dissipative Tile (SDT) Excelon Tile Flooring” manufactured by
Armstrong World Industries, Inc., composed of polyvinyl chloride resin binder,
fillers, pigments, and antistatic additive with colors and texture dispersed
uniformly throughout its thickness.
C. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT):
2.3 ACCESSORIES
1. Provide “Standard Excelon Tile Flooring – Imperial Texture” as manufactured
by Armstrong World Industries, composed of polyvinyl chloride resin binder,
plasticizers, fillers, and pigments with colors and texture dispersed uniformly
throughout its thickness.
A. Resilient Base (RB):
1. Gauge/Thickness – 1/8 inch
2. References: The base shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1861,
Type TS, Group I (solid).
3. Product Description:
a. “Traditional Wall Base”; Johnsonite, Inc.
b. “Pinnacle Rubber Wall Base”; Roppe Corporation
a. Products shall be constructed of first quality materials properly
vulcanized, and shall be smooth and free from imperfections which
detract from its appearance.
4. Height: 6", unless otherwise indicated.
5. Gauge/Thickness: 1/8 inch
6. Style: Standard top-set cove
a. Provide job formed inside and outside corners – neatly mitered.
b. Base over SDT/VCT: coved bottom
c. Base over carpet: straight bottom
7. Lengths: In coils / rolls to limit joints
B. Resilient Edge Strips:
1. Of required thickness, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or
bullnose edge, as selected for condition at adjoining other floor surface
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

material and a flush or “tapered” transition, color to match flooring, or as
selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. Provide as
follows:
a. VCT to sealed concrete: Johnsonite “RRS-XX-D” (25’ rolls)
b. VCT to carpet: Johnsonite “CTA-XX-A”
c. Provide all other transitions as required to finish any raw edge of resilient
flooring.
C. Adhesives (Cements):
(1) Transitions to tile are as specified in Division 9 Section “Tiling”.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
b. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. Provide equal to
Armstrong S-725 WallBase Adhesive.
2. Static Dissipative Tile Only:
a. Provide 2 inch wide x 24 inch long copper ground-connection strips under
the tile.
D. Concrete Slab Primer:
1. Low-VOC non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
E. Leveling and Patching Compounds:
1. Low-VOC latex-type as recommended by manufacturer of resilient products.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must examine sub-floor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory.
A satisfactory sub-floor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from
cracks, holes, ridges, and coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects
impairing performance or appearance.
B. Perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 1869,“Standard Test
Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using
Anhydrous Calcium Chloride” and Bond Tests as described in publication F-5061,
"Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System," to determine if surfaces are dry; free
of curing and hardening compounds and other coatings; and ready to receive
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 4 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

flooring.
1. MVER shall not exceed 5 lbs./1000 sq. ft./24 hrs.
C. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are
acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare sub-floor surfaces as follows:
1. Sand or grind substrate, if required to provide smooth surface and to remove
foreign materials which could interfere with adhesion.
2. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in sub-floors.
3. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect sub-floor.
B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s directions.
C. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of sub-floor conditions and full
responsibility for completed work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations. Extend
resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar
openings.
a. Install resilient edge strips as resilient flooring work progresses.
2. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and
cabinets, pipes, outlets, and permanent columns, walls, and partitions.
3. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly
marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor.
Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device.
4. Tightly cement resilient flooring to sub-base without open cracks, voids,
raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or
other surface imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each
covered area to assure adhesion.
B. Installation of Tile Floors:
1. Install tile floors according to color and pattern plans on Drawings.
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 5 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

3.4 CLEANING
2. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room area are of equal width. Adjust
as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters.
Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence
as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all
fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
a. Lay tile with grain running in one direction.
4. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in
compliance with flooring manufacturer’s directions.
5. Static Dissipative Tile only:
C. Accessories:
a. Install copper grounding strips into adhesive in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions.
1. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, face of risers in stairways,
casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is
required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with field formed
outside corner units, and with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond
base to backing throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at
horizontal and vertical surfaces.
a. On irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
2. Apply edge strips where shown on drawings and at all exposed edges of
resilient flooring. Secure units to substrate in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring:
1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in
adhesive.
3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil.
4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate
cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers.
B. After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, apply polish
and buff, with type of polish, MINIMUM 3 COATS, and buffing procedures in
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 6 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

3.5 PROTECTION
compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions.
A. Comply with resilient flooring manufacturer’s current written directions and
recommendations.
B. Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period
following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard in high traffic areas
and heavy Kraft paper in others. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or
furnishings across floors.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 65 19 - 7 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

SECTION 09 68 00 – CARPETING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The extent of carpeting is indicated on the Drawings and the Specifications, and is
defined to include carpet and accessories.
1. Provide modular carpet tile where indicated.
a. Direct glue-down installation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section “Tiling”
2. Division 9 Section “Resilient Tile Flooring”
A. Written warranty as specified above.
B. Manufacturer's descriptive data.
C. Flame Spread Test Reports or Radiant Panel Test to verify the meeting of the
various requirements specified herein.
D. Samples, Carpeting - Submit 18" X 27" samples of each carpet required, and 6"
lengths of exposed edge stripping.
E. Product Data: Provide Safety Data Sheets for carpet adhesives.
F. Manufacturer's certificate stating that carpet furnished, identified by register
numbers was manufactured according to these specifications.
G. Shop drawings showing layout of carpet, accessory type and location.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Firm with not less than 5 years of carpeting experience, similar to work of
this section.
B. Manufacturer: Major Firm (carpet mill) which has not less than 5 years of
production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this section; and
whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of products with
requirements of this section.
C. General Standard: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by the Carpet and Rug Institute;
comply with recommendations which can be reasonably applied to types of
MAHG121038 09 68 00 -1 CARPETING

carpeting work required.
D. Flammability: Flooring Radiant Panel ASTM E 648 (Glue Down) – NFPA Class I
and DOC-FF-1-70.
E. Flame Spread Rating: Carpeting shall have flame spread rating of 75 or less in
accordance with ASTM Spec. E84-68, Standard Method of Test for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials or pass the National Bureau of
Standards Radiant Panel Test.
F. Carpet Identification: Provide hang tag, or other suitable method, to identify carpet
delivered as to manufacturer (or supplier), and style.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Deliver carpeting material in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from
weather, moisture and soiling.
A. CPT1 (Modular):
1. 10 Year Limited Colourfastness (Light and Atmospheric)
2. Lifetime Stain, Static, Abrasive Wear, and No Delamination or Edge Ravel
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carpet
1. General:
B. CPT1:
2.2 ACCESSORIES
a. Color and Pattern: Provide as indicated on Drawings.
b. Substitutions: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of other
manufacturers may be substituted upon matching control sample in yarn
type, color, texture, weight, adhesive and backing construction.
1. Provide “Form Modular” 24 inch x 24 inch tile as manufactured by Lees
Commercial Carpets installed in quarter turn method.
A. General: Provide accessories as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.
MAHG121038 09 68 00 -2 CARPETING

B. Carpet Edge Guard:
1. Extruded or molded vinyl or rubber of same manufacturer of rubber base of
approved size and profile; color to match rubber base.
2. Provide at all locations where carpet meets sealed/stained concrete.
C. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant type as recommended by carpet
manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet and which contains no asbestos, and complies with full warranty.
D. Seaming Carpet: Seaming adhesive recommended by carpet manufacturer and
which contains no asbestos.
E. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, and other
carpeting products; and selected by installer to meet project circumstance and
requirements.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Installer must examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under
which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contracting Officer and Contractor in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Clear away debris and remove any cementitious deposits, and other foreign matter
which could interfere with adhesive bond, from surfaces to receive carpeting;
vacuum clean immediately before installation.
C. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete sub-floors to determine if surfaces
are sufficiently cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing
compounds. Moisture that results must be submitted in writing to the Contracting
Officer prior to start of installation.
D. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and
soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of direction and lay of
pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic
direction at doorways.
2. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable
flanges and furnishings, and into adjoining alcoves and closets of each space.
MAHG121038 09 68 00 -3 CARPETING

3.3 CLEANING
3.4 PROTECTION
3. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not
protected by edge guards or overlapping flanges.
4. Install carpet edge guard or metal trim where edge of carpet is exposed;
anchor guards to substrate.
B. Glue-down Installation:
1. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim
edges and butter cuts with seaming cement.
2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form cemented seams
without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.
Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet.
A. Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to discarded.
B. Vacuum carpet, using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove
spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed.
A. Contractor to use protection methods and materials needed to ensure that
carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 68 00 -4 CARPETING

SECTION 09 90 00 – PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and schedules, and as herein
specified.
B. The work includes painting and finishing of new interior and exterior exposed items
and surfaces throughout project, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to
shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
2. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes (including color coding) and
ducts, steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed
under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated, is
included.
C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers and fillers, and other applied
materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
D. Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work, or
are included in other sections of these specifications.
1. Shop Priming:
a. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is
included under various sections for structural steel, steel joists, metal
fabrications, hollow metal work, and similar items. Also, for factory built
mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories.
2. Pre-finished Items:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing
or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to)
windows, acoustical materials and finished mechanical and electrical
equipment, including light fixtures.
3. Concealed Surfaces:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as
walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas,
furred areas, pipe spaces, and duct shafts.
4. Finished Metal Surfaces:
a. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate,
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING

1.2 SUBMITTALS
bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting,
unless otherwise indicated.
5. Operating Parts and Labels:
a. Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as
valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor
and fan shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters'
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification,
performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.
6. Do not paint concrete or floors, unless specifically indicated.
7. Gypsum wallboard joint preparation is included in Gypsum Wallboard Section.
A. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's printed product data on all coatings specified,
including preparation and application instructions.
B. Selection Samples:
1. Provide two sets of samples not less than one by two inches in size illustrating
range of colors and textures available for each finishing product specified.
C. Verification Samples:
1. Provide two samples of not less than six inches square illustrating selected
color and texture for each finishing product specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Job Sample:
1. Prior to start of painting, paint full size field sample of each individual color
scheduled on each respective substrate. Paint sample at site, where directed,
of workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Obtain Contracting
Officer’s acceptance of the sample before start of work. If sample is
accepted, the sample may become part of the finished project.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and following minimum
information:
1. Name or title of materials
2. Manufacturer's name
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 2 PAINTING AND COATING

3. Thinning instructions
4. Application instructions
5. Color name and number
B. Store paint products in covered, ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature
of 45 degrees F and maximum ambient temperature of 90 degrees F.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. (10 Celsius) and 90
degrees F. (32 Celsius), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F. (7 Celsius) and 95
degrees F. (35 Celsius), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds
85%; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint
manufacturer's printed instructions.
D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Benjamin Moore
2. Sherwin-Williams Company
3. Glidden Professional
B. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply all products
specified in this section from the same manufacturer.
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 3 PAINTING AND COATING

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a
tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24);
these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
4. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more
than 250 g/L.
5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
A. Latex Flat, Egg-Shell, Semi-Gloss, and Primer:
1. Interior latex containing zero-VOC’s. Provide one of the following:
a. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar200 Zero VOC
b. Benjamin Moore: Natura Zero-VOC
c. Glidden Professional: LifeMaster
2. Custom colorants shall be low-VOC and not increase emissions.
B. Other products (alkyd, shellacs, etc) shall be submitted prior to use for approval by
Contracting Officer in accordance with VOC content as specified herein.
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 4 PAINTING AND COATING

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate for application of coatings
specified.
B. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings
are dry.
C. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture
content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture
measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for
surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or
appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil
grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or
abrasions.
E. Correct the above conditions and any other conditions which could impair
performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface
preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce
finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.
B. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods
recommended by coating manufacturer; seal with shellac or other coating
acceptable to paint manufacturer stains and marks that might bleed through paint
finishes which cannot be completely removed.
C. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers,
lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are
adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings.
D. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly
dry.
E. For specific substrate preparation, see “Surface Preparation” at end of Section.
F. Maximize ventilation during application and drying.
G. Isolate area of application from rest of building.
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 5 PAINTING AND COATING

3.3 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited to substrate and type of material being applied. Do not
use roller or spray for wood and plywood, or roller for metal, unless
specifically approved by the Contracting Officer.
2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show
through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces.
4. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces,
unless otherwise indicated.
6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
7. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and
touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated. Spot prime any damaged
areas.
B. Scheduling Painting:
1. Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and
before subsequent surface deterioration.
2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do
not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform, or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of
paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness:
1. Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate,
to provide a dry film thickness per coat as indicated, or if not indicated, as
recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Mechanical and Electrical Work:
1. Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed
on the exterior of the buildings, including the roof, and in occupied spaces.
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 6 PAINTING AND COATING

3.4 CLEANING
2. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following
(where present):
a. Piping and supports, roof vents, louvers, grilles, registers, fans and curbs.
3. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following
(where present):
E. Prime Coats:
3.5 PROTECTION
a. Conduit, boxes and fittings, exposed panelboard surfaces, including
covers.
1. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and
which has not been prime coated by others.
2. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots
or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or
other defects due to insufficient sealing.
F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes:
1. Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish,
color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
A. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish cans
and rags at end of each work day.
B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper method of washing and scraping,
using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
C. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
D. Vacate space for as long as possible after application. Wait a minimum of 48
hours before occupying freshly painted rooms.
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing,
as approved by Contracting Officer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after
completion of painting operations.
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 7 PAINTING AND COATING

3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.7 SCHEDULE
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint
systems indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
C. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as
required to produce paint systems indicated.
A. If paint on walls is to be applied using spray technique, the final coat shall be
backrolled to ensure even distribution.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 90 0 - 8 PAINTING AND COATING

SECTION 09 97 23 – CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Apply concrete sealer to exposed concrete floors as indicated on Finish Schedule.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”.
A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's product specification, installation
instructions and general recommendations for sealing.
1. Include Material Safety Data Sheets.
2. Color samples from manufacturers standard colors.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Materials shall be delivered in original sealed containers, clearly marked
with supplier’s name, brand name and type of material.
B. Storage and Handling: Recommended material storage temperature is 75 o F.
Handle products to avoid damage to container. Do not store for long periods in
direct sunlight.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Do not proceed with application of materials when substrate temperature is
less than 50 o F and not above 90 o F. Maintain a minimum concrete
temperature of 50 o F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during and after
installation.
2. Do not apply materials unless surface to receive coating is clean and dry.
3. Prepared concrete shall have a pH between 6 and 10.
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty.
MAHG121038 09 97 23-1 CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. H & C Concrete (Division of Sherwin Williams)
B. PROSOCO
C. Vexcon Chemicals
D. Equal as approved
A. Cleaner/Degreaser: “Cleaner Degreaser” as manufactured by H & C Concrete.
B. Etching Solution: “Etching Solution” as manufactured by H & C Concrete.
C. Concrete Stain:
1. Provide “Concrete Stain Solid Color Water-based” as manufactured by H & C
Concrete.
a. Finish: Low Luster
b. Vehicle Type: 100% Acrylic
c. VOC: 224 g/L
d. Volume Solids: 30 ± 2%
e. Weight Solids: 43 ± 2%
2. Color: to be selected from manufacturer’s full line, including tintable colors.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Newly poured concrete must be at least 28 days old. All concrete must be porous,
clean, dry and free of grease, oil & any other contaminates.
1. If areas require cleaning, use cleaner/degreaser following manufacturer’s
directions. If mold, mildew or fungus is present, kill and remove with a solution
of one-cup household bleach to one gallon of water.
B. All horizontal concrete surfaces MUST be etched with etching solution, following
manufacturer’s directions. After etching the surface should have the feel of 120-grit
sandpaper.
MAHG121038 09 97 23-2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS

3.2 APPLICATION
C. Do not apply the stain until all surfaces are porous and have been properly
prepared.
D. Concrete stain should be applied on to a dry surface where moisture content
should not exceed 3lbs/1000 sq. ft. of surface (ASTM F710). Air, surface and
material temperature must be between 50° and 90°F and at least 5°F above the
dew point during and for 24 hours after application.
1. Prepared concrete must have a pH level between 6 and 10.
A. Apply coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Stir stain thoroughly before and during application.
1. When using more than one container, intermix all containers together to
ensure color uniformity.
C. A minimum two coats is required. Apply with brush, roller or spray.
1. First Coat: Apply first coat evenly, working in one direction. Allow to dry at
least 2 hours before applying second coat.
2. Second Coat: Apply second coat crosswise to the first coat.
D. Allow 72 to 96 hours drying conditions before using the surface.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 09 97 23-3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS

SECTION 10 14 00 – SIGNAGE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. This Section includes the following identifying devices:
1. Room identification
2. Aluminum letters
B. Refer to Schedule at end of Section for locations of signage.
A. Submit product data for all signs.
B. Submit schedule of all signs and shop drawings listing sign size, letterform, and
letter heights. Include construction details, layouts, size, and mounting methods.
C. Provide a layout plan showing location of each type of sign.
D. Provide one sample of EACH sign types for verification of materials, color, pattern,
overall quality, and for adherence to drawings and requirements indicated.
E. Provide patterns as needed for installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All identifying devices shall comply with requirements of 36 CFR 1191 "Americans
with Disabilities Act Accessory Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities".
B. Manufacturer specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum five years experience. Obtain signs from one source and a single
manufacturer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage
and installation.
B. Products should remain in original packaging until removal is necessary. Store
products in a dry, indoor location.
A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for
minimum 5 years.
MAHG121038 10 14 00 - 1 SIGNAGE

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc.
B. Gemini Incorporated
C. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
2.2 GRAPHIC PROCESS
A. All signs shall be manufactured using process equal to Mohawk Graphic Process
Series 1000 – Sand Carved.
1. Tactile characters shall be raised the required 1/32" inches from sign face.
Glue-on letters or etched backgrounds are not acceptable.
2. All text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Braille shall be separated
½" from the corresponding raised characters or symbols. Grade 2 Braille
translations to be provided by signage manufacturer.
3. All letters, numbers and/or symbols shall contrast with their background, either
light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light
background. Characters and background shall have a non-glare finish.
B. Sign material shall be Special Purpose SP125 decorative thermosetting highpressure
laminate. Material to be 1/8” thick laminate with a melamine resin
surface and a phenolic resin core which provides resistance to abrasion, stains,
alcohol, solvents, boiling water, and heat. The material shall be NEMA rated and
have flammability and smoke values that meet the standards for flammability of
interior materials.
C. Finish: Background color as indicated on Drawings.
D. Letterform shall be Helvetica Medium letters and UC/LC numbers.
E. Size of letters and numbers shall be as follows:
1. Room numbers shall be 1”.
2. Lettering for room ID signs shall be 5/8" high or as noted.
3. Symbol size shall be 4".
4. Standard Grade 2 braille shall be ½" below copy.
2.3 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Type A – Room ID signs with room number and/or function with Braille on one line
MAHG121038 10 14 00 - 2 SIGNAGE

of copy.
1. Size: 3" high x the length required based on copy requirements.
a. 3” high signs maximum 8 inches in length. If 3” sign over 8” in length,
convert to a 6” x 6” sign as specified herein.
B. Type B – Office signs with room number, function, and Braille.
1. Offices: Design equal to Mohawk Sign Systems M310-A
2. Size: 6" wide x 6" high.
C. Type C – Restroom signs with a 4" accessibility and gender symbol with the verbal
description placed directly below and followed by Grade 2 Braille.
2.4 ALUMINUM LETTERS
1. Size: 8" wide x 8" high.
A. Equal to cast aluminum letters, bronze finish as manufactured by Gemini
Incorporated.
B. Style: Helvetica (to match Keesler Air Force Base standard).
C. Size/quantity: as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer shall examine signs for defects, damage and compliance with
specifications. Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Room Identification Signs and Restroom Signs:
1. Mount on wall by opening adjacent to latch side of door in accordance with referenced
standard, centered 5 feet above the floor. Attach to wall with tamper resistant
aluminum or stainless steel screws. Attach screws into screw anchors when setting in
masonry. Color screw heads to match sign background color.
B. Building letters:
1. Mount level where indicated or directed, secured with concealed threaded
rods mounted on back of tablet inserted into cement filled holes in brickwork.
MAHG121038 10 14 00 - 3 SIGNAGE

3.2 CLEANING
A. Upon completion all identifying devices shall be undamaged, level, plumb, true to
line and securely anchored.
B. Clean all exposed surfaces and protect to prevent damage during remainder of
construction period.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 10 14 00 - 4 SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 21 13 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Compartment work includes the following where indicated on the Drawings:
1. Floor mounted, overhead braced toilet compartments.
2. Hardware for toilet compartments and partitions.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of toilet partitions for approval prior to
fabrication.
B. Color Samples: Submit full range of color samples for toilet compartments and
urinal screens.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop
drawings and fabrication where possible to ensure proper fitting of work. However,
allow for adjustments within specified tolerance wherever taking of field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work
for installation of compartments and cubicles and related work; coordinate delivery
with other work to avoid delays.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pre-finished materials to the project site in original, unopened cartons or
other packaging materials necessary to protect structure and finishes.
1. Label packages clearly with manufacturer’s name and item description.
2. Store materials in such packaging until installation.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Building shall be enclosed and provide complete protection from outside weather
prior to installation.
MAHG121038 10 21 13 - 1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. HDPE Partitions:
1. Scranton Products (Santana, Comtec Industries)
2. Bradley Corporation
3. PSISC (Partition Systems International of South Carolina) – Columbia
Partitions
A. HDPE:
2.3 ACCESSORIES
1. Doors and panels shall be 1" thick constructed from High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) resins. Partitions shall be fabricated from polymer
resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is
waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks
from pens, pencils, markers and other writing instruments. All plastic
components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking.
A. Hardware
1. All hardware to be 18-8, type-304 stainless steel with satin finish.
2. Hardware of chrome-plated “Zamak”, aluminum, or extruded plastic is
unacceptable.
B. Latch:
1. Sliding door latch shall be 14-gauge and shall slide on nylon track.
2. Sliding door latch shall require less than 5-lb force to operate. Twisting latch
operation will note acceptable.
3. Latch track shall be attached to door by machine screws into factory installed
threaded brass inserts.
4. Threaded brass inserts shall be factory installed for door hinge and latch
connections and shall withstand a direct pull exceeding 1,500 lbs. per insert.
5. Through-bolted, stainless steel, pin-in-head Torx sex bolt fasteners shall be
used at latch keeper-tostile connections and shall withstand direct pull force
exceeding 1,500 lbs. per fastener
MAHG121038 10 21 13 - 2 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

C. Hinges:
1. Hinge shall be 16-gauge continuous piano-hinge.
2. All doors shall be equipped with self-closing hinge.
3. Continuous piano-hinge shall be attached to door and stile by theft-resistant,
pin-in-head Torx stainless steel machine screws into factory installed,
threaded brass inserts
4. Fasteners secured directly into the core are not acceptable.
5. Door shall be furnished with two 11-gauge stainless steel door stop plates
with attached rubber bumpers to resist door from being kicked in/out beyond
stile.
6. Door stops and hinges shall be secured with stainless steel, pin-in-head Torx
machine screws into threaded brass inserts.
7. Threaded brass inserts shall withstand a direct pull force exceeding 1,500 lbs
per insert.
D. Clothes Hook:
1. Clothes Hook shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall project no more
than 1-1/8"
2. Clothes hook shall be secured by to door by through-bolted, theft-resistant,
pin-in-head Torx stainless steel screws. Through-bolted fasteners shall
withstand a direct pull force exceeding 1,500 lbs. per fastener.
E. Mounting Brackets
1. Through-bolted, stainless steel, pin-in-head Torx sex bolt fasteners shall be
used for panel-to-stile connections.
2. Mounting brackets shall be 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel and extend full
height of panel.
3. U-channels shall be furnished to secure panels to stiles.
4. Angle brackets shall be furnished to secure stiles-to-walls and panels-to-walls.
5. Fasteners at locations connecting panels-to-stiles shall utilize through-bolted,
stainless steel, pinin-head Torx sex bolt fasteners. Through-bolted fasteners
shall withstand direct pull force exceeding 1,500 lbs. per fastener.
6. Wall mounted urinal screen brackets shall be 11 gauge double thickness.
F. Leveling Device shall be 7-gauge, 3/16" hot rolled steel bar; chromate-treated and
zinc-plated; thru-bolted to base of solid color reinforced composite stile.
MAHG121038 10 21 13 - 3 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

G. Stile Shoe shall be one-piece, 4" high, type-304, 22-gauge stainless steel with
satin-finish. Top shall have 90° return to stile. Shoe will be composed of one-piece
of stainless steel and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall
line.
H. Headrail (Overhead-Braced) shall be satin-finish, extruded anodized aluminum
(.065 thick) with antigrip profile.
2.4 FABRICATION
2.2 FINISHES
A. HDPE:
1. Doors and pilasters shall be a minimum of 1 inch thick and all edges
machined to a radius of .250 inch and all exposed surfaces to be free of saw
marks.
B. Doors and dividing panels shall be mounted 14 inches above finished floor –
overall height as indicated on drawings, or 55 inches high if not indicated.
C. Stainless steel edging strips to be fastened to the bottom edge of all doors and
panels using vandal proof stainless steel fasteners.
D. Doors at compartments with grab bars shall provide 32-inch clear opening width
when open to 90-degree position.
A. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer’s full line.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which compartments and
cubicles and related items are to be installed, including supporting anchors and
supports installed by others, and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Doors and Pilasters:
1. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and
installation sequence. Install doors and pilasters rigid, straight, plumb and
level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and walls.
Secure pilasters to walls with continuous brackets. Locate wall brackets so
that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure pilaster
in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
MAHG121038 10 21 13 - 4 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 CLEANING
A. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return to fully closed position.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent
damage during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 10 21 13 - 5 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide toilet and other accessory items in locations as indicated on the Drawings
and as specified in the schedule herein.
1. Refer to Toilet Accessory Schedule on Drawings for complete schedule.
2. Contractor to coordinate installation and provide blocking in wall for all items
specified.
A. Product Data
1. For each accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to
material, dimensions, gauges, profiles, method of mounting, specified options,
and finishes.
B. Setting Drawings:
1. Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate
preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for
installation of anchorage devices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each
type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless
otherwise acceptable to Architect.
D. Comply with 36 CFR 1191 "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessory Guidelines
for Buildings and Facilities" including requirement regarding location and installed
structural strength of grab bars.
MAHG121038 10 28 00-1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
2.2 MATERIALS
2.3 GRAB BARS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment
B. American Specialties Inc (ASI)
C. Bradley Corporation
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gauge minimum
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings,
and flat products with finished edges, ASTM B 16: castings, ASTM B-30
C. Sheet steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A366, 20-gauge minimum,
unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as
required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, G60.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same materials as accessory unit
or of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Keys: Unless otherwise indicated, provide universal keys for access to toilet
accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide
minimum of 6-keys to Owner and obtain receipt.
A. Provide Stainless steel grab bar, 1-1/2” outside diameter, heavy-duty grab bars as
follows:
1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer’s standard flanges and anchorages, with
concealed mounting plate and snap flange cover to conceal mounting screws.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall surface and inside face of
bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer’s standard nonslip texture.
4. Locations and configurations as shown on Drawings.
MAHG121038 10 28 00-2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

B. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. A - 36” Grab Bar: equal to Bobrick, No. B-6806x36
2. B - 42” Grab Bar: equal to Bobrick, No. B-6806x42
3. I - 24” x 36” Grab Bar: equal to Bobrick, No. B-68616
2.4 TOILET PAPER DISPENSER
A. Fabricate of stainless steel with all-welded construction; exposed surfaces shall
have satin finish. Door shall be secured to cabinet with two rivets and equipped
with a flush tumbler lock. Unit shall dispense two standard-core toilet tissue rolls
up to 5-1/4” diameter. Extra roll shall automatically drop in place when bottom roll
is depleted. Spindles shall be theft-resistant, one-piece, molded ABS.
B. Mountings: Concealed type, manufacturer’s standard.
C. Controlled delivery not permitted.
D. Mounting Height: 28” to top of unit
E. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
2.5 MIRROR UNITS
1. C – Multi Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser: equal to Bobrick No. B-2888
A. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate frame with angle shapes of not
less than 18 gauge with square welded corners mitered and ground smooth.
Provide with No. 4 satin polished finish. 1/4 inch tempered glass.
B. Mountings: Concealed type, manufacturer’s standard.
C. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. D - 18 inch wide x 36 inch high: equal to Bobrick No. B-290 1836
2.6 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND WASTE RECEPTACLE
A. Surface-mounted touch-free roll towel dispenser and waste receptacle shall be
constructed of type-304 stainless steel with satin finish and all-welded
construction. Flange shall be 22-gauge, drawn and beveled, one-piece, seamless
construction. Cabinet shall be equipped with an interior stainless steel shelf. Door
shall be 18-gauge stainless steel and shall be secured to cabinet with a full-length,
stainless steel piano-hinge and equipped with two tumbler locks.
B. Touch-free, pull-towel mechanism dispenses one 12" length of towel per pull.
Accommodates up to 8" diameter rolls, 800 ft long. Roll paper towel mechanism
shall have automatic towel transfer system to dispense towels from stub roll up to
3-1/2" diameter before new roll starts to dispense. Lever shall be operable with
one hand and with less than 5 lb of force. R
MAHG121038 10 28 00-3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

C. Removable stainless steel waste receptacle shall be equipped with a tumbler lock.
Front and side edges of bottom and all top edges of waste receptacle shall be
hemmed for safe handling with interior clips for securing vinyl liner. Waste
receptacle minimum capacity: 12-gal.
D. Mountings: Concealed type, manufacturer’s standard.
E. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
2.7 SOAP DISPENSER
1. E – equal to Bobrick No. B-39619 (with LinerMate)
2. All units to be fully stocked at Substantial Completion. This includes paper
towels and bags in waste receptacle.
A. Vertical tank with 40 fl oz capacity. Corrosion-resistant valve dispensing liquid and
lotion soaps and synthetic detergents.
B. Fabrication: 22-gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Body is drawn, one-piece
seamless construction. Clear acrylic refill-indicator window. Locked, hinged
stainless steel lid for top filling.
C. Mountings: Concealed type, manufacturer’s standard.
D. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. F – equal to Bobrick No. B-2111
2.8 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL
A. Fabricate of stainless steel with all-welded construction; exposed surfaces shall
have satin finish. Cover shall be one piece seamless construction secured to
container with a full-length stainless steel piano-hinge.
B. Mountings: Concealed type, manufacturer’s standard.
C. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. G – provide one of the following:
a. Bobrick No. B-270
b. ASI No. 20852
c. Bradley Model 4A10
2.9 SHOWER CURTAIN / ROD
A. Rod: Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 18 gauge, 1-1/4” diameter rod.
Flanges are 2-1/2” square.
MAHG121038 10 28 00-4 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

B. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. H - Rod: equal to Bobrick, No. B-6047, lengths as required
2. H - Shower Curtain: equal to Bobrick No. 204-2
3. H - Hooks: equal to Bobrick, No. 204-1
2.10 GARMENT (ROBE) HOOKS
A. Surface-mounted hook shall be 11-gauge, type-304 stainless steel with satin finish
and all-welded construction. Unit projects 7/8” from wall.
B. Mountings: manufacturer’s standard.
C. Toilet Accessory Schedule Symbol / Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. J - Equal to Bobrick No. B-233
2.11 FOLDING ADA SHOWER STALL BENCH
A. Folding shower seat shall have a frame constructed of type-304, satin finish
stainless steel, 16-gauge, 1-1/4" square tubing, and 18- gauge, 1" diameter
seamless tubing. Seat shall be constructed of one-piece, 1/2” thick, waterresistant,
ivory colored solid phenolic with black edge.
B. Seat shall lock in upright position when not in use.
C. Mountings: attach to wall using two 3” diameter mounting flanges constructed of
type-304, 3/16” thick stainless steel with satin finish.
D. Location: provide at each shower location.
E. Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. Equal to Bobrick No. B-5181
2.12 MOP HOLDER WITH SHELF
A. Utility shelf with mop/broom holders and rag hooks shall be type-304 stainless
steel with all-welded construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Shelf
shall be 18 gauge, 8" deep with 3/4 inch return edges. Unit shall have 4 16-gauge
hooks and 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders.
B. Mounting Height: as directed by Architect
C. Location: provide 1 at each mop sink location.
D. Manufacturer / Model No.:
1. Bobrick No. B-239x34
MAHG121038 10 28 00-5 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

2. ASI No. 1308-3
3. Bradley Model 9933
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must examine substrates, previously placed inserts and anchorages
necessary for mounting of toilet accessories and other conditions under which
installation is to occur, and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 CLEANING
A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using
fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer
of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly.
A. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 10 28 00-6 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 44 13 – FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide fully charged portable fire extinguisher where noted. The types of fire
extinguishers are as follows:
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Semi-Recessed Cabinet mounted (FEC)
2. Bracket Mounted (FE)
A. NFPA1 0-Portable Fire Extinguishers
B. Americans with Disabilities Act 1990- Maximum 4 cabinet projection for corridors.
A. Product Data: For extinguishers and cabinets. Include installation instructions for
cabinets and brackets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers.
B. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, and accessories by single manufacturer.
C. Conform to Americans with Disabilities Act 1990 on maximum cabinet projection of
C in corridors where necessary.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries (Activar, Inc.)
B. Larsens Manufacturing Company
C. Potter Roemer
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Type 1 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FEC):
1. Style shall be aluminum, semi-recessed sized for the applicable fire
MAHG121038 10 44 13 - 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

extinguisher as specified herein.
a. Equal to J.L. Industries “Academy Series, Model #1822W10”.
(1) Door Style: Vertical Duo with Saf-T-Lok and ADA pull
(2) Door Glazing: Clear 1/4 inch Acrylic
b. Door & Trim Construction: Clear anodized aluminum. Flush cabinet doors
with a 5/8” door stop are attached by a continuous hinge and equipped
with zinc-plated handle and roller catch. All models have 1-3/4” trim on
face and door.
c. Trim Style & Depth: 4” Rolled Edge with recessed ADAC pull.
d. Tub: The tub is constructed of cold rolled steel with white powder-coat
finish standard.
B. Fire Extinguisher Brackets (FE): Provide Extinguisher Brackets for the applicable
fire extinguisher as indicated below in locations as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Dry Chemical Type (Type 1): J.L. Industries “Model Cosmic 5E”
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated,
or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of goveming
authorities.
B. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturers instructions.
C. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure,
square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Provide and verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 10 44 13 - 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

SECTION 10 51 13 – METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide metal lockers in locations indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing locker types, sizes and quantities:
1. Dimensioned drawings including plans, elevations, and sections to show locker
locations and interfaces with adjacent substrates.
2. Details of assembly, erection, anchorage and clearance requirements.
C. Color Charts: Provide color charts showing manufacturer's available colors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single manufacturer, including
necessary accessories, fittings and fasteners.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation.
Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Penco Products, Inc.
B. Republic Storage Systems (All Welded Ventilated Lockers)
C. ASI Storage Solutions (Competitor All Welded Lockers)
MAHG121038 10 51 13 - 1 METAL LOCKERS

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Prime grade mild cold-rolled sheet steel free from surface imperfection, capable
of taking a high-grade enamel finish and in compliance with ASTM A1008.
B. Steel: Sheet steel components shall be fabricated using zinc-coated steel free from
surface imperfection, capable of taking a high-grade enamel finish and in compliance
with ASTM A879.
C. Hooks: Zinc plated forged steel, ball ends.
D. Bolts and Nuts: Zinc plated truss fin head bolts and hex nuts.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. “All Welded Locker” as manufactured by Penco Products Inc. with no legs for
installation on concrete housekeeping pad.
1. Provide sizes per the following schedule (locations as indicated on Drawings):
a. Type 1 – 12" deep, 12" wide and an opening height of 36"
1.) Double Tier – overall height of 72”.
2.4 COMPONENTS – LOCKER BODY
A. All locker body components made of cold rolled steel specially formed for added
strength and rigidity and to ensure tight joints at fastening points.
B. Locker Body: All-Welded Lockers:
1. Sides, Bottoms, Tops, and Shelves: 16 gauge steel with perforated sides
2. Backs: Solid 18 gauge steel.
3. Doors: 14 gauge steel.
a. Ventilation: 3/4 inch wide by 1-1/2 inch high diamond-shaped perforations.
4. Sides: Vertical frames and sides.
a. Intermediate vertical side frames: Frame channel securely welded to locker side.
b. Ventilation: 3/4 inch wide by 1-1/2 inch high diamond-shaped perforations.
5. Tops: Notched and formed sheet; one continuous sloped top for each group of
lockers.
a. Continuous Sloped Hoods: 16 gauge steel, slope rise equal to 1/3 of the locker
depth, plus a 1 inch vertical rise at front.
1.) Slip joints without visible fasteners at splice locations.
MAHG121038 10 51 13 - 2 METAL LOCKERS

2.) Provide necessary end closures.
3.) Finish to match lockers.
6. Bottoms: Notched and formed sheet; one continuous bottom for each group of
lockers, suitable for anchoring to wood or concrete bases.
7. Shelves: Flanged four sides with additional return flange on front edge to increase
strength.
8. Door frames, 16 gauge formed in a channel shape with continuous vertical door
strikes.
C. Legs: Furnish each group of lockers with four 4-inch high 14 gauge steel legs welded to
locker bottom.
D. Integral Metal Base: 4-inch high 16 gauge steel channel, welded to the locker bottom.
E. Locker Doors: One piece sheet steel.
1. Single Point Latch Doors: 14 gauge door reinforced by a full height 3-1/2 inch wide,
18 gauge vertical pan welded to the top, bottom and hinge side flanges and rear of
door skin on 12 inch, 15 inch and 18 inch wide doors. Provide a horizontal pan for
doors wider than 18 inches.
2. Provide holes for attaching number plates.
3. Ventilation: 3/4 inch wide by 1-1/2 inch high diamond-shaped perforations.
F. Continuous Hinges: Continuous piano hinge for the full height of the door.
2.5 COMPONENTS – DOOR HANDLES AND LATCHING
A. Double Tier Lockers:
1. Single-point latching:
a. Recess handle in door.
b. Integral Pocket and Pull: 22 gauge brushed stainless steel securely fastened to
door with two lugs and a positive tamper-resistant decorative fastener.
1.) Pocket Depth: Sufficient to prevent a combination padlock, built-in
combination lock, or key lock from protruding beyond door face.
2.) Pull: Formed in pocket.
3.) Padlock Staple: Protruding through pocket.
c. Provide lock hole cover plate for use with padlocks.
d. Locking Device: 11 gauge steel hasp welded to locker frame; include surface for
engaging the bolt of a built-in combination or key lock and anti-pry lug and slot
MAHG121038 10 51 13 - 3 METAL LOCKERS

2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Hooks:
to deter prying open when locked.
e. Firmly secure rubber silencers to locker frame.
1. Two single-prong wall hooks and one double-prong ceiling hook.
B. Number Plates: Provide each locker with a polished aluminum number plate, 2-1/4
inches wide by 1 inch high, with black numerals not less than 3/8 inch high; attach to
face of door with two aluminum rivets.
C. Finished End Panels: Minimum 16 gauge steel formed to match locker depth and
height, 1 inch edge dimension; finish to match lockers. Install with concealed fasteners.
D. Front Fillers: 20 gauge steel formed in an angle shape, with 20 gauge slip joint angles
formed in an angle shape with double bend on one leg forming a pocket to
provide adjustable mating with angle filler.
1. Attachment by means of concealed fasteners.
2. Finish to match lockers.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, without warp, with metal faces flat and free of distortion.
B. Welded Lockers: Pre-assemble lockers by welding into one piece structures in
groupings most practical for job requirements, welds free of burrs; no bolts, nuts, or
rivets allowed in assembly of main locker groups.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Enamel powder coat paint finish electrostatically applied and properly cured to
manufacturer’s specifications for optimum performance. Finishes containing volatile
organic compounds and subject to out-gassing are not acceptable. Locker exterior and
interior shall be painted the same color.
1. Powder Coat Plus - Dry Thickness: 2 to 2.2 mils
2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates and bases have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate and bases are the responsibility of another installer, notify Contracting
MAHG121038 10 51 13 - 4 METAL LOCKERS

Officer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal lockers and accessories at locations shown in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install lockers plumb, level, and square.
C. Anchor lockers to floor and wall at 36 inches or less, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
D. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
E. Install sloping tops and metal fillers using concealed fasteners. Provide flush hairline
joints against adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide end bases on exposed ends.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate without binding. Verify that latches are operating
satisfactorily.
B. Adjust built-in locks to prevent binding of dial or key and ensure smooth operation prior
to substantial completion.
C. Touch-up with factory-supplied paint and repair or replace damaged products before
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
MAHG121038 10 51 13 - 5 METAL LOCKERS

SECTION 21 13 17.00 10
DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
05/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA B300
AWWA B301
AWWA C651
AWWA C652
(2004) Hypochlorites
(2004) Liquid Chlorine
(2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting
Water Mains
(2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.1
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.21
ASME B16.9
ASME B18.2.2
(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
(2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
(2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
(2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
(1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex
Nuts
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 135/A 135M
ASTM A 183
ASTM A 449
(2009) Standard Specification for Electric-
Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
(2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
(2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
General Use
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 1

ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM A 536
ASTM A 795/A 795M
ASTM F 436
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
(2008) Standard Specification for Black and
Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded
and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection
Use
(2009) Hardened Steel Washers
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM P7825a
FM P7825b
(2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection
(2005) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 13
NFPA 24
(2010) Installation of Sprinkler Systems
(2010) Standard for the Installation of
Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
(NICET)
NICET 1014-7
(2003) Program Detail Manual for
Certification in the Field of Fire Protection
Engineering Technology (Field Code 003)
Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler System Layout
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Fire Prot Dir
(2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
a. Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as
required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate
interference with other construction. Install sprinkler over and under
ducts, piping and platforms when such equipment can negatively affect
or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage.
b. Provide dry pipe sprinkler system in all areas of the building.
The sprinkler system shall provide fire sprinkler protection for the
entire area. Except as modified herein, design and install the system
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 2

in accordance with NFPA 13. Pipe sizes, which are not indicated on the
drawings, shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Gridded
systems shall not be used.
c. Design any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated
on the drawings or are not specified herein, including locating
sprinklers, piping, and equipment, and size piping and equipment. Base
the design of the sprinkler system on hydraulic calculations, and the
other provisions specified herein.
1.2.1 Hydraulic Design
Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.10 gpm
per square foot over the hydraulically most demanding 1,500 square feet of
floor area indicated as Light Hazard and 0.15 gpm per square foot over the
hydraulically most demanding 1,500 square feet of floor area indicated as
Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. Provide hydraulic calculations in accordance with
the Area\Density Method of NFPA 13. Water velocity in the piping shall not
exceed 20 ft/s.
1.2.1.1 Hose Demand
Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 100 gpm for Light Hazard
Occupancies and 250 gpm for Oridinary Hazard Occupancies to the sprinkler
system demand at the fire hydrant closest to the point where the water
service enters the building.
1.2.1.2 Basis for Calculations
. Water supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection to
existing . Base hydraulic calculations upon the Hazen-Williams formula with
a "C" value of 120 for galvanized steel piping, 140 for new cement-lined
ductile-iron piping, and 100 for existing underground piping.
a. Outline hydraulic calculations as in NFPA 13, except that
calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
specifically for fire protection system design using the design data
shown on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch
lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall substantiate that the
design area used in the calculations is the most demanding
hydraulically.
b. Plot water supply curves and system requirements on semilogarithmic
graph paper so as to present a summary of the complete
hydraulic calculation. Provide a summary sheet listing sprinklers in
the design area and their respective hydraulic reference points,
elevations, actual discharge pressures and actual flows. Indicate
elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes). Documentation shall
identify each pipe individually and the nodes connected thereto.
Indicate for each pipe the diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction
loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe,
equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient.
1.2.2 Sprinkler Coverage
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 3

Uniformly space sprinklers on branch lines. In buildings protected by
automatic sprinklers, provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the
building. This includes, but is not limited to, telephone rooms, electrical
equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer rooms, and other
electrical and mechanical spaces. Coverage per sprinkler shall be in
accordance with NFPA 13, but not exceeding 100 square feet for extra hazard
occupancies, 130 square feet for ordinary hazard occupancies, and 225 square
feet for light hazard occupancies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33
00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G
Three copies of the Sprinkler System Drawings, no later than 21
days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation. The
drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working
plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Drawings shall include plan and
elevation views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the
allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance.
As-Built Drawings
As-built shop drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the
Final Tests.
SD-03 Product Data
List of the Submittals
A list of the Fire Protection Related Submittals, no later than 7
days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist.
Materials and Equipment; G
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler System
Drawings for all items specified herein. Highlight the data to
show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for
consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance
with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a complete
equipment list that includes equipment description, model number
and quantity.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and
equipment specified.
Fire Protection Specialist; G
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 4

The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire
Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system shop
drawings and hydraulic calculations.
Installer Qualifications; G
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed
Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
Protection Specialist Qualifications.
Onsite Training; G
Proposed Onsite Training schedule, at least 14 days prior to the
start of related training.
SD-05 Design Data
Sway Bracing
For systems that are required to be protected against damage from
earthquakes, load calculations for sizing of sway bracing.
Hydraulic Calculations; G
Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic
reference points and pipe segments.
SD-06 Test Reports
Preliminary Tests; G
Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days
prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time
to begin Preliminary Tests, submitted with the Preliminary Tests
Procedures.
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later
that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The
Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping.
All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the
Fire Protection Specialist.
Final Acceptance Test; G
Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14
days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and
time to begin Final Acceptance Test, submitted with the Final
Acceptance Test Procedures. Notification shall be provided at
least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test.
Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material &
Test Certificates.
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 5

Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no
later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed by
the Fire Protection Specialist.
SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist; G
Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification
by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is
installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test
Reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14
days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and
tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine
maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified
wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment. Each service organization
submitted shall be capable of providing 4 hour on-site response to
a service call on an emergency basis.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes
advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it
appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
govern. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted
to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist
Perform the work specified in this section under the supervision of and
certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is a registered professional
engineer and a Full Member of the Society of Fire Protection Engineers or
who is certified as a Level III Technician by National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the Automatic Sprinkler
System Layout subfield of Fire Protection Engineering Technology in
accordance with NICET 1014-7. The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare
a list of the submittals from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to
the successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s). The submittals
identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed
and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to the
Government. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in
the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 6

in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for
at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a
period of not less than 6 months.
1.4.2 Installer Qualifications
Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System
Installer. The Installer shall be regularly engaged in the installation of
the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and
shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have
performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.
1.4.3 Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings, on reproducible full-size mylar film, as specified
herein and in the Submittals paragraph; update the Shop drawings to reflect
as-built conditions after all related work is completed. Each set of
drawings shall include the following:
a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings
listed in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device
symbols, nomenclature, and conventions used.
b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which clearly
show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic separation
assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections, drains, and other
applicable details necessary to clearly describe the proposed arrangement.
Indicate each type of fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing
couplings, and welded joints..
c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on
branch lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to
adjacent walls; from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed
mains, cross-mains and branch lines to finished floor and roof or
ceiling. A detail shall show the dimension from the sprinkler and
sprinkler deflector to the ceiling in finished areas.
d. Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical
branch line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of
each typical sprinkler above finished floor.
e. Details of each type of riser assembly; air supply system and
piping; pipe hanger; sway bracing for earthquake protection, and
restraint of underground water main at point-of-entry into the
building, and electrical devices and interconnecting wiring.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner to
preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations,
dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall either
be capped or plugged until installed.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 7

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for
maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be
included.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's
name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
Materials and Equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory Mutual and listed
in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear
in this specification, such shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM
P7825a and FM P7825b.
2.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Steel Pipe
Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be galvanized as permitted by
NFPA 13 and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A 795/A 795M,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe in which threads or grooves are
cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) of 1.0
or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed. Pipe shall be
marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM
designation.
2.4.2 Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe
Fittings shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.
Fittings that sprinklers, drop nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are screwed
into shall be threaded type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings,
fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented
welded fittings shall not be used.
2.4.3 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
shall be the product of the same manufacturer; segmented welded fittings
shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 8

conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM
A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be of silicon compound and approved
for dry fire protection systems. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills
the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be
heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or
zinc electroplated.
2.4.4 Flanges
Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be nonasbestos
compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.
2.4.4.1 Bolts
Bolts shall be ASTM A 449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than three full
threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque.
2.4.4.2 Nuts
Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2 .
2.4.4.3 Washers
Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers
shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.
2.4.5 Pipe Hangers
Hangers shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b and
of the type suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and
size to be supported.
2.5 SPRINKLERS
Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be
used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Areas where
sprinklers are connected to or are a part of the dry pipe system shall be
considered unheated and subject to freezing. Temperature classification
shall be ordinary . Sprinklers in high heat areas including attic spaces or
in close proximity to unit heaters shall have temperature classification in
accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.
2.5.1 Pendent Sprinkler
Pendent sprinkler heads shall be the dry pendent type, unless otherwise
indicated. Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb
type, recessed type with nominal 1/2 inch orifice. Pendent sprinklers
shall have a polished chrome finish. Assembly shall include an integral
escutcheon. Maximum length shall not exceed the maximum length indicated in
UL Fire Prot Dir.
2.5.2 Upright Sprinkler
Upright sprinkler shall be brass and shall have a nominal 1/2 inch orifice.
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 9

2.5.3 Corrosion Resistant Sprinkler
Corrosion resistant sprinkler shall be upright or pendent type installed in
locations as indicated. Corrosion resistant coatings shall be factoryapplied
by the sprinkler manufacturer.
2.6 DISINFECTING MATERIALS
2.6.1 Liquid Chlorine
Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.
2.6.2 Hypochlorites
Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
2.7.1 Sprinkler Cabinet
Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be
packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of each
type required shall be provided.
2.7.2 Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.
2.7.3 Pipe Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.
2.7.4 Sprinkler Guard
Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
located as indicated.
2.8 DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
Double-check backflow prevention assembly is existing to remain .
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 10

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein.
3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST
The Fire Protection Specialist shall inspect the sprinkler system
periodically during the installation to assure that the sprinkler system
installed in accordance with the contract requirements. The Fire Protection
Specialist shall witness the preliminary and final tests, and shall sign the
test results. The Fire Protection Specialist, after completion of the
system inspections and a successful final test, shall certify in writing
that the system has been installed in accordance with the contract
requirements. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the
Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working days after the
discrepancy is discovered.
3.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
3.4.1 Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage
Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes. This
requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install the
seismic protection of the system piping, including sway bracing as required,
in accordance with UFC 3-13-04, NFPA 13 and Annex A. Include the required
features identified therein that are applicable to the specific piping
system.
3.4.2 Piping in Exposed Areas
Exposed piping shall be installed so as not diminish exit access widths,
corridors, or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain
piping, shall be installed to provide maximum headroom.
3.4.3 Piping in Finished Areas
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed
spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.
3.4.4 Pendent Sprinklers Locations
Sprinklers installed in the pendent position shall be of the listed dry
pendent type, unless otherwise indicated. Dry pendent sprinklers shall be
of the required length to permit the sprinkler to be threaded directly into
a branch line tee. Hangers shall be provided on arm-overs to drop nipples
supplying pendent sprinklers when the arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel
pipe or 6 inches for copper tubing. Dry pendent sprinkler assemblies shall
be such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of the uniform
depth throughout the finished space. Pendent sprinklers in suspended
ceilings shall be a minimum of 6 inches from ceiling grid. Recessed pendent
sprinklers shall be installed such that the distance from the sprinkler
deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed the
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 11

manufacturer's listed range and shall be of uniform depth throughout the
finished area.
3.4.5 Upright Sprinklers
Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings
between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.
3.4.6 Pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction site.
Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by NFPA 13.
Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with the
manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe material,
wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings and fittings shall be from the
same manufacturer. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations,
such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on
the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.4.7 Reducers
Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing
fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings will
not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.
3.4.8 Pipe Penetrations
Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger
fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or
masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with
pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile
iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or floor
and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide required
clearance between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. The
space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral
wool insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or
floors, pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor
penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at
both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but pliable
mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
3.4.9 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through which
piping passes.
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 12

3.4.10 Inspector's Test Connection
Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe
connected to the remote branch line ; a test valve located approximately 7
feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest
orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a painted metal identification
sign affixed to the valve with the words "Inspector's Test." The discharge
orifice shall be located outside the building wall directed so as not to
cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow
discharge.
3.4.11 Drains
Provide main drain piping to discharge at a safe point outside the building
. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as indicated and as required by NFPA
13. When the capacity of trapped sections of pipe is less than 3 gallons,
the auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 1/2 inch and a
plug or nipple and cap. When the capacity of trapped sections of piping is
more than 3 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of two 1 inch valves
and one 2 x 12 inch condensate nipple or equivalent, located in an
accessible location. Tie-in drains shall be provided for multiple adjacent
trapped branch pipes and shall be a minimum of 1 inch in diameter. Tie-in
drain lines shall be pitched a minimum of 1/2 inch per 10 feet.
3.4.12 Identification Signs
Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.5 ELECTRICAL WORK
Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in
accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm signal
wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be in
accordance with Section 28 31 00.00 10 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM,
DIRECT CURRENT LOOP and Section 28 31 64.00 10 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE All wiring for supervisory and alarm circuits shall be
#14 AWG solid copper installed in metallic tubing or conduit. Wiring color
code shall remain uniform throughout the system.
3.6 DISINFECTION
After all system components are installed and hydrostatic test(s) are
completed, the entire sprinkler system shall be disinfected. Flush all
sprinkler system piping with potable water until any entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating
material. Remove the flushing fitting of each cross main and of each grid
branch line and then back-flush through the sprinkler main drain.
a. The water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA
C651 and AWWA C652. Feed either a hypochlorite solution (using a
hypochlorinator) or liquid chlorine (using a solution-fed chlorinator
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 13

and booster pump) into the system at a constant rate of 50 parts per
million (ppm) until the entire system is filled.
b. Monitor the chlorine residual level in the water at six hour
intervals for a period of 24 hours. If the residual chlorine is below
25 ppm in any interval sampled, flush all piping and repeat the
chlorination procedure. Open and close each valve in the system
several times during this 24 hour period to ensure its proper
disinfection. Following the 24-hour period, verify that no less than
25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the system. After the chlorine
residual level is successfully maintained at or above 25 ppm for a 24
hour period, flush the system with water from the distribution system
until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than one ppm.
c. Take additional samples of water at locations specified by the
Contracting Officer in disinfected containers for bacterial
examination. Test these samples in an approved laboratory for total
coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal,
and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA Standard Method SM9223,
Total Coliforms-PA Test.
d. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of
coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in
two separate test samples taken 24 hours apart. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.7 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.8 PRELIMINARY TESTS
The system, including the underground water mains and the aboveground piping
and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and
components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior
piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working
pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon
completion of specified tests, complete certificates as specified in
paragraph SUBMITTALS.
3.8.1 Aboveground Piping
3.8.1.1 Hydrostatic Testing
Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA
13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system operating
pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours. There
shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when the system is
subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall be read from a
gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or portion being
tested.
3.8.1.2 Air Pressure Test
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 14

As specified in NFPA 13, an air pressure leakage test at 50 psi shall be
conducted for 24 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure in excess
of 1.5 psi for the 24 hours. This air pressure test is in addition to the
required hydrostatic test.
3.8.2 Testing of Alarm Devices
Each alarm initiating device, including pressure alarm switch, low air
pressure switch, valve supervisory switch, and electrically-operated switch
shall be tested for proper operation. Water motor alarm shall be tested.
The connecting circuit to the building fire alarm system and to the basewide
fire report system shall be inspected and tested.
3.8.3 Trip Tests of Dry Pipe Valves
Each dry pipe valve shall be trip-tested by reducing normal system air
pressure through operation the inspector's test connection. Systems
equipped with quick opening devices shall be first tested without the
operation of the quick opening device and then with it in operation. Test
results will be witnessed and recorded. Test results shall include the
number of seconds elapsed between the time the test valve is opened and
tripping of the dry valve; trip-point air pressure of the dry pipe valve;
water pressure prior to valve tripping; and number of seconds elapsed
between time the inspector's test valve is opened and water reaches the
orifice.
3.8.4 Main Drain Flow Test
Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be
made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual
pressures shall be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph
SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted each time
after a main control valve is shut and opened.
3.9 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST
Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has
been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final
Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation
of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing
of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow
alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the
main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the
open position. Each system shall be completely drained after each trip
test. The system air supply system shall be tested to verify that system
pressure is restored in the specified time. In addition, the Fire
Protection Specialist shall have available copies of as-built drawings and
certificates of tests previously conducted. The installation shall not be
considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and
test documentation is properly completed and received. After the system has
been tested and drained, the system shall be drained periodically for at
least 2 weeks until it can be assured that water from the system has been
removed.
3.10 ONSITE TRAINING
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 15

The Fire Protection Specialist and Manufacturer's Representative shall
conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as
designated by the Contracting Officer. Training shall be provided for a
period of 8 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is
functionally complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. The Onsite
Training shall cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating
and Maintenance Instructions.
-- End of Section --
Section 21 13 17.00 10 Page 16

SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
02/10
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 1010
(2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically
Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
(2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009; Errata
2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings, I-P Edition
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1003
ASSE 1005
ASSE 1010
ASSE 1018
(2001; Errata, 2003) Performance Requirements
for Water Pressure Reducing Valves
(1999) Water Heater Drain Valves 3/4 Inch
Size
(2004) Water Hammer Arresters
(2001) Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable,
Water Supplied
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA B300
AWWA B301
AWWA C203
AWWA C606
AWWA C651
(2004) Hypochlorites
(2004) Liquid Chlorine
(2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and
Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
(2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
(2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting
Water Mains
Section 22 00 00 Page 1

AWWA C652
(2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
AWS B2.2
(2004; Errata 2004) Specification for Filler
Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
(1991) Brazing Procedure and Performance
Qualification
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A112.14.1
ASME A112.19.2
ASME A112.19.3
ASME A112.36.2M
ASME A112.6.1M
ASME A112.6.3
ASME A112.6.4
ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.12
ASME B16.15
ASME B16.18
ASME B16.21
ASME B16.22
ASME B16.23
ASME B16.24
(2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves
(2008) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing
Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water
Closets and Urinals
(2008) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures
(1991; R 2008) Cleanouts
(1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for
Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
(2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench
Drains
(2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony Drains
(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose
(Inch)
(2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
(2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes
125 and 250
(2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings
(2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
(2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
(2002; Errata 2003; R 2006) Cast Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
(2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, 1500, and 2500
Section 22 00 00 Page 2

ASME B16.29
ASME B16.3
ASME B16.34
ASME B16.39
ASME B16.4
ASME B16.5
ASME B31.1
ASME B31.5
ASME B40.100
ASME BPVC SEC IX
ASME CSD-1
(2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
(2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
(2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding
End
(2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded
Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300
(2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
(2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24
(2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power
Piping
(2006) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer
Components
(2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
(2009) Control and Safety Devices for
Automatically Fired Boilers
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 105/A 105M
ASTM A 183
ASTM A 193/A 193M
ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 515/A 515M
(2009) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Forgings for Piping Applications
(2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
(2009) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel
and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2003; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
Section 22 00 00 Page 3

ASTM A 516/A 516M
ASTM A 518/A 518M
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM A 536
ASTM A 733
ASTM A 74
ASTM A 888
ASTM B 117
ASTM B 152/B 152M
ASTM B 306
ASTM B 32
ASTM B 370
ASTM B 42
ASTM B 43
ASTM B 584
ASTM B 75
(2006) Standard Specification for Pressure
Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderateand
Lower-Temperature Service
(1999; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron
Castings
(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
(2003e1; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
(2009) Standard Specification for Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings
(2009) Standard Specification for Hubless
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary
and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus
(2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
(2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Drainage Tube (DWV)
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
(2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
(2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes
(2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications
(2002) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube
Section 22 00 00 Page 4

ASTM B 813
ASTM B 828
ASTM B 88
ASTM B 88M
ASTM C 1053
ASTM C 564
ASTM C 920
ASTM D 1004
ASTM D 1785
ASTM D 2000
ASTM D 2235
ASTM D 2239
ASTM D 2241
ASTM D 2447
ASTM D 2464
(2000; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
(2002) Standard Practice for Making Capillary
Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper
Alloy Tube and Fittings
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
(2005) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube (Metric)
(2000; R 2005) Standard Specification for
Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for
Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications
(2009) Standard Specification for Rubber
Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
(2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric
Joint Sealants
(2009) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic
Film and Sheeting
(2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40,
80, and 120
(2008) Standard Classification System for
Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
(2004) Standard Specification for Solvent
Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
(2003) Standard Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
(2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR
Series)
(2003) Standard Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40
and 80, Based on Outside Diameter
(2006) Standard Specification for Threaded
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80
Section 22 00 00 Page 5

ASTM D 2466
ASTM D 2467
ASTM D 2564
ASTM D 2661
ASTM D 2665
ASTM D 2672
ASTM D 2683
ASTM D 2737
ASTM D 2822
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M
ASTM D 2855
ASTM D 2996
ASTM D 3035
ASTM D 3122
ASTM D 3138
(2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40
(2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80
(2004e1) Standard Specification for Solvent
Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems
(2008) Standard Specification for
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
Pipe and Fittings
(2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings
(1996a; R 2009) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using
Solvent Cement
(2004) Standard Specification for Socket-Type
Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-
Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
(2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
(2005) Asphalt Roof Cement
(2009b) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems
(1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for Making
Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
(2001; R 2007e1) Filament-Wound "Fiberglass"
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Pipe
(2008) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
(1995; R 2009) Solvent Cements for Styrene-
Rubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
(2004) Solvent Cements for Transition Joints
Between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure
Piping Components
Section 22 00 00 Page 6

ASTM D 3139
ASTM D 3212
ASTM D 3261
ASTM D 3311
ASTM D 4101
ASTM D 4551
ASTM D 638
ASTM E 1
ASTM E 96/E 96M
ASTM F 1760
ASTM F 2389
ASTM F 409
ASTM F 437
ASTM F 438
ASTM F 439
ASTM F 441/F 441M
(1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
(2007) Standard Specification for Joints for
Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals
(2003) Standard Specification for Butt Heat
Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
(2009a) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic
Fittings Patterns
(2009) Standard Specification for
Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion
Materials
(1996e1; R 2008) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Flexible Concealed Water-Containment
Membrane
(2008) Standard Test Method for Tensile
Properties of Plastics
(2007) Standard Specification for ASTM
Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers
(2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor
Transmission of Materials
(2001; R 2005e1) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe
Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content
2007e1) Standard Specification for Pressurerated
Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems
(2002; R 2008) Thermoplastic Accessible and
Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings
(2009) Standard Specification for Threaded
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
(2009) Standard Specification for Socket-Type
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
(2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80
(2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80
Section 22 00 00 Page 7

ASTM F 442/F 442M
ASTM F 477
ASTM F 493
ASTM F 628
ASTM F 877
ASTM F 891
(2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR)
(2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric
Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
(2004) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings
(2008) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
Pipe with a Cellular Core
(2007) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic
Hot- and Cold- Water Distribution Systems
(2009) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301
CISPI 310
(2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste,
and Vent Piping Applications
(2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
Piping Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015
(1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)
CSA/AM Z21.10.3
CSA/AM Z21.22
(2004; Addenda A 2007; Addenda B 2008) Gas
Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage Water Heaters
With Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu Per Hour,
Circulating and Instantaneous
(1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R
2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS
(IAPMO)
IAPMO PS 117 (2005) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gsktd W/
Nail CU & CU Alloy Fittings for Install On CU
Tubing
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
Section 22 00 00 Page 8

ICC A117.1
ICC IPC
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities
(2009) International Plumbing Code
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110
MSS SP-25
MSS SP-44
MSS SP-58
MSS SP-67
MSS SP-69
MSS SP-70
MSS SP-71
MSS SP-72
MSS SP-73
MSS SP-78
MSS SP-80
MSS SP-83
MSS SP-85
(1996) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
(2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,
Fittings, Flanges and Unions
(2006) Steel Pipeline Flanges
(2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports
- Materials, Design and Manufacture
(2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly Valves
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application
(2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
(1999) Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged
or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
(2003) Brazing Joints for Copper and Copper
Alloy Pressure Fittings
(2005a) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
(2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
Valves
(2006) Standard for Class 3000 Steel Pipe
Unions Socket Welding and Threaded
(2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe & Angle
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
NACE SP0169
(2007) Control of External Corrosion on
Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
Section 22 00 00 Page 9

NEMA 250
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 11
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF 14
(2008) Plastics Piping System Components and
Related Materials
NSF 61 (2009) Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA-01
(1998) Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive
Construction
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI WH 201
(2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE J1508
(2009) Hose Clamp Specifications
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA SM 9223
Energy Star
PL 93-523
(2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency
Labeling System
(1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED
(2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer
Products
Section 22 00 00 Page 10

21 CFR 175 Indirect Food Additives: Adhesives and
Components of Coatings
40 CFR 50.12 National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air
Quality Standards for Lead
PL 109-58
Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 174
(2004; Rev thru Apr 2009) Household Electric
Storage Tank Water Heaters
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Plumbing System; G,
Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts,
instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the
requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the
Plumbing Code.. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system
including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions
for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams
and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams.
Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance
and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported
other than as indicated, details shall include loadings and
proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans, elevations,
views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.
Fixtures; (LEED)
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow
rate.
Flush valve water closets
Wall hung lavatories
Service sinks
Section 22 00 00 Page 11

Plastic shower stalls
Pumps; G
Shower Faucets; G
Welding
Plumbing System
SD-06 Test Reports
A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and
identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.
Vibration-Absorbing Features; G,
Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement,
foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting.
Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and
spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to
adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
the final position of controls.
Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies; G, .
Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in
accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the
state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, the
Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative test the
device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as
intended. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of
the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the
tests.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Section 22 00 00 Page 12

Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and
installation shall conform to the code.
Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts
furnished comply with the specified requirements.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System; G, .
1.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed
satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000
hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be
shown.
1.3.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a
certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.3.4 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted
for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these
Section 22 00 00 Page 13

publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of
Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements
are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included
in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of
Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in
the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by
the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and
the FAR.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Welding
Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using
performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders
shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures
qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another
employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The Contracting
Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall
be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators
shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent
record.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with
ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with
PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Section 22 00 00 Page 14

The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent
instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4
man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are
made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II.
Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe
fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic
pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF 14 and shall be NSF listed
for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used
for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW."
Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional requirements of
Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size and shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61 and ASTM F
2389. Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light shall be
provided with a Factory applied UV resistant coating.. Pipe threads (except
dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and
fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment
containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line
devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops,
valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and
NSF 61, Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains,
lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, residential ice makers, supply
stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking must
meet the requirements of NSF 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe
shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl
Section 22 00 00 Page 15

spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air
plenums. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in a pressure piping system in
buildings greater than three stories including any basement levels.
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground.
Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil
pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast
Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the
following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74, AWWA
C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 (Grade 65-45-12) .
Copper ASTM A 536.
d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in
accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick,
and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or
Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self
centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall
be bonded with NBR.
e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M,
BCuP-5.
f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for
use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have
a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents;
contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.
h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to
ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.
i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot
type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.
k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D 2000, maximum temperature 230
degrees F.
l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.
m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel,
ASTM A 183.
Section 22 00 00 Page 16

n. Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure
Piping Components: ASTM D 3138.
o. Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2235.
p. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2564 and ASTM D
2855.
q. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 493.
r. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc.,
shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the
manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange
material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange material
shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M
for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength
with material conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.
s. Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3122.
t. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall
conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME
B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for
copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements
shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting
manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on
manufacturer's approved application guidelines.
u. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K, L or M.
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be
diaphragm or piston type.
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 2822.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal
molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight,
gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
Section 22 00 00 Page 17

h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines:
AWWA C203.
i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element:
ASME B40.100.
l. Thermometers: ASTM E 1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.
2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-
69.
2.3 VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-
1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and
solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have
flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon
the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable
MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description
Butterfly Valves
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends
for General Service
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
Standard
MSS SP-67
MSS SP-70
MSS SP-71
MSS SP-72
MSS SP-110
MSS SP-78
MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and
MSS SP-85
Section 22 00 00 Page 18

Threaded Ends
Backwater Valves
ASME A112.14.1
Vacuum Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22
Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003
Water Heater Drain Valves ASSE 1005
Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22
for Hot Water Supply Systems
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
for Automatically Fired Hot
Water Boilers
ASME CSD-1
Safety Code No., Part CW,
Article 5
2.3.1 Wall Faucets
Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 3/4
inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose connection.
Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.
2.3.2 Relief Valves
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure
and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T
relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure
buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of
heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a
relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters
when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated
according to CSA/AM Z21.22. Relief valves for systems where the maximum
rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch minimum
inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the maximum
rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch minimum
inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall
be the size of the valve outlet.
2.3.3 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves,
thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and
pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or
finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be
constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water
at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall
be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze,
corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with
necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets.
Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F of any
setting.
Section 22 00 00 Page 19

2.4 FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.
Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
ICC A117.1. Vitreous China], nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified
throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly
applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes,
blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with
appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each
fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system,
except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion
or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and
polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where
exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be
equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or
flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, pop-up
stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and
shoes of bathtub waste drains may contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon,
acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or other plastic material, if the
material has provided satisfactory service under actual commercial or
industrial operating conditions for not less than 2 years. Plastic in
contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180 degrees F water
temperature.
2.4.1 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ASME A112.19.3 302 Stainless Steel
siphon jet, elongated bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet seat
height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches for
wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve.
Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat .
Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall
not exceed1.28 gallons per flush.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve,
vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere
with the hand rail in ADA stalls.
2.4.2 Flush Valve Urinals
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ,wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon
jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Water flushing volume of
the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed 0.125 gallons per
flush. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel
pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle controlstop
valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed
to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel.
Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than
11 inches above the fixture.
Section 22 00 00 Page 20

2.4.3 Wall Hung Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ,straight back type, minimum
dimensions of 19 inches, wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply
openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings for
concealed arm carrier installation. Provide aerator with faucet. Water
flow rate shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure
of 60 psi. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical
steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory
with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum
clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. Provide top mounted
washerless centerset lavatory faucets.
2.4.4 Service Sinks
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger
supports, minimum dimensions of 22 inches wide by 20 inches front to rear,
with two supply openings in 10 inch high back. Provide floor supported wall
outlet cast iron P-trap and stainless steel rim guards as recommended by
service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service sink
faucets with vacuum breaker and 0.75 inch external hose threads.
2.4.5 Drinking-Water Coolers
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable
water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style,
air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel
splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be
controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near
the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum
of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct
water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or
nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed
steel pipe chair carriers.
2.4.6 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler
AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair
carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless
steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 27 inch minimum
knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch maximum spout
height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by push levers, by
push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front and both sides of
the cabinet.
2.4.7 Precast Terrazzo Shower Floors
Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to
produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide
floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo,
with polished stainless steel strainers.
2.4.8 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks
Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to
produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide
Section 22 00 00 Page 21

floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo,
with polished stainless steel strainers.
2.5 DRAINS
2.5.1 Floor and Shower Drains
Floor and shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage
pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickelbronze,
or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar.
Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane
is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in
the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels
for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor
thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing
membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing
membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with
threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene
rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564 may be installed, provided that the
drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint.
Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide drain with
trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping. Primer shall
meet ASSE 1018.
2.5.1.1 Drains and Backwater Valves
Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with waterproofed floors
or shower pans shall be equipped with bolted-type device to securely clamp
flashing.
2.5.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings
Provide single control pressure equalizing bathtub and shower faucets with
body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball
joint self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a
maximum of 2.2 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing
mounted from behind the wall between bathtub faucets and shower heads and
bathtub diverter spouts. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with
union connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up drain
fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain pop-ups,
drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain
shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage between drain
pop-up and pop-up control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be copper
alloy or stainless steel. Provide 1.5 inch copper alloy adjustable tubing
with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain outlet;
chromium-plated finish is not required.
2.5.3 Area Drains
Area drains shall be plain pattern with polished stainless steel perforated
or slotted grate and bottom outlet. The drain shall be circular or square
with a 12 inch nominal overall width or diameter and 10 inch nominal overall
depth. Drains shall be cast iron with manufacturer's standard coating.
Grate shall be easily lifted out for cleaning. Outlet shall be suitable for
inside caulked connection to drain pipe. Drains shall conform to ASME
A112.6.3.
Section 22 00 00 Page 22

2.5.4 Floor Sinks
Floor sinks shall be circular , with 12 inch nominal overall width or
diameter and 10 inch nominal overall depth. Floor sink shall have an acidresistant
enamel interior finish with cast-iron body, aluminum sediment
bucket, and perforated grate of cast iron in industrial areas and stainless
steel in finished areas. The outlet pipe size shall be as indicated or of
the same size as the connecting pipe.
2.5.5 Pit Drains
Pit drains shall consist of a body, integral seepage pan, and nontilting
perforated or slotted grate. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern
suitable for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall
have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drain pipe. Membrane or
flashing clamping device shall be provided when required. Drains shall be
cast iron with manufacturer's standard coating. Drains shall be circular
and provided with bottom outlet suitable for inside caulked connection,
unless otherwise indicated. Drains shall be provided with separate castiron
"P" traps, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.6 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall consist of body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable
strainer with perforated or slotted grate and funnel extension. The
strainer shall have a threaded collar to permit adjustment to floor
thickness. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern suitable for
embedding in the floor construction. A clamping device for attaching
flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
flashing or membrane shall be provided for other than concrete construction.
Drains shall have a galvanized heavy cast-iron body and seepage pan and
chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer and funnel
combination. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection and with a
separate cast-iron "P" trap, unless otherwise indicated. Drains shall be
circular, unless otherwise indicated. The funnel shall be securely mounted
over an opening in the center of the strainer. Minimum dimensions shall be
as follows:
Area of strainer and collar: 36 square inches
Height of funnel:
Diameter of lower portion:
Diameter of upper portion:
3-3/4 inches
2 inches of funnel
4 inches of funnel
2.5.7 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints
Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange,
and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing
and flashing. The whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast
iron. For aggregate surface roofing, the drain shall be provided with a
gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, roof drains shall
be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the
insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching
Section 22 00 00 Page 23

flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
flashing or membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building
construction. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice
that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper
connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the downspout. An expansion
joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be provided. The
expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze
sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing.
The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 0.134 inch.
Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring packing shall be
close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be held in place by a
packing gland secured with bolts.
2.6 SHOWER PAN
Shower pan may be copper, or nonmetallic material.
2.6.1 Sheet Copper
Sheet copper shall be 16 ounce weight.
2.6.2 Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Shower Pan Material
Material shall be sheet form. The material shall be 0.040 inch minimum
thickness of plasticized polyvinyl chloride or chlorinated polyethylene and
shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4551.
2.6.3 Nonplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pan Material
Material shall consist of a plastic waterproofing membrane in sheet form.
The material shall be 0.040 inch minimum thickness of nonplasticized PVC and
shall have the following minimum properties:
a. or ASTM D 638:
Ultimate Tensile Strength: 2600 psi
Ultimate Elongation:
398 percent
100 Percent Modulus: 445 psi
b. ASTM D 1004:
Tear Strength:
300 pounds per inch
c. ASTM E 96/E 96M:
Permeance:
0.008 perms
d. Other Properties:
Specific Gravity: 1.29
PVC Solvent:
Weldable
Cold Crack:
minus 53 degrees F
Dimensional stability
212 degrees F minus 2.5 percent
Section 22 00 00 Page 24

2.7 TRAPS
Hardness, Shore A: 89
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be plastic per ASTM F 409 or copperalloy
adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be
without a cleanout. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than
0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of
bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual
commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts
for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the
discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as
required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip.
Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the
application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections.
The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior
diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and
interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P"
trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall
nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The
assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubbergasketed
swivel joint.
2.8 WATER HEATERS
Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater
shall have replaceable anodes. Each primary water heater shall have
controls with an adjustable range that includes 90 to 160 degrees F. Each
gas-fired water heater and booster water heater shall have controls with an
adjustable range that includes 120 to 180 degrees F. Hot water systems
utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied into building off-hour
controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform to
TABLE III for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is
that storage water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 500
gallons storage capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the
tank surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not
used. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are
forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory precharged
expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each
water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on
potable water systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature
and 150 psi working pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume
shall be as indicated.
2.8.1 Automatic Storage Type
Heaters shall be complete with control system, temperature gauge, and
pressure gauge, and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and
temperature relief valve.
2.8.1.1 Electric Type
Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating
elements. Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so
that only one element can operate at a time.
Section 22 00 00 Page 25

*
*2.8.2 Phenolic Resin Coatings for Heater Tubes
The phenolic resin coating system shall be applied at either the coil or
coating manufacturer's factory in accordance with manufacturer's standard
proven production process. The coating system shall be a product
specifically intended for use on the material the water heating tubes/coils
are made of and shall be acceptable for use in potable water systems. The
coating system shall be capable of withstanding temperatures up to 400
degrees F dry bulb; and meet the requirements of 21 CFR 175.
The entire exterior surface of each coil shall be coated with phenolic resin
coating system.
2.8.2.1 Standard Product
Provide a phenolic resin coating system that is a standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of
a similar material, design and workmanship.
Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar applications of
similar size for at least two years before bid opening.
Prior to this two year period, these standard products were sold on the
commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers' catalogs or
brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures shall have been
copyrighted documents or be identified with a manufacturer's document
number.
2.9 PUMPS
2.9.1 Circulating Pumps
Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven, singlestage,
centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended
service. Pump and motor shall be close-coupled with an overhung impeller,
or supported by the piping on which it is installed. The shaft shall be
one-piece, heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smoothsurfaced
housing of bronze.
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient
horsepower for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped with
an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with
"START-STOP" switch in cover.
2.9.2 Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors shall be provided at the suction and discharge of each
pump that is 1 hp or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene,
rubber, or braided bronze, with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible
connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure and temperature
of the intended service.
Section 22 00 00 Page 26

2.10 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors,
motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of
packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high
efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current
motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the
applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In addition to the requirements
of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase,
squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including
motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for
premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in
accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the
specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds
with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during
one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply
fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required
for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For
packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including
the required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided
under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.11.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces. Provide
paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.11.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
floors. Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping
passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where
penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2.11.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves
are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through
concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry and
Section 22 00 00 Page 27

concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the coredrilled
hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.11.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.11.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S
beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole
on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection
shield for insulated piping.
2.11.4 Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte
finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and
valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each
system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.
Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts
shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of
plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance
with PPFA-01. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with
necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and
drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless
otherwise indicated. A full port ball valve and drain shall be installed on
the water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the
floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior
service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place.
Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when
otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches
below the finish grade or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are
closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the
service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be
marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed
with control no lower than the valve body.
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
Section 22 00 00 Page 28

3.1.1.1 Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hotwater
and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit
draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except
faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with
integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation
of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of
other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants,
shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.
3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of
construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or
equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in
the trade involved.
3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,
water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the
fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted,
and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating
equipment.
3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and
worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the
building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with
the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from
service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using
crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions.
Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between
finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines
shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to
transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made
with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for
use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are
furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in
direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches
and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep
bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less than
six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening,
or other malformations will not be acceptable.
3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable
seat and full port ball valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4
Section 22 00 00 Page 29

inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply
piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.1.1.6 Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water
pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion
loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc., where
indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as required or
where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers
shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings
or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall
be anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the
run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient
flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to
provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be
provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will
spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical
grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design
requirements for expansion and contraction may be allowed pending approval
of Contracting Officer.
3.1.1.7 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either
vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or larger
shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent movement.
Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2
sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi
after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the
fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base
and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against
undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall
be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking
shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair.
Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with
bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity
thrust blocks.
3.1.1.8 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and coldwater
supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with precise
location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water hammer
arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or
removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to
ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2 Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching
of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be
made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific
purpose intended.
Section 22 00 00 Page 30

3.1.2.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming
to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or
with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or
shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.
3.1.2.2 Mechanical Couplings
Mechanical couplings may be used in conjunction with grooved pipe for
aboveground, ferrous or non-ferrous, domestic hot and cold water systems, in
lieu of unions, brazed, soldered, welded, flanged, or threaded joints.
Mechanical couplings are permitted in accessible locations including behind
access plates. Flexible grooved joints will not be permitted, except as
vibration isolators adjacent to mechanical equipment. Rigid grooved joints
shall incorporate an angle bolt pad design which maintains metal-to-metal
contact with equal amount of pad offset of housings upon installation to
ensure positive rigid clamping of the pipe.
Designs which can only clamp on the bottom of the groove or which utilize
gripping teeth or jaws, or which use misaligned housing bolt holes, or which
require a torque wrench or torque specifications will not be permitted.
Rigid grooved pipe couplings shall be for use with grooved end pipes,
fittings, valves and strainers. Rigid couplings shall be designed for not
less than 125 psi service and appropriate for static head plus the pumping
head, and shall provide a watertight joint.
Grooved fittings and couplings, and grooving tools shall be provided from
the same manufacturer. Segmentally welded elbows shall not be used.
Grooves shall be prepared in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's
latest published standards. Grooving shall be performed by qualified
grooving operators having demonstrated proper grooving procedures in
accordance with the tool manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of test to
demonstrate operator's capability, and the test shall be performed at the
work site, if practical, or at a site agreed upon. The operator shall
demonstrate the ability to properly adjust the grooving tool, groove the
pipe, and to verify the groove dimensions in accordance with the coupling
manufacturer's specifications.
3.1.2.3 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls,
ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches
and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.
3.1.2.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's
instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be
products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply
with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of
grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
Section 22 00 00 Page 31

vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be
measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall
not be used in concealed locations.
3.1.2.5 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil,
waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.2.6 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2, MSS
SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes.
Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or
copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of
dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of
flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a
silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall
conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used
in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be
made in accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for
manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s)
approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between
fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3.1.2.7 Plastic Pipe
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with
solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent
cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed
only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule
40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.
3.1.2.8 Other Joint Methods
3.1.3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made
with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have
temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for
the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends
suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally
lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow
between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance
Section 22 00 00 Page 32

equirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints
between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for
the specific purpose.
3.1.4 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel
pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding. .
Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE
SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the
coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings
shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness
testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and
shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type
coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer.
3.1.5 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
location.
3.1.5.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following
requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide
sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a
waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The
links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt
around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of
the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a
watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall
be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve
involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where
indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as
detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof,
and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances.
Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical
equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum
of 1/4 inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve
or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and
concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe.
Section 22 00 00 Page 33

Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe,
galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or
between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with
sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material and
surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The
annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or
between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior
walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed
1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint
between the pipe and concrete wall as specified above. Sealant selected for
the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint
sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements
in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.5.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper
flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid
coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a
minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into
the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a
watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe
or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be
sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the
pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in
diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield
shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall
waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing
clamping flange shall be installed.
3.1.5.3 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by
forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the
sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit
between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the
cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing
guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1-1/2 inches;
then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the
flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall
extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between
the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron
water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and
Section 22 00 00 Page 34

drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be
upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside diameter of the
drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The
upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed.
3.1.5.4 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacketcovered
insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by
utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.5.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items
penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and
Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall
be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled
with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.5.6 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be
sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.6 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase
walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided .
3.1.7 Supports
3.1.7.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to
permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the
support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall
be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the
base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing
required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections
of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.7.2 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-
58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.
Section 22 00 00 Page 35

a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is
placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have
both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not
acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with
an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated
frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger
when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39
saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the
temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density
inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.
i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and
a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting
joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall
be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in
determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F
for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include
allowances for expansion and contraction.
j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-ongrade,
at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from
end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall
include allowances for expansion and contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do
not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:
Section 22 00 00 Page 36

(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may
freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe
or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees
F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely
rest on a steel plate.
l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the
outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous
through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the
guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be
separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount
adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut
or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except
where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.
3.1.7.3 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in
concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.8 Welded Installation
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of
piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged
branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for
improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against
external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of
weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs
made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded.
After filler metal has been removed from its original package, it shall be
protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are
not affected. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of
their coating shall not be used.
3.1.9 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs
larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
Section 22 00 00 Page 37

or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy castbrass
or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall
be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor.
Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T-
pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs,
except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the
same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches
with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at
the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain
where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside
the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single
story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than 18 inches
of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in
partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze,
nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round
access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw.
Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs
and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and
frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in
finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chromeplated
cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug
or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening
screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are
provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron .
3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.2.1 Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or
storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve
actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever
possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the
tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hot-water
outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water
supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above
and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.
3.2.2 Heat Traps
Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be
routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an
upward direction.
3.2.3 Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric
unions or flanges.
3.2.4 Expansion Tank
A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply
between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve.
The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended
by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.
Section 22 00 00 Page 38

3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where
exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for
supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and
installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and
faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be
used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected
to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under
the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified. Drain lines
and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated
and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and
accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.3.1 Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the
cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.
Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be
made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene
gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be
permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance
from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.3.2 Flushometer Valves
Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the
long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with
approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be
installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for
use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted
at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid
interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for
handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of
the enclosure.
3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor
Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor. Wallhung
drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 42
inches above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim 28
inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically
handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.3.4 Shower Bath Outfits
The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the
escutcheon plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing.
3.3.5 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and
other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-
Section 22 00 00 Page 39

carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the
fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab.
Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height
and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair
carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not
possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.
3.3.5.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the
masonry wall.
3.3.5.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair
carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the
concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.3.5.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be
of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a
square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of flooranchored
chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition
studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs.
3.3.6 Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect
or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable
water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in
accordance with at all other locations necessary to preclude a crossconnect
or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable
substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all
locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the
equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level
of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so that
no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of
sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and
preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water
system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers.
Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be
a standard commercial unit.
3.3.7 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any
item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced,
maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05
50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.3.8 Traps
Section 22 00 00 Page 40

Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture
shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be
cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recessdrainage
pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may
be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall
be of the same material as the pipe.
3.3.9 Shower Pans
Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as
nail heads or rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down,
clamping-ring type with weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is
flush with subfloor.
3.3.9.1 General
The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination
shower and drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two
are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a
shower pan fabricated in place. The shower pan material shall be cut to
size and shape of the area indicated, in one piece to the maximum extent
practicable, allowing a minimum of 6 inches for turnup on walls or
partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of
1/4 of curb height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or
partition finish. Subflooring shall be smooth and clean, with nailheads
driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall
be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring.
3.3.9.2 Metal Shower Pans
When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal
pieces shall be joined with a flintlock seam and soldered or burned. The
corners shall be folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or
burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one
brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at not less than 1
gallon per 50 square feet. A layer of felt covered with building paper
shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces
of metal pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan
is connected to the drain.
3.3.9.3 Nonplasticized Chlorinated Polyethylene Shower Pans
Corners of nonplasticized chlorinated polyethylene shower pans shall be
folded against the upstand by making a pig-ear fold. Hot-air gun or heat
lamp shall be used in making corner folds. Each pig-ear corner fold shall
be nailed or stapled 1/2 inch from the upper edge to hold it in place.
Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing nails. On metal framing or
studs, approved duct tape shall be used to secure pig-ear fold and membrane.
Where no backing is provided between the studs, the membrane slack shall be
taken up by pleating and stapling or nailing to studding 1/2 inch from upper
edge. To adhere the membrane to vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane
and the surface to which it will be applied shall be coated with adhesive
that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10 minutes, after which the membrane
shall be pressed into place. Surfaces to be solvent-welded shall be clean.
Surfaces to be joined with xylene shall be initially sprayed and vigorously
cleaned with a cotton cloth, followed by final coating of xylene and the
Section 22 00 00 Page 41

joining of the surfaces by roller or equivalent means. If ambient or
membrane temperatures are below 40 degrees F the membrane and the joint
shall be heated prior to application of xylene. Heat may be applied with
hot-air gun or heat lamp, taking precautions not to scorch the membrane.
Adequate ventilation and wearing of gloves are required when working with
xylene. Membrane shall be pressed into position on the drain body, and
shall be cut and fit to match so that membrane can be properly clamped and
an effective gasket-type seal provided. On wood subflooring, two layers of
15 pound dry felt shall be installed prior to installation of shower pan to
ensure a smooth surface for installation.
3.3.9.4 Nonplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pans
Nonplasticized PVC shall be turned up behind walls or wall surfaces a
distance of not less than 6 inches in room areas and 3 inches above curb
level in curbed spaces with sufficient material to fold over and fasten to
outside face of curb. Corners shall be pig-ear type and folded between pan
and studs. Only top 1 inch of upstand shall be nailed to hold in place.
Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing type. Approved duct tape shall
be used on metal framing or studs to secure pig-ear fold and membrane.
Where no backing is provided between studs, the membrane slack shall be
taken up by pleating and stapling or nailing to studding at top inch of
upstand. To adhere the membrane to vertical surfaces, the back of the
membrane and the surface to which it is to be applied shall be coated with
adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10 minutes, after which the
membrane shall be pressed into place. Trim for drain shall be exactly the
size of drain opening. Bolt holes shall be pierced to accommodate bolts
with a tight fit. Adhesive shall be used between pan and subdrain.
Clamping ring shall be bolted firmly. A small amount of gravel or porous
materials shall be placed at weepholes so that holes remain clear when
setting bed is poured. Membrane shall be solvent welded with PVC solvent
cement. Surfaces to be solvent welded shall be clean (free of grease and
grime). Sheets shall be laid on a flat surface with an overlap of about 2
inches. Top edge shall be folded back and surface primed with a PVC primer.
PVC cement shall be applied and surfaces immediately placed together, while
still wet. Joint shall be lightly rolled with a paint roller, then as the
joint sets shall be rolled firmly but not so hard as to distort the
material. In long lengths, about 2 or 3 feet at a time shall be welded. On
wood subflooring, two layers of 15 pound felt shall be installed prior to
installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface installation.
3.4 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES
Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated
from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless
otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number of
standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or
foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and
shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to
mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors. Isolation
unit installation shall limit vibration to percent of the lowest equipment
rpm.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Section 22 00 00 Page 42

3.5.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved
anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on
valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags
shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be
attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain,
or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.5.2 Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.5.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The
color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and
operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished
space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling.
The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages
and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code
board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be
approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels
with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so
that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be
manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling
panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of colored
metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which the
disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate
dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch thickness. The
board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1/16 inch
transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code
symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related
lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board shall be
mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The color code
system shall be as indicated below:
Color System Item Location
3.6 ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated
piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except
in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened
securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosionresisting
steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromiumplated
copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or splitpattern,
held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.
3.7 PAINTING
Section 22 00 00 Page 43

Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in
concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.7.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.7.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to
certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall
withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be
in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria
shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint
shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of
adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125
inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on
surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting
system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.7.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the
metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
Section 22 00 00 Page 44

degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils.
3.8 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
3.8.1 Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance
with , except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the
smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in
lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must
submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.
a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke
test.
b. Building Sewers Tests.
c. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.8.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically
designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies.
Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for
accuracy in accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory
agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements,
gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the
requirements of University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross
Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works
Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved
testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and
field evaluation of backflow prevention assembly test gauges.. Report form
for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:
Data on Device
Type of Assembly
Manufacturer
Model Number
Serial Number
Size
Location
Test Pressure Readings
Data on Testing Firm
Name
Address
Certified Tester
Certified Tester No.
Date of Test
Serial Number and Test Data of
Gauges
If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired
and retested.
3.8.1.2 Shower Pans
After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be
temporarily plugged below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded
with water to a minimum depth of 1 inch for a period of 24 hours. Any drop
in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for
rejection, repair, and retest.
Section 22 00 00 Page 45

3.8.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall
be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of
screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.8.3 System Flushing
3.8.3.1 During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall
be flushed with hot potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to
produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris
in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation
of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing
velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system.
In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting
Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of
fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate
personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines
are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor
shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the
system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign
materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any
device considered as an end point device by NSF 61, Section 9, shall be
flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14
day period.
3.8.3.2 After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,
cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh
potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish,
furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to
properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When
the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for
uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall
be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless
more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits
established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The water supply to the
building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination
found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed
inside the building.
3.8.4 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the
Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
Section 22 00 00 Page 46

following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the
system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.
f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.
h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including
pump start pressure and stop pressure.
3.8.5 Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete,
the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall be
disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material, entire
system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and
AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The
chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a
constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per
million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected
into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into
the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until
the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a
continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the
chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping
including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination
procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet
shall be opened and closed several times.
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine
residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour chlorination
procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual
remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be
flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced
to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each
valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
Section 22 00 00 Page 47

Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial
examination, at locations specified by the Contracting Officer
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal
coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA SM
9223 . The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking
water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state
requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence
of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters)
in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated
containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and
laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.10 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring
and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall
be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining
preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal
safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system
shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring
and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed
instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.
3.11 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 70 degrees F
temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)
3.11.1 Storage Water Heaters
3.11.1.1 Electric
Section 22 00 00 Page 48

a. Storage capacity of 60 gallons shall have a minimum energy factor (EF)
of 0.93 or higher per FEMP requirements.
b. Storage capacity of 60 gallons or more shall have a minimum energy
factor (EF) of 0.91 or higher per FEMP requirements.
3.11.1.2 Gas
a. Storage capacity of 50 gallons or less shall have a minimum energy
factor (EF) of 0.62 or higher per FEMP requirements.
b. Storage capacity of 20 gallons - or more and input rating of 75,000
Btu/h or less: minimum EF shall be 0.62 - 0.0019V per 10 CFR 430.
c. Rating of less than 22980 W: (75,000 Btu/h) ET shall be 80 percent;
maximum SL shall be (0/800+100x(V^^1/2)), per CSA/AM Z21.10.3
3.11.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage
All volumes and inputs: shall meet or exceed R-12.5.
3.12 TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub X X X X X
and spigot, ASTM A 74 with
compression gaskets. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the
CISPI trademark.
2 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, X X X X
CISPI 301 and ASTM A 888. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with
the CISPI trademark.
3 Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded, X X X
ASME B16.12 for use with Item 10
4 Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded) X X
ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10
5 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous and X X X X
non-ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M
6 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X X
for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and
Section 22 00 00 Page 49

ASTM A 47/A 47M for use with Item 5
7 Bronze sand casting grooved joint X X X X
pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5
8 Wrought copper grooved joint pressure X X
pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 75 C12200,
ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000,
ASME B16.22
ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5
9 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X
galvanized ASME B16.3
for use with Item 10
10 Steel pipe, seamless galvanized, X X X
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
11 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43 X X
12 Bronzed flanged fittings, X X
ASME B16.24 for use
with Items 11 and 14
13 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X
pressure fittings, ASME B16.18
for use with Item 14
14 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X
15 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X
ASME B16.15
16 Copper drainage tube, (DWV), X* X X* X X
ASTM B 306
17 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X X
alloy solder-joint drainage
fittings. ASME B16.29
18 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X X X X
drainage fittings, DWV,
ASME B16.23
19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) X X X X X X
plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe
and fittings ASTM D 2661,
ASTM F 628
20 Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, X X X X X X
waste and vent pipe and fittings,
ASTM D 2665,
ASTM F 891, (Sch 40)
ASTM F 1760
Section 22 00 00 Page 50

21 Process glass pipe and fittings, X
ASTM C 1053
22 High-silicon content cast iron pipe X X X
and fittings (hub and spigot, and
mechanical joint), ASTM A 518/A 518M
23 Polypropylene (PP) waste pipe and X
fittings, ASTM D 4101
24 Filament-wound reinforced thermosetting X
resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D 2996
SERVICE:
A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C - Underground Vent
D - Aboveground Vent
E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
* - Hard Temper
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X X X
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3
for use with Item 4a
b. Same as "a" but not galvanized X
for use with Item 4b
2 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe X X X
ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M,
non-ferrous pipe, ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M,
3 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X
for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use
with Item 2
4 Steel pipe: X X X X
a. Seamless, galvanized,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
b. Seamless, black, X
ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type S, Grade B
Section 22 00 00 Page 51

5 Seamless red brass pipe, X X X
ASTM B 43
6 Bronze flanged fittings, X X X
ASME B16.24 for use with
Items 5 and 7
7 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X X X
8 Seamless copper water tube, X** X** X** X***
ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M
9 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X X
ASME B16.15 for use
with Items 5 and 7
10 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint X X X X
pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for
use with Items 5, 7 and 8
11 Cast copper alloy solder-joint X X X X
pressure fittings,
ASME B16.18
for use with Item 8
12 Bronze and sand castings grooved X X X
joint pressure fittings for nonferrous
pipe ASTM B 584,
for use with Item 2
13 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, X X
Schedules 40 and 80, based on
outside diameter ASTM D 2447
14 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X
(SDR-PR), based on controlled
outside diameter, ASTM D 3035
15 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X
(SIDR-PR), based on controlled
inside diameter, ASTM D 2239
16 Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic X X
pipe fittings, ASTM D 3261
for use with Items 14, 15, and 16
17 Socket-type polyethylene fittings X X
for outside diameter-controlled
polyethylene pipe, ASTM D 2683
for use with Item 15
18 Polyethylene (PE) plastic tubing, X X
ASTM D 2737
19 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X
(CPVC) plastic hot and cold
Section 22 00 00 Page 52

water distribution system,
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M
20 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X
(CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40
and 80, ASTM F 441/F 441M
21 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X
(CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F 442/F 442M
22 Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X
(chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings,
Schedule 80, ASTM F 437,
for use with Items 20, and 21
23 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe
fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM F 438
for use with Items 20, 21, and 22
24 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings
Schedule 80, ASTM F 439
for use with Items 20, 21, and 22
25 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, X X
Schedules 40, 80, and 120,
ASTM D 1785
26 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated X X
pipe (SDR Series), ASTM D 2241
27 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe X X
fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466
28 Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X
plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2467 for use with Items 26 and 27
29 Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X
plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2464
30 Joints for IPS PVC pipe using solvent X X
cement, ASTM D 2672
31 Polypropylene (PP) plastic pipe and X X X
fittings; ASTM F 2389
32 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44 X X
33 Fittings: brass or bronze; X X
ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18
ASTM B 828
34 Carbon steel pipe unions, X X X
Section 22 00 00 Page 53

socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
35 Malleable-iron threaded pipe X X
unions ASME B16.39
36 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A 733 X X X
37 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) X X X
Plastic Pipe ASTM F 877
38 Press Fittings X X
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum
Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper
without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
TABLE III
STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING
EQUIPMENT (I-P)
A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS
STORAGE
CAPACITY INPUT
FUEL GALLONS RATING TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRED
PERFORMANCE
Elect. 60 max. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.93
Elect. 60 min. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.91
Elect. 20 min. 12 kW max. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.93-0.00132V min.
Elect. 20 min. 12 kW min. CSA/AM Z21.10.3 SL = 20+35x(V^^1/2)max.
Elect. Heat Pump 24 Amps or 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.93-0.00132V
less and 250 Volts or less
TERMS:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum Btu/h based on a 70 degree F temperature
difference between stored water and ambient requirements.
Section 22 00 00 Page 54

V = Rated storage volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in Btu/h
-- End of Section --
Section 22 00 00 Page 55

SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
08/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 167
ASTM A 240/A 240M
ASTM B 209
ASTM C 1136
ASTM C 195
ASTM C 449
ASTM C 533
ASTM C 534/C 534M
ASTM C 547
ASTM C 552
ASTM C 591
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
(2009c) Standard Specification for Chromium
and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for
General Applications
(2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(2009) Standard Specification for Flexible,
Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation
(2000) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement
(2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement
(2009) Standard Specification for Calcium
Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
(2008) Standard Specification for Preformed
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
(2008e1) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Pipe Insulation
(2007) Standard Specification for Cellular
Glass Thermal Insulation
(2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced
Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
Section 22 07 19 Page 1

ASTM C 592
ASTM C 795
ASTM C 916
ASTM C 920
ASTM C 921
ASTM D 226
ASTM D 579
ASTM E 84
ASTM E 96/E 96M
(2008a) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)
(Industrial Type)
(2008) Standard Specification for Thermal
Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel
(1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
(2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric
Joint Sealants
(2009) Standard Practice for Determining the
Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal
Insulation
(2006) Standard Specification for Asphalt-
Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
(2009) Standard Specification for Greige
Woven Glass Fabrics
(2009c) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
(2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor
Transmission of Materials
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 220
(2008) Standard on Types of Building
Construction
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE AMS 3779
(1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive, Pressure
Sensitive Thermal Radiation Resistant,
Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to
work specified in this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide noncombustible thermal-insulation system materials, as defined by
NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermalinsulation
materials, except cellular elastomers, with a flame-spread
classification (FSC) of 25 or less , and a smoke-developed classification
(SDC) of 50 or less . Determine these maximum values in accordance with
Section 22 07 19 Page 2

ASTM E 84 . Provide coatings and sealants that are nonflammable in their
wet state.
Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified
temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures
normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Installation Drawings for pipe insulation in accordance with
paragraph entitled, "Installation of Insulation Systems," of this
section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Adhesives
Coatings
Insulating Cement
Insulation Materials
Jacketing
Tape
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Installation manual for Insulation Materials
1.5 RECYCLED MATERIALS
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent
practicable, provided that the material meets all other requirements of this
section. The minimum recycled material content of he following insulation
are:
Rock Wool - 75 percent slag by weight
Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Plastic Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
Polyisocyanurate/Polyurethane - 9 percent recovered material
Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Materials shall be compatible and not contribute to corrosion, soften, or
otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state.
Meet ASTM C 795 requirements for materials to be used on stainless steel
surfaces. Provide materials that are asbestos free and conform to the
following.
Section 22 07 19 Page 3

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
Insulation conductances shall be maximum values, as tested at any point, not
an average. Replace or augment insulation conductance found by test to
exceed the specified maximum by an additional thickness to bring it to the
required maximum conductance and a complete finishing system.
2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 592 for Mineral Fiber Insulation and be suitable for
surface temperatures up to 370 degrees F, and not less than 4-pound per
cubic foot density with thermal conductivity not greater than 0.26 Btu per
hour per square foot square per degree F at 150 degrees F mean.
Mineral fiber pipe wrap insulation having an insulating efficiency not less
than that of the specified thickness of fibrous glass pipe insulation may be
provided in lieu of fibrous glass pipe insulation for pipe sizes 10 inches
and larger.
2.1.2 Cellular Elastomer Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 534/C 534M, except ensure the water vapor permeability
does not exceed 0.30 perms per foot per inch per hour per square foot
mercury pressure difference for 1 inch thickness for Cellular Elastomer.
2.1.3 Cellular Glass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 552, Type II, Grade 2, pipe covering for Cellular Glass.
Substitutions for this material are not permitted. Ensure minimum thickness
is not less than 1-1/2 inches.
2.1.4 Calcium Silicate Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 533. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not
exceed 0.54 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree F 200 degrees F
mean.
2.1.5 Fiberglass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 547. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not
exceed 0.54 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree F at 200 degrees F
mean.
Fiber glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than
that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber pipe insulation may be
provided in lieu of mineral fiber pipe insulation for aboveground piping.
2.1.6 Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 591 for polyisocyanurate, minimum density of 1.7 pcf.
2.1.7 Pipe Barrel
Section 22 07 19 Page 4

Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III,
Precision V-Groove, Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including 1200
degrees F.
2.1.8 Pipe Fittings
Provide molding pipe fitting insulation covering for use at temperatures up
to and including 1200 degrees F.
2.1.9 Flexible Blankets
Provide flexible blankets and felts for use at temperatures up to and
including 350 degrees F minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density. Thermal
conductivity shall be not greater than 0.26 Btu per hour per square foot per
degree F at 75 degrees F mean.
2.2 ADHESIVES
2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives
Adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and
open-weave glass cloth shall be a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion and
conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I.
2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives
Adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass
cloth and for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various other
substrates, must be solvent-base, synthetic-rubber type and conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass insulation
to metal surfaces. Solvent shall be nonflammable.
2.2.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive
Adhesive for cellular elastomer insulation shall be a solvent cutback
chloroprene elastomer conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I, and be of a type
approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENT
2.3.1 General Purpose Insulating Cement
General purpose insulating cement shall be diatomaceous silica and conform
to ASTM C 195. Composite shall be rated for 1800 degrees F service and have
a thermal-conductivity maximum of 0.85 Btu by inch per hour per square foot
for each degree F temperature differential at 200 degrees F mean temperature
for 1 inch thickness.
2.3.2 Finishing Insulating Cement
Finishing insulating cement shall be mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting type
conforming to ASTM C 449.
2.4 CALKING
Section 22 07 19 Page 5

Calking used with specified insulation materials shall be an elastomeric
joint sealant in accordance with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
A.
2.5 CORNER ANGLES
Corner angle piping insulation shall be nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1
inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be in accordance
with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 .
2.6 JACKETING
2.6.1 Aluminum Jacket
ASTM B 209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 0.016 inch, with factoryapplied
polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface.
Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside diameters less than 8
inches. Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside diameters 8
inches and larger. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 0.5
inch. Provide factory prefabricated aluminum covers for insulation on
fittings, valves, and flanges.
2.6.2 Asphalt-Saturated Felt
ASTM D 226, without perforations, minimum weight of 10 pounds per 100 square
feet.
2.6.3 Stainless Steel Jacket
ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type 304, minimum thickness of 0.010 inch,
smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture
barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of
0.5 inch. Provide factory prefabricated stainless steel covers for
insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges.
2.6.4 Glass Cloth Jacket
Provide plain-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D 579, Style 141 and
weigh not less than 7.23 ounces per square yard before sizing. Factory
apply cloth wherever possible.
Provide leno weave glass reinforcing cloth, 26-end and 12-pick thread
conservation, with a warp and fill tensile strength of 45 and 30 pounds per
inch of width, respectively, and with a weight of not less than 1.5 ounces
per square yard. At the Contractor's option, Style 191 leno-weave glass
cloth conforming to ASTM D 579 may be provided.
2.6.5 PVC Jacket
Provide 0.010 inch thick, factory-premolded, one-piece fitting
polyvinylchloride that is self-extinguishing, high-impact strength, moderate
chemical resistance with a permeability rating of 0.01 grain per hour per
square foot per inch of mercury pressure difference, determined in
accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. Provide manufacturer's standard solventweld
type vapor-barrier joint adhesive.
Section 22 07 19 Page 6

Conform to ASTM C 1136 for, Type I, low-vapor transmission, high-puncture
resistance vapor barrier for use on insulation for piping, ducts, and
equipment.
2.7 COATINGS
2.7.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
Coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces such as
fittings and elbows shall be a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer, solventbase
mastic containing a blend of nonflammable solvents. Conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 1136 and ASTM C 921 for coatings.
2.7.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
Provide pigmented resin and solvent compound coatings for indoor vaporbarrier
finishing of insulation surfaces and conform to ASTM C 1136, Type
II.
2.7.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing
Provide pigmented polymer-emulsion type recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer for outdoor and indoor nonvapor-barrier finish coating
of insulation surfaces for the surface to be coated and applied to specified
dry-film thickness.
2.7.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating
Provide a polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the
cellular elastomer finish coating.
2.7.5 Coating Color
Provide as specified by the Contracting Officerfor the coating color.
2.8 TAPE
Provide a knitted elastic cloth glass lagging specifically suitable for
continuous spiral wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and produce
a smooth, tight, wrinkle-free surface. Conform to requirements of SAE AMS
3779, SAE AMS 3779, ASTM D 579, and ASTM C 921 for tape, and weigh not less
than 10 ounces per square yard.
2.9 HOT-WATER, STEAM, AND CONDENSATE-RETURN PIPING
Provide mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a
thickness of not less than . Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies,
fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces.
2.10 COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING
Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and
miscellaneous surfaces shall be insulated
Section 22 07 19 Page 7

Cold-water piping insulation shall be flexible unicellular-elastomeric
thermal insulation, Type T-3, with a thickness of 3/8 inch per calculation.
Use expanded, closed-cell pipe insulation only aboveground, not for
underground piping.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS
Install smooth and continuous contours on exposed work. Smoothly and
securely paste down cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes. Apply adhesives
on a full-coverage basis.
Apply insulation only to system or component surfaces that have been tested
and approved.
Install insulation lengths tightly butted against each other at joints.
Where lengths are cut, provide smooth and square and without breakage of end
surfaces. Where insulation terminates, neatly taper and effectively seal
ends, or finish as specified. Direct longitudinal seams of exposed
insulation away from normal view.
Apply materials in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Clean surfaces free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or mastics
are applied. Provide solvent cleaning required to bring metal surfaces to
such condition.
Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be in accordance with the
adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3.2 SYSTEM TYPES
3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and fieldattached
vapor-barrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement
jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive.
Provide jacket overlaps not less than 1-1/2 inches and jacketing bands for
butt joints 3 inches wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber
pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation.
Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply
a 60-mil coating of white indoor vapor-barrier coating and, while still wet,
wrap with glass lagging tape with 50 percent overlap, and smoothly blend
into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as needed and rubbergloved
to smooth fillet or contour coating, then allowed to fully cure
before the finish coating is applied. On-the-job fabricated insulation for
concealed fittings and special configurations, build up from mineral fiber
and a special mastic consisting of a mixture of insulating cement and
lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Where standard vapor-barrier
jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor tight by using coating and
glass lagging cloth or tape as previously specified.
Section 22 07 19 Page 8

In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be
wrapped with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness
and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make seams vapor
tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hold all jacket
ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils
thick by 1/2 inch wide.
Set pipe insulation into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 6
inches at maximum 12-foot spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed to
the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective vapor-barrier
stop.
Do not use staples in applying insulation. Install continuous vapor-barrier
materials over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers,
and other concealments.
Piping insulation at hangers shall consist of 13-pounds per cubic foot
density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell,
polyvinylchloride. Seal junctions with vapor-barrier jacket where required,
glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.
Expose white-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing to view.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a 6-mil dry-film
thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket
Cover piping with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached,
presized, white, glass cloth. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps,
and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive with jacket overlap not less
than 1-1/2 inches and jacketing bands for butt joints 3 inches wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings with preformed mineral-fiber fitting
insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily
secured in place with light cord ties. Install impregnated glass lagging
tape with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the blend
tape smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as
needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. tape ends of insulation to
the pipe at valves 2 inches and smaller. Build up on-the-job fabricated
insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations from mineral
fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive, diluted with
3 parts water. Finish surfaces with glass cloth or tape lagging.
Cover all valves 2-1/2 inches and larger and all flanges with preformed
insulation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with a minimum 6-mil dry-film thickness of
nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped
with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and
covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Hold all jacket ends in
place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick
by 1/2 inch wide. Provide fitting insulation, thermally equivalent to pipe-
Section 22 07 19 Page 9

arrel insulation to preclude surface temperatures detrimental to
polyvinylchloride.
3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer
Cover piping-system surfaces with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or
preformed insulation. Maintain vapor seal. Cement insulation into
continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended
by the manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply adhesive to both of the
surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a minimum thickness of 10 mils
wet or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted adhesive.
Seal insulation on cold water piping to the pipe for a minimum of 6 inches
at maximum intervals of 12 feet to form an effective vapor barrier. At
piping supports, insulation shall be continuous through using outsidecarrying
type clevis hangers with insulation shield. Install Wood dowel
load-bearing inserts between the pipe and insulation shields to prevent
insulation compression.
Insulate hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes to the extent
shown with nominal 3/8 inch thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer,
preformed pipe insulation. Seal joints with adhesive.
At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger
strap, cut the insulation with a brass cork borer and a No. 3 superior grade
cork inserted. Seal seams with approved adhesive. Insulate sweat fitting
with miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same nominal
pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping or tubing.
Joint miter-cut pieces with approved adhesive. Slit and snap covers over
the fitting, and seal joints with approved adhesive.
Insulate screwed fittings with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut
pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter
large enough to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Butt pipe insulation
against fittings. Overlap shall be not less than 1 inch . Use adhesive to
join cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation.
Finish surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light with a 2-mil minimum
dry-film thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended by
the manufacturer, and applied in not less than two coats.
3.2.4 Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket
Cover piping with cellular glass insulation and factory- and field-attached
vapor-barrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement jackets, jacket
laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap
shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches . Jacket bands for butt joints shall be
not less than 3 inches wide. Provide insulation continuous through hangers.
Bed insulation in an outdoor vapor-barrier coating applied to all piping
surfaces.
Insulate flanges, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings with factory
premolded or prefabricated or field fabricated segments of insulation of the
same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments
of insulation are used, provide elbows with not less than three segments.
Section 22 07 19 Page 10

For other fittings and valves, cut segments to the required curvature or
nesting size.
Secure segments of the insulation in place with twine or copper wire. After
the insulation segments are firmly in place, apply a vapor-barrier coating
over the insulation in two coats with glass tape imbedded between coats.
First coat,tinted, the second, white to ensure application of two coats.
Apply coating to a total dry-film thickness of 1/16 inch minimum. Overlap
glass tape seams not less than 1 inch and the tape end not less than 4
inches .
In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped
with 3/8 inch thick, vapor-barrier, adhesive-coated strips of cellular
elastomer insulation. Insulation shall be under tension, compressed to 25
percent of original thickness, and wrapped until overall thickness is equal
to adjacent insulation. Secure cellular elastomer in place with twine and
sealed with vapor-barrier coating applied to produce not less than 1/16 inch
dry-film thickness. Cover fittings with premolded polyvinylchloride
jackets. Make seams vapor-tight with a double bead of manufacturer's
standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Hold jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series
corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick by 1/2 inch wide.
Insulate anchors secured directly to piping, to prevent condensation, for
not less than 6 inches from the surface of the pipe insulation.
Install white-bleached kraft paper side of jacket exposed to view. Finish
exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a 6-mil dry-film thickness of
nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
3.2.5 Type T-5, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Piping)
Cover piping with a calcium-silicate pipe insulation with factory attached
and presized, white, glass cloth. Field apply jackets when required.
Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vaporbarrier
adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches .
Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 4-inches wide. Fabricate fittings
from segmented pipe barrel sections bedded in general purpose insulating
cement and wired in place. Fill voids with general purpose insulating
cement with not less than 1/4 inch thick, final coating. Impregnate glass
lagging tape with lagging adhesive, wrapped with a 50-percent overlap, and
be blended smoothly into adjacent jacketing. Apply additional adhesive as
needed and rubber-gloved to a smooth contour.
3.2.6 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or
field-applied aluminum jacketing.
Cover fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting
insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily
secure fitting insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply a 60-mil
coating of vapor-barrier mastic, and while still tacky, wrapped with glass
lagging tape.
Section 22 07 19 Page 11

Apply additional mastic as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or
contours. Build up on-the-job fabricated insulation for special
configurations from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and
lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Only where standard aluminum
jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor-tight by using mastic and
glass lagging cloth or tape as specified above with an added finish coat of
mastic.
Set pipe insulation into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 6
inches at maximum 12-foot spacing. Seal ends of the insulation to the
jacketing with the same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops.
Install continuous vapor barrier over all surfaces, including areas inside
pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealment.
Apply piping insulation to both sides of pipe hangers. Insulate junctions
with a special mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as
previously specified.
Securely cement jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with aluminum jacket
sealant. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 6 inches wide.
Lap joints, wherever possible, against the weather so that the water will
run off the lower edge and in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch.
Locate longitudinal laps on horizontal lines 45 degrees below the horizontal
centerline and alternately staggered 1 inch. Lap jacketing material a
minimum of 2 inches , circumferentially sealed with mastic, and strapped to
provide a waterproof covering throughout. Locate straps 8 inches on center
and pull up tight to hold jacketing securely in place. Use screws in
addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof covering. Place
extra straps on each side of supporting devices and at openings. Where
flanging access occurs, strap a chamfer sheet to the pipe at jacketing.
Stiffen exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing by bending a 1 inch
hem on one edge.
Provide expansion joints for maximum and minimum dimensional fluctuations.
To prevent corrosion, do not allow the aluminum jacketing to come in direct
contact with other types of metal.
At openings in jacket, apply an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for 2 inches
in all directions. Apply jacketing while waterproofing is tacky.
Use screws at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as
necessary for the service. Place number 7, 3/8 inch long, binding-head
aluminum sheet metal screws through the mastic seal.
3.2.7 Type T-7, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces)
Cover surfaces with insulation block bedded in an insulating cement and
covered with glass cloth jacketing.
Clean surfaces with a chlorinated solvent. Mix general purpose insulating
cement with 3 parts water to 1 part nonvapor-barrier adhesive to bring to
application consistency. Set block into bedding and joints and fill spaces
Section 22 07 19 Page 12

with a bedding mix and wrap with galvanized chicken wire mesh well laced
into an envelope. Trowel a 3/8 inch thick coating of bedding mix jacket on
with nonvapor-barrier adhesive and glass cloth. Finish surfaces with not
less than a 6-mil dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating.
At the Contractor's option, aluminum sheet jacketing may be used in lieu of
glass cloth.
3.2.8 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer
Clean pump surfaces with solvent. Apply not less than 1 inch of general
purpose insulating cement, mixed with nonvapor-barrier adhesive diluted with
3 parts water, to achieve smooth surface and configuration contours. After
all water has been removed, cover surfaces with 1/2 inch thick cellular
elastomer insulation attached and joined into a continuous sheet with an
outdoor vapor-barrier coating recommended by the insulation manufacturer for
the specific purpose. Apply coating to both of the surfaces on a 100-
percent coverage basis with a minimum thickness of 10 mils wet, or
approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted coating. Blend
coating into the adjacent flange insulation and the joint covered with a
band of cellular elastomer equal to the flange assembly width. Use same
coating to seal insulation to the casing at penetrations and terminations.
Insulate pumps in a manner that will permit insulation to be removed to
repair or replace pumps.
Finish insulation with a 2-mil minimum dry-film application of a
polyvinylchloride lacquer coating recommended by the manufacturer and
applied in not less than two coats.
3.2.9 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill
Pack voids surrounding pipe with mineral-fiber fill.
3.2.10 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket
Cover piping system surfaces with calcium silicate insulation. Cover
fittings and valve bodies with preformed insulation of the same material and
thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance will depend upon providing construction (Record Drawings)
details to the Contracting Officer. Include construction details, by
building area, the insulation material type, amount, and installation
method. An illustration or map of the duct routing locations may serve this
purpose. With data provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the
system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings insulation/material."
Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive
Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
-- End of Section --
Section 22 07 19 Page 13

SECTION 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
11/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 500-D
(1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers
for Rating
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 62.1 (2007; INT 2007; INT 2-15 2008; Errata 2008;
Addenda a, b, e, f and h 2008; Errata 2009)
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
ASHRAE 70
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
(2006) Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets
(2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009; Errata
2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings, I-P Edition
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A13.1
(2007) Scheme for the Identification of
Piping Systems
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 123/A 123M
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM A 924/A 924M
ASTM B 117
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-
Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
(2009a) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus
Section 23 00 00 Page 1

ASTM B 766
ASTM C 553
ASTM D 1654
ASTM D 3359
ASTM D 520
(1986; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium
(2008) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
(2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
(2009) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
(2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 10
NEMA MG 11
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
(2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium
AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1966
(2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal
and Flexible
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 4-010-01
(2003; Change 1 2007) DoD Minimum
Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 181
UL 214
(2005; Rev thru Oct 2008) Standard for
Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
(1997; Rev thru Aug 2001) Tests for Flame-
Propagation of Fabrics and Films
Section 23 00 00 Page 2

UL 6
UL Bld Mat Dir
UL Electrical Constructn
(2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal
Conduit-Steel
(2009) Building Materials Directory
(2009) Electrical Construction Equipment
Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to
provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different
trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and
electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in
piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to
install the work as indicated and specified.
1.2.1 Mechanical Equipment Identification
The number of charts and diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the
number of mechanical equipment rooms. Where more than one chart or diagram
per space is required, mount these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf, extruded
aluminum frame holders which open to 170 degrees.
1.2.1.1 Charts
Provide chart listing of equipment by designation numbers and capacities
such as flow rates, pressure and temperature differences, heating and
cooling capacities, horsepower, pipe sizes, and voltage and current
characteristics.
[1.2.1.2 Diagrams
Submit proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related
testing. provide neat mechanical drawings provided with extruded aluminum
frame under 1/8-inch glass or laminated plastic, system diagrams that show
the layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork, and typed condensed operation
manuals explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking
the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting
and stopping the system. After approval, post these items where directed.
]1.2.2 Service Labeling
Label equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with
labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent
installation. Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples
below:
SERVICE
LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION
Air handling unit Number AHU -
Exhaust Fan Number EF -
Section 23 00 00 Page 3

Fan Coil Unit Number FC -
Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where
pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the maximum
system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in accordance with the
following:
a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.
b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.
c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point
required to clarify service or indicated hazard.
d. In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of
each other not to exceed 75 feet. All labels shall be visible and
legible from the primary service and operating area.
For Bare or Insulated Pipes
for Outside Diameters of
Lettering
1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch 1/2 inch
1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch 3/4 inch
2-1/2 inch and larger 1-1/4 inch
1.2.3 Color Coding
Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1 .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Metallic Flexible Duct
Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Duct Connectors
Duct Access Doors; G
Manual Balancing Dampers; G
Diffusers
Registers and Grilles
Louvers
Section 23 00 00 Page 4

Test Procedures
Diagrams; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests; G
Damper Acceptance Test; G
SD-07 Certificates
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Training
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Manual Balancing Dampers; G
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based
on manufacturer's published data.
a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards
of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing with
reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient
evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories
requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written
certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately
equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items
have been tested and that the units conform to the specified
requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified
agencies.
Section 23 00 00 Page 5

. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested,
or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM International
(ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a
manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is acceptable as
proof of compliance.
c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from
compliance with other requirements of these specifications.
1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide
rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment enclosures.
Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected to dissimilar
metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier material, or
treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies,
clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers, and
miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials
shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M for
exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B 766 for
interior locations.
1.4.2 Asbestos Prohibition
Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.
1.4.3 Ozone Depleting Substances Used as Refrigerants
Minimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair,
maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by
complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F. Any
person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances
owned by NASA shall comply with the following:
a. Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment, Class
I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.
b. Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82
Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation and
collection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F,
regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.
c. Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F, regarding
technician certification, can conduct work on appliances containing
refrigerant.
In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the
Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating
maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances,
including:
a. Proof of Technician Certification
b. Proof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling equipment.
c. Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.
Section 23 00 00 Page 6

1.4.4 Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refrigerants
The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82
Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses
include:
a. Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a
chlorofluorocarbon
b. Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which
contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent
wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays
c. Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured
with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open
cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene
sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell polypropylene
foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in coaxial
d. Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a
chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66
Subpart C.
Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited
material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request
in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and
dispositioned.
1.4.5 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and
installation details and electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout
showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and
static pressure and seal classifications. Include any information required
to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions properly
as a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to other parts of
the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance.
Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts prior
to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required
to have concrete foundations. Submit function designation of the equipment
and any other requirements specified throughout this Section with the shop
drawings.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and
temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally,
cap or plug all pipes until installed.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Section 23 00 00 Page 7

Provide components and equipment that are "standard products" of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of
a similar material, design and workmanship. "Standard products" is defined
as being in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years before bid
opening, including applications of components and equipment under similar
circumstances and of similar size, satisfactorily completed by a product
that is sold on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers'
catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field service
record are acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation,
for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests,
can be shown. Provide equipment items that are supported by a service
organization. Where applicable, provide equipment that is an ENERGY STAR
Qualified product or a Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) designated
product.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION PLATES
In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide
engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of
mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function
of the equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings.
Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved to
show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case.
Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch
thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger
than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of
suitable height. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall
have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible
adhesive.
2.3 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting
setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact
according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of
a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact
by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and
controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers
indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical
equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20
00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or automatic control
and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified
and control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not
shown. For packaged equipment, include manufacturer provided
controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractionalhorsepower
alternating-current motors, including motors that are part
of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size motors shall
be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Section 23 00 00 Page 8

c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors,
including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the
efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 10.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to
drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for
maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval
between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating
the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated
voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period.
Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and
other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply
fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
e. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state
variable-speed controllers are allowed to accomplish the same function.
Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or
less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.
2.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on
concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the
equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.
Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.
2.6 PAINTING
Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's
standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved.
Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.
2.7 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of
ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.
2.8 DUCT SYSTEMS
2.8.1 Metal Ductwork
Provide metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components,
that complies with SMACNA 1966, as supplemented and modified by this
specification .
b. Provide radius type elbows with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the
width or diameter of the duct where space permits. Otherwise, elbows
having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of the duct or
square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes are allowed.
b. Provide ductwork that meets the requirements of Seal Class A.
Section 23 00 00 Page 9

c. Provide sealants that conform to fire hazard classification specified
in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and are
suitable for the range of air distribution and ambient temperatures to
which it is exposed. Do not use pressure sensitive tape as a sealant.
2.8.1.1 Metallic Flexible Duct
a. Provide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory-applied
insulation, vapor barrier, and end connections. Provide duct assembly
that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed.
Proved ducts designed for working pressures of two inches water gauge
positive and 1.5 inches water gauge negative. Provide flexible round
duct length that does not exceed five feet. Secure connections by
applying adhesive for two inches over rigid duct, apply flexible duct
two inches over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and provide minimum of
three No. 8 sheet metal screws through clamp and rigid duct.
b. Inner duct core: Provide interlocking spiral or helically corrugated
flexible core constructed of zinc-coated steel, aluminum, or stainless
steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring
steel wire helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible vapor
barrier film, inner duct core.
c. Insulation: Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral
fiber blanket type flexible insulation, minimum of one inch thick.
Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard
fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.
2.8.1.2 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated
on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet. Provide runouts that are
preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181.
Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less
than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with
neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with
vertical air inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition
piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose. Provide a die-stamped
elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other
than the vertical air inlet type. Insulated flexible connectors are allowed
as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier that conform to
the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS. Do not expose the insulation material surface to the air stream.
2.8.1.3 General Service Duct Connectors
Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in width where
sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals
are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material by
stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For
rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars
using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector
system that complies with UL 214 and is classified as "flame-retarded
fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.
Section 23 00 00 Page 10

2.8.2 Duct Access Doors
Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and
plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring primaries, automatic
dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring
service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream
and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling
coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise
shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors
as large as practicable. Equip doors 24 by 24 inches or larger with
fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type
doors in insulated ducts.
2.8.3 Manual Balancing Dampers
Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating mechanisms. Use
chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges rounded) in finished
portions of the building. Provide manual volume control dampers that are
operated by locking-type quadrant operators. Install dampers that are 2
gauges heavier than the duct in which installed. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf dampers with maximum blade
width of 12 inches. Provide access doors or panels for all concealed damper
operators and locking setscrews. Provide stand-off mounting brackets,
bases, or adapters not less than the thickness of the insulation when the
locking-type quadrant operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be
thermally insulated, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the
operator. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or
standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
2.8.4 Air Supply And Exhaust Air Dampers
Where outdoor air supply and exhaust air dampers are required they shall
have a maximum leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D as
required by ASHRAE 90.1 - IP or UFC 4-010-01, including:
Maximum Damper Leakage for:
1) Climate Zones 1,2,6,7,8 the maximum damper leakage at 1.0 inch w.g. for
motorized dampers is 4 cfm per square foot of damper area and non-motorized
dampers are not allowed.
2) All other Climate Zones the maximum damper leakage at 1.0 inch w.g. is
10 cfm per square foot and for non-motorized dampers is 20 cfm per square
foot of damper area.
Dampers smaller than 24 inches in either direction may have leakage of 40
cfm per square foot.
2.8.5 Air Deflectors and Branch Connections
Provide air deflectors at all duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or
extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections, and
at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the drawings or
otherwise specified. Conical branch connections or 45 degree entry
connections are allowed in lieu of deflectors for branch connections.
Section 23 00 00 Page 11

Furnish all air deflectors, except those installed in 90 degree elbows, with
an approved means of adjustment. Provide easily accessible means for
adjustment inside the duct or from an adjustment with sturdy lock on the
face of the duct. When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated,
provide external adjustments with stand-off mounting brackets, integral with
the adjustment device, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the
adjustment device not less than the thickness of the thermal insulation.
Provide factory-fabricated air deflectors consisting of curved turning vanes
or louver blades designed to provide uniform air distribution and change of
direction with minimum turbulence or pressure loss. Provide factory or
field assembled air deflectors. Make adjustment from the face of the
diffuser or by position adjustment and lock external to the duct. Provide
stand-off brackets on insulated ducts as described herein. Provide fixed
air deflectors, also called turning vanes, in 90 degree elbows.
2.8.6 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Provide factory-fabricated units of aluminum that distribute the specified
quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing noticeable
drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or dead spots
anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for diffusion, spread,
throw, and noise level as required for specified performance. Certify
performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound rated and certified
inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound power level as
indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with volume damper with
accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the
manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is acceptable. Provide
opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers and registers, except
linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers with round or
elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet openings are
located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a grille or screen
according to NFPA 90A.
2.8.6.1 Diffusers
Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with antismudge
devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging through
design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type
indicated. Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling
diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL Electrical Constructn for the
interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return air
units. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling.
Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers
for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted diffusers.
For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that is airtight
and does not interfere with volume controller. Provide return or exhaust
units that are similar to supply diffusers.
2.8.6.2 Registers and Grilles
Provide units that are four-way directional-control type, except provide
return and exhaust registers that are fixed horizontal or vertical louver
type similar in appearance to the supply register face. Furnish registers
with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. Install wall
supply registers at least 6 inches below the ceiling unless otherwise
indicated. Locate return and exhaust registers 6 inches above the floor
Section 23 00 00 Page 12

unless otherwise indicated. Achieve four-way directional control by a
grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by adjustment of
horizontal and vertical vanes. Provide grilles as specified for registers,
without volume control damper.
2.8.7 Louvers
Provide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with
the air supply and distribution system.
2.9 FACTORY PAINTING
Factory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction.
Paint with a corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
or ASTM A 924/A 924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external
ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according
to ASTM B 117, ASTM D 1654, and ASTM D 3359. Submit evidence of
satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be
installed indoors and 500 hours for units to be installed outdoors. Provide
rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6, average
creepage not greater than 1/8 inch. Provide rating of the inscribed area
that is not less than 10, no failure. On units constructed of galvanized
steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of zinc-rich
protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have burned
through from the interior according to ASTM D 520 Type I.
Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the
Contracting Officer shall be field painted in compliance with the
requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
2.10 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.10.1 Chilled, Condenser, or Dual Service Water Piping
The requirements for chilled, condenser, or dual service water piping and
accessories are specified in Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND
CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
2.10.2 Water or Steam Heating System Accessories
The requirements for water or steam heating accessories such as expansion
tanks and steam traps are specified in Section 23 21 13.00 20 LOW
TEMPERATURE WATER HEATING SYSTEM.
2.10.3 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that
generates condensate in accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-
HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS except as modified herein.
2.10.4 Backflow Preventers
The requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
Section 23 00 00 Page 13

2.10.5 Insulation
The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.10.6 Controls
The requirements for controls are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING,
ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL
CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of
the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation
instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type
of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the
designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
b. No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to any
existing machine or system. Install all hinged doors to swing open a
minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access doors
that clears a minimum of 3 feet. In front of all access doors to
electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to energized
circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333 (Electrical-
Safety Related work practices)and an additional 3 feet.
c. Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms in
conspicuous locations. Mount all indicators, to include gauges,
meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.
3.2.1 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all units . Provide a
depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches, measured in water
gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the drain is
connected. Provide water seals that are constructed of 2 tees and an
appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Provide pipe cap
or plug cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains indicated to connect to
the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste fitting. Insulate air
conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.2.2 Equipment and Installation
Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air
handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring
supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated.
Section 23 00 00 Page 14

Anchor and fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than
6 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise indicated.
Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the intensity of the
vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the surrounding
structure, as recommended in writing by the equipment manufacturer. In lieu
of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete pedestal block with isolators
placed between the pedestal block and the floor. Make the concrete
foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not less than three times the
weight of the components to be supported. Provide the lines connected to
the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with flexible connectors. Submit
foundation drawings as specified in paragraph DETAIL DRAWINGS.
3.2.3 Access Panels
Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and
items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate
them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or
completely removed and replaced. Provide access panels as specified in
Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2.4 Flexible Duct
Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed
instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Provide
hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the
duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.
3.2.5 Metal Ductwork
Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct
supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless otherwise
specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in SMACNA 1966.
Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the vertical run to
allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion. Erect supports on the
risers that allow free vertical movement of the duct. Attach supports only
to structural framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to
metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the
anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required
between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal
framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips.
3.2.6 Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during
construction, perform temporary dust control protection. Protect the
distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all
inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary protection
in place until system is ready for startup.
3.2.7 Insulation
Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork,
piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and
plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit.
Section 23 00 00 Page 15

3.2.8 Duct Test Holes
Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and
plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in
balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched
over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if
needed for future use.
3.2.9 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to operation
and after 72 hours of operation at final speed. Uniformly load belts on
drive side to prevent bouncing. Make alignment of direct driven couplings
to within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range of
misalignment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT PADS
Provide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform
to the shape of each piece of equipment served with a minimum 3-inch margin
around the equipment and supports. Allow equipment bases and foundations,
when constructed of concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of 28 calendar days
before being loaded.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting and
patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed
locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by sanding.
Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically approved. Make
holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an iron pipe masonry
core saw.
3.5 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered
with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction
before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed
within the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean mechanical
equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free from dirt,
grease, and finger marks. When the work area is in an occupied space such
as office, laboratory or warehouse protect all furniture and equipment from
dirt and debris. Incorporate housekeeping for field construction work which
leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of construction
generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces vacuum-swept clean.
3.6 PENETRATIONS
Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other
penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to be
penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for round
duct 15 inches and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for round duct
larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts. Sleeves and
framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers
are installed at the openings. Provide one inch clearance between
penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and
Section 23 00 00 Page 16

diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct
insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-2.
a. Sleeves: Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated,
from 20 gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Where sleeves are
installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe
conforming with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 20.
b. Framed Prepared Openings: Fabricate framed prepared openings from 20
gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Insulation: Provide duct insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through sleeves
and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Terminate duct
insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections. For duct handling
air at or below 60 degrees F, provide insulation continuous over the
damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to
unconditioned air.
d. Closure Collars: Provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide,
unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of
penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install
collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or
insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to penetrating
surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or
less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and
rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over 15 inches
from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and
rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from 20
gauge galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 6
inches on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fasteners where the
opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners
where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.
e. Firestopping: Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire
partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the penetration with fire
stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.7 FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare metal
on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F. Where
more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the
preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch
before applying the succeeding coat. Provide aluminum or light gray finish
coat.
a. Temperatures less than 120 degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, apply
one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil per coat to metal surfaces subject to temperatures
less than 120 degrees F.
Section 23 00 00 Page 17

. Temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 400
degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of
two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400
degrees F.
c. Temperatures greater than 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 315
degrees C 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum
dry film thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or
engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all valves
and dampers. Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter with stamped
or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading clarity. Attach
tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter corrosion-resistant
steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps
designed for that purpose.
3.9 DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TEST
Submit the proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test.
Operate all fire dampers and smoke dampers under normal operating
conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they
function properly. Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by
having the fusible link cut in place. Test dynamic fire dampers with the
air handling and distribution system running. Reset all fire dampers with
the fusible links replaced after acceptance testing. To ensure optimum
operation and performance, install the damper so it is square and free from
racking.
3.10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in
Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Begin testing,
adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and distribution,
including controls, has been completed, with the exception of performance
tests.
3.11 PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each
system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the
system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the
building. Record the testing during the applicable season. Make
corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the conditions indicated
or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general operating tests by an
experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a period of not less than
days for each system and demonstrate that the entire system is functioning
according to the specifications. Make coincidental chart recordings at
points indicated on the drawings for the duration of the time period and
record the temperature at space thermostats or space sensors, the humidity
at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient temperature and
humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.
Section 23 00 00 Page 18

Submit test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests in
booklet form, upon completion of testing. Document phases of tests
performed including initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and
final test results in the reports.
3.12 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from
passing through coils. Inside of coil-induction units, thoroughly clean
ducts, plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of
rubbish and dust and then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces. Wipe
equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots. Provide
temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated during
construction, and install new filters after all construction dirt has been
removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and other items
specified have been vacuum cleaned. Maintain system in this clean condition
until final acceptance. Properly lubricate bearings with oil or grease as
recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper tension. Adjust
control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment to
setting indicated or directed. Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the
manufacturer to meet specified conditions. Maintain all equipment installed
under the contract until close out documentation is received, the project is
completed and the building has been documented as beneficially occupied.
3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.13.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit
0PERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units
listed under SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
3.13.2 Operation And Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as
designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist of
a total of hours of normal working time and start it after all work
specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have
been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items
contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations
of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed On-site Training
schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and at
least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 00 00 Page 19

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
01/07
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 117
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006 & 2007; INT 44-56 2007;
INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58, 51,
48, 59 2009) National Electrical Safety Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 10
NEMA MG 11
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
(2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium
AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -
2008 Edition
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION; 22,
PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this
project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have been
in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
Section 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1

opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product
shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000
hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be
shown.
1.3.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a
certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.3.5 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted
for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these
publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.5.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.5.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of
Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements
are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included
in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of
Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in
the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by
Section 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2

the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and
the FAR.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their
respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and
contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for
components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and
contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall have
auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and
equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional
electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that
specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit for field
installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements
of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements
specified herein.
1.6.1 New Work
Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors, motor
starters (except starters/controllers which are indicated as part of a motor
control center), control or push-button stations, float or pressure
switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices
functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and
conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the
requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment. Extended
voltage range motors shall not be permitted. The interconnecting power
wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit,
the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers, and the
electrical power circuits shall be provided under Division 26, except
internal wiring for components of package equipment shall be provided as an
integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment furnished are
larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical
service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the
section specifying that motor or equipment.
1.6.2 Modifications to Existing Systems
Where existing mechanical systems and motor-operated equipment require
modifications, provide electrical components under Division 26.
Section 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3

1.6.3 High Efficiency Motors
1.6.3.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternatingcurrent
motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the
applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
1.6.3.2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors shall be selected based on high
efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG
10. Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors with
continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in
accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.
1.6.4 Three-Phase Motor Protection
Provide controllers for motors rated one one horsepower and larger with
electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phaseloss,
undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from
immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
1.7 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent
instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4
man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are
made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
Section 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4

PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to
certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall
withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be
in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria
shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint
shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of
adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125
inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on
surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting
system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning,
the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F
shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum
dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject
to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two
coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total
minimum thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry
film thickness of 2 mils.
Section 23 03 00.00 20 Page 5

-- End of Section --
Section 23 03 00.00 20 Page 6

SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
08/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S2.71
(1983; R 2006) Guide to the Evaluation of
Human Exposure to Vibration in Buildings
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK
(2007) HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P
Edition
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS
(2005) Procedural Standards for TAB (Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing) Environmental
Systems
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
applies to work specified in this section to the extent applicable.
All vibration-control apparatus must be the product of a single
manufacturing source, where possible. Human exposure levels should be
considered using ASA S2.71 and NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.
Scheduled isolation mounting is in inches and is a minimum static
deflection.
Spans referred to in Part 2, "Vibration-Isolation Systems Application," must
mean longest bay dimension.
Determine exact mounting sizes and number of isolators by the isolator
manufacturer based on equipment that will be installed. Check equipment
revolutions per minute (rpm) and spring deflections to verify that resonance
cannot occur.
Installation Drawings for vibration isolator systems must include equipment
and performance requirements.
Section 23 05 48 Page 1

Indicate within Outline Drawings for vibration isolator systems overall
physical features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights of
equipment.
Equipment and Performance Data for vibration isolator systems must include
equipment base design; inertia-block mass relative to support equipment
weight; spring loads and free, operating, and solid heights of spring;
spring diameters; nonmetallic isolator loading and deflection; disturbing
frequency; natural frequency of mounts; deflection of working member; and
anticipated amount of physical movement at the reference points.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Installation Drawings and Outline Drawings in accordance
with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Equipment and Performance Data in accordance with paragraph
entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Mountings
Bases
Isolators
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for deflection tests in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "Type of Vibration-Isolation Provisions," of
this section. Include within reports the following information:
Type of Isolator
Type of Base
Allowable Deflection
Measured Deflection
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE OF VIBRATION-ISOLATION PROVISIONS
Design for vibration isolation using ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK, Chapter 37, as
applicable to the following sections.
Test reports for testing vibration isolation must be submitted for each Type
of Isolator and each Type of Base, and meet referenced standards contained
Section 23 05 48 Page 2

within this section. Include in test reports Allowable Deflectionand
Measured Deflection also meeting referenced standards within this section.
2.1.1 Materials
Rubber must be natural rubber. Elastomer must be chloroprene. Shore A
durometer measurement of both materials and range between 40 and 60.
Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass
encased in a resilient moisture-impervious membrane may be used in lieu of
specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this substitution is made,
specified deflections must be modified by the manufacturing source to
accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide
equal or better vibration isolation.
Weather-exposed metal vibration-isolator parts must be corrosion protected.
Chloroprene coat springs.
2.1.2 Mountings
Mountings must be:
Type B: Double rubber-in-shear with molded-in steel reinforcement in
top and bottom. Maximum deflections up to 0.50 inch are allowed.
Type C: Free-standing laterally stable open-spring type for
deflections over 0.50 inch, with built-in bearing and leveling
provisions, 0.25-inch thick Type A base elastomer pads, and
accessories. Outside diameter of each spring must be equal to or
greater than 0.9 times the operating height of the spring under rated
load.
Type D: Partially housed type, containing one or more vertically
restrained springs with at least 0.50 inch clearance maintained around
springs, with adjustable limit stops, 0.25-inch thick Type A base
elastomer pads, and accessories.
2.1.3 Bases
Bases must be:
Type U: Unit isolators without rails, structural-steel bases, or
inertia blocks.
Type R: Rails, connected mill-rolled structural steel, of sufficient
dimension to preclude deflection at midpoint of unsupported span in
excess of 1/1,440th of the span between isolators, power transmission,
component misalignment, and any overhung weight. Where Type R bases
Section 23 05 48 Page 3

are specified and the equipment proposed requires additional base
support, use a Type S base.
Type S: Structural-steel bases common to a supported assembly, made
from welded-joint mill-rolled structural steel with closed-perimeter
configuration, isolators attached to outrigger supports.
Height of steel members must be sufficient to provide stiffness
required to maintain equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment and
duty efficiency of power-transmission components. Height of steel
member must not result in member deflection at midpoint of unsupported
span of more than 1/1,440th of the span between isolators. Minimum
height must be 5 inches.
Type CIB: Concrete inertia blocks must be common to the entire
assembly, and have welded-joint construction, mill-rolled structuralsteel
perimeters, welded-in No. 4 reinforcing bars 8 inches on center
each way near the bottom of the block, outrigger-isolator mounting
provisions, anchor bolts, and be filled with 3,000 psi cured-strength
concrete.
Configuration of inertia bases must be rectangular to accommodate
equipment supported.
Minimum thickness of inertia base, in addition to providing suitable
mass, must be sufficient to provide stiffness to maintain equipment
manufacturer's recommended alignment and duty efficiency of powertransmission
components. Minimum thickness must be sufficient to
result in base deflection at midpoint of unsupported span of not more
than 1/1,440th of the span between isolators. Minimum thickness, the
preceding requirements not withstanding, must be 8 percent of the
longest base dimension.
Pumps with flexible couplings must not have inertia bases less than 8 inches
thick.
Minimum mass of concrete inertia block must be equal in weight to supported
equipment.
2.2 VIBRATION-ISOLATION SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Vibration isolation design per ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK, Chapter 37, .
2.2.1 Centrifugal Pump Locations
ON GRADE ON GRADE ON GRADE
BASEMENT 20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Closecouple
through
5 hp None -R-0.35 C-S-1.0 C-S-1.0
Bedplate-
Section 23 05 48 Page 4

mounted
through
5 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.5 C-CIB-1.75
7-1/2 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.75 C-CIB-2.5
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
2.2.2 Air-Cooled Condensing Unit Locations
20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN
TYPE EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Through 5 hp
over 900 rpm B-U-0.5 D-U-1.0 D-U-1.75
Over 5 hp
to 500 rpm B-U-0.5 D-U-1.75 D-U-2.5
500 rpm and over B-U-0.5 D-U-1.0 D-U-1.75
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
2.2.3 Low-Pressure AHU Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to floor-mounted Air Moving and
Conditioning Association Class A packaged central-station units.
ON GRADE ON GRADE ON GRADE
BASEMENT 20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Through
5 hp B-U-0.35 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.0
7-1/2 hp
and over
250 to
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-1.75 C-U-1.75 C-U-1.75
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.5
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
2.2.4 Medium- And High-Pressure AHU Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to floor-mounted Air Moving and
Conditioning Association Classes B and C packaged central-station units.
ON GRADE ON GRADE ON GRADE
BASEMENT 20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Section 23 05 48 Page 5

Through
20 hp
250 to
300 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-2.5 C-U-2.5 C-U-3.5
300 to
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-1.75 C-U-1.75 C-U-2.5
500 rpm
and over B-U-0.35 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.75
Over 20 hp
250 to
300 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-2.5 C-CIB-3.5 C-CIB-3.5
300 to
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-2.5 C-CIB-2.5 C-CIB-3.5
500 rpm
and over B-U-0.35 C-U-1.0 C-CIB-1.75 C-CIB-2.5
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
2.2.5 Air-Moving Device Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to housed free-standing fans of any
pressure rating, located in factory- fabricated central-station units .
ON GRADE ON GRADE ON GRADE
BASEMENT 20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Through
20 hp
200 to
300 rpm B-U-0.35 C-S-2.5 C-S-2.5 C-S-3.5
300 to
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-S-1.75 C-S-1.75 C-S-2.5
500 rpm
and over B-U-0.35 C-S-1.0 C-S-1.5 C-S-1.75
Over 20 hp
250 to
300 rpm B-U-0.35 C-S-2.75 C-CIB-3.5 C-CIB-5.0
300 to
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-S-1.75 C-CIB-2.5 C-CIB-3.5
500 rpm
and over B-U-0.35 C-S-1.0 C-CIB-1.75 C-CIB-2.5
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
Section 23 05 48 Page 6

2.3 PIPE AND DUCT VIBRATION ISOLATION
Type G: Isolators must be devices with in-series contained steel springs
and preformed fibrous-glass or chloroprene-elastomer elements for connecting
to building-structure attachments. Load devices by supported system during
operating conditions to produce a minimum spring and elastomer static
deflection of 1 inch and 3/8 inch, respectively.
Type H: Isolators must be devices with contained chloroprene-elastomer
elements for connecting to building-structure attachments. Load devices by
supported system during operating conditions to produce a minimum elastomer
static deflection of 3/8 inch.
Type J: Isolators must be devices with elastomers mounted on floorsupported
columns or directly on the floor. Load devices by supported
system during operating conditions to produce a minimum elastomer static
deflection of 3/8 inch.
2.3.1 Floor-Mounted Piping
Type K: Isolators must be devices with springs mounted on floor-supported
columns or directly on the floor. Load devices by supported system during
operating conditions to produce a minimum spring static deflection of 1
inch.
2.3.2 Vertical Piping
Type L: Isolators must be pipe base-support devices with one or more
contained steel springs. Load devices by supported system during operating
conditions to produce a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. Equip devices
with precompression and vertical-limit features, as well as a minimum 1/4-
inch thick elastomer sound pad and isolation washers, for mounting to floor.
Type M: Isolators must be elastomer mounted baseplate and riser pipe-guide
devices. Elastomer elements must be contained double acting, and elastomers
under rated load must have a minimum static deflection of 3/8 inch. Size
isolator to accommodate thermal insulation within the stationary guide ring.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Rails, structural steel bases, and concrete inertia blocks must be raised
not less than 1 inch above the floor and be level when equipment supported
is under operating load.
Vibration-isolation installation and deflection testing after equipment
start-up must be directed by a competent representative of the manufacturer.
3.2 TESTS AND REPORTS
Vibration-isolation devices must be deflection tested. Submit test reports
in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Submittal Procedures,"
Section 23 05 48 Page 7

substantiating that all equipment has been isolated as specified and that
minimum specified deflections have been met. Make all measurements in the
presence of the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 05 48 Page 8

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
08/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S1.11
ASA S1.4
(2004; Errata 2005) Specification for Octave-
Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and
Digital Filters (ASA 65)
(1983; Amendment 1985; R 2006) Specification
for Sound Level Meters (ASA 47)
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK
(2007) HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P
Edition
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
AABC MN-1
AABC MN-4
(2002) National Standards for Total System
Balance
(1996) Test and Balance Procedures
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB MASV
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS
(2006) Procedural Standards for Measurements
and Assessment of Sound and Vibration
(2005) Procedural Standards for TAB (Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing) Environmental
Systems
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1143
SMACNA 1780
(1985) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
(2002; 3rd Ed) HVAC Systems - Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing
SMACNA 1858 (2004) HVAC Sound And Vibration Manual -
First Edition
Section 23 05 93 Page 1

1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
c. DALT: Duct air leakage test
d. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested
e. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating,
ventilating, and cooling.
f. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
g. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing of
Final DALT or TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this phase means
When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken during
TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within the range of
plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement reported on the
TAB Report for a specific parameter."
h. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees
Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design temperature,
throughout the period of TAB data recording.
i. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees
Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design temperature,
throughout the period of TAB data recording.
j. Season 1, Season 2: Depending upon when the project HVAC is completed
and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining Season 2.
Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load, or the season of
maximum cooling load.
k. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1, NEBB MASV, or
SMACNA 1858 (TABB).
l. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems).
m. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.
n. TAB Agency: TAB Firm
o. TAB team field leader: TAB team field leader
p. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.
q. TAB team technicians: TAB team assistants.
r. TABB: Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau.
1.2.1 Similar Terms
Section 23 05 93 Page 2

In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB
Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry
standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to
produce optimal results.
The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only.
Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or
TABB requirements where differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term AABC NEBB TABB
Term Term Term
TAB Standard National Standards Procedural Standards International
for for Standards for
Testing and Balancing Testing, Adjusting Environmental
Heating, Ventilating, and Balancing of Systems Balance
and Air Conditioning Environmental Systems
Systems
TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor TAB Supervisor
Systems Construction Phase Field Readiness Field
Readiness Inspection Check & Preliminary Readiness
Check Field Procedures. Check &
Prelim.
Field
Procedures
1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION
The work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting,
and balancing (TAB) of new and existing heating, ventilating, and cooling
(HVAC) air and water distribution systems including ducts, and piping which
are located within, on, under, between, and adjacent to buildings.
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural
standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB
Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1, NEBB
PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and modified by
this specification section. All recommendations and suggested practices
contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered mandatory.
Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and
submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval. Conduct DALT
testing in compliance with the requirements specified in SMACNA 1143, except
as supplemented and modified by this section. Conduct DALT and TAB work in
accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems
Test, adjust, and balance systems (TAB) in compliance with this section.
Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to
Section 23 05 93 Page 3

exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.2 Water Distribution Systems
TAB systems in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's
written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems as
specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written approval, the
piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd.
Terminate piping insulation immediately adjacent to each flow control valve,
automatic control valve, or device. Seal the ends of pipe insulation and
the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping, with waterproof vapor
barrier coating.
After completion of work under this section, insulate the flow control
valves and devices as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.3 Related Requirements
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-06 Test Reports
DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule; G
DALT and TAB Procedures Summary; G
Design review report; G
Pre-Final DALT report; G
Final DALT report; G
TAB report for Season 1; G
TAB report for Season 2; G
SD-07 Certificates
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Independent Tab Agency and Personnel Qualifications
To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying
that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with
any other company participating in work on this contract, including design,
Section 23 05 93 Page 4

furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the following, for
the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:
a. Independent AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB agency:
TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current
certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of
current certification; or TABB certification number and expiration
date of current certification.
TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB
supervisor certificate and expiration date of current
certification.
TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team
field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of
TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately
preceding this contract's bid opening date.
TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each
field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field
leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than
one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.
Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are current,
and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew Certifications
which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely
manner so that there is no lapse in registration or certification.
TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current registration or
current certification are not to perform TAB work on this contract.
b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this
contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel
is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.
c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if
each new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications
and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.6.1 DALT and TAB Services to Obtain Existing Conditions
Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and
submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval. Conduct this DALT
and TAB work in accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1.7.1 Projects with Phased Construction
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,
and thereby the TAB work, will be completed in a single phase. When the
construction is completed in phases, the DALT work and TAB work must be
planned, completed, and accepted for each construction phase.
Section 23 05 93 Page 5

1.7.1.1 Phasing of Work
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,
and thereby the TAB work, is going to be completed in a single phase in
spite of the fact that there will be two seasons. All elements of the TAB
work are addressed on this premise. When a contract is to be completed in
construction phases, including the TAB work, and the DALT work, the TAB work
and DALT work must be planned for, completed and approved by the Contracting
Officer with each phase. An example of this case would be one contract that
requires the rehabilitation of the HVAC in each of several separated
buildings. At the completion of the final phase, compile all approved
reports and submit as one document.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS
Comply with requirements of this section.
3.2 PRE-DALT/TAB MEETING
Meet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) to
develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work and
TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this
meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work
schedule, and field quality control.
3.3 DALT PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Instruments, Consumables and Personnel
Provide instruments, consumables and personnel required to accomplish the
DALT field work. Follow the same basic procedure specified below for TAB
Field Work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, accuracy
of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and
treatment of deficiencies. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance
with manufacturer's written procedures.
3.3.2 Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work
On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be
DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to the COTR's duct
selection field visit.
3.3.3 Ductwork To Be DALT'd
From each duct system indicated as subject to DALT, the COTR will randomly
select sections of each completed duct system for testing by the
Contractor's TAB Firm. The sections selected will not exceed 20 percent of
the total measured linear footage of duct systems indicated as subject to
DALT. Sections of duct systems subject to DALT will include 20 percent of
Section 23 05 93 Page 6

main ducts, branch main ducts, branch ducts and plenums for supply, return,
exhaust, and plenum ductwork.
It is acceptable for an entire duct system to be DALT'd instead of
disassembling that system in order to DALT only the 20 percent portion
specified above.
3.3.4 DALT Testing
Perform DALT on the HVAC duct sections of each system as selected by the
COTR. Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test
pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures
specified in SMACNA 1143.
In spite of specifications of SMACNA 1143 to the contrary, DALT ductwork of
construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and below if
indicated to be DALT'd. Complete DALT work on the COTR selected ductwork
within 48 hours after the particular ductwork was selected for DALT.
Separately conduct DALT work for large duct systems to enable the DALT work
to be completed in 48 hours.
3.3.5 Pre-final DALT Report
3.3.6 Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Acceptance Testing
In the presence of the COTR and TAB team field leader, verify for accuracy
Pre-final DALT Report data selected by the COTR. For each duct system,
this acceptance testing shall be conducted on a maximum of 50 percent of
the duct sections DALT'd.
Further, if any data on the Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct
section is out-of-tolerance, then field acceptance testing shall be
conducted on data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same
duct system, in the presence of the COTR.
3.3.7 Additional COTR Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to
have a leakage rate measured that exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA
Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction class and sealant class,
terminate data checking for that section. The associated Pre-final DALT
Report data for the given duct system will be disapproved. Make the
necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT Report.
Reschedule a field check of the revised report data with the COTR.
3.3.8 Certified Final DALT Report
3.3.9 Prerequisite for TAB Field Work
Do not commence TAB field work prior to the completion and approval, for all
systems, of the Final DALT Report.
3.4 TAB PROCEDURES
Section 23 05 93 Page 7

3.4.1 TAB Field Work
Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air
and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates
as specified or indicated on the contract documents.
That is, comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 , or SMACNA 1780
(TABB) and SMACNA 1858 (TABB),except as supplemented and modified by this
section.
Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work.
Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written
procedures.
Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air
and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates
as specified or indicated on the contract documents. Conduct TAB work,
including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance
with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV, or SMACNA 1780
(used by TABB) and SMACNA 1858 sound measurement procedures, except as
supplemented and modified by this section. The only water flow and air flow
reporting which can be deferred until the Season 2 is that data which would
be affected in terms of accuracy due to outside ambient conditions.
3.4.2 Preliminary Procedures
Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and procedures
for accomplishing TAB field work. TAB engineer is to locate, in the field,
test ports required for testing. It is the responsibility of the sheet
metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by the TAB
engineer.
3.4.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems
3.4.3.1 Units With Coils
Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water, chilled
water, DX and steam coils for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet
the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations
with the coil test reports:
a. For air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu)
cooling, such as factory manufactured units, central built-up units and
rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4,
procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."
Do not determine entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures by
single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in
compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of
AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."
Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer
converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the
purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity
in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing,"
Section 23 05 93 Page 8

paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph
c.).
b. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as fan
coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal
units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:
Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point
measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures;
submit the calculations with the coil reports.
3.4.3.2 Air Handling Units
Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust
fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes,
terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for
supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.
3.4.3.3 Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, grilles, and hoods for
exhaust air.
[3.4.4 TAB Water Distribution Systems
3.4.4.1 Chilled Water
Chilled water systems including chillers, condensers, cooling towers, pumps,
coils, system balance valves and flow measuring devices.
For water chillers, report data as required by AABC, NEBB and TABB standard
procedures, including refrigeration operational data.
3.4.4.2 Heating Hot Water
Heating hot water systems including boilers, hot water converters (e.g.,
heat exchangers), pumps, coils, system balancing valves and flow measuring
devices.
][3.4.5 Sound Measurement Work
3.4.5.1 Areas To Be Sound Measured
In the following spaces, measure and record the sound power level for each
octave band listed in ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK Noise Criteria:
a. All HVAC mechanical rooms, including machinery spaces and other spaces
containing HVAC power drivers and power driven equipment.
b. All spaces sharing a common barrier with each mechanical room,
including rooms overhead, rooms on the other side of side walls, and
rooms beneath the mechanical room floor.
[c. AHU No. 1 System: Rooms: [_____]]
[d. [_____] System: Rooms: [_____]]
Section 23 05 93 Page 9

[e. [_____] System: Rooms: [_____]]
3.4.5.2 Procedure
Measure sound levels in each room, when unoccupied except for the TAB team,
with all HVAC systems that would cause sound readings in the room operating
in their noisiest mode. Record the sound level in each octave band.
Attempt to mitigate the sound level and bring the level to within the
specified ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals, if such mitigation
is within the TAB team's control. State in the report the ASHRAE HVAC APP
IP HDBK noise criteria goals. If sound level cannot be brought into
compliance, provide written notice of the deficiency to the Contractor for
resolution or correction.
3.4.5.3 Timing
Measure sound levels at times prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.
3.4.5.4 Meters
Measure sound levels with a sound meter complying with ASA S1.4, Type 1 or
2, and an octave band filter set complying with ASA S1.11. Use measurement
methods for overall sound levels and for octave band sound levels as
prescribed by NEBB.
3.4.5.5 Calibration
Calibrate sound levels as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB, except that
calibrators emitting a sound pressure level tone of 94 dB at 1000 hertz (Hz)
are also acceptable.
3.4.5.6 Background Noise Correction
Determine background noise component of room sound (noise) levels for each
(of eight) octave bands as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.
]3.4.6 TAB Work on Performance Tests Without Seasonal Limitations
3.4.6.1 Performance Tests
In addition to the TAB proportionate balancing work on the air distribution
systems and the water distribution systems, accomplish TAB work on the HVAC
systems which directly transfer thermal energy. TAB the operational
performance of the heating systems and cooling systems.
3.4.6.2 Ambient Temperatures
On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and
indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient
wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded.
Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.
3.4.6.3 Sound Measurements
Section 23 05 93 Page 10

Comply with paragraph entitled "Sound Measurement Work," specifically, the
requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time
of sound measurements in the room. The maximum noise level measurements
could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.
3.4.7 TAB Work on Performance Tests With Seasonal Limitations
3.4.7.1 Performance Tests
Accomplish proportionate balancing TAB work on the air distribution systems
and water distribution systems, in other words, accomplish adjusting and
balancing of the air flows and water flows, any time during the duration of
this contract, subject to the limitations specified elsewhere in this
section. However, accomplish, within the following seasonal limitations,
TAB work on HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.
3.4.7.2 Season Of Maximum Load
Visit the contract site for at least two TAB work sessions for TAB field
measurements. Visit the contract site during the season of maximum heating
load and visit the contract site during the season of maximum cooling load,
the goal being to TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and
cooling systems under their respective maximum outdoor environment-caused
loading. During the seasonal limitations, TAB the operational performance
of the heating systems and cooling systems.
3.4.7.3 Ambient Temperatures
On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and
indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient
wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded.
Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.
3.4.7.4 Sound Measurements
Comply with paragraph entitled "Sound Measurement Work," specifically, the
requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time
of sound measurements in the room. The maximum noise level measurements
could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.
3.4.8 Workmanship
Conduct TAB work on the HVAC systems until measured flow rates are within
plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated
on the contract documents. This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing
valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves. Further, this TAB work includes
changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and
water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and
equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be
attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.
3.4.9 Deficiencies
Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of the
equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in equipment
design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished within the
Section 23 05 93 Page 11

ange of design values specified in the paragraph entitled "Workmanship,"
provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor and the
Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended correction.
Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the
Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team
supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design
deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.
3.4.10 TAB Reports
3.4.11 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
3.4.11.1 TAB Field Acceptance Testing
During the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the COTR,
random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion, sound level
readings) recorded in the TAB Report. Points and areas for field
acceptance testing are to be selected by the COTR. Measurement and test
procedures are the same as approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.
Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded
for the following equipment groups:
Group 1: All chillers, boilers, return fans, computer room units, and
air handling units (rooftop and central stations).
Group 2: 25 percent of the VAV terminal boxes and associated diffusers
and registers.
Group 3: 25 percent of the supply diffusers, registers, grilles
associated with constant volume air handling units.
Group 4: 25 percent of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust
grilles and exhaust registers.
Group 5: 25 percent of the supply fans, exhaust fans, and pumps.
Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not
to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report
data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of the
COTR. Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment in that
group. Continue this additional group data verification until out-oftolerance
data ceases to be found.
3.4.11.2 Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group is
found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB
Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for that
group. The affected data for the given group will be disapproved. Make the
necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report. Reschedule
acceptance testing of the revised report data with the COTR.
Section 23 05 93 Page 12

3.4.11.3 Prerequisite for Approval
Compliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section is
a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB Report
submitted.
3.5 MARKING OF SETTINGS
Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC
adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that
adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide permanent
markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which
result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.
3.6 MARKING OF TEST PORTS
The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location
points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, make
these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the
location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions
given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 05 93 Page 13

SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
11/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the
manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test
reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with
the standard or standards referenced in this specification.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
(2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009; Errata
2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings, I-P Edition
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 167
ASTM A 240/A 240M
ASTM A 580/A 580M
ASTM B 209
ASTM C 1126
ASTM C 1136
ASTM C 1290
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
(2009c) Standard Specification for Chromium
and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for
General Applications
(2008) Standard Specification for Stainless
Steel Wire
(2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(2004) Standard Specification for Faced or
Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal
Insulation
(2009) Standard Specification for Flexible,
Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation
(2006e1) Standard Specification for Flexible
Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to
Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts
Section 23 07 00 Page 1

ASTM C 1427
ASTM C 195
ASTM C 449
ASTM C 533
ASTM C 534/C 534M
ASTM C 547
ASTM C 552
ASTM C 553
ASTM C 591
ASTM C 610
ASTM C 612
ASTM C 647
ASTM C 665
ASTM C 795
ASTM C 916
ASTM C 920
(2007) Specification for Preformed Flexible
Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form
(2000) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement
(2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement
(2009) Standard Specification for Calcium
Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
(2008) Standard Specification for Preformed
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
(2008e1) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Pipe Insulation
(2007) Standard Specification for Cellular
Glass Thermal Insulation
(2008) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
(2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced
Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
(2009) Standard Specification for Molded
Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation
(2009) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation
(2008) Properties and Tests of Mastics and
Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation
(2006) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing
(2008) Standard Specification for Thermal
Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel
(1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
(2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric
Joint Sealants
Section 23 07 00 Page 2

ASTM C 921
ASTM D 774/D 774M
ASTM D 882
ASTM E 2231
ASTM E 84
ASTM E 96/E 96M
(2009) Standard Practice for Determining the
Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal
Insulation
(1997; R 2007) Bursting Strength of Paper
(2009) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
(2009) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of
Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess
Surface Burning Characteristics
(2009c) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
(2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor
Transmission of Materials
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-69
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
MICA Insulation Stds
(1999) National Commercial & Industrial
Insulation Standards
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 255
NFPA 90A
NFPA 90B
(2005; Errata 2006) Standard Method of Test
of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
(2008) Installation of Warm Air Heating and
Air Conditioning Systems
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-A-3316
(Rev C; Am 2) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant,
Thermal Insulation
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 723
(2008) Standard for Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 23 07 00 Page 3

1.2.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as
specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping,
duct or equipment to be insulated. Field applied insulation materials
required for use on Government-furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
1.2.2 Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread
index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall
be determined by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. Insulation shall be tested
in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in
the actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted
according to ASTM E 2231. Insulation materials located exterior to the
building perimeter are not required to be fire rated.
1.2.3 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent
practicable, provided that the materials meets all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following
insulation are:
Rock Wool - 75 percent slag of weight
Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-
08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Duct Insulation Systems; G
Equipment Insulation Systems; G
A complete list of materials, including manufacturer's
descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts,
and installation instructions. The product number, k-value,
thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants
and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall
be included. The product data must be copywrited, have an
identifying or publication number, and shall have been published
Section 23 07 00 Page 4

prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials
furnished under this section of the specification shall be
submitted together in a booklet.
SD-04 Samples
Thermal Insulation; G
After approval of materials, actual sections of installed
systems, properly insulated in accordance with the specification
requirements, shall be displayed. Such actual sections must remain
accessible to inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed
from time to time for controlling the quality of the work
throughout the construction site. Each material used shall be
identified, by indicating on an attached sheet the specification
requirement for the material and the material by each manufacturer
intended to meet the requirement. The Contracting Officer will
inspect display sample sections at the jobsite. Approved display
sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the
construction period. Upon completion of construction, the display
sample sections will be closed and sealed.
Pipe Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections shall
include as a minimum an elbow or tee, a valve, dielectric waterways
and flanges, a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert,
or dowel as required, at support point, method of fastening and
sealing insulation at longitudinal lap, circumferential lap, butt
joints at fittings and on pipe runs, and terminating points for
each type of pipe insulation used on the job, and for hot pipelines
and cold pipelines, both interior and exterior, even when the same
type of insulation is used for these services.
Duct Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections for
rigid and flexible duct insulation used on the job. A temporary
covering shall be used to enclose and protect display sections for
duct insulation exposed to weather.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Duct Insulation Systems; G
Equipment Insulation Systems; G
Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation
instructions for the insulation systems. The instructions must be
copywrited, have an identifying or publication number, and shall
have been published prior to the issuance date of this
solicitation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar
type jobs within the last 5 years.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Section 23 07 00 Page 5

Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers.
Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection
from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting
Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty,
dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard
containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings
delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have
manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer
and brand, and a description of the material. Insulation packages and
containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate
items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid
opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA
National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification.
Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling
(HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are located within,
on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 -
IP. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking
and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to
corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either
wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall
meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and conform
to the following:
2.2.1 Adhesives
2.2.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM
C 916, Type I.
2.2.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement
Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 195.
2.2.1.3 Lagging Adhesive
Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a
cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the
cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be
nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented and be
suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass
insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced
fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape
Section 23 07 00 Page 6

to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to thermal
insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal
surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.
2.2.2 Contact Adhesive
Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber
based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and
a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E
84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service, the
insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect
on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile
component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not
contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried adhesive shall not
emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the
adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F. The dried
adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Natural crossventilation,
local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical)
ventilation shall be used to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors,
keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air
solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacletype
safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation
practices.
2.2.3 Caulking
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.4 Corner Angles
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing.
Aluminum shall be ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.2.5 Finishing Cement
ASTM C 449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing
cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless
steel must comply with ASTM C 795.
2.2.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have
maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls.
Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard.
2.2.7 Staples
Outward clinching type monel .
2.2.8 Jackets
2.2.8.1 Aluminum Jackets
Section 23 07 00 Page 7

Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch
nominal thickness; ASTM B 209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or
3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum
jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick,
1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe
over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam
bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands for
insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or
fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the
Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type
longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the
circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the
joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.2.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact
strength, UV resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance
with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive,
greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M; heavy duty, white or
natural; and UV resistant.
2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C 921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all
surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of
25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch
width. ASTM C 921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units,
tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation
exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting
without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that require
factory applied jackets are mineral fiber, cellular glass, polyisocyanurate,
and phenolic foam. Insulation materials that do not require jacketing are
flexible elastomerics. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts,
or equipment. Vapor retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in finished
areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.
2.2.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
a. The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,
3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white,
black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Less than
0.02 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements; UV resistant.
Section 23 07 00 Page 8

. The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and
appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color
shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be
determined according to procedure B of ASTM E 96/E 96M utilizing
apparatus described in ASTM E 96/E 96M. The coating shall be a
nonflammable, fire resistant type. All other application and service
properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647.
2.2.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder
ASTM C 1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum
puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed
ductwork, where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a
minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor retarder
shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed
index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder
The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor
transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units,
a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E
84.
2.2.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape
Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor
Retarder above.
2.2.9.6 Vapor Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white
vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M). Vapor barrier shall meet
UL 723 or ASTM E 84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant.
Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with ASTM D 774/D 774M.
Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified
for laminated film vapor barrier above.
2.2.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C 921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on
all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor
transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is
acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E
84.
2.2.11 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A 580/A 580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or
18 gauge.
Section 23 07 00 Page 9

2.2.12 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.13 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene
rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum
moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, and a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall
be as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 -
IP. Insulation thickness shall be 1/2inch. Comply with EPA requirements .
Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to those listed herein and shall
meet the following requirements:
2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline (-30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be
as follows:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor
barrier.
b. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade
1, Type I or II. Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin
on one or both sides of the insulation. Insulation with pre-applied
adhesive shall not be used.
c. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126, Type III. Phenolic insulations
shall comply with ASTM C 795 and with the ASTM C 665 paragraph
Corrosiveness. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended
factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
d. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, type I. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied vapor
retarder/vapor barrier. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not
be used.
e. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type
I or II.
f. Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM):
ASTM C 547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.3.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet
the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's
recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
Section 23 07 00 Page 10

a. Mineral Fiber: ASTM C 547, Types I, II or III, supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
b. Calcium Silicate: ASTM C 533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors
above 250 degrees F pipe temperature. Supply insulation with the
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
c. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II and Type III. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
d. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade
1, Type I or II to 200 degrees F service.
e. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service
shall comply with ASTM C 795. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
f. Perlite Insulation: ASTM C 610
g. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F
service. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory
applied jacket/vapor barrier.
h. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type
I or II to 200 degrees F.
2.3.3 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation
For below-ground pipeline insulation the following requirements shall be
met.
2.3.3.1 Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552, type II.
2.3.3.2 Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F.
2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1 Duct Insulation
Provide factory-applied cellular glass polyisocyanurate or phenolic foam
insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant
vapor barrier , with identification of installed thermal resistance (R)
value and out-of-package R value.
2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation
Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612, Class 2 (maximum surface
temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB,
II, III, and IV. Alternately, minimum thickness may be calculated in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
Section 23 07 00 Page 11

2.4.1.2 Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1,
Class B-3, 3/4 pcf nominal, 2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F.
Also ASTM C 1290 Type III may be used. Alternately, minimum thickness may
be calculated in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.2 Duct Insulation Jackets
2.4.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket
Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fireretardant
jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the
service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable
for field painting.
2.4.2.2 Metal Jackets
a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B 209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27
gauge (0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper
moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for
jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger. Provide corrugated
surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger.
Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
b. Stainless Steel Jackets: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type
304, minimum thickness of 33 gauge (0.010 inch), smooth surface with
factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
2.4.2.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability,
(greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or
natural).
2.4.3 Weatherproof Duct Insulation
Provide ASTM C 534/C 534M Grade 1, Type II, flexible cellular insulation,
and weatherproofing as specified in manufacturer's instruction.
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5. In
outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified.
Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary to
equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth,
exterior surface.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL
Section 23 07 00 Page 12

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and
equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed
at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation shall not
pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after
one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1 Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall
not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of
this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and
moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation
shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its
shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned
to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of
each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned
prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the
surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and shall
be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multi
layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed
with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation,
jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA
Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.
3.1.2 Firestopping
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade
floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with
fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. The
protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in
accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as
piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a
material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a
NRTL.
3.1.3 Painting and Finishing
Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.1.4 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and
joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 200 degrees
F. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.
Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be
protected with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as
recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured. A
brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to both butt ends to be joined
and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. The adhesive shall be allowed to
set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the
surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of
being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be
pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.
Section 23 07 00 Page 13

3.1.5 Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written
approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding
process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.1.6 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment which Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for omitted
items, as specified.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline
systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier,
including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified
otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and
using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting
each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the
following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for
use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and
drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.
c. Sanitary drain lines.
d. Air chambers.
e. Adjacent insulation.
f. ASME stamps.
g. Access plates of fan housings.
h. Cleanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors
a. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
b. An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive
jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000
permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall be provided
over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.
c. Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor
barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils
Section 23 07 00 Page 14

adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than
3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend 2
inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each end
with a band.
d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a
point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor
with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of
the aluminum jacket.
e. Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall
extend from below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the
flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.
f. Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for
pipe exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2
inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.
g. Where penetrating roofs, pipe shall be insulated as required for
interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and
sealed with vapor retarder coating. The insulation for exterior
application shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior
insulation. The exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down
beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing. The
flashing and counter flashing shall be sealed underneath with caulking.
h. For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated
service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on
the backside of the finished wall. The insulation termination shall be
protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total
thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats
(if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2
inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass tape seams
shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall
penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The
pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well
fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall
penetration at least 3/8 inches.
i. For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar
cooling service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be
terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must
cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall
be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum
total thickness of 1/16 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the
insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The
annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and the
wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved fire stop material
having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall penetration shall
be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The
escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8
inches.
3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers
Section 23 07 00 Page 15

a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous
through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be
supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield
to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever
insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or
jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield,
insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches
shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load
bearing core) can be used.
b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above
shall be supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
c. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall
be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection
shield in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular
glass, perlite above 80 degrees F, or the necessary strength
polyisocyanurate shall be installed above each shield. The insert
shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe.
Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend
2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation
inserts are required in accordance with the above, and the insulation
thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be
installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the
pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to installing
insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the
wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.
d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42
riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in
accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the
insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate
shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall
cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same
thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end
beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in
accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1
inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe
and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as
an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation
jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or
insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported
with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the
pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be
additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe
that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation.
These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as
indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.
e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same
appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall
overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and shall be sealed as
required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover
inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to
ASTM C 1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than
the adjoining insulation material.
Section 23 07 00 Page 16

3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe
sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes
larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes
larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe
on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying
multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with
miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings
shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut
pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation.
3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.
In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment
rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, welded PVC , aluminum or flexible
laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil laminate)
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000 permeability; (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed) aluminum
jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be
protected.
3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material For Piping (°F)
__________________________________________________________________________
Service Material Spec. Type Class Vapor Retarder/
Vapor Barrier
Required
___________________________________________________________________________
Chilled Water Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No
(Supply &
Return, Dual
Temperature
Piping, 40°F
nominal)
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating Hot Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No
Water Supply & Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 I No
Return, Heated
Oil
(Max 250°F)
Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I No
___________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic
Water Piping, Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No
Makeup Water & Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Drinking Fount
Drain Piping
___________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 07 00 Page 17

Hot Domestic Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No
Water Supply &
Recirculating
Piping (Max.
200°F) Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I No
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate
Drain Located
Inside Bldg. Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)
_____________________________________________________________________________
__
Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)
Service Material

_____________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be
insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but
is not limited to the following:
a. Domestic cold and chilled drinking water.
b. Make-up water.
c. Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains.
d. Refrigerant suction lines.
e. Chilled water.
f. Dual temperature water, i.e. HVAC hot/chilled water.
g. Air conditioner condensate drains.
h. Brine system cryogenics
i. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing
fixtures for handicap persons.
3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket
Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder
jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater than
3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability,
standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use with Mineral
Fiber, Cellular Glass, Phenolic Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulated
Pipe. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum
jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the
insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The
aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing selfadhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than
0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall
be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of
the laps of the aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such
as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and
mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor
barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed
silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft
Section 23 07 00 Page 19

level. Other areas that specifically require protection to the 6 ft level
are .
3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe
a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted.
All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and
sealed with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate
jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.
b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less
than 1-1/2 inches. Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for
circumferential joints.
c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on
4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, they
shall be sealed in accordance with item "e." below. Note that staples
are not required with cellular glass systems.
d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient
temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The
lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically
recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall
be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and
then stapling.
e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap
systems, shall be coated with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape. All seams, except those on factory self-seal systems
shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or
greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive
tape.
f. Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by
wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it
with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor retarder coating or
PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than
0.0000 perm adhesive tape. The patch shall extend not less than 1-1/2
inches past the break.
g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the insulation
shall be filled and sealed with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
h. Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall
be by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping
or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over
the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be
secured and sealed with adhesive. When using self seal products only
the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Insulation shall be
pushed on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result
in open seams and joints. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or
Section 23 07 00 Page 20

jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools
such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation
when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around
the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation
directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.
3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the
fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed
with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings
and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified
herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and
17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same insulation as
the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal
conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed
pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required.
Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe
insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the
insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows
insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered
Insulation Elbow'.
c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions,
valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints
and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch,
applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall
overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe
insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor
retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade,
silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a
2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting
insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a
vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the
jacket of the pipe insulation.
d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a
sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches
from the insulation surface.
e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions,
strainers, and check valves.
3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers
At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting
covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape.
Section 23 07 00 Page 21

Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the
fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same insulation
as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and thermal
conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape,
adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers. Seams in
the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be
sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous
vapor seal.
3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines
3.2.3.1 General Requirements
All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated
in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the
following:
a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.
a . Hot water heating.
Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied
aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.
3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. General. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation
of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the
location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that
would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.
b. Precut or Preformed. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed
around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness,
and thermal conductivity.
c. Rigid Preformed. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid
preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape
required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the
adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is
used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter.
Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20
"Mitered Insulation Elbow".
Section 23 07 00 Page 22

3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather
Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for
the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than
3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or
PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no factory-applied
jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be applied if factory
applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.
3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap
not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall
be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal joints
shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock
positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with
caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing
on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall
be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60
degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.
3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings
Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and
finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather
emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air)
recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape
embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the
adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed
aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting
covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of
pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be
weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed, and UV resistant.
3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket
PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include
provision for thermal expansion.
3.2.5 Below Ground Pipe Insulation
Below ground pipes shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2, except as
precluded in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3. This includes, but is
not limited to the following:
a . Heating hot water.
Section 23 07 00 Page 23

3.2.5.1 Type of Insulation
Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, or with
Polyisocyanurate insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
for application with thickness as determined from Table 2 (whichever is the
most restrictive).
3.2.5.2 Installation of Below ground Pipe Insulation
a. Bore surfaces of the insulation shall be coated with a thin coat of
gypsum cement of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Coating thickness shall be sufficient to fill surface cells of
insulation. Mastic type materials shall not be used for this coating.
Note that unless this is for a cyclic application (i.e., one that
fluctuates between high and low temperature on a daily process basis)
there is no need to bore coat the material.
b. Stainless steel bands, 3/4 inch wide by 0.020 inch thick shall be
used to secure insulation in place. A minimum of two bands per section
of insulation shall be applied. As an alternate, fiberglass reinforced
tape may be used to secure insulation on piping up to 12 inches in
diameter. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be
applied.
c. Insulation shall terminate at anchor blocks but shall be continuous
through sleeves and manholes.
d. At point of entry to buildings, underground insulation shall be
terminated 2 inches inside the wall or floor, shall butt tightly
against the aboveground insulation and the butt joint shall be sealed
with high temperature silicone sealant and covered with fibrous glass
tape.
e. Provision for expansion and contraction of the insulation system
shall be made in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's
recommendations.
f. Flanges, couplings, valves, and fittings shall be insulated with
factory pre-molded, prefabricated, or field-fabricated sections of
insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe
insulation. Insulation sections shall be secured as recommended by the
manufacturer.
g. Insulation, including fittings, shall be finished with three coats
of asphaltic mastic, with 6 by 5.5 mesh synthetic reinforcing fabric
embedded between coats. Fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 2
inches at joints. Total film thickness shall be a minimum of 3/16
inch. As an alternate, a prefabricated bituminous laminated jacket,
reinforced with internal reinforcement mesh, shall be applied to the
insulation. Jacketing material and application procedures shall match
manufacturer's written instructions. Vapor barrier - less than 0.0000
permeability self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
jacket greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
Section 23 07 00 Page 24

embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty,
white or natural). Application procedures shall match the
manufacturer's written instructions.
h. At termination points, other than building entrances, the mastic
and cloth or tape shall cover the ends of insulation and extend 2
inches along the bare pipe.
3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be
installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished
spaces before covering with jacket. Air conditioned spaces shall be
defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or
provided with a cooling device such as a fan-coil unit) and heated
conditioned air (or provided with a heating device such as a unit heater,
radiator or convector).
3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness
Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)
Cold Air Ducts 2.0
Relief Ducts 1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5
Warm Air Ducts 2.0
Relief Ducts 1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5
3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct
Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the
following cold air ducts and associated equipment.
a. Supply ducts.
b. Return air ducts.
c. Relief ducts.
d. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).
e. Plenums.
f. Duct-mounted coil casings.
g. Coil headers and return bends.
h. Coil casings.
i. Fresh air intake ducts.
Section 23 07 00 Page 25

j. Filter boxes.
k. Mixing boxes (field-insulated).
l. Supply fans (field-insulated).
m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.
n. Ducts exposed to weather.
o. Combustion air intake ducts.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed,
minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3
pcf. Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be
flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum
density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints
tightly butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be
provided with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a
field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as
specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately
1/16 inch. Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a
factory-applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct
insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except
firewall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall
be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers,
which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate
formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the
collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and
grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a
complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. Sheet Metal Duct shall be
sealed in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION,
VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be
attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct
in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation
shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of
mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and
not more than 16 inches from duct corners.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall
be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners
shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from
duct corners.
d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick
pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive.
Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket
joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a
thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over
standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.
Section 23 07 00 Page 26

e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be
installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary
to ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with
a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater
than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less
than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the
same material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend
not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all
directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and
tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating
or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper
operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and
flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a
brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the
adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture
coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.
j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be
extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.
3.3.2.2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work
a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the
duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not
more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of
the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be
provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be
provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical
fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized
steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test
perpendicular to the duct wall.
b. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams. Each
piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using
mechanical fasteners. When the height of projections is less than the
insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams,
reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried
over. Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams,
reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater
than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried
over. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel
insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.
Section 23 07 00 Page 27

c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers
shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide
strip of tape. Tape seams shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor
retarder coating.
e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket
material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the
jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break
or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled. Staples and
joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper
operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and
flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating
shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2
inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture
in all directions.
h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with
factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf,
attached as in accordance with MICA standards.
3.3.3 Insulation for Warm Air Duct
Insulation and vapor barrier shall be provided for the following warm air
ducts and associated equipment:.
a. Supply ducts.
b. Return air ducts.
c. Relief air ducts
d. Flexible run-outs (field insulated).
e. Plenums.
f. Duct-mounted coil casings.
g. Coil-headers and return bends.
h. Coil casings.
i. Fresh air intake ducts.
j. Filter boxes.
k. Mixing boxes.
l. Supply fans.
Section 23 07 00 Page 28

m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.
n. Ducts exposed to weather.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, and
rigid type where exposed. Insulation on exposed ducts shall be provided
with a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type II jacket, or finished with
adhesive finish. Flexible type insulation shall be used for round ducts,
with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Insulation on concealed duct shall
be provided with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Adhesive finish where
indicated to be used shall be accomplished by applying two coats of adhesive
with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry film
thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Duct insulation shall be
continuous through sleeves and prepared openings. Duct insulation shall
terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.
3.3.3.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, insulation shall be attached
by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch
wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger, insulation
shall be secured to the bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical
fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more
than 18 inches from duct corner.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall
be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners
shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from
duct corners.
d. The insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where
used. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than
that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and
trapeze-type hangers.
e. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners
are used and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Insulation jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at joints
and the lap shall be secured and stapled on 4 inch centers.
3.3.3.2 Installation on Exposed Duct
a. For rectangular ducts, the rigid insulation shall be secured to the
duct by the use of mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct,
spaced not more than 16 inches apart and not more than 6 inches from
the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners
shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger and a
minimum of one row for each side of duct less than 12 inches.
b. Duct insulation with factory-applied jacket shall be formed with
minimum jacket seams, and each piece of rigid insulation shall be
fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of
projection is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be
Section 23 07 00 Page 29

ought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical
projections and shall not be carried over the projection. Jacket shall
be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where the
height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness,
insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection.
c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers
shall be installed and pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints on jacketed insulation shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide
strip of tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.
e. Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered
with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend
not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be
secured with adhesive and stapled.
f. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed with tape
and brushed with vapor retarder coating.
g. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with
factory Type I jacket insulation, minimum density of 3/4 pcf attached
by staples spaced not more than 16 inches and not more than 6 inches
from the degrees of joints. Joints shall be sealed in accordance with
item "d." above.
3.3.4 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose
For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts
shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.
3.3.5 Insulation for Evaporative Cooling Duct
Evaporative cooling supply duct located in spaces not evaporatively cooled,
shall be insulated. Material and installation requirements shall be as
specified for duct insulation for warm air duct.
3.3.6 Duct Test Holes
After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the
insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable
section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be
repaired.
3.3.7 Duct Exposed to Weather
3.3.7.1 Installation
Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for
the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building. After the
above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as
detailed in the following subparagraphs.
3.3.7.2 Round Duct
Section 23 07 00 Page 30

Laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater
than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied
overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Aluminum jacket with
factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped
not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential
laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout. Horizontal joints
shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position. Joints
shall be sealed with caulking to prevent moisture penetration. Where
jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be sealed with
caulking.
3.3.7.3 Fittings
Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for
rectangular ducts.
3.3.7.4 Rectangular Ducts
Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for
outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface. Each coat of
weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness. The exterior
shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather
protection, and secured with screws.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
3.4.1 General
Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment
that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers,
fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted
on the following:
a. Hand-holes.
b. Boiler manholes.
c. Cleanouts.
d. ASME stamps.
e. Manufacturer's nameplates.
f. Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.
3.4.2 Insulation for Cold Equipment
Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on
equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:
a. Pumps.
b. Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
Section 23 07 00 Page 31

c. Drip pans under chilled equipment.
d. Cold water storage tanks.
f. Duct mounted coils.
g. Cold and chilled water pumps.
i. Roof drain bodies.
j. Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
k. Expansion and air separation tanks.
3.4.2.1 Insulation Type
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Material and
thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:
Legend
RMF: Rigid Mineral Fiber
FMF: Flexible Mineral Fiber
CS: Calcium Silicate
PL: Perlite
CG: Cellular Glass
FC: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
PF: Phenolic Foam
PC: Polyisocyanurate Foam
PE: Polyolefin closed cell
TABLE 5
Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling media Material Thickness
at indicated temperature:
_________________________________________________________________________
35 to 60 CG 1.5 inches
degrees F PF 1.5 inches
FC
1.0 inches
PC
1.0 inches
PE
1.0 inches
__
1 to 34 PC 1.5 inches
degrees F FC 1.5 inches
CG
3.0 inches
PF
1.5 inches
PE
1.5 inches
Section 23 07 00 Page 32

_________________________________________________________________________
Minus 30 to 0 PC 1.5 inches
degrees F FC 1.75 inches
CG
3.5 inches
PF
1.5 inches
PE
1.5 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
3.4.2.2 Pump Insulation
a. Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box
shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that
do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Joints between sides and
between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips
for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation. The box shall conform to the requirements of MICA
Insulation Stds plate No. 49 when using flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly
forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on
the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.
b. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including
removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be
applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The
total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line
shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing
the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation
coating. Caulking shall be applied to parting line, between equipment
and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.
3.4.2.3 Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To
ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at
intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch
centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered
with contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under
wires and bands with suitable corner angles.
c. Phenolic foam insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding
compound and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound as
recommended by the manufacturer. Cellular glass shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant, and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable.
Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female
shiplap type joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall
be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a
layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.
Section 23 07 00 Page 33

e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6
inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place,
or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment
over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks
and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place
on 12 inch centers.
3.4.2.4 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be
caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall
be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of
open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking or vapor barrier tape
shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section
insulation.
3.4.3 Insulation for Hot Equipment
Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F
including the following:
d. Water heaters.
e. Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F.
g. Hot water storage tanks.
h. Air separation tanks.
i. Surge tanks.
l. Unjacketed boilers or parts of boilers.
m. Boiler flue gas connection from boiler to stack (if inside).
Section 23 07 00 Page 34

3.4.3.1 Insulation
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Shell and
tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the
shell medium.
Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:
Legend
RMF: Rigid Mineral Fiber
FMF: Flexible Mineral Fiber
CS: Calcium Silicate
PL: Perlite
CG: Cellular Glass
FC: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
PF: Phenolic Foam
PC: Polyisocyanurate Foam
TABLE 6
Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling steam Material Thickness
or media to indicated pressure
or temperature limit:
_________________________________________________________________________
15 psig RMF 2.0 inches
or FMF 2.0 inches
250 F CS/PL 4.0 inches
CG
3.0 inches
PF
1.5 inches
FC (600 F: Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the
insulation to 120F. Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to
substantiate insulation and thickness selection.
3.4.3.2 Insulation of Pumps
Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be
constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave
raw ends of insulation exposed. Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a
Section 23 07 00 Page 35

igid housing that does not rest on the pump. Joints between top cover and
sides shall fit tightly. The top cover shall have a joint forming a female
shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, making
the top cover removable. Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied
over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth
embedded between the coats. A parting line shall be provided between the
box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed
without disturbing the insulation coating. The total dry thickness of the
finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line of the
removable sections and penetrations.
3.4.3.3 Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To
ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at
intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12
inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be
adhered. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands
with suitable corner angles.
c. On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set
in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer,
and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound. Mineral fiber joints
shall be filled with finishing cement.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The
removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap
type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished
as specified.
e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft
fans, and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over
6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in
place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the
equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric
with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or
wired in place on 12 inch (maximum) centers.
g. On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall
be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.
h. Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall
be caulked. Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation,
including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded
between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16
inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and
removable section insulation.
3.4.4 Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media
Section 23 07 00 Page 36

Below and above 60 degrees F: equipment handling dual temperature media
shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment.
3.4.5 Equipment Exposed to Weather
3.4.5.1 Installation
Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance
with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in paragraph DUCT
INSULATION INSTALLATION.
3.4.5.2 Optional Panels
At the option of the Contractor, prefabricated metal insulation panels may
be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified. Thermal
performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field
applied insulation. Panels shall be the standard catalog product of a
manufacturer of metal insulation panels. Fastenings, flashing, and support
system shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for
weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the
insulation. Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and
to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or
permanent damage to the insulation. Exterior metal cover sheet shall be
aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 07 00 Page 37

SECTION 23 09 23
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
12/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 500-D
(1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers
for Rating
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE FUN IP
(2009) Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.15
ASME B16.34
ASME B40.100
(2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes
125 and 250
(2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding
End
(2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 269
ASTM B 88
ASTM B 88M
ASTM D 1693
ASTM D 635
(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
(2005) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube (Metric)
(2008) Standard Test Method for Environmental
Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics
(2006) Standard Test Method for Rate of
Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal
Position
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)
Section 23 09 23 Page 1

CEA-709.1B
CEA-709.3
CEA-852-A
(2002) Control Network Protocol Specification
(1999) Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel
Specification
(2004) Tunneling Component Network Protocols
Over Internet Protocol Channels
FLUID CONTROLS INSTITUTE (FCI)
FCI 70-2
(2006) Control Valve Seat Leakage
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41.1
IEEE C62.41.2
IEEE Std 142
(2002; R 2008) IEEE Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)
AC Power Circuits
(2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
(2007) Recommended Practice for Grounding of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems -
IEEE Green Book (Color Book Series)
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -
2008 Edition
NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 5085-3
UL 916
(2006e1; Rev thru Jun 2007) UL Standard for
Safety Standard Low Voltage Transformers -
Part 3: Class 2 and Class 3 Transformers
(2007; Rev thru Nov 2009) Energy Management
Equipment
Section 23 09 23 Page 2

UL 94
(1996; Rev thru Jun 2009) Tests for
Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts
in Devices and Appliances
1.2 DEFINITIONS
The following list of definitions may contain terms not found elsewhere in
the Section but are included here for completeness.
a. Application Specific Controller: A device that is furnished with a preestablished
built in application that is configurable but not reprogrammable.
An ASC has a fixed factory-installed application program
(i.e Program ID) with configurable settings.
b. Binary: A two-state system where an "ON" condition is represented by a
high signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal
level. 'Digital' is sometimes used interchangeably with 'binary'.
c. Binding: The act of establishing communications between CEA-709.1B
devices by associating the output of a device to the input of another.
d. Building Control Network: The CEA-709.1B control network installed
under this Section, consisting of a backbone and one or more local
control busses.
e. Building Point of Connection (BPOC): The BPOC is the point of
connection between the UMCS network backbone (an IP network) and the
building control network backbone. The hardware at this location, that
provides the connection is referred to as the BPOC Hardware. In
general, the term "BPOC Location" means the place where this connection
occurs, and "BPOC Hardware" means the device that provides the
connection. Sometimes the term "BPOC" is used to mean either and its
actual meaning (i.e. location or hardware) is determined by the context
in which it is used.
f. Channel: A portion of the control network consisting of one or more
segments connected by repeaters. Channels are separated by routers.
The device quantity limitation is dependent on the topology/media and
device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network with locally powered
devices is limited to 128 devices per channel.
g. Configuration Parameter: Controller setting usually written to EEPROM.
Also see 'Standard Configuration Parameter Type (SCPT)'
h. Control Logic Diagram: A graphical representation of control logic for
multiple processes that make up a system.
i. Domain: A grouping of up to 32,385 nodes that can communicate directly
with each other. (Devices in different domains cannot communicate
directly with each other.) Part of the Node Addressing scheme.
j. Explicit Messaging: A method of communication between devices where
each message contains a message code that identifies the type of
message and the devices use these codes to determine the action to take
when the message is received. These messages are non-standard and
often vendor (application) dependent.
Section 23 09 23 Page 3

k. Functional Profile: The description of one or more objects used to
classify and certify devices.
l. Gateway: A device that translates from one protocol to another.
Gateways are also called Communications Bridges or Protocol
Translators.
m. General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC): Unlike an ASC, a GPPC
is not furnished with a fixed application program. A GPPC can be (re-
)programmed, usually using vendor-supplied software.
n. LNS Plug-in: Software which runs in an LNS compatible software tool.
Device configuration plug-ins provide a 'user friendly' interface to
configuration parameters.
o. Monitoring and Control (M&C) Software: The UMCS 'front end' software
which performs supervisory functions such as alarm handling, scheduling
and data logging and provides a user interface for monitoring the
system and configuring these functions.
p. Network Variable: See 'Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT)'.
q. Network Configuration Tool: The software used to configure the control
network and set device configuration properties. This software creates
and modifies the control network database (LNS Database).
r. Node: A device that communicates using the CEA-709.1B protocol and is
connected to an CEA-709.1B network.
s. Node Address: The logical address of a node on the network. Variations
in node addressing are possible, but the 'Domain, Subnet, Node' format
is the established standard for this specification.
aa. Node ID: A unique 48-bit identifier assigned (at the factory) to each
CEA-709.1B device, sometimes called the Neuron ID.
bb. Program ID: An identifier (number) stored in the device (usually
EEPROM) that identifies the node manufacturer, functionality of device
(application & sequence), transceiver used, and the intended device
usage.
cc. Repeater: A device that connects two control network segments and
retransmits all information received on one side onto the other.
dd. Router: A device that connects two channels and controls traffic
between the channels by retransmitting signals received from one subnet
onto the other based on the signal destination. Routers are used to
subdivide a control network and to control bandwidth usage.
ee. Segment: A 'single' section of a control network that contains no
repeaters or routers. The device quantity limitation is dependent on
the topology/media and device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network
with locally powered devices is limited to 64 devices per segment.
Section 23 09 23 Page 4

ff. Service Pin: A hardware push-button on a device which causes the
device to broadcast a message (over the control network) containing its
Node ID and Program ID. This broadcast can also be initiated via
software.
gg. Subnet: Consists of a logical (not physical) grouping of up to 127
nodes, where the logical grouping is defined by node addressing. Part
of the Node Addressing scheme.
hh. TP/FT-10: A Free Topology Twisted Pair network defined by CEA-709.3.
This is the most common media type for an ANSI-709.1 control network.
ii. UMCS Network: An IP network connecting multiple building level control
networks using the CEA-852-A standard.
jj. User-defined Configuration Parameter Type (UCPT): Pronounced 'u-keepit'.
A Configuration Parameter format type that is defined by the
device manufacturer.
kk. User-defined Network Variable Type (UNVT): A network variable format
defined by the device manufacturer. Note that UNVTs create nonstandard
communications (other vendor's devices may not correctly
interpret it) and may close the system and therefore are not permitted
by this specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government.
Technical data packages consisting of technical data and computer software
(meaning technical data which relates to computer software) which are
specifically identified in this project and which may be defined/required in
other specifications shall be delivered strictly in accordance with the
CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List,
DD Form 1423. Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the
particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. All
submittals not specified as technical data packages are considered 'shop
drawings' under the Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (FARS) and
shall contain no proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted
rights.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES, the CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423 and according to the
sequencing specified in paragraph PROJECT SEQUENCING:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
DDC Contractor Design Drawings; G
DDC Contractor Design Drawings shall be submitted in hard copy
and on CDROM in AutoCAD format.
Draft As-Built Drawings; G
Section 23 09 23 Page 5

Draft As-Built Drawings shall be submitted in hard copy and on
CDROM in AutoCAD format.
Final As-Built Drawings; G
Final As-Built Drawings shall be submitted in hard copy and on
CDROM in AutoCAD format.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's Catalog Data; G
Product specific catalog cuts shall be submitted for each product
provided under this specification.
Programming Software; G
The most recent version of the Programming software for each type
(manufacturer and model) of General Purpose Programmable Controller
(GPPC) shall be installed on the existing Metasys ADX server and
shall be licensed to the project site.
SD-06 Test Reports
Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report; G
Four copies of the Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report shall be
submitted.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G
2 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed
and in booklet form shall be submitted. The Operation and
Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate
volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Direct Digital Control (DDC) system shall be a complete system suitable
for the control of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) and
other building-level systems as specified and shown. The DDC system shall
be an extension of the existing Metasys ADX server located in building 4705.
1.4.1 System Requirements
Systems installed under this guide specification shall have the following
characteristics:.
a. The control system shall be an implementation of Bacnet MS/TP as the
communications protocol.
Section 23 09 23 Page 6

. The hardware shall perform the control sequences as specified and shown
to provide control of the equipment as specified and shown.
c. Control sequence logic shall reside in DDC hardware in the building.
The building control network shall not be dependent upon connection to
a Utility Monitoring and Control System (UMCS) for performance of
control sequences in this specification. The hardware shall, to the
greatest extent practical, perform the sequences without reliance on
the building network.
d. The hardware shall be installed such that individual control equipment
can be replaced by similar control equipment from other equipment
manufacturers with no loss of system functionality.
e. All necessary documentation, configuration information, configuration
tools, programs, drivers, and other software shall be licensed to and
otherwise remain with the Government such that the Government or their
agents are able to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and
expansions of the system without subsequent or future dependence on the
Contractor.
f. The Contractor shall provide sufficient documentation and data,
including rights to documentation and data, such that the Government or
their agents can execute work to perform repair, replacement, upgrades,
and expansions of the system without subsequent or future dependence on
the Contractor.
g. Hardware shall be installed and configured such that the Government or
their agents are able to perform repair, replacement, and upgrades of
individual hardware without further interaction with the Contractor.
h. Control hardware shall be installed and configured to provide all input
and output Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) as shown and as needed to
meet the requirements of this specification.
i. All DDC devices installed under this specification shall communicate
via Bacnet MS/TP. The control system shall be installed such that a
SNVT output from any node on the network can be bound to any other node
in the domain.
1.4.2 Verification of Dimensions
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, the Contractor shall
verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer
of any discrepancy before performing any work.
1.4.3 Drawings
The Government will not indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that
may be required on the drawings. The Contractor shall carefully investigate
the mechanical, electrical, and finish conditions that could affect the work
to be performed, shall arrange such work accordingly, and shall provide all
work necessary to meet such conditions.
1.5 PROJECT SEQUENCING
Section 23 09 23 Page 7

TABLE I: PROJECT SEQUENCING lists the sequencing of submittals as specified
in paragraph SUBMITTALS (denoted by an 'S' in the 'TYPE' column) and
activities as specified in PART 3: EXECUTION (denoted by an 'E' in the
'TYPE' column).
a. Sequencing for submittals: The sequencing specified for submittals is
the deadline by which the submittal shall be initially submitted to the
Government. Following submission there will be a Government review
period as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. If the
submittal is not accepted by the Government, the Contractor shall
revise the submittal and resubmit it to the Government within 21 days
of notification that the submittal has been rejected. Upon resubmittal
there shall be an additional Government review period. If the
submittal is not accepted the process repeats until the submittal is
accepted by the Government.
b. Sequencing for Activities: The sequencing specified for activities
indicates the earliest the activity may begin.
c. Abbreviations: In TABLE I the abbreviation AAO is used for 'after
approval of' and 'ACO' is used for 'after completion of'.
TABLE I. PROJECT SEQUENCING
SEQUENCING
(START OF ACTIVITY or
ITEM # TYPE DESCRIPTION DEADLINE FOR SUBMITTAL)
------ ---- ------------------------------ --------------------------
2 S DDC Contractor Design Drawings
3 S Manufacturer's Catalog Data
6 E Install Building Control System AAO #1 thru #5
7 E Start-Up and Start-Up Testing ACO #6
9 S Programming Software days ACO #7
12 S Start-Up and Start-Up days ACO #7
Testing Report
13 S Draft As-Built Drawings days ACO #7
14 S PVT Procedures days before schedule
start of #15 and AAO #12
15 E PVT AAO #13 and #14
16 S PVT Report days ACO #15
19 S Final As-Built Drawings days AAO #16
20 S O&M Instructions AAO #19
23 S Closeout QC Checklist ACO #22
before scheduled start
of #22
Section 23 09 23 Page 8

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) CHECKLISTS
The Contractor's Chief Quality Control (QC) Representative shall complete
the QC Checklist in APPENDIX A and submit a Pre-Construction QC Checklist,
Post-Construction QC Checklist and a Closeout QC Checklist as specified.
The QC Representative shall verify each item in the Checklist and initial in
the provided area to indicate that the requirement has been met. The QC
Representative shall sign and date the Checklist prior to submission to the
Government.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Products shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and
temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants, within the
storage condition limits published by the equipment manufacturer.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS
The HVAC control System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall
include:
a. "Manufacturer Data Package 3" for each piece of control equipment.
b. "Manufacturer Data Package 4" for all air compressors.
c. HVAC control system sequences of operation formatted as specified.
d. Procedures for the HVAC system start-up, operation and shut-down
including the manufacturer's supplied procedures for each piece of
equipment, and procedures for the overall HVAC system.
e. As-built HVAC control system detail drawings formatted as specified.
f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall
be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all
installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance
activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state
the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for
additional comments or reference.
h. Qualified service organization list.
i. Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report.
j. Performance Verification Test (PVT) Procedures and Report.
1.9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Services, materials and equipment shall be provided as necessary to maintain
the entire system in an operational state as specified for a period of one
year after successful completion and acceptance of the Performance
Verification Test. Impacts on facility operations shall be minimized.
Section 23 09 23 Page 9

1.9.1 Description of Work
The adjustment and repair of the system shall include the manufacturer's
required sensor and actuator (including transducer) calibration, span and
range adjustment.
1.9.2 Personnel
Service personnel shall be qualified to accomplish work promptly and
satisfactorily. The Government shall be advised in writing of the name of
the designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel.
1.9.4 Scheduled Work
This work shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through
Friday, excluding Federal holidays.
1.9.5 Emergency Service
The Government will initiate service calls when the system is not
functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide
service to the system. A telephone number where the service supervisor can
be reached at all times shall be provided. Service personnel shall be at
the site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service. The control
system shall be restored to proper operating condition .
1.9.6 Operation
Scheduled adjustments and repairs shall include verification of the control
system operation as demonstrated by the applicable tests of the performance
verification test.
1.9.7 Records and Logs
Dated records and logs shall be kept of each task, with cumulative records
for each major component, and for the complete system chronologically. A
continuous log shall be maintained for all devices. The log shall contain
initial analog span and zero calibration values and digital points.
Complete logs shall be kept and shall be available for inspection onsite,
demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been
accomplished for the control system.
1.9.8 Work Requests
Each service call request shall be recorded as received and shall include
its location, date and time the call was received, nature of trouble, names
of the service personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing what
has to be done, the amount and nature of the materials to be used, the time
and date work started, and the time and date of completion. A record of the
work performed shall be submitted within 5 days after work is accomplished.
1.9.9 System Modifications
Recommendations for system modification shall be submitted in writing. No
system modifications, including operating parameters and control settings,
Section 23 09 23 Page 10

shall be made without prior approval of the Government. Any modifications
made to the system shall be incorporated into the Operations and Maintenance
Instructions, and other documentation affected.
1.10 SURGE PROTECTION
1.10.1 Power-Line Surge Protection
Equipment connected to ac circuits shall be protected against or withstand
power-line surges. Equipment protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE
C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.
1.10.2 Surge Protection for Transmitter and Control Wiring
DDC hardware shall be protected against or withstand surges induced on
control and transmitter wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The
equipment protection shall be protected against the following two waveforms:
a. A waveform with a 10-microsecond rise time, a 1,000-microsecond decay
time and a peak current of 60 amps.
b. A waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time, a 20-microsecond decay time
and a peak current of 500 amperes.
1.11 INPUT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
Sensors, transmitters and DDC Hardware shall be selected, installed and
configured such that the maximum error of the measured value at the SNVT
output of the DDC hardware is less than 150% of the maximum allowable error
specified for the sensor or instrumentation.
1.12 BUILDING CONTROL NETWORK
The building control network shall consist of a backbone and one or more
local control busses as specified. The DDC system shall be an extension of
the existing Metasys ADX server. The application specific controllers used
for this project shall perfectly match the application specific controllers
used in the building 0308 building renovation.
1.12.1 Backbone Media
The backbone shall be a TP/FT-10 network in accordance with CEA-709.3 or an
IP network according to the following criteria:
b. The backbone shall be a TP/FT-10 network otherwise.
1.12.2 Control Network Requirements
The control network shall meet the following requirements:
a. The backbone shall have no control devices connected to it.
b. The backbone shall be installed such that a router at the Building Point
of Connection (BPOC) location as shown may be connected to the
backbone.
Section 23 09 23 Page 11

c. The local control bus shall use Bacnet MS/TP over a TP/FT-10 network
d. The local control busses shall be installed such that no node (device
connected to the control network) has more than two CEA-709.1B Routers
and CEA-709.3 Repeaters (in any combination) between it and the
backbone, including the router connected to the backbone.
e. All DDC Hardware shall connect to a local control bus.
f. All DDC Hardware shall be locally powered; link power is not
acceptable.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
PART 2 of this specification covers requirements for Products (equipment).
Installation requirements for these products are covered in PART 3 of this
specification.
2.1 EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 General Requirements
Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single
manufacturer. Each major component of equipment shall have the
manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a
conspicuous place. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of these and similar
products. The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for two years prior to use on this project.
The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under
similar circumstances and of similar size. DDC Hardware not meeting the
two-year field service requirement shall be acceptable provided it has been
successfully used by Keesler AFB in a minimum of two previous projects. The
equipment items shall be supported by a service organization. Items of the
same type and purpose shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies,
parts and components. Manufacturer's catalog data sheets documenting
compliance with product specifications shall be submitted as specified for
each product installed under this specification.
2.1.2 Operation Environment Requirements
All products shall be rated for continuous operation under the following
conditions:
a. Pressure: Pressure conditions normally encountered in the installed
location.
b. Vibration: Vibration conditions normally encountered in the installed
location.
c. Temperature:
(1) Products installed indoors: Ambient temperatures in the range of
32 to 112 degrees F and temperature conditions outside this range
normally encountered at the installed location.
Section 23 09 23 Page 12

(2) Products installed outdoors or in unconditioned indoor spaces:
Ambient temperatures in the range of -35 to plus 151 degrees F and
temperature conditions outside this range normally encountered at
the installed location.
d. Humidity: 10% to 95% relative humidity, noncondensing and humidity
conditions outside this range normally encountered at the installed
location.
2.2 ENCLOSURES AND WEATHERSHIELDS
2.2.1 Enclosures
Enclosures shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a. Outdoors: Enclosures located outdoors shall meet NEMA 250 Type 3
requirements.
b. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Enclosures located in mechanical or
electrical rooms shall meet NEMA 250 Type 2 requirements.
c. Other Locations: Enclosures in other locations including but not
limited to occupied spaces, above ceilings, and plenum returns shall
meet NEMA 250 Type 1 requirements.
Enclosures supplied as an integral (pre-packaged) part of another product
are acceptable.
2.2.2 Weathershields
Weathershields for sensors located outdoors shall prevent the sun from
directly striking the sensor. The weathershield shall be provided with
adequate ventilation so that the sensing element responds to the ambient
conditions of the surroundings. The weathershield shall prevent rain from
directly striking or dripping onto the sensor. Weathershields installed
near outside air intake ducts shall be installed such that normal outside
air flow does not cause rainwater to strike the sensor. Weathershields
shall be constructed of galvanized steel painted white, unpainted aluminum,
aluminum painted white, or white PVC.
2.3 TUBING
2.3.1 Copper
Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 and ASTM B 88M
2.3.2 Stainless Steel
Stainless steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A 269
2.3.3 Plastic
Plastic tubing shall have the burning characteristics of linear low-density
polyethylene tubing, shall be self-extinguishing when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 635, shall have UL 94 V-2 flammability classification or better,
Section 23 09 23 Page 13

and shall withstand stress cracking when tested in accordance with ASTM D
1693. Plastic-tubing bundles shall be provided with Mylar barrier and
flame-retardant polyethylene jacket.
2.4 NETWORK HARDWARE
2.4.1 CEA-709.1B Network Hardware
2.4.1.1 CEA-709.1B Routers
CEA-709.1B Routers (including routers configured as repeaters) shall meet
the requirements of CEA-709.1B and shall provide connection between two or
more CEA-709.3 TP/FT-10 channels.
2.4.1.2 CEA-709.3 Repeaters
CEA-709.3 Repeaters shall be physical layer repeaters in accordance with
CEA-709.3.
2.4.2 Gateways
Gateways shall perform bi-directional protocol translation from one non-CEA-
709.1B protocol to CEA-709.1B. Gateways shall incorporate exactly two
network connections: one shall be for connection to a TP/FT-10 network in
accordance with CEA-709.3 and the second shall be as required to communicate
with the non-CEA-709.1B network.
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE
All wire and cable shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 90A in
addition to the requirements of this specification.
2.5.1 Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks which are not integral to other equipment shall be
insulated, modular, feed-through, clamp style with recessed captive screwtype
clamping mechanism, shall be suitable for rail mounting, and shall have
end plates and partition plates for separation or shall have enclosed sides.
2.5.2 Control Wiring for Binary Signals
Control wiring for binary signals shall be 18 AWG copper and shall be rated
for 300-volt service.
2.5.3 Wiring for 120-Volt Circuits
Control wiring for 120-volt circuits shall be 18 AWG or thicker stranded
copper and shall be rated for 600-volt service.
2.5.4 Control Wiring for Analog Signals
Control Wiring for Analog Signals shall be 18 AWG, copper, single- or
multiple-twisted, minimum 2 inch lay of twist, 100% shielded pairs, and
shall have a 300-volt insulation. Each pair shall have a 20 AWG tinnedcopper
drain wire and individual overall pair insulation. Cables shall have
Section 23 09 23 Page 14

an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20
AWG tinned-copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation.
2.5.5 Transformers
Transformers shall be UL 5085-3 approved. Transformers shall be sized so
that the connected load is no greater than 80% of the transformer rated
capacity.
2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended
necks to clear the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall meet ASME B16.34
or ASME B16.15 pressure and temperature class ratings based on the design
operating temperature and 150% of the system design operating pressure.
Unless otherwise specified or shown, valve leakage shall meet FCI 70-2 Class
IV leakage rating (0.01% of valve Kv). Unless otherwise specified or shown,
valves shall have globe-style bodies. Unless otherwise specified:
a. Bodies for valves 1.5 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with
threaded or union ends.
b. Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded ends.
c. Bodies for valves 2 to 3 inches shall be of brass, bronze or iron.
d. Bodies for valves 2.5 inches and larger shall be provided with flangedend
connections.
e. For modulating applications, valve Kv (Cv) shall be within 100 to 125%
of the Kv (Cv) shown.
f. For two position applications (where the two positions are full open
and full closed) the Kv (Cv) shall be the largest available for the
valve size.
g. Valve and actuator combination shall be normally open or normally
closed as shown.
2.6.1 Ball Valves
Balls shall be stainless steel or nickel plated brass. Valves shall have
blow-out proof stems. In steam and high temperature hot water applications,
the valve-to-actuator linkage shall provide a thermal break.
2.6.2 Butterfly Valves
Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service
and modulation to the fully-closed position, with carbon-steel bodies and
non-corrosive discs, stainless steel shafts supported by bearings, and EPDM
seats suitable for temperatures from -20 to plus 250 degrees F. The rated
Kv (Cv) for butterfly valves shall be the value Kv (Cv) at 70% (60 degrees)
open position. Valve leakage shall meet FCI 70-2 Class VI leakage rating.
2.6.3 Two-Way Valves
Section 23 09 23 Page 15

Two-way modulating valves used for liquids shall have an equal-percentage
characteristic. Two-way modulating valves used for steam shall have a
linear characteristic.
2.6.4 Three-Way Valves
Three-way modulating valves shall provide equal percentage flow control with
constant total flow throughout full plug travel.
2.6.5 Valves for Chilled-Water Service
Valve internal trim shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Valves 4 inches and
larger shall be butterfly valves.
2.7 DAMPERS
2.7.1 Damper Assembly
A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inch and shall
be no higher than 72 inch. Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inch.
Larger sizes shall be made from a combination of sections. Dampers shall be
steel, or other materials where shown. Flat blades shall be made rigid by
folding the edges. Blade-operating linkages shall be within the frame so
that blade-connecting devices within the same damper section shall not be
located directly in the air stream. Damper axles shall be 1/2 inch minimum,
plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze
bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.
Pressure drop through dampers shall not exceed 0.04 inches water gauge at
1,000 ft/min in the wide-open position. Frames shall not be less than 2
inch in width. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D.
2.7.2 Operating Linkages
Operating links external to dampers, such as crank arms, connecting rods,
and line shafting for transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers,
shall withstand a load equal to at least 300% of the maximum required
damper-operating force. Rod lengths shall be adjustable. Links shall be
brass, bronze, zinc-coated steel, or stainless steel. Working parts of
joints and clevises shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel. Adjustments
of crank arms shall control the open and closed positions of dampers.
2.7.3 Damper Types
2.7.3.1 Flow Control Dampers
Outside air, return air, relief air, exhaust, face and bypass dampers shall
be provided where shown and shall be parallel-blade or opposed blade type as
shown on the Damper Schedule. Blades shall have interlocking edges and
shall be provided with compressible seals at points of contact. The channel
frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air
leakage. Unless otherwise shown, dampers shall be AMCA 500-D Class 2 and
shall not leak in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge
static pressure when closed. Outside air damper seals shall be suitable for
an operating temperature range of -40 to plus 167 degrees F. Dampers shall
be rated at not less than 2000 ft/min air velocity.
Section 23 09 23 Page 16

2.7.3.2 Mechanical Rooms and Other Utility Space Ventilation Dampers
Utility space ventilation dampers shall be as shown. Unless otherwise
shown, dampers shall be AMCA 500-D class 4 and shall not leak in excess of
80 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed.
Dampers shall be rated at not less than 1500 ft/min air velocity.
2.8 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Unless otherwise specified, sensors and instrumentation shall incorporate an
integral transmitter or be provided with a transmitter co-located with the
sensor. Sensors and instrumentation, including their transmitters, shall
meet the specified accuracy and drift requirements at the input of the
connected DDC Hardware's analog-to-digital conversion. Sensors and
instrumentation, including their transmitters, shall meet or exceed the
specified range.
2.8.1 Transmitters
The transmitter shall match the characteristics of the sensor. Transmitters
providing analog values shall produce a linear 4-20 mAdc, 0-10 Vdc or SNVT
output corresponding to the required operating range and shall have zero and
span adjustment. Transmitters providing binary values shall have dry
contacts or SNVT output. Transmitters with SNVT output are Application
Specific Controllers (ASCs) and shall meet all ASC requirements. (note: ASCs
are specified in paragraph DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE)
2.8.2 Temperature Sensors
2.8.2.1 Sensor Ranges and Accuracy
Temperature sensors may be provided without transmitters. Temperature
sensors, including transmitter if used, shall have minimum operating ranges,
minimum accuracy and maximum drift as specified below for the application:
a. Conditioned Space Temperature
(1) Operating Range: 50 to 86 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F over the operating range.
(3) Drift: Maximum 1 degree F per year.
b. Unconditioned Space Temperature
(1) Operating Range: 20 to 150 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F over the range of 30 to 131 degrees F
and +/- 4 degrees F over the rest of the operating range.
(3) Drift: Maximum 1 degree F per year.
c. Duct Temperature
(1) Operating Range: 40 to 140 degrees F.
Section 23 09 23 Page 17

(2) Accuracy: +/- 2 degrees F.
(3) Drift: Maximum 2 degrees F per year.
d. Outside Air Temperature
(1) Operating Range: 0 to 125 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy:
(a) +/- 2 degrees F over the range of -30 to plus 130 degrees F.
(b) +/- 1 degree F over the range of 30 to 100 degrees F.
(3) Drift: Maximum 1 degree F per year.
e. High Temperature Hot Water
(1) Operating Range: 150 to 450 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy: +/- 3.6 degrees F.
(3) Drift: Maximum +/- 2 degrees F per year.
f. Chilled Water
(1) Operating Range: 30 to 100 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy: +/- 0.8 degrees F over the range of 35 to 65 degrees F
and +/- 2 degrees F over the rest of the operating range.
(3) Drift: Maximum 0.8 degrees F per year.
g. Heating Hot Water
(1) Operating Range: 70 to 250 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy: +/- 2 degrees F.
(3) Drift: Maximum 2 degrees F per year.
2.8.2.2 Point Temperature Sensors
Point Sensors shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,
anodized aluminum, or copper.
2.8.2.3 Averaging Temperature Sensors
Averaging sensors shall be a continuous element with a minimum length equal
to 1 foot/square foot of duct cross-sectional area at the installed
location. The sensing element shall have a bendable copper sheath.
Section 23 09 23 Page 18

2.8.2.4 Thermowells
Thermowells shall be Series 300 stainless steel with threaded brass plug and
chain, 2 inch lagging neck and extension type well. Inside diameter and
insertion length shall be as required for the application.
2.8.3 Relative Humidity Sensor
Relative humidity sensors shall use bulk polymer resistive or thin film
capacitive type non-saturating sensing elements capable of withstanding a
saturated condition without permanently affecting calibration or sustaining
damage. The sensors shall include removable protective membrane filters.
Where required for exterior installation, sensors shall be capable of
surviving below freezing temperatures and direct contact with moisture
without affecting sensor calibration. When used indoors, the sensor shall
be capable of being exposed to a condensing air stream (100% RH) with no
adverse effect to the sensor's calibration or other harm to the instrument.
The sensor shall be of the wall-mounted or duct-mounted type, as required by
the application, and shall be provided with any required accessories.
Sensors used in duct high-limit applications shall have a bulk polymer
resistive sensing element. Duct-mounted sensors shall be provided with a
duct probe designed to protect the sensing element from dust accumulation
and mechanical damage. Relative humidity (RH) sensors shall measure
relative humidity over a range of 0% to 100% with an accuracy of +/- 3%. RH
sensors shall function over a temperature range of 25 to 130 degrees F and
shall not drift more than 2% per year.
2.8.4 Differential Pressure Instrumentation
2.8.4.1 Differential Pressure Sensors
Differential Pressure Sensor range shall be as shown or as required for the
application. Pressure sensor ranges shall not exceed the high end range
shown on the Points Schedule by more than 50%. The over pressure rating
shall be a minimum of 150% of the highest design pressure of either input to
the sensor. The accuracy shall be +/- 2% of full scale.
2.8.4.2 Differential Pressure Switch
The switch shall have a user-adjustable setpoint. The setpoint shall not be
in the upper or lower quarters of the range. The over pressure rating shall
be a minimum of 150% of the highest design pressure of either input to the
sensor. The switch shall have two sets of contacts and each contact shall
have a rating greater than it's connected load. Contacts shall open or
close upon rise of pressure above the setpoint or drop of pressure below the
setpoint as shown.
2.8.5 Flow Sensors
2.8.5.1 Airflow Measurement Array (AFMA)
Airflow Straightener.-AFMAs shall contain an airflow straightener if
required by the AFMA manufacturer's published installation instructions.
The straightener shall be contained inside a flanged sheet metal casing,
with the AMFA located as specified according to the published recommendation
of the AFMA manufacturer. In the absence of published documentation airflow
Section 23 09 23 Page 19

straighteners shall be provided if there is any duct obstruction within 5
duct diameters upstream of the AFMA. Air-flow straighteners, where
required, shall be constructed of 0.125 inch aluminum honeycomb and the
depth of the straightener shall not be less than 1.5 inches.
Resistance to airflow.-The resistance to air flow through the AFMA,
including the airflow straightener shall not exceed 0.08 inch water gauge at
an airflow of 2,000 fpm. AFMA construction shall be suitable for operation
at airflows of up to 5,000 fpm over a temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees
F.
Outside air temperature.-In outside air measurement or in low-temperature
air delivery applications, the AFMA shall be certified by the manufacturer
to be accurate as specified over a temperature range of -20 to plus 120
degrees F .
Pitot Tube AFMA.-Each Pitot Tube AFMA shall contain an array of velocity
sensing elements. The velocity sensing elements shall be of the multiple
pitot tube type with averaging manifolds. The sensing elements shall be
distributed across the duct cross section in the quantity and pattern
specified by the published installation instructions of the AFMA
manufacturer. Pitot Tube AFMAs shall have an accuracy of +/- 3% over a
range of 500 to 2,500 fpm.
Electronic AFMA.-Each electronic AFMA shall consist of an array of velocity
sensing elements of the resistance temperature detector (RTD) or thermistor
type. The sensing elements shall be distributed across the duct cross
section in the quantity and pattern specified by the published application
data of the AFMA manufacturer. Electronic AFMAs shall have an accuracy of
+/- 3% percent over a range of 125 to 2,500 fpm and the output shall be
temperature compensated over a range of 32 to 212 degrees F.
2.8.5.2 Flow Switch
Flow switch shall have a repetitive accuracy of +/- 10% of actual flow
setting. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow
range. The switch shall have Form C snap-action contacts, rated for the
application. The flow switch shall have non flexible paddle with
magnetically actuated contacts and be rated for service at a pressure
greater than the installed conditions. Flow switch for use in sewage system
shall be rated for use in corrosive environments encountered.
2.8.6 Electrical Instruments
Electrical Instruments shall have an input range as shown or sized for the
application. Unless otherwise specified, AC instrumentation shall be
suitable for 60 Hz operation.
2.8.6.1 Current Transducers
Current transducers shall accept an AC current input and shall have an
accuracy of +/- 0.5 % of full scale. An integral power supply shall be
provided if required for the analog output signal. The device shall have a
means for calibration.
Section 23 09 23 Page 20

2.8.6.2 Current Sensing Relays (CSRs)
Current sensing relays (CSRs) shall provide a normally-open contact with a
voltage and amperage rating greater than its connected load. Current
sensing relays shall be of split-core design. The CSR shall be rated for
operation at 200% of the connected load. Voltage isolation shall be a
minimum of 600 volts. The CSR shall auto-calibrate to the connected load.
2.8.6.3 Voltage Transducers
Voltage transducers shall accept an AC voltage input and have an accuracy of
+/- 0.25% of full scale. An integral power supply shall be provided if
required for the analog output signal. The device shall have a means for
calibration. Line side fuses for transducer protection shall be provided.
2.8.7 Temperature Switch
2.8.7.1 Duct Mount Temperature Low Limit Safety Switch (Freezestat)
Duct mount temperature low limit switches (Freezestats) shall be manual
reset, low temperature safety switches with a minimum element length of 1
foot/square-foot of coverage which shall respond to the coldest 18 inch
segment with an accuracy of +/- 3.6 degrees F. The switch shall have a
field-adjustable setpoint with a range of at least 30 to 50 degrees F. The
switch shall have two sets of contacts, and each contact shall have a rating
greater than its connected load. Contacts shall open or close upon drop of
temperature below setpoint as shown and shall remain in this state until
reset.
2.8.7.2 Pipe Mount Temperature Limit Switch (Aquastat)
Pipe mount temperature limit switches (aquastats) shall have a field
adjustable setpoint between 60 and 90 degrees F, an accuracy of +/- 3.6
degrees F and a 10 degrees F fixed deadband. The switch shall have two sets
of contacts, and each contact shall have a rating greater than its connected
load. Contacts shall open or close upon change of temperature above or
below setpoint as shown.
2.8.8 Damper End Switches
Each end switch shall be a hermetically sealed switch with a trip lever and
over-travel mechanism. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting
on the duct exterior and shall permit setting the position of the trip lever
that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the damper
blade.
2.9 INDICATING DEVICES
All indicating devices shall display readings in [metric (SI)][English
(inch-pound)] units.
2.9.1 Thermometers
Thermometers shall not contain mercury. Unless otherwise specified,
thermometers shall have an accuracy of +/- 3% of scale range. Thermometers
Section 23 09 23 Page 21

shall have a range suitable for the application with an upper end of the
range not to exceed 150% of the design upper limit.
2.9.1.1 Piping System Thermometers
Piping system thermometers shall have brass, malleable iron or aluminum
alloy case and frame, clear protective face, permanently stabilized glass
tube with indicating-fluid column, white face, black numbers, and a 9 inch
scale. Piping system thermometers shall have an accuracy of +/- 1% of scale
range. Thermometers for piping systems shall have rigid stems with
straight, angular, or inclined pattern. Thermometer stems shall have
expansion heads as required to prevent breakage at extreme temperatures. On
rigid-stem thermometers, the space between bulb and stem shall be filled
with a heat-transfer medium.
2.9.2 Pressure Gauges
Gauges shall be suitable for field or panel mounting as required, shall have
black legend on white background, and shall have a pointer traveling through
a 270-degree arc. Gauge range shall be suitable for the application with an
upper end of the range not to exceed 150% of the design upper limit.
Accuracy shall be +/- 3% of scale range. Gauges shall meet requirements of
ASME B40.100.
2.9.3 Low Differential Pressure Gauges
Gauges for low differential pressure measurements shall be a minimum of 3.5
inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps, and shall have a
diaphragm-actuated pointer, white dial with black figures, and pointer zero
adjustment. Gauge range shall be suitable for the application with an upper
end of the range not to exceed 150% of the design upper limit. Accuracy
shall be plus or minus two percent of scale range.
2.10 OUTPUT DEVICES
Output Devices with SNVT input are ASCs and shall meet all ASC requirements
in addition to the output device requirements. (Note: ASCs are specified in
paragraph DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE.)
2.10.1 Actuators
Actuators shall be electric (electronic) . All actuators shall be normally
open (NO), normally closed (NC) or fail-in-last-position (FILP) as shown.
Normally open and normally closed actuators shall be of mechanical spring
return type. Electric actuators shall have an electronic cut off or other
means to provide burnout protection if stalled. Actuators shall have a
visible position indicator. Electric actuators shall provide position
feedback to the controller as shown. Actuators shall smoothly open or close
the devices to which they are applied. Pneumatic actuators shall have a
full stroke response time matching the connected Electric to Pneumatic
Transducer (EP). Electric actuators shall have a full stroke response time
in both directions of 90 seconds or less at rated load. Electric actuators
shall be of the foot-mounted type with an oil-immersed gear train or the
direct-coupled type. Where multiple electric actuators operate from a
common signal, the actuators shall provide an output signal identical to its
input signal to the additional devices.
Section 23 09 23 Page 22

2.10.1.1 Valve Actuators
Valve actuators shall provide shutoff pressures and torques as shown on the
Valve Schedule.
2.10.1.2 Damper Actuators
Damper actuators shall provide the torque necessary per damper
manufacturer's instructions to modulate the dampers smoothly over its full
range of operation and torque shall be at least 6 inch-pounds/1 square foot
of damper area for opposed blade dampers and 9 inch-pounds/1 square foot of
damper area for parallel blade dampers.
2.10.1.3 Positive Positioners
Positive positioners shall be a pneumatic relay with a mechanical position
feedback mechanism and an adjustable operating range and starting point.
2.10.2 Solenoid-Operated Electric to Pneumatic Switch (EPS)
Solenoid-Operated Electric to Pneumatic Switches (EPS) shall accept a
voltage input to actuate its air valve. Each valve shall have three-port
operation: common, normally open, and normally closed. Each valve shall
have an outer cast aluminum body and internal parts of brass, bronze, or
stainless steel. The air connection shall be a 0.38 inch NPT threaded
connection. Valves shall be rated for 50 psig.
2.10.3 Electric to Pneumatic Transducers (EP)
Electric to Pneumatic Transducers (EPs) shall convert either a 4-20 mAdc
input signal, a 0-10 Vdc input signal, or SNVT input to a 3-15 psig
pneumatic output with a conversion accuracy of +/- 2% of full scale,
including linearity and hysteresis. The EP shall withstand pressures at
least 150% of the system supply air pressure (main air). EPs shall include
independent offset and span adjustment. Air consumption shall not be
greater than 0.05 scfm. EPs shall have a manual adjustable override for the
EP pneumatic output. EPs shall have sufficient output capacity to provide
full range stroke of the actuated device in both directions within 90
seconds.
2.10.4 Relays
Control relay contacts shall have utilization category and ratings selected
for the application, with a minimum of two sets of contacts enclosed in a
dust proof enclosure. Each set of contacts shall incorporate a normally
open (NO), normally closed (NC) and common contact. Relays shall be rated
for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating time shall be 20
milliseconds or less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient
suppression devices to limit transients to 150% of rated coil voltage.
2.11 USER INPUT DEVICES
User Input Devices, including potentiometers, switches and momentary contact
push-buttons with SNVT output are Application Specific Controllers (ASCs)
and shall meet all ASC requirements. (Note: ASCs are specified in paragraph
Section 23 09 23 Page 23

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE). Potentiometers shall be of the
thumb wheel or sliding bar type. Momentary Contact Push-Buttons may include
an adjustable timer for their output. User input devices shall be labeled
for their function.
2.12 MULTIFUNCTION DEVICES
Multifunction devices are products which combine the functions of multiple
sensor, user input or output devices into a single product. Unless
otherwise specified, the multifunction device shall meet all requirements of
each component device. Where the requirements for the component devices
conflict, the multifunction device shall meet the most stringent of the
requirements.
2.12.1 Current Sensing Relay Command Switch
The Current Sensing Relay portion shall meet all requirements of the Current
Sensing Relay input device. The Command Switch portion shall meet all
requirements of the Relay output device except that it shall have at least
one normally-open (NO) contact.
2.12.2 Thermostats
Thermostats shall be multifunction devices incorporating a temperature
sensor and a temperature indicating device. Thermostats shall not contain
mercury (Hg). In addition, the thermostat shall have the following as
specified and shown:
a. A User Input Device which shall adjust a temperature setpoint output.
b. A User Input Momentary Contact Button and an output indicating zone
occupancy.
c. A three position User Input Switch labeled to indicate heating, cooling
and off positions ('HEAT-COOL-OFF' switch) and providing corresponding
outputs.
d. A two position User Input Switch labeled with 'AUTO' and 'ON' positions
and providing corresponding outputs.
e. A multi-position User Input Switch with 'OFF' and at least two fan
speed positions and providing corresponding outputs.
2.13 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE
2.13.1 General Requirements
All DDC Hardware shall meet the following requirements:
a. It shall incorporate a "service pin" which, when pressed will cause the
DDC Hardware to broadcast its 48-bit NodeID and its ProgramID over the
network. The service pin shall be distinguishable and accessible.
b. It shall incorporate a light to indicate the device is receiving power.
Section 23 09 23 Page 24

c. It shall incorporate a TP/FT-10 transceiver in accordance with CEA-
709.3 and connections for TP/FT-10 control network wiring. It shall
not have connections to any other network media type.
d. It shall communicate on the network using only the Bacnet MS/TP
protocol.
e. It shall be locally powered; link powered devices are not acceptable.
f. Application programs and configuration settings shall be stored in a
manner such that a loss of power does not result in a loss of the
application program or configuration settings.
g. It shall have all functionality specified and required to support the
application (Sequence of Operation or portion thereof) in which it is
used, including but not limited to:
(1) It shall provide input and output SNVTs as specified and required
to support the sequence and application in which it is used.
(2) It shall be configurable via standard or user-defined
configuration parameters (SCPT or UCPT), SNVT network configuration
inputs (nci), or hardware settings on the controller itself as
specified and as required to support the sequence and application
in which it is used.
h. It shall meet 47 CFR 15 requirements and have UL 916 or equivalent
safety listing.
2.13.2 Hardware Input-Output (I/O) Functions
DDC Hardware incorporating hardware input-output (I/O) functions shall meet
the following requirements:
a. Analog Inputs: DDC Hardware analog inputs (AIs) shall perform analog to
digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 8 bits plus
sign or better as needed to meet the accuracy requirements specified in
paragraph INPUT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY. Signal conditioning including
transient rejection shall be provided for each analog input. Analog
inputs shall be capable of being individually calibrated for zero and
span. The AI shall incorporate common mode noise rejection of at least
50 dB from 0 to 100 Hz for differential inputs, and normal mode noise
rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz from a source impedance of 10,000
ohms.
b. Analog Outputs: DDC Hardware analog outputs (AOs) shall perform digital
to analog (D-to-A) conversion with a minimum resolution of 8 bits plus
sign, and output a signal with a range of 4-20 mAdc or 0-10 Vdc.
Analog outputs shall be capable of being individually calibrated for
zero and span.
c. Binary Inputs: DDC Hardware binary inputs (BIs) shall accept contact
closures and shall ignore transients of less than 5 milli-second
Section 23 09 23 Page 25

duration. Isolation and protection against an applied steady-state
voltage up to 180 Vac peak shall be provided.
d. Binary Outputs: DDC Hardware binary outputs (BOs) shall provide relay
contact closures or triac outputs for momentary and maintained
operation of output devices.
(1) Relay Contact Closures: Closures shall have a minimum duration of
0.1 second. Relays shall provide at least 180V of isolation.
Electromagnetic interference suppression shall be provided on all
output lines to limit transients to non-damaging levels. Minimum
contact rating shall be one ampere at 24 Vac.
(2) Triac outputs: Triac outputs shall provide at least 180 V of
isolation.
e. Pulse Accumulator: DDC Hardware pulse accumulators shall have the same
characteristics as the BI. In addition, a buffer shall be provided to
totalize pulses. The pulse accumulator shall accept rates of at least
20 pulses per second. The totalized value shall be reset to zero upon
operator's command.
2.13.3 Application Specific Controller (ASC)
Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) have a fixed factory-installed
application program (i.e. ProgramID) with configurable settings. ASCs shall
meet the following requirements in addition to the General DDC Hardware and
DDC Hardware Input-Output (I/O) Function requirements:
a. Unless otherwise approved, all necessary Configuration Parameters and
network configuration inputs (ncis) for the sequence and application in
which the ASC is used shall be fully configurable through an LNS plugin.
This plug-in shall be submitted as specified for each type of ASC
(manufacturer and model). (Note: configuration accomplished via
hardware settings does not require configuration via plug-in)
b. Local Display Panel (LDP): The Local Display Panel shall be an
Application Specific Controller (ASC) with a display and navigation
buttons. It shall provide display and adjustment of SNVT inputs and
SNVT outputs as shown.
2.13.4 General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC)
A General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC) is not installed with a
fixed factory-installed application program. GPPCs shall meet the following
requirements in addition to the general DDC Hardware requirements and
Hardware Input-Output (I/O) Function:
a. All programming software required to program the GPPC shall be
delivered to and licensed to the project site as specified.
b. Copies of the installed GPPC application programs as source code
compatible with the supplied programming software shall be submitted as
specified. The submitted GPPC application program shall be the
Section 23 09 23 Page 26

complete application necessary for the GPPC to function as installed
and be sufficient to allow replacement of the installed controller with
a GPPC of the same type.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.2 CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.2.1 General Installation Requirements
3.2.1.1 HVAC Control System
The HVAC control system shall be completely installed, tested and ready for
operation. Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals
are used for connection and support. Penetrations through and mounting
holes in the building exterior shall be made watertight. The HVAC control
system installation shall provide clearance for control system maintenance
by maintaining access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or
replace control system devices. The control system installation shall not
interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical
system maintenance.
3.2.1.2 Device Mounting Criteria
All devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and as specified and shown. Control devices to be installed
in piping and ductwork shall be provided with required gaskets, flanges,
thermal compounds, insulation, piping, fittings, and manual valves for
shutoff, equalization, purging, and calibration. Strap-on temperature
sensing elements shall not be used except as specified. Spare thermowells
shall be installed adjacent to each thermowell containing a sensor and as
shown. Devices located outdoors shall have a weathershield.
3.2.1.3 Labels and Tags
Labels and tags shall be keyed to the unique identifiers shown on the As-
Built drawings. All Enclosures and DDC Hardware shall be labeled. All
sensors and actuators in mechanical rooms shall be tagged. Airflow
measurement arrays shall be tagged to show flow rate range for signal output
range, duct size, and pitot tube AFMA flow coefficient. Duct static
pressure taps shall be tagged at the location of the pressure tap. Tags
shall be plastic or metal and shall be mechanically attached directly to
each device or attached by a metal chain or wire. Labels exterior to
protective enclosures shall be engraved plastic and mechanically attached to
the enclosure or DDC Hardware. Labels inside protective enclosures may
attached using adhesive, but shall not be hand written.
3.2.2 DDC Hardware
DDC Hardware shall be installed in an enclosure. Except for DDC Hardware
used to control Terminal Units, where multiple pieces of DDC Hardware are
used to execute one sequence all DDC Hardware executing that sequence shall
be on a common local control bus and isolated from all other DDC Hardware
via an CEA-709.1B Router or CEA-709.3 Repeater.
Section 23 09 23 Page 27

3.2.3 Local Display Panel (LDP)
Local Display Panels shall be installed in each mechanical room containing
an air handler and shall provide SNVT inputs for display and outputs for
adjusting SNVT values as shown on the Points Schedule.
3.2.4 Gateways
Gateways may be used for communication with non-CEA-709.1B control hardware
subject to all of the following limitations:
a. Each gateway shall communicate with and perform protocol translation
for non-CEA-709.1B control hardware controlling one and only one
package unit.
b. Non-CEA-709.1B control hardware shall not be used for controlling
built-up units.
c. Non-CEA-709.1B control hardware shall not perform system scheduling
functions.
3.2.5 Network Interface Jack
A standard network interface jack shall be provided for each node on the
control network. For terminal unit controllers with hardwired thermostats
this network interface jack shall be located at the thermostat or within 10
ft of the controller. Locating the interface jack near the controller is
preferred. For all other nodes the network interface jack shall be located
within 10 ft of the node. If the network interface jack is other than a 1/8
inch phone jack, the Contractor shall provide an interface cable with a
standard 1/8 inch phone jack on one end and a connector suitable for mating
with installed network interface jack on the other. No more than one type
of interface cable shall be required to access all network interface jacks.
Contractor shall furnish one interface cable(s).
3.2.6 Room Instrument Mounting
Room instruments, including but not limited to wall mounted thermostats and
sensors located in occupied spaces shall be mounted 60 inches above the
floor unless otherwise shown. Unless otherwise shown on the Thermostat
Schedule:
a. Thermostats for Fan Coil Units shall be unit mounted.
b. All other Thermostats shall be wall mounted.
3.2.7 Indication Devices Installed in Piping and Liquid Systems
Gauges in piping systems subject to pulsation shall have snubbers. Gauges
for steam service shall have pigtail fittings with cock. Thermometers and
temperature sensing elements installed in liquid systems shall be installed
in thermowells.
3.2.8 Temperature Limit Switch
Section 23 09 23 Page 28

A temperature limit switch (freezestat) shall be provided to sense the
temperature at the location shown. A sufficient number of temperature limit
switches (freezestats) shall be installed to provide complete coverage of
the duct section. Manual reset limit switches shall be installed in
approved, accessible locations where they can be reset easily. The
temperature limit switch (freezestat) sensing element shall be installed in
a serpentine pattern and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3.2.9 Averaging Temperature Sensing Elements
Sensing elements shall be installed in a serpentine pattern located as
shown.
3.2.10 Air Flow Measurement Arrays (AFMA))
Outside Air AFMAs shall be located downstream from the Outside Air filters.
Pitot Tube AFMA shall not be used if the expected velocity measurement is
below 700 fpm or for outside airflow measurements.
3.2.11 Duct Static Pressure Sensors
The duct static pressure sensing tap shall be located at 75% to 100% of the
distance between the first and last air terminal units. If the transmitter
is wired in a homerun configuration to an AHU controller, the transmitter
shall be located in the same enclosure as the air handling unit (AHU)
controller(s) for the AHU serving the terminal units.
3.2.12 Relative Humidity Sensors
Relative humidity sensors in supply air ducts shall be installed at least 10
feet downstream of humidity injection elements.
3.2.13 Flowmeters
The minimum straight unobstructed piping for the flowmeter installation
shall be at least 10 pipe diameters upstream and at least 5 pipe diameters
downstream and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3.2.14 Dampers
3.2.14.1 Damper Actuators
Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. Multiple actuators shall
not be connected to a common drive shaft. Actuators shall be installed so
that their action shall seal the damper to the extent required to maintain
leakage at or below the specified rate and shall move the blades smoothly.
3.2.14.2 Damper Installation
Dampers shall be installed straight and true, level in all planes, and
square in all dimensions. Dampers shall move freely without undue stress
due to twisting, racking (parallelogramming), bowing, or other installation
error. Blades shall close completely and leakage shall not exceed that
specified at the rated static pressure. Structural support shall be used
Section 23 09 23 Page 29

for multi-section dampers. Acceptable methods include but are not limited
to U-channel, angle iron, corner angles and bolts, bent galvanized steel
stiffeners, sleeve attachments, braces, and building structure. Where
multi-section dampers are installed in ducts or sleeves, they shall not sag
due to lack of support. Jackshafts shall not be used to link more than
three damper sections. Blade to blade linkages shall not be used. Outside
and return air dampers shall be installed such that their blades direct
their respective air streams towards each other to provide for maximum
mixing of air streams.
3.2.15 Valves
3.2.15.1 Ball Valves
Two-position (open/closed) ball valves may only be used on chilled water,
condenser water, hot water, or steam applications. Modulating ball valves
may only be used for chilled water and condenser water applications
(modulating ball valves shall not be used on steam or hot water
applications). In modulating applications a characterizing equal-percentage
disc shall be used.
3.2.15.2 Butterfly Valves
In two-way control applications, valve travel shall be limited to 70% (60
degrees) open position.
3.2.16 Local Gauges for Actuators
Pneumatic actuators shall have an accessible and visible pressure gauge
installed in the tubing lines at the actuator as shown.
3.2.17 Wire and Cable
Wire and Cable shall be installed without splices between control devices and
in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 90A. Instrumentation grounding shall be
installed per the device manufacturer's instructions and as necessary to
prevent ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting operation of
the system. Ground rods installed by the Contractor shall be tested as
specified in IEEE Std 142. Cables and conductor wires shall be tagged at
both ends, with the identifier shown on the shop drawings. Electrical work
shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as
shown. Wiring external to enclosures shall be run in raceways
3.2.18 Copper Tubing
Copper tubing shall be hard-drawn in exposed areas and either hard-drawn or
annealed in concealed areas. Only tool-made bends shall be used. Fittings
for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder joint type except at
connections to apparatus, where fittings shall be brass compression type.
3.2.19 Plastic Tubing
Plastic tubing shall be run within covered raceways or conduit except when
otherwise specified. Plastic tubing shall not be used for applications
where the tubing could be subjected to a temperature exceeding 130 degrees
F. Fittings for plastic tubing shall be for instrument service and shall be
Section 23 09 23 Page 30

ass or acetal resin of the compression or barbed push-on type. Except in
walls and exposed locations, plastic multitube instrument tubing bundle
without conduit or raceway protection may be used where a number of air
lines run to the same points, provided the multitube bundle is enclosed in a
protective sheath, is run parallel to the building lines and is adequately
supported as specified.
3.3 DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS
Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings.
3.3.2 DDC Contractor Design Drawings
Drawings shall be on ISO A1 34 by 22 inchesorA3 17 by 11 inches sheets in
the form and arrangement shown. The drawings shall use the same
abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature and identifiers shown. Each control
system element on a drawing shall be assigned a unique identifier as shown.
The DDC Contractor Design Drawings shall be delivered together as a complete
submittal. Deviations shall be approved by the Contracting Officer. DDC
Contractor Design Drawings shall include the following:
a. Drawing Index and HVAC Design Drawing Legend: The HVAC Control System
Drawing Index shall show the name and number of the building, military
site, State or other similar designation, and Country. The Drawing
Index shall list all Contractor Design Drawings, including the drawing
number, sheet number, drawing title, and computer filename when used.
The Design Drawing Legend shall show and describe all symbols,
abbreviations and acronyms used on the Design Drawings.
b. Valve Schedule: The valve schedule shall contain each valve's unique
identifier, size, flow coefficient Kv (Cv), pressure drop at specified
flow rate, spring range, positive positioner range, actuator size,
close-off pressure to torque data, dimensions, and access and clearance
requirements data. The valve schedule shall contain actuator selection
data supported by calculations of the force required to move and seal
the valve, access and clearance requirements. A valve schedule shall
be submitted for each HVAC system.
c. Damper Schedule: The damper schedule shall contain each damper's unique
identifier, type (opposed or parallel blade), nominal and actual sizes,
orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, actuator
size and spring ranges, operation rate, positive positioner range,
location of actuators and damper end switches, arrangement of sections
in multi-section dampers, and methods of connecting dampers, actuators,
and linkages. The Damper Schedule shall include the AMCA 500-D maximum
leakage rate at the operating static-pressure differential. A damper
schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC system.
d. Thermostat and Occupancy Sensor Schedule: The thermostat and occupancy
sensor schedule shall contain each thermostat's unique identifier, room
identifier and control features and functions as shown. A thermostat
and occupancy sensor schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC system.
e. Critical Alarm Handling Schedule: The critical alarm handling schedule
shall contain the same fields as the critical alarm handling schedule
Section 23 09 23 Page 31

Contract Drawing with Contractor updated information and any other
project-specific information required to implement the alarm handling
function. A critical alarm handling schedule shall be submitted for
each HVAC system.
f. Equipment Schedule: The equipment schedule shall contain the unique
identifier, manufacturer, model number, part number and descriptive
name for each control device, hardware and component provided under
this specification. An equipment schedule shall be submitted for each
HVAC system.
g. Occupancy Schedule: The occupancy schedule drawing shall contain the
same fields as the occupancy schedule Contract Drawing with Contractor
updated information. An occupancy schedule shall be submitted for each
HVAC system.
h. Points Schedule: The Points Schedule drawing shall contain the same
fields as the Points Schedule Contract Drawing with Contractor updated
information. A Points Schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC
system.
j. Riser diagram of building control network: The Riser Diagram of the
Building Control Network shall show all network cabling, DDC Hardware,
and Network Hardware including:
(1) All DDC Hardware with room number and location within room.
(2) DDC Hardware unique identifiers and common descriptive names.
(3) All Network hardware with room number and location within room.
(4) Network hardware unique identifiers.
(5) All cabling.
(6) Room number and location within room of all cabling termination
points.
(7) Room number and location within room of all network interface
jacks.
k. A single riser diagram shall be submitted for each building.
l. Control System Schematics: The control system schematics shall be in
the same form as the control system schematic Contract Drawing with
Contractor updated information. A control system schematic shall be
submitted for each HVAC system.
m. Sequences of Operation including Control Logic Diagrams: The HVAC
control system sequence of operation and control logic diagrams shall
be in the same format as the Contract Drawings and shall refer to the
devices by their unique identifiers. No operational deviations from
specified sequences will be permitted without prior written approval of
Section 23 09 23 Page 32

the Government. Sequences of operation and control logic diagrams
shall be submitted for each HVAC control system.
n. Controller, Motor Starter and Relay Wiring Diagram: The controller
wiring diagrams shall be functional wiring diagrams which show the
interconnection of conductors and cables to each controller and to the
identified terminals of input and output devices, starters and package
equipment. The wiring diagrams shall show necessary jumpers and ground
connections. The wiring diagrams shall show the labels of all
conductors. Sources of power required for control systems and for
packaged equipment control systems shall be identified back to the
panel board circuit breaker number, controller enclosures, magnetic
starter, or packaged equipment control circuit. Each power supply and
transformer not integral to a controller, starter, or packaged
equipment shall be shown. The connected volt-ampere load and the power
supply volt-ampere rating shall be shown. Wiring diagrams shall be
submitted for each HVAC control system.
3.3.3 Draft As-Built Drawings
The Contractor shall update the Contractor Design Drawings with all as-built
data and submit as specified.
3.3.4 Final As-Built Drawings
The Contractor shall update the Draft As-Built Drawings with all final asbuilt
data and submit as specified.
3.4 HVAC SYSTEMS SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
3.4.1 Alarm Handling
The Contractor shall install and configure DDC Hardware to provide alarm
handling functionality for critical alarms as specified and shown, either in
a piece of DDC Hardware dedicated to this function or in DDC Hardware
performing other functions. The DDC Hardware providing alarm handling
functionality shall provide the following capabilities as required:
a. Dial to a pager: The node shall be able to dial a paging service and
leave a numeric message.
b. Dial to an e-mail server: The node shall be able to dial and connect to
a remote server and send an e-mail via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP).
c. Send e-mail over IP Network: The alarm handling node shall be capable
of connecting to an IP network and sending e-mail via Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
d. Provide network access: The node shall be capable of receiving a
connection via the modem to allow a remote computer access to the
control network.
3.4.2 Scheduling
Section 23 09 23 Page 33

3.4.2.1 System Mode
AHUs shall operate in Occupied, Warm-Up-Cool-Down, or Unoccupied modes as
specified. VAV boxes, Fan Coils, and other terminal equipment shall operate
in Occupied or Unoccupied modes as specified. Chillers, boilers, and other
sources of heating/cooling for hydronic loads do not require scheduling;
these systems receive requests for heating/cooling from their loads.
3.4.2.2 System Scheduler Requirements
The System Scheduler functionality shall reside in either a piece of DDC
Hardware dedicated to this functionality or in the DDC Hardware controlling
the system AHU. A single piece of DDC Hardware may contain multiple System
Schedulers. A unique System Scheduler shall be provided for: each AHU
including it's associated Terminal Units, and each stand-alone Terminal Unit
(those not dependent upon AHU service). Each System Scheduler shall provide
the following functionality:
a. Scheduled Occupancy Input: Accept network variable of type
SNVT_occupancy. Input shall support the following possible values:
OC_STANDBY, OC_OCCUPIED and OC_UNOCCUPIED.
b. Occupancy Override Input: Accept network variable of type
SNVT_occupancy . Input shall support the following possible values:
OC_STANDBY, OC_OCCUPIED, OC_UNOCCUPIED, and OC_NUL.
c. Space Occupancy Inputs: For systems with multiple occupancy sensors,
accept multiple inputs of network variable type SNVT_Occupancy. Input
shall support the following possible values: OC_OCCUPIED,
OC_UNOCCUPIED, and OC_NUL. For systems with a single occupancy sensor,
accept a network variable input of type SNVT_Occupancy or a hardware
binary input (BI) indicating the space occupancy status as Occupied or
Unoccupied.
d. Air Handler Occupancy Output: For a System Scheduler for a system
containing an air handler, output one or more SNVTs indicating the
desired occupancy status as one of the following possible values:
Warm-Up-Cool-Down (when required by the AHU Sequence of Operation),
Occupied and Unoccupied.
e. Default Schedule: Incorporate a 24-hour 7-day default schedule as shown
on the drawings which may be activated and deactivated by the System
Scheduler Logic.
f. Communication Determination: Determine the time elapsed between
receipts of the scheduled occupancy input SNVT, and use this elapsed
time to activate and deactivate the Default Schedule as specified.
(This provides the capability for the system scheduler to use its
Default Schedule if it loses communication with the UMCS).
3.4.2.3 System Scheduler Output Determination
a. Air Handler Occupancy Output: If more than 95 minutes have passed since
the last receipt of the Scheduled Occupancy input, the Air Handler
Section 23 09 23 Page 34

Occupancy Output shall be determined by the default schedule and the
Space Occupancy Inputs. Otherwise, the output shall be determined as
follows:
(1) If the Override Occupancy Input is not OC_NUL, the Air Handler
Occupancy Output shall determined as follows:
(a) The output shall be Occupied when the Override OccupancyInput
is OC_OCCUPIED.
(b) The output shall be Unoccupied when the Override
OccupancyInput is OC_UNOCCUPIED.
(c) If the system Sequence Of Operation specifies Warm-Up-Cool-
Down mode, the output shall be Warm-Up-Cool-Down when the Override
Occupancy Input is OC_STANDBY.
(2) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL and the Schedule
Occupancy input is OC_OCCUPIED, the Air Handler and Stand-Alone
Terminal Unit Occupancy Output shall be OC_OCCUPIED.
(3) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL, the Schedule Occupancy
input is not OC_OCCUPIED, and less than required number of Space
Occupancy Inputs (as shown on the Occupancy Schedule Drawing) are
OC_OCCUPIED (or the hardware BI is Unoccupied), the Air Handler
Occupancy Output shall be determined by the Scheduled Occupancy
Input
(a) The output shall be Occupied when the Scheduled Occupancy
Input is OC_OCCUPIED.
(b) The output shall be Unoccupied when the Scheduled Occupancy
Input is OC_UNOCCUPIED.
(c) If the system Sequence Of Operation specifies Warm-Up-Cool-
Down mode the output shall be Warm-Up-Cool-Down when the Scheduled
Occupancy Input is OC_STANDBY.
(4) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL and at least the
required number (as shown on the Occupancy Schedule Drawing) of
Space Occupancy Inputs are OC_OCCUPIED (or the hardware BI is
Occupied), the Air Handler Occupancy Output shall be Occupied.
3.4.2.4 Air Handler System Scheduling
The AHU Occupancy Output SNVT shall be bound from the System Scheduler to
the DDC Hardware that executes the Occupancy Mode Determination part of the
Air Handler Sequence of Operation.
For Air Handlers using occupancy sensors, the occupancy sensor output SNVT
(of type SNVT_Occupancy) shall be bound to a Space Occupancy Input of the
System Scheduler.
Section 23 09 23 Page 35

3.4.3 Sequences of Operation for Air Handling Units
3.4.3.1 Single Zone with Heating and Cooling Coils
Contractor shall install DDC hardware to perform this Sequence of Operation
and to provide SNVT inputs, outputs and alarms as specified and shown on the
Points Schedule. Unless otherwise specified, all modulating control shall
be proportional-integral (PI) control.
a. HAND-OFF-AUTO switch: Supply fan motor starter shall accept a Fire
Alarm Panel (FAP) signal that takes precedence over all other starter
inputs and switches and shall start the fan. The fan motor starter
shall accept an occupant accessible emergency shutoff switch as shown.
The supply fan motor starter shall have an H-O-A switch:
(1) HAND: With the H-O-A switch in HAND position, the supply fan
shall start and run continuously, subject to Safeties.
(2) OFF: With the H-O-A switch in OFF position, the supply fan shall
stop.
(3) AUTO: With the H-O-A switch in AUTO position, the supply fan
shall run subject to the Supply Fan Start/Stop (SF-SS) command and
Safeties.
b. Occupancy Modes: The system shall obtain its Occupancy Mode input from
the System Scheduler as specified and shown. The system shall operate
in one of the following modes: Occupied, Unoccupied[, or
WarmUp/CoolDown].
c. System Enable and Loop Enable:
(1) Occupied Mode: The supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-ENA) and
commanded to run (SF-SS) and all control loops shall be enabled.
(2) Unoccupied mode: While the building temperature (BLDG-T) is above
setpoint (BLDG-T-LL-SP) all control loops shall be disabled and the
supply fan shall not run. When BLDG-T drops below BLDG-T-LL-SP
(with a 5 degrees F deadband) the supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-
ENA) and commanded to run (SF-SS) and the Heating Coil Temperature
Control loop shall be enabled. The Outside Air Flow Control,
Economizer Damper Control, and Cooling Coil Control loops shall be
disabled.
[(3) Warm Up / Cool Down Mode: The supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-
ENA) and commanded to run (SF-SS) and the Minimum Outside Air Flow
Control loop shall be disabled. All other control loops shall be
enabled.]
d. Proofs and Safeties:
(1) The supply fan and all DDC Hardware control loops shall be
subject to Proofs and Safeties. Safeties shall be direct-hardwire
interlocked to the fan starter circuit as shown. DDC Hardware
shall monitor all proofs and safeties and failure of any proof or
Section 23 09 23 Page 36

activation of any safety shall result in all control loops being
disabled and the AHU fan being commanded off until reset.
(2) Proofs:
(a) Supply fan status (proof) (SF-S)
(3) Safeties:
(a) Heating coil discharge air temperature low limit (freeze
stat) (HTG-DA-T-LL)
(4) DDC Hardware reset of all proofs and safeties shall be via a
local binary push-button (RST-BUT) input to the DDC Hardware, via a
remote command to the DDC Hardware via SNVT or both (where the
Contractor provides both reset functions and the operator can use
either one to perform the reset), as shown on the Points Schedule
drawing.
e. Minimum Outside Air Flow Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC
Hardware shall open the 2-position minimum outside air damper to
introduce the minimum outside air flow quantity as shown. When this
loop is disabled, the minimum outside air damper shall be closed.
g. Heating Coil Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware shall
modulate the heating coil control valve in sequence with the cooling
coil valve and economizer dampers as shown to maintain zone temperature
(ZN-T) at setpoint (ZN-T-SP) as shown. When this loop is disabled, the
heating coil control valve shall be closed.
h. Cooling Coil Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware shall
[stage the DX Unit] [modulate the cooling coil control valve] in
sequence with the heating coil valve and economizer dampers as shown to
maintain zone temperature (ZN-T) at setpoint (ZN-T-SP) as shown. When
this loop is disabled, the cooling coil control valve shall be closed.
3.4.3.2 Single Zone with Humidity Control
Contractor shall install DDC hardware to perform this Sequence of Operation
and to provide SNVT inputs, outputs and alarms as specified and shown on the
Points Schedule. Unless otherwise specified, all modulating control shall
be proportional-integral (PI) control.
a . HAND-OFF-AUTO switch: Supply fan motor starter shall accept a Fire
Alarm Panel (FAP) signal that takes precedence over all other starter
inputs and switches and shall start the fan. The fan motor starter
shall accept an occupant accessible emergency shutoff switch as shown.
The supply fan motor starter shall have an H-O-A switch:
(1) HAND: With the H-O-A switch in HAND position, the supply fan
shall start and run continuously, subject to Safeties.
Section 23 09 23 Page 37

(2) OFF: With the H-O-A switch in OFF position, the supply fan shall
stop.
(3) AUTO: With the H-O-A switch in AUTO position, the supply fan
shall run subject to the Supply Fan Start/Stop (SF-SS)command and
Safeties.
b. Occupancy Modes: The system shall obtain its Occupancy Mode input from
the System Scheduler as specified and shown. The system shall operate
in one of the following modes: Occupied, Unoccupied[, or
WarmUp/CoolDown].
c. System Enable and Loop Enable:
(1) O ccupied Mode: The supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-ENA) and
commanded to run (SF-SS) and all control loops shall be enabled.
(2) Unoccupied mode: While the building temperature (BLDG-T) is above
setpoint (BLDG-T-LL-SP) all control loops shall be disabled and the
supply fan shall not run. When BLDG-T drops below BLDG-T-LL-SP
(with a 5 degrees F deadband) the supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-
ENA) and commanded to run (SF-SS), the Preheat Coil Control loop
and Reheat Coil Control loop shall be enabled and all other loops
shall be disabled.
[(3) Warm Up / Cool Down Mode: The supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-
ENA) and commanded to run (SF-SS). The Minimum Outside Air Flow
Control loop shall be disabled and all other control loops shall be
enabled.]
d. Proofs and Safeties
(1) The supply fan and all DDC Hardware control loops shall be
subject to Proofs and Safeties. Safeties shall be direct-hardwire
interlocked to the fan starter circuit as shown. DDC Hardware shall
monitor all proofs and safeties and failure of any proof or
activation of any safety shall result in all control loops being
disabled and the AHU fan being commanded off until reset.
(2) Proofs: Supply fan status (proof) (SF-S)
(3) Safeties:
(a) Preheat coil discharge air temperature low limit
(freezestat) (PH-DA-T-LL)
(b) Supply air smoke (SA-SMK)
(c) Return air smoke (RA-SMK)
(4) DDC Hardware reset of all proofs and safeties shall be via a
local binary push-button (RST-BUT) input to the DDC Hardware, via a
remote command to the DDC Hardware via SNVT or both (where the
Contractor provides both reset functions and the operator can use
either one to perform the reset), as shown on the Points Schedule
drawing.
Section 23 09 23 Page 38

e. Minimum Outside Air Flow Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC
Hardware shall open the 2-position minimum outside air damper to
introduce the minimum outside air flow quantity as shown. When this
loop is disabled, the minimum outside air damper shall be closed.
f. Preheat Coil Control Loop: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware
shall modulate the preheat coil valve to maintain the preheat coil
discharge air temperature (PH-T) at setpoint (PH-T-SP) as shown. When
this loop is disabled, the preheat coil valve shall be closed.
g. Cooling-and-Dehumidification Coil Control: When this loop is enabled
the DDC Hardware shall modulate the cooling and dehumidification valve
to maintain either the zone temperature (ZN-T) at setpoint (ZN-T-SP) or
zone relative humidity (ZN-RH) at setpoint (ZN-RH-SP), whichever calls
for more chilled water flow. The valve shall be modulated in sequence
with the reheat valve and humidification valve as shown to avoid
simultaneous cooling and reheating, and simultaneous dehumidification
and humidification. When this loop is disabled, the coil valve shall
be closed.
h. Reheat Coil Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware shall
modulate the reheat coil valve to maintain the zone temperature (ZN-T)
at setpoint (ZN-T-SP) as shown. The valve shall be modulated in
sequence with the cooling-and-dehumidification valve as shown to avoid
simultaneous cooling and reheating. When this loop is disabled, the
coil valve shall be closed.
i. Humidification Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware
shall modulate the humidifier valve to maintain zone relative humidity
(ZN-RH) at setpoint (ZN-RH-SP). The valve shall be modulated in
sequence with the cooling-and-dehumidification valve as shown to avoid
simultaneous dehumidification and humidification. When the supply air
duct humidity (SA-RH) rises above 80% relative humidity, the humidifier
valve shall begin to modulate towards closed and shall, under
proportional control, continue to gradually move towards closed until
the supply air duct humidity reaches 90% relative humidity, at which
point the humidifier valve shall be fully closed. When this loop is
disabled, the humidifier valve shall be closed.
3.4.3.3 Variable Air Volume System without Return Fan
Contractor shall install DDC hardware to perform this Sequence of Operation
and to provide SNVT inputs, outputs and alarms as specified and shown on the
Points Schedule. Unless otherwise specified, all modulating control shall
be proportional-integral (PI) control.
a. HAND-OFF-AUTO switches:
Supply fan variable frequency drive (VFD) unit shall accept a Fire Alarm
Panel (FAP) signal that takes precedence over all other VFD inputs and
switches and shall cause the VFD to run at 100% speed. The VFD shall
accept an occupant accessible emergency shutoff switch as shown. The
supply fan variable frequency drive (VFD) unit shall have an integral
H-O-A switch:
Section 23 09 23 Page 39

(1) HAND: With the H-O-A switch in HAND position, the supply fan
shall start and run continuously, subject to Safeties. Fan speed
shall be under manual-operator control.
(2) OFF: With the H-O-A switch in OFF position, the supply fan shall
stop.
(3) AUTO: With the H-O-A switch in AUTO position, the supply fan
shall run subject to the Supply Fan Start/Stop Signal (SF-SS) and
Safeties. Fan speed shall be under control of the DDC Hardware.
b. Occupancy Modes: The system shall obtain its Occupancy Mode input from
the System Scheduler as specified and shown. The system shall operate
in one of the following modes: Occupied, Unoccupied, or Warm Up/Cool
Down.
c. Proofs and Safeties:
(1) The supply fan and all DDC Hardware control loops shall be
subject to Proofs and Safeties. Safeties shall be direct-hardwire
interlocked to the VFD as shown. DDC Hardware shall monitor all
proofs and safeties and failure of any proof or activation of any
safety shall result in all control loops being disabled and the AHU
fan being commanded off until reset.
(2) Proofs:
(a) Supply fan status (SF-S)
(3) Safeties:
(a) Cooling coil discharge air temperature low limit (freezestat)
(CLG-DA-T-LL)
(b) Supply air duct pressure high limit (SA-P-HL)
(c) Supply air smoke (SA-SMK)
(d) Return air smoke (RA-SMK)
(4) DDC Hardware reset of all proofs and safeties shall be via a
local binary push-button (RST-BUT) input to the DDC Hardware, via a
remote command to the DDC Hardware via SNVT or both (where the
Contractor provides both reset functions and the operator can use
either one to perform the reset), as shown on the Points Schedule
drawing.
d. System Enable and Loop Enable
(1) Occupied mode: The supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-ENA) and
commanded to run (SF-SS). All control loops shall be enabled. The
Zone Temperature Control loops for VAV boxes serviced by the AHU
shall also be enabled.
Section 23 09 23 Page 40

(2) Unoccupied mode: While the building temperature (BLDG-T) is above
setpoint (BLDG-T-LL-SP) all control loops shall be disabled (except
fan-powered VAV box Zone Temperature Control loops) and the supply
fan shall not run. When BLDG-T drops below BLDG-T-LL-SP (with a 5
degrees F deadband) the supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-ENA) and
commanded to run (SF-SS), the Supply Duct Static Pressure Control,
Preheat Control loops shall be enabled. The Minimum Outside Air
Flow Control, Mixed Air Temperature Control, and Cooling Coil
Control loops shall be disabled.
(3) Warm Up/Cool Down: The supply fan shall be enabled (SYS-ENA) and
commanded to run (SF-SS). The Minimum Outside Air Flow Control
loop shall be disabled and all other control loops shall be
enabled. The Zone Temperature Control loops for VAV boxes serviced
by the AHU shall also be enabled.
e. Fan Capacity Control:
(1) Supply Duct Static Pressure Control. When this loop is enabled
the DDC Hardware shall modulate the supply fan variable frequency
drive unit to maintain the duct static pressure (SA-P) at setpoint
(SA-P-SP) as shown, as measured by the duct static pressure tap and
sensor as shown. When this loop is disabled, the DDC Hardware
capacity modulation output to the VFD shall be zero percent.
f. Minimum Outside Air Flow Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC
Hardware shall modulate the minimum outside air damper to maintain the
minimum OA volumetric flow (MINOA-F) at setpoint (MINOA-F-SP) as shown.
When this loop is disabled, the minimum outside air damper shall be
closed.
h. Cooling Coil Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware shall
modulate the cooling coil valve to maintain the supply air temperature
(SA-T) setpoint (SA-T-SP) as shown. When this loop is disabled, the
cooling coil valve shall be closed.
3.4.4 Sequences of Operation for Hydronic Systems
3.4.4.1 Hydronic Heating Hot Water From Single-Building Boiler
Contractor shall install DDC hardware to perform this Sequence of Operation
and to provide SNVT inputs, outputs and alarms as specified and shown on the
Points Schedule. Unless otherwise specified, all modulating control shall
be proportional-integral (PI) control.
a. System Enable and loop enable
(1) This system shall monitor the enabled status of all systems
served by this system. If one or more systems served by this
Section 23 09 23 Page 41

system are enabled, this system shall be enabled (SYS-ENA). If all
systems served by this system are not enabled, this system shall
not be enabled.
(2) When this system is enabled (SYS-ENA) and the hot water pump is
proofed on, the boiler control and hot water temperature control
loops shall be enabled.
b. HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch: The hot water pump motor starter shall have an
H-O-A switch:
(1) HAND: With the H-O-A switch in HAND position, the pump shall
start and run continuously.
(2) OFF: With the H-O-A switch in OFF position, the pump shall stop.
(3) AUTO: With the H-O-A switch in AUTO position, the pump shall run
subject to the Hot Water Pump Start/Stop (HW-PMP-SS) command.
c. Proofs and Safeties:
(1) DDC Hardware shall monitor all proofs and safeties.
(2) Proofs: Hot water pump
(3) Safeties: None
(4) DDC Hardware reset of all proofs and safeties shall be via a
local binary push-button (RST-BUT) input to the DDC Hardware, via a
remote command to the DDC Hardware via SNVT or both (where the
Contractor provides both reset functions and the operator can use
either one to perform the reset), as shown on the Points Schedule
drawing.
d. Boiler Control: When this loop is enabled, the DDC Hardware shall turn
the boiler on. When this loop is disabled, the boiler shall be off.
e. Hot Water Temperature Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC
Hardware shall modulate the 3-way mixing valve to maintain hot water
supply temperature (HWS-T) at setpoint (HWS-T-SP). The Hot Water
Supply Temperature Setpoint (HWS-T-SP) shall be determined from a
linear reset schedule as shown. When this loop is disabled, the valve
shall be in its normal (failsafe) position.
3.4.4.2 Hydronic Secondary with Variable Speed Pump
Contractor shall install DDC hardware to perform this Sequence of Operation
and to provide SNVT inputs, outputs and alarms as specified and shown on the
Points Schedule. Unless otherwise specified, all modulating control shall
be proportional-integral (PI) control.
a. System Enable and loop enable:
(1) This system shall monitor the enabled status of all systems
served by this system. If one or more systems served by this system
are enabled, this system shall be enabled (SYS-ENA). If all
Section 23 09 23 Page 42

systems served by this system are not enabled, this system shall
not be enabled.
(2) When this system is enabled (SYS-ENA) the Pressure Control loop
shall be enabled.
b. HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch: The hot water pump variable frequency drive (VFD)
unit shall have an integral H-O-A switch:
(1) HAND: With the H-O-A switch in HAND position, the pump shall
start and run continuously. Pump speed shall be under manualoperator
control.
(2) OFF: With the H-O-A switch in OFF position, the pump shall stop.
(3) AUTO: With the H-O-A switch in AUTO position, the pump shall run
subject to the Hot Water Pump Start/Stop (HW-PMP-SS) command and
pump speed shall be under control of the DDC system.
c. roofs and Safeties
(1) DDC Hardware shall monitor all proofs and safeties.
(2) Proofs: None
(3) Safeties: None
(4) DDC Hardware reset of all proofs and safeties shall be via a
local binary push-button (RST-BUT) input to the DDC Hardware, via a
remote command to the DDC Hardware via SNVT or both (where the
Contractor provides both reset functions and the operator can use
either one to perform the reset), as shown on the Points Schedule
drawing.
d. Pressure Control: When this loop is enabled the DDC Hardware shall
modulate the pump variable frequency drive unit to maintain the pipe
system pressure at setpoint as shown, as measured by the differential
pressure tap and sensor as shown. When this loop is disabled, the DDC
Hardware capacity modulation output to the VFD shall be zero percent.
3.5 CONTROLLER TUNING
The Contractor shall tune each controller in a manner consistent with that
described in the ASHRAE FUN IP. Tuning shall consist of adjustment of the
proportional, integral, and where applicable, the derivative (PID) settings
to provide stable closed-loop control. Each loop shall be tuned while the
system or plant is operating at a high gain (worst case) condition, where
high gain can generally be defined as a low-flow or low-load condition.
Upon final adjustment of the PID settings, in response to a change in
controller setpoint, the controlled variable shall settle out at the new
setpoint with no more than two (2) oscillations above and below setpoint.
Upon settling out at the new setpoint the controller output shall be steady.
With the exception of naturally slow processes such as zone temperature
control, the controller shall settle out at the new setpoint within five (5)
minutes. The Contractor shall return the controller to its original
Section 23 09 23 Page 43

setpoint and shall record and submit the final PID configuration settings
with the O&M Instructions and on the associated Points Schedule.
3.6 START-UP AND START-UP TEST
The Contractor shall perform the following startup tests for each control
system to ensure that the described control system components are installed
and functioning per this specification.
a. General: The Contractor shall adjust, calibrate, measure, program,
configure, set the time schedules, set alarms, and otherwise perform
all necessary actions to ensure that the systems function as specified
and shown in the sequence of operation and other contract documents.
b. Systems Check: An item-by-item check shall be performed for each HVAC
system;
(1) Step 1 - System Inspection: With the system shut down, it shall
be verified that power and main air are available where required
and that all output devices are in their failsafe and normal
positions. Each local display panel and each M&C Client shall be
inspected to verify that all displays indicate shutdown conditions.
(2) Step 2 - Calibration Accuracy Check: A two-point accuracy check
of the calibration of each HVAC control system sensing element and
transmitter shall be performed by comparing the SNVT output from
the DDC Hardware the sensor is connected to the actual value of the
variable measured at the sensing element. Digital indicating test
instruments shall be used, such as digital thermometers, motordriven
psychrometers, and tachometers. The test instruments shall
be at least twice as accurate as the specified sensor accuracy.
The calibration of the test instruments shall be traceable to
National Institute Of Standards And Technology standards. The
first check point shall be with the HVAC system in the shutdown
condition, and the second check point shall be with the HVAC system
in an operational condition. Calibration checks shall verify that
the sensing element-to-DDC system readout accuracies at two points
are within the specified product accuracy tolerances. If not, the
device shall be recalibrated or replaced and the calibration check
repeated.
(3) Step 3 - Actuator Range Check: With the system running, a signal
shall be applied to each actuator through the DDC Hardware
controller. Proper operation of the actuators and positioners for
all actuated devices shall be verified and the signal levels shall
be recorded for the extreme positions of each device. The signal
shall be varied from live zero to full range, and it shall be
verified that the actuators travel from zero stroke to full stroke
within the signal range. Where applicable, it shall be verified
that all sequenced actuators move from zero stroke to full stroke
in the proper direction, and move the connected device in the
proper direction from one extreme position to the other.
c. Weather Dependent Test: Weather dependent test procedures that cannot
be performed by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate
Section 23 09 23 Page 44

climatic season. When simulation is used, the actual results shall be
verified in the appropriate season.
Test Report: Upon completion of the Start-Up Test, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit a Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report documenting the
results of the tests performed and certifying that the system is installed
and functioning per this specification, and is ready for the Performance
Verification Test (PVT).
3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TEST (PVT)
3.7.1 PVT Procedures
The performance verification test procedures shall explain, step-by-step,
the actions and expected results that will demonstrate that the control
system performs in accordance with the sequences of operation, and other
contract documents. The PVT shall include a one-point accuracy check of
each sensor. The PVT Procedure shall describe a methodology to measure and
trend the network bandwidth usage on the network backbone and compare it to
the Bandwidth Usage Calculation submittal. A control system performance
verification test equipment list shall be included that lists the equipment
to be used during performance verification testing. The list shall include
manufacturer name, model number, equipment function, the date of the latest
calibration, and the results of the latest calibration.
3.7.2 PVT Execution
The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance of the control system with the
contract documents. Using test plans and procedures approved by the
Government, the Contractor shall demonstrate all physical and functional
requirements of the project. The performance verification test shall show,
step-by-step, the actions and results demonstrating that the control systems
perform in accordance with the sequences of operation. The performance
verification test shall measure and trend the Network Bandwidth Usage and
compare it to the Bandwidth Usage Calculation submittal. The performance
verification test shall not be started until after receipt by the Contractor
of written permission by the Government, based on Government approval of the
Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report and completion of balancing. The tests
shall not be conducted during scheduled seasonal off periods of base heating
and cooling systems.
3.7.3 PVT Report
Contractor shall prepare a PVT report documenting all tests performed during
the PVT and their results. The PVT report shall include all tests in the
PVT Procedures and any other testing performed during the PVT. Failures and
repairs shall be documented with test results.
3.8 TRAINING
A training course shall be conducted for operating staff members designated
by the Government in the maintenance and operation of the system, including
specified hardware and software. The training period, for a total of 32
hours of normal working time, shall be conducted within 30 days after
successful completion of the performance verification test. The training
course shall be conducted at the project site and the Government reserves
Section 23 09 23 Page 45

the right to videotape the training sessions for later use. Audiovisual
equipment and sets of all other training materials and supplies shall be
provided. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction,
including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through
Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility.
Section 23 09 23 Page 46

APPENDIX A
QC CHECKLIST
This checklist is not all-inclusive of the requirements of this specification
and should not be interpreted as such.
This checklist is for (check one:)
Pre-Construction QC Checklist Submittal (Items 1-5)
|____|
Post-Construction QC Checklist Submittal (Items 1-12) |____|
Close-out QC Checklist Submittal (Items 1-19)
|____|
Initial each item in the space provided (|____|) verifying that requirement
has been met.
Items verified for Pre-Construction, Post-Construction and Closeout QC
Checklists Submittal:
1 Network bandwidth calculations have been performed, |____|
and the backbone type (Ethernet or TP/FT-10) has been
determined based on these calculations.
2 All DDC Hardware (nodes) are numbered on Control System |____|
Schematic Drawings.
3 Signal lines on Control System Schematic are labeled with |____|
the signal type.
4 Local Display Panel (LDP) Locations are shown on Control |____|
System Schematic drawings.
5 Points Schedule drawings have been sub-divided by device (DDC |____|
Hardware), including DDC Hardware node numbers.
Items verified for Post-Construction and Closeout QC Checklist Submittal:
6 All DDC Hardware is installed on a TP/FT-10 local control |____|
bus.
7 All Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are BACnet |____|
certified.
8 Communication between DDC Hardware is only via CEA-709.1B |____|
using SNVTs. Other protocols and network variables other
than SNVTs have not been used.
9 Explicit messaging has not been used. |____|
10 System Scheduler functionality has been installed for all |____|
HVAC systems and default schedules have been configured at
each System Scheduler.
11 All sequences are performed as specified using DDC Hardware. |____|
12 Training schedule and course attendee list has been |____|
Section 23 09 23 Page 47

developed and coordinated with shops and submitted.
Items verified for Closeout QC Checklists Submittal:
13 Final As-built Drawings, including the Points Schedule |____|
drawings accurately represent the final installed system.
14 LonWorks Network Services (LNS) Database is up-to-date and |____|
accurately represents the final installed system.
15 LNS Plug-ins have been submitted for all ASCs. |____|
16 Programming software has been submitted for all General |____|
Purpose Programmable Controllers (GPPCs).
17 All software has been licensed to the Government |____|
18 O&M Instructions have been completed and submitted. |____|
19 Training course has been completed. |____|
________________________________________________________
(QC Representative Signature)
(Date)
-- End of Section --
Section 23 09 23 Page 48

SECTION 23 11 25
FACILITY GAS PIPING
11/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)
AGA XR0603
(2006) AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for Gas
Service
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z21.45
(1995) Flexible Connectors of Other Than All-
Metal Construction for Gas Appliances
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
API 570
API RP 2009
(2009) Piping Inspection Code
(2002; R 2007) Safe Welding, Cutting, and Hot
Work Practices in the Petroleum and
Petrochemical Industries
API Spec 6D (2008; Errata 2008; Errata 2008; Errata 2009;
Addendum 2009) Specification for Pipeline
Valves
API Std 598
API Std 607
(2009) Valve Inspecting and Testing
(2005; Errata 2008) Fire Test for Soft-Seated
Quarter-Turn Valves
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 25
(2008) Standard for Earthquake-Activated
Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
AWS WHB-2.9
(2004; Errata 2004) Specification for Filler
Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
(2004) Welding Handbook; Volume Two - Welding
Processes
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
Section 23 11 25 Page 1

ASME A13.1
ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.21
ASME B16.33
ASME B31.9
ASME BPVC SEC IX
(2007) Scheme for the Identification of
Piping Systems
(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose
(Inch)
(2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
(2002; R 2007) Manually Operated Metallic Gas
Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up to
125 psi, Sizes NPS 1/2 - NPS 2
(2008) Building Services Piping
(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM 01.01
ASTM A 513
ASTM A 666
ASTM B 280
ASTM B 88
(2010) Steel - Piping, Tubing, Fittings
(2008a) Standard Specification for Electric-
Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel
Mechanical Tubing
(2003) Standard Specification for Annealed or
Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate and Flat Bar
(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)
CSA CGA 3.11
CSA CGA 3.16
CSA CGA 9.2
(1988; R 2009) Lever Operated Pressure
Lubricated Plug Type Gas Shut-Off Valves
(1988; R 2009) Lever Operated Non-Lubricated
Gas Shut-Off Valves
(1988; R 2009) Manually Operated Shut-Off
Valves for Gas Piping Systems - First
Edition; General Instruction No 1
CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)
CSA/AM ANSI Z21.1 (2005; Addenda A 2007; Addenda B 2008)
Household Cooking Gas Appliances
Section 23 11 25 Page 2

CSA/AM Z21.15
CSA/AM Z21.24
CSA/AM Z21.41
CSA/AM Z21.69
(2009) Manually Operated Gas Valves for
Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and
Hose End Valves
(2006; Addenda A 2009) Connectors for Gas
Appliances
(2003; A 2005; Errata 2007) Quick-Disconnect
Devices for Use with Gas Fuel Appliances
(2009) Connectors for Movable Gas Appliances
CSA/AM Z21.78 (2005; Addenda A 2007; Addenda B 2008)
Standard Specification for Combination Gas
Controls for Gas Appliances
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-25
MSS SP-58
MSS SP-69
(2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,
Fittings, Flanges and Unions
(2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports
- Materials, Design and Manufacture
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 54
(2008) National Fuel Gas Code
NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code -
2008 Edition
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC SP 6
(2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Gas&Oil Dir
(2009) Flammable and Combustible Liquids and
Gases Equipment Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The gas piping system includes natural gas piping and appurtenances from
point of connection with supply system, as indicated, to gas operated
equipment within the facility. Submit operation and maintenance data in
three separate packages.
1.2.1 Gas Facility System and Equipment Operation
Include shop drawings showing piping layout, locations of system valves, gas
line markers and cathodic protection system; step-by-step procedures for
system start up, operation and shutdown (index system components and
Section 23 11 25 Page 3

equipment to the system drawings); isolation procedures including valve
operation to shutdown or isolate each section of the system (index valves to
the system maps and provide separate procedures for normal operation and
emergency shutdown if required to be different). Submit Data package No. 4.
1.2.2 Gas Facility System Maintenance
Include maintenance procedures and frequency for system and equipment;
identification of pipe materials and manufacturer by locations, pipe repair
procedures, and jointing procedures at transitions to other piping material
or material from a different manufacturer. Submit Data Package No.4.
1.2.3 Gas Facility Equipment Maintenance
Include identification of valves, shut-offs, disconnects, and other
equipment by materials, manufacturer, vendor identification and location;
maintenance procedures and recommended tool kits for valves and equipment;
recommended repair methods (i.e., field repair, factory repair, or
replacement) for each valve and piece of equipment; and preventive
maintenance procedures, possible failure modes and troubleshooting guide.
Submit Data Package No. 3.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Gas Piping System; G
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe and Fittings; G
Gas equipment connectors; G
Gas Piping System; G
Pipe Coating Materials and application procedures; G
Pressure regulators; G
Risers; G
Transition fittings; G
Valves; G
Valve box; G
Warning and identification tape; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing; G
Pressure Tests; G
Test With Gas; G
SD-07 Certificates
Section 23 11 25 Page 4

Welders procedures and qualifications; G
assigned number, letter, or symbol; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
PE pipe and fittings; G
pipe coating materials and application procedures; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Gas facility system and equipment operation; G
Gas facility system maintenance; G
Gas facility equipment maintenance; G
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Data packages, as specified.
Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions for
approval for compression-type mechanical joints used in joining dissimilar
materials and for insulating joints. Mark all valves, flanges and fittings
in accordance with MSS SP-25.
1.4.1 Welding Qualifications
a. Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using
performance qualified welders and welding operators in accordance with
API RP 2009, ASME BPVC SEC IX, and ASME B31.9. Welding procedures
qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by
another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.9. Notify
the Contracting Officer at least 24 hours in advance of tests, and
perform at the work site if practicable.
b. Submit a certified copy of welders procedures and qualifications
metal and PE in conformance with ASME B31.9 for each welder and welding
operator. Submit the assigned number, letter, or symbol that will be
used in identifying the work of each welder to the Contracting Officer.
Weld all structural members in conformance with AWS A5.8/A5.8M, and
AWS WHB-2.9.
1.4.2 Jointing Thermoplastic and Fiberglass Piping
Perform all jointing of piping using qualified joiners and qualified
procedures in accordance with AGA XR0603. Furnish the Contracting Officer
with a copy of qualified procedures and list of and identification symbols
of qualified joiners. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and
manufacturer's visual joint appearance chart, including all PE pipe and
fittings.
1.4.3 Shop Drawings
Submit drawings for complete Gas Piping System, within 30 days of contract
award, showing location, size and all branches of pipeline; location of all
required shutoff valves; and instructions necessary for the installation of
gas equipment connectors and supports.
Section 23 11 25 Page 5

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, transport, and store plastic pipe and fittings carefully. Plug or
cap pipe and fittings ends during transportation or storage to minimize dirt
and moisture entry. Do not subject piping to abrasion or concentrated
external loads. Discard PE pipe sections and fittings that have been
damaged.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening. Asbestos or products containing asbestos are
not allowed. Submit catalog data and installation instructions for pipe,
valves, all related system components, pipe coating materials and
application procedures. Conform to NFPA 54 and with requirements specified
herein. Provide supply piping to appliances or equipment at least as large
as the inlets thereof.
2.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM AND FITTINGS
2.2.1 Steel Pipe, Joints, and Fittings
2.2.2 Copper Tubing, Joints and Fittings
Provide copper tubing conforming to ASTM B 88, Type K or L, or ASTM B 280,
with tubing joints made up with tubing fittings recommended by the tubing
manufacturer. Provide copper and copper alloy press fittings, with sealing
elements of Hydrogenated Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (HNBR), factory installed,
or an alternative supplied by the fitting manufacturer.
2.2.3 Steel Tubing, Joints and Fittings
Provide steel tubing conforming to ASTM 01.01, and ASTM A 513, with tubing
joints made up with gas tubing fittings recommended by the tubing
manufacturer.
2.2.4 Sealants for Steel Pipe Threaded Joints
Provide joint sealing compound as listed in UL Gas&Oil Dir, Class 20 or
less. For taping, use tetrafluoroethlene tape conforming to UL Gas&Oil Dir.
2.2.5 Warning and Identification
Provide pipe flow markings, warning and identification tape, and metal tags
as required.
2.2.6 Flange Gaskets
Provide gaskets of nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME
B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type,
containing aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or
nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) suitable for a maximum 600 degree F service,
to be used for hydrocarbon service.
Section 23 11 25 Page 6

2.2.7 Pipe Threads
Provide pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
2.2.8 Escutcheons
Provide chromium-plated steel or chromium-plated brass escutcheons, either
one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set
screw.
2.2.9 Gas Transition Fittings
a. Provide steel to plastic (PE) designed for steel-to-plastic with
tapping tee or sleeve conforming to AGA XR0603 requirements for
transitions fittings.. Coat or wrap exposed steel pipe with heavy
plastic coating.
b. Plastic to Plastic: Manufacturer's standard bolt-on (PVC to PE)
plastic tapping saddle tee, UL listed for gas service, rated for 100
psig, and O-ring seals. Manufacturer's standard slip-on PE mechanical
coupling, molded, with stainless-steel ring support conforming to ASTM
A 666, O-ring seals, and rated for 150 psig gas service.
Manufacturer's standard fused tapping (PE-to-PE) tee assembly with
shut-off feature.
c. Provide lever operated pressure lubricated plug type gas shut-off
valve conforming to CSA CGA 3.11. Provide lever operated nonlubricated
gas shut-off valves conforming to CSA CGA 3.16 Provide
manually operated shut-off valve conforming to CSA CGA 9.2
2.2.10 Insulating Pipe Joints
2.2.10.1 Insulating Joint Material
Provide insulating joint material between flanged or threaded metallic pipe
systems where shown to control galvanic or electrical action.
2.2.10.2 Threaded Pipe Joints
Provide threaded pipe joints of steel body nut type dielectric unions with
insulating gaskets.
2.2.10.3 Flanged Pipe Joints
Provide joints for flanged pipe consisting of full face sandwich-type flange
insulating gasket of the dielectric type, insulating sleeves for flange
bolts, and insulating washers for flange nuts.
2.2.11 Flexible Connectors
a. Provide flexible connectors for connecting gas utilization
equipment to building gas piping conforming to CSA/AM Z21.24, ANSI
Z21.45, or CSA/AM Z21.41 for quick disconnect devices, and flexible
connectors for movable food service equipment conforming to CSA/AM
Section 23 11 25 Page 7

Z21.69. Provide combination gas controls for gas appliances conforming
to CSA/AM Z21.78.
b. Do not install the flexible connector through the appliance cabinet
face. Provide rigid metallic pipe and fittings to extend the final
connection beyond the cabinet, except when appliance is provided with
an external connection point.
2.3 VALVES
Provide lockable shutoff or service isolation valves conforming to the
following:
2.3.1 Valves 2 Inches and Smaller
Provide valves 2 inches and smaller conforming to ASME B16.33 of materials
and manufacture compatible with system materials used. Provide manually
operated household cooking gas appliance valves conforming to CSA/AM ANSI
Z21.1 and CSA/AM Z21.15.
2.3.2 Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger
Provide valves 2-1/2 inches and larger of carbon steel conforming to API
Spec 6D, Class 150.
2.4 RISERS
Provide manufacturer's standard riser, transition from plastic to steel pipe
with 7 to 12 mil thick epoxy coating. Use swaged gas-tight construction
with O-ring seals, metal insert, and protective sleeve. Provide remote
bolt-on or bracket or wall-mounted riser supports .
2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Provide pipe hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy or areas
of conflict before performing the work.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
Provide required excavation, backfilling, and compaction as specified in
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.3 GAS PIPING SYSTEM
Provide a gas piping system from the point of delivery, defined as the
outlet of the meter set assembly to the connections to each gas utilization
device.
Section 23 11 25 Page 8

3.3.1 Protection and Cleaning of Materials and Components
Protect equipment, pipe, and tube openings by closing with caps or plugs
during installation. At the completion of all work, thoroughly clean the
entire system.
3.3.2 Workmanship and Defects
Piping, tubing and fittings shall be clear and free of cutting burrs and
defects in structure or threading and shall be thoroughly brushed and chipand
scale-blown. Repair of defects in piping, tubing or fittings is not
allowed; replace defective items when found.
3.4 PROTECTIVE COVERING
3.4.1 Underground Metallic Pipe
Protect buried metallic piping from corrosion with protective coatings .
When dissimilar metals are joined underground, use gastight insulating
fittings.
3.4.2 Aboveground Metallic Piping Systems
3.4.2.1 Ferrous Surfaces
Touch up shop primed surfaces with ferrous metal primer. Solvent clean
surfaces that have not been shop primed. Mechanically clean surfaces that
contain loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by power
wire brushing or commercial sand blasted conforming to SSPC SP 6 and prime
with ferrous metal primer or vinyl type wash coat. Finish primed surfaces
with two coats of exterior oil paint or vinyl paint.
3.4.2.2 Nonferrous Surfaces
Except for aluminum alloy pipe, do not paint nonferrous surfaces. Paint
surfaces of aluminum alloy pipe and fittings to protect against external
corrosion where they contact masonry, plaster, insulation, or are subject to
repeated wettings by such liquids as water, detergents or sewage. Solventclean
the surfaces and treat with vinyl type wash coat. Apply a first coat
of aluminum paint and a second coat of alkyd gloss enamel or silicone alkyd
copolymer enamel.
3.5 INSTALLATION
Install the gas system in conformance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and applicable provisions of NFPA 54, AGA XR0603, and as
indicated. Perform all pipe cutting without damage to the pipe, with an
approved type of mechanical cutter, unless otherwise authorized. Use wheel
cutters where practicable. On steel pipe 6 inches and larger, an approved
gas cutting and beveling machine may be used. Cut thermoplastic and
fiberglass pipe in accordance with AGA XR0603.
3.5.1 Metallic Piping Installation
Bury underground piping a minimum of 18 inches below grade. Make changes in
direction of piping with fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form
Section 23 11 25 Page 9

elbows and tees or other similar type construction is not permitted. Branch
connection may be made with either tees or forged branch outlet fittings.
Provide branch outlet fittings which are forged, flared for improvement of
flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Do
not use aluminum alloy pipe in exterior locations or underground.
3.5.2 Metallic Tubing Installation
Install metallic tubing using gas tubing fittings approved by the tubing
manufacturer. Make branch connections with tees. Prepare all tubing ends
with tools designed for that purpose. Do not use aluminum alloy tubing in
exterior locations or underground.
3.5.3 Thermoplastic and Fiberglass Piping, Tubing, and Fittings
Installation of thermoplastic and fiberglass piping, tubing, and fittings is
permitted only outside and underground. Bury piping a minimum of 18 inches
below grade. Install the piping to avoid excessive stresses due to thermal
contraction, and use only where indicated.
3.5.4 Connections Between Metallic and Plastic Piping
Connections between metallic and plastic piping are only allowed outside,
underground, and with approved transition fittings.
3.5.5 Piping Buried Under Buildings
Run underground piping installed beneath buildings in a steel pipe casing
protected from corrosion with protective coatings as specified in Section 23
11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING. Extend casing at least 4 inches outside the
building, and provide the pipe with spacers and end bushings to seal at both
ends to prevent the entrance of water and/or the escape of gas. Extend a
vent line from the annular space above grade outside to a point where gas
will not be a hazard, and terminate in a rain/insect-resistant fitting.
3.5.6 Concealed Piping in Buildings
Do not use combinations of fittings ( unions, tubing fittings, running
threads, right- and left-hand couplings, bushings, and swing joints) to
conceal piping within buildings.
3.5.6.1 Piping in Partitions
Locate concealed piping in hollow, rather than solid, partitions. Protect
tubing passing through walls or partitions against physical damage both
during and after construction, and provide appropriate safety markings and
labels..
3.5.6.2 Piping in Floors
Lay piping in solid floors except where embedment in concrete is indicated
in channels suitably covered to permit access to the piping with minimum
damage to the building. Surround piping embedded in concrete by a minimum
of 1-1/2 inches of concrete and do not allow physical contact with other
metallic items such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors.
Section 23 11 25 Page 10

Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quickset additives or
cinder aggregate.
3.5.7 Aboveground Piping
Run aboveground piping as straight as practicable along the alignment and
elevation indicated, with a minimum of joints, and separately supported from
other piping system and equipment. Install exposed horizontal piping no
farther than 6 inches from nearest parallel wall and at an elevation which
prevents standing, sitting, or placement of objects on the piping.
3.5.8 Final Gas Connections
Unless otherwise specified, make final connections with rigid metallic pipe
and fittings. Provide accessible gas shutoff valve and coupling for each
gas equipment item.
3.5.9 Seismic Requirements
Support and brace piping and attached valves to resist seismic loads in
conformance with ASCE 25.
3.6 PIPE JOINTS
Design and install pipe joints to effectively sustain the longitudinal pullout
forces caused by contraction of the piping or superimposed loads.
3.6.1 Threaded Metallic Joints
Provide threaded joints in metallic pipe with tapered threads evenly cut and
made with UL approved graphite joint sealing compound for gas service or
tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male threads only. Threaded joints
up to 1-1/2 inches in diameter may be made with approved tetrafluoroethylene
tape. Threaded joints up to 2 inches in diameter may be made with approved
joint sealing compound. After cutting and before threading, ream pipe and
remove all burrs. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is
not permitted.
3.6.2 Welded Metallic Joints
Conform beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of welds to NFPA
54. Remove weld defects and make repairs to the weld, or remove the weld
joints entirely and reweld. After filler metal has been removed from its
original package, protect and store so that its characteristics or welding
properties are not affected adversely. Do not use electrodes that have been
wetted or have lost any of their coating.
3.6.3 Thermoplastic and Fiberglass Joints
a. Thermoplastic and Fiberglass: Conform jointing procedures to AGA
XR0603. Do not make joints with solvent cement or heat of fusion
between different kinds of plastics.
b. PE Fusion Welding Inspection: Visually inspect butt joints by
comparing with, manufacturer's visual joint appearance chart. Inspect
fusion joints for proper fused connection. Replace defective joints by
Section 23 11 25 Page 11

cutting out defective joints or replacing fittings. Inspect, in
conformance with API 570, 100 percent of all joints and re-inspect all
corrections. Arrange with the pipe manufacturer's representative in
the presence of the Contracting Officer to make first time inspection.
3.6.4 Flared Metallic Tubing Joints
Make flared joints in metallic tubing with special tools recommended by the
tubing manufacturer. Use flared joints only in systems constructed from
nonferrous pipe and tubing, when experience or tests have demonstrated that
the joint is suitable for the conditions, and when adequate provisions are
made in the design to prevent separation of the joints. Do not use metallic
ball sleeve compression-type tubing fittings for tubing joints.
3.6.5 Solder or Brazed Joints
Make all joints in metallic tubing and fittings with materials and
procedures recommended by the tubing supplier. Braze joints with material
having a melting point above 1000 degrees F, containing no phosphorous.
3.6.6 Joining Thermoplastic or Fiberglass to Metallic Piping or Tubing
When compression type mechanical joints are used, provide gasket material in
the fittings compatible with the plastic piping and with the gas in the
system. Use an internal tubular rigid stiffener in conjunction with the
fitting, flush with end of the pipe or tubing, extending at least to the
outside end of the compression fitting when installed. Remove all rough or
sharp edges from stiffener. Do not force fit stiffener in the plastic.
Split tubular stiffeners are not allowed.
3.6.7 Press Connections
Make press connections in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions using tools approved by the manufacturer. Fully insert the
tubing into the fitting and then mark at the shoulder of the fitting. Check
the fitting alignment against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is
fully inserted before the joint is pressed.
3.7 PIPE SLEEVES
Provide pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors
or roofs with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction.
Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or
approved. Make all rectangular and square openings as detailed. Extend
each sleeve through its respective wall, floor or roof, and cut flush with
each surface, except in mechanical room floors not located on grade where
clamping flanges or riser pipe clamps are used. Extend sleeves in
mechanical room floors above grade at least 4 inches above finish floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, use sleeves large enough to provide a minimum
clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe. Provide steel pipe for sleeves
in bearing walls, waterproofing membrane floors, and wet areas . Provide
sleeves in nonbearing walls, floors, or ceilings of steel pipe, galvanized
sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or moisture-resistant fiber or
plastic. For penetrations of fire walls, fire partitions and floors which
are not on grade, seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with
Section 23 11 25 Page 12

fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of Section 07
84 00 WIRETAPPING.
3.8 PIPES PENETRATING WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES
Install pipes penetrating waterproofing membranes as specified in Section 22
00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.9 FIRE SEAL
Fire seal all penetrations of fire rated partitions, walls and floors in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.10 ESCUTCHEONS
Provide escutcheons for all finished surfaces where gas piping passes
through floors, walls, or ceilings except in boiler, utility, or equipment
rooms.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide drips, grading of the lines, freeze protection, and branch outlet
locations as shown and conforming to the requirements of NFPA 54.
3.12 BUILDING STRUCTURE
Do not weaken any building structure by the installation of any gas piping.
Do not cut or notch beams, joists or columns. Attach piping supports to
metal decking. Do not attach supports to the underside of concrete filled
floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.13 PIPING SYSTEM SUPPORTS
Support gas piping systems in buildings with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps,
bands or hangers suitable for the size of piping or tubing. Do not support
any gas piping system by other piping. Conform spacing of supports in gas
piping and tubing installations to the requirements of NFPA 54. Conform the
selection and application of supports in gas piping and tubing installations
to the requirements of MSS SP-69. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a
common base member, use a clip or clamp where each pipe crosses the base
support member. Spacing of the base support members is not to exceed the
hanger and support spacing required for any of the individual pipes in the
multiple pipe run. Rigidly connect the clips or clamps to the common base
member. Provide a clearance of 1/8 inch between the pipe and clip or clamp
for all piping which may be subjected to thermal expansion.
3.14 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
Provide a gas piping system within the building which is electrically
continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode as required by NFPA 70.
3.15 SHUTOFF VALVE
Install the main gas shutoff valve controlling the gas piping system to be
easily accessible for operation, as indicated, protected from physical
Section 23 11 25 Page 13

damage, and marked with a metal tag to clearly identify the piping system
controlled.
3.16 TESTING
Submit test reports in booklet form tabulating test and measurements
performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the Contractor's
name and address, the project name and location, and a list of the specific
requirements which are being certified. Test entire gas piping system to
ensure that it is gastight prior to putting into service. Prior to testing,
blow out the system, clean, and clear all foreign material. Test each joint
with an approved gas detector, soap and water, or an equivalent nonflammable
solution. Inspect and test each valve in conformance with API Std 598 and
API Std 607. Complete testing before any work is covered, enclosed, or
concealed, and perform with due regard for the safety of employees and the
public during the test. Install bulkheads, anchorage and bracing suitably
designed to resist test pressures if necessary, and as directed and or
approved by the Contracting Officer. Do not use oxygen as a testing medium.
3.16.1 Pressure Tests
Submit test reports in booklet form tabulating test and measurements
performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the Contractor's
name and address, the project name and location, and a list of the specific
requirements which are being certified. Before appliances are connected,
test by filling the piping systems with air or an inert gas to withstand a
minimum pressure of 3 pounds gauge for a period of not less than 10 minutes
as specified in NFPA 54 without showing any drop in pressure. Do not use
Oxygen for test. Measure pressure with a mercury manometer, slope gauge, or
an equivalent device calibrated to be read in increments of not greater than
0.1 pound. Isolate the source of pressure before the pressure tests are
made.
3.16.2 Test With Gas
Before turning on gas under pressure into any piping, close all openings
from which gas can escape. Immediately after turning on the gas, check the
piping system for leakage by using a laboratory-certified gas meter, an
appliance orifice, a manometer, or equivalent device. Conform all testing
to the requirements of NFPA 54. If leakage is recorded, shut off the gas
supply, repair the leak , and repeat the tests until all leaks have been
stopped.
3.16.3 Purging
After testing is completed, and before connecting any appliances, fully
purge all gas piping. Do not purge piping into the combustion chamber of an
appliance. Do not purge the open end of piping systems into confined spaces
or areas where there are ignition sources unless the safety precautions
recommended in NFPA 54 are followed.
3.16.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment
Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for conducting the
testing and purging.
Section 23 11 25 Page 14

3.17 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Provide color code marking of piping as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS, conforming to ASME A13.1.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 11 25 Page 15

SECTION 23 21 13.00 20
LOW TEMPERATURE WATER HEATING SYSTEM
04/06
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S1.4
(1983; Amendment 1985; R 2006) Specification
for Sound Level Meters (ASA 47)
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1003
ASSE 1017
(2001; Errata, 2003) Performance Requirements
for Water Pressure Reducing Valves
(2003; Errata 2004) Temperature Actuated
Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution
Systems
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS Z49.1
(2005) Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied
Processes
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B1.1
ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.1
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.18
ASME B16.21
ASME B16.22
(2003; R 2008) Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN
and UNR Thread Form)
(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose
(Inch)
(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
(2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
(2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings
(2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
(2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 1

ASME B16.24
ASME B16.3
ASME B16.34
ASME B16.39
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.9
ASME B18.2.2
ASME B31.9
ASME B40.100
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1
(2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, 1500, and 2500
(2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
(2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding
End
(2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded
Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300
(2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24
(2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
(1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex
Nuts
(2008) Building Services Piping
(2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code; Section VIII, Pressure Vessels
Division 1 - Basic Coverage
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 123/A 123M
ASTM A 183
ASTM A 194/A 194M
ASTM A 307
ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 53/A 53M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-
Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
(2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
(2009) Standard Specification for Carbon and
Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure
or High-Temperature Service, or Both
(2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 2

ASTM A 536
ASTM B 32
ASTM B 88
ASTM D 1785
ASTM D 2000
ASTM F 1007
ASTM F 1120
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
(2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40,
80, and 120
(2008) Standard Classification System for
Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
(1986; R 2007) Pipeline Expansion Joints of
the Packed Slip Type for Marine Application
(1987; R 2004) Standard Specification for
Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion
Joints for Piping Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015
(1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH
(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List
(continuously updated) List of Approved
Backflow Prevention Assemblies
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110
MSS SP-58
MSS SP-67
MSS SP-69
MSS SP-70
MSS SP-71
MSS SP-72
(1996) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
(2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports
- Materials, Design and Manufacture
(2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly Valves
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application
(2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
(1999) Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged
or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 3

MSS SP-80
MSS SP-85
(2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
Valves
(2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe & Angle
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 6
NEMA MG 1
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers,
Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated Not
More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part
8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial
Control Equipment
(1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial
Controls and Systems Enclosures
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-V-12003
(Rev F; Am 1; CANC Notice 1) Valves, Plug,
Cast-Iron or Steel, Manually Operated
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-59617
FS A-A-1689
FS A-A-50560
FS WW-S-2739
(Basic) Unions, Brass or Bronze, Threaded
Pipe Connections and Solder-Joint Tube
Connections
(Rev B) Tape, Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive,
(Plastic Film)
(Basic) Pumps, Centrifugal, Water
Circulating, Electric-Motor-Driven
(Basic) Strainers, Sediment: Pipeline,
Water, Air, Gas, Oil, or Steam
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.144 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical
Hazards
29 CFR 1910.219 Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 4

Except as specified otherwise, equipment and piping components shall be
suitable for use in low temperature water heating system. Except as
modified herein, the pressure temperature limitations shall be as specified
in the referenced standards and specifications. Pressures in this
specification are pressures in pounds per square inch above atmospheric
pressure, and temperatures are in degrees Fahrenheit (F).
1.3.1 Hot Water Heating System
Submit plan, elevations, dimensions, capacities, and ratings. Include the
following:
d. Pumps
e. Valves
f. Expansion tanks
h. Backflow preventer
i. Air separating tank
j. Boilers
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hot water heating system
SD-03 Product Data
Pumps
Include pump speed and characteristic curve for performance of
impeller selected for each pump. Curves shall indicate capacity vs
head, efficiency, and brake power for full range, from shut-off to
free delivery.
Expansion tanks
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 5

Backflow preventers
External air separation tanks
Hot water heating pipe
SD-06 Test Reports
Hydrostatic test of piping system
Auxiliary equipment and accessory tests
Submit test reports in accordance with the paragraph entitled
"Field Quality Control."
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow preventer certification
Report of prior installations
Welding procedures
Welder's qualifications
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Convectors, Data Package 3; G
Finned tube radiators, Data Package 3; G
Submit a list of qualified service organizations which includes
addresses and qualifications.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Standard Commercial Product for Terminal Units
Terminal units provided shall comply with features called out in this
specification and shall be the manufacturer's standard commercial product.
Additional or better features which are not prohibited by this specification
but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial product,
shall be included in the terminal units being furnished. A standard
commercial product is a product which has been sold or is currently being
offered for sale, on the commercial market through advertisements or
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Provide Institute of Boiler and
Radiator Manufacturer (IBR) or Steel Boiler Institute (SBI) rating for
required capacity.
1.5.2 Welding
1.5.2.1 Report of Prior Installations
Submit a Certificate of Full Approval or a current Certificate of Approval
for each design, size, and make of backflow preventer being provided for the
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 6

project. Certificate shall be from the Foundation for Cross-Connection
Control and Hydraulic Research, University of Southern California, and shall
attest that this design, size, and make of backflow preventer has
satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and
evaluation for the respective level of approval. A Certificate of
Provisional Approval is not acceptable in lieu of the above.
1.5.2.2 Welding Procedures
Before performing welding, submit three copies of welding procedure
specification for all metals to be used in the work, together with proof of
welder's qualification as outlines in ASME B31.9.
1.5.2.3 Welder's Qualifications
Before welder or operator performs welding, submit three copies of Welder's
Performance Qualification Record in conformance with ASME B31.9showing that
the welder was tested under the approved procedure specification submitted
by the Contractor. In addition, submit each welder's assigned number,
letter, or symbol used to identify the work of the welder.
1.5.2.4 Identification of Welder's Work
Ensure that each welder's assigned number, letter or symbol is affixed
immediately upon completion of the weld. To welders making defective welds
after passing a qualification test, give a requalification test. Upon
failing to pass the test, do not permit welder to work in this contract.
1.5.2.5 Previous Qualifications
Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators previously qualified by
test may be accepted for this contract without requalification subject to
the approval and provided that all the conditions specified in
ASME B31.9 are met before a procedure can be used.
1.5.3 Brazing and Soldering
1.5.3.1 Brazing Procedure
ASME B31.9. Brazing procedure for joints shall be as outlined in CDA A4015.
1.5.3.2 Soldering, Soldering Preparation, and Procedures for Joints
ASME B31.9 and as outlined in CDA A4015.
1.5.4 Backflow Preventer Certification
Submit a Certificate of Full Approval or a current Certificate of Approval
for backflow preventers.
1.6 SAFETY STANDARDS
1.6.1 Welding
Safety in welding and cutting of pipe shall conform to AWS Z49.1.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 7

1.6.2 Guards
Couplings, motor shafts, gears and other moving parts shall be guarded, in
accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.219. Guards shall be cast iron or expanded
metal. Guard parts shall be rigid and removable without disassembling the
guarded unit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.1.1 Hot Water Heating Pipe (Supply and Return)
ASTM A 53/A 53M electric resistance welded or seamless Schedule steel pipe
or ASTM B 88 Type hard drawn Copper tubing.
2.1.2 Fittings
Provide fittings compatible with the pipe being provided and shall conform
to the following requirements.
2.1.2.1 Steel or Malleable Iron Pipe
Sizes 1/8 to 2 inches. ASME B16.11 steel socket welding or screwed type or
ASME B16.3 for screwed type malleable iron fittings.
2.1.2.2 Steel, Cast Iron, or Bronze
Sizes 2 1/2 inches and above. Steel fitting butt welding type ASME B16.9 or
ASME B16.5 flanged type. Cast iron fittings flanged type ASME B16.1.
Bronze fittings up to 8 inch size flanged type ASME B16.24.
2.1.2.3 Fittings for Copper Tubing
ASME B16.18 cast bronze solder joint type or ASME B16.22wrought copper
solder joint type. Fittings may be flared or compression joint type.
2.1.3 Mechanical Pipe Coupling System
Couplings may be provided for water temperatures not to exceed 200 degrees
F. Couplings shall be self centering and shall engage and lock in place the
grooved or shouldered ends of pipe and pipe fittings in a positive
watertight couple. Couplings shall be designed to permit some angular pipe
deflection, contraction, and expansion. Coupling clamp shall be ductile
iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be molded
rubber conforming to ASTM D 2000, the "line call-out" number shall be
suitable for a water temperature of 230 degrees F. Coupling nuts and bolts
shall be steel conforming to ASTM A 183. Fittings shall be grooved
malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to
ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510. Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be of
the same manufacturer. Before assembling couplings, coat pipe ends and
outsides of gaskets with lubricant approved by the coupling manufacturer to
facilitate installation.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 8

2.1.3.1 Groove and Check Valves
Grooved end, dual disc, spring loaded, non-slam check valves with Type 316
stainless steel or aluminum bronze discs and EPDM rubber seats. Maximum
rated working pressure of 500 psi dependent on size. Tested in accordance
with MSS SP-71.
2.1.3.2 Butterfly Valves
Grooved end butterfly valves with ductile iron body and disc core to
ASTM A 536. Disc rubber connected with EPDM rubber. Maximum rated working
pressure of 300 psi tested in accordance with MSS SP-67.
2.1.3.3 Strainers
Include grooved end T-type strainers with steel or ductile iron bodies, Type
304 removable strainer baskets with 6 or 12 mesh screens and 57 percent open
area. Maximum rated working pressure of 750 psi dependent on size.
2.1.4 Unions
2.1.4.1 Steel Pipe
Provide ASME B16.39, malleable iron unions, threaded connections.
2.1.4.2 Copper Tubing
Provide CID A-A-59617, bronze unions, solder joint end.
2.1.4.3 Dielectric Union
Provide insulated union with galvanized steel female pipe-threaded end and a
copper solder joint end conforming with ASME B16.39, Class 1, dimensional,
strength and pressure requirements. Union shall have a water-impervious
insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to one percent of
the short-circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry,
insulation barrier shall be able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test.
2.1.5 Flanges
Remove raised faces when used with flanges having a flat face.
2.1.5.1 Steel Flanges
ASME B16.5 forged steel, welding type.
2.1.5.2 Cast Iron Screwed Flanges
ASME B16.1.
2.1.5.3 Bronze Screwed Flanges
ASME B16.24.
2.1.6 Drains and Overflows
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 9

2.1.6.1 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Electric resistance welded Schedule 40, Malleable iron or
forged steel fittings, screwed or welded joints.
2.1.6.2 Copper Tubing
ASTM B 88, Type K, hard drawn, cast brass or wrought copper fittings, Grade
Sb5 solder joints.
2.1.6.3 PVC Pipe
ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, and Schedule 80 for sizes 8 inch and larger,
solvent weld joints.
2.1.7 Valves
Valves shall have rising stems and shall open when turned counterclockwise.
2.1.7.1 Gate Valves
a. Bronze Gate Valves: MSS SP-80, 2 inches and smaller, wedge disc,
inside screw type not less than Class 150. Use solder joint ends
with copper tubing.
b. Steel Gate Valves: ASME B16.34, provide with open stem and yoke
type with solid wedge or flexible wedge disc and heat and
corrosion-resistant steel trim.
c. Cast Iron Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, 2 1/2 inches and larger, open
stem and yoke type with bronze trim.
2.1.7.2 Globe and Angle Valves
a. Bronze Globe and Angle Valves: MSS SP-80, 2 inches and smaller,
Class 200, except use Class 150 with solder ends for copper tubing.
Valves shall have renewable seat and discs except solder end valves
which shall have integral seats.
b. Steel Globe and Angle Valves: ASME B16.34, provide with heat and
corrosion-resistant trim.
c. Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves: MSS SP-85, 2 1/2 inches and
larger, with bronze trim, tapped drains and brass plug.
2.1.7.3 Check Valves
a. Bronze Check Valves: MSS SP-80, 2 inches and smaller, regrinding
swing check type, Class 200.
b. Steel Swing Check Valves: ASME B16.34, regrinding swing check
type, Class 200.
(1) Swing check valves shall have bolted caps.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 10

(2) Steel Lift check valves 2 inches and smaller shall have
bolted caps. Lift check valves 2 1/2 inches and larger shall have
pressure seal caps.
c. Cast Iron Check Valves: ASME B16.34, 2 1/2 inches and larger,
bronze trim, non-slam, eccentric disc type for centrifugal pump
discharge service.
2.1.7.4 Temperature Regulating Valves
Provide ASSE 1017 copper alloy body with adjustable range thermostat.
2.1.7.5 Water Pressure-Reducing Valves
ASSE 1003.
2.1.7.6 Plug Valves
MIL-V-12003, except that a replaceable valve seat will not be required. Type
I - lubricated, tapered plug valves.
2.1.7.7 Ball Valves
Flanged or butt-welding ends ball valve shall conform to MSS SP-72, bronze .
Threaded, socket-welding, solder joint, grooved and flared ends shall
conform to MSS SP-110.
2.1.7.8 Radiator Valves
Radiator valves shall be angle or straightway pattern, with packed or
packless bonnet shutoff globe type, designed especially for hot water
heating system. Valve shall be constructed of brass or bronze or copper
alloy conforming to ASTM specifications for materials with non-metallic
renewable disc and plastic wheel handle for shutoff service.
2.1.7.9 Flow Control Balancing Valves
Copper alloy or cast iron body, copper alloy or stainless internal working
parts, and integral pointer that indicates the degree of valve opening.
Valves shall be suitable for 125 psig at 190 degrees F hot water. Valve
shall function as a service valve when in fully closed position. Valve body
shall have factory-installed tappings for differential pressure meter
connections for verification of pressure differential across valve orifice.
Meter connections shall have positive check valves or shutoff valves. Each
valve shall have metal tag showing the gallons per minute flow for each
differential pressure reading.
2.1.7.10 Butterfly Valves
Conform with MSS SP-67, Type I - Tight shut off valve, and flanged valve
ends. Valve body material shall be cast iron and shall be bubble tight for
shutoff at 150 psig. Flanged and flangeless type valves shall have Type 300
series corrosion resistant steel stems and corrosion resistant or bronze
discs with molded elastomer disc seals. Flow conditions shall be for the
regulation from maximum flow to complete shutoff by way of throttling
effect. Valves shall be provided in closed system. Valves smaller than 8
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 11

inches shall have throttling handles. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have
totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops
and indicators. Valves shall have a minimum of 7 locking positions and
shall be suitable for water temperatures up to 200 degrees F.
2.1.7.11 Butterfly Valves 2 Inches and Smaller
Valves shall be one-piece and three-piece design with male or female
threaded or soldered end connections and shall be bubble tight for shutoff
at 150 psig. Stem and disc assembly shall be of 300 series corrosion
resistant steel. Disc seal assembly shall be of 300 series corrosion
resistant steel. Disc seal shall be suitable for the liquid being used in
the system in which the valve is to be installed. Valves shall be suitable
for water temperature up to 200 degrees F and shall be capable of operating
at the rated pressure of psig. Valves shall be designed for throttling
service use by valve lever and indicator adjustment.
2.1.7.12 Relief Valves
Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic,
direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled.
2.1.7.13 Valve Operating Mechanisms
Provide floor stands chainwheels power operators and extension stems where
indicated and as specified.
a. Floor Stands: Construct for bolting to the floor and include an
extension stem and an operating handwheel. Design an adequately
supported and guided extension stems for connection to the valve
stem by a sleeve coupling or universal joint. Floor stands shall
be cast iron or steel. Handwheel shall identify rotation direction
for closing the valve and shall be of such diameter as to permit
operation of the valve with a force of not more than 40 pounds.
b. Chainwheel Operator: Shall be fabricated of cast iron or steel and
shall include a wheel, endless chain and a guide to keep the chain
on the wheel. Provide galvanized steel endless chain extending to
within 3 feet of the floor.
c. Power Operators: Shall be electric . Power operated valves shall
open and close at rates no slower than 10 inches per minute for
gate valves and 4 inches per minute for globe and angle valves.
Valves shall open fully or close tightly without requiring further
attention when the actuating control is moved to the open or close
position. A predetermined thrust exerted on the stem during
operation resulting from an obstruction in the valve shall cause
the motor to automatically stop. Power operators shall be complete
with all gearing and controls necessary for the size of valve being
provided. Power operators shall be designed to operate on the
electric power supply indicated.
d. Extension Stem: Corrosion resisting steel designed for rising and
non-rising stems. Provide in length required to connect the valve
stem and the operating mechanism and of sufficient cross section to
transfer the torque required to operate the valve.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 12

2.1.7.14 Balancing Valves
Balancing valves shall be calibrated bronze body balancing valves with
integral ball valve and venturi or valve orifice and valve body pressure
taps for flow measurement based on differential pressure readings. Valve
pressure taps and meter connections shall have seals and built-in check
valves with threaded connections for a portable meter. Meter shall be
provided by the same manufacturer and be capable of reading system pressures
and shall meet the requirements of the paragraph entitled "Flow Measuring
Equipment." Valves shall have internal seals to prevent leakage around
rotating element and be suitable for full shut-off rated pressure. Valves
shall have an operator with integral pointer and memory stop. Balancing
valves shall be selected for the required flows as indicated on the plans.
2.1.8 End Connections
2.1.8.1 Flexible Connectors
Provide flexible pipe connectors on piping connected to equipment. Flexible
section shall consist of rubber, tetrafluoroethylene resin, corrosionresistant
steel, bronze, monel, or galvanized steel. Material provided and
configuration shall be suitable for pressure, temperature, and circulating
medium. Flexible section shall have threaded, welding, soldering, flanged
or socket-weld ends and shall be suitable for service intended. Flexible
section may be reinforced with metal retaining rings, with built-in braided
wire reinforcement and restriction bolts or with wire braid cover suitable
for service intended.
2.1.8.2 Steel Piping
Screwed or socket welded for 2 inches and smaller and flanged or butt welded
for 2 1/2 inches and larger.
a. Screwed Joints With Taper Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
b. Flanged Joints: Bolting and gaskets shall be as follows:
(1) Bolting: Bolt and stud material ASTM A 307, Grade B, and nut
material ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 2. Bolt, stud, and nut
dimensions ASME B18.2.2 threads ASME B1.1coarse type with Class 2A
fit for bolts and studs, and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or bolt
studs shall extend completely through the nuts and may have reduced
shanks of a diameter not less than the diameter at root of threads.
Carbon steel bolts shall have American Standard regular square or
heavy hexagon heads and shall have American Standard heavy
semifinished hexagonal nuts conforming to ASME B18.2.2.
(2) Gaskets: ASME B16.21, Nonasbestos compressed material 1/16
inch thickness full face or self-centering flat ring type and
suitable for pressure and temperature of the piping system.
c. Butt Weld Joints: ASME B31.9. Backing rings shall conform to ASME
B31.9. Ferrous rings shall not exceed 0.05 percent sulfur; for
alloy pipe, backing rings shall be of material compatible with the
chemical composition of the parts to be welded and preferably of
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 13

the same composition. Provide continuous machined or split band
backing rings.
d. Socket Weld Joints: ASME B31.9.
2.1.8.3 Joints for Copper Tubing
a. Solder conforming to ASTM B 32 alloy grade Sb5 or Sn96. Solder and
flux shall be lead free (less than 0.2 percent of lead).
b. Copper Tube Extracted Joint: An extracted mechanical tee joint may
be made in copper tube. Make joint with an appropriate tool by
drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a
collar having a minimum height of three times the thickness of the
tube wall. To prevent the branch tube from being inserted beyond
the depth of the extracted joint, provide dimpled depth stops.
Notch the branch tube for proper penetration into fitting to assure
a free flow joint. Braze extracted joints using a copper
phosphorous classification brazing filler metal. Soldered joints
shall not be permitted.
2.1.9 Expansion Joints
2.1.9.1 Packless Type
Provide ASTM F 1120, Type III with fabricated corrosion-resistant steel
bellows.
2.1.9.2 Guided Slip-Tube Type
Provide ASTM F 1007, Type IV internally-externally guided, injected
semiplastic type packing.
2.1.10 Instrumentation
2.1.10.1 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Provide ASME B40.100 with restrictor.
2.1.10.2 Indicating Thermometers
Thermometers shall be dial type with an adjustable angle suitable for the
service. Provide thermowell sized for each thermometer in accordance with
the thermowell specification. Fluid-filled thermometers (mercury is not
acceptable) shall have a nominal scale diameter of 5 inches. Construction
shall be stainless-steel case with molded glass cover, stainless-steel stem
and bulb. Stem shall be straight, length as required to fit well. Bimetal
thermometers shall have a scale diameter of 3 1/2 inches. Case shall be
hermetic. Case and stem shall be constructed of stainless steel. Bimetal
stem shall be straight and of a length as required to fit the well.
2.1.10.3 Pressure/Temperature Test Ports
Pressure/Temperature Test Ports shall have brass body and EPDM and/or
Neoprene valve seals. Ports shall be rated for service between 35 and 275
degrees F and up to 500 psig. Ports shall be provided in lengths
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 14

appropriate for the insulation thickness specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and installed to allow a minimum
of 12 inches of access for probe insertion. Provide with screw-on cap
attached with a strap or chain to prevent loss when removed. Ports shall be
1/4 inch NPT and accept 1/8 inch diameter probes.
2.1.11 Miscellaneous Pipeline Components
2.1.11.1 Air Vent
Provide float type air vent in hydronic systems. Vent shall be constructed
of brass or semi-steel body, copper float, and stainless steel valve and
valve seat. Design air vent to suit system operating temperature and
pressure. Provide isolating valve to permit service without draining the
system. Pipe discharge of vent to a drain.
2.1.11.2 Strainers
Strainers for classes 125 and 250 piping in IPS 1/2 to 8 inches, inclusive,
FS WW-S-2739 and locate as indicated.
2.1.11.3 Hangers and Supports
Design and fabrication of pipe hangers, supports, and welding attachments
shall conform to MSS SP-58 and ASME B31.9. Hanger types and supports for
bare and covered pipe shall conform to MSS SP-69 for the temperature range.
2.1.11.4 Pipe Sleeves
Sleeves in masonry and concrete walls, floors, and roof slabs shall be ASTM
A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 or Standard Weight, hot-dip galvanized steel
ductile-iron or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in partitions shall be zinc-coated
sheet steel having a nominal weight of not less than 0.906 pound per square
foot.
2.1.11.5 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping passing through
floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished stainless
steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished
spaces and paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
2.2 CENTRAL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 Boilers
Provide as specified in Section 23 52 43.00 20 LOW PRESSURE WATER HEATING
BOILERS UNDER 800,000 BTU/HR OUTPUT.
2.3 PIPING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
2.3.1 Pumps
Provide hot water circulating pumps, FS A-A-50560, Service A. Pump casing
and flange shall be made of close-grained cast iron. Shaft shall be carbon
or alloy steel with lubricated bearings and impeller shall be bronze.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 15

Select pumps so that the operating point on selected impeller-curve will lie
at or to the left of shutoff side of, and not more than 5 percent below,
point of maximum efficiency for impeller. Provide motors of open type
conforming to NEMA MG 1 and suitable for electrical characteristic as
indicated. Motor starters shall conform to NEMA ICS 2 manual type with NEMA
ICS 6general purpose enclosure.
2.3.2 Expansion Tanks
Provide welded steel, constructed and tested hydrostatically in accordance
with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. Tank shall be equipped with all necessary
fittings. The tank and fittings shall be pressure rated at least equal to
the test pressure of the total system. Zinc coat the tank inside and out
after fabrication by the hot dip process ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.3.3 External Air Separation Tanks
Provide tank constructed of steel, designed for not less than 75 psig, and
constructed and tested in accordance with the requirements of ASME BPVC SEC
VIII D1. Provide tangential inlet and outlet connections, flanged for sizes
2 1/2 inches and larger. Each unit shall have an internal design suitable
for creating the required vortex and subsequent air separation. Provide
with automatic air release device and galvanized steel strainer. Provide a
blow down connection with a gate valve and piped to nearest floor drain.
2.3.4 Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type. Furnish proof that each make,
model/design, and size of backflow preventer being furnished for the project
is approved by and has a current "Certificate of Approval" from the FCCCHR
List or local code. Listing of a particular make, model/design, and size in
the current FCCCHR List or local code will be acceptable as the required
proof.
2.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Provide complete with motors, motor starters, thermal overload protection,
and controls. Equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26
20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.5 INSULATION
Provide shop and field applied insulation as specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.6 ASBESTOS PROHIBITION
Asbestos and asbestos containing products are prohibited.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Provide storage for equipment and material at the project site. All parts
shall be readily accessible for inspection, repair, and renewal. Protect
material and equipment from the weather.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 16

3.2 INSTALLATION
Piping fabrication, assembly, welding, soldering, and brazing shall conform
to ASME B31.9. Piping shall follow the general arrangement shown. Route
piping and equipment within buildings out of the way of lighting fixtures
and doors, windows, and other openings. Run overhead piping in buildings in
inconspicuous positions. Provide adequate clearances from walls, ceilings,
and floors to permit welding of joints and application of insulation. Make
provision for expansion and contraction of pipe lines. Make changes in size
of water lines with reducing fittings. Do not bury, conceal, or insulate
until piping has been inspected, tested, and approved. Do not run piping
concealed in walls, partitions, underground, or under the floor except as
otherwise indicated. Where pipe passes through building structure, locate
pipe joints and expansion joints where they may be inspected. Provide
flanged joints where necessary for normal maintenance and where required to
match valves and equipment. Furnish gaskets, packing, and thread compounds
suitable for the service. Provide long radius ells where possible to reduce
pressure drops. Pipe bends in lieu of welding fittings may be used where
space permits. Pipe bends shall have a uniform radius of at least five
times the pipe diameter and shall be free from appreciable flattening,
wrinkling, or thinning of the pipe. Do not use mitering of pipe to form
elbows, notching straight runs to form full sized tees, or any similar
construction. Make branch connections over 2 inches with welding tees
except factory made forged welding branch outlets or nozzles having integral
reinforcements conforming to ASME B31.9 may be used, provided the nominal
diameter of the branch is at least one pipe size less than the nominal
diameter of the run. Branch connections 2 inches and under can be threaded
or welded. Run vertical piping plumb and straight and parallel to walls.
Provide sleeves for lines passing through building structure. Provide a
fire seal where pipes pass through fire wall, fire partitions, fire rated
pipe chase walls, or floors above grade. Install piping connected to
equipment with flexibility for thermal stresses and for vibration, and
support and anchor so that strain from weight and thermal movement of piping
is not imposed on the equipment.
3.2.1 Hangers and Supports
Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal and vertical piping attachments shall
conform to MSS SP-58. Band and secure insulation protection shields without
damaging pipe insulation. Continuous inserts and expansion bolts may be
used.
3.2.2 Grading of Pipe Lines
Unless otherwise indicated, install horizontal lines of hot water piping to
grade down in the direction of flow with a pitch of not less than one inch
in 30 feet, except in loop mains and main headers where the flow may be in
either direction.
3.2.3 Pipe Sleeves
Provide sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through masonry or concrete
walls, floors, roof, and partitions. Annular space between pipe, tubing, or
insulation and the sleeve shall not be less than 1/4 inch. Hold sleeves
securely in proper position and location before and during construction.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 17

Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of
walls, partitions, or slabs. Sleeves in floor slabs shall extend 2 inches
above finished floor. Firmly pack space between pipe or tubing and sleeve
with oakum and caulk on both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof
cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically
adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. Seal both ends of penetrations
through fire walls and fire floors to maintain fire resistive integrity with
UL listed fill, void, or cavity material.
3.2.4 Flashing for Buildings
Provide flashing where pipes pass through building roofs, and make outside
walls tight and waterproof.
3.2.5 Unions and Flanges
Provide unions and flanges to permit easy disconnection of piping and
apparatus. Each connection having a screwed-end valve shall have a union.
Place unions and flanges no farther apart than 100 feet. Install unions
downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Provide
unions on piping under 2 inches in diameter, and provide flanges on piping 2
inches and over in diameter. Provide dielectric unions or flanges between
ferrous and non-ferrous piping, equipment, and fittings; except that bronze
valves and fittings may be used without dielectric couplings for ferrous-toferrous
or non-ferrous-to-non-ferrous connections.
3.2.6 Connections for Future Equipment
Locate capped or plugged outlets for connections to future equipment as
indicated.
3.2.7 Changes in Pipe Size
Provide reducing fittings for changes in pipe size; reducing bushings are
not permitted. In horizontal lines, provide eccentric reducing fittings to
maintain the top of the lines in the same plane.
3.2.8 Cleaning of Pipe
Thoroughly clean each section of pipe, fittings, and valves free of foreign
matter before erection. Prior to erection, hold each piece of pipe in an
inclined position and tap along its full length to loosen sand, mill scale
and other foreign matter. For pipe 2 inches and larger, draw wire brush, of
a diameter larger than that of the inside of the pipe, several times through
the entire length of pipe. Before making final connections to apparatus,
wash out interior of piping thoroughly with water. Plug or cap open ends of
mains during shutdown periods. Do not leave lines open where foreign matter
might enter the pipe.
3.2.9 Valves
Install valves in conformance with ASME B31.9. Provide gate valves unless
otherwise directed. Install valves with stems horizontal or above. Locate
or equip stop valves to permit operation from floor level, or provide with
safe access in the form of walkways or ladders. Install valves in positions
accessible for operation and repair.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 18

3.2.9.1 Globe Valves
Install globe valves so that the pressure is below the disk and the stem
horizontal.
3.2.9.2 Relief Valves
Provide valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat
exchangers, and expansion tanks. Select system relief valve so that
capacity is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select
equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.
Pipe relief valve outlet to the nearest floor drain.
3.2.10 Pressure Gage
Provide a shut-off valve or pet cock between pressure gages and the line.
3.2.11 Thermometers
Provide thermometers and thermal sensing elements of control valves with a
separable socket. Install separable sockets in pipe lines in such a manner
to sense the temperature of flowing the fluid and minimize obstruction to
flow.
3.2.12 Strainers
Provide strainers, with meshes suitable for the services, where indicated,
or where dirt might interfere with the proper operation of valve parts,
orifices, or moving parts of equipment.
3.2.13 Pumps
Select pumps for specified fluid temperatures, are non-overloading in
parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint
of published maximum efficiency curve. Support piping adjacent to pump such
that no weight is carried on pump casings. Install close coupled and base
mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout
in place and provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge
line sizes 4 inches and over. Lubricate pump before start-up.
3.2.14 Equipment Foundations
Locate equipment foundations as shown on the drawings. Size, weight, and
design shall preclude shifting of equipment under operating conditions.
Foundations shall meet the requirements of the equipment manufacturer.
3.2.15 Equipment Installation
Install equipment in accordance with installation instructions of the
manufacturers. Grout equipment mounted on concrete foundations before
installing piping. Install piping in such a manner as not to place a strain
on the equipment. Do not bolt flanged joints tight unless they match.
Grade, anchor, guide, and support piping without low pockets.
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 19

3.2.16 Cleaning of Systems
As installation of the various system components is completed, fill, start,
and vent prior to cleaning. Place terminal control valves in open position.
Add cleaner to closed system at concentration as recommended by
manufacturer. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to
160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. Remove heat and circulate
to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill
with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain.
Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. Use
neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval
of Contracting Officer. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning
process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.
Preliminary or final tests are not permitted until cleaning is approved.
3.2.17 Painting of Piping and Equipment
Provide in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.18 Identification of Piping
Identify piping in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.144, except that labels
or tapes may be used in lieu of painting or stencilling. Spacing of
identification marking on runs shall not exceed 50 feet. Materials for
labels and tapes shall conform to FS A-A-1689, and shall be general purpose
type and color class. Painting and stencilling shall conform to Section 09
90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform inspections and tests as specified herein to demonstrate that piping
and equipment, as installed, is in compliance with contract requirements.
Start up and operate the system. During this time, periodically clean the
various strainers until no further accumulation of foreign material occurs.
Exercise care so that minimum loss of water occurs when strainers are
cleaned. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments to place them in
proper operation and sequence.
3.3.1 Hydrostatic Test of Piping System
Test piping system hydrostatically using water not exceeding 100 degrees F.
Conduct tests in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.9 and as
follows. Test piping system after all lines have been cleaned and before
applying insulation covering. Remove or valve off from the system, gages,
and other apparatus which may be damaged by the test before the tests are
made. Install calibrated test pressure gage in the system to observe any
loss in pressure. Maintain test pressure for a sufficient length of time to
enable an inspection of each joint and connection. Perform tests after
installation and prior to acceptance.Notify the Contracting Officer in
writing days prior to the time scheduled for the tests.
3.3.2 Auxiliary Equipment and Accessory Tests
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 20

Observe and check pumps, accessories, and equipment during operational and
capacity tests for leakage, malfunctions, defects, noncompliance with
referenced standards, or overloading.
3.3.2.1 Backflow Preventers
Backflow preventers shall be tested by locally approved and certified
backflow assembly testers. A copy of the test report shall be provided to
the Contracting Officer prior to placing the domestic water system into
operation, or no later than 5 days after the test.
3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Test, adjust, and balance the hydronic system in accordance with Section 23
05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING.
3.4.1 Markings of Settings
Following final acceptance of the balancing report, the settings of all
valves, splitters, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be
permanently marked so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at
anytime.
3.4.2 Sound Level Tests
Upon completion of testing and balancing of hydronic systems, conduct sound
level tests of conditioned spaces. Use sound level meter required by ASA
S1.4, Type 2, calibrated in accordance with NBS standards and guidelines,
and accompanied by a certificate of calibration. Record sound levels in dBA
with heating systems off and with heating systems operating. Record the
following data for each room and system:
a. Background sound level (systems off);
b. Total sound level corrected for background; and
c. Sound power rating by manufacturer of the respective outlet.
Test Locations: Take sound level reading at location 6 feet from face of
each outlet on a line at 45 degrees with face of outlet. Remedial Action:
If sound level at any observation point exceeds 20 dBA, take remedial action
as directed.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 21 13.00 20 Page 21

SECTION 23 25 00
CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
11/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 2688
ASTM D 596
(2005) Corrosivity of Water in the Absence of
Heat Transfer (Weight Loss Methods)
(2001; R 2006) Reporting Results of Analysis
of Water
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section covers the provisions and installation procedures necessary for
a complete and totally functional water system(s) chemical treatment.
Provide and install the system with all necessary System Components,
Accessories, Piping Components, and Supplemental Components/Services.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Water Treatment System; G
Water Analysis; G
Six complete copies, at least 5 weeks prior to the purchase of
the water treatment system, of the proposed water treatment plan
including a layout; control scheme; a list of existing make-up
water chemistry, including the items listed in paragraph Water
Analysis; a list of treatment chemicals to be added; the proportion
of chemicals to be added; the final treated water control levels;
and a description of health, safety and environmental concerns for
handling the chemicals plus any special ventilation requirements.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and
equipment specified.
Section 23 25 00 Page 1

Field Instructions
Instructions, at least 2 weeks prior to construction completion,
including equipment layout, wiring and control diagrams, piping,
valves and control sequences, and typed condensed operation
instructions. The condensed operation instructions shall include
preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system
for normal and safe operation, and procedures for safely starting
and stopping the system. The posted instructions shall be framed
under glass or laminated plastic and posted where indicated by the
Contracting Officer.
Tests; G
Test schedules, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related
testing, for the condenser/chilled/boiler/condensate/feedwater
water quality tests. The schedules shall identify the date, time,
frequency and collection location for each test.
Demonstrations; G
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed
training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for
the training.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Water Treatment System
Six complete copies of operating and maintenance manuals for the
step-by-step water treatment procedures. The manuals shall include
testing procedures used in determining water quality.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Safety
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts
which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to
operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted
with other types of safety devices. Install safety devices so that proper
operation of equipment is not impaired. Provide catwalk, ladder, and
guardrail where indicated and in accordance with Section 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS .
1.4.2 Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate
all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully
investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish
conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange such work
Section 23 25 00 Page 2

accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet
such conditions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified, after approval of the detail drawings, not later than months
prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a
complete list of parts and supplies, with source of supply
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior
to bid opening.
b. The two-year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The two
years experience shall have been satisfactorily completed by a product
which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market
through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for
not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests,
can be shown.
c. All products shall be supported by a service organization. Submit
a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for
support of the equipment, including their addresses and qualifications.
These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the
equipment installation and shall be able to render satisfactory service
to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty
period of the contract.
d. The selected service organization shall provide the chemicals
required, the concentrations required, and the water treatment
equipment sizes and flow rates required. The company shall provide all
chemicals required for the chilled water systems and fill the systems
with chemicals to the levels specified. The chemical shall meet the
requirements of this specification as well as the recommendations from
the manufacturers of the condenser and cooling tower. Acid treatment
chemicals shall not be used.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
Section 23 25 00 Page 3

Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name,
address, type or style, and catalog or serial number on a plate securely
attached to the item of equipment. Nameplates shall be provided for:
a. Pump(s)
b. Pump Motor(s)
2.3 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
A 2 gallon shot feeder shall be provided on the chilled water piping as
indicated. The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge glass,
funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.
2.3.1 Chilled Water Treatment
Treat chilled water with either a borax/nitrite type treatment or a
molybdate type treatment. Both types of treatment can be used with glycol.
Borax/nitrite treatment shall be maintained at the limits of 600 to 1000 ppm
nitrite, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or MBT), and pH of 8.5
to 9.5. Molybdate treatment shall be maintained at the limits of 100 to 125
ppm molybdate, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or MBT), and pH of
8.0 to 9.0.
2.3.2 Chilled Water Test Kits
One test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as
outlined within the operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided
(e.g. pH and nitrite or molybdate).
2.4 LOW AND MEDIUM TEMPERATURE HOT WATER BOILERS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
Low and medium temperature hot water boilers are defined as those operating
below 350 degrees F, (250 degrees F for Low Temperature).
2.4.1 Chemical Feeder
A 2 gallon shot feeder shall be provided on the hot water piping as
indicated. Size and capacity of feeder shall be based on local requirements
and water analysis. The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge
glass, funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.
2.4.2 Low and Medium Temperature Hot Water Treatment
Hot water shall be treated with either a borax/nitrite type treatment or a
molybdate type treatment. Both types of treatment can be used with glycol.
Borax/nitrite treatment shall be maintained at the limits of 600 to 1000 ppm
nitrite, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or MBT) and pH of 8.5 to
9.5. Molybdate treatment shall be maintained at the limits of 100 to 125
ppm molybdate, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or MBT) and pH of
8.0 to 9.0.
2.4.3 Test Kit Requirements
Section 23 25 00 Page 4

One test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as
outlined within the operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided
(e.g. pH and nitrite or molybdate).
2.5 TEST KIT
One test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as
outlined within the operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided
(e.g. pH, hardness and sulfite).
2.6 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
Drain and makeup water piping shall comply with the requirements of Section
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Drains which connect to sanitary sewer
systems shall be connected by means of an indirect waste.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy, before
performing any work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Provide all chemicals, equipment and labor necessary to bring all system
waters in conformance with the specified requirements. Perform all work in
accordance with the manufacturer's published diagrams, recommendations, and
equipment warranty requirements.
3.3 PIPING
Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with a dielectric union.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the
Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total hours of
normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed but
prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of
the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
3.5 TESTS
If the waters of the mechanical systems are not in conformance with the
specified requirements or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,
the water treatment company shall take corrective action to enable
compliance. Daily operational tests shall be performed in the directed
frequencies to maintain required control to prevent corrosion, scaling and
damage to equipment during operation
3.5.1 Chilled Water Testing (monthly)
Once a month, the following tests will be performed on chilled water.
Section 23 25 00 Page 5

PH
Nitrite or Molybdate
Conductivity
ppm (mg/L)
micromho/cm
3.5.2 Hot Water Boiler Water Quality Testing
3.5.2.1 Low and Medium Temperature Systems (monthly)
Monthly testing shall be completed and recorded for the following
parameters.
PH
Nitrite or Molybdate
ppm (mg/L)
3.5.3 Quality Assurance Testing
Conduct quality assurance testing periodically by an independent water
treatment lab/consultant to verify to managers that the mechanical and water
treatment systems are being maintained properly. Provide the Quality
Assurance evaluation reports to the government COR.
3.5.3.1 Chilled Water Quality Assurance Testing (quarterly)
Quarterly, the following tests shall be performed on chilled water.
PH
Nitrite or Molybdate
Conductivity
Iron (total, as Fe(2)O(3))
Written evaluation summary
ppm (mg/L)
micromho/cm
ppm (mg/L)
3.5.3.2 Hot Water Boiler Water Quality Assurance Testing
a. Quarterly testing of Low and Medium Temperature Systems shall be
completed and recorded for the following parameters.
PH
Nitrite or Molybdate
Iron (total, as Fe(2)O(3))
Written evaluation summary
ppm (mg/L)
ppm (mg/L)
b. The hot water boiler water shall be analyzed once a month for a
period of 1 year by an independent consultant. The analysis shall
include the following information recorded in accordance with ASTM D
596.
PH
Sulfite (Na2SO3)
Hardness(as CaCO3)
Iron (total, as Fe(2)O(3))
Written evaluation summary
ppm (mg/L)
ppm (mg/L)
ppm (mg/L)
3.5.4 Corrosion Testers
Section 23 25 00 Page 6

Install corrosion coupon and rack systems to verify corrosion control in the
systems. Testers or coupons are installed in flowing system water through a
sidestream or rack system. Both mild steel and copper metal samples are to
be tested in the corrosion testers in accordance with ASTM D 2688. Samples
are to be replaced and analyzed every 3 months. Rates of corrosion less
than 3 mpy for steel and 0.2 mpy for copper are acceptable. Corrosion
testers shall be installed on the piping systems of the following systems.
3.6 INSPECTIONS
Condenser loop
Chilled water system
Hot water loop
Condensate
3.6.1 Inspection General Requirements
Thirty days after project completion, inspect the cooling tower and
condenser for problems due to corrosion, scale, and biological growth. If
the cooling tower and condenser are found not to conform to the
manufacturer's recommended conditions, and the water treatment company
recommendations have been followed; the water treatment company shall
provide all chemicals and labor for cleaning or repairing the equipment as
required by the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6.2 Boiler/Piping Test
Thirty day after project completion, inspect the boiler and condensate
piping for problems due to corrosion and scale. If the boiler is found not
to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations, and the water treatment
company recommendations have been followed, the water treatment company
shall provide all chemicals and labor for cleaning or repairing the
equipment as required by the manufacturer's recommendations. If corrosion
is found within the condensate piping, proper repairs shall be made by the
water treatment company.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 25 00 Page 7

SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS
02/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 325
AISC 360
(2005) Manual of Steel Construction
(2005) Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings, with Commentary
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK
ASHRAE FUN IP
(2004) Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment
(IP Edition)
(2009) Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
(2004; Errata 2004) Specification for Filler
Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 123/A 123M
ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM A 924/A 924M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-
Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
(2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel
(2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2009a) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
Section 23 31 13 Page 1

NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1966
SMACNA 1987
(2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal
and Flexible
(2006) HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE AMS 2480
(2009) Phosphate Treatment, Paint, Base
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC A
(2000) Good Painting Practice Steel
Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 181
(2005; Rev thru Oct 2008) Standard for
Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
apply to work specified in this section.
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for medium/high pressure ductwork
systems consisting of use life, system functional flows, safety features,
and mechanical automated details. Submit test response and performance
characteristics curves for certified equipment.
Submit Design Analysis and Calculations for medium/high pressure ductwork
systems indicating the manufacturer's recommended air velocities, maximum
static pressure, and temperature calculations.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
Encompass low-pressure systems ductwork and plenums where maximum air
velocity is 2,000 feet per minute(fpm) and maximum static pressure is 2
inches water gage (wg), positive or negative.
Submit Connection Diagrams for low pressure ductwork systems indicating
the relation and connection of devices and apparatus by showing the
general physical layout of all controls, the interconnection of one
system (or portion of system) with another, and internal tubing,
wiring, and other devices.
Section 23 31 13 Page 2

Submit Design Analysis and Calculations for low pressure ductwork
systems indicating the manufacturer's recommended air velocities,
maximum static pressures, temperature calculations and acoustic levels.
Encompass high velocity systems ductwork where:
Minimum air velocity exceeds 2,000 feet per minute (fpm) or static
pressure exceeds 2 inches water gage (wg).
Medium static pressure ranges from over 2 inches wg through 3 inches
wg, positive or negative, or over 3 inches wg through 6 inches wg
positive.
High static pressure ranges from over 6 inches wg through 10 inches wg,
positive.
Do not use rigid fibrous-glass ductwork.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists and Records of
Existing Conditions in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General
Requirements," of this section.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit the following in accordance with paragraph entitled,
"Drawings," of this section.
Connection Diagrams
Record Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for medium/high pressure
ductwork systems in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Design
Requirements," of this section.
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Brazing Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Round, High-Pressure, Double-Wall Sheet Metal Ducts
Turning Vanes
Flexible Connectors
Section 23 31 13 Page 3

Flexible Duct Materials
Power Operated Dampers
Flexible Connectors
Gravity Backdraft and Relief Dampers
Manual Volume Dampers
SD-05 Design Data
Submit Design Analysis and Calculations for medium/high pressure
ductwork systems in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Design
Requirements," of this section.
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for medium/high pressure ductwork systems in
accordance with the paragraphs entitled, "Ductwork Leakage Tests"
and "Fire Damper Tests," of this section.
Ductwork Leakage Tests
Operational Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Listing of Product Installations for medium/high pressure ductwork
systems in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Installation," of
this section.
Submit certificates, showing conformance with the referenced
standards contained in this section for:
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Brazing Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Round, High-Pressure, Double-Wall Sheet Metal Ducts
Turning Vanes
Dampers
Flexible Connectors
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with
paragraph entitled, "Operation and Maintenance," of this section.
Power Operated Dampers
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of
Contractor's survey of work area conditions and features of existing
structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite. Commencement
of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
Section 23 31 13 Page 4

Include the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and
drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site
information within Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists.
1.6 DRAWINGS
Submit Connection Diagrams for medium/high pressure ductwork systems
indicating the relation and connection of devices and apparatus by showing
the general physical layout of all controls, the interconnection of one
system (or portion of system) with another, and internal tubing, wiring, and
other devices.
Provide Record Drawings with current factual information including
deviations from, and amendments to, the drawings and concealed or visible
changes in the work, for medium/high pressure ductwork systems.Label
drawings "As-Built".
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Galvanized steel ductwork sheet metal shall be carbon steel, of lock-forming
quality, hot-dip galvanized, with regular spangle-type zinc coating,
conforming to ASTM A 924/A 924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, Designation G90.
Treat duct surfaces to be painted by phosphatizing.
Conform to ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and
SMACNA 1966 for sheet metal gages and reinforcement thickness.
Low pressure ductwork minimum standards are as follows:
MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAGE
DUCT WIDTH
INCHES
GAGE
0 - 12 26
13 - 30 24
31 - 60 22
2.1.2 Brazing Materials
Brazing materials shall be silicon bronze conforming to AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
2.1.3 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Conform to ASTM A 36/A 36Mfor mill-rolled structural steel and, wherever in
contact with sheet metal ducting galvanize to commercial weight of zinc or
coated with materials conforming to ASTM A 123/A 123M SSPC A.
Equivalent strength, proprietary design, rolled-steel structural support
systems may be submitted for approval in lieu of mill-rolled structural
steel.
Section 23 31 13 Page 5

2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Shop fabricate fittings.
Manufacture as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded or brazed into
duct sections.
Submit for approval offset configurations.
Miter elbows shall be two-piece type for angles less than 31 degrees, threepiece
type for angles 31 through 60 degrees, and five-piece type for angles
61 through 90 degrees. Centerline radius of elbows shall be 1-1/2 times
fitting cross section diameter.
Crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90-degree tees shall be
conical type.
Cutouts in fitting body shall be equal to branch tap dimension or, where
smaller, excess material shall be flared and rolled into smooth radius
nozzle configuration.
2.2.2 Reinforcement
Support inner liners of both duct and fittings by metal spacers welded in
position to maintain spacing and concentricity.
2.2.3 Fittings
Make divided flow fittings as separate fittings, not tap collars into duct
sections, with the following construction requirements:
Sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and
tap
Tap liner securely welded to inner liner, with weld spacing not to
exceed 3 inches
Pack insulation around the branch tap area for complete cavity filling.
Carefully fit branch connection to cutout openings in inner liner
without spaces for air erosion of insulation and without sharp
projections that cause noise and airflow disturbance.
Continuously braze seams in the pressure shell of fittings. Protect
galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding with manufacturer's
standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Submit for approval offset configurations.
Elbows shall be two-piece type for angles through 35 degrees, three-piece
type for angles 36 through 71 degrees, and five-piece type for angles 72
through 90 degrees.
Section 23 31 13 Page 6

Crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90-degree tees shall be
conical type.
2.2.4 Turning Vanes
Turning vanes shall be double-wall type, commercially manufactured for highvelocity
system service.
2.2.5 Dampers
Low pressure drop, high-velocity manual volume dampers, and high-velocity
fire dampers shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK,
Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
2.2.6 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Connectors shall be UL listed, 30-ounce per square foot, waterproof, fireretardant,
airtight, woven fibrous-glass cloth, double coated with
chloroprene. Clear width, not including clamping section, shall be 6 to 8
inches.
2.2.7 Duct Hangers
Duct hangers in contact with galvanized duct surfaces shall be galvanized
steel painted with inorganic zinc.
2.2.8 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Mill-rolled structural steel shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M and, whenever
in contact with sheet metal ducting, shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Equivalent strength, proprietary-design, rolled-steel structural support
systems may be submitted for approval in lieu of mill-rolled structural
steel.
2.2.9 Flexible Duct Materials
Flexible duct connectors shall be in accordance with UL 181, Class 1
material and shall comply with NFPA 90A.
Metal duct shall be bendable through 180 degrees without damage, with an
inside bend radius not greater than one-half the diameter of duct. Metal
shall be carbon steel zinc-coated ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Wire-reinforced cloth duct shall consist of a vinyl-impregnated and coated
fibrous-glass cloth bonded to and supported by a corrosion-protected spring
steel helix. Fabric may be a laminate of metallic film and fibrous glass.
Working pressure rating of ducting shall be not less than three times
maximum system pressure, and temperature range shall be minus 20 to plus 175
degrees F.
Wire-reinforced fibrous-glass duct shall consist of a minimum1 1 pound/cubic
foot density fibrous glass bonded to and supported by corrosion-protected
spring helix. Vapor barrier shall be a 4 mil minimum, pigmented
Section 23 31 13 Page 7

polyvinylchloride film. Duct shall be bendable without damage through 180
degrees with an inside bend radius not greater than two duct diameters.
Minimum wall thickness shall be 1 inch. Thermal conductivity shall be not
greater than 0.23 Btu per hour per square foot per degrees F at 75 degrees
F mean. Permeance shall be not greater than 0.10 perm . Working pressure
range shall be from minus 1/2 inch wg to plus 1-1/2 inches wg. Working
temperature shall range from minus 20 to plus 250 degrees F. Minimum
sustained velocity without delamination shall be 2,400 fpm. Materials shall
conform to NFPA 90A.
2.2.10 Manual Volume Dampers
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for volume damper construction.
Equip dampers with an indicating quadrant regulator with a locking feature
externally located and easily accessible for adjustment and standoff
brackets to allow mounting outside external insulation. Where damper rod
lengths exceed 30 inches , provide a regulator at each end of damper shaft.
All damper shafts shall have two-end bearings.
Splitter damper shall be 2 gages heavier than duct in which installed.
Hinges shall be full length piano-type .
Damper shaft shall be full length and shall extend beyond damper blade. A
3/8 inch square shaft shall be used for damper lengths up to 20 inches and a
1/2 inch square shaft shall be used for damper lengths 20 inches and larger.
Where necessary to prevent damper vibration or slippage, adjustable support
rods with locking provisions external to duct shall be provided at damper
blade end.
Dampers in ducts having a width perpendicular to the axis of the damper that
is greater than 12 inches shall be multiblade type having a substantial
frame with blades fabricated of 16-gage metal. Blades shall not exceed 10
inches in width and 48 inches in length and shall be pinned to 1/2 inch
diameter shafts. Dampers greater than 48 inches in width shall be made in
two or more sections with intermediate mullions, each section being
mechanically interlocked with the adjoining section or sections. Blades
shall have oil-impregnated sintered bronze bearings and shall be connected
so that adjoining blades rotate in opposite directions.
2.2.11 Gravity Backdraft And Relief Dampers
Frame shall be constructed of not less than 1-1/2- by 4 inch reinforced 16-
gage galvanized carbon steel. Frames and mullions shall be solidly secured
in place and sealed with elastomer calking against air bypass.
Maximum blade width shall be 9 inches , and maximum blade length shall be 36
inches . Blade material shall be 16-gage galvanized steel . Blades shall
be provided with mechanically retained seals and 90-degree limit stops.
Dampers used for relief service shall have blades linked together to open
not less than 30 degrees on 0.05 inch wg differential pressure.
Shaft bearings shall be oil-impregnated bronze.
Section 23 31 13 Page 8

Counterbalanced dampers shall be equipped with fixed or adjustable
counterbalancing weights.
Gravity backdraft dampers in sizes 18 by 18 inches or smaller, when
furnished integral with air moving equipment, may be equipment
manufacturer's standard construction.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Provide sheet metal construction in accordance with the recommendations for
best practices in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, SMACNA 1966, NFPA 90A,
and ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32.
Where construction methods for certain items are not described in the
referenced standards or herein, perform the work in accordance with
recommendations for best practice defined in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK.
Clean free of oil, grease, and deleterious substances sheet metal surfaces
to be painted and surfaces to which adhesives are to be applied.
Duct strength shall be adequate to prevent failure under service pressure or
vacuum created by fast closure of duct devices. Provide leaktight,
automatic relief devices.
Supplementary steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC
360and AISC 325.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Within Listing of Product Installations for medium/high pressure ductwork
systems include identification of at least 5 units, similar to those
proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum period
of 5 years. Include purchaser, address of installation, service
organization, and date of installation.
Fabricate airtight and include reinforcements, bracing, supports, framing,
gasketing, sealing, and fastening to provide rigid construction and freedom
from vibration, airflow-induced motion and noise, and excessive deflection
at specified maximum system air pressure and velocity.
Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers by a
rigid sheet metal collar and sealed to building construction with elastomers
for complete air tightness.
Provide outside air-intake ducts and plenums made from sheet metal with
soldered watertight joints.
Provide offsets and transformations as required to avoid interference with
the building construction, piping, or equipment.
Wherever ducts pass through firewalls or through walls or floors dividing
conditioned spaces from unconditioned spaces, provide a flanged segment in
that surface during surface construction.
Section 23 31 13 Page 9

Clean free of oil, grease, and deleterious substances sheet metal surfaces
to be painted or surfaces to which adhesives will be applied.
Where interiors of ducting may be viewed through air diffusion devices,
construct the viewed interior with sheet metal and paint flat black.
Make plenum anchorage provisions, sheet metal joints, and other areas
airtight and watertight by calking mating galvanized steel and concrete
surfaces with a two-component elastomer.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ducts
Weld angle iron frames at corners and ends, whenever possible. Angle iron
reinforcements shall be riveted or welded to ducts not more than 6 inches on
center, with not less than two points of attachment. Spot welding, where
used, shall be 3 inches on center.
Standard seam joints shall be sealed with an elastomer compound to comply
with SMACNA 1966 Seal Class A, B or C as applicable.
Crossbreaking shall be limited to 4 feet and shall be provided on all ducts
8 inches wide and wider. Bead reinforcement shall be provided in lieu of
crossbreaking where panel popping may occur. Where rigid insulation will be
applied, crossbreaking is not required.
3.3.1.1 Longitudinal Duct Seams
Corner seams shall be Pittsburg lock .
3.3.1.2 Joints and Gaskets
Companion angle flanges shall be bolted together with 1/4 inch diameter
bolts and nuts spaced 6 inches on center. Flanged joints shall be gasketed
with chloroprene full-face gaskets 1/8 inch thick, with Shore A 40 durometer
hardness. Gaskets shall be one piece and vulcanized at joints.
3.3.1.3 Flexible Duct Joints
Joints between flexible duct without sheet metal collars and round metal
ductwork connections shall be made by trimming the ends, coating the inside
of the flexible duct for a distance equal to depth of insertion with
elastomer calk, and by securing with sheet metal screws or binding with a
strap clamp.
3.3.1.4 Square Elbows
Provide double-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.5 Radius Elbows
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for radius elbows. Provide an inside radius equal to
the width of the duct. Where installation conditions preclude use of
standard elbows, the inside radius may be reduced to a minimum of 0.25 times
Section 23 31 13 Page 10

duct width and install turning vanes in accordance with the following
schedule.
RADIUS OF TURNING
WIDTH OF ELBOWS VANES IN PERCENT OF DUCT WIDTH
INCHES VANE NO. 1 VANE NO. 2 VANE NO. 3
Up to 16 56 -- --
17 to 48 43 73 --
49 and over 37 55 83
Where two elbows are placed together in the same plane in ducts 30 inches
wide and larger, the guide vanes shall be continuous through both elbows
rather than spaced in accordance with above schedule.
3.3.1.6 Outlets, Inlets, And Duct Branches
Install branches, inlets, and outlets so that air turbulence will be reduced
to a minimum and air volume properly apportioned. Install adjustable
splitter dampers at all supply junctions to permit adjustment of the amount
of air entering the branch. Wherever an air-diffusion device is shown as
being installed on the side, top, or bottom of a duct, and whenever a branch
takeoff is not of the splitter type, a commercially manufactured 45 degree
side-take-off (STO) fitting with manual; provide volume damper to allow
adjustment of the air quantity and to provide an even flow of air across the
device or duct it services.
Where a duct branch is to handle more than 25 percent of the air handled by
the duct main, use a complete 90-degree increasing elbow with an inside
radius of 0.75 times branch duct width. Size of the leading end of the
increasing elbow within the main duct shall have the same ratio to the main
duct size as the ratio of the related air quantities handled.
Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by
the duct main, the branch connection shall have a 45 degree side take-off
entry in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.7 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, the angle of the side of the transition
piece shall not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected
thereto.
Where equipment is installed in ductwork, the angle of the side of the
transition piece from the straight run of duct connected thereto shall not
exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2 degrees
on the downstream side of the equipment.
3.3.1.8 Branch Connections
Construct radius tap-ins in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.9 Access Openings
Section 23 31 13 Page 11

Install access doors and panels in ductwork adjacent to fire dampers at
controls or at any item requiring periodic inspection, adjustment,
maintenance, or cleaning , and every 20 feet 6.1M for indoor air quality
housekeeping purposes.
Minimum size of access opening shall be 12 by 18 inches, unless precluded by
duct dimensions or otherwise indicated.
Construct access door in accordance with SMACNA 1966, except that sliding
doors may be used only for special conditions upon prior approval.
Insulated doors shall be double-panel type.
Access doors that leak shall be made airtight by adding or replacing hinges
and latches or by construction of new doors adequately reinforced, hinged,
and latched.
3.3.1.10 Plenum Construction
Intake and discharge plenum shall have companion angle joints with the
following minimum thickness of materials:
LONGEST SHEET
ANGLES METAL REINFORCEMENT
SIDE USS GAGE COMPANION ANGLES INCHES, 24 INCHES ON
INCHES ALL SIDES INCHES CENTER MAXIMUM
To 48 20 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
49 to 84 18 2 by 2 by 1/8 2 by 2 by 3/16
85 to 120 16 2 by 2 by 1/8 2 by 2 by 1/8
121 and larger 14 2 by 2 by 3/16 2 by 2 by 3/16
At the floor line and other points where plenums join masonry construction,
panels shall be bolted 12 inches on center to 2- by 2- by 3/16 inch thick
hot-dip galvanized steel angle that has been secured to the masonry with
masonry anchors and bolts 24 inches on center and calked tight to the
masonry.
Panels shall be anchored to curbing by not less than 2- by 2- by 3/16 inch
thick hot-dip galvanized steel angle iron. Concrete curbing shall include
angle iron nosing with welded studs for the anchoring of panels. Nosing
shall be level at curb height within plus or minus 1/16 inch .
Plenum access doors shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA
1966except that access doors smaller than man-access doors shall have door
openings framed with angle iron that is one commercial size smaller than
specified panel reinforcement.
Man-access door size shall be per SMACNA 1966 and paragraph entitled,
"Access Openings," of this section. Insulated and uninsulated construction
shall be per SMACNA 1966. Door openings shall be framed with channel iron.
Section 23 31 13 Page 12

Doors shall be framed with angle iron. Channel iron and angle iron shall be
approximately the same size as specified panel reinforcement. Exterior door
skin shall be 16 gage . Latches shall be fabricated steel, hinges shall be
at least 4 inches long, and bolting shall be at least 3/8 inch diameter.
Angle iron and channel iron shall have welded and ground miter corners.
3.3.1.11 Manual Volume Dampers
Balancing dampers of the splitter, butterfly, or multilouver type, shall be
provided to balance each respective main and branch duct.
Dampers regulated through ceilings shall have regulator concealed in box
mounted in the ceiling, with a cover finish aesthetically compatible with
ceiling surface. Where ceiling is of removable construction, regulators
shall be above ceiling, and location shall be marked on ceiling in a manner
acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.3.1.12 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Air handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan
inlets and outlets shall be connected to upstream and downstream components
by treated woven-cloth connectors.
Connectors shall be installed only after system fans are operative, and
vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted. When system fans are
operating, connectors shall be free of wrinkle caused by misalignment or fan
reaction. Width of surface shall be curvilinear.
3.3.2 Rectangular Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.2.1 Medium-Pressure Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Minimum sheet metal gages, joints, and reinforcements between joints shall
be in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Sheet metal minimum thickness, transverse reinforcement between joints, and
joints of ducts shall be in accordance with the following:
SHEET
LONGEST METAL REINFORCEMENT ANGLES
SIDE GAGE COMPANION ANGLE INCHES, 24 INCHES ON
INCHES ALL SIDES INCHES CENTER MAXIMUM
(BACK TO BACK)
______ _________ _______________ ____________________
97 to 108 16 2 by 2 by 1/8, Two 2 by 2 by 1/8,
two tie rods two tie rods along
along angle angle
109 to 132 16 2 by 2 by 3/16, Two 2 by 2 by 3/16,
two tie rods two tie rods along
along angle angle
Section 23 31 13 Page 13

133 and 14 2 by 2 by 3/16, Two 2 by 2 by 3/16,
longer with tie rods with tie rods every
every 48 inches 48 inches
3.3.2.2 Medium- And High-Pressure Branches, Inlets, Outlets
Install branches, inlets, and outlets to minimize air turbulence and to
ensure proper airflow.
Install dampers so that the amount of air entering duct mains can be
adjusted.
Provide commercially manufactured air extractors to allow adjustment of the
air quantity and to provide an even flow of air across the device or duct
served.
Where a duct branch is to handle over 25 percent of the air handled by the
duct main, a complete 90-degree increasing elbow shall be used, with an
inside radius of 0.75 times duct branch width. Size of the trailing end of
the increasing elbow within the main duct shall be in the same ratio to the
main duct size as the ratio of the relative air quantities handled.
Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by
the duct main, the branch connection shall have an inside radius of 0.75
times branch duct width, a minimum arc length of 45 degrees, and an outside
radius of 1.75 times duct branch width. Arc shall be tangent to duct main.
3.3.2.3 High-Pressure Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Sheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints
shall be in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
The following types of ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 transverse joints shall be used:
Welded flange joint with angle
Companion angle flanged joint
The following types of longitudinal seams shall be used:
Approved lock seams, back brazed, or continuously brazed seams for
ducts with largest dimension up to 72 inches
Continuously welded or brazed seams for ducts with largest dimension
greater than 72 inches
Sheet metal minimum thickness, transverse reinforcement between joints, and
companion angle joints of ducts with longest side greater than 96 inches
shall be in accordance with the following:
SHEET
LONGEST METAL REINFORCEMENT ANGLES
SIDE GAGE COMPANION ANGLE INCHES, 24 INCHES ON
INCHES ALL SIDES INCHES CENTER MAXIMUM
Section 23 31 13 Page 14

(BACK TO BACK)
______ _________ _______________ ____________________
97 to 108 16 2 by 2 by 1/8, *Two 2 by 2 by 1/8,
two tie rods two tie rods along
along angle angle
109 to 132 16 2 by 2 by 3/16, *Two 2 by 2 by 3/16,
two tie rods two tie rods along
along angle angle
133 and 14 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 *Two 2-1/2 by 2-1/2
longer by 3/16, with by 3/16, with tie
tie rods every rods every 24 inches
24 inches
3.3.3 Round Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.3.1 Duct Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Sheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints
shall be in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Longitudinal duct joint shall be manufactured by machine, with spiral
lockseams to and including 60 inch diameters, and to dimensional tolerances
compatible with fittings provided.
Ducts shall have supplemental girth angle supports, riveted with solid
rivets 6 inches on center to duct. Girth angles shall be located as
follows:
DIAMETER, INCHES
REINFORCEMENT-MAXIMUM SPACING, INCHES
25 to 36 1-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 thick, 72
inches on center
37 to 50 1-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 thick, 60
inches on center
51 to 60 1-1/2 by 1-1/2, 1/8 thick, 48
inches on center
Draw band girth joints are not acceptable.
Slip joints shall be made up by coating the male fitting with elastomer
sealing materials, exercising care to prevent mastic from entering fitting
bore, leaving only a thin annular mastic line exposed internally. Sheet
metal screws shall be used to make assembly rigid, not less than four screws
per joint, maximum spacing 6 inches. Pop rivets shall not be used. All
joints shall be taped and heat sealed.
Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex-shaped, 5/16 inch diameter for ducts up to
50 inch diameter, and 3/8 inch diameter for 51 inch diameter ducts and
larger.
Section 23 31 13 Page 15

Flanges shall be continuously welded to duct on outside of duct and
intermittently welded with 1 inch welds every 4 inches on inside joint face.
Excess filler metal shall be removed from inside face. Galvanized areas
that have been damaged by welding shall be protected with manufacturer's
standard corrosion-resistant coating.
3.3.3.2 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, the angle of the side of the transition
piece shall not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected
thereto.
Where equipment is installed in ductwork, the angle of the side of the
transition piece from the straight run of duct connected thereto shall not
exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2 degrees
on the downstream side of the equipment.
3.3.4 Transverse Reinforcement Joints
Transverse reinforcements shall be riveted with solid rivets to duct sides 6
inches on center . Transverse reinforcement shall be welded at all corners
to form continuous frames.
3.3.5 Joint Gaskets
Flanged joints shall be gasketed with chloroprene full-face gaskets 1/8 inch
thick, Shore A 40 durometer hardness. Gaskets shall be one piece,
vulcanized at joints.
3.3.6 Radius Elbows
Fabricate elbow proportions and radius elbows in accordance with ASHRAE
EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
3.3.7 Plenum Connections
Round duct connections shall be welded joint bellmouth type.
Rectangular duct connections shall be bellmouth type, constructed in
accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32
and SMACNA 1966.
3.3.8 Access Openings
Install access panels in ductwork adjacent to fire dampers.
Minimum size of access opening shall be 12 by 18 inches, unless precluded by
duct dimension.
Access openings shall be framed by welded and ground miter joint, 1/8 inch
thick strap steel , with 1/4 inch studs welded to frame. Cover plate shall
be not less than 16-gage, reinforced as necessary for larger sizes .
Section 23 31 13 Page 16

In lieu of access doors, readily accessible flanged duct sections may be
provided upon approval. Provide stable hanger supports for disconnected
duct termini.
3.3.9 Duct Supports
Install duct support in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16,
ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966. Duct hangers shall meet the
minimum size specified in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966. Provide two hangers where necessary to
eliminate sway. Support attachment to duct surfaces, shall be by solid
rivet 4 incheson center.
Round, double-wall duct supports shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
except that minimum hanger ring and strap size shall be 1-1/2 inches by 1/8
inch.
Selection of hanging system shall be at the Contractor's option, and shall
take into account the location and precedence of work under other sections,
interferences of various piping and electrical conduit, equipment, building
configuration, structural and safety factor requirements, vibration, and
imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditions. Support sizes,
configurations, and spacings are given to show the minimal type of
supporting components required. If installed loads are excessive for the
specified hanger spacing, hangers, and accessories heavier-duty components
shall be provided . After system startup, any duct support device which,
due to length, configuration, or size, vibrates or causes possible failure
of a member, shall be replaced or the condition shall otherwise be
alleviated. Special care shall be exercised to preclude cascade-type
failures.
Hanger rods, angles, and straps shall be attached to beam clamps. Concrete
inserts, masonry anchors, and fasteners shall be approved for the
application.
Hardened high-carbon spring-steel fasteners fitted onto beams and
miscellaneous structural steel are acceptable upon prior approval of each
proposed application and upon field demonstration of conformance to
specification requirements. Fasteners shall be made from steel conforming
to AISI Type 1055 , treated and finished in conformance with SAE AMS 2480,
Type Z (zinc phosphate base), Class 2 (supplementary treatment). A 72-hour
load-carrying capacity shall be verified by a certified independent
laboratory.
Hanger spacing shall provide a 20-to-1 safety factor for supported load.
Maximum load supported by any two fasteners shall be 100 pounds.
Friction rod assemblies are not acceptable.
Where support from metal deck systems is involved, support requirements
shall be coordinated with installation of metal deck.
Ductwork and equipment shall not be hung from roof deck, piping, or other
ducts or equipment. Maximum span between any two points shall be 10 feet,
Section 23 31 13 Page 17

with lesser spans as required by duct assemblies, interferences, and
permitted loads imposed.
There shall be not less than one set of hangers for each point of support.
Hangers shall be installed on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings,
and transitions.
Hangers shall be sufficiently cross braced to eliminate sway vertically and
laterally.
Rectangular ducts up to 36 inches shall be supported by strap-type hangers
attached at not less than three places to not less than two duct surfaces in
different planes.
Perforated strap hangers are not acceptable.
Rectangular ducting, 36 inches and larger, shall be supported by trapeze
hangers. Ducts situated in unconditioned areas and required to have
insulation with a vapor-sealed facing shall be supported on trapeze hangers.
Hangers shall be spaced far enough out from the side of the duct to permit
the duct insulation to be placed on the duct inside the trapeze. Duct
hangers shall not penetrate the vapor-sealed facing.
Where trapeze hangers are used, the bottom of the duct shall be supported on
angles sized as follows:
WIDTH OF DUCT, INCHES
MINIMUM BOTTOM ANGLE SIZE, INCHES
30 and smaller 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 1/8
31 to 48 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
49 to 72 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16
73 to 96 2 by 2 by 1/4
97 and wider 3 by 3 by 1/4
Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, excluding air-diffusion
devices and single-leaf dampers, such equipment shall be hung independently
of the ductwork by means of rods or angles of sizes adequate to support the
load.
Ducting, when supported from roof purlins, shall not be supported at points
greater than one-sixth of the purlin span from the roof truss. Load per
hanger shall not exceed 400 pounds when support is from a single purlin or
800 pounds when hanger load is applied halfway between purlins by means of
auxiliary support steel provided under this section. When support is not
halfway between purlins, the allowable hanger load shall be the product of
400 times the inverse ratio of the longest distance to purlin-to-purlin
spacing.
When the hanger load exceeds the above limits, provide reinforcing of
purlin(s) or additional support beam(s). When an additional beam is used,
the beam shall bear on the top chord of the roof trusses, and bearing shall
Section 23 31 13 Page 18

e over gusset plates of top chord. Beam shall be stabilized by connection
to roof purlin along bottom flange.
Purlins used for supporting fire-protection sprinkler mains, electrical
lighting fixtures, electrical power ducts, or cable trays shall be
considered fully loaded, and supplemental reinforcing or auxiliary support
steel shall be provided for these purlins.
3.3.10 Flexible Connectors For Steel Metal
Air-handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan
inlets and outlets shall be connected to upstream and downstream components
by treated woven-cloth connectors.
Install connectors only after system fans are operative and all vibration
isolation mountings have been adjusted. When system fans are operating,
connectors shall be free of wrinkles caused by misalignment or fan reaction.
Width of surface shall be curvilinear.
3.3.11 Insulation Protection Angles
Galvanized 20-gage sheet, formed into an angle with a 2 inch exposed long
leg with a 3/8 inch stiffening break at outer edge, and with a variable
concealed leg, depending upon insulation thickness, shall be provided.
Install angles over all insulation edges terminating by butting against a
wall, floor foundation, frame, and similar construction. Fasten angles in
place with blind rivets through the protection angle, insulation, and sheet
metal duct or plenum. Install angles after final insulation covering has
been applied.
3.3.12 Duct Probe Access
Provide holes with neat patches, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on
caps for air-balancing pitot tube access. Provide extended-neck fittings
where probe access area is insulated.
3.3.13 Openings In Roofs And Walls
Building openings are fixed and provide equipment to suit.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Fire Damper Tests
Perform Operational tests on each fire damper in the presence of the
Contracting Officer by enervating fusible link with localized heat. Provide
new links and install after successful testing.
3.4.2 Ductwork Leakage Tests
Contractor shall conduct complete leakage test of new ductwork in accordance
with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.Tests shall
be performed prior to installing ductwork insulation.
Section 23 31 13 Page 19

3.4.3 Inspection
3.5 DUCTWORK CLEANING PROVISIONS
Open ducting shall be protected from construction dust and debris in a
manner approved by the Contracting Officer. Dirty assembled ducting shall
be cleaned by subjecting all main and branch interior surfaces to airstreams
moving at velocities two times specified working velocities, at static
pressures within maximum ratings. This may be accomplished by: filterequipped
portable blowers which remain the Contractor's property; wheelmounted,
compressed-air operated perimeter lances which direct the
compressed air and which are pulled in the direction of normal airflow; and
other means approved by the Contracting Officer. Compressed air used for
cleaning ducting shall be water- and oil- free. After construction is
complete, and prior to acceptance of the work, construction dust and debris
shall be removed from exterior surfaces. SMACNA 1987.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Contractor shall submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30
calendar days prior to testing the medium/high pressure ductwork systems.
Data shall be updated and resubmitted for final approval no later than 30
calendar days prior to contract completion.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be consistent with manufacturer's
standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating
procedures and safety precautions.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 31 13 Page 20

SECTION 23 34 23
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
02/10
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide power roof ventilators complete with all components and accessory
equipment as specified in this section.
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
applies to work specified in this section.
Section 26 60 13.00 40 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTORS applies to this section.
Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including Equipment and Performance
Datafor power roof ventilator(s). As a minimum, include the following data:
a. Fan Type
b. Fan Specifications, including:
(1) Number of rotating fan blades/vanes
(2) Number of stationary fan blades/vanes
(3) Rotating Speed(s)
(4) Number of belts (if belt driven)
(5) Belt Lengths- measured at the pitch line (if belt driven)
c. Location of Installation
e. Date of Installation (Required or Actual Acceptance Date)
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 7-05
(2006; Errata 2007) Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
Section 23 34 23 Page 1

ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM B 209
ASTM B 37
(2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
for Use in Iron and Steel Manufacturer
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 705
(2004; Rev thru Oct 2009) Standard for Power
Ventilators
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
reviews the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Shop Drawings for power roof ventilator systems
Submit Installation Drawings for power roof ventilator systems
Submit Record Drawings for power roof ventilators in accordance
with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Equipment and Performance Data
Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Housing
Fan
Motor
Roof Curbs
Dampers
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests
Section 23 34 23 Page 2

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
applies to work specified in this section. Submit detailed Shop Drawings
for power rood ventilator systems, and detailed Record Drawings upon
completion of the installation..
Section 26 60 13.00 40 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTORS applies to this section.
Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including all Equipment and Performance
Data for power roof ventilator.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Rate and label ventilators in accordance with the applicable standards of
the Air Movement Control Association, and license to bear the AMCA seal for
both air and sound.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN AND FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
Provide roof ventilators that comply with UL 705 and are furnished complete
with bases, curbs, flashing flanges, noise baffles, dampers, damper
controls, louvers, and screens as indicated.
Provide ventilators that are designed for windloads in accordance with ASCE
7-05 with the installed design not less than 130 miles per hour windload.
Provide structural bracing that is properly spaced to accommodate this
loading and in accordance with the design requirements of the covering
material. Provide ventilators that are adequately reinforced and well
braced with joints properly formed. Provide edges that are wired or beaded
where necessary to ensure rigidity. Prevent galvanic action between
different metals in direct contact by nonconductive separators. Make all
soldering even and smooth.
Provide corrosion-resistant steel bolts, rivets, and other fastenings used
in connection with protected metal.
2.2 HOUSING STYLE(S)
Provide round mushroom style power roof ventilator as indicated.
2.3 FAN TYPE(S)
Provide fan of the following type(s):
2.3.1 Type C-PRV Centrifugal, Direct Drive
For Type C-PRV ventilator, provide a centrifugal roof ventilator with direct
drive, nonoverloading, backward-inclined wheel. Provide vibration isolated
drive with elastomer. Provide drive components that are mounted in a
compartment isolated from airstream.
2.3.2 Type CB-PRV Centrifugal, V-Belt Drive
Section 23 34 23 Page 3

For Type CB-PRV ventilator provide a centrifugal roof ventilator with V-belt
drive, nonoverloading, backward-inclined wheel. Provide vibration isolated
drive with elastomer. Provide drive components that are mounted in a
compartment isolated from airstream.
2.4 MATERIALS
Provide manufacturers' standard materials.
2.4.1 Aluminum Alloy
Provide aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 209 and ASTM B 37.
2.4.2 Zinc-Coated Steel
Provide zinc-coated steel in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.4.3 Fibrous Glass
Provide fibrous glass ventilators that are molded from a glass-fiber
reinforced polyester resin with a pigmented polyester resin gel coat in
manufacturer's standard color, and that are not less than .02 and .06 inch
thick. Provide matrix material that is not less than 30 percent, by weight,
of chopped-fiber and random-strand glass fibers, and that is thoroughly
saturated and impregnated with not more than 70 percent high-solids
polyester resin with not less than 5 percent antimony trioxide fireretardant
additive. Provide material that is smooth, dense, and uniform in
texture, color, and cross section and that is shatter-resistant, rigid, and
free from visual defects, foreign inclusions, cracks, crazing, die lines,
pinholes, striations, unsaturated and resin-poor areas, and excessive-resin
areas.
2.5 FAN MOTOR
For belt drive motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower, provide single-phase, 120
volts, 60 hertz with permanently lubricated ball bearings and provide splitphase
type.
For motors 1/2 horsepower and larger, provide three-phase , 460 volts, 60
hertz.
Provide motors with local disconnects to provide means for fan and motor
maintenance. Provide all motors with thermal overload protection. For
motors located in airstreams, provide totally enclosed type.
For direct drive motors 1/2 horsepower and smaller, provide the energy
efficient permanent split capacitor type, single phase, 60 hertz.
2.6 ROOF CURBS
Provide factory-formed metal ventilator curbs of the type and design
required for the ventilator and suitable for roof configuration and
flashing.
Section 23 34 23 Page 4

Provide job-built curbs that conform to the recommendations of the
ventilator manufacturer, sized correctly for the ventilator, and suitable
for type of supporting roof construction.
2.7 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS
Provide gravity operated back-draft dampers with adjustable counterweight of
the same material as fan housing.
2.8 SCREENS
Provide bird screens with frames of the same material as that used in the
ventilators and securely attach in a manner that permits easy removal for
access and cleaning.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install power roof ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. Properly coordinate installation of ventilators
with other work. Coordinate anchors, attachments, and other items to be
built, for installation as the work progresses. Rigidly install ventilators
in a weathertight and watertight manner free from vibration. Refer to
Section 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation considerations.
Submit Installation Drawings for power roof ventilator in accordance with
referenced standards in this section.
3.2 FINAL TEST REPORTS
Provide final test reports to the Contracting Officer. Provide reports with
a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the
words "Final Test Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition
Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance
Database."
-- End of Section --
Section 23 34 23 Page 5

SECTION 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS
08/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 113
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK
ASHRAE FUN IP
(2009) Method of Testing for Room Air
Diffusion (Repeatable Method of Testing
Steady - State Air Diffusion Performance in
Occupied Zones of Building Spaces)
(2004) Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment
(IP Edition)
(2009) Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to
work specified in this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Certify air diffusion devices s having been tested and rated in accordance
with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 17; ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 31, and ASHRAE
113, where such certification is required.
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for air-diffusion devices consisting
of sound data in terms of Noise Criteria (NC) index for the capacity range
of the device.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with this section.
Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists
Records of Existing Conditions
Section 23 37 13 Page 1

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Fabrication Drawings for air-diffusion devices in accordance
with this section.
Submit Installation Drawings for air-diffusion devices in
accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this
section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for air-diffusion devices in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "Performance Requirements," of
this section.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
Preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration on air-diffusion device construction
and mounting. Refer to Section 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation considerations. Modify
devices and provide accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface
construction.
Provide color as indicated on drawings.
Provide supply diffusers with combination damper and equalizing grid.
Ensure dampers are extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
Ensure air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments can be made from
the face of the device. Make volume adjustments by removable key .
Provide gaskets for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished
surfaces.
Include within the Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists the manufacturer's
style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers,
warranty information, and fabrication site information.
Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of
Contractor's survey of work area conditions and features of existing
structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite. Commencement
of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
Submit Fabrication Drawings for air-diffusion devices consisting of
fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory.
2.2 TYPES OF AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICES
Section 23 37 13 Page 2

2.2.1 Type DRC
Provide type DRC combination supply and return diffuser, round with four
expanding cones. Arrange cones to provide one return air path and two
supply air paths. Provide a butterfly supply-air damper and an annular
return-air damper. Provide a baked enamel finish
2.2.2 Type DRE
Provide type DRE supply diffuser, round with three expanding cones to
provide discharge air paths, minimally, two-position adjustable for
horizontal or vertical discharge.Provide a baked enamel finish
2.2.3 Type DSA
Provide type DSA supply diffuser, square with four expanding flared members
to provide radically diffused discharge air. Arrange flared members to
provide a minimum of four air paths which simultaneously diffuse air at 20
to 50 fpm. Include pattern adjustments horizontal, vertical projection, and
an intermediate position or range.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
Provide integral extended surface to fit into module of lay-in ceiling.
2.2.4 Type GS
Provide type GS supply grille double deflection type with adjustable face
bars parallel to short dimension and adjustable rear bars parallel to long
dimension.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.5 Type GR
Provide type GR return grilles, single deflection type with fixed face bars.
Provide grilles installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars set
downward at 35 degrees from vertical.
Provide grilles installed in horizontal surfaces with face bars straight and
parallel to short dimension.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Section 23 37 13 Page 3

Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.6 Type GCA
Provide type GCA with an individually adjustable, horizontal, curved-blade
grille and a one-way pattern.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.7 Type GCB
Provide type GCB with an individually adjustable, vertical, curved-blade
grille and a one-way pattern.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.8 Type GCD
Provide type GCD with an individually adjustable, vertical, curved-blade
grille and a two-way pattern.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.9 Type GCE
Provide type GCE with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal,
curved-blade grille and a three-way pattern.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.10 Type GCF
Provide type GCF with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal,
curved-blade grille and a four-way pattern.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.11 Type RS
Provide type RS supply register, double-deflection type, with adjustable
face bars parallel to short dimension and adjustable rear bars parallel to
long dimension with opposed-blade type dampers.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Section 23 37 13 Page 4

Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.12 Type RR
Provide type RR return register, single-deflection type with fixed face bars
with opposed-blade dampers.
Provide registers installed in vertical surfaces with have horizontal face
bars set downward at approximately 35 degrees from vertical.
Provide registers installed in horizontal surfaces with face bars set
straight and parallel to short dimension.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
2.2.13 Type RCA
Provide type RCA with an individually adjustable, horizontal, curved-blade
register and a one-way pattern with opposed-blade damper.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.14 Type RCB
Provide type RCB with individually adjustable, vertical, curved-blade
register and a one-way pattern with opposed blade damper.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.15 Type RCC
Provide type RCC with an individually adjustable, horizontal, curved-blade
register and a two-way pattern with opposed blade damper.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.16 Type RCD
Provide type RCD with an individually adjustable, vertical, curved-blade
register and a two-way pattern with opposed blade damper.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.17 Type RCE
Section 23 37 13 Page 5

Provide type RCE with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal,
curved-blade register and a three-way pattern with opposed-blade damper.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.18 Type RCF
Provide type RCF with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal,
curved-blade register and a four-way pattern with opposed-blade damper.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Submit installation Drawings for air-diffusion devices. Indicate on
drawings overall physical features, dimensions, ratings, service
requirements, and equipment weights.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 37 13 Page 6

SECTION 23 52 43.00 20
LOW PRESSURE WATER HEATING BOILERS (UNDER 800,000 BTU/HR OUTPUT)
07/06
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z83.3
(1971; R 1995) Gas Utilization Equipment in
Large Boilers
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME BPVC SEC IV
ASME CSD-1
(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code; Section IV, Recommended Rules
for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
(2009) Control and Safety Devices for
Automatically Fired Boilers
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM C 592
(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
(2008a) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)
(Industrial Type)
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)
CSA 4.9
(2004; Addenda A 2005; Addenda B 2007) Gas-
Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water
Boilers
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 211
(2010) Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid
Fuel-Burning Appliances
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 1

MIL-B-18897
(Rev F; CANC Notice 1) Boilers, Steam and Hot
Water, Watertube (Straight Bare and Finned
Tube), Cast Iron and Firebox, Packaged Type
(40,000 to 35,000,000 BTU/HR Thermal Output
Capacity)
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency
Labeling System
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS F-B-2910
(Basic) Burners, Single Oil, Gas, and Gas-Oil
Combination for Packaged Boilers (320,001 to
125,000,000 BTU/HR Thermal Output Capacity)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 795
(2006; Rev thru Dec 2009) Commercial-
Industrial Gas Heating Equipment
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to
this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Boiler shall be suitable for installation in the space shown with ample room
for opening doors and cleaning and removal and replacement of tubes.
Boiler shall have an output as indicated on the drawings with an
efficiency not less than that recommended by Energy Star. Boiler shall be
designed, tested, and installed in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV and ASME
CSD-1. Paint boiler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Boiler design working pressure shall be 30 psig . Boiler operating pressure
shall be 12 psig . Boiler operating temperature shall be 130 degrees F .
Boiler return water temperature shall be 110 degrees F . Provide a
thermostatically controlled three-way mixing valve on boiler suitable for
operating conditions of the boiler.
1.3.1 Detail Drawings
Submit fuel train and wiring diagram
1.3.2 Water Analysis
Provide test reports of water analysis.
1.4 SAFETY STANDARDS
Hot water boilers, burners and supplementary control devices, safety
interlocks, or limit controls required under this specification, shall meet
requirements of the following standards as applicable:
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 2

. Gas-Fired Units: ANSI Z83.3, CSA 4.9 or UL 795.
d. All Units: ASME BPVC SEC IV and ASME CSD-1.
Controls not covered by the above shall have a UL label, UL listing mark, or
shall be listed in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fuel train
Wiring diagram
SD-03 Product Data
See attached product data sheets.
SD-06 Test Reports
Operational tests
Water analysis
SD-07 Certificates
Boilers
Burners and control equipment
Boiler trim and control equipment
Boilers
Boiler trim and control equipment
Burners and control equipment
Boiler manufacturer's certificate of boiler performance including
evidence that the burners provided shall be a make, model, and type
certified and approved by the manufacturer of the boiler being
provided.
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 3

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Boilers
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Boilers, Data Package 4
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Posted operating instructions for heating water boilers
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 BOILERS
MIL-B-18897. Provide hot water heating boiler complete with firing
equipment, combustion chamber, insulation with steel jacket, safety and
operating controls, integral electrical wiring and other appurtenances, to
make the boiler a complete, self-contained, fully-automatic unit, ready for
service upon completion of utility connections. Boilers less than 300,000
Btuh shall have an Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE) of at least 87
percent. Gas fired boilers greater than 300,000 Btuh output shall have a
steady state combustion efficiency of at least 80 percent when fired at the
maximum and minimum capacities which are provided and allowed by the
controls.
2.2 BURNERS AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 Gas-Fired Power Burner
Gas-fired power burner (over 400,000 BTU/hr input). FS F-B-2910.
Interrupted pilot type ignition system, and pilot shall be the electrodeignited
natural gas type. Design burner and combustion control equipment
for firing natural gas having a specific gravity of 0.6 and a heating value
of approximately 1000 BTU per cubic foot and be an integral part of the
boiler. Burner controls and safety equipment shall conform to applicable
requirements of FS F-B-2910. Mount controls; including operating switches,
indicating lights, gages, alarms, motor starters, fuses, and circuit
elements of control systems on a single control panel or cabinet designed
for separate mounting not on the burner in accordance with FS F-B-2910. The
combustion control system shall be the positioning type. Locate flame
scanner such that testing and cleaning of scanner can be accomplished
without disassembly of burner. Provide fuel train as indicated.
2.3 BOILER TRIM AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Provide in accordance with MIL-B-18897 and additional requirements specified
below.
2.3.1 Emergency Disconnect Switch
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 4

Provide and locate on wall outside boiler room entrance or just inside door,
when boiler room door is on building exterior to allow rapid and complete
shutdown of the boiler in the event of an emergency. Switch shall be red
and furnished with a label indicating function of switch.
2.3.2 Relief Valves
Provide relieving capacity for the full output of boiler installed.
Relief-valve piping shall conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, schedule 40 steel pipe
and be piped full-size to a floor drain.
2.3.3 Pressure and Altitude Gage or Combination Pressure/Altitude Gage
MIL-B-18897. Provide one located on supply water piping and one on return
water piping.
2.3.4 Thermometer
Provide thermometer with a scale equivalent to 1.5 times outlet water
temperature. Provide one located on supply water piping and one on return
water piping.
2.3.5 Drain Tapping
Provide drain valve and piping to a floor drain.
2.3.6 Make-up Water Station
2.3.6.1 Pressure Reducing Station
Provide a water pressure-reducing valve and relief valve, or a combination
of the two in the makeup water line to the boiler to maintain a water
pressure of 12 psig in the hot water system. Provide a 3/4 inch globe valve
by-pass around this valve.
2.3.6.2 Backflow Preventers
Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS. Locate upstream of by-pass.
2.3.7 Combustion Regulator
Provide adjustable temperature, thermostatic immersion type that shall limit
boiler water temperature to a maximum of 250 degrees F. Control shall
actuate burner through an electric relay system to maintain boiler water
temperature within normal prescribed limits at loads within rated capacity
of boiler.
2.3.8 Air Vent Valve
Provide with screwed connection, stainless steel disk, and stainless steel
seats to vent entrapped air.
2.3.9 High Temperature Limit Switch
Provide immersible aquastat type with a temperature setting above that of
the combustion regulator and below that of the lowest relief valve setting.
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 5

Aquastat shall function to cause a safety shutdown by closing fuel valves
and shutting down burner equipment , activating a red indicating light, and
sounding an alarm in the event that boiler water temperature rises to the
high temperature limit setting. A safety shutdown due to high temperature
shall require manual reset before operation can resume and prevent recycling
of burner equipment.
2.3.10 Low Water Pressure Control
Provide mercury switch type. Control shall have a main scale, adjusting
screws at the top of the case, and have an internal or external bellows.
Control shall be the type which will open an electric circuit on a drop in
pressure below a set minimum. Control shall be set and installed to cause a
safety shutdown by closing fuel valves and shutting down burner equipment ,
activating a red indicating light, and sounding an alarm in the event that
water pressure in the system drops below 12 psig . A safety shutdown due to
low water pressure shall require manual reset before operation can resume
and prevent recycling of burner equipment.
2.3.11 Low Water Level Cutoff Switch
Provide float actuated type. Low water level cutoff shall cause a safety
shutdown by closing fuel valves, shutting down burner equipment , activating
a red indicating light, and sounding an alarm in the event that water level
drops below the lowest safe permissible water level established by the
boiler manufacturer and ASME BPVC SEC IV. A safety shutdown due to low
water shall require manual reset before operation can resume and prevent
recycling of burner equipment.
2.3.12 Boiler Safety Control Circuits
Provide boiler safety control circuits, including control circuits for
burner , shall be single-phase, two-wire one-side grounded, and not over 120
volts. Provide safety control switching in ungrounded conductors. Provide
overcurrent protection. In addition to circuit grounds, ground metal parts
which do not carry current to a grounding conductor.
2.3.13 Indicating Lights
Provide indicating lights as follows. Each safety interlock requiring a
manual reset shall have an individually-labeled indicating light. Nonrecycling
controls/interlocks shall have the reset located on
control/interlock itself. Indicating lights shall have colors as follows in
lieu of those required by FS F-B-2910:
a. Amber: Ignition on
b. Green: Main fuel safety shut-off valves open
c. Red (One for Each): Safety lockout, flame failure, low water
pressure, low water level, and high temperature
2.3.14 Alarm Bell
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 6

Provide alarm bell not less than 4 inches in diameter, electrically
operated, with a manual disconnect switch. Disconnect switch shall be type
and wired so that switching off alarm following a safety shutdown will not
prevent alarm from sounding again upon recurrence of a subsequent safety
shutdown condition.
2.3.15 Post-Combustion Purge
Provide controls and wiring necessary to ensure operation of draft fan for a
period of not less than 15 seconds or of sufficient duration to provide four
complete air changes in the boiler combustion chamber (whichever is greater)
following shutdown of burner upon satisfaction of heat demand. Upon
completion of post-combustion purge period, draft fan shall automatically
shutdown until next restart.
2.3.16 Draft
Comply with boiler manufacturer's recommendations.
2.3.17 Stack, Breeching, and Supports
Provide boiler stack constructed of sheet steel having a thickness of not
less than 0.0972 inches with welded joints. Insulate stack located inside
the building with 1 1/2 inches of mineral wool conforming to applicable
requirements of ASTM C 592, Class II - for use up to 1200 degrees F.
Insulation shall receive a finish coat of finishing cement not less than 3/4
inch thick, trowelled to a smooth finish. Provide stack supports, umbrella
collar and cap, and flue transition piece. Stack diameter and height shall
be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and conform to NFPA
211.
NFPA 211, Type B - gas , prefabricated multi-wall type, flashed to the roof,
and complete with rain cap. Stack diameter and height shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and conform to NFPA 211.
2.4 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Electric motors shall meet requirements of NEMA MG 1. Motors less than 1 hp
shall meet NEMA High Efficiency requirements. Motors 1 hp and larger shall
meet NEMA Premium Efficiency requirements. Motors which are an integral
part of the packaged boiler system shall be the highest efficiency available
by the manufacturer of the packaged boiler. Motors shall be variable speed.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions. Grout equipment mounted on concrete foundations before
installing piping. Install piping in such a manner as not to place a strain
on equipment. Do not bolt flanged joints tight unless they match. Grade,
anchor, guide, and support piping without low pockets. Feedwater treatment
feeders shall be mounted so that the top of the feeder is no higher than 48
inches above the finished floor.
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 7

3.2 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
Locate equipment foundations as indicated, designed, and made of sufficient
size and weight to preclude shifting of equipment under operating conditions
or under abnormal conditions that could be imposed upon the equipment.
Foundations shall meet requirements of the equipment manufacturer.
3.3 BOILER CLEANING
Before being placed in service, boiler shall be boiled out for a period of
24 hours at a pressure not exceeding 12 psig. Solution to be used in the
boiler for the boiling out process shall consist of two pounds of trisodium
phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Upon completion of boiling out, flush
out boiler with potable water, drain, and charge with chemically treated
water. Protect boiler and appurtenances against internal corrosion until
testing is completed and boiler is accepted. Professional services are
required for cleaning/treatment process.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform and furnish everything required for inspections and tests as
specified herein to demonstrate that boiler and auxiliary equipment, as
installed, are in compliance with contract requirements. Start-up and
operate the system. During this time, clean strainers until no further
accumulation of foreign material occurs. Exercise care to minimize loss of
water when strainers are cleaned. Adjust safety and automatic control
instruments as necessary to place them in proper operation and sequence.
Test instrumentation shall be calibrated and have full scale readings from
1.5 to 2 times test values.
3.4.1 Operational Tests
Operate each boiler and appurtenances prior to final testing and insure that
necessary adjustments have been made. Provide testing equipment required to
perform tests. During this testing period, provide operating instructions
and training to persons tasked with operation of the boiler. Tests shall be
accomplished with both fuels on dual fuel units and include the following:
3.4.1.1 Preliminary Operational Test
Operate the boilers continuously for a period of at least 8 hours to
demonstrate proper operability of the combustion control, flame safeguard
control, and safety interlocks.
3.4.1.2 Acceptance Operational Test and Inspection
Conduct a preliminary operational test prior to requesting an acceptance
operational test and inspection by a Division, Naval Facilities Engineering
Command Boiler inspector. The Contracting Officer, upon receipt of the
notice from the Contractor, shall request the boiler be inspected by
Division Naval Facilities Engineering Command. Fifteen days advance notice
is required for scheduling inspector to conduct acceptance operational test
and inspection.
3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 8

Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Close and seal
tightly all partly used adhesives and solvents; store protected in a wellventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 52 43.00 20 Page 9

SECTION 23 64 10
WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE
08/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 550/590
AHRI 575
(2003) Standard for Water-Chilling Packages
Using the Vapor Compression Cycle
(2008) Method of Measuring Machinery Sound
Within an Equipment Space
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2007; Std 15 Errata 2007, 2009, & Addenda a-
e; Std 34 Errata 2007, 2008, Addenda a-y, aaae)
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard
for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 34-Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS Z49.1
(2005) Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied
Processes
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 117
ASTM D 520
ASTM E 84
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus
(2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment
(2009c) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 11
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Section 23 64 10 Page 1

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Water Chiller; G
Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least highlighted to
show material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc.
in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract
requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's recommended
installation instructions and procedures. Data shall be adequate
to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements as specified
within the paragraphs:
a. Water Chiller
b. Chiller Components
c. Accessories
If vibration isolation is specified for a unit, vibration isolator
literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and
certification that the isolation characteristics of the isolators
provided meet the manufacturer's recommendations.
Posted Instructions
Posted instructions, including equipment layout, wiring and
control diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences, and typed
condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation
instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation, and
procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The posted
instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic and
be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer.
Verification of Dimensions
A letter including the date the site was visited, conformation of
existing conditions, and any discrepancies found.
Manufacturer's Multi-Year Compressor Warranty
Manufacturer's multi-year warranty for compressor(s) in aircooled
water chillers as specified.
Factory Tests
Schedules which identify the date, time, and location for each
test. Schedules shall be submitted for both the Chiller
Performance Test and the Chiller Sound Test.
Section 23 64 10 Page 2

System Performance Tests
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related
testing, for the system performance tests. The schedules shall
identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test.
Demonstrations
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed
training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for
the training.
Water Chiller - field acceptance test plan
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Acceptance Testing
Water Chiller - field acceptance test report
Factory Tests
Six copies of the report shall be provided in bound 8 1/2 x 11
inch booklets. Reports shall certify the compliance with
performance requirements and follow the format of the required
testing standard for both the Chiller Performance Tests and the
Chiller Sound Tests. Test report shall include certified
calibration report of all test instrumentation. Calibration report
shall include certification that all test instrumentation has been
calibrated within 6 months prior to the test date, identification
of all instrumentation, and certification that all instrumentation
complies with requirements of the test standard. Test report shall
be submitted 1 week after completion of the factory test.
System Performance Tests
Six copies of the report shall be provided in bound 8 1/2 x 11
inch booklets.
SD-07 Certificates
Refrigeration System; G
Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to
comply with requirements of AGA, NFPA, ARI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, 1
copy of proof of such compliance shall be provided. The label or
listing of the specified agency shall be acceptable evidence. In
lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an
approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to
perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and
conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified
agency may be submitted. When performance requirements of this
project's drawings and specifications vary from standard ARI rating
conditions, computer printouts, catalog, or other application data
certified by ARI or a nationally recognized laboratory as described
above shall be included. If ARI does not have a current
Section 23 64 10 Page 3

certification program that encompasses such application data, the
manufacturer may self certify that his application data complies
with project performance requirements in accordance with the
specified test standards.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Water Chiller - Installation Instruction; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11
inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and
normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training
course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, and a brief
description of all equipment and their basic operating features.
Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11 inch
booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals
shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring
and control diagrams of the system as installed.
1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts
which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to
operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted
with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting
safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and
care of all material both before and during installation shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and
similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Verification of Dimensions
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify
all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.6 WARRANTY
Section 23 64 10 Page 4

In addition to the warranty requirements specification in Division 00,
Contract Requirements, the following major components of the chiller shall
be covered by a warranty of a duration period of five years: compressor,
and .
1.7 MANUFACTURER'S MULTI-YEAR COMPRESSOR WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a 5 year parts and labor (includes refrigerant)
manufacturer's warranty on the chiller compressor(s). This warranty shall
be directly from the chiller manufacturer to the Government and shall be in
addition to the standard one-year warranty of construction. The
manufacturer's warranty shall provide for the repair or replacement of the
chiller compressor(s) that become inoperative as a result of defects in
material or workmanship within 5 years after the date of final acceptance.
When the manufacturer determines that a compressor requires replacement, the
manufacturer shall furnish new compressor(s) at no additional cost to the
Government. Upon notification that a chiller compressor has failed under
the terms of the warranty, the manufacturer shall respond in no more than 6
hours. Response shall mean having a manufacturer-qualified technician
onsite to evaluate the extent of the needed repairs. The warranty period
shall begin on the same date as final acceptance and shall continue for the
full product warranty period.
1.7.1 Indexed Notebook
The Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed
notebook containing a complete listing of all water chillers covered by a
manufacturer's multi-year warranty. The chiller list shall state the
duration of the warranty thereof, start date of the warranty, ending date of
the warranty, location of the warranted equipment, and the point of contact
for fulfillment of the warranty. This information shall be provided for each
chiller and the recorded chiller serial numbers shall identify each chiller.
Point of contact shall include the name of the service representative along
with the day, night, weekend, and holiday phone numbers for a service call.
The completed bound and indexed notebook shall be delivered to the
Contracting Office prior to final acceptance of the facility. The Contractor
shall furnish with each manufacturer's multi-year warranty the name, address,
and telephone number (day, night, weekend, and holiday) of the service
representative nearest to the location where the equipment is installed.
Upon a request for service under the multi-year warranty, the service
representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period, and shall
provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty.
1.7.2 Equipment Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, each item of manufacturer's multi-year
warranted equipment shall be tagged with a durable, oil- and water-resistant
tag, suitable for interior and exterior locations, resistant to solvents,
abrasion, and fading due to sunlight. The tag shall be attached with copper
wire or a permanent, pressure-sensitive, adhesive backing. The tag shall be
installed in an easily noticed location attached to the warranted equipment.
The tag for this equipment shall be similar to the following in format, and
shall contain all of the listed information:
MANUFACTURER'S MULTI-YEAR WARRANTY EQUIPMENT TAG
Equipment/Product Covered: ____________________
Section 23 64 10 Page 5

Manufacturer:_______Model No.:_____Serial No.:__
Warranty Period: From _________to _____________
Contract No.: _________________________________
Warranty Contact: _____________________________
Name: _________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________
Telephone: ____________________________________
STATION PERSONNEL SHALL PERFORM PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment shall be standard Commercial cataloged products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which
are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
These products shall have a two year record of satisfactory field service
prior to bid opening. the two year record of service shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size.
Products having less than a two year record of satisfactory field service
shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field service for
not less than 6000 hours can be shown. The 6000 hour service record shall
not include any manufacturer's prototype or factory testing.
Satisfactory field service shall have been completed by a product that has
been, and presently is being sold or offered for sale on the commercial
market through the following copyrighted means: advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD NAMEPLATES
Major equipment including chillers, compressors, compressor drivers,
condensers, water coolers, receivers, refrigerant leak detectors, heat
exchanges, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured
to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible throughout
equipment life. Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with
nonferrous screws or bolts.
Nameplates are required on major components if the manufacturer needs to
provide specific engineering and manufacturing information pertaining to the
particular component. Should replacement of this component be required,
nameplate information will insure correct operation of the unit after
replacement of this component.
2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and
controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers
indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical
equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20
00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and
protective or signal devices required for controls and devices
Section 23 64 10 Page 6

specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment,
the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required
monitors and timed restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractionalhorsepower
alternating-current motors, including motors that are part
of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.
c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction
motors, including motors that are part of a system, and that meet the
efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 11.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 11 and of sufficient size
to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be rated for continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow
for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered
interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of
accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of
the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting
period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload
protection and other necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings shall be
fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the
enclosure.
e. Provide inverter duty premium efficiency motors for use with
variable frequency drives.
2.4 SELF-CONTAINED WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE
Unless necessary for delivery purposes, units shall be assembled, leaktested,
charged (refrigerant and oil), and adjusted at the factory. In lieu
of delivery constraints, a chiller may be assembled, leak-tested, charged
(refrigerant and oil), and adjusted at the job site by a factory
representative. Unit components delivered separately shall be sealed and
charged with a nitrogen holding charge. Parts weighing 50 pounds or more
which must be removed for inspection, cleaning, or repair, such as motors,
gear boxes, cylinder heads, casing tops, condenser, and cooler heads, shall
have lifting eyes or lugs. Chiller shall be provided with a single point
wiring connection for incoming power supply. Chiller's condenser and water
cooler shall be provided with standard water boxes with grooved mechanical,
flanged, or welded connections.
2.4.1 Scroll, Reciprocating, or Rotary Screw Type
Chiller shall be rated in accordance with AHRI 550/590. Chiller shall
conform to ASHRAE 15 & 34. As a minimum, chiller shall include the
following components as defined in paragraph CHILLER COMPONENTS.
a. Refrigerant and oil
b. Structural base
c. Chiller refrigerant circuit
Section 23 64 10 Page 7

d. Controls package
e. Scroll, reciprocating, or rotary screw compressor
f. Compressor driver, electric motor
g. Compressor driver connection
h. Water cooler (evaporator)
i. Air-cooled condenser coil
2.5 CHILLER COMPONENTS
2.5.1 Refrigerant and Oil
Refrigerants shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall
have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with
ASHRAE 15 & 34. Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP)
of 0.055 or less. The ODP shall be in accordance with the "Montreal
Protocol On Substances That Deplete The Ozone Layer," September 1987, as
amended through 2000, sponsored by the United Nations Environment Programme.
2.5.2 Structural Base
Chiller and individual chiller components shall be provided with a factorymounted
structural steel base (welded or bolted) or support legs. Chiller
and individual chiller components shall be isolated from the building
structure by means of molded neoprene isolation pads.
2.5.3 Chiller Refrigerant Circuit
Chiller refrigerant circuit shall be completely piped and factory leak
tested. For multicompressor units, not less than 2 independent refrigerant
circuits shall be provided. Circuit shall include as a minimum a
combination filter and drier, combination sight glass and moisture
indicator, liquid-line solenoid valve for reciprocating, an electronic or
thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer, charging ports,
compressor service valves for field-serviceable compressors, and superheat
adjustment.
2.5.4 Controls Package
Chiller shall be provided with a complete factory-mounted , prewired
electric or microprocessor based operating and safety control system.
Controls package shall contain as a minimum a digital display or acceptable
gauges, an on-auto-off switch, motor starters, disconnect switches, power
wiring, and control wiring. Controls package shall provide operating
controls, monitoring capabilities, programmable setpoints, safety controls,
and EMCS interfaces as defined below.
Section 23 64 10 Page 8

2.5.4.1 Operating Controls
Chiller shall be provided with the following adjustable operating controls
as a minimum.
a. Leaving chilled water temperature control
b. Adjustable timer or automated controls to prevent a compressor from
short cycling
c. Automatic lead/lag controls (adjustable) for multi-compressor units
d. Load limiting
e. System capacity control to adjust the unit capacity in accordance
with the system load and the programmable setpoints. Controls
shall automatically re-cycle the chiller on power interruption.
f. Startup and head pressure controls to allow system operation at all
ambient temperatures down to 0 degrees F
2.5.4.2 Monitoring Capabilities
During normal operations, the control system shall be capable of monitoring
and displaying the following operating parameters. Access and operation of
display shall not require opening or removing any panels or doors.
a. Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures
b. Self diagnostic
c. Operation status
d. Operating hours
e. Number of starts
f. Compressor status (on or off)
g. Refrigerant discharge and suction pressures
h. Oil pressure
2.5.4.3 Programmable Setpoints
The control system shall be capable of being reprogrammed directly at the
unit. [No parameters shall be capable of being changed without first
entering a security access code.] The programmable setpoints shall include
the following as a minimum.
a. Leaving Chilled Water Temperature
Section 23 64 10 Page 9

2.5.4.4 Safety Controls with Manual Reset
Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which
automatically shutdown the chiller and which require manual reset.
a. Low chilled water temperature protection
b. High condenser refrigerant discharge pressure protection
c. Low evaporator pressure protection
d. Chilled water flow detection
e. High motor winding temperature protection
f. Low oil flow protection if applicable
g. Motor current overload and phase loss protection
2.5.4.5 Safety Controls with Automatic Reset
Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which
automatically shutdown the chiller and which provide automatic reset.
a. Over/under voltage protection
b. Chilled water flow interlock
c. Phase reversal protection
2.5.4.6 Remote Alarm
During the initiation of a safety shutdown, a chiller's control system shall
be capable of activating a remote alarm bell. In coordination with the
chiller, the Contractor shall provide an alarm circuit (including
transformer if applicable) and a minimum 4 inch diameter alarm bell. Alarm
circuit shall activate bell in the event of machine shutdown due to the
chiller's monitoring of safety controls. The alarm bell shall not sound for
a chiller that uses low-pressure cutout as an operating control.
2.5.4.7 Energy Management Control System (EMCS) Interface
The control system shall be capable of communicating all data to a remote
integrated DDC processor through a single shielded cable. The data shall
include as a minimum all system operating conditions, capacity controls, and
safety shutdown conditions. The control system shall also be capable of
receiving at a minimum the following operating commands.
a. Remote Unit Start/Stop
Section 23 64 10 Page 10

2.5.5 Compressor(s)
2.5.5.1 Reciprocating Compressor(s)
Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory
to minimize vibration. Compressors shall be capable of operating at
partial-load conditions without increased vibration over the normal
vibration at full load operation and shall be capable of continuous
operation down to the lowest step of unloading as specified. Compressors of
size 10 horsepower and above shall have an oil lubrication system of the
reversible, forced-feed type with oil strainer. Shaft seal in open-type
units shall be mechanical type. Piston speed for open-type compressors
shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation or 1200 fpm, whichever is
less. Compressors shall include:
a. Vertical, V, W, or radial cylinder design
b. Oil lubrication
c. Integrally cast block of close-grained iron or cast aluminum block
with hardened steel cylinder sleeves
d. Oil-level bull's eye
e. Cast cylinder heads
f. Cast-aluminum or forged-steel connecting rods
g. Cast iron or forged-steel crankshaft
h. Main bearings of the sleeve-insert type
i. Crankcase oil heaters controlled as recommended by the manufacturer
j. Suction and discharge refrigerant service valves that are flange
connected, wrench operated, with cap
k. A strainer on the suction side of the compressor
2.5.5.2 Scroll Compressor(s)
Compressors shall be of the hermetically sealed design. Compressors shall
be mounted on vibration isolators to minimize vibration and noise. Rotating
parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to
minimize vibration. Lubrication system shall be centrifugal pump type
equipped with a means for determining oil level and an oil charging valve.
Crankcase oil heater shall be provided if standard or if available as an
option. If provided, the crankcase oil heater shall be controlled as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2.5.6 Compressor Driver, Electric Motor
Motors, starters, wiring, etc. shall be in accordance with paragraph
ELECTRICAL WORK. Motor starter shall be unit mounted as indicated with
Section 23 64 10 Page 11

starter type, wiring, and accessories coordinated with the chiller
manufacturer.
2.5.7 Air-Cooled Condenser Coil
Condenser coil shall be of the extended-surface fin-and-tube type and shall
be constructed of seamless copper tubes with compatible aluminum fins. Fins
shall be soldered or mechanically bonded to the tubes and installed in a
metal casing. Coils shall be circuited and sized for a minimum of 5 degrees
F subcooling and full pumpdown capacity. Coil shall be factory leak and
pressure tested after assembly in accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34. Coil
shall be entirely coated with the manufacturer's standard epoxy or vinyl
coating.
2.6 FABRICATION
2.6.1 Factory Coating
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated
from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show
no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and no sign
of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch mark. Cut
edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet steel is used
shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D 520, Type I.
2.6.2 Factory Applied Insulation
Chiller shall be provided with factory installed insulation on surfaces
subject to sweating including the water cooler, suction line piping,
economizer, and cooling lines. Insulation on heads of coolers may be field
applied, however it shall be installed to provide easy removal and
replacement of heads without damage to the insulation. Where motors are the
gas-cooled type, factory installed insulation shall be provided on the coldgas
inlet connection to the motor per manufacturer's standard practice.
Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be firerated.
As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a
flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher
than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which
are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall
have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no
higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be
determined by ASTM E 84. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and
installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction.
Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a
composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame
spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.7 FACTORY TESTS
2.7.1 Chiller Performance Test
Section 23 64 10 Page 12

The Contractor and proposed chiller manufacturer shall be responsible for
performing the chiller factory test to validate the specified full load
capacity, full load EER, and IPLV in accordance with AHRI 550/590 except as
indicated. The Contractor and chiller manufacturer shall provide to the
Government a certified chiller factory test report in accordance with AHRI
550/590 to confirm that the chiller performs as specified. Tests shall be
conducted in an ARI certified test facility in conformance with AHRI 550/590
procedures and tolerances, except as indicated. At a minimum, chiller
capacity shall be validated to meet the scheduled requirements indicated on
the drawings. Tolerance or deviation shall be in strict accordance with
AHRI 550/590. Stable operation at minimum load of 10 percent of total
capacity shall be demonstrated during the factory test.
2.7.1.1 Temperature Adjustments
Temperature adjustments shall adhere to AHRI 550/590 to adjust from the
design fouling factor to the clean tube condition. Test temperature
adjustments shall be verified prior to testing by the manufacturer. There
shall be no exceptions to conducting the test with clean tubes with the
temperature adjustments per AHRI 550/590. The manufacturer shall clean the
tubes, if necessary, prior to testing to obtain a test fouling factor of
0.0000.
2.7.1.2 Test Instrumentation
The factory test instrumentation shall be per AHRI 550/590 and the
calibration shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
2.7.1.3 Test Report
A certified test report of all data shall be forwarded to the Government for
approval prior to project acceptance. Calibration curves and information
sheets for all instrumentation shall be provided.
2.7.1.4 Equipment Adjustments
If the equipment fails to perform within allowable tolerances, the
manufacturer shall be allowed to make necessary revisions to his equipment
and retest as required.
2.7.2 Chiller Sound Test
Chillers shall be sound tested at the factory prior to shipment to confirm
the sound pressure level specified herein. Tests and data shall be
conducted and measured in strict accordance with AHRI 575 at the full load
system operating conditions. The chiller sound pressure level, in decibels
(dB), with a reference pressure of 20 micropascals, shall not exceed 85 dB,
A weighted. Ratings shall be in accordance with AHRI 575. No reduction of
entering condenser water temperature or raising of leaving chilled water
temperature shall be allowed. A minimum of 75 percent of the sound data
points shall be taken along the length of the machine, and established as
the minimum percentage of total possible points used to determine sound
levels. In the event that the chiller does not meet the dBA sound pressure
level, the manufacturer shall, at his expense, provide sufficient
attenuation to the machine to meet the specified value. This attenuation
Section 23 64 10 Page 13

shall be applied in such a manner that it does not hinder the operation or
routine maintenance procedures of the chiller. The attenuation material,
adhesives, coatings, and other accessories shall have surface burning
characteristics as determined by ASTM E 84.
2.8 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.8.1 Chilled and Condenser Water Piping and Accessories
Chilled and condenser water piping and accessories shall be provided and
installed in accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND
CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS.
2.8.2 Refrigerant Piping
Refrigerant piping for split-system water chillers shall be provided and
installed in accordance with Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.
2.8.3 Cooling Tower
Cooling towers shall be provided and installed in accordance with Section 23
65 00 COOLING TOWER.
2.8.4 Temperature Controls
Chiller control packages shall be fully coordinated with and integrated into
the temperature control system specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY,
DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM and 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL
CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC .
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Installation of water chiller systems including materials, installation,
workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and
testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation
instructions, including the following:
1. Water chiller - installation instructions
3.1.1 Connections to Existing Systems
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to
the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before interrupting
service. Furnish materials required to make connections into existing
systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other
incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual
connections to existing systems.
3.1.2 Refrigeration System
3.1.2.1 Equipment
Section 23 64 10 Page 14

Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to ASHRAE
15 & 34. Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment,
appurtenances, and pipe as required, including frames or supports for
compressors, pumps, cooling towers, condensers, water coolers, and similar
items. Compressors shall be isolated from the building structure. If
mechanical vibration isolators are not provided, vibration absorbing
foundations shall be provided. Each foundation shall include isolation
units consisting of machine and floor or foundation fastenings, together
with intermediate isolation material. Other floor-mounted equipment shall
be set on not less than a 6 inch concrete pad doweled in place. Concrete
foundations for floor mounted pumps shall have a mass equivalent to three
times the weight of the components, pump, base plate, and motor to be
supported. In lieu of concrete pad foundation, concrete pedestal block with
isolators placed between the pedestal block and the floor may be provided.
Concrete pedestal block shall be of mass not less than three times the
combined pump, motor, and base weights. Isolators shall be selected and
sized based on load-bearing requirements and the lowest frequency of
vibration to be isolated. Isolators shall limit vibration to percent at
lowest equipment rpm. Lines connected to pumps mounted on pedestal blocks
shall be provided with flexible connectors. Foundation drawings, boltsetting
information, and foundation bolts shall be furnished prior to
concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to
have concrete foundations. Equipment shall be properly leveled, aligned,
and secured in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2.2 Field Refrigerant Charging
a. Initial Charge: Upon completion of all the refrigerant pipe tests,
the vacuum on the system shall be broken by adding the required
charge of dry refrigerant for which the system is designed, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor
shall provide the complete charge of refrigerant in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Upon satisfactory completion of
the system performance tests, any refrigerant that has been lost
from the system shall be replaced. After the system is fully
operational, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points
shall be installed and tightened.
b. Refrigerant Leakage: If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the
system has been charged, the leaking portion of the system shall
immediately be isolated from the remainder of the system and the
refrigerant shall be pumped into the system receiver or other
suitable container. The refrigerant shall not be discharged into
the atmosphere.
c. Contractor's Responsibility: The Contractor shall, at all times
during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system,
take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the
atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to,
procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the
atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove
refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or
reclaim. At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be
released to the atmosphere in any one occurrence. Any system leaks
within the first year shall be repaired in accordance with the
specified requirements including material, labor, and refrigerant
Section 23 64 10 Page 15

if the leak is the result of defective equipment, material, or
installation.
3.1.2.3 Oil Charging
Except for factory sealed units, two complete charges of lubricating oil for
each compressor crankcase shall be furnished. One charge shall be used
during the performance testing period, and upon the satisfactory completion
of the tests, the oil shall be drained and replaced with the second charge.
3.1.3 Field Applied Insulation
Field installed insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL
INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently herein.
3.1.4 Field Painting
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting
of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE
The services of a factory-trained representative shall be provided for days.
The representative shall advise on the following:
a. Hermetic machines:
(1) Testing hermetic water-chilling unit under pressure for
refrigerant leaks; evacuation and dehydration of machine to an
absolute pressure of not over 300 microns.
(2) Charging the machine with refrigerant.
(3) Starting the machine.
b. Open Machines:
(1) Erection, alignment, testing, and dehydrating.
(2) Charging the machine with refrigerant.
(3) Starting the machine.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint
spots removed. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are
operated during construction, and new filters shall be installed after all
construction dirt has been removed from the building. System shall be
maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall
be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the
manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control valves
and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to
setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed
indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. At least one
Section 23 64 10 Page 16

week before the official equipment warranty start date, all condenser coils
on air-cooled water chillers and split-system water chillers shall be
cleaned in accordance with the chiller manufacturer's instructions. This
work covers two coil cleanings. The condenser coils shall be cleaned with
an approved coil cleaner by a service technician, factory trained by the
chiller manufacturer. The condenser coil cleaner shall not have any
detrimental affect on the materials or protective coatings on the condenser
coils. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.
3.4 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTING
3.4.1 Test Plans
a. Manufacturer's Test Plans: Within 120 calendar days after contract
award, submit the following plans:
(1) Water chiller - field acceptance test plan
Field acceptance test plans shall be developed by the absorption
chiller manufacturer detailing recommended field test procedures
for that particular type and size of equipment. Field acceptance
test plans developed by the installing Contractor, or the equipment
sales agency furnishing the equipment, will not be acceptable.
The Contracting Officer will review and approve the field
acceptance test plan for each of the listed equipment prior to
commencement of field testing of the equipment. The approved field
acceptance tests of the absorption chiller and subsequent test
reporting.
b. Coordinated testing: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan
when work required by this section requires coordination with test
work required by other specification sections. Furnish test
procedures for the simultaneous or integrated testing of tower
system controls which interlock and interface with controls factory
prewired or external controls for the equipment provided under
Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL
BUILDING SYSTEMS .
d. Test procedure: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan each
equipment manufacturers published installation, start-up, and field
acceptance test procedures. Include in each test plan a detailed
step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls provided by
the manufacturer.
Each test plan shall include the required test reporting forms to
be completed by the Contractor's testing representatives.
Procedures shall be structured to test the controls through all
modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing with
the intended sequence of control.
Section 23 64 10 Page 17

Controller shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have the
proper set point to provide stable control of their respective
equipment.
e. Performance variables: Each test plan shall list performance
variables that are required to be measured or tested as part of the
field test.
Include in the listed variables performance requirements indicated
on the equipment schedules on the design drawings. Chiller
manufacturer shall furnish with each test procedure a description
of acceptable results that have been verified.
Chiller manufacturer shall identify the acceptable limits or
tolerance within which each tested performance variable shall
acceptably operate.
f. Job specific: Each test plan shall be job specific and shall
address the particular cooling towers and particular conditions
which exist in this contract. Generic or general preprinted test
procedures are not acceptable.
g. Specialized components: Each test plan shall include procedures
for field testing and field adjusting specialized components, such
as hot gas bypass control valves, or pressure valves.
3.4.2 Testing
a. Each water chiller system shall be field acceptance tested in
compliance with its approved field acceptance test plan and the
resulting following field acceptance test report submitted for
approval:
1. Water chiller - field acceptance test report
b. Manufacturer's recommended testing: Conduct the manufacturer's
recommended field testing in compliance with the approved test
plan. Furnish a factory trained field representative authorized by
and to represent the equipment manufacturer at the complete
execution of the field acceptance testing.
c. Operational test: Conduct a continuous 24 hour operational test
for each item of equipment. Equipment shutdown before the test
period is completed shall result in the test period being started
again and run for the required duration. For the duration of the
test period, compile an operational log of each item of equipment.
Log required entries every two hours. Use the test report forms
for logging the operational variables.
d. Notice of tests: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended tests and
the operational tests; record the required data using the approved
reporting forms. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at
least 15 calendar days prior to the testing. Within 30 calendar
days after acceptable completion of testing, submit each test
report for review and approval.
Section 23 64 10 Page 18

e. Report forms: Type data entries and writing on the test report
forms. Completed test report forms for each item of equipment
shall be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor's test
director. The manufacturer's field test representative shall
review, approve, and sign the report of the manufacturer's
recommended test. Signatures shall be accompanied by the person's
name typed.
f. Deficiency resolution: The test requirements acceptably met;
deficiencies identified during the tests shall be corrected in
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and corrections
retested in order to verify compliance.
3.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
3.5.1 General Requirements
Before each refrigeration system is accepted, tests to demonstrate the
general operating characteristics of all equipment shall be conducted by a
registered professional engineer or an approved manufacturer's start-up
representative experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times as
directed. Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each
system and shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. Corrections and
adjustments shall be made as necessary and tests shall be re-conducted to
demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as specified. Prior to
acceptance, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be
installed and tightened. Any refrigerant lost during the system startup
shall be replaced. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system
performance, deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be
retested. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by
the Government. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel
required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Field tests
shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING.
3.5.2 Test Report
The report shall document compliance with the specified performance criteria
upon completion and testing of the system. The report shall indicate the
number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy
of the system. The report shall also include the following information and
shall be taken at least three different times at outside dry-bulb
temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart:
a. Date and outside weather conditions.
b. The load on the system based on the following:
(1) The refrigerant used in the system.
(2) Condensing temperature and pressure.
(3) Suction temperature and pressure.
(4) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each
phase of all motors.
Section 23 64 10 Page 19

(5) The actual on-site setting of all operating and safety
controls.
(6) Chilled water pressure, flow and temperature in and out of
the chiller.
(7) The position of the capacity-reduction gear at machine off,
one-third loaded, one-half loaded, two-thirds loaded, and fully
loaded.
3.6 DEMONSTRATIONS
Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as
designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of
a total hours of normal working time and start after the system is
functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field
posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine
maintenance operations.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 64 10 Page 20

SECTION 23 64 26
CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
08/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1003
ASSE 1017
(2001; Errata, 2003) Performance Requirements
for Water Pressure Reducing Valves
(2003; Errata 2004) Temperature Actuated
Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution
Systems
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C606
(2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
AWS BRH
(2004; Errata 2004) Specification for Filler
Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
(2007) Brazing Handbook
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2008; Errata 2009) Structural Welding Code -
Steel
AWS Z49.1
(2005) Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied
Processes
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B1.20.1
ASME B16.1
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.18
(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose
(Inch)
(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
(2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
(2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings
Section 23 64 26 Page 1

ASME B16.21
ASME B16.22
ASME B16.26
ASME B16.3
ASME B16.39
ASME B16.9
ASME B31.9
ASME B40.100
(2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
(2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
(2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy
Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
(2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
(2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded
Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300
(2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
(2008) Building Services Piping
(2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 106/A 106M
ASTM A 183
ASTM A 47/A 47M
ASTM A 53/A 53M
ASTM A 536
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM A 733
ASTM B 117
(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service
(2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
(2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2003e1; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus
Section 23 64 26 Page 2

ASTM B 32
ASTM B 42
ASTM B 62
ASTM B 75
ASTM B 813
ASTM B 88
ASTM D 2000
ASTM D 3308
ASTM D 520
ASTM D 596
ASTM E 84
ASTM F 1007
ASTM F 1120
ASTM F 1199
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
(2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
(2009) Standard Specification for Composition
Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
(2002) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube
(2000; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
(2008) Standard Classification System for
Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
(2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape
(2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment
(2001; R 2006) Reporting Results of Analysis
of Water
(2009c) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
(1986; R 2007) Pipeline Expansion Joints of
the Packed Slip Type for Marine Application
(1987; R 2004) Standard Specification for
Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion
Joints for Piping Applications
(1988; R 2004) Cast (All Temperatures and
Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers
(150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)
CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)
CSA/AM Z21.22
CSA/ANSI Z21.22
(1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R
2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems
(1999; Addenda A 2000; Addenda B 2001; R
2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems
EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)
EJMA Stds
(2003) EJMA Standards
Section 23 64 26 Page 3

HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)
HI 1.1-1.2
(2000) Centrifugal Pump Nomenclature
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110
MSS SP-25
MSS SP-58
MSS SP-67
MSS SP-69
MSS SP-70
MSS SP-71
MSS SP-72
MSS SP-78
MSS SP-80
MSS SP-85
(1996) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
(2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,
Fittings, Flanges and Unions
(2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports
- Materials, Design and Manufacture
(2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly Valves
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application
(2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
(1999) Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged
or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
(2005a) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
(2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
Valves
(2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe & Angle
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 11
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
Section 23 64 26 Page 4

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide the water systems having the minimum service (design) temperaturepressure
rating indicated. Provision of the piping systems, including
materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection,
examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the
required and advisory provisions of ASME B31.9 except as modified or
supplemented by this specification section or design drawings. This
specification section covers the water systems piping which is located
within, on, and adjacent to building(s) within the building(s) 5 foot line.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Grooved Mechanical Connections For Steel; G
Grooved Mechanical Connections For Copper; G
Calibrated Balancing Valves; G
Automatic Flow Control Valves; G
Pump Discharge Valve
Water Temperature Mixing Valve; G
Water Temperature Regulating Valves; G
Water Pressure Reducing Valve
Pressure Relief Valve
Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves
Expansion Joints; G
Pumps; G
Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser
Expansion Tanks
Air Separator Tanks
Water Treatment Systems; G
Proposed water treatment plan including a layout, control scheme, a
list of existing make-up water conditions including the items
Section 23 64 26 Page 5

listed in paragraph "Water Analysis", a list of chemicals, the
proportion of chemicals to be added, the final treated water
conditions, and a description of environmental concerns for
handling the chemicals.
SD-06 Test Reports
Piping welds NDE report
Pressure tests reports; G
Report shall be provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. In
the reports, document all phases of the tests performed. Include
initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the final
test results.
SD-07 Certificates
Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)
Welding Procedures and Qualifications
Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing
conformance with the referenced standards contained in this
section.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Lesson plan for the Instruction Course; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment
specified, with operation and maintenance data packages. Include a
complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and
source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of
operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer
to be replaced on a routine basis.
Submit a list of qualified permanent service organizations with
operation and maintenance data packages. Include service
organization addresses and service area or expertise. The service
organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the
equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty
period of the contract.
Water Treatment Systems; G
Section 23 64 26 Page 6

An operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing
step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation,
abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown.
Include testing procedures used in determining water quality.
A maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing
routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs,
and a trouble shooting guide.
Calibrated Balancing Valves, Data Package 3; G
Automatic Flow Control Valves, Data Package 3; G
Pump Discharge Valve, Data Package 2; G
Water Temperature Mixing Valve, Data Package 3; G
Water Temperature Regulating Valves, Data Package 3; G
Water Pressure Reducing Valve, Data Package 3; G
Pressure Relief Valve, Data Package 2; G
Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves, Data Package 2;
G
Expansion Joints, Data Package 2; G
Pumps, Data Package 3; G
Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser, Data Package 2; G
Expansion Tanks, Data Package 2; G
Air Separator Tanks, Data Package 2; G
1.4 MODIFICATIONS TO REFERENCES
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted
for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these
publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
Section 23 64 26 Page 7

1.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of
Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements
are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included
in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of
Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in
the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by
the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and
the FAR.
1.5 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts
which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to
operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted
with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature variations,
dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all
material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's
responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the
Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings
to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. Any porous materials found to be
contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's
expense. Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew
will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Verification of Dimensions
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify
all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.7.2 Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate
all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor
shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical,
structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed
and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets,
fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
1.7.3 Accessibility
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
Section 23 64 26 Page 8

PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening.
The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under
similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's
catalogs, or brochures.
Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than
6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
2.2 STEEL PIPING
Water piping shall be steel pipe or copper tubing. Provide steel piping
with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the
pressure rating is 175 psig.
2.2.1 Pipe
Steel pipe, conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grades A
or B. Do not use Type F pipe.
2.2.2 Fittings and End Connections (Joints)
Piping and fittings 1 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections.
Piping and fittings larger than 1 inch and smaller than 3 inches shall have
either threaded, grooved, or welded connections. Piping and fittings 3
inches and larger shall have grooved, welded, or flanged connections. The
manufacturer of each fitting shall be permanently identified on the body of
the fitting in accordance with MSS SP-25.
2.2.2.1 Threaded Connections
Use threaded valves and pipe connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Used
threaded fitting conforming to ASME B16.3. Use threaded unions conforming
to ASME B16.39. Use threaded pipe nipples conforming to ASTM A 733.
2.2.2.2 Flanged Connections
Section 23 64 26 Page 9

Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 150. Gaskets shall be
nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. These gaskets shall
contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or nitrile
butadeine rubber (NBR). Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall conform to
ASME B16.1.
2.2.2.3 Welded Connections
Welded valves and pipe connections (both butt-welds and socket-welds types)
shall conform to ASME B31.9. Butt-welded fittings shall conform to ASME
B16.9. Socket-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.11. Welded
fittings shall be identified with the appropriate grade and marking symbol.
2.2.2.4 Grooved Mechanical Connections For Steel
Rigid grooved mechanical connections may only be used in serviceable
aboveground locations where the temperature of the circulating medium does
not exceed 230 degrees F. Flexible grooved connections shall be used only
as a flexible connector with grooved pipe system. Unless otherwise
specified, grooved piping components shall meet the corresponding criteria
specified for the similar welded, flanged, or threaded component specified
herein.
Each grooved mechanical joint shall be a system, including coupling housing,
gasket, fasteners, all furnished by the same manufacturer. Joint
installation shall be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written
instructions.
Use fitting and coupling houses of malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A
47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12; or
steel conforming ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B or ASTM A 53/A 53M. Use gaskets
of molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsive
configuration and conforming to ASTM D 2000 Grade No. 2CA615A15B44F17Z for
circulating medium up to 230 degrees F or Grade No. M3BA610A15B44Z for
circulating medium up to 200 degrees F. Grooved mechanical connections
shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts shall be steel and
shall conform to ASTM A 183. Pipe connections and fittings shall be the
product of the same manufacturer. Provide joint installation be in
compliance with joint manufacturer's written instructions.
2.2.2.5 Dielectric Waterways and Flanges
Provide dielectric waterways with a water impervious insulation barrier
capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of short circuit current
in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, insulation barrier shall be
able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test. Provide dielectric waterways
constructed of galvanized steel and have threaded end connections to match
connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be suitable for the required
operating pressures and temperatures. Provide dielectric flanges with the
same pressure ratings as standard flanges and provide complete electrical
isolation between connecting pipe and/or equipment as described herein for
dielectric waterways.
2.3 COPPER TUBING
Section 23 64 26 Page 10

Provide copper tubing and fittings with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service
rating, which for 150 degrees F., the pressure rating is 175 psig.
2.3.1 Tube
Use copper tube conforming to ASTM B 88, Type L or M for aboveground tubing,
and Type K for buried tubing.
2.3.2 Fittings and End Connections (Solder and Flared Joints)
Wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings, including unions
ands flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75. Provide adapters
as required. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings, including
unions and flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.18. Cast copper alloy
fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62.
ASTM B 42 copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections shall conform to
ASTM B 42.
Copper tubing of sizes larger than 4 inches shall have brazed joints.Brass
or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to
flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.
Extracted brazed tee joints may be used if produced with an acceptable tool
and installed in accordance with tool manufacturer's written procedures.
2.3.3 Grooved Mechanical Connections For Copper
Rigid grooved mechanical connections may only be used in serviceable
aboveground locations where the temperature of the circulating medium does
not exceed 230 degrees F. Flexible grooved connections shall be used only
as a flexible connector with grooved pipe system. Unless otherwise
specified, grooved piping components shall meet the corresponding criteria
specified for the similar welded, flanged, or threaded component specified
herein.
Each grooved mechanical joint shall be a system, including coupling housing,
gasket, fasteners, all furnished by the same manufacturer. Joint
installation shall be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written
instructions.
Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A 536. Provide gaskets for use in grooved joints shall
constructed of molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and
shall conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F.
Provide grooved joints in conformance with AWWA C606.
2.3.4 Solder
Provide solder in conformance with ASTM B 32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy.
Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM
B 813.
2.3.5 Brazing Filler Metal
Section 23 64 26 Page 11

Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3
flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper
joints.
2.4 VALVES
Provide valves with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150
degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.
Valves in sizes larger than 1 inch and used on steel pipe systems, may be
provided with rigid grooved mechanical joint ends. Such grooved end valves
shall be subject to the same requirements as rigid grooved mechanical joints
and fittings and, shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the grooved
pipe joint and fitting system.
2.4.1 Gate Valve
Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 Class 125
and shall be bronze with wedge disc, rising stem and threaded, soldered, or
flanged ends. Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-70,
Class 125, cast iron with bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, and flanged
or threaded ends.
2.4.2 Globe and Angle Valve
Globe and angle valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80,
Class 125. Globe and angle valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS
SP-85, Class 125.
2.4.3 Check Valve
Check valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80. Check
valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-71, Class 125.
2.4.4 Butterfly Valve
Butterfly valves shall conform to MSS SP-67, Type 1 and shall be either the
wafer or lug type. Valves smaller than 8 inches shall have throttling
handles with a minimum of seven locking positions. Valves 8 inches and
larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable
balance return stops and position indicators.
2.4.5 Plug Valve
Plug valves 2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-78, have flanged or
threaded ends, and have cast iron bodies with bronze trim. Valves 2 inches
and smaller shall be bronze with NPT connections for black steel pipe and
brazed connections for copper tubing. Valve shall be lubricated, nonlubricated,
or tetrafluoroethylene resin-coated type. Valve shall be
resilient, double seated, trunnion mounted with tapered lift plug capable of
2-way shutoff. Valve shall operate from fully open to fully closed by
rotation of the handwheel to lift and turn the plug. Valve shall a
weatherproof operators with mechanical position indicators. Valves 8 inches
or larger shall be provided with manual gear operators with position
indicators.
Section 23 64 26 Page 12

2.4.6 Ball Valve
Full port design. Ball valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-
72 or MSS SP-110 and shall be cast iron or bronze with threaded, soldered,
or flanged ends. Valves 8 inches or larger shall be provided with manual
gear operators with position indicators. Ball valves may be provided in
lieu of gate valves.
2.4.7 Square Head Cocks
Provide copper alloy or cast-iron body with copper alloy plugs, suitable for
125 psig water working pressure.
2.4.8 Calibrated Balancing Valves
Copper alloy or cast iron body, copper alloy or stainless internal working
parts. Provide valve calibrated so that flow can be determined when the
temperature and pressure differential across valve is known. Valve shall
have an integral pointer which registers the degree of valve opening. Valve
shall function as a service valve when in fully closed position. Valve
shall be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage and shall be
supplied with preformed insulation.
Provide valve bodies with tapped openings and pipe extensions with positive
shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation. The pipe extensions shall be
provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a portable differential
pressure meter connections to verify the pressure differential. Provide
metal tag on each valve showing the gallons per minute flow for each
differential pressure reading. In lieu of the balancing valve with integral
metering connections, a ball valve or plug valve with a separately installed
orifice plate or venturi tube may be used for balancing.
2.4.9 Automatic Flow Control Valves
Valve shall automatically maintain the constant flow indicated on the design
drawings. Valve shall modulate by sensing the pressure differential across
the valve body. Valve shall be selected for the flow required and provided
with a permanent nameplate or tag carrying a permanent record of the
factory-determined flow rate and flow control pressure levels. Provide
valve that controls the flow within 5 percent of the tag rating. Valve
materials shall be the same as specified for the ball or plug valves.
Provide valve that are electric type as indicated. Valve shall be capable
of positive shutoff against the system pump head, valve bodies shall be
provided with tapped openings and pipe extensions with shutoff valves
outside of pipe insulation. The pipe extensions shall be provided with
quick connecting hose fittings and differential meter, suitable for the
operating pressure specified. Provide the meter complete with hoses, vent,
integral metering connections, and carrying case as recommended by the valve
manufacturer.
2.4.10 Pump Discharge Valve
Valve shall shall perform the functions of a nonslam check valve, a manual
balancing valve, and a shutoff. Valve shall be of cast iron or ductile iron
construction with bronze and/or stainless steel accessories. Provide an
Section 23 64 26 Page 13

integral pointer on the valve which registers the degree of valve opening.
Flow through the valve shall be manually adjustable from bubble tight
shutoff to full flow. Valves smaller than 2 inches shall have NPT
connections. Valves 2 inches and larger shall have flanged or grooved end
connections. Valve design shall allow the back seat for the stem to be
replaced in the field under full line pressure.
2.4.11 Water Temperature Mixing Valve
Valve, ASSE 1017 for water service.
2.4.12 Water Temperature Regulating Valves
Provide copper alloy body, direct acting, pilot operated, for the intended
service.
2.4.13 Water Pressure Reducing Valve
Valve, ASSE 1003 for water service, copper alloy body, automatic re-seating,
with test lever.
2.4.14 Pressure Relief Valve
Valve shall prevent excessive pressure in the piping system when the piping
system reaches its maximum heat buildup. Valve, CSA/AM Z21.22 and shall
have cast iron bodies with corrosion resistant internal working parts. The
discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.15 Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves
CSA/AM Z21.22, copper alloy body, automatic re-seating, test lever, and
discharge capacity based on AGA temperature steam rating.
2.4.16 Drain Valves
Valves, MSS SP-80 gate valves. Valve shall be manually-operated, 3/4 inch
pipe size and above with a threaded end connection. Provide valve with a
water hose nipple adapter. Freeze-proof type valves shall be provided in
installations exposed to freezing temperatures.
2.4.17 Air Venting Valves
Manually-operated general service type air venting valves, brass or bronze
valves that are furnished with threaded plugs or caps. Automatic type air
venting shall be the ball-float type with brass/bronze or brass bodies, 300
series corrosion-resistant steel float, linkage and removable seat. Air
venting valves on water coils shall have not less than 1/8 inch threaded
end connections. Air venting valves on water mains shall have not less than
3/4 inch threaded end connections. Air venting valves on all other
applications shall have not less than 1/2 inch threaded end connections.
2.4.18 Vacuum Relief Valves
CSA/ANSI Z21.22
Section 23 64 26 Page 14

2.5 PIPING ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 Strainer
Strainer, ASTM F 1199, except as modified and supplemented in this
specification. Strainer shall be the cleanable, basket or "Y" type, the
same size as the pipeline. Strainer bodies shall be fabricated of cast iron
with bottoms drilled, and tapped. Provide blowoff outlet with pipe nipple,
gate valve, and discharge pipe nipple. The bodies shall have arrows clearly
cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.
Provide strainer with removable cover and sediment screen. The screen shall
be made of minimum 22 gauge brass sheet, with small perforations numbering
not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the
basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe. The flow shall be
into the screen and out through the perforations.
2.5.2 Cyclonic Separator
Metal- bodied, with removal capability of removing solids 45 microns/325
mesh in size and heavier than 1.20 specific gravity, maximum pressure drop
of 5 psid, with cleanout connection.
2.5.3 Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser
Angle type body with removable strainer basket and internal straightening
vanes, a suction pipe support, and a blowdown outlet and plug. Strainer
shall be in accordance with ASTM F 1199, except as modified and supplemented
by this specification. Unit body shall have arrows clearly cast on the
sides indicating the direction of flow.
Strainer screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge brass sheet, with small
perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net
free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering
pipe. Flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations.
Provide an auxiliary disposable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed 30
days after start-up. Provide warning tag for operator indicating scheduled
date for removal.
Casing shall have connection sizes to match pump suction and pipe sizes, and
be provided with adjustable support foot or support foot boss to relieve
piping strains at pump suction. Provide unit casing with blowdown port and
plug. Provide a magnetic insert to remove debris from system.
2.5.4 Flexible Pipe Connectors
Provide flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single
braid. Equip flanged assemblies with limit bolts to restrict maximum
travel to the manufacturer's standard limits. Unless otherwise indicated,
the length of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the service intended. Internal sleeves or liners,
compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by
the manufacturer. Provide covers to protect the bellows where indicated.
2.5.5 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Section 23 64 26 Page 15

Gauges, ASME B40.100 with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation
dampener and shut-off valve. Provide gauges with 4.5 inch dial, brass or
aluminum case, bronze tube, and siphon. Gauge shall have a minimum of with
a range from 0 psig to approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working
pressure. Each gauge range shall be selected so that at normal operating
pressure, the needle is within the middle-third of the range.
2.5.6 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges, shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for
the required temperature range. Provide gauges with fixed thread
connection, dial face gasketed within the case; and an accuracy within 2
percent of scale range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2 degree
graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. The pointer shall be
adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal
wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor. Universal adjustable
angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in
thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor or in locations
indicated. Remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in
thermal wells located 7 feet above the finished floor or in locations
indicated.
2.5.6.1 Stem Cased-Glass
Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum, 9
inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube with
indicating-fluid column.
2.5.6.2 Bimetallic Dial
Bimetallic dial type case shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches, stainless
steel, and shall be hermetically sealed with clear acrylic lens. Bimetallic
element shall be silicone dampened and unit fitted with external calibrator
adjustment.
2.5.6.3 Liquid-, Solid-, and Vapor-Filled Dial
Liquid-, solid-, and vapor-filled dial type cases shall be not less than 3-
1/2 inches, stainless steel or cast aluminum with clear acrylic lens. Fill
shall be nonmercury, suitable for encountered cross-ambients, and connecting
capillary tubing shall be double-braided bronze.
2.5.6.4 Thermal Well
Thermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection, brass
or stainless steel. Where test wells are indicated, provide captive plugfitted
type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either engraved
stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat. Mercury shall
not be used in thermometers. Extended neck thermal wells shall be of
sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.
2.5.7 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports: to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
Section 23 64 26 Page 16

2.5.8 Escutcheons
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Secure plates in place by internal
spring tension or set screws. Provide polished stainless steel plates or
chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide
paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
2.5.9 Expansion Joints
2.5.9.1 Slip-Tube Type
Slip-tube expansion joints, ASTM F 1007, Class I or II. Joints shall be
provided with internally-externally alignment guides, injected semi-plastic
packing, and service outlets. End connections shall be flanged or beveled
for welding as indicated. Initial settings shall be made in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations to compensate for ambient temperature at
time of installation. Pipe alignment guides shall be installed as
recommended by the joint manufacturer.
2.5.9.2 Flexible Ball Type
Flexible ball expansion joints shall be capable of 360 degrees rotation plus
15 degrees angular flex movement. Joints shall be constructed of carbon
steel with the exterior spherical surface of carbon steel balls plated with
a minimum 5 mils of hard chrome in accordance with EJMA Stds. Joint end
connections shall be threaded for piping 2 inches or smaller. Joint end
connections larger than 2 inches shall be grooved, flanged, or beveled for
welding. Provide joint with pressure-molded composition gaskets suitable
for continuous operation at twice design temperature.
2.5.9.3 Bellows Type
Bellows expansion type joints, ASTM F 1120 with Type 304 stainless steel
corrugated bellows, reinforced with equalizing rings, internal sleeves, and
external protective covers. Joint end connections shall be grooved,
flanged, or beveled for welding. Guiding of piping on both sides of
expansion joint shall be in accordance with the published recommendations of
the manufacturer of the expansion joint.
2.6 PUMPS
Pumps shall be the electrically driven, non-overloading, centrifugal type
which conform to HI 1.1-1.2. Pumps shall be selected at or within 5 percent
of peak efficiency. Pump curve shall rise continuously from maximum
capacity to shutoff. Pump motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1, be open , and
have sufficient horsepower for the service required. Pump motor shall have
the required capacity to prevent overloading with pump operating at any
point on its characteristic curve. Pump speed shall not exceed 3,600 rpm,
except where the pump head is less than 60 feet of water, the pump speed
shall not exceed 1,750 rpm. Pump motor shall be equipped with an acrossthe-line
magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-
STOP" switch in the cover.
2.6.1 Construction
Section 23 64 26 Page 17

Each pump casing shall be designed to withstand the discharge head specified
plus the static head on system plus 50 percent of the total, but not less
than 125 psig. Pump casing and bearing housing shall be close grained cast
iron. High points in the casing shall be provided with manual air vents;
low points shall be provided with drain plugs. Provide threaded suction and
discharge pressure gage tapping with square-head plugs.
Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impeller, impeller
wearing rings, glands, casing wear rings, and shaft sleeve shall be bronze.
Shaft shall be carbon or alloy steel, turned and ground. Bearings shall be
ball-bearings, roller-bearings, or oil-lubricated bronze-sleeve type
bearings, and be efficiently sealed or isolated to prevent loss of oil or
entrance of dirt or water.
Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron base having lipped
edges and tapped drainage openings or structural steel base with lipped
edges or drain pan and tapped drainage openings.Pump shall be provided with
steel shaft coupling guard. Base-mounted pump, coupling guard, and motor
shall each be bolted to a fabricated steel base which shall have bolt holes
for securing base to supporting surface. Close-coupled pump shall be
provided with integrally cast or fabricated steel feet with bolt holes for
securing feet to supporting surface. Close- coupled pumps shall be provided
with drip pockets and tapped openings. Pump shall be accessible for
servicing without disturbing piping connections. Shaft seals shall be
mechanical-seals or stuffing-box type.
2.6.2 Mechanical Shaft Seals
Seals shall be single, inside mounted, end-face-elastomer bellows type with
stainless steel spring, brass or stainless steel seal head, carbon rotating
face, and tungsten carbide or ceramic sealing face. Glands shall be bronze
and of the water-flush design to provide lubrication flush across the face
of the seal. Bypass line from pump discharge to flush connection in gland
shall be provided, with filter or cyclone particle separator in line.
2.6.3 Stuffing-Box Type Seals
Stuffing box shall include minimum 4 rows of square, impregnated TFE
(Teflon) or graphite cord packing and a bronze split-lantern ring. Packing
gland shall be bronze interlocking split type.
2.7 EXPANSION TANKS
Tank shall be welded steel, constructed for, and tested to pressuretemperature
rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Provide tanks precharged to
the minimum operating pressure. Tank shall have a replaceable polypropylene
or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air charge separated from the
water; shall be the captive air type.
Tanks shall accommodate expanded water of the system generated within the
normal operating temperature range, limiting this pressure increase at all
components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those
components. Each tank air chamber shall be fitted with a drain, fill, an
air charging valve, and system connections. Tank shall be supported by
steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for
Section 23 64 26 Page 18

horizontal installations. The only air in the system shall be the permanent
sealed-in air cushion contained within the expansion tank.
2.8 AIR SEPARATOR TANKS
External air separation tank shall have an internal design constructed of
stainless steel and suitable for creating the required vortex and subsequent
air separation. Tank shall be steel, constructed for, and tested to
pressure-temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Tank shall have
tangential inlets and outlets connections, threaded for 2 inches and smaller
and flanged for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. Air released from a tank
shall be to the atmosphere . Tank shall be provided with a blow-down
connection.
Design to separate air from water and to direct released air to automatic
air vent. Unit shall be of one piece cast-iron construction with internal
baffles and two air chambers at top of unit; one air chamber shall have
outlet to expansion tank and other air chamber shall be provided with
automatic air release device. Tank shall be steel, constructed for, and
tested to a ANSI Class 125 pressure-temperature rating.
2.9 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
When water treatment is specified, the use of chemical-treatment products
containing equivalent chromium (CPR) is prohibited.
2.9.1 Water Analysis
Conditions of make-up water to be supplied to the condenser and chilled
water systems were reported in accordance with ASTM D 596 and are as
follows:
Date of Sample
Temperature degrees F.
Silica (Sino 2)
pp (mg/1)
Insoluble
pp (mg/1)
Iron and Aluminum Oxides
pp (mg/1)
Calcium (Ca)
pp (mg/1)
Magnesium (Mg)
pp (mg/1)
Sodium and Potassium (Nan and AK)
pp (mg/1)
Carbonate (HO 3)
pp (mg/1)
Sulfate (SO 4)
pp (mg/1)
Chloride (JCL)
pp (mg/1)
Nitrate (NO 3)
pp (mg/1)
Turbidity
unit
pH
Residual Chlorine
pp (mg/1)
Total Alkalinity
PM (me/1)
Non-Carbonate Hardness
PM (me/1)
Total Hardness
PM (me/1)
Dissolved Solids
pp (mg/1)
Fluorine
pp (mg/1)
Conductivity
McMahon/cm
Section 23 64 26 Page 19

2.9.2 Chilled and Condenser Water
Water to be used in the chilled and condenser water systems shall be treated
to maintain the conditions recommended by this specification as well as the
recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator
coils. Chemicals shall meet all required federal, state, and local
environmental regulations for the treatment of evaporator coils and direct
discharge to the sanitary sewer.
2.9.3 Water Treatment Services
The services of a company regularly engaged in the treatment of condenser
and chilled water systems shall be used to determine the correct chemicals
required, the concentrations required, and the water treatment equipment
sizes and flow rates required. The company shall maintain the chemical
treatment and provide all chemicals required for the condenser and chilled
water systems for a period of 1 year from the date of occupancy. The
chemical treatment and services provided over the 1 year period shall meet
the requirements of this specification as well as the recommendations from
the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator coils. Acid treatment and
proprietary chemicals shall not be used.
2.9.4 Chilled Water System
A shot feeder shall be provided on the chilled water piping as indicated.
Size and capacity of feeder shall be based on local requirements and water
analysis. The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge glass,
funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.
2.10 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls
with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as
part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including
motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices
required for the operation specified and control wiring required for
controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For
packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the
required monitors and timed restart.
Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower
alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in
accordance with NEMA MG 11.
Provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors
that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium
efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in
accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the
specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds
with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during
Section 23 64 26 Page 20

one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload
protection and other necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings shall be
fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the
enclosure.
Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state
variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function.
Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less
and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.
2.11 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
2.11.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided. The
factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog
test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a
salt-spray fog test.
Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that
test, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after
completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering,
wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of 0.125 inch on either side of the
scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on
the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test
specimen.
If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
2.11.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, retreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
metal.
Where hot-dip galvanized steel has been cut, resulting surfaces with no
galvanizing shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D
520, Type I.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the
metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
Section 23 64 26 Page 21

thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils.
2.12 FACTORY APPLIED INSULATION
Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be firerated.
As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a
flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher
than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which
are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall
have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no
higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be
determined by ASTM E 84.
Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as
the material to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by a
manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material.
Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher
than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.13 NAMEPLATES
Major equipment including pumps, pump motors, expansion tanks, and air
separator tanks shall have the manufacturer's name, type or style, model or
serial number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. The nameplate of
the distributing agent will not be acceptable. Plates shall be durable and
legible throughout equipment life and made of anodized aluminum. Plates
shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.
2.14 RELATED COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.14.1 Drain and Make-Up Water Piping
Requirements for drain and make-up water piping and backflow preventer is
specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS.
2.14.2 Field Applied Insulation
Requirements for field applied insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.14.3 Field Applied Insulation
Section 23 64 26 Page 22

Requirements for field installed insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as supplemented and
modified by this specification section.
2.14.4 Field Painting
Requirements for painting of surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish
painting of items only primed at the factory, are specified in Section 09 90
00PAINTING, GENERAL.
2.14.4.1 Color Coding
Requirements for color coding for piping identification are specified in
Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATINGS.
2.14.4.2 Color Coding For Hidden Piping
A color coding scheme for locating hidden piping shall be in accordance with
Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE .
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and work
into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows,
doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building
structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted without written
approval. Cut pipe or tubing square, remove burrs by reaming, and fashion
to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the
building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to
the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before interrupting
service. Furnish materials required to make connections into existing
systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other
incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual
connections to existing systems.
3.1.1 Welding
Provide welding work specified this section for piping systems in
conformance with ASME B31.9, as modified and supplemented by this
specification section and the accompanying drawings. The welding work
includes: qualification of welding procedures, welders, welding operators,
brazers, brazing operators, and nondestructive examination personnel;
maintenance of welding records, and examination methods for welds.
3.1.1.1 Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)
Submit for review and approval the following documentation. This
documentation and the subject qualifications shall be in compliance with
ASME B31.9.
a. List of qualified welding procedures that is proposed to be used to
provide the work specified in this specification section.
Section 23 64 26 Page 23

. List of qualified welders, brazers, welding operators, and brazing
operators that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in
this specification section.
c. List of qualified weld examination personnel that are proposed to be
used to provide the work specified in this specification section.
3.1.1.2 Welding Procedures and Qualifications
a. Specifications and Test Results: Submit copies of the welding
procedures specifications and procedure qualification test results for
each type of welding required. Approval of any procedure does not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing acceptable
welds. Submit this information on the forms printed in ASME BPVC SEC
IX or their equivalent.
b. Certification: Before assigning welders or welding operators to the
work, submit a list of qualified welders, together with data and
certification that each individual is performance qualified as
specified. Do not start welding work prior to submitting welder, and
welding operator qualifications. The certification shall state the
type of welding and positions for which each is qualified, the code and
procedure under which each is qualified, date qualified, and the firm
and individual certifying the qualification tests.
3.1.1.3 Examination of Piping Welds
Conduct non-destructive examinations (NDE) on piping welds and brazing and
verify the work meets the acceptance criteria specified in ASME B31.9. NDE
on piping welds covered by ASME B31.9 is visual inspection only. Submit a
piping welds NDE report meeting the requirements specified in ASME B31.9.
3.1.1.4 Welding Safety
Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS
Z49.1.
3.1.2 Directional Changes
Make changes in direction with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4
inches and smaller is permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide
weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar
construction to form elbows or tees is not permitted. The centerline radius
of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing
kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations is not acceptable.
3.1.3 Functional Requirements
Pitch horizontal supply mains down in the direction of flow as indicated.
The grade shall not be less than 1 inch in 40 feet. Reducing fittings shall
be used for changes in pipe sizes. Cap or plug open ends of pipelines and
equipment during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of
the system.
Section 23 64 26 Page 24

Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated. Connections to appliances
shall be made with malleable iron unions for steel pipe 2-1/2 inches or less
in diameter, and with flanges for pipe 3 inches and above in diameter.
Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be electrically isolated
from each other with dielectric waterways or flanges.
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Pipe
and fittings installed in inaccessible conduits or trenches under concrete
floor slabs shall be welded. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit
into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for
installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance. Electric
isolation fittings shall be provided between dissimilar metals.
3.1.4 Fittings and End Connections
3.1.4.1 Threaded Connections
Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with
PTFE tape complying with ASTM D 3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound
applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show
after the joint is made.
3.1.4.2 Brazed Connections
Brazing, AWS BRH, except as modified herein. During brazing, the pipe and
fittings shall be filled with a pressure regulated inert gas, such as
nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Before brazing copper joints,
both the outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be cleaned
with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright and
clean. Do not use brazing flux. Surplus brazing material shall be removed
at all joints. Steel tubing joints shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Piping shall be supported prior to brazing
and not be sprung or forced.
3.1.4.3 Welded Connections
Branch connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch
outlets. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter
before the piping is assembled. During welding, the pipe and fittings shall
be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of
scale. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall
conform to ASME B31.9. Weld defects shall be removed and rewelded at no
additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be stored and dried in
accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating
shall not be used.
3.1.4.4 Grooved Mechanical Connections
Prepare grooves in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the
coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be
measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, or narrow-land
micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling
manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of
groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in
Section 23 64 26 Page 25

grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's
tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such
as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the
drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.1.4.5 Flared Connections
When flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used between
the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the flare while
tightening the nut.
3.1.4.6 Flanges and Unions
Except where copper tubing is used, union or flanged joints shall be
provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of
equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control
valves, and other similar items. Flanged joints shall be assembled square
end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts. Gaskets shall be
suitable for the intended application.
3.1.5 Valves
Isolation gate or ball valves shall be installed on each side of each piece
of equipment, at the midpoint of all looped mains, and at any other points
indicated or required for draining, isolating, or sectionalizing purpose.
Isolation valves may be omitted where balancing cocks are installed to
provide both balancing and isolation functions. Each valve except check
valves shall be identified. Valves in horizontal lines shall be installed
with stems horizontal or above.
3.1.6 Air Vents
Air vents shall be provided at all high points, on all water coils, and
where indicated to ensure adequate venting of the piping system.
3.1.7 Drains
Drains shall be provided at all low points and where indicated to ensure
complete drainage of the piping. Drains shall be accessible, and shall
consist of nipples and caps or plugged tees unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.8 Flexible Pipe Connectors
Connectors shall be attached to components in strict accordance with the
latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight
joint. Hangers, when required to suspend the connectors, shall be of the
type recommended by the flexible pipe connector manufacturer and shall be
provided at the intervals recommended.
3.1.9 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be located on coolant supply and return piping at
each heat exchanger, on condenser water piping entering and leaving a
condenser, at each automatic temperature control device without an integral
thermometer, and where indicated or required for proper operation of
Section 23 64 26 Page 26

equipment. Thermal wells for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall
extend beyond thermal insulation surface not less than 1 inch.
3.1.10 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-
69, except as supplemented and modified in this specification section. Pipe
hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. Hangers used to support
piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment
after erection while still supporting the load. Piping subjected to
vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures,
shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant
support hangers.
3.1.10.1 Hangers
Type 3 shall not be used on insulated piping. Type 24 may be used only on
trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
3.1.10.2 Inserts
Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is
placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if they
otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.
3.1.10.3 C-Clamps
Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and have both
locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer. Fieldfabricated
C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
3.1.10.4 Angle Attachments
Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an
added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
3.1.10.5 Saddles and Shields
Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe
attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be
used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less
than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than
60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be
used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.
3.1.10.6 Horizontal Pipe Supports
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a
support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at
each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not
over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist
with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have the
excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.
Section 23 64 26 Page 27

3.1.10.7 Vertical Pipe Supports
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and
at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than 8 feet from end of
risers, and at vent terminations.
3.1.10.8 Pipe Guides
Type 35 guides using, steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or
graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Lateral restraints shall be provided as required. Slide
materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures,
atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
3.1.10.9 Steel Slides
Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral
movement, an alternate guide method may be used. On piping 4 inches and
larger, a Type 39 saddle shall be used. On piping under 4 inches, a Type 40
protection shield may be attached to the pipe or insulation and freely rest
on a steel slide plate.
3.1.10.10 Multiple Pipe Runs
In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or
clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support
spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.
*
*3.1.10.11 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in
concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural
steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not
shown, shall be provided under this section. Material used for support
shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.1.11 Pipe Alignment Guides
Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion loops,
offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for expansion
joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion joint, and in
lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side of the joint.
3.1.12 Building Surface Penetrations
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated
or approved. Except as indicated otherwise piping sleeves shall comply with
requirements specified. Sleeves in nonload bearing surfaces shall be
galvanized sheet metal, conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Class G-90,
Section 23 64 26 Page 28

20 gauge. Sleeves in load bearing surfaces shall be uncoated carbon steel
pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard weight. Sealants shall be
applied to moisture and oil-free surfaces and elastomers to not less than
1/2 inch depth. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members.
3.1.12.1 General Service Areas
Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and
shall be cut flush with each surface. Pipes passing through concrete or
masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves
fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be of such
size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between bare
pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves. Except in pipe
chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve or
between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance with
Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.12.2 Waterproof Penetrations
Pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane shall be
installed through a .17 ounce copper sleeve, or a 0.032 inch thick aluminum
sleeve, each within an integral skirt or flange.
Flashing sleeve shall be suitably formed, and skirt or flange shall extend
not less than 8 inches from the pipe and be set over the roof or floor
membrane in a troweled coating of bituminous cement. The flashing sleeve
shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 2 inches above the roof or floor
penetration. The annular space between the flashing sleeve and the bare
pipe or between the flashing sleeve and the metal-jacket-covered insulation
shall be sealed as indicated. Penetrations shall be sealed by either one of
the following methods.
a. Waterproofing Clamping Flange: Pipes up to and including 10 inches in
diameter passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.
Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be
placed in the caulking recess.
b. Modular Mechanical Type Sealing Assembly: In lieu of a waterproofing
clamping flange, a modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be
installed. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links
shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit
and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and
pressure plates. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a
continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each
bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of
the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide
a watertight seal rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a
watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the pipe/conduit
and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by
the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve involved. The
Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical type seals shall
provide sleeves of the proper diameters.
Section 23 64 26 Page 29

3.1.12.3 Fire-Rated Penetrations
Penetration of fire-rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as
specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.12.4 Escutcheons
Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through
floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms,
shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from
floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be
secured to pipe or pipe covering.
3.1.13 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided where indicated for all concealed valves,
vents, controls, and additionally for items requiring inspection or
maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that
the concealed items may be serviced and maintained or completely removed and
replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Install electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturers
instructions.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Pipes shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign
matter. A temporary bypass shall be provided for all water coils to prevent
flushing water from passing through coils. Strainers and valves shall be
thoroughly cleaned. Prior to testing and balancing, air shall be removed
from all water systems by operating the air vents. Temporary measures, such
as piping the overflow from vents to a collecting vessel shall be taken to
avoid water damage during the venting process. Air vents shall be plugged
or capped after the system has been vented. Control valves and other
miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting
indicated or directed.
3.4 FIELD TESTS
Field tests shall be conducted in the presence of the QC Manager or his
designated representative to verify systems compliance with specifications.
Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test
shall be provided by the Contractor.
3.4.1 Equipment and Component Isolation
Prior to testing, equipment and components that cannot withstand the tests
shall be properly isolated.
3.4.2 Pressure Tests
Section 23 64 26 Page 30

Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure not less
than 188 psig for period of time sufficient to inspect every joint in the
system and in no case less than 2 hours. Test pressure shall be monitored
by a currently calibrated test pressure gauge. Leaks shall be repaired and
piping retested until test requirements are met. No leakage or reduction in
gage pressure shall be allowed.
Leaks shall be repaired by rewelding or replacing pipe or fittings.
Caulking of joints will not be permitted. Concealed and insulated piping
shall be tested in place before concealing.
Submit for approval pressure tests reports covering the above specified
piping pressure tests; describe the systems tested, test results, defects
found and repaired, and signature of the pressure tests' director. Obtain
approval from the QC Manager before concealing piping or applying insulation
to tested and accepted piping.
3.4.3 Related Field Inspections and Testing
3.4.3.1 Piping Welds
Examination of Piping Welds is specified in the paragraph above entitled
"Examination of Piping Welds".
3.4.3.2 HVAC TAB
Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of HVAC water
piping, and associated equipment is specified in Section 23 05 93
TESTING,ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Coordinate with the TAB team,
and provide support personnel and equipment as specified in Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC to assist TAB team to meet the TAB
work requirements.
3.5 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to
the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and
maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the chilled water,
. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the
installation and shall be instructed in operating theory as well as
practical operation and maintenance work. Submit a lesson plan for the
instruction course for approval. The lesson plan and instruction course
shall be based on the approved operation and maintenance data and
maintenance manuals.
Conduct a training course for the operating staff and maintenance staff
selected by the Contracting Officer. Give the instruction during the first
regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned
over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8
hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be one man-day.. Use
approximately half of the time for classroom instruction and the other time
for instruction at the location of equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are
made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
Section 23 64 26 Page 31

-- End of Section --
Section 23 64 26 Page 32

SECTION 23 73 13
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
11/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 211
AMCA 99
(2005) Certified Ratings Programme - Product
Rating Manual for Air Fan Performance
(2003) Standards Handbook
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 430
AHRI 880
(1999) Standard for Central-Station Air-
Handling Units
(2008) Standard for Air Terminals
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 51
ASHRAE 52.1
(2008) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Aerodynamic Performance Rating
(1992; Interpretation 1 2007) Gravimetric and
Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning
Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM B 117
(2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating Salt
Spray (Fog) Apparatus
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 1940-1
(2003; Corrigendum 2005) Mechanical Vibration
- Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in
a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1:
Specification and Verification of Balance
Tolerance - International Restrictions
Section 23 73 13 Page 1

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 900
(2004; Rev thru Nov 2009) Standard for Air
Filter Units
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
applies to work specified in this section.
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for air handling units in accordance
with the specification. Provide data that consists of use life, total
static pressure and coil face area classifications, and performance ratings.
Submit drawings and manuals that include a spare parts data sheet, with
manufactures recommended stock levels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
reviews the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Installation Drawings for air handling units in accordance
with paragraph entitled, "AHU Equipment Installation," of this
section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for air handling units in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this
section.
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Unit Cabinet
Fan
Drain Pans
Insulation
Plenums
Section 23 73 13 Page 2

Spare Parts
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Listing of Product Installations for air handling units in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "AHU Equipment Installation,"
of this section.
Submit certificates for following items showing conformance with
the referenced standards contained in this section.
Unit Cabinet
Fan
Drain Pans
Insulation
Plenums
Spare Parts
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for air handling units in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "Operation and Maintenance," of
this section.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU)
Provide central-station type, factory fabricated, and sectionally assembled
air handling unit (AHU). Provide AHU that includes components and
auxiliaries in accordance with AHRI 430. Balance AHU fan and motor to ISO
1940-1-2005.
Provide total static pressure and coil face area classification that conform
to AMCA 99.
Fans with enlarged outlets are not permitted.
Provide double-width, double-inlet, centrifugal scroll type AHU fan.
2.2 UNIT CABINET
Provide AHU cabinet that is suitable for pressure class shown and that has
leaktight joints, closures, penetrations, and access provisions. Provide
cabinet that does not expand or contract perceptibly during starting and
stopping of fans and that does not pulsate during operation. Reinforce
cabinet surfaces with deflections in excess of 0.004167 of unsupported span
prior to acceptance. Stiffen pulsating panels, which produce low frequency
noise due to diaphragming of unstable panel walls, to raise natural
frequency to an easily attenuated level. Fabricate enclosure from
continuous hot-dipped galvanized steel no lighter than 20 gage thickness, to
match industry standard. Provide mill-galvanized sheet metal that conforms
Section 23 73 13 Page 3

to ASTM A 653/A 653M and that is coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of
zinc per square foot of two-sided surface. Provide mill-rolled structural
steel that is hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted. Corrosion protect
cut edges, burns, and scratches in galvanized surfaces. Provide primed and
painted black carbon steel cabinet construction that complies with this
specification.
Provide removable panels to access the interior of the unit cabinet.
Provide seams that are welded, bolted or gasketed and sealed with a rubberbased
mastic. Make entire floor as well as ceiling unit hot-dipped
galvanized steel. Provide removable access doors on both sides of all
access, filter, and fan sections for inspection and maintenance.
Provide AHU cabinet suitable for pressure class indicated with leaktight
joints, closures, penetrations, and access provisions. Provide cabinet that
does not expand or contract perceptibly during starting and stopping of fans
and that does not pulsate during operation. Reinforce cabinet surfaces with
deflections in excess of 0.002778 of unsupported span prior to acceptance by
the Contracting Officer. Stiffen pulsating panels, which produce low
frequency noise due to diaphragming of unstable panel walls, to raise
natural frequency to an easily attenuated level. Provide enclosure that is
fabricated from mill-galvanized or primed and painted carbon steel sheet of
required thickness. Provide mill-galvanized sheet metal that conforms to
ASTM A 653/A 653M and that is coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc
per square foot of two-sided surface. Provide mill-rolled structural steel
that is hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted. Corrosion protect edges,
burns, and scratches in galvanized surfaces. Provide primed and painted
black carbon steel cabinet construction that complies with this
specification.
Provide removable panels to access the interior of the unit cabinet.
Provide seams that are welded, bolted or gasketed and sealed with a rubberbased
mastic. Make entire floor as well as ceiling unit hot-dipped
galvanized steel. Provide removable access doors on both sides of all
access, filter, and fan sections for inspection and maintenance.
Where cabinet size is such that personnel access is possible, strengthen
cabinet floor to permit entry without damage to any component. Hinge and
latch access doors and panels at a spacing sufficiently close to preclude
leaks caused by distortion, and effectively gasket.
Black carbon steel cabinet construction is acceptable when the following
conditions are met:
Coat all interior and exterior surfaces, including lapped contacting
surfaces, with a corrosion-protective coating.
Certify coating as passing a 500-hour exposure salt-spray fog test in
accordance with ASTM B 117.
Immediately after completion of the test, provide a specimen that
shows no signs of wrinkling, cracking or loss of adherence, and no
signs of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark.
Section 23 73 13 Page 4

Ensure inspection of interior and exterior cabinet surfaces will pass
examination for the same defects as the salt-spray fog test specimen,
after 11 months of service and prior to expiration of guarantee.
Interior surfaces of cabinets constructed of intact mill-galvanized steel
require no further protection.
Provide cabinets with exterior surfaces constructed of mill-galvanized steel
that are prepared by a phosphatizing treatment, and painted with two coats
of manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by the
Contracting Officer.
Provide cabinets and casings that are double walled with 2 inch insulation.
Provide interior wall that is non-absorbent coating .
Dynamically and statically balance fan wheels at the factory. Provide fan
with RPM that is 25 percent less than the first critical speed. Provide fan
shaft that is solid, ground and polished steel and coated with a rust
inhibitor. Provide V-belt driven fans that are designed for 50 percent
overload capacity. For variable air volume air handling units that are
provided with variable frequency drives, have their fans balanced over the
entire range of operation (20 percent - 100 percent RPM). Balancing fans of
only 100 percent design of RPM is not acceptable for air handling units to
be used with variable frequency drives.
Mount fans on isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation
bases and internally isolate fans and motors with 2-inch. Install flexible
canvas ducts or vibration absorbent fan discharge seal between fan and
casings to ensure complete isolation. Provide flexible canvas ducts that
comply with NFPA 90A.
Weigh fan and motor assembly at air handling unit manufacturer's factory for
isolator selection. Statically and dynamically balance fan section
assemblies. Fan section assemblies include fan wheels, shafts, bearings,
drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators. Allow isolators to free float
when performing fan balance. Measure vibration at each fan shaft bearing in
horizontal, vertical and axial directions.
Factory install all motors on slide bases to permit adjustment of belt
tension.
Provide heavy duty, open drip-proof, operable at 460 volts, 60 hertz, 3-
phase fan motors. Provide high efficiency motors. Refer to specification
Section 26 05 70.00 40 HIGH-VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES and
Section 26 05 71.00 40 LOW-VOLTAGE OVERCURRECT PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
Provide a marine-type, vapor proof service light in the fan segment.
Provide 100 watt service light that is wired to an individual switch. Light
requires 115 Volt, single phase, 60 Hertz service that is separate from the
main power to the AHU. Provide a single 115 volt outlet at the light
switch.
2.3 FAN
Provide an overall fan-section depth that is equal to or greater than the
manufacturer's free-standing fan.
Section 23 73 13 Page 5

Provide single-wheel fans.
Locate fan inlet where it provides not less than one-half fan-wheel diameter
clearance from cabinet wall or adjacent fan inlet where double wheels are
permitted.
Mount AHU fan drive external to casing.
Install AHU fan motor and drive inside fan cabinet. Provide motor that
conforms to NEMA MG 1 and is installed on an adjustable base. Provide an
access door of adequate size for servicing motor and drive. Provide a belt
guard inside the cabinet, or interlock the access door with the supply fan
so that power to the fan is interrupted when the access door is opened.
2.4 DRAIN PANS
Provide intermediate-coil, 3-inch deep drip pans for each tiered coil bank.
Extend top pan 12 inches beyond face of coil, and extend bottom pan not less
than 24 inches beyond face of coil. Where more than two pans are used, make
pan extension proportional. Make adequate supports from the same type
material as pans or hot-dip galvanized angle iron with isolation at
interface. Provide pan material that is 22-gage AISI Type 304 corrosionresistant
steel with silver-soldered joints. Minimum size of drain opening
is 1-1/4 inches. Pipe pan to drain.
Extend integral cabinet drain pan under all areas where condensate must be
collected and make watertight with welded or brazed joints, piped to drain,
corrosion protect in condensate collection area, and insulate against
sweating. Provide minimum 14-gage sheet metal, except that 16-gage doubledrain-pan
construction is acceptable.
Provide cooling coil ends that are enclosed by cabinet and are factory
insulated against sweating or drain to a drain pan.
Provide drain pans that are double pan construction, thermally isolated from
the exterior casing with 1-inch thick fiberglass insulation. Provide drain
pans that slope to drain and drain substantially dry by gravity alone when
drains are open.
Provide pans that have a double slope to the drain point.
2.5 INSULATION
Provide unit that is internally fitted at the factory with a soundattenuating,
thermal-attenuating, fibrous-glass material not less than 2
inch thick with 1-1/2 inch density neoprene coated fiberglass. Ensure
insulation effectiveness precludes any condensation on any exterior cabinet
surface under conditions normal to the unit's installed location. Provide
acoustic treatment that attenuates fan noise in compliance with specified
noise criteria. Apply material to the cabinet with waterproof adhesives and
permanent fasteners on 100 percent coverage basis. Provide adhesive and
insulating material in accordance with NFPA 90A.
Section 23 73 13 Page 6

Provide insulated plenums .
2.6 PLENUMS
Provide plenums in the following minimum widths:
6 inches for mounting temperature controls and to separate two or more
coils of different size mounted in series
2.7 COILS
24 inches for access sections
2.7.1 Coil Section
Provide coil section that encases cooling coils and drain pipes. Arrange
coils for horizontal air flow. Provide intermediate drain pans for multiple
coils installation. Completely enclose coil headers with the insulated
casing with only connections extended through the cabinet.
2.7.2 Coil Pressure and Temperature Ratings
Provide coils that are designed for the following fluid operating pressures
and temperatures:
SERVICE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
Hot Water 200 PSI 250 degrees F
Chilled Water 200 PSI 40 degrees F
SERVICE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
Hot Water 289 Pa 121 degrees C
Chilled Water 289 Pa 4 degrees C
Provide coils that are air-pressure tested under water at the following
minimum pressures:
SERVICE
Water (hot and chilled)
SERVICE
Water (hot and chilled)
PRESSURE
250 PSI
PRESSURE
289 Pa
2.7.3 Coil Casings
Provide stainless steel casings. Provide cast iron, brass, or copper coil
headers. Fit water coil headers with .25 inch ops spring-loaded plug drains
and vent petcocks. Provide automatic air vents with ball type isolation
valves for each coil piped to the drain pan.
Provide coils that are factory tested, dehydrated, vacuum tested, purged
with inert gas, and sealed prior to shipment to the job site.
Section 23 73 13 Page 7

2.7.4 Chilled Water coils
Provide 0.625 inch outside diameter copper tubing for coils. Provide fins
that are aluminum mechanically bonded by tubing expansion with a maximum
spacing of 12 fins per 1 inch unless otherwise noted. Provide coils that
have supply and return connections on the same end. Provide a maximum of
four coil rows.
2.7.5 Hot Water Coils
Provide heating coils that have copper tubing aluminum fins.
2.7.6 Drainable Coils
Provide drainable coils that are capable of being purged free of water with
compressed air.
Provide self-draining coils that have a drain point at the end of every tube
and are pitched to that point. Provide drain provisions that include:
drained headers; U-bends with integral plugs; or nonferrous plugs in castiron
headers. Provide tubes that drain substantially dry by gravity alone
when drains and vents are open.
2.8 FILTERS
2.8.1 Filter Housing
Provide factory fabricated filter section of the same construction and
finish as unit casings. Provide filter sections that have filter guides and
full height, double wall, hinged and removable access doors for filter
removal. Provide air sealing gaskets to prevent air bypass around filters.
Provide visible identification on media frames showing model number and
airflow direction. Where filter bank is indicated or required, provide
means of sealing to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. Performance in
accordance with ASHRAE 52.1.
2.8.2 Replaceable Air Filters
UL 900, Class 1, those which, when cleaned, do not contribute fuel when
attacked by flame and emit only negligible amount of smoke. Permanent
frames with replaceable media, 1-inch thickness and size as indicated.
2.8.3 Air Filter Gauges
Provide manometer air filter gauges of the inclined tube differential type,
of solid acrylic plastic construction with built-in level vial and with an
adjustable mirror-polished scale. Equip gauges with vent valves for zeroing
and over-pressure safety traps. Provide adequate gauge range for the
particular installation. Provide gauges manufactured by Dwyer or approved
equal.
Provide one (1) air filter gauge at each filter bank.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Section 23 73 13 Page 8

3.1 AHU EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide Installation drawings in accordance with referenced standards in
this section.
Submit Listing of Product Installations for air handling units showing a
minimum of 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have
been in successful service for a minimum period of 5 years. Provide list
that includes purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and
date of installation.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE
Prior to final acceptance, use dial indicator gages to demonstrate that fan
and motor are aligned as specified.
Prior to final acceptance, verify conformance to specifications using
vibration analysis. Ensure maximum vibration levels are .075 in/sec at 1
times run speed and at fan/blade frequency, and .04 in/sec at other
multiples of run speed.
3.3 AHU TESTING
Performance test and rate AHU and components in accordance with AMCA 211 and
ASHRAE 51. Provide AHU ratings in accordance with AHRI 430.
Provide final test reports to the Contracting Officer. Provide reports with
a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the
words "Final Test Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition
Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance
Database."
Perform air handling unit start-up in the presence of the Contracting
Officer.
3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals prior to testing the air handling
units. Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30
calendar days prior to contract completion.
3.5 COORDINATION
Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads, variable
frequency drives, control and electrical requirements.
3.6 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FILTERS
Have temporary construction filters in place during normal building
construction whenever the air handling units are run for general
ventilation, building dehumidification, and for other purposes during
construction. Install two (2) layers of blanket filter at a time. Replace
temporary construction filters as required during construction and after
completion of duct system cleaning.
Section 23 73 13 Page 9

After systems have been cleaned and temporary construction filers are
removed, and before test and balance operations are started, install set of
final filters. Do not have final filters in place while general building
construction is taking place, to avoid unnecessary loading with construction
dust. Clean permanent filter bank before testing and balancing.
Submit all required installation, Fabrication and Connection drawings and
obtain approval prior to the start of work detailed on these drawings.
Maximum number of coil rows is
inch is ten (10).
eight (8) . Maximum number of fins per
Provide VAV terminal units that are AHRI 880 certified and UL listed.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 73 13 Page 10

SECTION 23 82 19
FAN COIL UNITS
08/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S12.23
(1989; R 2006) Method for the Designation of
Sound Power Emitted by Machinery and
Equipment
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 440
(2008) Standard for Room Fan-Coils and Unit
Ventilators
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 1940-1
(2003; Corrigendum 2005) Mechanical Vibration
- Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in
a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1:
Specification and Verification of Balance
Tolerance - International Restrictions
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1
(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and
Generators
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-STD-810
(Rev G) Department of Defense Test Method
Standard for Environmental Engineering
Considerations and Laboratory Tests
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1995
UL Bld Mat Dir
(2005; Rev thru Jul 2009) Standard for
Heating and Cooling Equipment
(2009) Building Materials Directory
Section 23 82 19 Page 1

1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit Material, Equipment, and Product Installation Lists in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this
section.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Fabrication Drawings for fan coil units in accordance with
paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.
Submit Installation Drawings for fan coil systems in accordance
with the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for fan coil units in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this
section.
Submit the manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Coils
Casing
Enclosure
Motors
Fan
Drain Pans
Filters
Controls
Vibration Isolation
SD-07 Certificates
Submit the Listing of Product Installations for fan coil units in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this
section.
Submit the certificates for following items showing conformance
with the referenced standards contained in this section.
Coils
Casing
Enclosure
Motors
Section 23 82 19 Page 2

Fan
Drain Pans
Filters
Controls
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with
paragraph entitled, "Operation and Maintenance," of this section.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to
work specified in this section.
Submit vibration isolation components.
Section 26 60 13.00 40 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTORS applies to this section.
Submit the Listing of Product Installations for fan coil units showing a
minimum of 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have
been in successful service for a minimum period of 5 years. List shall
include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date
of installation.
Submit Fabrication Drawings for fan coil units consisting of fabrication and
assembly details to be performed in the factory.
Material, Equipment, and Product Installation Lists shall include the
manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference
numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information.
Submit Equipment and Performance Data for fan coil units consisting of use
life, system functional flows, safety features, and mechanical automated
details. Curves indicating tested and certified equipment response and
performance characteristics shall also be submitted, including vibration
isolation.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed
models.
Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with
auxiliary water or steam heating-coil, valve and piping package, drain pans,
air filter, fan motor, and motor control. Sound-power-level, decibels
reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed
selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the following
values at the midfrequency of each octave band:
OCTAVE BANDS
Section 23 82 19 Page 3

3RD 4TH 5TH 6TH 7TH
Frequency 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000
(hertz)
Power Level 60 55 53 50 48
(decibels)
Obtain sound-power-level data or values for these units in accordance with
the test procedures specified in ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to
units provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard
grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models will be acceptable
for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation
between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or
relative arrangement of parts. Fasten each unit securely to the building
structure. Capacity of the units shall be as indicated. Room fan-coil
units shall be certified as complying with AHRI 440 and shall meet the
requirements of UL 1995.
2.2 ENCLOSURE
Construct enclosure of not lighter than 18-gage steel, properly reinforced
and braced. Ensure front panel of enclosure is removable and provided with
1/2-inch thick insulation conforming to NFPA 90A, to prevent condensation.
Ensure discharge louvers are four-way adjustable and designed to properly
distribute air throughout the conditioned space. Ensure all ferrous-metal
surfaces are galvanized or treated with a rust-inhibiting finish. Ensure
all exposed-to-view enclosure corners and edges are rounded. Ensure
discharge louvers are mounted in a top panel that is removable for coil
cleaning. Ensure access doors are hinged and provided for all piping and
control compartments. Ensure finish is in manufacturer's standard color as
selected by the Contracting Officer.
2.3 CASING
Ensure casing is acoustically and thermally insulated internally with not
less than 1/2-inch thick insulation conforming to NFPA 90A, fastened with
waterproof and fire-resistant adhesive.
2.4 FAN
Ensure fan is galvanized steel or aluminum, centrifugal type with blades.
In lieu of metal, fabricate or mold the wheels and scrolls from suitably
reinforced nonmetallic compounds certified to have satisfactorily passed the
low temperature, high temperature, temperature shock, and sand and dust
tests for ground equipment, outlined in MIL-STD-810, without deformation,
cracking, corrosion, or loss of balance characteristics. All surfaces shall
be smooth. Ensure that assemblies are accessible for maintenance. Ensure
that disassembly and reassembly is done by mechanical fastening devices, not
adhesives. Dynamically and statically balance fan to ISO 1940-1 at the
factory, after assembly in unit.
2.5 COILS
Construct the water coils of not less than 1/2-inch outside diameter (od)
seamless copper tubing with copper or aluminum plate fins mechanically
Section 23 82 19 Page 4

onded or soldered to the tubes and provide with not less than 5/8-inch od
female solder connectors, accessory piping package with terminal connections
for control valves, and manual air vent on returns. Make provisions for
coil removal.
2.6 DRAIN PANS
Size and locate drain pans to collect condensed water dripping from any item
within the unit enclosure. Do not construct drain pans of lighter than 20-
gage galvanized steel, thermally insulated to prevent condensation. Coat
thermal insulation with a waterproofing compound. Not less than 3/4-inch
National Pipe Thread (NPT) or 5/8-inch od copper drain connection shall be
provided in the drain pan. Pans shall slope not less than 1/8-inch per foot
to drain.
2.7 FILTERS
Provide filters for each unit that are glass fiber throwaway or permanent
washable type, 1-inch nominal thickness, in conformance with UL Bld Mat Dir.
Ensure filters are removable without tools.
2.8 MOTORS
Provide motors that are direct connected, two-bearing, permanent splitcapacitor
type with built-in overload protection, conform to NEMA MG 1, and
mounted on a resilient base. Design motors for 1,060 revolutions per minute
maximum on 115-volt, single-phase, 60-hertz power. Furnish motors with
three built-in speeds, with four insulated leads (common, high, medium, and
low) to terminate in a control-junction box.
Provide a solid-state variable speed controller capable of not less than 50
percent speed reduction in lieu of step speed control, when so specified.
2.9 CONTROLS
Applicable requirements of Section 23 09 33.00 40 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC shall apply.
Unit manufacturer shall factory-install control valves furnished by the
automatic temperature-control manufacturer.
Install the controls in a unit-mounted control panel. Provide remotemounted
controllers where indicated.
Motor speed-control switch shall provide speed selection and off position
and be mounted for convenient use from an access door.
2.10 INSULATION
Contain all thermal and acoustical insulation within a double walled
enclosure or seal with a coating impervious to moisture.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Section 23 82 19 Page 5

Install equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Set dampers in a fixed position to provide
the outside air quantity scheduled.
Submit Installation Drawings for fan coil systems in accordance with
referenced standards in this section.
3.2 TESTS
Hydrostatically test coils at 250 pounds per square inch (psi) or under
water at 250 psi air pressure. Ensure the coils are suitable for 200-psi
working pressure.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Contractor shall submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30
calendar days prior to testing the fan coil units. Update and resubmit data
for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract
completion.
-- End of Section --
Section 23 82 19 Page 6

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
07/06
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
IEEE C2
IEEE C57.12.28
IEEE C57.12.29
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code
(2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment
- Enclosure Integrity
(2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment
- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal
Environments
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to certain sections of Division 02, EXISTING CONDITIONS.
This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and
UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the
individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus,
does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.
Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1

Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification
sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment
operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of
submittal types.
c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in
PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that
describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and
test methods.
1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project are existing. The existing
service entrance is 208y/120 volt thre phase four wire terminating at the
existing 700 Amp. main panel "1MDP"
1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must
conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating
proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices.
1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2

1.6.2 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the
technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The
operating instructions shall include the following:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each
principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown
procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each
system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in
approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not
fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal
or peeling.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall
be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align
lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
1.11 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including
substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in
accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for
pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the
outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal
and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend
"DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high
letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red
background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a
white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved
equal.
b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence.
Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with
the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in three lines of
nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and black field.
1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and
requirements specified herein.
1.13 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of
competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified
systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation
and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work
week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the
Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day)
of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4

half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction
with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the
equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide
additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the
changes or modifications.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible
side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 5

SECTION 26 05 00.00 40
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
11/10
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)
EIA 480
(1981) Toggle Switches
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C57.12.28
IEEE C57.12.29
IEEE Stds Dictionary
(2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment
- Enclosure Integrity
(2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment
- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal
Environments
(2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary
of Terms & Definitions
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC/ANSI A117.1
(2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)
RCBEA GUIDE
(2004) NASA Reliability Centered Building
and Equipment Acceptance Guide
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI Z535.1
ANSI/NEMA FB 1
ANSI/NEMA OS 1
NEMA 250
(2006) American National Standard for
Safety--Color Code
(2007; AMD 2010) Standard for Fittings,
Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for
Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and
Cable
(2008; Amd 2010) Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes,
Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 1

(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA KS 1
NEMA PB 1
NEMA RN 1
NEMA TC 2
NEMA TC 3
NEMA VE 1
NEMA WD 1
NEMA WD 6
(2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous
Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V
Maximum)
(2006; Errata 2008) Panelboards
(2005) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally
Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit
(2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Conduit
(2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing
(2009) Standard for Metal Cable Tray
Systems
(1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for
General Color Requirements for Wiring
Devices
(2002; R 2008) Wiring Devices Dimensions
Specifications
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1
UL 1242
UL 489
UL 506
UL 6
UL 797
UL 870
(2005; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for
Flexible Metal Conduit
(2006; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for
Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
(2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
(2008; Reprint Mar 2010) Specialty
Transformers
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
(2007) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
(2008) Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary
Gutters, and Associated Fittings
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 2

1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification
sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment
operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of
submittal types.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists for the following:
Conduits, Raceway sand Fittings
Wire and Cable
Splices and Connectors
Switches
Receptacles
Outlets, Outlet Boxes, and Pull Boxes
Circuit Breakers
Panelboards
Lamps and Lighting Fixtures
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Conduits, Raceway sand Fittings
Wire and Cable
Splices and Connectors
Switches
Receptacles
Outlets, Outlet Boxes, and Pull Boxes
Circuit Breakers
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 3

Panelboards
Lamps and Lighting Fixtures
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Spare Parts
Certification
SD-06 Test Reports
Continuity Test
Phase-Rotation Tests
Insulation Resistance Test
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit Manufacturer's Instructions.
1.4 PREDICTIVE TESTING AND INSPECTION TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
This section contains systems and/or equipment components regulated by
NASA's Reliability Centered Building and Equipment Acceptance Program.
This program requires the use of Predictive Testing and Inspection (PT&I)
technologies in conformance with RCBEA GUIDE to ensure building equipment
and systems installed by the Contractor have been installed properly and
contain no identifiable defects that shorten the design life of a system
and/or its components. Satisfactory completion of all acceptance
requirements is required to obtain Government approval and acceptance of
the Contractor's work.
Perform PT&I tests and provide submittals as specified in Section
01 86 26.07 40 RELIABILITY CENTERED ACCEPTANCE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
1.5 PREVENTION OF CORROSION
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment enclosures
with the standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor
installations. For harsh indoor environments (any area subjected to
chemical and/or abrasive action), and all outdoor installations, refer to
Section 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS. Do not use aluminum when in
contact with earth or concrete and, where connected to dissimilar metal,
protect by approved fittings and treatment. Ferrous metals such as, but
not limited to, anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings,
guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers, and miscellaneous spare
parts not of corrosion-resistant steel shall be hot-dip galvanized except
where other equivalent protective treatment is specifically approved in
writing.
1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Submit material, equipment, and fixture lists for the following items
showing manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing
reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 4

Submit manufacturer's instructions including special provisions required to
install equipment components and system packages. Special notices shall
detail impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
Submit certification required to install equipment components and system
packages.
1.7 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the
technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The
operating instructions shall include the following:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each
principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown
procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each
system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in
approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not
fade when exposed to sunlight and be secured to prevent easy removal or
peeling.
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall
be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align
lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
1.10 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including
substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 5

accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for
pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the
outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal
and have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The
word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the
words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background.
Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.
b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence.
Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with
the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in three lines of
nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and black field.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Materials and equipment to be provided shall be the standard cataloged
products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the
products.
2.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit
Rigid steel conduit shall comply with UL 6 and be galvanized by the hot-dip
process. Rigid steel conduit shall be polyvinylchloride (PVC) coated in
accordance with NEMA RN 1, where underground and in corrosive areas, or
must be painted with bitumastic.
Fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be threaded.
Gaskets shall be solid. Conduit fittings with blank covers shall have
gaskets, except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run
where drainage is required.
Covers shall have captive screws and be accessible after the work has been
completed.
2.1.2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
EMT shall be in accordance with UL 797 and be zinc coated steel.
Couplings and connectors shall be zinc-coated, raintight, gland compression
with insulation throat. Crimp, spring, or setscrew type fittings are not
acceptable.
2.1.3 Flexible Metallic Conduit
Flexible metallic conduit shall comply with UL 1 and be galvanized steel.
Fittings for flexible metallic conduit shall be specifically designed for
such conduit.
Provide liquidtight flexible metallic conduit with a protective jacket of
PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect
wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes.
Specifically design fittings for liquidtight flexible metallic conduit for
such conduit.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 6

2.1.4 Intermediate Metal Conduit
Intermediate metal conduit shall comply with UL 1242 and be galvanized.
2.1.5 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall comply with NEMA TC 2 and NEMA TC 3 with
wall thickness not less than Schedule 40.
2.1.6 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
Wireway and auxiliary gutters shall be a minimum 4- by 4 inch trade size
conforming to UL 870.
2.1.7 Surface Raceways and Assemblies
Surface metal raceways and multi-outlet assemblies shall conform to NFPA 70.
Receptacles shall conform to NEMA WD 1, Type 5-20R.
2.1.8 Cable Trays
Provide ladder type cable trays conforming to NEMA VE 1.
2.2 WIRE AND CABLE
Conductors installed in conduit shall be copper 600-volt type THHN . All
conductors AWG No. 8 and larger, shall be stranded. All conductors smaller
than AWG No. 8 shall be solid.
Flexible cable shall be Type SO and contain a grounding conductor with
green insulation.
Conductors installed in plenums shall be marked plenum rated.
2.3 SPLICES AND CONNECTORS
Make all splices in AWG No. 8 and smaller with approved indentor crimp-type
connectors and compression tools.
Make all splices in AWG No. 6 and larger with indentor crimp-type
connectors and compression tools . Joints shall be wrapped with an
insulating tape that has an insulation and temperature rating equivalent to
that of the conductor.
2.4 SWITCHES
2.4.1 Safety Switches
Safety switches shall comply with NEMA KS 1, and be the heavy-duty type
with enclosure, voltage, current rating, number of poles, and fusing as
indicated. Switch construction shall be such that, when the switch handle
in the "ON" position, the cover or door cannot be opened. Cover release
device shall be coinproof and be so constructed that an external tool
shall be used to open the cover. Make provisions to lock the handle in the
"OFF" position, but the switch shall not be capable of being locked in the
"ON" position.
Provide switches of the quick-make, quick-break type. Approve terminal
lugs for use with copper conductors.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 7

Safety color coding for identification of safety switches shall conform to
ANSI Z535.1.
2.4.2 Toggle Switches
Toggle switches shall comply with EIA 480, control incandescent, mercury,
and fluorescent lighting fixtures and be of the heavy duty, general
purpose, noninterchangeable flush-type.
Toggle switches shall be commercial grade toggle type, single or double
-pole, three or four-way two-position devices as indicated rated 20
amperes at 277 volts, 60 hertz alternating current (ac) only.
All toggle switches shall be products of the same manufacturer.
2.5 RECEPTACLES
Receptacles shall be commercial grade, 20A, 125 VAC, 2-pole, 3-wire duplex
conforming to NEMA WD 6, NEMA 5-20R.
2.6 OUTLETS, OUTLET BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Outlet boxes for use with conduit systems shall be in accordance with
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 and ANSI/NEMA OS 1 and be not less than 1-1/2 inches deep.
Furnish all pull and junction boxes with screw-fastened covers.
2.7 PANELBOARDS
Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall be the
circuit-breaker type in accordance with NEMA PB 1. Bolt circuit breakers
to the bus. Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable. Buses shall be
copper of the rating indicated, with main lugs or main circuit breaker as
indicated. Provide all panelboards for use on grounded ac systems with a
full-capacity isolated neutral bus and a separate grounding bus bonded to
the panelboard enclosure. Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA 250, Type 1,
in accordance with NEMA PB 1. Provide enclosure fronts with latchable
hinged doors.
2.8 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit-breaker interrupting rating shall be not less than those indicated
and in no event less than 10,000 amperes root-mean-square (rms) symmetrical
at 208 volts, respectively. Multipole circuit breakers shall be the
common-trip type with a single handle. Molded case circuit breakers shall
be bolt-on type conforming to UL 489.
2.9 LAMPS AND LIGHTING FIXTURES
Manufacturers and catalog numbers shown are indicative of the general type
desired and are not intended to restrict the selection to fixtures of any
particular manufacturer. Fixtures with the same salient features and
equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics, of equal
finish and quality, are acceptable. Provide lamps of the proper type and
wattage for each fixture.
Ballasts shall be high power factor and be energy efficient. Ballasts
shall have a Class P terminal protective device for 120 -volt operation as
indicated and be rapid-start fluorescent. Ballasts shall be "A" sound
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 8

ated. Fluorescent lamps shall be standard reduced wattage type.
High intensity discharge (HID) lighting fixtures shall have prewired
integral ballasts and cast aluminum housings complete with tempered glass
lenses suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. Provide
fixtures and lamps.
2.10 DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
General purpose dry-type transformers with windings 600 volts or less shall
be two-winding, 60 hertz, self-cooled in accordance with UL 506. Windings
shall have a minimum of two 2-1/2-percent taps above and below nominal
voltage.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or
between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of
three 90-degree bends, including those bends located immediately at the
outlet or fitting.
Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Avoid trapped conduit runs
where possible. Take care to prevent the lodgment of foreign material in
the conduit, boxes, fittings, and equipment during the course of
construction. Clear any clogged conduit of obstructions or be replaced.
Conduit and raceway runs concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, or
exposed on walls and ceilings 5 feet or more above finished floors and not
subject to mechanical damage may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
3.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit
Make field-made bends and offsets with approved hickey or conduit bending
machine. Conduit elbows larger than 2-1/2 inches shall be long radius.
Provide all conduit stubbed-up through concrete floors for connections to
free-standing equipment with the exception of motor-control centers,
cubicles, and other such items of equipment, with a flush coupling when the
floor slab is of sufficient thickness. Otherwise,provide a floor box set
flush with the finished floor. Conduits installed for future use shall be
terminated with a coupling and plug set flush with the floor.
3.1.2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
EMT shall be grounded in accordance with NFPA 70, using pressure grounding
connectors especially designed for EMT.
3.1.3 Flexible Metallic Conduit
Use flexible metallic conduit to connect recessed fixtures from outlet
boxes in ceilings, transformers, and other approved assemblies.
Bonding wires shall be used in flexible conduit as specified in NFPA 70,
for all circuits. Flexible conduit shall not be considered a ground
conductor.
Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment shall be made with
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 9

flexible metallic conduit.
Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit shall be used in wet and oily
locations and to complete the connection to motor-driven equipment.
3.1.4 Intermediate Conduit
Make all field-made bends and offsets with approved hickey or conduit
bending machine. Use intermediate metal conduit only for indoor
installations.
3.1.5 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Rigid PVC conduit shall be direct buried.
A green insulated copper grounding conductor shall be in conduit with
conductors and be solidly connected to ground at each end. Grounding wires
shall be sized in accordance with NFPA 70.
3.1.6 Wireway and Auxiliary Gutter
Straight sections and fittings shall be bolted together to provide a rigid,
mechanical connection and electrical continuity. Dead ends of wireways and
auxiliary gutters shall be closed. Plug all unused conduit openings.
Wireways for overhead distribution and control circuits shall be supported
at maximum 5-foot intervals.
Auxiliary gutters used to supplement wiring spaces for equipment not
contained in a single enclosure shall contain no switches, overcurrent
devices, appliances, or apparatus and be not more than 30 feet long.
3.1.7 Surface Raceways and Assemblies
Surface raceways shall be mounted plumb and level, with the base and cover
secured. Minimum circuit run shall be three-wire with one wire designated
as ground.
3.1.8 Cable Trays
Support cable trays from ceiling hangers, equipment bays, or floor or wall
supports. Cable trays may be mounted on equipment racks. Provide support
when the free end extends beyond 3 feet. Maximum support spacing shall be 6
feet. Trays 10-inches wide or less shall be supported by one hanger.
Trays greater than 10-inches wide shall be supported by two hangers. Bond
cable trays at splices.
3.2 WIRING
Feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows:
CONDUCTOR
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
COLOR AC
Black
Red
Blue
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 10

CONDUCTOR
Neutral
Equipment Grounds
COLOR AC
White
Green
Conductors up to and including AWG No. 2 shall be manufactured with colored
insulating materials. Conductors larger than AWG No. 2 shall have ends
identified with color plastic tape in outlet, pull, or junction boxes.
Splice in accordance with the NFPA 70. Provide conductor identification
within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made and at
the equipment terminal of each conductor. Terminal and conductor
identification shall match as indicated.
Where several feeders pass through a common pullbox, the feeders shall be
tagged to clearly indicate the electrical characteristics, circuit number,
and panel designation.
3.3 SAFETY SWITCHES
Securely fasten switches to the supporting structure or wall, utilizing a
minimum of four 1/4 inch bolts. Do not use sheet metal screws and small
machine screws for mounting. Do not mount switches in an inaccessible
location or where the passageway to the switch may become obstructed.
Mounting height shall be 5 feet above floor level, when possible.
3.4 WIRING DEVICES
3.4.1 Wall Switches and Receptacles
Install wall switches and receptacles so that when device plates are
applied, the plates will be aligned vertically to within 1/16 inch.
Ground terminal of each flush-mounted receptacle shall be bonded to the
outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper when used with dry wall
type construction.
3.4.2 Device Plates
Device plates for switches that are not within sight of the loads
controlled shall be suitably engraved with a description of the loads.
Device plates and receptacle cover plates for receptacles other than
125-volt, single-phase, duplex, convenience outlets shall be suitably
marked, showing the circuit number, voltage, frequency, phasing, and
amperage available at the receptacle. Required marking shall consist of a
self-adhesive label having 1/4 inch embossed letters.
Device plates for convenience outlets shall be similarly marked indicating
the supply panel and circuit number.
3.5 BOXES AND FITTINGS
Furnish and install pullboxes where necessary in the conduit system to
facilitate conductor installation. Conduit runs longer than 100 feet or
with more than three right-angle bends shall have a pullbox installed at a
convenient intermediate location.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 11

Securely mount boxes and enclosures to the building structure with
supporting facilities independent of the conduit entering or leaving the
boxes.
Mounting height of wall-mounted outlet and switch boxes, measured between
the bottom of the box and the finished floor, shall be in accordance with
ICC/ANSI A117.1 and as follows:
LOCATION
Receptacles in offices
Receptacles in corridors
Receptacles in shops and laboratories
Receptacles in rest rooms
Switches for light control
MOUNTING HEIGHT
18 inches
18 inches
48 inches
48 inches
48 inches
3.6 LAMPS AND LIGHTING FIXTURES
Install new lamps of the proper type and wattage in each fixture. Securely
fasten fixtures and supports to structural members and install parallel and
perpendicular to major axes of structures.
3.7 PANELBOARDS
Securely mount panelboards so that the top operating handle does not exceed
72-inches above the finished floor. Do not mount equipment within 36 inches
of the front of the panel. Directory card information shall be complete
and legible.
3.8 DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Connect dry-type transformers with flexible metallic conduit.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION PLATES AND WARNINGS
Furnish and install identification plates for lighting and power
panelboards, motor control centers, all line voltage heating and
ventilating control panels, fire detector and sprinkler alarms, door bells,
pilot lights, disconnect switches, manual starting switches, and magnetic
starters. Process control devices and pilot lights shall have
identification plates.
Furnish identification plates for all line voltage enclosed circuit
breakers, identifying the equipment served, voltage, phase(s) and power
source. Circuits 480 volts and above shall have conspicuously located
warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements.
3.10 PAINTING
Exposed conduit, supports, fittings, cabinets, pull boxes, and racks shall
be thoroughly cleaned and painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS or Section 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 12

3.11 FIELD TESTING
Perform PT&I tests and provide submittals as specified in Section
01 86 26.07 40 RELIABILITY CENTERED ACCEPTANCE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
Submit Test Reports in accordance with referenced standards in this section.
After completion of the installation and splicing, and prior to energizing
the conductors, perform wire and cable continuity and insulation tests as
herein specified before the conductors are energized.
Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, labor, and personnel
to perform the tests, as herein specified.
Isolate completely all wire and cable from all extraneous electrical
connections at cable terminations and joints. Substation and switchboard
feeder breakers, disconnects in combination motor starters, circuit
breakers in panel boards, and other disconnecting devices shall be used to
isolate the circuits under test.
Perform insulation-resistance test on each field-installed conductor with
respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500
volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated
cable. Take readings after 1 minute and until the reading is constant for
15 seconds. Minimum insulation-resistance values shall not be less than 25
Megohms for 300 volt rated cable and 100 Megohms for 600 volt rated cable.
For circuits with conductor sizes 8AWG and smaller insulation resistance
testing is not required.
Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection (i.e correct
phase conductor, grounded conductor, and grounding conductor wiring) end-to
end. Any damages to existing or new electrical equipment resulting from
contractor mis-wiring will be repaired and re-verified at contractor's
expense. All repairs shall be approved by the CO prior to acceptance of
the repair.
Conduct phase-rotation tests on all three-phase circuits using a
phase-rotation indicating instrument. Perform phase rotation of electrical
connections to connected equipment clockwise, facing the source.
Final acceptance will depend upon the successful performance of wire and
cable under test. Do not energize any conductor until the final test
reports are reviewed and approved by the CO.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 13

SECTION 26 05 19.00 10
INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE
11/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)
AEIC C8
AEIC CS8
(2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power
Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV
(2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power
Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 383
(2003; R 2008) Standard for Qualifying
Class 1E Electric Cables and, Field
Splices for Nuclear Power Generating
Stations 2004
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA WC 70
(2009) Power Cable Rated 2000 V or Less
for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy--S95-658
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Installation Instructions
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Inspections, and Verifications
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Furnish cables on reels or coils. Each cable and the outside of each reel
or coil, shall be plainly marked or tagged to indicate the cable length,
voltage rating, conductor size, and manufacturer's lot number and reel
number. Each coil or reel of cable shall contain only one continuous cable
without splices. Cables for exclusively dc applications, as specified in
paragraph HIGH VOLTAGE TEST SOURCE, shall be identified as such. Shielded
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 1

cables rated 2,001 volts and above shall be reeled and marked in accordance
with Section I of AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8, as applicable. Reels shall remain
the property of the Contractor .
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Rated Circuit Voltages
All wire and cable shall have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance
with NEMA WC 70.
2.1.2 Conductors
2.1.2.1 Material for Conductors
Conductors shall conform to all the applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70,
as applicable, and shall be annealed copper. Copper conductors may be
bare, or tin- or lead-alloy-coated, if required by the type of insulation
used.
2.1.2.2 Size
Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits; No.
10 AWG for current transformer secondary circuits; No. 14 AWG for potential
transformer, relaying, and control circuits; No. 16 AWG for annunciator
circuits; and No. 19 AWG for alarm circuits. Minimum wire sizes for rated
circuit voltages of 2,001 volts and above shall not be less than those
listed for the applicable voltage in NEMA WC 70, as applicable.
2.1.2.3 Stranding
Conductor stranding classes cited herein shall be as defined in NEMA WC 70,
as applicable. Lighting conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid
or have Class B stranding. Any conductors used between stationary and
moving devices, such as hinged doors or panels, shall have Class H or K
stranding. All other conductors shall have Class B or C stranding, except
that conductors shown on the drawings, or in the schedule, as No. 12 AWG
may be 19 strands of No. 25 AWG, and conductors shown as No. 10 AWG may be
19 strands of No. 22 AWG.
2.1.2.4 Conductor Shielding
Use conductor shielding conforming to NEMA WC 70, as applicable, on power
cables having a rated circuit voltage above 2,000 volts. In addition,
conductor shielding for shielded cables shall also comply with Section C of
AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8. Strict precautions shall be taken after application
of the conductor shielding to prevent the inclusion of voids or
contamination between the conductor shielding and the subsequently applied
insulation.
2.1.2.5 Separator Tape
Where conductor shielding, strand filling, or other special conductor
treatment is not required, a separator tape between conductor and
insulation is permitted.
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 2

2.1.3 Insulation
2.1.3.1 Insulation Material
Provide insulation which is a cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene
(XLPE) type, meeting the requirements of NEMA WC 70, as applicable, or an
ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) type meeting the requirements of NEMA WC 70.
For shielded cables of rated circuit voltages above 2,000 volts, the
following provisions shall also apply:
a. XLPE, if used, shall be tree-retardant.
b. Insulation shall be chemically bonded to conductor shielding.
c. The insulation material and its manufacturing, handling, extrusion
and vulcanizing processes, shall all be subject to strict procedures to
prevent the inclusion of voids, contamination, or other irregularities
on or in the insulation. Insulation material shall be inspected for
voids and contaminants. Inspection methods, and maximum allowable void
and contaminant content shall be in accordance with Section B of AEIC C8
or AEIC CS8, as applicable.
d. Cables with repaired insulation defects discovered during factory
testing, or with splices or insulation joints, are not acceptable .
2.1.3.2 Insulation Thickness
The insulation thickness for each conductor shall be based on its rated
circuit voltage.
a. Power Cables/Single-Conductor Control Cables, 2,000 Volts and Below
- The insulation thickness for single-conductor cables rated 2,000
volts and below shall be as required by NEMA WC 70, as applicable.
Some thicknesses of NEMA WC 70 will be permitted only for
single-conductor cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulated
cables without a jacket. NEMA WC 70 ethylene-propylene
rubber-insulated conductors shall have a jacket.
b. Power Cables, Rated 2,001 Volts and Above - Thickness of insulation
for power cables rated 2,001 volts and above shall be in accordance
with the following:
(1) Non-shielded cables, 2,001 to 5,000 volts, shall comply with
NEMA WC 70, as applicable.
(2) Shielded cables rated 2,001 volts and above shall comply with
Column B of Table B1, of AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8, as applicable.
c. Multiple-Conductor Control Cables - The insulation thickness of
multiple-conductor cables used for control and related purposes shall
be as required by NEMA WC 70, as applicable.
2.1.3.3 Insulation Shielding
Unless otherwise specified, provide insulation shielding for conductors
having rated circuit voltages of 2,001 volts and above. The voltage limits
above which insulation shielding is required, and the material
requirements, are given in NEMA WC 70, as applicable. The material, if
thermosetting, shall meet the wafer boil test requirements as described in
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 3

Section D of AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8, as applicable. The method of shielding
shall be in accordance with the current practice of the industry; however,
the application process shall include strict precautions to prevent voids
or contamination between the insulation and the nonmetallic component.
Voids, protrusions, and indentations of the shield shall not exceed the
maximum allowances specified in Section C of AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8, as
applicable. The cable shall be capable of operating without damage or
excessive temperature when the shield is grounded at both ends of each
conductor. All components of the shielding system shall remain tightly
applied to the components they enclose after handling and installation in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Shielding systems
which require heat to remove will not be permitted unless specifically
approved.
2.1.4 Jackets
All cables shall have jackets meeting the requirements of NEMA WC 70, as
applicable, and as specified herein. Individual conductors of
multiple-conductor cables shall be required to have jackets only if they
are necessary for the conductor to meet other specifications herein.
Jackets of single-conductor cables and of individual conductors of
multiple-conductor cables, except for shielded cables, shall be in direct
contact and adhere or be vulcanized to the conductor insulation.
Multiple-conductor cables and shielded single-conductor cables shall be
provided with a common overall jacket, which shall be tightly and
concentrically formed around the core. Repaired jacket defects found and
corrected during manufacturing are permitted if the cable, including
jacket, afterward fully meets these specifications and the requirements of
the applicable standards.
2.1.4.1 Jacket Material
The jacket shall be one of the materials listed below.
a. General Use
(1) Heavy-duty black neoprene (NEMA WC 70).
(2) Heavy-duty chlorosulfonated polyethylene (NEMA WC 70).
(3) Heavy-duty cross-linked (thermoset) chlorinated polyethylene (
NEMA WC 70).
b. Accessible Use Only, 2,000 Volts or Less - Cables installed where
they are entirely accessible, such as cable trays and raceways with
removable covers, or where they pass through less than 10 feet of
exposed conduit only, shall have jackets of one of the materials
specified in above paragraph GENERAL USE, or the jackets may be of one
of the following:
(1) General-purpose neoprene (NEMA WC 70).
(2) Black polyethylene (NEMA WC 70).
(3) Thermoplastic chlorinated polyethylene (NEMA WC 70).
2.1.4.2 Jacket Thickness
The minimum thickness of the jackets at any point shall be not less than 80
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 4

percent of the respective nominal thicknesses specified below.
a. Multiple-Conductor Cables - Thickness of the jackets of the
individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables shall be as required
by NEMA WC 70, and shall be in addition to the conductor insulation
thickness required by Column B of Table 3-1 of the applicable NEMA
publication for the insulation used. Thickness of the outer jackets or
sheaths of the assembled multiple-conductor cables shall be as required
by NEMA WC 70.
b. Single-Conductor Cables - Single-conductor cables, if nonshielded,
shall have a jacket thickness as specified in NEMA WC 70. If shielded,
the jacket thickness shall be in accordance with the requirements of
NEMA WC 70.
2.2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION
2.2.1 Color-Coding
Insulation of individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables shall be
color-coded in accordance with NEMA WC 70, except that colored braids will
not be permitted. Only one color-code method shall be used for each cable
construction type. Control cable color-coding shall be in accordance with
NEMA WC 70 . Power cable color-coding shall be black for Phase A, red for
Phase B, blue for Phase C, white for grounded neutral, and green for an
insulated grounding conductor, if included.
2.2.2 Shielded Cables Rated 2,001 Volts and Above
Marking shall be in accordance with Section H of AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8, as
applicable.
2.2.3 Cabling
Individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables shall be assembled with
flame-and moisture-resistant fillers, binders, and a lay conforming to
NEMA WC 70, except that flat twin cables will not be permitted. Fillers
shall be used in the interstices of multiple-conductor round cables with a
common covering where necessary to give the completed cable a substantially
circular cross section. Fillers shall be non-hygroscopic material,
compatible with the cable insulation, jacket, and other components of the
cable. The rubber-filled or other approved type of binding tape shall
consist of a material that is compatible with the other components of the
cable and shall be lapped at least 10 percent of its width.
2.2.4 Dimensional Tolerance
The outside diameters of single-conductor cables and of multiple-conductor
cables shall not vary more than 5 percent and 10 percent, respectively,
from the manufacturer's published catalog data.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Submit cable manufacturing data as requested. The following information
shall be provided by the cable manufacturer for each size, conductor
quantity, and type of cable furnished:
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 5

a. Minimum bending radius, in inches - For multiple-conductor cables,
this information shall be provided for both the individual conductors
and the multiple-conductor cable.
b. Pulling tension and sidewall pressure limits, in pounds.
c. Instructions for stripping semiconducting insulation shields, if
furnished, with minimum effort without damaging the insulation.
d. Upon request, compatibility of cable materials and construction
with specific materials and hardware manufactured by others shall be
stated. Also, if requested, recommendations shall be provided for
various cable operations, including installing, splicing, terminating,
etc.
3.2 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
3.2.1 Cable Data
Manufacture of the wire and cable shall not be started until all materials
to be used in the fabrication of the finished wire or cable have been
approved by the Contracting Officer. Cable data shall be submitted for
approval including dimensioned sketches showing cable construction, and
sufficient additional data to show that these specifications will be
satisfied.
3.2.2 Inspection and Tests
Inspection and tests of wire and cable furnished under these specifications
shall be made by and at the plant of the manufacturer, and shall be
witnessed by the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative,
unless waived in writing. The Government may perform further tests before
or after installation. Testing in general shall comply with NEMA WC 70.
Specific tests required for particular materials, components, and completed
cables shall be as specified in the sections of the above standards
applicable to those materials, components, and cable types. Tests shall
also be performed in accordance with the additional requirements specified
below. Submit 6 certified copies of test reports.
3.2.2.1 High-Voltage Test Source
Where the applicable standards allow a choice, high-voltage tests for
cables to be used exclusively on dc circuits shall be made with dc test
voltages. Cables to be used exclusively on ac circuits shall be tested
with ac test voltages. If both ac and dc will be present, on either the
same or separate conductors of the cable, ac test voltages shall be used.
3.2.2.2 Shielded Cables Rated 2,001 Volts or Greater
The following tests shall be performed in addition to those specified
above. Section or paragraph references are to AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8 as
applicable, unless otherwise stated.
a. High potential test voltages shall be as required by Table B1 of
AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8 as applicable, rather than by NEMA WC 70.
b. If high potential testing is done with an ac test voltage as
specified in paragraph HIGH-VOLTAGE TEST SOURCE, an additional test
shall be made using a dc test voltage rated at 75 percent of the
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 6

specified full dc test voltage, for 5 consecutive minutes.
c. Production sampling tests shall be performed in accordance with
Section D. Sampling frequency and failure contingencies shall be in
accordance with paragraph G.3. Unless otherwise approved, samples
shall not be taken from the middle of extruder runs of insulation or
shielding made only for one continuous shipping length of cable, if
such sampling will result in the need to repair the sampled area.
d. Partial discharge tests shall be performed in accordance with
Section E, paragraph E.2, and Section F.
3.2.2.3 Flame Tests
All multiple-conductor and single-conductor cable assemblies shall pass
IEEE 383 flame tests, paragraph 2.5, using the ribbon gas burner.
Single-conductor cables and individual conductors of multiple-conductor
cables shall pass the flame test of NEMA WC 70. If such tests, however,
have previously been made on identical cables, these tests need not be
repeated. Instead, certified reports of the original qualifying tests shall
be submitted. In this case the reports furnished under paragraph REPORTS,
shall verify that all of each cable's materials, construction, and
dimensions are the same as those in the qualifying tests.
3.2.2.4 Independent Tests
The Government may at any time make visual inspections, continuity or
resistance checks, insulation resistance readings, power factor tests, or
dc high-potential tests at field test values. A cable's failure to pass
these tests and inspections, or failure to produce readings consistent with
acceptable values for the application, will be grounds for rejection of the
cable.
3.2.2.5 Reports
Furnish results of tests made. No wire or cable shall be shipped until
authorized. Lot number and reel or coil number of wire and cable tested
shall be indicated on the test reports.
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 7

__________________________________________________________________
| |
| WIRE TABLE |
|__________________________________________________________________|
| Size, Rated |
| Item AWG or No. of Circuit Quantity |
| No. kcmil Conds. Voltage Stranding Comments lin ft.|
|__________________________________________________________________|
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| _____ ______ ______ _______ _________ __________ _________ |
| |
| Class ___ stranding may be substituted for ___ where |
| indicated by "*". |
|__________________________________________________________________|
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 19.00 10 Page 8

SECTION 26 05 71.00 40
LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
05/11
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI C39.1
(1981; R 1992) Requirements for Electrical
Analog Indicating Instruments
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A167
ASTM A48/A48M
ASTM D 877
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
(2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Gray Iron Castings
(2002; R 2007) Standard Test Method for
Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using Disk Electrodes
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)
EIA 443
(1979) NARM Standard for Solid State
Relays Service
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C37.17
IEEE C37.90
IEEE C57.13
IEEE C63.2
IEEE C63.4
(1997) Standard for Trip Devices for AC
and General-Purpose DC Low-Voltage Power
Circuit Breakers
(2005) Standard for Relays and Relay
Systems Associated With Electric Power
Apparatus
(2008) Standard Requirements for
Instrument Transformers
(2009) Standard for Electromagnetic Noise
and Field Strength Instrumentation, 10 Hz
to 40 GHz - Specifications
(2009) American National Standard for
Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise
Emissions from Low-Voltage Electrical and
Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 1

to 40 GHz
IPC - ASSOCIATION CONNECTING ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES (IPC)
IPC D330
(1992) Design Guide Manual
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C12.1
ANSI C78.23
NEMA 107
NEMA 250
NEMA AB 3
NEMA FU 1
NEMA ICS 1
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 6
(2008) Electric Meters Code for
Electricity Metering
(1995; R 2003) American National Standard
for Incandescent Lamps - Miscellaneous
Types
(1987; R 1993) Methods of Measurement of
Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) of
High-Voltage Apparatus (inactive)
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2006) Molded Case Circuit Breakers and
Their Application
(2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
(1993; R 2006) Enclosures
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 20
UL 489
UL 50
UL 508
(2010) General-Use Snap Switches
(2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
(2007) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations
(1999; Reprint Apr 2010) Industrial
Control Equipment
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 2

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Prior to the beginning of construction, submit manufactures
equipment and performance data for the following items including
use life, system functional flows, safety features, and mechanical
automated details..
Fuses
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Connection Diagrams and Fabrication Drawings for the
following items in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General
Requirements," of this section.
Submit Installation drawings for the following items in accordance
with the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.
Control Devices G
Protective Devices G
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's equipment and performance data for the
following items including use life, system functional flows,
safety features, and mechanical automated details.
Motor Control G
Instrument Transformers G
Enclosures G
Circuit Breakers G
Control Devices G
Time Switches G
Indicating Instruments G
Indicating Lights G
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for Circuit Tests on similar motor-control or
submit motor-circuit protector (MCP) units under actual conditions
in lieu of factory tests on the actual units provided. Also
include dielectric tests.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit manufacturer's instructions for the following items,
including special provisions required to install equipment
components and system packages. Provide detail on resistance
impedances, hazards and safety precautions within the special
notices.
Control Devices G
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 3

Protective Devices G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data G
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the following
equipment:
Manual Motor Controllers G
Magnetic Motor Controllers G
Combination Motor Controllers G
Circuit Breakers G
Time Switches G
Indicating Instruments G
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
work specified in this section.
Submit Connection Diagrams showing the relations and connections of control
devices and protective devices by showing the general physical layout of
all controls, the interconnection of one system (or portion of system) with
another, and internal tubing, wiring, and other devices.
Submit Fabrication Drawings for control devices and protective devices
consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the
factory.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR CONTROL
Conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and UL 508 for motor controllers.
Provide controllers that have thermal overload protection in each phase.
2.1.1 Manual Motor Controllers
Provide full-voltage, manually operated manual motor controllers for the
control and protection of single-phase 60-hertz ac fractional-horsepower
squirrel-cage induction motors.
Provide single-throw, single- or double-pole, three-position controllers
rated at not more than 1 horsepower at 115- and 230-volts single phase.
Include a supporting base or body of electrical insulating material with
enclosed switching mechanism, yoke, thermal overload relay, and terminal
connectors. Provide controllers that clearly indicate operating
condition: on, off, or tripped.
Provide toggle- or key-operated type manual motor controllers as indicated
and arrange so that they are lockable with a padlock in the "OFF" position.
Provide recessed manual motor controllers for single-speed,
fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage induction motors, that include a single
controller and indicating light in a 4-inch square wall outlet box, for
flush-wiring devices with matching corrosion-resistant steel flush cover
plate. Provide surface-mounted manual motor controllers for single-speed,
fractional-horsepower squirrel cage induction motors that include a single
controller and indicating light in a NEMA 250, Type 1 general-purpose
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 4

enclosure.
Provide recessed and surface-mounted manual motor controllers for two-speed,
fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage induction motors, that include two
controllers, two indicating lights, and a selector switch in a
multiple-gang wall outlet box for flush-wiring devices, with matching
corrosion-resistant steel flush-cover plate. Provide surface-mounted
manual motor controllers for two-speed fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage
induction motors, that include two controllers, two indicating lights, and
a selector switch in a NEMA 250, Type 1 general-purpose enclosure.
2.1.2 Magnetic Motor Controllers
2.1.2.1 Full-Voltage Controllers
Provide full-voltage, full magnetic devices in accordance with NEMA ICS 1,
NEMA ICS 2, and UL 508for magnetic motor controllers for the control and
protection of single- and three-phase, 60-hertz, squirrel-cage induction
motors.
Provide operating coil assembly that operates satisfactorily between 85 and
110 percent of rated coil voltage. Provide 120 volts, 60 hertz motor
control circuits.
Provide controller with two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary
contacts rated per NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 in addition to the sealing-in
contact for control circuits.
Provide solderless pressure wire terminal connectors for line-and
load-connections to controllers.
Include three manual reset thermal overload devices for overcurrent
protection, one in each pole of the controller. Provide thermal overload
relays of bimetallic nonadjustable type with continuous current ratings and
service-limit current ratings, and with a plus or minus 15 percent
adjustment to compensate for ambient operating conditions.
Provide an externally operable manual-reset button to re-establish control
power to the holding coil of the electromagnet. After the controller has
tripped from overload, ensure that resetting the motor-overload device does
not restart the motor.
Provide enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.1.2.2 Reduced-Voltage Starters
Conform to the requirements for full-voltage controllers for
reduced-voltage starters, except for voltage, and to the following
additional requirements.
Fully protect the motor during all phases of motor starting with an
overload device in each motor leg. Rate starter contacts to withstand the
switching surges during selector to full voltage. Provide starter that
contains the necessary sensing and timing devices to monitor motor
operation and select the correct time for selector to full voltage.
Adequately ventilate resistors and autotransformers used for starting.
Ventilate solid-state starters for starting cycles as well as any follow-on
restart-run cycles. Operate external control circuits or solid-state
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 5

starters at a maximum of 120 volts ac.
For solid-state starters, provide adjustable starting torque from 0 to 50
percent of applied voltage, minimum. Provide autotransformer starters with
a minimum of three taps above 50 percent reduced voltage.
2.1.3 Combination Motor Controllers
Following requirements are in addition to the requirements specified for
magnetic motor controller:
Provide combination motor controllers for the control and protection of
single-and three-phase 60-hertz alternating-current squirrel-cage
induction motors with branch-circuit disconnecting and protective
devices in accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.
For combination motor controllers include magnetic motor controllers
and molded-case circuit breakers or MCP in metal enclosures in
accordance with NEMA 250 or motor-control center draw-out assemblies
with control-power transformers, selector switches, pushbuttons, and
indicating lights as follows:
Provide full-voltage, full-magnetic devices as specified in this
section under paragraph entitled, "Remote-Control Station
Enclosures." for magnetic motor controllers and enclosures.
Provide thermal-magnetic breakers as specified in paragraph
entitled, "Manual Motor Controllers."for molded-case circuit
breakers. Manufacturer's standard MCP may be used in lieu of
molded-case circuit breakers.
Provide control-power transformers 120-volt ac maximum, selector
switches, pushbuttons, and pilot lights as required.
Identify combination motor controllers with identification plates
affixed to front cover of the controller.
2.1.3.1 Nonreversing Combination Motor Controllers
Following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic
motor controllers:
For nonreversing combination motor controllers for the control and
protection of single-speed squirrel-cage induction motors, include a
magnetic controller with molded-case circuit breaker or MCP with
selector switch or start/stop pushbutton and indicating light in the
cover of the enclosure.
Provide rating of single and three-phase single-speed full-voltage
magnetic controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty in accordance
with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide wiring and connections for full-voltage single-speed magnetic
controllers in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
2.1.3.2 Reversing Combination Motor Controllers
Following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic
motor controllers:
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 6

For reversing combination motor controllers for the control and protection
of single-speed squirrel-cage induction motors, include two interlocked
magnetic controllers with molded-case circuit breaker or MCP, with selector
switch or forward/reverse/stop pushbutton and two indicating lights in the
cover of the enclosure. Indicate with indicating lights the forward and
reverse running connection of the motor controller.
Provide rating of single and three-phase single-speed full-voltage magnetic
controllers for plug-stop, plug-reverse, or jogging duty in accordance with
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide wiring and connections for full-voltage single-speed magnetic
controllers in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
2.1.3.3 Two-Speed Combination Motor Controllers
Following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic
motor controllers:
For two-speed combination motor controllers for the control and
protection of single- and two-winding, two-speed, three-phase,
squirrel-cage induction motors, include two magnetic controllers with
molded-case circuit breaker or MCP, with selector switch or
fast/slow/stop pushbutton and two indicating lights in the cover of the
enclosure. Indicate with indicating lights the high- and low-speed
running connection of the motor controller.
Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage, magnetic
controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty for constant- and
variable-torque motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage, magnetic
controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty for constant-horsepower
motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage, magnetic
controllers for plug-stop, plug-reverse, or jogging duty for
constant-torque, variable-torque, and constant horsepower motors in
accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
2.2 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Comply with the interference requirements listed below, measured in
accordance with IEEE C63.2, IEEE C63.4, and NEMA 107 for Instrument
transformers.
Preferred
Radio Influence
Basic Nominal Test Voltage Test Voltage Voltage Level,
Insulation Insulation System for Potential for Current Microvolts
Class, Level, Voltage, Transformers, Transformers, Dry Oil
kV kV kV kV kV Type Filled
__________________________________________________________________________
0.6 10 ....... ..... 0.76 250 250
1.2 30 0.208 0.132 0.76 250 250
0.416 0.264
0.832 0.528
1.04 0.66
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 7

Preferred Radio Influence
Basic Nominal Test Voltage Test Voltage Voltage Level,
Insulation Insulation System for Potential for Current Microvolts
Class, Level, Voltage, Transformers, Transformers, Dry Oil
kV kV kV kV kV Type Filled
__________________________________________________________________________
2.5 45 2.40 1.52 1.67 250 250
5.0 60 4.16 2.64 3.34 250 250
4.80 3.04
8.7 75 7.20 4.57 5.77 250 250
8.32 5.28
15L or 15H 95-110 12.00 7.62 9.41 1000 250
12.47 7.92
14.40 9.14
25 150 23.00 14.60 15.70 2500 650
34.5 200 34.50 21.90 23.0 .... 650
46 250 46.00 29.20 29.30 .... 1250
69 350 69.00 43.80 44.00 .... 1250
92 450 92.00 58.40 58.40 .... 2500
115 550 115.00 73.40 73.40 .... 2500
138 650 138.00 88.00 88.00 .... 2500
2.2.1 Current Transformers
Provide current transformers that conform to IEEE C57.13 for installation
in metal-clad switchgear. Use standard 3-A secondary transformer.
Provide wound type transformers.
Provide transformers that have single secondary winding.
Provide transformers that are complete with secondary short-circuiting
device.
For window-type current transformers, provide indoor dry type construction
with secondary current ratings as indicated with specified burden,
frequency, and accuracy.
2.2.2 Potential Transformers
For potential transformers, conform to IEEE C57.13 for installation in
metal-clad switchgear. Use standard 120-volt secondary transformers.
Provide transformers that have tapped secondary.
Provide burden, frequency, and accuracy as required.
For disconnecting potential transformers with integral fuse mountings and
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 8

current-limiting fuses, provide indoor dry type two-winding construction
with primary and secondary voltage ratings as required.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
2.3.1 Equipment Enclosures
Provide enclosures for equipment in accordance with NEMA 250.
Contain equipment installed inside, clean, dry locations in a NEMA Type 1,
general-purpose sheet-steel enclosure.
Contain equipment installed in wet locations in a NEMA Type 4 watertight,
corrosion-resistant sheet-steel enclosure, constructed to prevent entrance
of water when tested in accordance with NEMA ICS 6 for Type 4 enclosures.
Contain equipment installed in industrial locations in a NEMA Type 12
industrial use, sheet-steel enclosure, constructed to prevent the entrance
of dust, lint, fibers, flyings, oil, and coolant seepage.
Fabricate sheet-steel enclosures from uncoated carbon-steel sheets of
commercial quality, with box dimensions and thickness of sheet steel in
accordance with UL 50.
Fabricate steel enclosures from corrosion-resistant, chromium-nickel steel
sheet conforming to ASTM A167 Type 300 series with ASM No. 4
general-purpose polished finish, with box dimensions and thickness of sheet
steel in accordance with UL 50.
Provide cast-iron enclosures from gray-iron castings conforming to
ASTM A48/A48M with tensile-strength classification recognized as suitable
for the application. Provide cast metal enclosures that are not less than
1/8-inch thick at every point, of greater thickness at reinforcing ribs and
door edges, and not less than 1/4-inch thick at tapped holes for conduits.
2.3.2 Remote-Control Station Enclosures
Provide remote-control station enclosures for pushbuttons, selector
switches, and indicating lights in accordance with the appropriate articles
of NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA 250.
Contain remote-control stations installed in indoor, clean, dry locations
in NEMA Type 1 general-purpose, sheet-steel enclosures. Contain recessed
remote-control stations in standard wall outlet boxes with matching
corrosion-resistant steel flush cover plate.
Contain remote-control stations installed in wet locations in NEMA Type 4
watertight, corrosion-resistant sheet-steel enclosures constructed to
prevent entrance of water when tested in accordance with NEMA ICS 6 and
NEMA 250 for Type 4 enclosures.
Contain remote-control stations installed in wet locations in NEMA Type 4
watertight, cast-iron enclosures, constructed to prevent entrance of water
when tested in accordance with NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA 250 for Type 4
enclosures.
Contain remote-control stations installed in dry noncombustible dust-laden
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 9

atmospheres in NEMA Type 12 dusttight, cast-iron enclosures with gaskets or
their equivalent to prevent the entrance of dust.
Contain remote-control stations installed in industrial locations in NEMA
Type 12 industrial-use, sheet-steel enclosures, constructed to prevent the
entrance of dust, lint, fibers, flyings, oil, and coolant seepage.
Contain remote-control stations installed in industrial locations in NEMA
Type 12 industrial-use, cast-iron enclosures, constructed to prevent the
entrance of dust, lint, fibers, flyings, oil, and coolant seepage.
Fabricate sheet-steel enclosures from uncoated carbon-steel sheets of
commercial quality, with box dimensions and thickness of sheet steel in
accordance with UL 50.
Fabricate steel enclosures from corrosion-resistant, chromium-nickel steel
sheet, conforming to ASTM A167, Type 300 series with ASM No. 4
general-purpose polished finish, with box dimensions and thickness of sheet
steel in accordance with UL 50.
Install remote-control stations with the centerline 66 inches above the
finished floor.
2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Provide circuit breakers that conform to UL 489, and NEMA AB 3.
2.4.1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Provide molded case, manually operated, trip-free, circuit breakers, with
inverse-time thermal-overload protection and instantaneous magnetic
short-circuit protection as required. Completely enclose circuit breakers
in a molded case, with the calibrated sensing element factory-sealed to
prevent tampering.
Locate thermal-magnetic tripping elements in each pole of the circuit
breaker, and provide inverse-time-delay thermal overload protection and
instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protection. Provide instantaneous
magnetic tripping element, that is adjustable and accessible from the front
of the breaker on frame sizes larger than 100 amperes.
Size breaker as required for the continuous current rating of the
circuit. Provide breaker class as required.
Provide sufficient interrupting capacity of the panel and lighting branch
circuit breakers, to successfully interrupt the maximum short-circuit
current imposed on the circuit at the breaker terminals. Provide circuit
breaker interrupting capacities with a minimum of 10,000 amperes and that
conform to NEMA AB 3.
Provide the common-trip type multipole circuit breakers having a single
operating handle and a two-position on/off indication. Provide circuit
breakers with temperature compensation for operation in an ambient
temperature of 104 degrees F. Provide circuit breakers that have root mean
square (rms) symmetrical interrupting ratings sufficient to protect the
circuit being supplied. Interrupting ratings may have selective type
tripping (time delay, magnetic, thermal, or ground fault).
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 10

Provide phenolic composition breaker body capable of having such
accessories as handle-extension, handle-locking, and padlocking devices
attached where required.
Provide circuit breakers used for meter circuit disconnects that meet the
applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and that are of the motor-circuit
protector type.
For circuit breakers used for service disconnection, provide an enclosed
circuit-breaker type with external handle for manual operation. Provide
sheet metal enclosures with a hinged cover suitable for surface mounting.
2.4.2 Enclosed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
For enclosed circuit breakers, provide thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit
breakers in surface-mounted, nonventilated enclosures conforming to the
appropriate articles of NEMA 250 and UL 489.
Provide enclosed circuit breakers in nonhazardous locations as follows:
2.5 FUSES
Contain circuit breakers installed inside clean, dry locations in NEMA
Type 1, general purpose sheet steel enclosures.
Contain circuit breakers installed in unprotected outdoor locations, in
NEMA Type 3R, weather-resistant sheet steel enclosures that are
splashproof, weatherproof, sleetproof, and moisture resistant.
Contain circuit breakers installed in wet locations, in NEMA Type 4,
watertight corrosion-resistant sheet steel enclosures constructed to
prevent entrance of water.
Contain circuit breakers installed in wet locations in NEMA Type 4,
watertight cast-iron enclosures, constructed to prevent entrance of
water when tested in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 for Type 4 enclosures.
Contain circuit breakers installed in dry, noncombustible dust-laden
atmospheres in NEMA Type 5, dusttight corrosion-resistant sheet steel
enclosures, with gaskets or their equivalent to prevent the entrance of
dust.
Contain circuit breakers installed in dry, noncombustible, dust-laden
atmospheres in NEMA Type 5, dusttight cast-iron enclosures, with
gaskets or their equivalent to prevent the entrance of dust.
Contain circuit breakers installed in industrial locations in NEMA Type
12, industrial-use sheet steel enclosures, constructed to prevent the
entrance of dust, lint, fibers and flyings, and oil and coolant seepage.
Fabricate steel enclosures from corrosion-resistant steel sheet,
conforming to ASTM A167, 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, with box
dimensions and thickness of sheet steel in accordance with UL 50.
Provide a complete set of fuses for all switches and switchgear. Rate fuses
that have a voltage rating of not less than the circuit voltage.
Make no change in continuous-current rating, interrupting rating, and
clearing or melting time of fuses unless written permission has first been
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 11

secured.
Provide nonrenewable cartridge type fuses for ratings 30 amperes, 125 volts
or less. Provide renewable cartridge type fuses for ratings above 30
amperes 600 volts or less with time-delay dual elements, except where
otherwise indicated. Conform to NEMA FU 1 for fuses.
Install special fuses such as extra-high interrupting-capacity fuses, fuses
for welding machines, and capacitor fuses where required. Plug fuses are
not permitted.
Label fuses showing UL class, interrupting rating, and time-delay
characteristics, when applicable. Additionally, clearly list fuse
information on equipment drawings.
Provide porcelain fuse holders when field-mounted in a cabinet or box. Do
not use fuse holders made of such materials as ebony asbestos, Bakelite, or
pressed fiber for field installation.
2.6 CONTROL DEVICES
2.6.1 Magnetic Contactors
Provide magnetic contactors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 as
required for the control of low-voltage, 60-hertz, tungsten-lamp loads,
fluorescent-lamp loads, resistance-heating loads, and the primary windings
of low-voltage transformers.
Provide core-and-coil assembly that operates satisfactorily with coil
voltage between 85 and 110 percent of its voltage rating.
Provide contactor that is designed with a normally open holding circuit
auxiliary contact for control circuits, with a rating in accordance with
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Furnish solderless pressure wire terminal connectors, or make available for
line-and-load connections to contactors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and
NEMA ICS 2.
Provide magnetic contactors with a rating in accordance with NEMA ICS 1and
NEMA ICS 2.
2.6.2 Control-Circuit Transformers
Provide control-circuit transformers within the enclosure of magnetic
contactors and motor controllers when the line voltage is in excess of 120
volts. Provide encapsulated dry type, single-phase, 60-hertz transformer,
with a 120-volt (or 24-volt) isolated secondary winding.
Do not provide a transformer with a rated primary voltage less than the
rated voltage of the controller, or a rated secondary current less than the
continuous-duty current of the control circuit.
Provide voltage regulation of the transformer such that, with rated primary
voltage and frequency, the secondary voltage is not less than 95 percent
nor more than 105 percent of rated secondary voltage.
Provide source of supply for control-circuit transformers at the load side
of the main disconnecting device. Protect secondary winding of the
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 12

transformer and control-circuit wiring against overloads and short
circuits, with fuses selected in accordance with NEMA ICS 6. Ground
secondary winding of the control-circuit transformer in accordance with
NEMA ICS 6.
2.6.3 Magnetic Control Relays
Provide magnetic control relays for energizing and de-energizing the coils
of magnetic contactors or other magnetically operated devices, in response
to variations in the conditions of electric control devices in accordance
with NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide core-and-coil assembly that operates satisfactorily with coil
voltages between 85 and 110 percent of their voltage rating.
Provide relays that are designed to accommodate normally open and normally
closed contacts.
Provide 120 -volt, 60-hertz, Class AIB magnetic control relays with a
continuous contact rating of 10 amperes, and with current-making and
-breaking ability in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2, two
normally open and two normally closed.
2.6.4 Pushbuttons and Switches
2.6.4.1 Pushbuttons
For pushbuttons for low-voltage ac full-voltage magnetic controllers,
provide heavy-duty oiltight NEMA 250, Type 1, momentary-contact devices
rated 600 volts, with pilot light, and with the number of buttons and the
marking of identification plates as shown. Furnish pushbutton color code
in accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
Provide pushbuttons that are designed with normally open, circuit-closing
contacts; normally closed circuit-opening contacts; and two-circuit
normally open and normally closed circuit-closing and -opening contacts.
Provide pushbutton-contact ratings in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and
NEMA ICS 2 with contact designation A600.
Identify pushbuttons in remote control stations with identification plates
affixed to front cover in a prominent location. Carry the identification
of the system being controlled on the identification plate.
2.6.4.2 Selector Switches
Provide heavy-duty oiltight maintained-contact selector switches for
low-voltage control circuits, with the number of positions and the marking
of identification plates in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Identify selector switches in remote control stations with engraved
identification plates affixed to front cover in a prominent location.
Carry the identification of the system being controlled on the
identification plate.
2.6.4.3 Ammeter Selector Switches
Provide rotary multistage snap-action type ammeter selector switches for
switchgear in accordance with UL 20 with silver-plated contacts rated for
600 volts ac or dc. Provide a manually operated, four-position selector
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 13

switch rated for 600 volts, 20 amperes, minimum, and designed to permit
current readings on each bus of the main bus from a single indicating
instrument. Mount ammeter switch on the hinged front panel of the
switchgear compartment and completely isolate it from high-voltage
circuits, with engraved escutcheon plate.
Provide a oval type selector switch handle.
2.6.4.4 Voltmeter Selector Switches
Provide rotary snap-action type voltmeter selector switches for switchgear
in accordance with UL 20 with silver-plated contacts rated for 600 volts ac
or dc. Provide manually operated, four-position switch designed to permit
voltage readings on each phase of the main bus from a single indicating
instrument. Mount voltmeter switch on the hinged front panel of the
switchgear compartment and completely isolate from high-voltage circuits,
and with engraved escutcheon plate.
Provide a oval type selector switch handle.
2.6.4.5 Miscellaneous Switches
Provide float, limit, door, pressure, proximity, and other types of
switches in accordance with IPC D330 and of the types and classes indicated.
2.7 TIME SWITCHES
Provide time switches for the control of tungsten-lamp loads,
fluorescent-lamp loads, resistive-heating loads, motors, and magnetically
operated devices, consisting of a motor-driven time dial and switch
assembly in a NEMA 250, Type 1 general-purpose enclosure.
Provide motor drives consisting of 120-volt, single-phase, 60-hertz,
heavy-duty, self-starting synchronous motors, directly connected to the
time dial through a geartrain operating mechanism. Provide a spring-wound
stored-energy source of reserve power that will automatically operate the
mechanism for a period of not less than 12 hours in case of electric power
failure. Provide spring that automatically rewinds electrically in not
more than 3 hours of time after electric power is restored.
Include a heavy-duty general-purpose precision snap-action switch in
accordance with UL 20 for switch mechanism, with provision for a manual
"OFF" and "ON" operation of the switch.
Provide time switches for the control of 120/240-volt, 2- and 3-wire,
single-phase, 60-hertz circuits and 120/208-volt, three-phase, 4-wire,
60-hertz circuits, with a continuous-current tungsten-lamp load rating of
35 amperes.
Provide astronomic type time dials which automatically change settings
each day, in accordance with the seasonal time changes in sunrise and
sunset. Provide astronomic type dials that have adjustable on and off
trippers, for repetitive switching operations at solar time each day and
each day in the year and that make one revolution in a 24-hour period of
time. Provide time dials that are designed to operate in the "ON" position
at sunset and be fully adjustable upward in 15-minute intervals of time
throughout each day, and that indicate the day and month of the year.
Calibrate dial in 15-minute intervals over a 24-hour period of time around
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 14

its circumference. Make provision to defeat the switching operation over
weekends or up to 6 preselected calendar days each week.
2.8 PROTECTIVE RELAYS
2.8.1 Overcurrent Relays
Conform to IEEE C37.90 for overcurrent relays.
For protection against phase and ground faults, provide single-phase
nondirectional removable induction type overcurrent relays with built-in
testing facilities designed for operation on the dc or ac control circuit
indicated.
Provide ground-fault overcurrent relays with short-time inverse time
characteristics with adjustable current tap range as required.
Provide phase-fault overcurrent relays with varied inverse-time
characteristics with adjustable current tap range as required, and
indicating instantaneous-trip attachments with adjustable current range as
required.
Semiflush-mount case with matching cover to the hinged instrument panel.
Provide solid-state static-type trips for low-voltage power circuit
breakers in accordance with EIA 443 and IEEE C37.17.
Provide a trip unit that employs a combination of discreet components and
integrated circuits to provide the time-current protection functions
required in a modern selectively coordinated distribution system.
Provide complete system selective coordination by utilizing a combination
of the following time-current curve-shaping adjustments: ampere setting;
long-time delay; short-time pickup; short-time delay; instantaneous pickup;
and ground fault.
Provide switchable or easily defeatable instantaneous and ground fault
trips.
Make all adjustments using non-removable, discrete step, highly reliable
switching plugs for precise settings. Provide a sealable, transparent
cover over the adjustments to prevent tampering.
Furnish trip devices with three visual indicators to denote the automatic
tripping mode of the breaker including: overload; short circuit; and
ground fault.
Wire trip unit to appropriate terminals whereby an optional remote
automatic trip accessory can be utilized to provide the same indication.
Make available for use a series of optional automatic trip relays for use
with the trip unit to provide remote alarm and lockout circuits.
Provide all trip units with test jacks for in-service functional testing of
the long-time instantaneous and ground fault circuits using a small
hand-held test kit.
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 15

2.8.2 Directional Overcurrent Relays
Provide directional overcurrent relays in accordance with IEEE C37.90.
For directional overcurrent relays for protection against reverse-power
faults, provide single-phase induction type with adjustable time-delay and
instantaneous trip attachments. Provide removable type relays with
inverse-time directional and overcurrent units with built-in testing
facilities.
Semi-flush mount case with matching cover to the hinged instrument panel.
2.8.3 Reclosing Relays
For reclosing relays, conform to IEEE C37.90.
Design reclosing relays to reclose circuit breakers that have tripped from
overcurrent. Provide device that automatically recloses the breaker at
adjustable time intervals between reclosures and then locks out the breaker
in the open position if the fault persists. If the fault disappears after
any reclosure, the circuit breaker remains closed and the reclosing relay
resets automatically and is ready to start a new sequence of operation.
Provide removable reclosing relays with built-in testing facilities and
consisting of a timing unit rated at 120/240 volts, single-phase, ac and
solenoid and contactor units with dc rating as indicated. Arrange contacts
for one instantaneous reclosure and two subsequent reclosures at 15 and 45
seconds, respectively. Set time dial for 60-second drum speed.
Semi-flush mount case with matching cover to the hinged instrument panel.
2.8.4 Undervoltage Relays
For undervoltage relays conform to IEEE C37.90.
Provide three-phase induction type undervoltage relays, including inverse
timing with adjustable high- and low-voltage contacts and calibrated scale
for protection against loss of voltage, undervoltage, and overvoltage.
Equip relays with indicating contactor and voltage switches to provide
electrically separate contact circuits. Provide relays that are removable
with built-in testing facilities and that are suitable for operation on
120-volt ac circuits, with contacts that are suitable for operation on dc
or ac control circuits.
Semi-flush mount case with matching cover to the hinged instrument panel.
2.9 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
2.9.1 Ammeters
For ammeters, conform to ANSI C39.1.
Provide switchboard indicating ammeters of approximately 4-1/2 inches
square with 250-degree scale and recessed cases suitable for flush
mounting. Furnish white dials with black figures and black pointers.
Mount instruments on the hinged front panel of the switchgear compartment
completely isolated from high-voltage circuits. Provide standard 5-ampere
type meter for a zero to full-scale normal movement, 60 hertz.
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 16

2.9.2 Voltmeters
For voltmeters, conform to ANSI C39.1.
Provide a switchboard indicating voltmeters that is approximately
4-1/2-inches square with 250-degree scale and recessed cases suitable for
flush mounting. Furnish white dials with black figures and black
pointers. Mount instruments on the hinged front panel of the switchgear
compartment completely isolated from high-voltage circuits. Provide
standard 120-volt type voltmeter for a zero to full-scale normal movement,
60 hertz.
2.9.3 Watt-Hour Meters/Wattmeters
For watt-hour meters, wattmeters, and pulse initiation meters, conform to
ANSI C12.1.
Provide three-phase induction type switchboard wattmeters for use with
instrument transformers with two stators, each equipped with a current and
potential coil. Provide meter that is rated for 5 amperes at 120 volts and
is suitable for connection to three-phase, 3- and 4-wire circuits. Provide
instrument complete with potential indicating lamps, light-load and
full-load adjustments, phase balance, power-factor adjustments, four-dial
clock register, ratchets to prevent reverse rotation, and built-in testing
facilities.
Provide pulse initiating meters for use with demand meters or pulse
recorders, that are suitable for use with mechanical or electrical pulse
initiators. Provide mechanical load imposed on the meter by the pulse
initiator that is within the limits of the pulse meter. Provide load as
constant as practical throughout the entire cycle of operation to ensure
accurate meter readings. Provide pulse initiating meter that is capable of
measuring the maximum number of pulses at which the pulse device is
nominally rated. Consider pulse initiating meter to be operating properly
when a kilowatt hour check indicates that the demand meter kilowatthours
are within limits of the watthour meter kilowatthours.
Locate pulse initiating meters such that components sensitive to moisture
and temperature conditions are minimized. Take precautions to protect
sensitive electronic metering circuitry from electromagnetic and
electrostatic induction.
Furnish removable meters with draw out test plug and furnish contact
devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing graphic demand meters.
Semi-flush mount case with matching cover to the hinged instrument panel.
2.9.4 Graphic Demand Meters
For impulse-totalizing graphic demand meters, conform to ANSI C12.1.
Provide impulse-totalizing graphic demand meters that are suitable for use
with switchboard watt-hour meters and that include a two-circuit totalizing
relay, cyclometer for cumulative record of impulses, four-dial totalizing
kilowatt-hour register, synchronous motor for timing mechanism, torque
motor, and chart drive. Provide a positive chart-drive mechanism
consisting of chart spindles and drive sprockets that maintains the correct
chart speed for roll strip charts. Provide instrument that records as well
as indicates on clearly legible graph paper, the 15-minute integrated
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 17

kilowatt demand of the totalized system.
Furnish the motive power for advancing the register and pen-movement
mechanism with a torque motor. Provide capillary pen containing a 1-month
ink supply. Provide a 31-day continuous record of operation roll charts.
Semi-flush mount case with matching cover to the hinged instrument panel.
2.9.5 Specialty-Type Meters
For specialty meters, conform to ANSI C39.1. Specialty-type meters are
panel meters applicable to specific situations, such as pyrometers and dc
parameter meters that conform to the panel layout specified. Provide meter
scales that are not less than 180 degrees. Do not use edgewise meters for
circuit current and voltage measurements.
2.10 FACTORY TESTING
Perform factory tests on control and low voltage protective devices in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Conduct short-circuit tests in accordance with Section 2 of NEMA ICS 1.
2.11 INDICATING LIGHTS
2.11.1 General-Purpose Type
For indicating lights, provide oiltight instrument devices with threaded
base and collar for flush-mounting, translucent convex lens, candelabra
screw-base lampholder, and 120-volt, 6-watt, Type S-6 incandescent lamp in
accordance with ANSI C78.23. Provide indicating lights color coded in
accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
Provide indicating lights in remote-control stations when pushbuttons and
selector switches are out of sight of the controller.
2.12 FINISH
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment with the
standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor
installations. For harsh indoor environments (any area subjected to
chemical and/or abrasive action), and all outdoor installations, refer to
Section 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install Control devices and protective devices that are not factory
installed in equipment, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and field adjusted and operation tested. Conform to NFPA 70,
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 requirements for installation of control and
protective devices.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
Demonstrate to operate as indicated control and protective devices not
factory installed in equipment.
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 18

Ratio and verify tap settings of instrumentation, potential, and current
transformers.
Perform dielectric tests on insulating oil in oil circuit breakers before
the breakers are energized. Test oil in accordance with ASTM D 877, and
provide breakdown voltage that is not less than 25,000 volts. Provide
manufacturer certification that the oil contains no PCB's, and affix a
label to that effect on each breaker tank and on each oil drum containing
the insulating oil.
Field adjust reduced-voltage starting devices to obtain optimum operating
conditions. Provide test meters and instrument transformers that conform
to ANSI C12.1 and IEEE C57.13.
Do not energize control and protective devices until recorded test data has
been approved. Provide final test reports with a cover letter/sheet
clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the words "Final Test
Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 19

SECTION 26 09 23.00 40
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
08/10
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GC-12
(1997) Occupancy Sensors
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)
IESNA LM-48
(2001) Guide for Testing the Calibration
of Locking-Type Photoelectric Control
Devices Used in Outdoor Applications
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA ICS 1
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 6
(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
(1993; R 2006) Enclosures
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 773
UL 773A
UL 98
(1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for
Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
(2006; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for
Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
(2004; Reprint Jan 2011) Enclosed and
Dead-Front Switches
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
work specified in this section.
Submit Installation Drawings for light-sensitive occupancy sensitive motion
sensitive control devices in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
instructions for installation.
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 1

1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval.for information only. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Photoconductive Control
Devices.
Submit Installation Drawings for Light-Sensitive Control Devices
in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of
this section.
Light Level Sensor; G
Lighting Contactor; G
Time Switch; G
Photocell Switch; G
Occupancy Sensors; G
Motion Sensors G
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for System Operation Tests in the presence of
the Contracting Officer.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit operational instructions for Light-Sensitive Control Devices
consisting of the manufacturer's recommended procedures for
operation.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data G
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOCONDUCTIVE CONTROL DEVICES
Provide photoconductive control devices in accordance with UL 773. Control
lighting luminaires Provide physically and electrically interchangeable
light sensitive control devices with three-pole, 3-wire locking plug and
receptacle connections to the line, load, and neutral conductors of the
lighting circuit.
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 2

Provide photoconductive control devices for natural daylight and darkness
control of incandescent, fluorescent, and outdoor lighting luminaires
including a photoconductive cell, thermal actuator, and snap-action switch
in a weatherproof housing. Provide a control device which is, when
attached to its mounting, weatherproof and constructed to exclude beating
rain, snow, dust, and insects and capable of withstanding 96 percent
relative humidity at 122 degrees F for 48 hours under operating conditions.
Submit operation and maintenance data,Lighting Control System, Data Package
5, in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and
as specified herein, showing all light fixtures, control modules, control
zones, occupancy sensors,motion sensors, light level sensors, power packs,
dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire,
conduit, and associated hardware.
2.1.1 Photoconductive Limit Settings
Provide device which turns on within the limits of plus 100 to minus 50
percent of its setting, over a range of input voltage from 105 to 130 volts
at rated frequency and ambient temperature, and at rated voltage and
frequency over a range of temperature from minus 85 to 122 degrees F, with
relative humidities up to 96-percent throughout the temperature range.
Adjust the device to operate within the limits of 0.8 to 1.2 foot-candles,
but also capable of calibration of the turn-on light level over a minimum
range from 0.5 to 3.0 foot-candles, and adaptable for calibration up to 10
foot-candles. Ratio of turn-off light level to turn-on light level is not
to exceed 5.
2.1.2 Device Rating and Accuracy
Rate the devices at 120 or 277 volts, 60 hertz, with rated ambient
temperature of 77 plus or minus41 degrees F
Maintain instrument accuracy by proper calibration in accordance with
IESNA LM-48.
2.2 TIME CONTROL SWITCHES
Install switches with not less than four 1/4 inch bolts. The use of sheet
metal screws is not allowed.
2.3 MANUAL AND SAFETY SWITCHES
Provide Astronomic dial type arranged to turn "ON" at sunset, and turn
"OFF" at a pre-determined time between 2030 hours hours and 0230 hours
hours or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in
accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide a switch
rated 120 volts, having battery backed electronic clock to maintain
accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following a power failure, with a
time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Provide surface mounted
housing for the time switch, type NEMA 1 (indoor) enclosure conforming to
NEMA ICS 6.
Provide switch mechanism consisting of a heavy-duty general-purpose
precision snap-acting switch, with NEMA ICS 6 Type 1 enclosures,,
single-pole, single-throw, suitable for operation on a 208Y/120 volt, 60
Hz, three-phase or single-phase system as indicated. Provide with a
selector switch having a minimum of three positions: ON, OFF, and
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 3

AUTOMATIC. Use the automatic position when photoelectric or timer control
is desired. Interface the selector switch with the lighting system magnetic
contactor to control system activity.
Provide switches conforming to UL 98. Provide switch construction of the
quick-make, quick-break type, such that a screwdriver is required to open
the switch door when the switch is on, with blades visible when the door is
open. Coordinate terminal lugs with the wire size.
2.4 LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR
Provide UL listed light level sensor capable of detecting changes in
ambient lighting levels, with a dimming range of 20 percent to 100 percent,
minimum, and designed for use with dimming ballast and voltage system to
which they are connected. Provide with sensor capable of controlling 40
electronic dimming ballast, minimum, with a sensor light level adjustable
with a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles, minimum. Provide a
sensor with a bypass function to electrically override sensor control.
2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTOR
Provide NEMA ICS 2, electrically held contactor, rated 120 volts, 30
amperes, and poles as indicated, with coils rated 120 volts. Provide in
NEMA1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Provide contactor with silver
alloy double-break contacts requiring no arcing contacts. Provide
contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.
2.6 TIME SWITCH
Provide astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at
sunset and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m.
or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 120 volts,
having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain
accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure. Provide
time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Surface mount the housing
for the time switch, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
2.7 PHOTOCELL SWITCH
Provide photocell switch conforming to UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically
sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz
with single-throw contacts designed to fail to the ON position. Provide
switch which turns on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 4 to 10
footcandles. Provide time delay to prevent accidental switching from
transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell
to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. Provide
switch:
b. In a U.V. stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and
adjustable window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum.
2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Provide UL listed occupancy sensor complying with GC-12. Design occupancy
sensors and power packs to operate on the voltage indicated. Provide
sensors and power packs with circuitry that only allows load switching at
or near zero current crossing of supply voltage, with mounting as
indicated. Provide sensor with an LED occupant detection indicator,
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 4

adjustable sensitivity, and adjustable delayed-off time range of 5 minutes
to 15 minutes. Provide wall mounted sensors, and ceiling mounted sensors,
color to be selected by the Architect. Provide ceiling mounted sensors with
360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.
(1) Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic
and infrared sensor detection, such that the lights remain on if
either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement.
Provide infrared sensor with a lens selected for indicated usage
and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared
interference. Provide crystal controlled ultrasonic sensor
frequency.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.9.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Provide each item of equipment with a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in an
inconspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not
acceptable.
2.9.2 Labels
Provide labeled control devices, clearly marked for operation of specific
lighting functions according to type. Note the following devices
characteristics in the format "Use Only" FMEP":
a. Lamp diameter code (T5, T8), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),
base type and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent
luminaires.
b. Lamp type, wattage and coating.
c. Start type, rapid, instant, program start for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
d. ANSI ballast type for HID luminaires.
e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
Make markings related to control device type clear and locate to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
devices are in place.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Photoconductive Control Devices
Install photoconductive control devices in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.1.2 Time Control Switches
Install switches with not less than four 1/4 inch bolts. The use of sheet
metal screws is not allowed.
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 5

3.1.3 Manual and Safety Switches
Coordinate terminal lugs with the wire size. Securely fasten switches to
the supporting structure or wall using not less than four 1/4 inch bolts.
The use of sheet metal screws is not allowed.
3.1.4 Magnetic Contactors
Provide magnetic contactors mechanically held, electrically operated,
conforming to NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2, suitable for 120 volts, single
phase, 60 Hz, with coil voltage of 120 volts. Provide with maximum
continuous ampere rating and number of poles as indicated on drawings.
Provide enclosures for contactors mounted indoors conforming to NEMA ICS 6,
Type 1. Provide each contactor with a spare, normally open auxiliary
contact.
Coordinate terminal lugs with the wire size. Securely fasten switches to
the supporting structure or wall using not less than four 1/4 inch bolts.
The use of sheet metal screws is not allowed.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
Perform PT&I tests and provide submittals as specified in Section
01 86 26.07 40 RELIABILITY CENTERED ACCEPTANCE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
Demonstrate that photoconductive control devices operate satisfactorily in
the presence of the Contracting Officer.
Perform System Operation Tests in accordance with referenced standards in
this section.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 6

SECTION 26 12 19.10
THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
02/12
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A240/A240M
ASTM D117
ASTM D1535
ASTM D3487
ASTM D877
ASTM D92
ASTM D97
(2011a) Standard Specification for
Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels and for General Applications
(2010) Standard Guide for Sampling, Test
Methods, Specifications and Guide for
Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum
Origin
(2008e1) Specifying Color by the Munsell
System
(2009) Standard Specification for Mineral
Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus
(2002; R 2007) Standard Test Method for
Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using Disk Electrodes
(2005a; R 2010) Standard Test Method for
Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open
Cup Tester
(2011) Pour Point of Petroleum Products
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide
http://www.approvalguide.com/
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
IEEE 386
IEEE C2
IEEE C37.47
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
(2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable
Insulated Connector Systems for Power
Distribution Systems Above 600V
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code
(2000) Standard for High Voltage
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 1

Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class
Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches
IEEE C57.12.00
IEEE C57.12.28
IEEE C57.12.34
IEEE C57.12.90
IEEE C57.13
IEEE C57.98
IEEE C62.11
(2010) Standard General Requirements for
Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and
Regulating Transformers
(2005; INT 3 2011) Standard for
Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity
(2009) Standard for Requirements for
Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type,
Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution
Transformers, 5 MVA and Smaller; High
Voltage, 34.5 kV Nominal System Voltage
and Below; Low Voltage, 15 kV Nominal
System Voltage and Below
(2010) Standard Test Code for
Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and
Regulating Transformers
(2008) Standard Requirements for
Instrument Transformers
(1993; Errata 1998; R 1999) Guide for
Transformer Impulse Tests
(2005; Amd 1 2008) Standard for
Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for
Alternating Current Power Circuits (>1kV)
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
(2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C12.1
ANSI C12.7
NEMA LI 1
NEMA/ANSI C12.10
(2008) Electric Meters Code for
Electricity Metering
(2005) Requirements for Watthour Meter
Sockets
(1998) Industrial Laminating Thermosetting
Products
(2011) Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters
- Safety Standards
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2;
TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical
Code
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 2

ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)
OECD Test 203
(1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 712-C-98-075
EPA 821-R-02-012
(1996) Fate, Transport and Transformation
Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic
Aquatic Biodegradation"
(2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute
Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters
to Freshwater and Marine Organisms
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain
Commercial and Industrial Equipment
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 467
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section,
with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE 100.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Pad-mounted transformer drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Pad-mounted transformers; G
Submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each
component, device, insulating fluid, and accessory provided with
the transformer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance checks and tests; G
Submittal shall include acceptance criteria and limits for each
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 3

test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".
SD-07 Certificates
Transformer Efficiencies; G
Submit certification, including supporting calculations, from the
manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled
"Specified Transformer Efficiencies."
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Pad-mounted transformer design tests; G
Pad-mounted transformerroutine and other tests; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Transformer test schedule; G
Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled
"Field Quality Control."
1.4.1 Reduced Submittal Requirements
Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City, MO; by
Cooper Power Systems in Waukesha, WI; by ERMCO in Dyersburg, TN; or by
Howard Industries in Laurel, MS need not submit the entire submittal
package requirements of this contract. Instead, the following items shall
be submitted:
a. A certification, signed by the manufacturer, stating that the technical
requirements of this specification shall be met.
b. An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified
(paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings", item a).
c. ANSI nameplate data of the transformer (paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted
Transformer Drawings", item b).
d. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (properly overlaid on one
full size logarithmic paper) of the transformer high side fuses
(paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings", item e) with
transformer damage curve, inrush curve, and thru fault current
indicated.
e. Routine and other tests (in PART 2, see paragraph entitled "Source
Quality Control", subparagraph entitled "Routine and Other Tests"),
shall be conducted by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by the
government. Provide transformer test schedule required by submittal
item "SD-11 Closeout Submittals". Provide certified copies of the
tests.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 4

f. Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item "SD-06 Test
Reports".
g. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item
"SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data".
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings
Drawings shall indicate, but not be limited to the following:
a. An outline drawing, with front, top, and side views.
b. ANSI nameplate data.
c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of
watthour meter and current transformers.
d. One-line diagram, including switch(es), current transformers, meters,
and fuses.
e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic
paper) of the transformer high side fuses.
1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.5.3 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.5.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 5

1.5.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data
In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the
actual transformer(s) provided:
a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted
b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views
c. Prices for spare parts and supply list
d. Routine and field acceptance test reports
e. Fuse curves for primary fuses
f. Information on watthour demand meter, CT's, and fuse block
g. Actual nameplate diagram
h. Date of purchase
1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and
related accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM,.
2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein.
2.2.1 Compartments
The high- and low-voltage compartments shall be separated by steel
isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments.
Compartment doors: hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and
three-point latching.
2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front
High-voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line, insulated
high-voltage load-break connectors, feed-thru inserts, six high-voltage
bushing wells configured for loop feed application, load-break switch
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 6

handle(s), access to oil-immersed bayonet fuses, dead-front surge arresters,
tap changer handle, connector parking stands with insulated standoff
bushings, protective caps, and ground pad.
a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated 15 kV,
95 kV BIL. Current rating: 200 amperes rms continuous. Short time
rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17
seconds. Connector shall have a steel reinforced hook-stick eye,
grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.
e. Load-break switch
Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position,
oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and
sectionalizing. Each switch shall be rated at 15 kV, 95 kV BIL, with a
continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 amperes, and a
make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the
switch handles in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches
shall be as follows:
ARRANGEMENT
NO.
DESCRIPTION OF
SWITCH ARRANGEMENT
SWITCH POSITION
LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW
OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
1 Line A connected to
Line B and both
lines connected to
transformer
2 Transformer
connected to Line A
only
3 Transformer
connected to Line B
X X X
X X X
X X X
4 Transformer open
and loop closed
5 Transformer open
and loop open
X X X
X X X
i. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing. Provide
insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized high-voltage
connectors on parking stands.
2.2.1.2 High Voltage, Live-Front
High-voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line, transformer
high-voltage bushings, load-break switch handle(s),access to oil-immersed
bayonet fuses, tap changer handle, insulated phase barriers, and ground pad.
a. Cable terminators: Provide as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 7

. Load-break switch
Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position,
oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and
sectionalizing. Each switch shall be rated at 15 kV, 95 kV BIL, with a
continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 amperes, and a
make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the
switch handles in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches
shall be as follows:
ARRANGEMENT
NO.
DESCRIPTION OF
SWITCH ARRANGEMENT
SWITCH POSITION
LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW
OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
1 Line A connected to
Line B and both
lines connected to
transformer
2 Transformer
connected to Line A
only
3 Transformer
connected to Line B
only
4 Transformer open
and loop closed
5 Transformer open
and loop open
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
] c. Provide bayonet type, oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with
oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse
links shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order
to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate
transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults
and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the
interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. In order to eliminate or
minimize oil spills, the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil
retention valve inside the housing which closes when the fuse holder is
removed and an external drip shield. Warning shall be conspicuously
displayed within the high-voltage compartment cautioning against
removing or inserting fuses unless the load-break switch is in the open
position and the tank pressure has been released.
Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.
Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes
symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.
d. Provide oil-immersed, weak link expulsion fuses in series with
oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Coordinate
transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults
and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 8

interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse.
Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes
symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.
e. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated 15 kV. Provide six arresters for
loop feed circuits.
f. Insulated phase barriers: NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3,0.25 inch minimum
thickness. Provide vertical barriers between the high-voltage bushings
and a single horizontal barrier above the high-voltage bushings.
2.2.1.3 Low Voltage
Low-voltage compartment shall contain low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade
terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized
aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.
a. Accessories shall include drain valve with sampler device, fill plug,
pressure relief device, liquid level gage, pressure-vacuum gage, and
dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator. Provide a
removable 600V Volt rated secondary NEMA spade terminal insulating
system to completely insulate and cover these exposed live parts within
the secondary compartment.
b. Metering: NEMA/ANSI C12.10. Provide a socket-mounted electronic
programmable outdoor watthour meter, surface mounted flush against the
side of the low-voltage compartment as indicated. Meter shall either
be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field. When
field programming is performed, turn field programming device over to
the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Meter shall be
coordinated to system requirements.
1. Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire,
208Y/120 volt system with 3 current transformers. Include
necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and
Control System (EMCS).
2. Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current
transformers and transformer secondary voltage.
3. Class: 20; Form: 9S_____; Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent;
Finish: Class II
4. Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and
unauthorized removal.
5. Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type
6. Demand Register:
(a) Provide solid state
(b) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter
face.
(c) Demand interval length: shall be programmed for 15 minutes
with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 9

7. Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the secondary
compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage
input to the watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the
meter manufacturer.
8. Socket: ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket
having automatic circuit-closing bypass and having jaws compatible
with requirements of the meter. Cover unused hub openings with
blank hub plates. Paint box Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green to match
the pad-mounted transformer to which the box-mounted socket is
attached. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.
9. Current transformers: IEEE C57.13. Provide butyl-molded window
type current transformers with 600-volt insulation, 10 kV BIL and
mount on the low-voltage bushings. Route current transformer leads
Provide shorting type terminal blocks and route current
transformer leads from the shorting type terminal blocks in a
location as remote as possible from the power transformer
secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with
hook-on-ammeters. Provide three current transformers per power
transformer with characteristics listed in the following table.
kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class
225 208Y/120 600/5 3 [0.3 thru B-0.5]
2.2.2 Transformer
a. Less-flammable liquid-insulated or oil-insulated, two winding, 60
hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient,
self-cooled type.
b. Transformer shall be rated 225 kVA.
c. Transformer voltage ratings: 13200 V DeltaGrdY - 208 V GrdY. For GrdY
- GrdY transformers, provide transformer with five-legged core design
for third harmonic suppression.
d. Tap changer shall be externally operated, manual type for changing tap
setting when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent
full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Tap
changers shall clearly indicate which tap setting is in use.
e. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C shall not be less than
the following values:
2.50 for units rated 75kVA and below
2.87 for units rated 112.5kVA to 300kVA
4.03 for 500kVA rated units
5.32 for units rated 750kVA and above
f. Audible sound levels shall comply with the following:
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 10

kVA
DECIBELS
(MAX
75 51
112.5 55
150 55
225 55
300 55
500 56
750 57
1000 58
1500 60
2000 61
2500 62
g. Transformer shall include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under
base. The transformer base construction shall be suitable for using
rollers or skidding in any direction. Provide transformer top with an
access handhole. Transformer shall have its kVA rating conspicuously
displayed using 3 inch high yellow letters on its enclosure. The
transformer shall have an insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with
NEMA spade terminal, and with removable ground strap.
2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies
Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the actual no-load
and load loss values obtained during the routine tests performed on the
actual transformer(s) prepared for this project. No-load losses (NLL)
shall be referenced at 20 degrees C. Load losses (LL) shall be referenced
at 55 degrees C and at 50 percent of the nameplate load. The transformer is
not acceptable if the calculated transformer efficiency is less than the
efficiency indicated in the "KVA / Efficiency" table below. That table is
based on requirements contained within 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.
kVA
EFFICIENCY
(percent)
15 98.36
30 98.62
45 98.76
75 98.91
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 11

112.5 99.01
150 99.08
225 99.17
300 99.23
500 99.25
750 99.32
1000 99.36
1500 99.42
2000 99.46
2500 99.49
above 2500 99.50
2.2.3 Insulating Liquid
a. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for
less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C
tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV
tested per ASTM D877. Provide identification of transformer as
"non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on the nameplate.
The fluid shall be a biodegradable electrical insulating and cooling
liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as "less flammable" fluids.
The fluid shall meet the following fluid properties:
1. Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C
2. Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100 percent
3. Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012,
pass
b. Mineral oil: ASTM D3487, Type II, tested in accordance with ASTM D117.
Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "Type II mineral
oil" on the nameplate.
2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates
Distribution transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in
accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as modified or supplemented by this
section.
2.2.4 Corrosion Protection
Bases and cabinets of transformers shall be corrosion resistant and shall
be fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or
304L. Base shall include any part of pad-mounted transformer that is within
3 inches of concrete pad.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 12

Paint entire transformer assembly Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green. Paint coating
system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 regardless of base, cabinet, and
tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.
2.3 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having
a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in
accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted transformers,
provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage
compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal
dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE"
printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER"
shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH
VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall
be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.
2.4 Arc Flash Warning Label
Provide warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted transformers.
Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the high voltage
compartment door warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and
appropriate PPE required. The label format shall be as indicated.
2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING
UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section as indicated
on the drawings.
2.6 PADLOCKS
Padlocks shall be provided for pad-mounted equipment . Padlocks shall be
keyed as directed by the Contracting Officer. Padlocks shall comply with
Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
]2.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of
underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength
unless specified otherwise. All concrete shall conform to the requirements
of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.8.1 Transformer Test Schedule
The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide transformer
test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test
facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the
Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify
Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled
date.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 13

a. Test Instrument Calibration
1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures
that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated
accuracy.
2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute
of Standards and Technology.
3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12
months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty
equipment.
4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the
instrument tested.
6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of
instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by
the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party
calibration, include the following:
(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and
procedures for each test instrument.
(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to
verify that calibrating standard is met.
2.8.2 Design Tests
IEEE C57.12.00 states that "design tests are made only on representative
apparatus to substantiate the ratings assigned to all other apparatus of
basically the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test
data, explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package
as the catalog data and drawings for the specified transformer(s). Design
tests shall have been performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 prior to
the award of this contract.
a. Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional
engineer.
b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature rise
test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction
(such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA,
the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the
same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.
c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning
impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same
BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet
wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning
impulse tests shall include the primary windings only of that
transformer.
1. IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test
Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 14

2. State test voltage levels.
3. Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of
digitized waveforms with test report.
d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement
for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming
that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of
the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.34.
e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a
pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the
tank volume of the transformer specified.
f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test
means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer
specified.
2.8.3 Routine and Other Tests
IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests shall be performed in accordance
with IEEE C57.12.90 by the manufacturer on the actual transformer(s)
prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is
maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial number and
receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site.
Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows:
a. Phase relation
b. Ratio
c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current
d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage
e. Dielectric
f. Leak
1. Impulse
2. Applied voltage
3. Induced voltage
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless
indicated or specified otherwise.
3.2 GROUNDING
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounding systems shall have a resistance
to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 15

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes
Provide driven ground rods as indicated on the drawings.. Connect ground
conductors to the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or
compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of
ground conductors.
3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding
Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground
loop as indicated. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is
required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the
contract covering "Changes" shall apply.
3.2.3 Connections
Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld . .
3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section
as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as
specified herein.
3.3.1 Meters and Current Transformers
ANSI C12.1.
3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the
manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended
coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible
side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
3.6 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
Mount transformer on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab
shall be at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9
mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab. Slab shall be
placed on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab
shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for
drainage. Edges above grade shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab shall be of
adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.
Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete
pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training
areas.
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 16

3.6.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to the requirements of Section
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .
3.6.2 Sealing
When the installation is complete, the Contractor shall seal all entries
into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing method. Seals shall
be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live
parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include
the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,
performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.7.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved
shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or
cracked insulators and leaks.
3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
4. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.
5. Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.
6. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance
using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible
bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method,
or performing thermographic survey.
7. Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.
8. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed
transformers.
9. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended
by manufacturer.
10. Verify de-energized tap changer position is left as specified.
11. Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.
b. Electrical tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections
with low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 17

phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.
3. Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each
winding-to-ground. Calculate polarization index.
4. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.
5. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all
windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s
published data.
6. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing
equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap. In the absence of a
power-factor/capacitance tap, perform hot-collar tests.
7. Measure the resistance of each high-voltage winding in each
de-energized tap-changer position. Measure the resistance of each
low-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position, if
applicable.
8. Remove and test a sample of insulating liquid for the following:
Dielectric breakdown voltage, Acid neutralization number, Specific
gravity, Interfacial tension, Color, Visual Condition, Water in
insulating liquids (Required on 25 kV or higher voltages and on
all silicone-filled units.), and Power factor or dissipation
factor.
9. Perform dissolved-gas analysis (DGA) on a sample of insulating
liquid.
3.7.1.2 Current Transformers
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved
shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3. Verify correct connection.
4. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and
secondary circuit wiring.
5. Verify the unit is clean.
6. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance
using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible
bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method,
or performing thermographic survey.
7. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections
provide good contact.
8. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and
grounding operation.
9. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 18

and on moving and sliding surfaces.
b. Electrical tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections
with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and
its secondary wiring.
3. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer.
4. Perform a ratio-verification test.
3.7.1.3 Watthour Meter
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved
shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
b. Electrical tests
1. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published
data.
2. Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter,
where applicable.
3. Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact.
3.7.1.4 Grounding System
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and
specifications.
b. Electrical tests
1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the
fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected
ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete.
On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before
any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather,
not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground
testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be
equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions
thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or
grounding systems under test.
2. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and
grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding
system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 19

location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions
at the time the measurements were made.
3.7.1.5 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved
shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
4. Verify the arresters are clean.
5. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance
using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible
bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method,
or performing thermographic survey.
6. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually
attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.
b. Electrical tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections
with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase
terminal-to-ground.
3. Test grounding connection.
3.7.2 Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show
by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating
condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception
to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer
shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of
checking and testing.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 12 19.10 Page 20

SECTION 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
08/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B1
ASTM B8
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
(2011) Standard Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
IEEE 81
IEEE C2
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth
Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
(2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C80.1
ANSI C80.3
ANSI C80.5
NEMA 250
NEMA ICS 1
(2005) American National Standard for
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
(2005) American National Standard for
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
(2005) American National Standard for
Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems: General
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 1

Requirements
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 4
NEMA ICS 6
NEMA KS 1
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 10
NEMA MG 11
NEMA RN 1
NEMA ST 20
NEMA TC 2
NEMA TC 3
NEMA VE 1
NEMA WD 1
NEMA WD 6
NEMA Z535.4
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
(2010) Terminal Blocks
(1993; R 2006) Enclosures
(2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous
Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V
Maximum)
(2009) Motors and Generators
(2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency
Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase
Induction Motors
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
(2005) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally
Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit
(1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type
Transformers for General Applications
(2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Conduit
(2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing
(2009) Standard for Metal Cable Tray
Systems
(1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for
General Color Requirements for Wiring
Devices
(2002; R 2008) Wiring Devices Dimensions
Specifications
(2007; Errata 2007) American National
Standard for Product Safety Signs and
Labels
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
NFPA 70E
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
(2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in
the Workplace
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 2

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA J-STD-607
TIA-568-C.1
TIA-569
(2002a) Commercial Building Grounding
(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
(2009) Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
(2004b; Add 1 2009) Commercial Building
Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag
Out)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1
UL 1063
UL 1242
UL 1449
UL 1660
UL 20
UL 360
UL 44
UL 467
UL 486A-486B
UL 486C
UL 489
UL 498
UL 5
(2005; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for
Flexible Metal Conduit
(2006) Machine-Tool Wires and Cables
(2006; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for
Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
(2006; Reprint Feb 2011) Surge Protective
Devices
(2004; Reprint Apr 2008) Liquid-Tight
Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
(2010) General-Use Snap Switches
(2009; Reprint Jun 2009) Liquid-Tight
Flexible Steel Conduit
(2010) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
(2003; Reprint Feb 2010) Wire Connectors
(2004; Reprint Feb 2010) Splicing Wire
Connectors
(2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
(2001; Reprint Apr 2010) Attachment Plugs
and Receptacles
(2004; Reprint Jul 2010) Surface Metal
Raceways and Fittings
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 3

UL 50
UL 506
UL 508
UL 510
UL 514A
UL 514B
UL 514C
UL 5A
UL 6
UL 651
UL 67
(2007) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations
(2008; Reprint Mar 2010) Specialty
Transformers
(1999; Reprint Apr 2010) Industrial
Control Equipment
(2005; Reprint Apr 2008) Polyvinyl
Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
(2004; Reprint Apr 2010) Metallic Outlet
Boxes
(2004; Reprint Nov 2009) Conduit, Tubing
and Cable Fittings
(1996; Reprint May 2011) Nonmetallic
Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and
Covers
(2003; Reprint Aug 2008) Nonmetallic
Surface Raceways and Fittings
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
(2005; Reprint Mar 2010) Standard for
Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and
Fittings
(2009; Reprint Sep 2010) Standard for
Panelboards
UL 6A (2008) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -
Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel
UL 797
UL 817
UL 83
UL 869A
UL 943
(2007) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
(2001; Reprint Oct 2009) Standard for Cord
Sets and Power-Supply Cords
(2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and
Cables
(2006) Reference Standard for Service
Equipment
(2006; Reprint May 2010) Ground-Fault
Circuit-Interrupters
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE 100.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 4

1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards; G
Cable trays; G
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment
indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control
panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must
be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams
shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring
for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each
item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for
operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
devices.
Wireways; G
Marking strips drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles; G
Circuit breakers; G
Switches; G
Transformers; G
Enclosed circuit breakers; G
Motor controllers; G
Combination motor controllers; G
Manual motor starters; G
Metering; G
CATV outlets; G
Surge protective devices; G
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 5

Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves.
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test; G
Grounding system test; G
Transformer tests; G
Ground-fault receptacle test; G
SD-07 Certificates
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Transformer factory tests
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Electrical Systems, Data Package 5; G
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section
01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Fuses
Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.
1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.4.3 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 6

1.4.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.4.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
1.5.1 Electrical Systems
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that
provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of
the electrical distribution system for the building. This shall include:
a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.
b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC,
covered elsewhere).
c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical
equipment.
1.6 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of
UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of
NFPA 70.
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Shall conform to the following:
2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit
2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.1.2 Rigid Aluminum Conduit
ANSI C80.5, UL 6A.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 7

2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.
2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.
2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, ANSI C80.3.
2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit
NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).
2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1.
2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel
UL 360.
2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance
with UL 514B.
2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.
2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT
Steel compression type.
2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.
2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1660.
2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY
2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway
UL 5, two-piece painted steel, totally enclosed, snap-cover type.
2.3.2 Surface Nonmetallic Raceway
UL 5A, nonmetallic totally enclosed, snap-cover type.
2.4 CABLE TRAYS
NEMA VE 1. Cable trays shall form a wireway system, and shall be of nominal
6 inch depth. Cable trays shall be constructed of steel that has been
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 8

zinc-coated after fabrication. Trays shall include splice and end plates,
dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware. Edges, fittings, and hardware shall
be finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Fittings shall have not less
than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and shall have
manufacturer's minimum standard radius.
2.4.1 Basket-Type Cable Trays
Provide size as indicated] with maximum wire mesh spacing of 2 by 4 inch.
2.5 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if
nonmetallic.
2.5.1 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System
Provide standard type 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Depth of boxes
shall be large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend
radii.
2.6 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet
steel.
2.7 WIRES AND CABLES
Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for
type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires
and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to
site shall not be used.
2.7.1 Conductors
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No.
10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for
remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be
stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes and
capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise. All
conductors shall be copper. Conductors indicated to be No. 6 AWG or
smaller diameter shall be copper. Conductors indicated to be No. 4 AWG and
larger diameter shall be either copper or aluminum, unless type of
conductor material is specifically indicated, or specified, or required by
equipment manufacturer.
2.7.1.1 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements
When manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the
terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between
components of equipment, provide copper conductors or splices, splice
boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.
2.7.1.2 Aluminum Conductors
Aluminum conductors shall be AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy
conductors. Type EC/1350 aluminum is not acceptable. Should Contractor
choose to provide aluminum for conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter,
Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conductor size to have same
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 9

ampacity as copper size indicated; increasing conduit and pull box sizes to
accommodate larger size aluminum conductors in accordance with NFPA 70;
ensuring that pulling tension rating of aluminum conductor is sufficient;
providing panelboards that are UL listed for use with aluminum, and so
labeled; relocating equipment, modifying equipment terminations, resizing
equipment; and resolving problems that are direct results of providing
aluminum conductors in lieu of copper.
2.7.1.3 Minimum Conductor Sizes
Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy,
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy,
remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.
2.7.2 Color Coding
Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit
conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for
neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in
same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored
(not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different
voltage systems shall be as follows:
a. 208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
b. 480/277 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - brown
(2) Phase B - orange
(3) Phase C - yellow
c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red
2.7.3 Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and
lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83,
except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83;
remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF, conforming to
UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C)
conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.
2.7.4 Bonding Conductors
ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter;
ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 10

2.7.5 Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords
UL 817.
2.8 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes.
Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated,
pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing
connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
2.9 DEVICE PLATES
Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices
installed. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of
zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges. For
nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided.
Plates on finished walls shall be nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall
thickness. Plates shall be same color as receptacle or toggle switch with
which they are mounted. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads
in color to match finish of plate. Sectional type device plates will not
be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL
listed for "wet locations."
2.10 SWITCHES
2.10.1 Toggle Switches
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, three-way, and four-way as
indicatedtotally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic
and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be thermoplastic
color to be selected by the Architect. Wiring terminals shall be
screw-type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm
shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated quiet-type ac
only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.
2.10.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle
NEMA WD 1. Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part
of the switch's handle. The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate
whenever the switch is closed or "on". The pilot lighted switch shall be
rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated. Provide the
circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.
2.10.3 Breakers Used as Switches
For 120- and 277-Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in
accordance with UL 489.
2.10.4 Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where
switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches.
Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless
indicated otherwise. Switches serving as motor-disconnect means shall be
horsepower rated. Provide switches in NEMA 1 , enclosure as indicated per
NEMA ICS 6.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 11

2.11 RECEPTACLES
UL 498, hard use, heavy-duty, grounding-type. Ratings and configurations
shall be as indicated. Bodies shall be of color which shall be selected by
the Architect as per NEMA WD 1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic
supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per
NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals. Connect
grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe
power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.11.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles
Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole. Top receptacle shall
be switched when installed.
2.11.2 Weatherproof Receptacles
Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover
plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a
spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet
locations with plug in use."
2.11.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be
capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping
per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices. Provide screw-type,
side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.
2.11.4 Special Purpose Receptacles
Receptacles serving are special purpose. Provide in ratings indicated.
NEMA 1 configuration, rated as indicated amperes, as indicated volts.
Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle.
2.11.5 Plugs
Provide heavy-duty, rubber-covered three-, four-, or five-wire cord of
required size, install plugs thereon, and attach to equipment. Plugs shall
be UL listed with receptacles, complete with grounding blades. Where
equipment is not available, turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the
Government.
2.12 PANELBOARDS
UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.
Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally
conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker-equipped. Design
shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing
adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation
supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL. "Specific
breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker
placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings. Use of
"Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated
otherwise. Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" or "below"
branch breakers. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for
future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load served by
each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of
service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Provide new
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 12

directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated.
Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.
Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use.
Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD
FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
UL 67 and UL 50. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall
additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit
breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing
supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as
required by UL. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for
future installation of breaker sized as indicated. Directories shall
indicate load served by each circuit of panelboard. Directories shall also
indicate source of service (upstream panel, switchboard, motor control
center, etc.) to panelboard. Type directories and mount in holder behind
transparent protective covering. Panelboard shall have nameplates in
accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
2.12.1 Enclosure
Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be
fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted
or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted
indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or
flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets
shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Outdoor cabinets
shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with a removable steel plate 1/4 inch thick
in the bottom for field drilling for conduit connections. Front edges of
cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or
riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front. All
cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished
cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch. Holes shall
be provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside
spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch
clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface. Flush
doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view
when the door is closed. Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch
and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a
three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. Two
keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks shall be keyed alike.
Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard
fronts on the cabinets.
2.12.2 Panelboard Buses
Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and
back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without
machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each
panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate
ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting
grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.
2.12.3 Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating
equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the
circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as
suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the drawings,
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 13

provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. Series rated circuit
breakers and plug-in circuit breakers without a self-contained bracket and
not secured by a positive locking device requiring mechanical release for
removal are unacceptable. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in
circuit breakers are unacceptable.
2.12.3.1 Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design
shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to
open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three
adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.
2.12.3.2 Circuit Breaker With GFCI
UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication
of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of
6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI GFI
devices, for personnel protection, and 20 milliamperes or greater per
requirements of UL 943 for Class B GFCI per equipment protection.
2.12.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment
Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual)
shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.
2.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and
continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and
short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as
indicated. Provide solid neutral.
2.14 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)
Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors
(MCPs); shall conform to UL 508 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown.
MSCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker
used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides
coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection.
MSCPs shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.
]2.15 MOTORS
NEMA MG 1
Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches
indicated.
2.15.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high
efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall
efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to
meet the overall system rating indicated.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 14

2.15.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics
relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10.
In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction
motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors
in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency
ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal
or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with
motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.15.3 Motor Sizes
Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load
nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified
capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor
size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to
wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate
equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and
above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors
from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for
motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
2.15.4 Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral
part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for
field-installed equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit
shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring shall
be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section
specifying the associated equipment.
2.16 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2,. Controllers shall have thermal
overload protection in each phase and shall have one spare normally open
and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact. Provide controllers for
motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed
to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide
protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart
relay. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection
when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall
have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton
stations or switches. When used with pressure, float, or similar
automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, controller shall have
hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall
be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed
when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and
high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload
protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand"
and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to
hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory
control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's
approved wiring diagram. For each motor not in sight of controller or
where controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and
driven machinery location, controller disconnecting means shall be capable
of being locked in open position. As an alternative, provide a manually
operated, lockable, nonfused switch which disconnects motor from supply
source within sight of motor. Overload protective devices shall provide
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 15

adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type;
and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller
case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit
breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit
breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit
breaker is in "off" position..
2.16.1 Control Wiring
All control wire shall be stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with
600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW
meeting UL 1063, and shall pass the VW-1 flame tests included in those
standards. Hinge wire shall have Class K stranding. Current transformer
secondary leads shall be not smaller than No. 10 AWG. The minimum size of
control wire shall be No. 14 AWG. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and
below shall be of the same type as control wiring and the minimum size
shall be No. 12 AWG. Special attention shall be given to wiring and
terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual
conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal
points.
2.16.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks
NEMA ICS 4. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring shall be
molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.
The terminals shall be removable binding, fillister or washer head screw
type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts. The terminals
shall be not less than No. 10 in size and shall have sufficient length and
space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors
to each terminal. The terminal arrangement shall be subject to the
approval of the Contracting Officer and not less than four (4) spare
terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, shall be provided on each
block or group of blocks. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks will be
acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type. The
Contractor shall submit data showing that the proposed alternate will
accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying
capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between
current-carrying parts.
2.16.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks
a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks shall be
furnished for all current transformer secondary leads and shall have
provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer
without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks shall meet the
requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.
b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of
adequate capacity shall be provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3
and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except
those for feeder tap units. The terminals shall be of either the stud
type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type,
having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size
required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more
than 50 amperes, screws shall have hexagonal heads. Conducting parts
between connected terminals shall have adequate contact surface and
cross-section to operate without overheating. Each connected terminal
shall have the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the
terminal in permanent contrasting color.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 16

2.16.3 Control Circuits
Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from
control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers shall conform to UL 506,
as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits,
shall have primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for
correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of
rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary
side.. One secondary lead shall be fused; other shall be grounded.
Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from a
separate control source. Provide terminals and terminal boards. Provide
separate control disconnect switch within controller. One secondary lead
shall be fused; other shall be grounded.
2.16.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers
NEMA ICS 6.
2.16.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers
Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked.
Multiple-speed controllers shall have compelling relays and shall be
multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.
2.16.6 Pushbutton Stations
Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and
one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor
is running. Stations shall be heavy duty, oil-tight design.
2.16.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights
Provide transformer, resistor, or diode type.
2.16.8 Reduced-Voltage Controllers
Provide for polyphase motors 5 horsepower and larger. Reduced-voltage
starters shall be single-step, closed transition or as indicated, and shall
have adjustable time interval between application of reduced and full
voltages to motors. Wye-delta reduced voltage starter or part winding
increment starter having adjustable time delay between application of
voltage to first and second winding of motor may be used in lieu of the
reduced-voltage starters for starting of centrifugally operated equipment,
or reciprocating compressors provided with automatic unloaders.
2.17 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)
SingleDouble or Three pole designed for flush or surface mounting as
indicated with overload protection.
2.18 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and
other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy
in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Mechanical isolation of machines and
other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23,
"Mechanical."
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 17

2.19 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway),
including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires wireways, and other
accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with
TIA-569 and as specified herein. Additional telecommunications
requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS
CABLING SYSTEM.
2.20 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT
2.20.1 Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods shall be sectional type, copper-clad steel, with
minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet.
2.21 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.22 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch
thick, white with black _____ center core. Surface shall be matte finish.
Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering
shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.23 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and
NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and
motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of
potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by
the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified
persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the
equipment.
2.24 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING .
2.25 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Provide parallel type surge protective devices which comply with UL 1449 at
the service entrance , panelboards . Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1
enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Provide the following modes of protection:
FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS-
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 18

Each phase to neutral ( L-N )
Neutral to ground ( N-G )
Phase to ground ( L-G )
Surge protective devices at the service entrance shall have a minimum surge
current rating of 80,000 amperes per mode minimum and downstream protectors
shall be rated 40,000 amperes per mode minimum. The maximum line to
neutral (L-N) Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) shall be:
500V for 208Y/120V, three phase system
The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating shall be:
150V for 120V, single phase system
300/150V for 208Y/120V, three phase system
EMI/RFI filtering shall be provided for each mode with the capability to
attenuate high frequency noise. Minimum attenuation shall be 20db.
2.26 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and
exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned
and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment
prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams,
dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces
shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces
shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats
baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be
ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors shall be ANSI Light Gray.
Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in
paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
2.27 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.27.1 Transformer Factory Tests
Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each
transformer and also contain the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype"
tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to
those specified.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations
and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to
requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
3.1.1 Underground Service
Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 19

from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.
3.1.2 Service Entrance Identification
Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be
labeled and identified as such.
3.1.2.1 Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than
one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing,
shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance
disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate number of service
disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of
enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated
plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use
lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white
matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one
enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
3.1.3 Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid
nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or
specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise.
Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral
conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for
circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be
1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits.
Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with metal
conduit in fire-rated shafts. Metal conduit shall extend through shafts
for minimum distance of 6 inches. Conduit which penetrates fire-rated
walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors shall be firestopped in
accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.3.1 Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having
minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack
at each end of pull wire.
3.1.4 Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within
finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away
from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit
parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members
where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible
after completion of project.
3.1.4.1 Restrictions Applicable to Aluminum Conduit
a. Do not install underground or encase in concrete or masonry.
b. Do not use brass or bronze fittings.
c. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 20

3.1.4.2 Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a. Do not install underground.
b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious
materials.
c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not
limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could
physically damage the EMT.
d. Do not use in hazardous areas.
e. Do not use outdoors.
f. Do not use in fire pump rooms.
g. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.3 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80
(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage,
including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms,
electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile
magazines, and other such areas.
(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.
(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms.
(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or
fire-rated floors.
(5) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for
rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.
(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
b. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing
(1) Do not install underground.
(2) Do not encase in concrete except when provided with fittings
identified for this purpose are used for connections.
(3) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage,
including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms,
electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile
magazines, and other such areas.
(4) Do not use in hazardous areas.
(5) Do not use outdoors.
(6) Do not use in sizes larger than 2 inch.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 21

(7) Do not run exposed in buildings exceeding three floors above
grade, where "first floor" is as defined in NFPA 70.
(8) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.4 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when
the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude
Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.5 Service Entrance Conduit, Overhead
Rigid steel or IMC from service entrance to service entrance fitting or
weatherhead outside building.
3.1.4.6 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion
shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed
minimum 18 inches below slab or grade.
3.1.4.7 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance
Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40;
Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to
plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor
slab. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor.
3.1.4.8 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts
Rigid metal conduit or IMC only.
3.1.4.9 Stub-Ups
Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to
free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for
plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in
rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches
above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install
screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.
3.1.4.10 Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze.
Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by
concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine
screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work.
Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld
conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners
shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to
concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes
cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to
depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main
reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel
construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction,
run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 22

system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both
(a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system
into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared
between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation
shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure
maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used
for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry
locations. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable
watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity
by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches
inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the
equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the
downward direction.
3.1.4.11 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal
fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending
machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped
conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,
fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of
obstructions.
3.1.4.12 Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where
required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings
cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least
minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for
digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of
conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
3.1.4.13 Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit
to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be
1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit in wet
and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,
movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible
connections.
3.1.4.14 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway
Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA-569.
a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to
the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling length
requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits in
accordance with TIA-569 and as indicated.
3.1.5 Busway Installation
Installation shall comply at minimum with NFPA 70. Install busways
parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members. Support busways at 5 foot maximum intervals, and brace to prevent
lateral movement. Hinges provided on risers shall be fixed type;
spring-type are unacceptable. Provide flanges where busway makes
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 23

penetrations through walls and floors, and seal to maintain smoke and fire
ratings. Provide waterproof curb where busway riser passes through floor.
Seal gaps with fire-rated foam and calk. Provide expansion joints, but
only where bus duct crosses building expansion joints. Provide supports to
resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5
times the equipment weight in the downward direction.
3.1.6 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling
of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes
for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet
locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when
surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and
walkways, or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically
indicated. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel, except that
aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may
be used with nonmetallic conduit system. Each box shall have volume
required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for
mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal,
except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture
configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls
shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having
square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes
installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of
exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures
when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; fixtures shall be
readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are
provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on
suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and
supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on
concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with
machine screws or welded studs on steel. In open overhead spaces, cast
boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where
used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building
structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to
raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type
fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete
members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.
3.1.6.1 Boxes
Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep,
except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are
approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4
inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one
raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4
inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep , except for wall mounted telephones .
Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls.
3.1.6.2 Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge
aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, and compatible with nonmetallic
raceway systems, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations
specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several
feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly
electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 24

3.1.6.3 Extension Rings
Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on
existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for
new finish.
3.1.7 Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards, circuit breakers, motor controller and disconnecting
switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum
78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished
floor. Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Mount other devices as
indicated.
3.1.8 Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice,
or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter,
color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation.
For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by
plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates;
or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide telecommunications
system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.
3.1.8.1 Marking Strips
White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to
each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire
numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be
reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be
furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets
of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be
assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device
terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct
terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the
Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point)
designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on
terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard
practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for
identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the
Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings
submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for
addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along
with any rearrangement of points required.
3.1.9 Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10
AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make
splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless
connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor
insulation.
3.1.9.1 Splices of Aluminum Conductors
Make with solderless circumferential compression-type, aluminum-bodied
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 25

connectors UL listed for AL/CU. Remove surface oxides from aluminum
conductors by wire brushing and immediately apply oxide-inhibiting joint
compound and insert in connector. After joint is made, wipe away excess
joint compound, and insulate splice.
3.1.10 Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces
without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not
permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of
sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates
installed in wet locations.
3.1.11 Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated
walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.12 Grounding and Bonding
Provide In accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying
metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding
conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system
grounds, grounding conductor of nonmetallic sheathed cables, and neutral
conductor of wiring systems. In addition to the requirements specified
herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with
TIA J-STD-607. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that
connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation
of fault protection.
3.1.12.1 Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be
measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. The
maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under
normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a
single rod,an additional rod not less than 6 feet on centers, or if
sectional type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven
with the first rod. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured
not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who
will decide on the number of ground rods to add.
3.1.12.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally
inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access for
periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or
which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to
provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be
as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other
standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has
been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 26

3.1.12.3 Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 _____
ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 _____ ohms,
contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.1.12.4 Telecommunications System
Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:
b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications
service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for
telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding
connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors
should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary
to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit
that exceeds3 feet in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each
end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor,
minimum.
c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications grounding
connections to the TMGB or TGB shall utilize listed compression
two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole
non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections.
All metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications
cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or
space as the TMGB or TGB shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB respectively.
In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework
is readily accessible within the room; each TMGB and TGB shall be
bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG
conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily
accessible, the metal frame shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB with a
minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter
distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently
electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded
to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members.
All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall
be listed for the intended purpose.
3.1.13 Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment
under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically
noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and
protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this
section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section
specifying the associated equipment.
3.1.14 Elevator
Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect
switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, outlet
receptacle and work light at midheight of elevator shaft, and work light
and outlet receptacle in elevator pit.
3.1.15 Government-Furnished Equipment
Contractor shall rough-in for Government-furnished equipment shall make
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 27

connections to Government-furnished equipment to make equipment operate as
intended, including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs,
receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet boxes or
fittings.
3.1.16 Repair of Existing Work
Repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing
electrical distribution systems shall be performed as follows:
3.1.16.1 Workmanship
Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing,
or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is
necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit,
raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping,
and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.
3.1.16.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed
Existing concealed wiring to be removed shall be disconnected from its
source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of
floor, and through walls; and seal openings.
3.1.16.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System
Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment shall include
equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed
conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, back to equipment's
power source as indicated.
3.1.16.4 Continuation of Service
Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing
circuits of equipment shall remain energized. Circuits which are to remain
but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits wiring and power
restored back to original condition.
3.1.17 Surge Protective Devices
Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source,
keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible
side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.
3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria.
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 28

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test
results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each tests.
3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five
times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or
accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring
No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of
approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum
resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.
3.5.3 Transformer Tests
Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection
and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and
below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages
for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized
independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.
3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test
Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to
verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.
3.5.5 Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground
is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for
resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test
to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance
and soil conditions at time measurements were made.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 20 00 Page 29

SECTION 26 24 16.00 40
PANELBOARDS
08/10
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)
RCBEA GUIDE
(2004) NASA Reliability Centered Building
and Equipment Acceptance Guide
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
NEMA PB 1
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2006; Errata 2008) Panelboards
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-HDBK 232 (1987; Rev A; Notice 1 1988; Notice 2
2000) Red/Black Engineering -
Installation Guidelines
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FED-STD-595
(Rev C) Colors Used in Government
Procurement
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 489
UL 67
(2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
(2009; Reprint Sep 2010) Standard for
Panelboards
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
work specified in this section.
Submit Detail Drawings for the panelboards consisting of fabrication and
assembly drawings for all parts of the work in sufficient detail to enable
the Government to check conformity with the requirements of the contract
documents. Include within drawings details of bus layout.
Ensure Outline Drawings for panelboards indicate overall physical features,
dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights of equipment.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 1

Statements signed by responsible officials of a manufacturer of a product,
system, or material attesting that the product, system or material meet
specified requirements. Statements must be dated after the award of this
contract, name the project, and list the specific requirements which it is
intended to address.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Detail Drawings and Outline Drawings for panelboards in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of
this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Panelboards
Directory Card and Holder
Filtered Panelboard
SD-04 Samples
Ensure that Keys are properly tagged and delivered to the
Contracting Officer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for the following tests in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "Site Testing," of this section. Do not
energize panelboards until the recorded test data has been
submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer.
Continuity Tests
Insulation Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Statements in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General
Requirements," of this section.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit manufacturer's instructions for Panelboards including
special provisions required to install equipment components and
system packages. Special notices shall detail impedances, hazards
and safety precautions.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 2

1.4 PREDICTIVE TESTING AND INSPECTION TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS
This section contains systems and/or equipment components regulated by
NASA's Reliability Centered Building and Equipment Acceptance Program.
This program requires the use of Predictive Testing and Inspection (PT&I)
technologies in conformance with RCBEA GUIDE to ensure building equipment
and systems installed by the Contractor have been installed properly and
contain no identifiable defects that shorten the design life of a system
and/or its components. Satisfactory completion of all acceptance
requirements is required to obtain Government approval and acceptance of
the Contractor's work.
Perform PT&I tests and provide submittals as specified in Section
01 86 26.07 40 RELIABILITY CENTERED ACCEPTANCE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
Totally enclose power-distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance
branch-circuit panelboards in a steel cabinet, dead-front circuit breaker
type with copper buses, surface- or flush-mounted as indicated. Ensure
panelboards conform to NEMA PB 1 and UL 489. Branch circuit panels shall
have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers.
An outer door or cover, hinged on one side, shall be provided on
surface-mounted panelboards to provide gutter space access. Provide a
center door for circuit breaker/switch access only.
Voltage and current rating, number of phases, and number of wires shall be
as indicated. Provide four-wire distribution panelboards and lighting and
appliance branch-circuit panelboards with an isolated full-capacity neutral
bus. Ensure panelboards are rated for 120/208-volt, three-phase , 60-hertz
current.
Provide three-phase, 4-wire and single-phase, 3-wire distribution lighting
and branch circuit panelboards with an isolated full-capacity bus providing
spaces for single-pole circuit breakers/switches and spaces indicated as
spare.
Provide panelboards with a separate grounding bus bonded to the enclosure.
Grounding bus shall be a solid bus bar of rectangular cross section
equipped with binding screws for the connection of equipment grounding
conductors.
Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short-circuit current
rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the panelboard schedule or as indicated.
Ensure panelboards and main lugs or main breaker have current ratings as
shown on the panelboard schedule.
Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the
"distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Single-phase, three-wire
panelboard busing shall be such that when any two adjacent single-pole
breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can be
installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be such
that when any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually
connected to each of the three different phases, two- or three-pole
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 3

eakers can be installed at any location. Current-carrying parts of the
bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as shown.
Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast copper or copper
alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected
thereto.
Boxes shall have the manufacturer's standard knockouts and shall be
galvanized code-gage sheet steel. Fronts shall be of code-gage sheet steel
furnished with hinged doors with adjustable trim clamps for securing the
fronts to the boxes.
Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA 250, Type 1. Provide enclosures with
hinged fronts and corrosion-resistant steel pin-tumbler cylinder locks.
Key locks alike and provide two keys for each enclosure.
Finish panelboards with baked enamel. Finish color is to be No. 61 gray
conforming to FED-STD-595.
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers shall be the molded-case type as specified in Section
26 05 70.00 40 HIGH VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES and Section
26 05 71.00 40 LOW VOLTAGE OVERCORRECT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. Frame and trip
ratings shall be as indicated.
Interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be as indicated. If not
shown, the interrupting rating for circuit breakers in 120/208 -volt
panelboards shall be not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, .
Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type. Plug-in type is not acceptable.
Provide shunt trips where indicated.
In branch circuit panelboards, branch circuit breakers feeding convenience
outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10
times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts
resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single-pole 15- and 20-ampere
circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120 volts ac .
Provide UL Class A (5-milliampere sensitivity) ground fault circuit
protection on 120-volt ac branch circuit as indicated. This protection is
an integral part of the branch circuit breaker that also provides overload
and short-circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a
branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption is not
to disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single-pole circuit
breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption requires no more
panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional slide pole circuit
breaker.
Ensure connections to the bus are bolt-on type.
When multiple wires per phase are specified, furnish the circuit breakers
with connectors made to accommodate multiple wires.
Ensure circuit breaker spaces called out on the drawings are complete with
mounting hardware to permit ready installation of the circuit breakers.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 4

2.3 DIRECTORY CARD AND HOLDER
Mount a directory card on the inside of hinged fronts and doors 0.030-inch
thick minimum plastic in a metal frame, with spaces for circuit numbers,
outlets controlled, and room numbers. Where hinged fronts or doors are not
required, provide the directory card 0.030-inch thick minimum plastic in a
metal frame mounted on the left-hand side of the front trim. Directory
card shall identify each branch circuit with its respective and numbered
circuit breaker.
2.4 FILTERED PANELBOARDS
2.4.1 General
Design panelboards for the distribution, control, and protection of
electrical circuits, providing filtering and shielding performance and,
when specified, conforming to MIL-HDBK 232. (Portions of MIL-HDBK 232 are
classified and will be available only on classified projects to approved
companies and individuals.)
Panelboard cabinet shall be 12-gage steel minimum, with
corrosion-resistant finish and four external mounting brackets welded to
the case. Front door and trim shall be of code gage steel, with gray
finish, equipped with directory, holder, adjustable trim clamps, hinges,
self-latching catch, tumbler lock and key and shall bear the UL label.
Provide a red diagonal strip across the outside surface of door and trim.
2.5 FACTORY TESTING
Test complete panelboards in accordance with UL 67.
2.6 PRECAUTIONARY LABEL
To ensure persons are aware of immediate or potential hazard in the
application, installation, use, or maintenance of panelboards, each
panelboard shall be conspicuously marked on the trim or dead front shield
with the text (or equivalent) DANGER symbol. If the panel is supplied with
a door, ensure the label is visible when the door is in the open position.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install panelboards as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Fully align and mount panels so that the height of the top
operating handle does not exceed 72-inches above the finished floor.
Directory-card information shall be typewritten in capital letters to
indicate outlets controlled and final room numbers served by each circuit
and shall be mounted in holders behind protective covering.
3.2 SITE TESTING
Perform PT&I tests and provide submittals as specified in Section
01 86 26.07 40 RELIABILITY CENTERED ACCEPTANCE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
Each panelboard enclosure key shall be shown to operate the enclosure locks
in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 5

Panelboards shall be given continuity and insulation tests after the
installation has been completed and before the panelboard is energized.
Provide test equipment, labor, and personnel as required to perform the
tests as specified. Conduct Continuity tests using a dc device with bell
buzzer .
Conduct insulation tests on 480-volt panelboards using a 1,000-volt
insulation-resistance test set. Record readings every minute until three
equal and consecutive readings have been obtained. Resistance between
phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground shall be not less
than 50 megohms.
Conduct insulation tests on panelboards rated 300 volts or less using a
500-volt minimum insulation-resistance test set. Record readings after 1
minute and until the reading is constant for 15 seconds. Resistance
between phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground shall be
not less than 25 megohms.
Record test data and include the location and identification of panelboards
and megohm readings versus time.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 6

SECTION 26 41 00.00 20
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
04/06
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 81
(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth
Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
NFPA 780
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
(2011) Standard for the Installation of
Lightning Protection Systems
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 467
UL 96
UL 96A
UL Electrical Constructn
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
(2005; Reprint Oct 2010) Standard for
Lightning Protection Components
(2007; Reprint Oct 2010) Standard for
Installation Requirements for Lightning
Protection Systems
(2009) Electrical Construction Equipment
Directory
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.2.1 Verification of Dimensions
Contractor shall become familiar with all details of work, verify all
dimensions in field, and shall advise Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing work. No departures shall be made without
prior approval of Contracting Officer.
1.2.2 System Requirements
Materials shall consist of standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in production of lightning protection systems and shall be
manufacturer's latest UL approved design. Lightning protection system
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 1

shall conform to NFPA 70, NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Overall lightning protection system; G
Each major component; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Grounding system test; G
Lightning protection system inspection; G
SD-07 Certificates
UL listing or label; G
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
In each standard referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be
mandatory, as though the word "shall" has been substituted for "should"
wherever it appears. Interpret references in these standards to "authority
having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean Contracting
Officer.
1.4.1 Installation Drawings
a. Submit installation shop drawing for the overall lightning protection
system. Drawings shall include physical layout of the equipment,
mounting details, relationship to other parts of the work, and wiring
diagram.
b. Submit detail drawings for each major component to include
manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions.
1.4.2 UL Listing or Label
Submit proof of compliance. Label of or listing in UL Electrical Constructn
is acceptable evidence. In lieu of label or listing, submit written
certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization
equipped to perform such services, stating that items have been tested and
conform to requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
Contractor will become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions
in the field, and advise Contracting Officer of discrepancies before
performing work. Deviations from contract drawings will not be made
without prior approval of Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 2

PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Do not use a combination of materials that forms an electrolytic couple of
such nature that corrosion is accelerated in presence of moisture unless
moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where
unusual conditions exist which would cause corrosion of conductors, provide
conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors. Where
mechanical hazard is involved, increase conductor size to compensate for
hazard or protect conductors by covering them with molding or tubing made
of wood or nonmagnetic material. When metallic conduit or tubing is
provided, electrically bond conductor to conduit or tubing at the upper and
lower ends by clamp type connectors or welds (including exothermic).
2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors
NFPA 780 and UL 96 Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as
applicable.
2.1.2 Copper
Provide copper conductors on nonmetallic stacks that do not weigh less than
319 pounds per thousand feet, and provide cable such that the size of any
strand in the cable is not less than No. 15 AWG. Provide thickness of web
or ribbon on stacks that is not less than No. 12 AWG. Provide loop
conductors that are comprised of copper conductors not smaller than No. 1/0
AWG.
2.1.3 Aluminum
Do not allow aluminum to contact the earth and do not use in any other
manner that will contribute to rapid deterioration of the metal. Observe
appropriate precautions at connections with dissimilar metals in accordance
with NFPA 70 Article 110-14. Provide aluminum cable conductors for bonding
and interconnecting metallic bodies to main cable that are at least
equivalent to strength cross-sectional area of a No. 4 AWG aluminum wire.
When perforated strips are provided, use strips that are much wider than
solid strips. Use a strip width that is at least twice that of the
diameter of the perforations. Use an aluminum strip which has a thickness
of not less than the diameter of No. 12 AWG and at least 1 1/2 inches wide
for connecting exposed water pipes.
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Air Terminals
Provide terminals in accordance with UL 96, except provide Class II for
Class I and Class II applications. Support air terminals more than 24
inches in length by suitable brace, with guides, not less than one-half the
height of the terminal.
2.2.2 Ground Rods
Provide ground rods made of copper-clad steel conforming to conform to
UL 467. Provide ground rods that are not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and
10 feet in length. Do not mix ground rods of copper-clad steel, stainless
steel, galvanized ferrous, or solid copper on the job.
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 3

2.2.3 Connections and Terminations
Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96, class as
applicable. Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds
(including exothermic). Provide style and size connectors required for the
installation.
2.2.4 Connector Fittings
Provide connector fittings for "end-to-end", "Tee", or "Y" splices that
conform to NFPA 780.
2.2.5 Lightning Protection Components
Provide bonding plates, air terminal supports, chimney bands, clips, and
fasteners that conform to UL 96 classes as applicable.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM
Lightning protection system consists of air terminals, roof conductors,
down conductors, ground connections, grounding electrodes and ground loop
conductor. Electrically interconnect lightning protection system to form
the shortest distance to ground. Do not use nonconducting parts of the
structure as part of the building's lightning protection system. Expose
conductors on the structures except where conductors are required to be in
protective sleeves. Interconnect secondary conductors with grounded
metallic parts within the building. Make interconnections within
side-flash distances at or above the level of the grounded metallic parts.
3.1.1 Air Terminals
Air terminal design and support conforming to NFPA 780. Rigidly connect
terminals to, and make electrically continuous with, roof conductors by
means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of T-shaped malleable
metal. Provide pressure connector or crimped joint with a dowel or
threaded fitting to connect ground rod conductor with air terminal. Set
air terminals at ends of structures not more than 2 feetfrom ends of ridges
and corners of roofs. Do not exceed 25 feet in spacing of 2 foot high air
terminals on ridges, parapets, and around perimeter of building with flat
roofs. When necessary to exceed this spacing, increase specified height of
air terminals not less than 2 inches for each one foot of increase over 25
feet. On large flat, or gently sloping roofs, as defined in NFPA 780,
place air terminals at points of the intersection of imaginary lines
dividing the surface into rectangles having sides not exceeding 50 feet in
length. Secure air terminals against overturning either by attachment to
the object to be protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other
braces which are permanently and rigidly attached to the building or
structure. Metal projections and metal parts of buildings such as
smokestacks and other metal objects that are at least 3/16 inch thick and
that do not contain hazardous materials, need not be provided with air
terminals. However, bond these metal objects to a lightning conductor
through a metal conductor of the same unit weight per length as the main
conductor. Where metal ventilators are installed, mount air terminals
thereon, where practical. Bond air terminals, erected by necessity
adjacent to a metal ventilator, to the ventilator near the top and bottom.
Where nonmetallic spires, steeples, or ventilators are present, mount air
terminals to the side. In addition, where spires or steeples project more
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 4

than 10 feet above the building, continue conductor from air terminal to
nearest down conductor securely connect thereto.
3.1.2 Roof Conductors
Connect roof conductors directly to the roof or ridge roll. Avoid sharp
bends or turns in conductors. Do not make turns of less than 8 inches.
Preserve horizontal or downward course on conductors. Rigidly fasten
conductors every 3 feet along the roof and down the building to the
ground. Rigidly connect metal ventilators to the roof conductor at three
places. Make connections electrically continuous. Course roof conductors
along contours of flat roofs, ridges, parapets, and edges; and where
necessary, over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air terminal
to all the rest. Connect roof conductors surrounding tank tops, decks,
flat surfaces, and flat roofs to form a closed loop.
3.1.3 Down Conductors
Make down conductors electrically continuous from air terminals and roof
conductors to grounding electrodes. Course down conductors over outer
extreme portions of the building, such as corners, with consideration given
to location of ground connections and air terminals. Provide each building
or structure not less than two down conductors located as widely separated
as practicable, such as at diagonally opposite corners. Install
additional down conductors when necessary to avoid "dead ends" or branch
conductors exceeding 16 feet in length, ending at air terminals. Equally
and symmetrically spaced down conductors about the perimeter of the
structure. Protect conductors where necessary, to prevent physical damage
or displacement to the conductor.
3.1.4 Interconnection of Metallic Parts
Connect metal doors, windows, and gutters directly to ground or down
conductors using not smaller than No. 6 copper conductor, or equivalent.
Where there is probability of unusual wear, mechanical injury, or
corrosion, provide conductors with greater electrical capacity than normal
or protect the conductor. Provide mechanical ties or pressure connectors
between grounds and metal doors and windows.
3.1.5 Ground Connections
Securely connect conductor forming continuations of down conductors from
structure to grounding electrode in a manner to ensure electrical
continuity between the two. Provide clamp type connections or welds
(including exothermic) for continuation. Provide a ground connection for
each down conductor. Attach down conductors to ground rods by welding
(including exothermic).. Protect ground connection from mechanical
injury. Bond metal water pipes and other large underground metallic
objects together with all grounding mediums. In making ground connections,
take advantage of all permanently moist places where practicable, although
avoid such places when area is wet with waste water that contains chemical
substances, especially those corrosive to metal.
3.1.6 Grounding Electrodes
Provide grounding electrode for each down conductor. Extend driven ground
rods into the existing undisturbed earth for a distance of not less 10 feet.
Set ground rods not less than 2 feet nor more than 10 feet, from the
structure. After the completed installation, measure the total resistance
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 5

to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Maximum
resistance of a driven ground rod shall be 10 ohms, under normally dry
conditions . Use a ground loop when two of any three ground rods, driven
not less than 10 feet into the ground, a minimum of 10 feet apart, and
equally spaced around the perimeter, give a combined value exceeding 50
ohms immediately after having driven. For ground loop, provide continuous
No. 1/0 bare stranded copper cable or equivalent material having suitable
resistance to corrosion. Lay ground loop around the perimeter of the
structure in a trench not less than 30 inches below grade, at a distance
not less than 2 feet nor more than 10 feet from the nearest point of the
structure. Install a ground loop in earth undisturbed by excavation, not
earth fill, and do not locate beneath roof overhang, or wholly under paved
areas or roadways where rainfall cannot penetrate to keep soil moist in the
vicinity of the cable. Make connections between ground conductors and
grounds or ground loop, and between ground loop and grounds electrically
continuous. .
3.1.7 Grounding Plates
Provide a grounding plate for down conductor. Set grounding plates not
less than 2 feet nor more than 10 feet, from the structure. Grounding
plate is to be buried as deeply in the existing dirt as local conditions
allow, without exceeding 10 feetin depth.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.2.1 Nonmetallic Exterior Walls with Metallic Roof
Bond metal roof sections together which are insulated from each other so
that they are electrically continuous. Connect air terminals so that they
are electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof
conductors and down conductors. Bond ridge cables and roof conductors to
the roof at upper and lower edges of roof and at intervals not to exceed
100 feet. Bond down conductors to roof conductors and to lower edge of
metal roof. Where metal of roof is in small sections, make connections
between air terminals and down conductors to at least four sections of the
metal roof. Make connections electrically continuous and have a surface
contact of at least 3 square inches.
3.2.2 Metal Roofs with Metal Walls
Bond metal roof and metal walls so that they are electrically continuous
and considered as one unit. Connect air terminals to and make them
electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof down
conductors. Bond all roof conductors and down conductors to metal roof or
metal walls at upper and lower edges at intervals not to exceed 100 feet.
Make all connections electrically continuous and have surface contact of at
least 3 square inches.
3.2.3 Steel Frame Building
Make the steel framework of the building electrically continuous.
Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding
unless another specific method is indicated. Connect air terminals to the
structural steel framework at the ridge. Provide short runs of conductors
to join air terminals to the metal framework so that proper placing of air
terminals is maintained. Separate down conductors from air terminals to
ground connections are not required. Where water system enters the
building, securely connect structural steel framework and water system at
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 6

point of entrance by a ground connector. Make connections to pipes by
means of ground clamps with lugs. Make connections to structural framework
by means of nut and bolt or welding. Make connections between columns and
ground connections at bottom of steel columns. Make ground connections to
grounds or ground loop runs from not less than one-half of the columns
distributed equally around perimeter of structure. When no water system
enter the structure, run ground connections from steel columns distributed
equally around the perimeter of the structure. Bond metal doors, windows,
gutters, and similar metal installation to steel work of the building.
Provide a grounding electrode for each ground connection.
3.2.4 Ramps and Covered Passageways
Ramps and covered passageways which are in the zone of protection of a
lightning protection system, as defined by NFPA 780, need no additional
lightning protection. However, ramps and covered passageways which are
outside the zone of protection of a lightning protection system shall be
provided with a lightning protection conforming to the requirements for
lightning protection systems for buildings of similar construction. Place
a down conductor and a driven ground at one of the corners where the ramp
connects to each building or structure. Connect down conductor and driven
ground to the ground loop or nearest ground connection of the building or
structure. Where buildings or structures and connecting ramps are clad
with metal, connect metal of the buildings or structures and metal of the
ramp in a manner to ensure electrical continuity, in order to avoid the
possibility of a flash-over or spark due to a difference in potential.
Make connections electrically continuous and have a surface contact area of
at least 3 square inches.
3.2.5 Tanks and Towers
3.2.5.1 Wooden Tanks and Towers
Electrically interconnect lightning protection system components (such as:
air terminals, ridge cables, down conductors, ground connections, and
grounds) to form the shortest distance to ground without passing through
any nonconducting parts of the structure. Where the roof of the structure
ends in a peak, a single air terminal not less than 2 feethigh will be
regarded as sufficient. When structure does not end in a peak, provide air
terminals not less than 2 feet high at intervals not exceeding 25 feet
along the perimeter of the structure. When the tank or tower is an adjunct
of a building, near or touching the perimeter, extend one of the down
conductors directly to a ground connection and connect the other to
lightning protection of the building. When tank or tower is set well
within the perimeter of the building, connect both down conductors to
lightning protection system of the building. When height of the structure
exceeds 100 feet, cross-connect down conductors midway between the top and
bottom. Where buried metal pipes enter tank or tower, connect one down
conductor to pipes, approximately 1 foot below grade. Ground metal guy
wires or cables set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting
supports to a ground rod driven full length into the ground.
3.2.5.2 Metal or Reinforced-Concrete Tanks and Towers
Make metal or reinforcing steel electrically continuous. Electrical
continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding metal and tying
or clipping reinforcing bars, unless a specific method is noted on the
drawings. Air terminals and down conductors are required except on bolted,
riveted, or welded 3/16 inch minimum steel plate tanks. Ground connections
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 7

and grounding electrodes are not required on metal tanks that are
electrically continuous with a metallic underground pipe system. On other
structures, provide two ground connections approximately 180 degrees apart
at the base of the structure. Connect each buried metal pipe entering the
tank or tower to one ground connection approximately one foot below
finished grade. Ground metal guy wires on tanks and towers. Metal guy
wires or cables attached to steel anchor rods set in earth will be
considered as grounded. Ground metal guy wires or cables set in concrete
or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports to a ground rod driven
full length into the ground.
3.2.6 Stacks
Ground metal guy wires for stacks. Metal guy wires or cables attached to
steel anchor rods set in earth will be considered as sufficiently well
grounded. However, ground metal guy wires or cables attached to anchor
rods set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports to
a ground rod driven full length into the ground.
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURES
3.3.1 Interconnection of Metal Bodies
Protect metal bodies when not within the zone of protection of air
terminal. Bond metal bodies having an area of 400 square inches or greater
or a volume of 1000 cubic inches or greater to lightning protection system
using main size conductors and a bonding plate having a surface contact
area of not less than 3 square inches. Make provisions to guard against
the corrosive effect of bonding dissimilar metals. Bond metal bodies at
their closest point to the lightning protection system using bonding
conductors and fittings. Independently ground any metal body that exceeds
5 feet in any dimension, that is situated wholly within a building, and
that does not at any point come within 6 feet of a lightning conductor or
metal connected to a lightning protection system.
3.3.2 Fences
Except as specified below, metal fences that are electrically continuous
with metal posts extending at least 2 feet into the ground require no
additional grounding. Ground other fences on each side of every gate at
gate posts, at corner posts, and at end posts. Bond gate to adjacent fence
post utilizing flexible copper grounding braid with sufficient slack to
permit 180 degree opening of the gate. Provide flexible copper ground
braid which has an ampacity equivalent to that of the fence ground wire
specified herein. Provide ground rods every 1000 to 1500 feet for
grounding fences when fences are located in isolated places, and every 500
to 750 feet when in proximity ( 100 feet or less) to public roads,
highways, and buildings. Provide connection to ground from the post where
it is metal and is electrically continuous with the fencing using removable
ground clamps on the fence posts and split-bolt connectors suitable for
dissimilar metals on the fence fabric and barbed wire. Where the fence
consists of wooden posts and horizontal metal strands only, run down
conductors consisting of No. 8 copper wire or equivalent from the ground
rod the full height of the fences and fastened to each wire, so as to be
electrically continuous. Make connections to ground from the horizontal
metal strand using split-bolt connectors suitable for dissimilar metals on
the fence fabric and barbed wire. Ground metal fences at or near points
150 feet on each side of medium and high voltage, (meaning in excess of 600
volts,) overhead line crossings. Ground metal fences at 150 foot intervals
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 8

where high and medium voltage lines are directly overhead and run parallel
to the fence.
3.3.3 Exterior Overhead Pipe Lines
Properly ground overhead pipes, conduits, and cable trays on the exterior
of the building that enter a building, preferably to building grounds at
points where pipes enter the building. Where a separate ground is
provided, bond the pipes to the building ground at points where the pipes
are closest to the ground connections. In addition, bond pipes to any
metallic masses that are within 6 feet of the pipe.
3.4 RESTORATION
Where sod has been removed, place sod as soon as possible after completing
the backfilling. Restore to original condition the areas disturbed by
trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Include
necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging or
mulching in any restoration. Maintain disturbed surfaces and replacements
until final acceptance.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5.1 Grounding System Test
Test the grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to
ground is not in excess of 10 _____ ohms. Test the ground rod for
resistance to ground before making connections to the rod. Tie the
grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make
resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after
rainfall. Include in the written report: locations of ground rods,
resistance, and soil conditions at the time that measurements were made.
Submit results of each test to the Contracting Officer.
3.5.2 Lightning Protection System Inspection
Make visual inspections to verify that there are no loose connections which
may result in high resistance joints, and that conductors and system
components are securely fastened to their mounting surfaces and are
protected against accidental mechanical displacement.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 41 00.00 20 Page 9

SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
07/07
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI ANSLG C78.81
(2010) American National Standard for
Electric Lamps--Double-Capped Fluorescent
Lamps--Dimensional and Electrical
Characteristics
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A1008/A1008M
ASTM A641/A641M
ASTM A653/A653M
ASTM B633
(2011) Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
(2009a) Standard Specification for
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
(2010) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
(2007) Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)
CEC Title 24
(1978; R 2005) California's Energy
Efficiency Standards for Residential and
Nonresidential Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GC-12
(1997) Occupancy Sensors
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)
IESNA HB-9
(2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005; Errata
2006) IES Lighting Handbook
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 1

Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
IEEE C62.41.1
IEEE C62.41.2
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code
(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
(2002) Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C78.901
NEMA 250
NEMA ANSLG C82.11
NEMA ICS 2
NEMA ICS 6
(2005) American National Standard for
Electric Lamps - Single Base Fluorescent
Lamps--Dimensional and Electrical
Characteristics
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2011) American National Standard for
High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp
Ballasts--Supplements
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
(1993; R 2006) Enclosures
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 101
NFPA 70
(2012) Life Safety Code
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy
Efficiency Labeling System
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1598
UL 773
UL 773A
UL 924
(2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires
(1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for
Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
(2006; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for
Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
(2006; Reprint Feb 2011) Standard for
Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 2

UL 935
(2001; Reprint Jun 2010) Standard for
Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture
accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of
buildings are specified in this section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50
percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all
the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.4.1 Lighting Control System
Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment
shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming
ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications,
and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting
system specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G,
Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G,
Fluorescent electromagnetic ballasts; G,
Fluorescent lamps; G,
Lighting contactor; G,
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 3

Time switch; G,
Photocell switch; G,
Exit signs; G,
Occupancy sensors; G,
Light Level Sensor; G,
Energy Efficiency
SD-04 Samples
Lighting fixtures, complete with lamps and ballasts; G,
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality
Control."
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operational Service
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary
of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to
the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim
materials for recycling and/or reuse.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts
Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled
"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option,
submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast
specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's
catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and
sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled
"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be
supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of
vendors with vendor part numbers.
1.6.2 Lighting Fixtures, Complete With Lamps and Ballasts
Submit one sample of each fixture type for inspection, review, and
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 4

approval. The sample shall be retained for comparison against the
remainder of the fixtures. The sample may be used in the final fixture
installation.
1.6.3 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.4 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.6.4.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.4.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.6.4.3 Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and
color rendition index of light source.
1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty
Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty
period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the
electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture,
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 5

transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby
permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and
energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall
be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using
Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an
improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.
1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE
Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement take-back program.
Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement
options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim
materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not landfill or burn
reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations
governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local
recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.
1.9 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.9.1 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500_____ mile radius from the project site, if
available from a minimum of three sources.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following
characteristics:
a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA ANSLG C82.11, NFPA 70, and
CEC Title 24 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100 percent
electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil
components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by
IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the
wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall
be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are
connected.
b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).
c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum).
Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the
operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems.
Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.
d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen
output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation.
Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible
lamp.
e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum).
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 6

Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).
f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."
g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on
the ballast.
h. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated.
Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit
configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start
ballasts where available.
i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.
j. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection
circuits as required by ANSI ANSLG C78.81 and ANSI C78.901 as
applicable.
k. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a
minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.
l. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years
from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic
Ballast Warranty" herein.
2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast
a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 10 percent (maximum).
b. Input wattage.
2.1.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast
a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 25 percent (maximum).
b. Input wattage:
1. 34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps.
2.1.1.3 T-5 Long Twin Tube Lamp Ballast
a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall not be greater than 25 percent
when operating one lamp,.
b. Input wattage:
1. 45 watts (maximum) when operating one F40 T-5 lamps
2. 74 watts (maximum) when operating two F40 T-5 lamps
3. 105 watts (maximum) when operating three F40 T-5 lamps
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 7

2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamps
e. T-5, long twin tube fluorescent lamp, 40 watts (maximum), 3500 K_____,
22.6 inches maximum length, 20,000 hours average rated life, 3150
initial lumens, CRI of 80 (minimum), 2G11 Type base, 90 to 100
lumens/watt depending on wattage.
g. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI 80, minimum, 3500 K, 10,000
hours average rated life, and as follows:
Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.
2.1.3 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures
Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact
fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing
assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except
when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures
shall use lamps as indicated, with a minimum CRI of 80.
2.1.3.1 Bare Bulb Retrofits
Replace 40-watt incandescent bulbs (495+ lumens) with 11- to 14-watt
compact fluorescent bulbs (45+ lumens per watt). Replace 60-watt
incandescent bulbs (900+ lumens) with 15- to 19-watt compact fluorescent
bulbs (60+ lumens per watt). Replace 75-watt incandescent bulbs (1200+
lumens) with 20- to 25-watt compact fluorescent bulbs (60+ lumens per
watt). Replace 100-watt incandescent bulbs (1750+ lumens) with 29-watt or
greater compact fluorescent bulbs (60+ lumens per watt).
2.1.3.2 Reflector Type Bulb Retrofits
Replace 50-watt incandescent bulbs (550+ lumens) with 17- to 19-watt
compact fluorescent bulbs (33+ lumens per watt). Replace 60-watt
incandescent bulbs (675+ lumens) with 20- to 21-watt compact fluorescent
bulbs (40+ lumens per watt). Replace 75-watt incandescent bulbs (875+
lumens) with 22-watt or greater compact fluorescent bulbs (40+ lumens per
watt).
2.1.4 Open-Tube Fluorescent Fixtures
Provide with self-locking sockets, or lamp retainers (two per lamp).
Provide lamps with shatter resistant coating, non-yellowing, nominal
thickness of 15 mils, and with 97 percent (minimum) light transmission.
2.1.5 Electromagnetic Interference Filters
Provide in each fluorescent fixture mounted in shielded enclosures.
Filters shall be integral to the fixture assembly with one filter per
ballast and shall suppress electromagnetic interference in the AM radio
band from 500 to 1700 kHz.
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 8

2.2 SUSPENDED FIXTURES
Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures
supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb
installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball
tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to
swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to
limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have
twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures
shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod
suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each
end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.
2.3 SWITCHES
2.3.1 Toggle Switches
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTOR
NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Contacts shall be rated 120
volts, 30 amperes, and have number of poles indicated. Coils shall be
rated 120 volts. Rate contactor as indicated. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure
conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy double-break
contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor.
Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.
2.5 TIME SWITCH
Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset
and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or
sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 10 amperes120
volts, having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to
maintain accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure.
Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the
time switch shall be surface-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to
NEMA ICS 6.
2.6 PHOTOCELL SWITCH
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode
type cell rated 120120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single-throw contacts. Switch
shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A
time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light
sources. Provide switch:
b. In a U.V. stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and
adjustable window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum.
2.7 POWER HOOK FIXTURE HANGERS
Provide UL listed assembly including through-wired power hook housing,
interlocking plug and receptacle, power cord, and fixture support loop.
Power hook housing shall be cast aluminum having two 3/4 inch threaded
hubs. Support hook shall have safety screw. Fixture support loop shall be
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 9

cast aluminum with provisions for accepting 3/4 inch threaded fixture
stems. Power cord shall include 16 inches of 3 conductor No. 16 Type SO
cord. Assembly shall be rated 120 volts or 277 volts, 15 amperes.
2.8 EXIT SIGNS
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type.
Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts.
2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated.
Provide accessories required for remote-mounted lamps where indicated.
Remote-mounted lamps shall be as indicated.
2.9.1 Emergency Lighting Unit
Provide as indicated.
2.9.2 Fluorescent Emergency System
Each system shall consist of an automatic power failure device, test switch
operable from outside of the fixture, pilot light visible from outside the
fixture, and fully automatic solid-state charger in a self-contained power
pack. Provide self-testing module integral to the fixture. Charger shall
be either trickle, float, constant current or constant potential type, or a
combination of these. Battery shall be sealed Ni-cd type with capacity as
required to supply power to the number of lamps shown for each system for
90 minutes at a minimum of 1100 lumens output. Battery shall operate
unattended and require no maintenance for a period of not less than 5
years. Emergency ballasts provided with fixtures containing solid-state
ballasts shall be fully compatible with the solid-state ballasts.
2.10 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
UL listed. Comply with GC-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be
designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs
shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero
current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as
indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor
shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of
5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall color shall be
selected by the Architect, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling
mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.
a. Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause
detection interference between adjacent sensors.
b. Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a
fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.
c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 10

2.11 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS
2.11.1 Wires
ASTM A641/A641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055_____ inches
in diameter (12_____ gage).
2.11.2 Straps
Galvanized steel, one by 3/16 inch, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, with a
light commercial zinc coating or ASTM A1008/A1008M with an electrodeposited
zinc coating conforming to ASTM B633, Type RS.
2.11.3 Rods
Threaded steel rods, 3/16 inch diameter, zinc or cadmium coated.
2.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.12.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.12.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All
luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics
shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,
quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.
2.13 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test.
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 11

PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein.
3.1.1 Lamps
Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered
to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project
completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction
shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15
percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for
proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with
new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps
of each type from the original manufacturer.
3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in
alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with
manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet
requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be
to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of
fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting
for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where
applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the
ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be
independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four
wires or straps or rods per fixture and located near each corner of each
fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to
independently supported light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller
in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the
building structure by a minimum of four wires or straps or rods per fixture
spaced approximately equidistant around the fixture. Do not support
fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than
the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel,
support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal
channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and
aligning the fixture. Provide wires or straps or rods for lighting fixture
support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings
shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL
CEILINGS.
3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that
they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45
degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be
capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer
excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at
120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have
internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly
aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light
leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded
aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be
supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free
of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 12

specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable
shall be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling
and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between
suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer,
whichever is less.
3.1.4 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units
Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the
normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.
3.1.5 Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.6 Occupancy Sensor
Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide
additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage
shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration
type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage
rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to
avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or
airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.
3.1.7 Light Level Sensor
Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for
the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area.
3.2 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly
installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that
equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.
3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast
Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually detectable
flicker over full dimming range.
3.3.2 Occupancy Sensor
Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire
area being covered.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 51 00 Page 13

SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
04/06
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2;
TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical
Code
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a cable TV premises distribution system consisting of coaxial
cables and connecting hardware to transport television signals throughout
the building to user locations as indicated. Submit detail drawings
including a complete list of equipment and material and containing complete
wiring and schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate
that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a
system. Drawings shall include vertical riser diagrams, equipment rack and
panel details, elevation drawings of telecommunications closet walls,
outlet face plate details for each outlet configuration, and descriptions
and types of cables, conduits, and cable trays, if used. Drawings shall
show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and
equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for
maintenance and operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Cable TV Premises Distribution System; G
Installation; G
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts.
Test Plan; G
Qualifications; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 1

SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Recommendations; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit proof of the qualifications of the Contractor, Installers, and
Manufacturers that will perform the work, and provide the specified
products.
1.4.1 Minimum Contractor Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed, and equipment shall be
furnished and installed, by a qualified Contractor as defined herein. The
Contractor shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the
installation and testing of coaxial cable-based TV distribution systems and
equipment. Installers assigned to the installation of this system or its
components shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the
installation of the specified coaxial cable and components.
1.4.2 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
The equipment and hardware provided under this contract shall be products
of manufacturers that have a minimum of two years of experience in
producing the types of systems and equipment specified.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust or other contaminants.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of
32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity,
non-condensing.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified, after approval of detail drawings, not later than 2 months prior
to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete
list of parts, tools, test equipment and supplies, with current unit prices
and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.
Provide the following additional materials required for facility startup:
a. 2 of each type of connector used.
b. 2 of each type of cover plate, with connector.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 2

PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that
are the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory
use for at least one year prior to installation. Where materials or
equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or tested to meet
specific requirements, submit certification that the items provided conform
to such requirements. Certification by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory that a representative sample has been tested to meet the
requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to the effect
that the item meets the referenced standard, is acceptable as evidence that
the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with other requirements of the specifications.
Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective publications and
other requirements specified below and to the applicable requirements of
NFPA 70. Cables shall be labeled on both ends with circuit number, room
number, or other appropriate marking allowing for correct identification of
the cable and its destination. Each faceplate shall be labeled with its
function and a unique number to identify the cable run.
2.1.1 Coaxial Cable
Coaxial cable shall be RG-6/U, quad shield. Cable shall be
label-verified. Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals
identifying cable type. Cable shall be rated CMP in accordance with NFPA 70.
Interconnecting cables shall be cable assemblies consisting of RG-6/U
coaxial cable with male connectors at each end, provided in lengths
determined by equipment locations as shown.
2.1.2 Outlet Boxes
Electrical boxes for cable television outlets shall be 4-11/16 inch square
by 2-1/8 inches deep with minimum 3/8 inch deep single or two gang plaster
ring as shown. Conduits shall be minimum 1 inch.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with NFPA 70,
manufacturer's instructions and as shown. Submit record drawings for the
installed cable system showing the locations of cable terminations,
including outlets, and location and routing of cables. The identifier for
each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Provide necessary
interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete cable
television distribution system, ready to connect to external television
signal sources. Penetrations in fire-rated construction shall be
firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. Install
conduits, outlets, raceways, and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Cables and outlets shall be individually
labeled and marked. Cables shall not be installed in the same cable tray,
utility pole compartment, or floor trench compartment with ac power
cables. Cables not installed in conduit or wireways shall be properly
secured and neat in appearance and, if installed in plenums or other spaces
used for environmental air, shall comply with NFPA 70 requirements for this
type of installation.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 3

3.1.1 Horizontal Cable Installation
The rated cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be
stressed such that twisting, stretching or kinking occurs. Cable shall not
be spliced. Cable not in a wireway shall be suspended a minimum of 8 inches
above ceilings by cable supports no greater than 60 inches apart. Cable
shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to
power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12
inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided. Cables
shall be terminated unless shown otherwise. Minimum bending radius shall
not be exceeded during installation or once installed. Cable ties shall
not be excessively tightened such that the transmission characteristics of
the cable are altered.
3.1.2 Cables
Cables shall have a minimum of 6 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into
the cable television outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius
shall not be exceeded.
3.1.3 Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduits serving the cable television
premises distribution system which do not initially have cable installed.
3.2 TERMINATIONS
Cables and conductors shall sweep into termination areas; cables and
conductors shall not bend at right angles. Manufacturer's minimum bending
radius shall not be exceeded. Coaxial cables shall be terminated with
appropriate connectors as required. Cable shield conductor shall be
grounded to communications ground at only one point and shall not make
electrical contact with ground anywhere else.
3.3 GROUNDING
The cable television distribution system ground shall be installed in the
cable television entrance facility and in any auxiliary closet identified
in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM or otherwise indicated.
Equipment racks shall be connected to the electrical safety ground.
3.4 TESTING
Submit test reports in booklet form with witness signatures verifying
execution of tests. The cable system testing documentation shall include
the physical routing and a test report for each cable (end-to-end) from the
installed outlet to the main termination point. Test reports shall be
submitted within 7 days after completion of testing.Materials and
documentation to be furnished under this specification are subject to
inspections and tests.
a. Submit a Test Plan defining the tests required to ensure that the
system meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60
days prior to the proposed test date. The plan shall be approved
before testing begins. The test plan shall identify the capabilities
and functions to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the
setup and execution of each test and procedures for evaluation and
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 4

documentation of the results.
b. Components shall be terminated prior to testing.
c. Equipment and systems will not be accepted until the required
inspections and tests have been made, demonstrating that the cable
television premises distribution system conforms to the specified
requirements, and that the required equipment, systems, and
documentation have been provided.
d. After installation of the cable and before connecting system
components, each cable section shall be end-to-end tested using a time
domain reflectometer (TDR) to determine shorts, opens, kinks, and other
impedance discontinuities and their locations. Cable sections showing
adverse impedance discontinuities (greater than 6 dB loss) shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
e. There shall be no cable splices between system components unless
approved by the Government.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SD-10Submit commercial, off-the-shelf manuals for operation, installation,
configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the cable
television premises distribution system. Specification sheets for cable,
connectors, and other equipment shall be provided.as specified in the
Submittals paragraph.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 5

SECTION 27 05 28.36 40
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
08/11
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA VE 2
(2006) Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2;
TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical
Code
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
work specified in this section.
1.2.1 Pre-Installation Meetings
The Contracting Officer will schedule a pre-installation meeting within 30
days of Contract Award. Submit the following for review and approval:
a. Fabrication Drawings
b. Installation Drawings
Submit manufacturer's product data for the following items:
a. Cable Trays
b. Supports
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings; G
Installation Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 1

Cable Trays; G
Supports; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Instructions; G
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with NEMA Standards Publication Number VE1, "Cable Tray Systems."
Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable
tray and cable channel systems (Article 392 NEC).
Provide products that are UL-classified and labeled.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide ladder cable trays consisting of two longitudinal side members
connected by individual transverse members.
2.2 MATERIAL
Provide cable trays constructed of high-strength corrosion-resistant
aluminum Alloy No. 5052-H32 .
2.3 FABRICATION
Submit fabrication drawings for cable trays consisting of fabrication and
assembly details to be performed in the factory.
Prior to assembly, coat contact surfaces of trays with an antioxidant
compound. Finish edges, fittings, and hardware free from burrs and sharp
edges. Include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware.
2.4 COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Supports
Permit both vertical and horizontal adjustment, where possible on supports
and hangers. Provide an adequate bearing surface for the tray on the
horizontal and vertical tray supports and have provisions for holddown
clamps or fasteners. Provide a secure means other than friction for
fastening cable trays to supports.
Support cable trays at not more than 6 -foot intervals. Place supports for
horizontal-elbow tray fittings within 2 feet of each fitting extremity and
as recommended by the cable-tray manufacturer.
When supported at 6 -foot intervals, the cable trays shall be capable of
carrying not less than 150 pounds per linear foot. Tray fittings shall
have not less than the load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and
have the manufacturer's minimum standard radius.
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 2

PART 3
EXECUTION
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray installation.
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit manufacturer's instructions for cable trays including special
provisions required to install equipment components and system packages.
Detail impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
3.1.2 Installation Drawings
Thirty calendar days prior to shipment, submit installation drawings to the
Contracting Officer for approval. Coordinate drawings with all other work
in the immediate area that could come in conflict with the installation.
Include layout of cable tray work and details of both horizontal and
vertical supports as specified in paragraph entitled, "Supports," of this
section.
3.1.3 Grounding
Properly grounded cable trays by means of a low-resistance conductor of
sufficient capacity, but in no case smaller than No. 1/0 AWG copper. Bond
grounding conductor to cable-tray sections and fittings by compatible
bolted connections. Consider cable tray sections in tandem assembly as
having electrical continuity when these sections are bonded with
appropriate high-strength bolts. Provide permanent and continuous
effective grounding with an impedance sufficiently low to limit the
potential above ground and to facilitate operation of overcurrent devices
in the circuit. Provide grounding and bonding of cable trays in accordance
with NFPA 70.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 3

SECTION 27 10 00
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
08/11
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ASSOCIATION (ECA)
ECA EIA/ECA 310
(2005) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and
Associated Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)
ICEA S-83-596
ICEA S-90-661
(2011) Optical Fiber Premises Distribution
Cable
(2008) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually
Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for
Use in General Purpose and LAN
Communications Wiring Systems Technical
Requirements
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)
NECA/BICSI 568
(2006) Standard for Installing Building
Telecommunications Cabling
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI/NEMA WC 66
(2001; Errata 2003) Performance Standard
for Category 6 and Category 7 100 Ohm
Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pairs
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA J-STD-607
(2002a) Commercial Building Grounding
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 1

(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
TIA-1152
TIA-568-C.0
TIA-568-C.1
TIA-568-C.2
TIA-568-C.3
TIA-569
(2009) Requirements for Field Test
Instruments and Measurements for Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
(2009; Add 1 2010) Generic
Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
(2009) Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
(2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair
Telecommunications Cabling and Components
Standards
(2008; Corrections 2008) Optical Fiber
Cabling Components Standard
(2004b; Add 1 2009) Commercial Building
Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
TIA/EIA-606 (2002a; Errata 2007; R 2007; Adm 1 2008)
Administration Standard for the
Telecommunications Infrastructure
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 68
Connection of Terminal Equipment to the
Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1286
UL 1863
UL 444
UL 467
UL 50
UL 514C
UL 723
UL 969
(2008; Reprint Jan 2011) Office Furnishings
(2004; Reprint Aug 2008) Communication
Circuit Accessories
(2008; Reprint Apr 2010) Communications
Cables
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
(2007) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations
(1996; Reprint May 2011) Nonmetallic
Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and
Covers
(2008; Reprint Sep 2010) Test for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
(1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for
Marking and Labeling Systems
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 2

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, apply to this section with
additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2,
TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, TIA/EIA-606 and IEEE 100 and herein.
1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)
A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates.
(International expression for main cross-connect (MC).)
1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)
A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which
connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International
expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).)
1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)
A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or
equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)
1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)
An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable,
terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect
between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.
1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)
An entrance to the building for both private and public network service
cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building
wall and continuing to the equipment room.
1.3.6 Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications)
An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications
equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed
therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of
the nature of its complexity.
1.3.7 Open Cable
Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to
cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed
and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with
that space.
1.3.8 Open Office
A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other
means instead of by building walls.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 3

1.3.9 Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of
telecommunications cable.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include
permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and
backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways,
telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for
splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport
telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building.
The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the
telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor
at the center or hub of the star. The backbone cabling and pathway system
includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling, pathway,
and terminal hardware. The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity
from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus
distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as
required. The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the
campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. Provide
telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Telecommunications drawings; G
Telecommunications Space Drawings; G
In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop
drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.
SD-03 Product Data
Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G
Patch panels; G
Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G
Spare Parts; G
Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name,
place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include
performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also
include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical
society publication references. Should manufacturer's data
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 4

equire supplemental information for clarification, the
supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in
paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-06 Test Reports
Telecommunications cabling testing; G
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G
Key Personnel Qualifications; G
Manufacturer Qualifications; G
Test plan; G
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Factory reel tests; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Record Documentation; G
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 Shop Drawings
In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan
drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum
scale of 1/8 inch per foot. Include wiring diagrams and installation
details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement,
control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be
shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify
circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of
equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings
shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and
replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the
nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include
applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication
references.
1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings
Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved,
drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The identifier for each
termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict
final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The drawings should provide details required
to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity
from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications, CD's, BD's, and
FD's to the telecommunications work area outlets. Provide a plastic
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 5

laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable system
showing cabling, CD's, BD's, FD's, and the EF and ER for telecommunications
keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the laminated schematic in the
EF telecommunications space as directed by the Contracting Officer. The
following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:
a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone
Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of
complete building per floor. The drawing indicates location of building
areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams, telecommunications
rooms, access points, pathways, grounding system, and other systems
that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective.
b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable
Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving zone. These
drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points
and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested
areas.
c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping,
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of
Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such
as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population
installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.
1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings
Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606 that include
telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks,
ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and , rack and wall
elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including
incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly,
outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and
cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and
material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of
equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of
the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may
also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.
1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be
provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel.
Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system
contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if
different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation,
submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor
and of the key personnel.
1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and
professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation,
and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The
telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing
successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of similar
scope and size. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum
of five successful telecommunication system installations for the
telecommunications contractor.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 6

1.6.2.2 Key Personnel
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the
business of the application, installation and testing of the specified
telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or
more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of
the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel
shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications
systems within the past 3 years.
Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or
any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services
International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level.
Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key
personnel.
In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the
installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum
of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber
optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved
certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are
qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation
for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication
system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each
key person shall include at least two successful system installations
provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity
to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include
specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems
and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations
successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications
cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system
installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall
have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to
the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the
key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the
referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact
information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and
generally, the referenced project description including system size and
construction complexity.
Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the
telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons
shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of
issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the
bid was due to the Contracting Officer.
Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the
successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications
system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract,
as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions
for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval
from The Contracting Officer.
1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 7

years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of
components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3.
1.6.3 Test Plan
Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications
cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the
components and accessories for each cable type specified, 60 days prior to
the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation,
and testing.
1.6.4 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.5 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.6.5.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.5.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt,
dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment
placed in storage.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of
32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 8

1.9 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation,
installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part
of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system, Data Package 5.
Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2
months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to
requirements of Data Package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD
DOCUMENTATION. Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the
as-built configuration.
1.10.2 Record Documentation
Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination
hardware in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. T5 drawings shall include
schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management,
patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information
and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided
on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software.
A licensed copy of the cable management software including documentation,
shall be provided. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a
minimum:
a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance
with TIA/EIA-606. The cable records shall include the required data
fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each
complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Include manufacture date of cable with
submittal.
b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels,
cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block
arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with
TIA/EIA-606. Documentation shall include the required data fields as a
minimum in accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
1.10.3 Spare Parts
In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with
current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts
recommended for stocking.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 9

PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
Comments shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or
materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society
reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance.
The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable
evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a
certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform
testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall
state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified
organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified
organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of
telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology.
Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables,
connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and
interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems
shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified,
and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified
herein.
2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA-569 and as
specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide system
furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.
2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with
TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a
labeling system for cabling as required by TIA/EIA-606 and UL 969. Ship
cable on reels or in boxes bearing manufacture date for for unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 and optical fiber
cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on this
project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of
installation shall not be used.
2.3.1 Backbone Cabling
2.3.1.1 Backbone Copper
Copper backbone cable shall be solid conductor, 24 AWG, 100 ohm, 25-pair,
Category 3, UTP, in accordance with ICEA S-90-661, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2
and UL 444, formed into 25 pair binder groups covered with a gray
thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or
identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission
performance rating (category designation) at regular length marking
intervals in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 . Provide plenum (CMP)
communications rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a
higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70.
2.3.2 Horizontal Cabling
Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance
characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 10

2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper
Provide horizontal copper cable, UTP, 100 ohm in accordance with TIA-568-C.2,
UL 444, ANSI/NEMA WC 66, ICEA S-90-661 . Provide four each individually
twisted pair, minimum size 24 AWG conductors, Category 6, with a blue
thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or
identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission
performance rating (category designation) and length marking at regular
intervals in accordance with ICEA S-90-661. Provide plenum (CMP), riser
(CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG) communications rated cabling in
accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be
permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. Cables installed in conduit within
and under slabs shall be UL listed and labeled for wet locations in
accordance with NFPA 70.
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the
telecommunications entrance facility and telecommunication equipment room
to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and
cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications
interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
2.4.1 Backboards
Provide void-free, interior gradeA-C plywood 3/4 inch thick 4 by 8 feet.
Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process. Fire stamp shall
be clearly visible. Paint applied over fire retardant backboard shall be
UL 723 fire retardant paint. Provide label including paint manufacturer,
date painted, UL listing and name of Installer. When painted, paint label
and fire stamp shall be clearly visible. . Backboards shall be provided on
a minimum of two adjacentwalls in the telecommunication spaces.
2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame
Provide in accordance with ECA EIA/ECA 310 and UL 50.
b. Racks, floor mounted modular type, 11 gauge aluminum construction,
minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack with vertical and
horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs,
grounding lug and a surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp
receptacles. Rack shall be compatible with 19 inches] panel mounting.
2.4.3 Connector Blocks
Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6
systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables
terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare.
2.4.4 Cable Guides
Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing
cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on 19 inches
equipment racks. Mount cable guides with screws,.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 11

2.4.5 Patch Panels
Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated
on the panel plus 25 percent spare. Provide pre-connectorized copper patch
cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords, as complete assemblies, with
matching connectors as specified.. Patch cords shall meet minimum
performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 for cables,
cable length and hardware specified.
2.4.5.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel
Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Panels shall be
third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIACategory 6 requirements.
Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inches minimum aluminum and shall be rack
mounted and compatible with an ECA EIA/ECA 310 19 inches equipment rack.
Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to T568A.
Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs and
shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each panel
shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall
have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic
nameplates above each port.
2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES
2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper
Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and
TIA-568-C.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed,
8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and
shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 Category 6
requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or
exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be
terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both
T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired as indicated.
UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for 200 mating cycles.
UTP outlet/connectors installed in outdoor or marine environments shall be
jell-filled type containing an anti-corrosive, memory retaining compound.
2.5.2 Cover Plates
Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1,
TIA-568-C.2; flush design constructed of high impact thermoplastic material
to match color of receptacle/switch cover plates specified in Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]. Provide labeling in accordance
with the paragraph LABELING in this section.
2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA J-STD-607, and NFPA 70. Components
shall be identified as required by TIA/EIA-606. Provide ground rods,
bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.7 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 12

2.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125
inches thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte
finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave
into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches.
Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style.
2.10 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.10.1 Factory Reel Tests
Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by
manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2,
TIA-568-C.3 cables.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the
horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications
outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with
NECA/BICSI 568, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, NFPA 70,
and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network.
Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling
with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid
potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications
equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter
measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.
Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in
telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection
equipment.
3.1.1 Cabling
Install UTP, telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1,
TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals shall not be used except where
specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement
connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not exceed
manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables.
Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds
pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer
jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do
not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend
radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall
be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall
not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 13

this section.
3.1.1.1 Backbone Cable
a. Copper Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone copper cable, in
indicated pathways, between the campus distributor, located in the
telecommunications entrance facility or room, the building distributors
and the floor distributors located in telecommunications rooms and
telecommunications equipment rooms as indicated on drawings.
b. Optical fiber Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone optical
fiber in indicated pathways. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
bending radii and pull tension. Prepare cable for pulling by cutting
outer jacket 10 inches leaving strength members exposed for
approximately 10 inches. Twist strength members together and attach to
pulling eye. Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.1.2 Horizontal Cabling
Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist
Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of termination
to maintain cable geometry. Provide slack cable in the form of a figure
eight (not a service loop) on each end of the cable, 10 feet in the
telecommunications room, and 12 inches in the work area outlet..
3.1.2 Pathway Installations
Provide in accordance with TIA-569 and NFPA 70. Provide building pathway
as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.1.3 Work Area Outlets
3.1.3.1 Terminations
Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring
configuration as specified.
3.1.3.2 Cover Plates
As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and
a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph
LABELING in this section.
3.1.3.3 Cables
Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12
inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet
boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not
be exceeded.
3.1.3.4 Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets
that do not have cable installed.
3.1.4 Telecommunications Space Termination
Install termination hardware required for Category 6 system. An insulation
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 14

displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation
displacement connectors.
3.1.4.1 Connector Blocks
Connector blocks shall be rack mounted in orderly rows and columns.
Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided
between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard
wire routing guides in accordance with TIA-569.
3.1.4.2 Patch Panels
Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment racks with sufficient ports to
accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.
a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be
secured to the panel as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent
movement of the cable.
3.1.4.3 Equipment Support Frames
Install in accordance with TIA-569:
b. Racks, floor mounted modular type. Permanently anchor rack to the
floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.3.1.5
Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated
wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.6 Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with TIA J-STD-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.2 LABELING
3.2.1 Labels
Provide labeling in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Handwritten labeling is
unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be
provided using thermal ink transfer process.
3.2.2 Cable
Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
3.2.3 Termination Hardware
Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using
color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
3.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 15

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3.1 Painting Backboards
If backboards are required to be painted, then the manufactured fire
retardant backboard must be painted with fire retardant paint, so as not to
increase flame spread and smoke density and must be appropriately labeled.
Label and fire rating stamp must be unpainted.
3.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.5 TESTING
3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing
Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and
performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2. Test
equipment shall conform to TIA-1152. Perform optical fiber field
inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide
results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests.
Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.
3.5.1.1 Inspection
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third
party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in
telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for
T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm
compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2. Visually confirm Category 6,
marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.
3.5.1.2 Verification Tests
UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts,
opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between
conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of
shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but
prior to being cross-connected.
3.5.1.3 Performance Tests
Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:
a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and
TIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss,
NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and
delay skew.
3.5.1.4 Final Verification Tests
Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 16

telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 10 00 Page 17

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
SMALL INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
11/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI INCITS 92
(1980; R 2003) Data Encryption Algorithm
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 142
IEEE C2
IEEE C62.41.1
IEEE C62.41.2
(2007) Recommended Practice for Grounding
of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
- IEEE Green Book
(2012) National Electrical Safety Code
(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
(2002) Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
NEMA ICS 1
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1037
UL 1076
(1999; Reprint Dec 2009) Safety Antitheft
Alarms and Devices
(1995; Reprint Sep 2010) Proprietary
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 1

Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
UL 294 (1999; R 2001; R 2004; R 2005; R 2009)
Access Control System Units
UL 639
UL 681
UL 796
(2007; Reprint Jan 2010) Standard for
Intrusion Detection Units
(1999; Reprint Jan 2001) Installation and
Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm
Systems
(2010) Standard for Printed-Wiring Boards
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Intrusion Alarm
An alarm resulting from the detection of a specified target and which
results in an attempt to intrude into the protected area or when entry into
an entry controlled area is attempted without successfully using entry
control procedures.
1.2.2 Nuisance Alarm
An alarm resulting from the detection of an alarm stimuli, but which does
not represent an attempt to intrude into the protected area.
1.2.3 Environmental Alarm
An alarm during environmental conditions which exceed those specified.
1.2.4 False Alarm
An alarm when there is no alarm stimulus.
1.2.5 Duress Alarm
An alarm condition which results from a set of pre-established conditions
such as entering a special code into a keypad or by activating a switch.
This alarm category shall take precedence over other alarm categories.
1.2.6 Standard Intruder
Individual that weighs 100 pounds or less and is 5 feet tall or less,
dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks and shoes, unless environmental
conditions at the site require protective clothing. Standard intruder
movement is defined as any movement such as walking, running, crawling,
rolling, or jumping through a protected zone in the most advantageous
manner for the intruder.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 General
Configure the Intrusion Detection System (IDS) as described and shown,
including Government Furnished Equipment (GFE). Computing devices, as
defined in 47 CFR 15, shall be certified to comply with the requirements
for Class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in 47 CFR 15.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 2

Submit the following:
a. System block diagram.
b. Console installation, block diagrams, and wiring diagrams.
c. Processor installation, typical block, and wiring diagrams.
d. Details of connections to power sources, including power
supplies and grounding.
e. Details of surge protection device installation.
f. Sensor detection patterns.
g. The qualifications of the Manufacturer, Contractor, and
Installer to perform the work specified herein.
1.3.2 Overall System Reliability Requirement
The system, including all components and appurtenances, shall be configured
and installed to yield a mean time between failure (MTBF) of at least
10,000 hours continuous operation.
1.3.3 Probability of Detection
Each zone shall have a continuous probability of detection greater than 90
percent and shall be demonstrated with a confidence level of 95 percent.
This probability of detecting a standard intruder equates to 49 successful
detections out of 50 tests or 98 successful detections out of 100 tests.
1.3.4 Electrical Requirements
Electrically powered IDS equipment shall operate on 120 or 240 volt 60 Hz
AC sources as shown. Equipment shall be able to tolerate variations in the
voltage source of plus or minus 10 percent, and variations in the line
frequency of plus or minus 2 percent with no degradation of performance.
1.3.5 Power Line Surge Protection
Protect equipment connected to alternating current circuits from power line
surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms
described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for
surge protection.
1.3.6 Sensor Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection
Protect inputs against surges induced on sensor wiring. Outputs shall be
protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed
outdoors and as shown. All communications equipment shall be protected
against surges induced on any communications circuit. All cables and
conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits
from the console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall
have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be
furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge
protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be
installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be
used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both
normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:
a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform
with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width waveform with
a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 3

1.3.7 System Reaction
All alarms shall be annunciated on the displays within 1 second of their
occurring at a local processor.
1.3.8 System Capacity
The system shall monitor and control the number of inputs and outputs shown
and shall include an expansion capability of a minimum of 25 percent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Intrusion Detection System; G
Manufacturer's Instructions; G
Testing; G
Experience
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Verification Test
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit written proof that the following experience requirements are being
met.
1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturer
All system components shall be produced by manufacturers who have been
regularly engaged in the production of intrusion detection system
components of the types to be installed for at least 3 years.
1.5.2 Software Manufacturer
All system and application software shall be produced by manufacturers who
have been regularly engaged in the production of intrusion detection system
and application software of similar type and complexity as the specified
system for at least 2 years.
1.5.3 System Installer
The system shall be installed by a Contractor who has been regularly
engaged in the installation of intrusion detection systems of similar type
and complexity as the specified system for at least 2 years.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 4

1.5.4 Line Supervision
1.5.4.1 Signal and Data Transmission System (DTS) Line Supervision
All signal or DTS lines between sensors and the alarm annunciation console
shall be supervised by the system. The system shall supervise the signal
lines by monitoring changes in the direct current that flows through the
signal lines and a terminating resistor. The system shall initiate an
alarm in response to a current change of 5 percent or greater. The system
shall also initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or
grounding of the signal and DTS lines.
1.5.4.2 Data Encryption
The intrusion detection system shall incorporate data encryption equipment
on data transmission media links as shown. The algorithm used for
encryption shall be the Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm described
in ANSI INCITS 92.
1.5.5 Data Transmission System (DTS)
Provide data transmission systems as specified in Section 27 15 19.00 10
WIRE LINE DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM and as shown.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1 Interior, Controlled Environment
All system components, except the console, installed in interior locations
having controlled environments shall be rated for continuous operation
under ambient environmental conditions of 36 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and
20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
1.6.2 Interior, Uncontrolled Environment
All system components installed in interior locations having uncontrolled
environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient
environmental conditions of 0 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95
percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
1.6.3 Exterior Environment
System components that are installed in locations exposed to weather shall
be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of
minus 30 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity,
condensing. In addition, the system components shall be rated for
continuous operation when exposed to performance conditions as specified in
UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor use equipment. In addition, components shall
be rated for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in
NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 2 feet thick, measured
vertically.
1.6.4 Hazardous Environment
System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may
exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible
dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings, shall be rated and installed
according to Chapter 5 of NFPA 70 and as shown.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 5

1.6.5 Central Station
All central station equipment shall, unless designated otherwise, be rated
for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 60 to 85
degrees F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment and material
specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than 2 months
prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a
complete list of parts, tools and supplies, with current unit prices and
source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended for stocking.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
The Intrusion Detection Panel shall be an Advantor Infraguard.
Where materials or equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or
tested to meet specific requirements, submit certification that the items
provided conform to such requirements. Certification by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory that a representative sample has been tested
to meet the requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to
the effect that the item meets the referenced standard, will be acceptable
as evidence that the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements
does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with other requirements of
the specifications
2.1.1 General
Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single
manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in
production. Each major component of equipment shall have the
manufacturer's model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Provide
laminated plastic nameplates for local processors. Each nameplate shall
identify the local processor and its location within the system. Laminated
plastic shall be 1/8 inch thick, white with black center core. Nameplates
shall be a minimum of 1 by 3 inches, with minimum 1/4 inch high engraved
block lettering. Attach nameplates to the inside of the enclosure housing
the local processor. Other major components of the system shall have the
manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and
catalog number on a corrosion resistant plate secured to the item of
equipment. Nameplates will not be required for devices smaller than 1 by 3
inches.
2.1.2 Enclosures
System enclosures shall be as shown.
2.1.2.1 Interior Sensor
Sensors to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in an
enclosure that provides protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping
noncorrosive liquids.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 6

2.1.2.2 Interior Electronics
System electronics to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in
enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 12.
2.1.3 Tamper Provisions
2.1.3.1 Tamper Switches
Enclosures, cabinets, housings, boxes, and fittings of every description
having hinged doors or removable covers and which contain circuits or
connections of the intrusion detection system and its power supplies, shall
be provided with cover operated, corrosion-resistant tamper switches,
arranged to initiate an alarm signal when the door or cover is moved. The
enclosure and the tamper switch shall function together in such a manner as
to not allow direct line of sight to any internal components before the
switch activates. Make tamper switches inaccessible until the switch is
activated; have mounting hardware so concealed that the location of the
switch cannot be observed from the exterior of the enclosure; be connected
to circuits which are under electrical supervision at all times,
irrespective of the protection mode in which the circuit is operating;
shall be spring-loaded and held in the closed position by the door or
cover; and shall be wired so that they break the circuit when the door or
cover is disturbed.
a. Nonsensor Enclosures: Tamper switches on nonsensor enclosures, which
must be opened to make routine maintenance adjustments to the system
and to service the power supplies, shall be push/pull-set, automatic
reset type.
b. Sensor Enclosures: Tamper switches on sensor enclosures, which must be
opened to make routine maintenance adjustments to the sensor, shall be
single pole single throw type.
2.1.3.2 Enclosure Covers
Covers of pull and junction boxes provided to facilitate initial
installation of the system need not be provided with tamper switches if
they contain no splices or connections, but shall be protected by tack
welding or brazing the covers in place or by tamper resistant security
fasteners. Labels shall be affixed to such boxes indicating they contain
no connections.
2.1.4 Locks and Key-Lock Switches
2.1.4.1 Locks
Install locks on system enclosures for maintenance purposes. Locks shall
be UL listed, conventional key type lock having a combination of five
cylinder pin and five-point three position side bar. Keys shall be stamped
"U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP". The locks shall be so arranged that the key can
only be withdrawn when in the locked position. All maintenance locks shall
be keyed alike and only two keys shall be furnished for all of these
locks. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control
plan. Submit a Key control plan including the following:
a. Procedures that will be used to log and positively control all keys
during installation.
b. A listing of all keys and where they are used.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 7

c. A listing of all persons allowed entry to the keys.
2.1.5 Application of System Component
System components shall be designed for continuous operation. Electronic
components shall be solid state type, mounted on printed circuit boards
conforming to UL 796. Printed circuit board connectors shall be plug-in,
quick-disconnect type. Power dissipating components shall incorporate
safety margins of not less that 25 percent with respect to dissipation
ratings, maximum voltages, and current carrying capacity. Light duty
relays and similar switching devices shall be solid state type or sealed
electro-mechanical.
2.1.5.1 Maintainability
Components shall be designed to be maintained using commercially available
tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and assembled so they
are accessible to maintenance personnel. There shall be no degradation in
tamper protection, structural integrity, EMI/RFI attenuation, or line
supervision after maintenance when it is performed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. The system shall be configured and installed
to yield a mean time to repair (MTTR) of not more than 8 hours. Repair
time is the clock time from the time maintenance personnel are given
entrance to the system and begin work, until the system is fully functional.
2.1.5.2 Interchangeability
Construct the system with off-the-shelf components which are physically,
electrically and functionally interchangeable with equivalent components as
complete items. Replacement of equivalent components shall not require
modification of either the new component or of other components with which
the replacement items are used. Custom designed or one-of-a-kind items
shall not be used. Interchangeable components or modules shall not require
trial and error matching in order to meet integrated system requirements,
system accuracy, or restore complete system functionality.
2.1.5.3 Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI)
System components generating EMI/RFI shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with 47 CFR 15.
2.1.5.4 Product Safety
System components shall conform to applicable rules and requirements of
NFPA 70. System components shall be equipped with instruction plates,
including warnings and cautions, describing physical safety, and special or
important procedures to be followed in operating and servicing system
equipment.
2.1.6 Controls and Designations
Provide controls and designations as specified in NEMA ICS 1.
2.1.7 Special Test Equipment
Provide all special test equipment, special hardware, software, tools, and
programming or initialization equipment needed to start or maintain any
part of the system and its components. Special test equipment is defined
as any test equipment not normally used in an electronics maintenance
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 8

facility.
2.1.8 Alarm Output
The alarm output of each sensor shall be a single pole double throw (SPDT)
contact rated for a minimum of 0.25 A at 24 volts DC.
2.1.9 Alarm Indicator Lights
Indicator lights used throughout the system shall be light emitting diodes
(LED) or long life incandescent lamps. The indicator lights used shall be
visible from a distance of 30 feet in an area illuminated to 75 foot candles.
The indicator lights shall conform to the following color coding:
a. FLASHING RED to alert an operator that a zone has gone into an
unacknowledged alarm or that primary power has failed.
b. RED to alert an operator that a zone is in alarm and that the alarm has
been acknowledged.
c. YELLOW to advise an operator that a zone is in access.
d. GREEN to indicate that a zone is secure or that power is on.
2.1.10 Access/Secure Devices
Access/secure devices shall be used to place a protected zone in ACCESS.
The device shall disable all sensor alarm outputs, with the exception of
tamper alarm outputs within the protected zone, and sensors in zones above
false ceilings or other inaccessible locations as shown.
2.1.10.1 Switches
The switch shall consist of a double pull key-operated switch housed in a
NEMA 12 equivalent enclosure.
2.1.10.2 Key Pads
Secure/Access keypads shall use a unique combination of alphanumeric and
other symbols as an identifier. Keypads shall contain an integral
alphanumeric/special symbols keyboard with symbols arranged in ascending
ASCII code ordinal sequence. The keypad shall have a contact output.
2.2 INTERIOR SENSORS
2.2.1 Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS)
The BMS shall detect 1/4 inch of separating relative movement between the
magnet and the switch housing. Upon detecting such movement, it shall
transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system.
2.2.1.1 BMS Subassemblies
The BMS shall consist of a switch assembly and an actuating magnetic
assembly. The switch mechanism shall be of the balanced magnetic type.
Each switch shall be provided with an overcurrent protective device, rated
to limit current to 80 percent of the switch capacity. Switches shall be
rated for a minimum lifetime of one million operations. The housings of
surface mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal and
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 9

shall be weatherproof. The housings of recess mounted switches and magnets
shall be made of nonferrous metal or plastic.
2.2.1.2 Remote Test
Provide a remote test capability. The remote test shall be initiated when
commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall activate
the sensor's switch mechanism causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to
the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall simulate the movement
of the actuating magnet relative to the switch subassembly.
2.2.2 Passive Infrared Motion Sensor
The passive infrared motion sensor shall detect changes in the ambient
level of infrared emissions caused by the movement of a standard intruder
within the sensor's field of view. Upon detecting such changes, the sensor
shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The
sensor shall detect a change in temperature of no more than 2 degrees F,
and shall detect a standard intruder traveling within the sensor's
detection pattern at a speed of 0.3 to 7.5 feet per second across two
adjacent segments of the field of view. Emissions monitored by the sensor
shall be in the 8 to 14 micron range. The sensor shall be adjustable to
obtain the coverage pattern shown. The sensor shall be equipped with a
temperature compensation circuit.
2.2.2.1 Test Indicator, Infrared Emissions
The passive infrared motion sensor shall be equipped with an LED walk test
indicator. The walk test indicator shall not be visible during normal
operations. When visible, the walk test indicator shall light when the
sensor detects an intruder. The sensor shall either be equipped with a
manual control, located within the sensor's housing, to enable/disable the
test indicator or the test indicator shall be located within the sensor
such that it can only be seen when the housing is open/removed.
2.2.2.2 Remote Test, Infrared Emissions
Provide a remote test capability. The remote test hardware may be integral
to the sensor or a separate piece of equipment. The remote test shall be
initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test
shall excite the sensing element and associated electronics causing an
alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The
sensor stimulation generated by the remote test hardware shall simulate a
standard intruder moving within the sensor's detection pattern.
2.3 FIELD PROCESSING HARDWARE
2.3.1 Alarm Annunciation Local Processor
The alarm annunciation local processor shall respond to interrogations from
the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until
they are transmitted to the central station and change outputs based on
commands received from the central station. The local processor shall also
automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption
with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of
its alarm inputs.
a. Inputs. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for change
of state that reflect alarm conditions. The local processor shall have
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 10

at least 8 alarm inputs which allow wiring as normally open or normally
closed contacts for alarm conditions; and shall also provide line
supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open,
grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements.
The local processor shall report for any condition that remains off
normal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. Each alarm
condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next
interrogation cycle.
b. Outputs. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands
issued by the central station. The outputs shall be a form C contact
and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. The
local processor shall have at least 4 command outputs.
2.3.2 Processor Power Supply
Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power
source. The uninterruptible power source shall provide 6 hours of battery
back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically
fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours after primary power is
restored. There will be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss
of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa.
Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. The power supply shall be
equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc
output power. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central
station as an alarm.
2.3.3 Auxiliary Equipment Power
A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's
enclosure.
2.4 FIELD PROCESSING SOFTWARE
All field processing software described in this specification shall be
furnished as part of the complete system.
2.4.1 Operating System
Each local processor shall contain an operating system that controls and
schedules that local processor's activities in real time. The local
processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes all
parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of all points
connected to that local processor. The execution of local processor
application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident files. The
operating system shall include a real time clock function that maintains
the seconds, minutes, hours, date and month, including day of the week.
Each local processor real time clock shall be automatically synchronized
with the central station clock at least once per day to plus or minus 10
seconds. The time synchronization shall be accomplished without operator
intervention and without requiring system shutdown.
2.4.1.1 Startup
The local processor shall have startup software that causes automatic
commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of
all connected functions. A local processor restart program based on
detection of power failure at the local processor shall be included in the
local processor software. The startup software shall initiate operation of
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 11

self-test diagnostic routines. Upon failure of the local processor, if the
database and application software are no longer resident, the local
processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode
indicated until the necessary repairs are made. If the database and
application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately
resume operation.
2.4.1.2 Operating Mode
Each local processor shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as
specified, independent of communications with the central station. Alarms,
status changes and other data shall be transmitted to the central station
when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not
available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone mode and
operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted
to the central station shall be stored for later transmission to the
central station. Storage for the latest 1024 events shall be provided at
each local processor. Each local processor shall accept software
downloaded from the central station.
2.4.1.3 Failure Mode
Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly
shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure
mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated
control device.
2.4.1.3.1 Maintenance Mode
When an alarm zone is placed in maintenance mode, the condition shall be
signaled automatically to the monitor station. The signal must appear as an
alarm or maintenance message at the monitor station and must be continually
visible at the monitor-station throughout the period of maintenance. All
maintenance periods shall be archived. A self-test feature shall be limited
to one second per occurence.
2.4.2 Functions
Provide all software necessary to accomplish the following functions, as
appropriate, fully implemented and operational, within each local processor.
a. Monitoring of inputs.
b. Control of outputs.
c. Reporting of alarms automatically to central station.
d. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request.
e. Maintenance of real time, updated by the central station at least once
a day.
f. Communication with the central station.
g. Execution of local processor resident programs.
h. Diagnostics.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 12

i. Download and upload data to and from the central station.
j. Reporting of alarm zone shunting or masking condition
k. Power source failure/change in power source inidcation at equipment
and monitoring station.
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE
2.5.1 General
Provide all wire and cable not indicated as Government furnished
equipment. All wiring shall meet NFPA 70 standards.
2.5.2 Above Ground Sensor Wiring
Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum, twisted and shielded, 2, 3, 4, or 6
pairs to match hardware. Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of
PVC.
2.5.3 Class 2 Low Energy Conductors
The conductor sizes specified for digital functions shall take precedence
over any requirements for Class 2 low energy signal-circuit conductors
specified elsewhere.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install the system in accordance with the standards for safety, NFPA 70,
UL 681, UL 1037 and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for
each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with
appropriate service points to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20
minutes. Minimum size of conduit shall be 1/2 inch. DTS shall not be
pulled into conduits or placed in raceways, compartments, outlet boxes,
junction boxes, or similar fittings with other building wiring. Flexible
cords or cord connections shall not be used to supply power to any
components of the system, except where specifically noted herein. All
other electrical work shall be as specified in Sections 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown. Grounding shall be installed as
necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely
affecting system operation. Install all system components, including
Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, IEEE C2 and as shown, and shall furnish
necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a
complete and operable system as specified and shown. Submit printed copies
of manufacturer's recommendations for installation of materials prior to
installation. Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are
required to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,
installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received and approved.
3.1.1 Enclosure Penetrations
All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system
design requires penetrations from other directions. The conduit riser
shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 13

terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the
cable manufacturer, and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged.
3.1.2 Cold Galvanizing
All field welds and/or brazing on factory galvanized components, such as
boxes, enclosures, and conduits, shall be coated with a cold-galvanized
paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.
3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP
Do not apply power to the intrusion detection system until the following
items have been completed:
a. Intrusion detection system equipment items and DTS have been set up in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. A visual inspection of the intrusion detection system has been
conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been
installed and that there are no loose connections.
c. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as
indicated.
d. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been
verified as properly installed and connected as indicated.
e. Power supplies to be connected to the intrusion detection system have
been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as
indicated.
f. Satisfaction of the above requirements will not relieve the Contractor
of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment
items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment.
3.3 SITE TESTING
3.3.1 Testing
Submit a Test Plan defining all tests required to ensure that the system
meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60 days prior
to proposed test date. The test plan must be approved before the start of
any testing. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and functions
to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the setup and execution
of each test and procedures for evaluation and documentation of the
results. Perform site testing and adjustment of the completed intrusion
detection system. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and
supplies necessary to perform all testing. The Government will witness all
testing. Obtain written permission from the Government before proceeding
with the next phase of testing.
a. Original copies of all data produced during performance verification
and endurance testing shall be turned over to the Government at the
conclusion of each phase of testing prior to Government approval of the
test. Submit written notification of planned testing to the
Government, at least 14 days prior to the test, and in no case shall
notice be given until after the Contractor has received written
approval of the specific test procedures.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 14

. Calibrate and test all equipment, verify data transmission system (DTS)
operation, place the integrated system in service, and test the
integrated system. Test installed ground rods as specified in IEEE 142.
c. Deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics,
and calibrations including written certification to the Government that
the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready
to begin performance verification testing. The report shall also
include a copy of the approved performance verification test procedure.
3.3.2 Performance Verification Test
Demonstrate that the completed system complies with the specified
requirements. Using approved test procedures, all physical and functional
requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. The
performance verification test, as specified, shall not be started until
receipt of written permission from the Government, based on the
Contractor's written request. This shall include certification of
successful completion of testing as specified in paragraph Contractor's
Field Testing, and upon successful completion of training as specified.
Upon successful completion of the performance verification test, deliver
test reports and other documentation to the Government, as specified.
Submit test reports, in booklet form with witness signatures verifying
execution of tests. Reports shall show the field tests to verify
compliance with the specified performance criteria. Test reports shall
include records of the physical parameters verified during testing. Test
reports shall be submitted within 14 days after completion of testing. The
Contractor will not be held responsible for failures in system performance
resulting from the following:
a. An outage of the main power in excess of the capability of any backup
power source, provided that the automatic initiation of all backup
sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the
system performed as specified.
b. Failure of a Government furnished communications link, provided that
the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment,
installation, or software.
c. Failure of existing Government owned equipment, provided that the
failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or
software.
d. The occurrence of specified nuisance alarms.
e. The occurrence of specified environmental alarms.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 15

SECTION 28 31 64.00 10
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE
08/09
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S3.41
(1990; R 2008) Audible Emergency
Evacuation Signal (ASA 96)
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41.1
IEEE C62.41.2
(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
(2002) Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
NFPA 72
NFPA 90A
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
(2010; TIA 10-4) National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code
(2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1242
UL 1971
UL 268
UL 268A
UL 38
(2006; Reprint Jul 2007) Standard for
Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
(2002; Reprint Oct 2008) Signaling Devices
for the Hearing Impaired
(2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm
Systems
(2008; Reprint Sep 2009) Smoke Detectors
for Duct Application
(2008; Reprint Dec 2008) Manual Signaling
Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 1

UL 464
UL 521
UL 6
UL 797
UL 864
(2009; Reprint Jan 2011) Standard for
Audible Signal Appliances
(1999; Reprint May 2010) Heat Detectors
for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
(2007) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
(2003; Reprint Jan 20110) Standard for
Control Units and Accessories for Fire
Alarm Systems
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The fire detection and alarm system and the central reporting system shall
be a complete, supervised fire alarm reporting system configured in
accordance with NFPA 72; exceptions are acceptable as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Furnish equipment compatible and UL listed, FM
approved, or approved or listed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory in accordance with the applicable NFPA standards. Locks shall
be keyed alike. Provide four keys for the system. Furnish tags with
stamped identification number for keys and locks.
1.2.1 Operation
Activate the system into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm
initiating device. The system will remain in the alarm mode until the
initiating device is reset and the fire alarm control panel is reset and
restored to normal. Alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be
individually addressable. Alarm initiating devices shall be connected to
signal line circuits (SLC), Class A, in accordance with NFPA 72. Connect
alarm notification appliances to notification appliance circuits (NAC),
Class A in accordance with NFPA 72. Provide a looped conduit system so
that if the conduit and all conductors within are severed at any point, all
IDC, NAC and SLC will remain functional. The conduit loop requirement is
not applicable to the signal transmission link from the local panels (at
the protected premises) to the Supervising Station (fire station, fire
alarm central communication center). Textual, audible, and visual
appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72. Fire alarm system
components requiring power, except for the control panel power supply,
shall operate on 24 Volts dc. Addressable system shall be microcomputer
(microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight
bits and shall provide the following features:
a. Sufficient memory to perform as specified and as shown for addressable
system.
b. Individual identity of each addressable device for the following
conditions: alarm; trouble; open; short; and appliances missing/failed
remote detector - sensitivity adjustment from the panel for smoke
detectors.
c. Capability of each addressable device being individually disabled or
enabled from the panel.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 2

d. Size each SLC to provide 40 percent addressable expansion without
hardware modifications to the panel.
1.2.2 Operational Features
The system shall have the following operating features:
a. Monitor electrical supervision of SLC, and NAC.
b. Monitor electrical supervision of the primary power (ac) supply,
battery voltage, placement of alarm zone module (card, PC board) within
the control panel, and transmitter tripping circuit integrity.
c. A trouble buzzer and trouble LED/LCD (light emitting diode/liquid
crystal diode) to activate upon a single break, open, or ground fault
condition which prevents the required normal operation of the system.
The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (ac)
supply, low battery voltage, removal of alarm zone module (card, PC
board), and disconnection of the circuit used for transmitting alarm
signals off-premises. Submit Voltage drop calculations for
notification appliance circuits to indicate that sufficient voltage is
available for proper appliance operation. A trouble alarm silence
switch shall be provided which will silence the trouble buzzer, but
will not extinguish the trouble indicator LED/LCD. Subsequent trouble
and supervisory alarms shall sound the trouble signal until silenced.
After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble
buzzer shall again sound until the silencing switch returns to normal
position, unless automatic trouble reset is provided.
d. A one person test mode. Activating an initiating device in this mode
will activate an alarm for a short period of time, then automatically
reset the alarm, without activating the transmitter during the entire
process.
e. A transmitter disconnect switch to allow testing and maintenance of the
system without activating the transmitter but providing a trouble
signal when disconnected and a restoration signal when reconnected.
f. Evacuation alarm silencing switch which, when activated, will silence
alarm devices, but will not affect the zone indicating LED/LCD displays
on the control panel nor the operation of the transmitter. This switch
shall be over-ridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm from an
unalarmed device and the NAC devices will be activated.
g. Electrical supervision for circuits used for supervisory signal
services (i.e., sprinkler systems, valves, etc.). Supervision shall
detect any open, short, or ground.
h. Confirmation or verification of all smoke detectors. The control panel
shall interrupt the transmission of an alarm signal to the system
control panel for a factory preset period. This interruption period
shall be adjustable from 1 to 60 seconds and be factory set at 20
seconds. Immediately following the interruption period, a confirmation
period shall be in effect during which time an alarm signal, if
present, will be sent immediately to the control panel. Fire alarm
devices other than smoke detectors shall be programmed without
confirmation or verification.
i. The fire alarm control panel shall provide supervised addressable
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 3

elays for HVAC shutdown. An override at the HVAC panel shall not be
provided.
k. The fire alarm control panel shall monitor the fire sprinkler system,
or other fire protection extinguishing system.
l. The control panel and field panels shall be software reprogrammable to
enable expansion or modification of the system without replacement of
hardware or firmware. Examples of required changes are: adding or
deleting devices or zones; changing system responses to particular
input signals; programming certain input signals to activate auxiliary
devices.
n. Zones for NAC shall be arranged as indicated on the contract drawings.
1.2.3 Alarm Functions
An alarm condition on a circuit shall automatically initiate the following
functions:
a. Transmission of signals over the station radio fire reporting system.
The signal shall be common for any device.
b. Visual indications of the alarmed devices on the fire alarm control
panel display and on the remote audible/visual display.
c. Continuous sounding or operation of alarm notification appliances
throughout the building as required by ASA S3.41.
d. Closure of doors held open by electromagnetic devices.
f. Deactivation of the air handling units serving the alarmed area .
g. Shutdown of power to the data processing equipment in the alarmed area.
1.2.4 Primary Power
Operating power shall be provided as required by paragraph Power Supply for
the System. Transfer from normal to emergency power or restoration from
emergency to normal power shall be fully automatic and not cause
transmission of a false alarm. Loss of ac power shall not prevent
transmission of a signal via the fire reporting system upon operation of
any initiating circuit.
1.2.5 Battery Backup Power
Battery backup power shall be through use of rechargeable, sealed-type
storage batteries and battery charger.
1.2.6 Interface With Existing Fire Alarm Equipment
The equipment specified herein shall operate as an extension to an existing
configuration. Submit certified copies of current approvals or listings
issued by an independent test lab if not listed by UL, FM or other
nationally recognized testing laboratory, showing compliance with specified
NFPA standards. The new equipment shall be connected to existing Monaco
Delta 21 monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station (Building 4225).
Existing monitoring equipment shall be expanded, modified, or supplemented
as necessary to extend the existing monitoring functions to the new points
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 4

or zones. New components shall be capable of merging with the existing
configuration without degrading the performance of either system. The
scope of the acceptance tests of paragraph Testing shall include aspects of
operation that involve combined use of both new and existing portions of
the final configuration.
1.2.7 Interface With other Equipment
Interfacing components shall be furnished as required to connect to
subsystems or devices which interact with the fire alarm system, such as
supervisory or alarm contacts in suppression systems, operating interfaces
for smoke control systems, door releases, etc.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Storage Batteries
Low Battery Voltage
Special Tools and Spare Parts
Technical Data and Computer Software; G
Training
Testing
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
SD-07 Certificates
Equipment
Qualifications
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance Instructions; G
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Qualifications
Submit proof of qualifications for required personnel. The installer shall
submit proof of experience for the Professional Engineer, fire alarm
technician, and the installing company.
1.4.1.1 Engineer and Technician
a. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at
least 4 years of current experience in the design of the fire
protection and detection systems.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 5

. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
(NICET) qualifications as an engineering technician in fire alarm
systems program with verification of experience and current NICET
certificate.
c. The Registered Professional Engineer may perform all required items
under this specification. The NICET Fire Alarm Technician shall
perform only the items allowed by the specific category of
certification held.
1.4.1.2 Installer
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: NICET Fire Alarm
Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 4
Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm
system. NICET Level 2 or higher Fire Alarm Technician shall install and
terminate fire alarm devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician or NICET
Level 1 Fire Alarm Technician shall install conduit for the fire alarm
system. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be
factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of
the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.4.1.3 Fire Protection Engineer
Installations needing designs or modifications of fire detection, fire
alarm, or fire suppression systems require the services and review of a
qualified fire protection engineer. For the purposes of meeting this
requirement, a qualified fire protection engineer is defined as an
individual meeting one of the following conditions:
a. An engineer having a Bachelor of Science or Masters of Science Degree
in Fire Protection Engineering from an accredited university
engineering program, plus a minimum of 2 years' work experience in fire
protection engineering.
b. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection
engineering.
c. A registered PE in a related engineering discipline and member grade
status in the National Society of Fire Protection Engineers.
d. An engineer with a minimum of 10 years' experience in fire protection
engineering and member grade status in the National Society of Fire
Protection Engineers.
1.4.2 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and
material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature,
catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Note that the contract
drawings show layouts based on typical audible appliances. Check the
layout based on the actual audible devices to be installed and make any
necessary revisions in the detail drawings. The detail drawings shall also
contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams for the equipment furnished,
equipment layout, and any other details required to demonstrate that the
system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Detail
drawings and detailed point-to-point wiring diagram shall be prepared and
signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 6

Technician showing points of connection. Diagram shall include connections
between system devices, appliances, control panels, supervised devices, and
equipment that is activated or controlled by the panel.
1.5 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE
Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data which relates
to computer software) which is specifically identified in this project, and
which may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered,
strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES, and in accordance with
the Contract Data Requirements List, DD Form 1423. Data delivered shall be
identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against
which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system,
equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the
equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of
this contract. The data package shall also include the following:
a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and
capabilities.
b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods
of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.
c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable
portions of the fire alarm and detection system.
d. Description of Fire Alarm Control Panel equipment operation.
e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.
f. Library of application software.
g. Operation and maintenance manuals as specified in SD-19 of the
Submittals paragraph.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity and temperature variation, dirt, dust, and any other contaminants.
1.7 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified, not later than 3 months prior to the date of beneficial
occupancy. Data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies with
the current unit prices and source of supply and a list of the parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year of service.
Furnish software, connecting cables, proprietary equipment and two spare
fuses of each type and size required, necessary for the maintenance,
testing, and reprogramming of the equipment. Two percent of the total
number of each different type of detector, but no less than two each, shall
be furnished. Mount spare fuses in the fire alarm panel.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide material and equipment which are the standard products of Siemens
or approved equal. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 7

that can provide service within 24 hours of notification.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
type or style, voltage and current rating, and catalog number on a
noncorrosive and nonheat-sensitive plate which is securely attached to the
equipment.
2.3 CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel shall comply with the applicable requirements of UL 864.
Panel shall be modular, installed in a surface mounted steel cabinet with
hinged door and cylinder lock. Control panel shall be a clean,
uncluttered, and orderly assembled panel containing components and
equipment required to provide the specified operating and supervisory
functions of the system. The panel shall have prominent rigid plastic,
phenolic or metal identification plates for LED/LCDs, zones, SLC, controls,
meters, fuses, and switches.
a. Nameplates for fuses shall also include ampere rating. The LED/LCD
displays shall be located on the exterior of the cabinet door or be
visible through the cabinet door. Control panel switches shall be
within the locked cabinet. A suitable means (single operation) shall
be provided for testing the control panel visual indicating devices
(meters or LEDs/LCDs). Meters and LEDs shall be plainly visible when
the cabinet door is closed. Signals and LEDs/LCDs shall be provided to
indicate by zone any alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the
system.
b. Loss of power, including batteries, shall not require the manual
reloading of a program. Upon restoration of power, startup shall be
automatic, and shall not require any manual operation. The loss of
primary power or the sequence of applying primary or emergency power
shall not affect the transmission of alarm, supervisory or trouble
signals.
c. Visual annunciation shall be provided for LED/LCD visual display as an
integral part of the control panel and shall identify with a word
description and id number each device. Cabinets shall be provided with
ample gutter space to allow proper clearance between the cabinet and
live parts of the panel equipment. If more than one modular unit is
required to form a control panel, the units shall be installed in a
single cabinet large enough to accommodate units. Cabinets shall be
painted red.
2.3.1 Remote System Audible/Visual Display
Audible appliance shall have a minimum sound level output rating of 85 dBA
at 10 feet and operate in conjunction with the panel integral display. The
audible device shall be silenced by a system silence switch on the remote
system. The audible device shall be silenced by the system silence switch
located at the remote location, but shall not extinguish the visual
indication. The remote LED/LCD visual display shall provide
identification, consisting of the word description and id number for each
device as displayed on the control panel. A rigid plastic, phenolic or
metal identification sign which reads "Fire Alarm System Remote Display"
shall be provided at the remote audible/visual display. The remote visual
appliance located with the audible appliance shall not be extinguished
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 8

until the trouble or alarm has been cleared.
2.3.2 Circuit Connections
Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each conductor and terminal marked for identification.
2.3.3 System Expansion and Modification Capabilities
Provide, as part of this contract, any equipment and software needed by
qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system.
2.3.4 Addressable Control Module
The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact
form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems. The module
shall be UL listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating
device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Class
B notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of
supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module
shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect
a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being
applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting
means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an
internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral
LED that flashes each time the control module is polled.
2.3.5 Addressable Initiating Device Circuits Module
Configure the initiating device being monitored as a Class A initiating
device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an
alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory
module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of
polling. The module shall be UL listed as compatible with the control
panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible
with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying
code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time
the monitor module is polled. Pull stations with a monitor module in a
common backbox are not required to have an LED.
2.4 STORAGE BATTERIES
Submit substantiating battery calculations for supervisory and alarm power
requirements. Ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each
panel component, and the battery recharging period shall be included.
Provide storage batteries which are 24 Vdc sealed, lead-calcium type
requiring no additional water with ample capacity, with primary power
disconnected, to operate the fire alarm system for a period of 72 hours.
Following this period of battery operation, the batteries shall have ample
capacity to operate all components of the system, including all alarm
signaling devices in the total alarm mode for a minimum period of 15
minutes. Locate batteries at the bottom of the panel. Provide batteries
with overcurrent protection in accordance with NFPA 72. Separate battery
cabinets shall have a lockable, hinged cover similar to the fire alarm
panel. The lock shall be keyed the same as the fire alarm control panel.
Paint the cabinets to match the fire alarm control panel.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 9

2.5 BATTERY CHARGER
Battery charger shall be completely automatic, 24 Vdc with high/low
charging rate, capable of restoring the batteries from full discharge (18
Volts dc) to full charge within 48 hours. A pilot light indicating when
batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge shall be provided as
part of the unit assembly, if a high rate switch is provided. Locate
charger in control panel cabinet or in a separate battery cabinet.
2.6 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
Addressable manual fire alarm stations shall conform to the applicable
requirements of UL 38. Manual stations shall be connected into signal line
circuits. Stations shall be installed on semi-flush mounted outlet boxes.
Manual stations shall be mounted at 48 inches. Stations shall be single
action type. Stations shall be finished in red, with raised letter
operating instructions of contrasting color. Stations requiring the
breaking of glass or plastic panels for operation are not acceptable.
Stations employing glass rods are not acceptable. The use of a key or
wrench shall be required to reset the station. Gravity or mercury switches
are not acceptable. Switches and contacts shall be rated for the voltage
and current upon which they operate. Addressable pull stations shall be
capable of being field programmed, shall latch upon operation and remain
latched until manually reset. Stations shall have a separate screw
terminal for each conductor. Surface mounted boxes shall be matched and
painted the same color as the fire alarm manual stations.
2.7 FIRE DETECTING DEVICES
Fire detecting devices shall comply with the applicable requirements of
NFPA 72, NFPA 90A, UL 268, UL 268A, and UL 521. The detectors shall be
provided as indicated. Detector base shall have screw terminals for making
connections. No solder connections will be allowed. Detectors located in
concealed locations (above ceiling, raised floors, etc.) shall have a
remote visible indicator LED/LCD. Addressable fire detecting devices,
except flame detectors, shall be dynamically supervised and uniquely
identified in the control panel. All fire alarm initiating devices shall
be individually addressable, except where indicated. Installed devices
shall conform to NFPA 70 hazard classification of the area where devices
are to be installed.
2.7.1 Heat Detectors
Design heat detectors for detection of fire by combination fixed
temperature and rate-of-rise principle . Heat detector spacing shall be
rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in areas subject to
moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions, or hazardous locations as
defined by NFPA 70, shall be types approved for such locations. Heat
detectors located in attic spaces or similar concealed spaces below the
roof shall be intermediate temperature rated.
2.7.1.1 Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for semi-flush outlet box mounting and
supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be
self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed
temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external
indication which is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler
rooms, showers, or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 10

shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating
for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F as shown. The
UL 521 test rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by
50 ft.
2.7.1.2 Fixed Temperature Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for semi-flush outlet box mounting and
supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be designed
to detect high heat. The detectors shall have a specific temperature
setting of 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature
detectors shall be rated for 15 by 15 ft.
2.7.2 Smoke Detectors
Design smoke detectors for detection of abnormal smoke densities. Smoke
detectors shall be photoelectric type. Detectors shall contain a visible
indicator LED/LCD that shows when the unit is in alarm condition.
Detectors shall not be adversely affected by vibration or pressure.
Detectors shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains
terminals for making wiring connections. Detectors that are to be
installed in concealed (above false ceilings, etc.) locations shall be
provided with a remote indicator LED/LCD suitable for mounting in a
finished, visible location.
2.7.2.1 Photoelectric Detectors
Detectors shall operate on a light scattering concept using an LED light
source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition. Detectors
shall be factory set for sensitivity and shall require no field adjustments
of any kind. Detectors shall have an obscuration rating in accordance with
UL 268. Addressable smoke detectors shall be capable of having the
sensitivity being remotely adjusted by the control panel.
2.7.2.2 Duct Detectors
Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed
where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a
smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted
in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry
shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. Detectors
shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for air velocities
that include air flows between 500 and 9000 and fpm. Detectors shall be
powered from the fire alarm panel. Sampling tubes shall run the full width
of the duct. The duct detector package shall conform to the requirements
of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling
systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be
controlled from the fire alarm control panel. Lights to indicate the
operation and alarm condition; and the test and reset buttons shall be
visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place.
Detectors mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet that cannot
be easily accessed while standing on the floor, shall be provided with a
remote detector indicator panel containing test and reset switches. Remote
lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly
identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall have auxiliary
contacts to provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in
Section 23 09 23 LONWORKS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL
BUILDING SYSTEMS. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system
manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 11

2.7.3 Combination Smoke and Heat Detectors
Combination smoke and heat detectors shall have an audible device
(self-contained) and be designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities
by the photoelectric principle and abnormal heat by a fixed temperature
sensor. Smoke detectors shall be provided with an LED light source.
Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition and the sensitivity
shall be factory set at a nominal 3 percent and require no field
adjustments of any kind. Heat detector portion shall be fixed temperature
sensor rated at 135 degrees F. The audible appliances shall have a minimum
sound output of at least 85 dBA at 10 feet. Detectors shall contain a
visible indicator LED that shows when the unit is in alarm condition.
Detectors shall not be adversely affected by vibration or pressure. Heat
detectors shall connect to a control panel SLC and shall be self restorable.
2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.
Devices shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Devices
shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor. Audible
appliances shall generate a unique audible sound from other devices
provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface mounted audible
appliances shall be painted red. Recessed audible appliances shall be
installed with a grill that is painted red.
2.8.1 Alarm Horns
Horns shall be surface mounted, with the matching mounting back box recessed
vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit.
Horns shall produce a sound rating of at least 85 dBA at 10 feet. Horns
used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed or approved for
outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and protective grilles.
2.8.2 Visual Notification Appliances
Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements
of UL 1971 and the contract drawings. Appliances shall have clear high
intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light. Strobe
flash rate shall be between 1 to 3 flashes per second and a minimum of 75
candela. Strobe shall be semi-flush mounted.
2.8.3 Combination Audible/Visual Notification Appliances
Combination audible/visual notification appliances shall provide the same
requirements as individual units except they shall mount as a unit in
standard backboxes. Units shall be factory assembled. Any other audible
notification appliance employed in the fire alarm systems shall be approved
by the Contracting Officer.
2.9 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
2.9.1 Conduit
Conduit and fittings shall comply with NFPA 70, UL 6, UL 1242, and UL 797.
2.9.2 Wiring
Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. Wiring for 120 Vac power shall be No. 12
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 12

AWG minimum. The SLC wiring shall be copper cable in accordance with the
manufacturers requirements. Wiring size for fire alarm dc circuits shall
be as indicated on drawings. Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction
box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control
relays. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. System field wiring shall be
solid copper and installed in metallic conduit or electrical metallic
tubing, except that rigid plastic conduit may be used under slab-on-grade.
Conductors shall be color coded. Conductors used for the same functions
shall be similarly color coded. Wiring code color shall remain uniform
throughout the circuit. Pigtail or T-tap connections to initiating device
circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits
are prohibited. T-tapping using screw terminal blocks is allowed for style
5 addressable systems.
2.10 TRANSMITTERS
2.10.1 Radio Alarm Transmitters
The existing Monaco Transmitter shall remain.
2.10.1.1 Antenna
Provide omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for radio alarm
transmitters with a driving point impedance to match transmitter output.
The antenna and antenna mounts shall be corrosion resistant and designed to
withstand wind velocities of 100 mph. Antennas shall not be mounted to any
portion of the building roofing system.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the
field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install all work as shown, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72, and in
accordance with the manufacturer's diagrams and recommendations, unless
otherwise specified. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until
construction is essentially complete and the building has been thoroughly
cleaned.
3.2.1 Power Supply for the System
Provide a single dedicated circuit connection for supplying power from a
branch circuit to each building fire alarm system. The power shall be
supplied as shown on the drawings. The power supply shall be equipped with
a locking mechanism and marked in red with the words "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT
CONTROL".
3.2.2 Wiring
Conduit size for wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. Wiring for
the fire alarm system shall not be installed in conduits, junction boxes,
or outlet boxes with conductors of lighting and power systems. Not more
than two conductors shall be installed under any device screw terminal.
The wires under the screw terminal shall be straight when placed under the
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 13

terminal then clamped in place under the screw terminal. The wires shall
be broken and not twisted around the terminal. Circuit conductors entering
or leaving any mounting box, outlet box enclosure, or cabinet shall be
connected to screw terminals with each terminal and conductor marked in
accordance with the wiring diagram. Connections and splices shall be made
using screw terminal blocks. The use of wire nut type connectors in the
system is prohibited. Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily
accessible without removing any component parts. The fire alarm equipment
manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring
to the control panel.
3.2.3 Control Panel
The control panel and its assorted components shall be mounted so that no
part of the enclosing cabinet is less than 12 inches nor more than 78 inches
above the finished floor. Manually operable controls shall be between 36
and 42 inches above the finished floor. Panel shall be installed to comply
with the requirements of UL 864.
3.2.4 Detectors
Detectors shall be located and installed in accordance with NFPA 72.
Detectors shall be connected into signal line circuits or initiating device
circuits as indicated on the drawings. Detectors shall be at least 12
inches from any part of any lighting fixture. Detectors shall be located
at least 3 feet from diffusers of air handling systems. Each detector
shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware as required by its
mounting location. Detectors which mount in open space shall be mounted
directly to the end of the stubbed down rigid conduit drop. Conduit drops
shall be firmly secured to minimize detector sway. Where length of conduit
drop from ceiling or wall surface exceeds 3 feet, sway bracing shall be
provided. Detectors installed in concealed locations (above ceiling,
raised floors, etc.) shall have a remote visible indicator LED/LCD in a
finished, visible location.
3.2.5 Notification Appliances
Notification appliances shall be mounted 80 inches above the finished floor
or 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower.
3.2.6 Annunciator Equipment
Annunciator equipment shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings.
3.2.7 Addressable Control Module
Addressable and control modules shall be installed in the outlet box or
adjacent to the device they are controlling. If a supplementary
suppression releasing panel is provided, then the monitor modules shall he
mounted in a common enclosure adjacent to the suppression releasing panel
and both this enclosure and the suppression releasing panel shall be in the
same room as the releasing devices. All interconnecting wires shall be
supervised unless an open circuit or short circuit abnormal condition does
not affect the required operation of the fire alarm system. If control
modules are used as interfaces to other systems, such as HVAC or elevator
control, they shall be within the control panel or immediately adjacent to
it. Control modules that control a group of notification appliances shall
be adjacent to the first notification appliance in the notification
appliance circuits. Control modules that connect to devices shall
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 14

supervise the notification appliance circuits. Control modules that
connect to auxiliary systems or interface with other systems (non-life
safety systems) and where not required by NFPA 72, shall not require the
secondary circuits to be supervised. Contacts in suppression systems and
other fire protection subsystems shall be connected to the fire alarm
system to perform required alarm functions as specified in 21 13 17.00 10
DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTIONNFPA 72, as indicated on the
drawings and as specified herein.
3.3 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
3.3.1 Power Line Surge Protection
All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected
from surges in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination
waveform and NFPA 70. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The
surge protector shall be rated for a maximum let thru voltage of 350 Volts
ac (line-to-neutral) and 350 Volt ac (neutral-to-ground).
3.3.2 Low Voltage DC Circuits Surge Protection
All NAC and communication cables/conductors shall have surge protection
installed at each point where it exits or enters a building. Equipment
shall be protected from surges in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/
IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70. The surge protector
shall be rated to protect the 24 Volt dc equipment. The maximum dc
clamping voltages shall be 36 V (line-to-ground) and 72 Volt dc
(line-to-line).
3.3.3 Signal Line Circuit Surge Protection
All SLC cables/conductors shall have surge protection/isolation circuits
installed at each point where it exits or enters a building. The circuit
shall be protected from surges in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/
IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70. The surge
protector/isolator shall be rated to protect the equipment.
3.4 GROUNDING
Grounding shall be provided by connecting to building ground system.
3.5 SUPERVISING STATION PROVISIONS
The proprietary type Supervising Station (PSS) is located in building 4225
The supervising equipment is existing and consists of the following brands
and models: supervising station control panel Monaco Delta 21.
3.5.1 Revisions to Existing Facilities
Existing supervising components shall be modified as indicated on the
drawings and programming shall be updated if required to accommodate the
revised configuration. Acceptance testing shall include procedures that
would demonstrate that operation of existing equipment has not been
degraded and that the revised configuration plus interfacing components
operates compatibly with the new fire alarm system at the protected
premises. Work on existing equipment shall be performed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions or under supervision of the manufacturer's
representative.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 15

3.5.2 Additions to Existing Facilities
Supplemental components shall be added to the existing supervising
equipment as required to accommodate the new fire alarm system to be
installed at the protected premises. All present functions shall be
extended, including recording and storage in memory, and programming shall
be updated if required to accommodate the revised configuration.
Acceptance testing shall include procedures that would demonstrate that
operation of existing equipment has not been degraded and that the expanded
configuration operates compatibly with the new fire alarm system.
3.6 TRAINING
Submit lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and
training data, furnished in manual format, for the training courses. The
operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with
proper operation of the fire alarm system. Conduct the course in the
building where the system is installed or as designated by the Contracting
Officer.
a. The instructions shall cover items contained in the operating and
maintenance instructions. In addition, training shall be provided on
performance of expansions or modifications to the fire detection and
alarm system. The training period for system expansions and
modifications shall consist of at least 1 training days (8 hours per
day) and shall start after the system is functionally completed but
prior to final acceptance tests.
b. The maintenance training course shall provide the designated
government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair,
maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system. Provide
training course for the maintenance staff. The training period for
systems maintenance shall consist of 2 training days (8 hours per day)
and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to
final acceptance tests. Six copies of maintenance manual listing
routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout,
equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the
system as installed. The manuals shall include complete procedures for
system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software
requirements. Original and backup copies of all software delivered for
this project shall be provided, on each type of media utilized.
Manuals shall be approved prior to training.
c. The training period for systems operation shall consist of 1
training days (8 hours per day) and shall start after the system is
functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. Six copies
of operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for
system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.
3.7 TESTING
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 10 days before the preliminary and
acceptance tests are to be conducted. Perform the tests in accordance with
the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
The control panel manufacturer's representative shall be present to
supervise tests. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 16

a. Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a
Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm
Technician, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to
performing system tests.
b. Submit test reports, in booklet form, showing field tests performed
to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon
completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall
document readings, test results and indicate the final position of
controls. Include the NFPA 72 Certificate of Completion and NFPA 72
Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports.
3.7.1 Preliminary Tests
Upon completion of the installation, subject the system to functional and
operational performance tests including tests of each installed initiating
and notification appliance, when required. Tests shall include the
meggering of system conductors to determine that the system is free from
grounded, shorted, or open circuits. Conduct the megger test prior to the
installation of fire alarm equipment. If deficiencies are found,
corrections shall be made and the system shall be retested to assure that
it is functional. After completing the preliminary testing complete and
submit the NFPA 72, Certificate of Completion and Testing Form.
3.7.2 Acceptance Test
Acceptance testing shall not be performed until the Contractor has
completed and submitted the Certificate of Completion. Conduct testing in
accordance with NFPA 72. The recommended tests in NFPA 72 are considered
mandatory and shall verify that previous deficiencies have been corrected.
The Fire alarm Technician supervising the installation of the fire alarm
system shall attend the testing of the system. The test shall include all
requirements of NFPA 72 and the following:
a. Test of each function of the control panel.
b. Test of each circuit in both trouble and normal modes.
c. Tests of each alarm initiating devices in both normal and trouble
conditions.
d. Tests of each control circuit and device.
e. Tests of each alarm notification appliance.
f. Tests of the battery charger and batteries.
g. Complete operational tests under emergency power supply.
h. Visual inspection of wiring connections.
i. Opening the circuit at each alarm initiating device and notification
appliance to test the wiring supervisory feature.
j. Ground fault.
k. Short circuit faults.
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 17

l. Stray voltage.
m. Loop resistance.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 31 64.00 10 Page 18